PART NO.
T1M9-E-01
ZAXIS40U-2 • 50U-2 HYDRAULIC EXCAVATOR
Technical Manual
TECHNICAL MANUAL
40U-2 50U-2 Hydraulic Excavator
URL:http://www.hitachi-c-m.com
Service Manual consists of the following separate Part No; Technical Manual : Vol. No.T1M9-E Workshop Manual : Vol. No.W1M9-E
PRINTED IN JAPAN (E) 2007, 03
INTRODUCTION TO THE READER • This manual is written for an experienced technician
to provide technical information needed to maintain and repair this machine. • Be sure to thoroughly read this manual for correct product information and service procedures.
• If you have any questions or comments, at if you found any errors regarding the contents of this manual, please contact using “Service Manual Revision Request Form” at the end of this manual. (Note: Do not tear off the form. Copy it for usage.): Publications Marketing & Product Support Hitachi Construction Machinery Co. Ltd. TEL: 81-29-832-7084 FAX: 81-29-831-1162
ADDITIONAL REFERENCES • Please refer to the materials listed below in addition to this manual.
• Operation Manual of the Engine • Parts Catalog of the Engine • Hitachi Training Material
• The Operator’s Manual • The Parts Catalog
MANUAL COMPOSITION • This manual consists of two portions:
the Technical Manual and the Workshop Manual. Use the manuals according to purpose. • Information included in the Technical Manual: technical information needed for redelivery and delivery, operation and activation of all devices and systems, operational performance tests, and troubleshooting procedures.
• Information included in the Workshop Manual: technical information needed for maintenance and repair of the machine, tools and devices needed for maintenance and repair, maintenance standards, and removal/installation and assemble/disassemble procedures.
PAGE NUMBER • Each page has a number, located on the center lower part of the page, and each number contains the following information: Example : T 1-3-5
Consecutive Page Number for Each Group Group Number Section Number T: Technical Manual
W: Workshop Manual
IN-01
INTRODUCTION SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL AND HEADLINE NOTATIONS In this manual, the following safety alert symbol and signal words are used to alert the reader to the potential for personal injury of machine damage.
•
This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this symbol, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Never fail to follow the safety instructions prescribed along with the safety alert symbol. The safety alert symbol is also used to draw attention to component/part weights. To avoid injury and damage, be sure to use appropriate lifting techniques and equipment when lifting heavy parts.
• IMPORTANT:
CAUTION: Indicated potentially hazardous situation which could, if not avoided, result in personal injury or death.
Indicates a situation which, if not conformed to the instructions, could result in damage to the machine.
•
NOTE: Indicates supplementary technical information or know-how.
UNITS USED 2
• SI Units (International System of Units) are used in
Example : 24.5 MPa (250 kgf/cm , 3560 psi)
this manual. MKSA system units and English units are also indicated in parenthheses just behind SI units.
Quantity Length Volume
Weight Force Torque
To Convert From mm mm L L 3 m kg N N N⋅m N⋅m
Into in ft US gal US qt 3 yd lb kgf lbf kgf⋅m lbf⋅ft
A table for conversion from SI units to other system units is shown below for reference purposees.
Quantity
Multiply By 0.03937 0.003281 0.2642 1.057 1.308 2.205 0.10197 0.2248 1.0197 0.7375
Pressure Power Temperature Velocity Flow rate
IN-02
To Convert From MPa MPa kW kW °C km/h -1 min L/min mL/rev
Into
Multiply By 2
kgf/cm psi PS HP °F mph rpm US gpm cc/rev
10.197 145.0 1.360 1.341 °C×1.8+32 0.6214 1.0 0.2642 1.0
SECTION AND GROUP CONTENTS
SECTION 1 GENERAL Group 1 Specification Group 2 Component Layout Group 3 Component Specifications
SECTION 2 SYSTEM TECHNICAL MANUAL
Group 1 Control System Group 2 Hydraulic System Group 3 Electrical System
SECTION 3 COMPONENT OPERATION Group Group Group Group Group Group Group Group
1 Pump Device 2 Revolution Sensing Valve 3 Swing Device 4 Control Valve 5 Pilot Valve 6 Travel Device 7 Others (Upperstructure) 8 Others (Undercarriage)
SECTION 4 OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST
All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
Group Group Group Group Group Group
1 Introduction 2 Standard 3 Engine Test 4 Excavator Test 5 Component Test 6 Adjustment
SECTION 5 TROUBLESHOOTING
COPYRIGHT(C)2004 Hitachi Construction Machinery Co., Ltd. Tokyo, Japan All rights reserved
Group Group Group Group Group
1 Diagnosing Procedure 2 Troubleshooting A 3 Troubleshooting B 4 Troubleshooting C 5 Electrical System Inspection
WORKSHOP MANUAL SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Group 1 Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling Group 2 Tightening Torque Group 3 Bleeding Air Group 4 Painting SECTION 2 UPPERSTRUCTURE Group 1 Canopy Group 2 Counterweight Group 3 Pump Device Group 4 Control Valve Group 5 Swing Device Group 6 Pilot Valve Group 7 Solenoid Valve Group 8 Revolution Sensing Valve Group 9 Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve (Optional)
SECTION 3 UNDERCARRIAGE Group 1 Swing Bearing Group 2 Travel Device Group 3 Center Joint Group 4 Track Adjuster Group 5 Front Idler Group 6 Upper and Lower Roller Group 7 Track SECTION 4 FRONT ATTACHMENT Group 1 Front Attachment Group 2 Cylinder SECTION 5 Engine
SAFETY RECOGNIZE SAFETY INFORMATION • These are the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOLS. • When you see these symbols on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the potential for personal injury. • Follow recommended precautions and safe operating practices.
SA-688
UNDERSTAND SIGNAL WORDS • On machine safety signs, signal words designating the degree or level of hazard - DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION - are used with the safety alert symbol.
• DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. • WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. • CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. • DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near specific hazards. General precautions are listed on CAUTION safety signs. • Some safety signs don’t use any of the designated signal words above after the safety alert symbol are occasionally used on this machine.
• CAUTION also calls attention to safety messages in this manual.
• To avoid confusing machine protection with personal
safety messages, a signal word IMPORTANT indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in damage to the machine.
•
NOTE indicates an additional explanation for an element of information.
SA-1
SA-1223
SAFETY FOLLOW SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS • Carefully read and follow all safety signs on the machine as well as all safety messages in this manual.
• Safety signs must be installed, maintained and replaced if damaged.
• If a safety sign or this manual is damaged or missing, order a replacement from your nearest Hitachi dealer in the same way you order other replacement parts (be sure to state machine model and serial number when ordering).
• Allow only properly trained, qualified, authorized personnel to operate the machine.
SA-003
• Learn how to correctly operate and service the machine. • Keep your machine in proper working condition. • Always operate the machine within the specification. • Unauthorized modifications of the machine may impair the functions and/or safety and affect machine life and the warranty will become void.
• The safety messages in this SAFETY chapter are in-
tended to illustrate basic safety procedures of machines. However it is impossible for these safety messages to cover every possible hazardous situation you may encounter. If you have any questions concerning safety, you should first consult your supervisor and/or your nearest Hitachi dealer before operating or performing maintenance work on the machine.
PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES • Be prepared if a fire starts or if an accident occurs. • Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher on hand. • Thoroughly read and understand the label attached on the fire extinguisher and use it properly. • To ensure that a fire-extinguisher can be always used when necessary, check and service the fire-extinguisher at the recommended intervals as specified in the fire-extinguisher manual. • Establish emergency procedure guidelines to cope with any fire or accidents which may occur. • Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service, hospitals, and fire department posted near your telephone.
SA-2
SA-437
SAFETY WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING • Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment appropriate to the job.
You may need: A hard hat Safety belt Safety shoes Safety glasses, goggles, or face shield Heavy gloves Hearing protection Reflective clothing Wet weather gear Respirator or filter mask. Be sure to wear the correct equipment and clothing for the job. Do not take any chances.
SA-438
• Avoid wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or other items that can catch on control levers or other parts of the machine.
• Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of the operator.
• Do not wear radio or music headphones while operating the machine.
PROTECT AGAINST NOISE • Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment or loss of hearing.
• Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or uncomfortably loud noises.
SA-434
INSPECT MACHINE DAILY • If any abnormality is found, be sure to repair it immediately before operating the machine.
• In the walk-around inspection, be sure to cover all points described in the “PRE-START INSPECTION” chapter in the operator’s manual.
SA-435
SA-3
SAFETY TIDY UP INSIDE CAB • Always keep inside the cab clean by observing instruc-
tions below, to prevent any personal accidents from occurring.
• Remove mud and/or oily material from the shoe soles
before entering the cab. If pedals are operated without removing mud or oily matter, the foot may slip off the pedal, possibly creating a hazardous situation.
• Do not leave parts and/or tools around the operator’s seat.
• Do not keep a transparent water bottle in the cab. The transparent water bottle may concentrate the sun light like a lens, possibly causing a fire.
• Do not wear radio or music headphones and do not use a cell phone while traveling or operating the machine.
• Never allow hazardous materials such as combustible and/or explosive material in the cab.
• Do not leave a lighter in the cab. If the temperature in the cab increases, the lighter may explode.
USE HANDHOLDS AND STEPS • Falling is one of the major causes of personal injury. • When you get on and off the machine, always face the machine. • Maintain a three-point contact with the steps and handrails. • Do not use any controls as handholds. • Never jump on or off the machine. Never mount or dismount a moving machine. • In case adhered slippery material such as oil, grease, or mud is present on steps, handrails, or platforms, thoroughly remove such material.
SA-4
SA-439
SAFETY ADJUST THE OPERATOR'S SEAT • A poorly adjusted seat for either the operator or for the
work at hand may quickly fatigue the operator leading to mis-operation of the machine. • The seat should be adjusted whenever the operator for the machine changes. • The operator should be able to fully depress the pedals and to correctly operate the control levers with his back firmly against the seat back. • If not, readjust the seat forward or backward, and check again.
SA-378
FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT • If the machine should overturn, the operator may be-
come injured and/or thrown from the cab. Additionally the operator may be crushed by the overturning machine, resulting in serious injury or death. • Be sure to remain seated with the seat belt securely fastened whenever operating the machine. • Prior to operating the machine, thoroughly examine webbing, buckle and attaching hardware. If any item is damaged or worn, replace the seat belt or component before operating the machine. Replace the seat belt at least once every 3 years regardless of appearance
SA-5
SA-237
SAFETY MOVE AND OPERATE MACHINE SAFELY • Always be aware that there is a potential danger around the machine while operating the machine.
• Take extra care not to run over bystanders. Confirm the location of bystanders before moving, swinging, or operating the machine. • Always keep the travel alarm and horn in working condition (if equipped). • Before starting to move or operate the machine, sound the travel alarm and horn to alert bystanders. • Use a signal person when moving, swinging, or operating the machine in congested areas. Locate the signal person so that the operator can always witness the signal person. • Coordinate the meanings of all safety signs, hand signals and marks before starting the machine. Appoint a person who is responsible to make a signal and/or guidance. • Never allow any persons or obstacles to enter the machine operation areas. • Use appropriate illuminations.
SA-6
SA-1291
SAFETY OPERATE ONLY FROM OPERATOR'S SEAT • Inappropriate engine starting procedures may cause the machine to runaway, possibly resulting in serious injury or death. • Start the engine only when seated in the operator's seat. • NEVER start the engine while standing on the tracks or on ground. • Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals. A hazardous situation may be created and/or possible damage to the machine may result.
SA-444
• Before starting the engine, confirm that all control levers are in neutral.
JUMP STARTING • Failure to follow correct jump starting procedures could result in a battery explosion or a runaway machine.
• If the engine must be jump started, be sure to follow the instructions shown in the “OPERATING THE ENGINE” chapter. • The operator must be seated in the operator’s seat so that the machine will be under control when the engine starts. Jump starting is a two-person operation. • Never use a frozen battery. • Failure to follow correct jump starting procedures could result in a battery explosion or a runaway machine.
SA-032
KEEP RIDERS OFF MACHINE • Riders on machine are subject to injury such as being struck by foreign objects and being thrown off the machine. • Riders also obstruct the operator’s view, resulting in the machine being operated in an unsafe manner. • Only allow the operator is allowed on the machine. Keep riders off.
SA-1292
SA-7
SAFETY INVESTIGATE JOB SITE BEFOREHAND • When working at the edge of an excavation or on a road shoulder, the machine could tip over due to collapse of the ground, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
• Investigate the configuration and ground conditions of the job site beforehand to prevent the machine from falling and to prevent the ground, stockpiles, or banks from collapsing. • Make a work plan. Use machines appropriate to the work and job site. • Reinforce ground, edges, and road shoulders as necessary. Keep the machine well back from the edges of excavations and road shoulders. • When working on an incline or on a road shoulder, employ a signal person as required. • Never allow bystanders to enter the working area such as swing radius or traveling range. • Confirm that your machine is equipped a FOPS cab before working in areas where the possibility of falling stones or debris exist. • When the footing is weak, reinforce the ground before starting work. • When working on frozen ground, be extremely alert. As ambient temperatures rise, footing may become loose and slippery. • When operating the machine near open flame, sparks, and/or dead grass, a fire may easily break out. Use special care not to cause a fire.
SA-8
SA-1293
SAFETY PROVIDE SIGNALS FOR JOBS INVOLVING MULTIPLE NUMBERS OF MACHINES • In case more than one machine is operated in the same job site, accidental collision between machines may cause serious injury or death.
• For jobs involving multiple numbers of machines, provide signals commonly known by all personnel involved. Also, appoint a signal person to coordinate the job site. Make sure that all personnel obey the signal person’s directions.
SA-481
CONFIRM DIRECTION OF MACHINE TO BE DRIVEN • Incorrect travel pedal/lever operation may result in serious injury death.
• Before driving the machine, confirm the position of the undercarriage in relation to the operator’s position. • If the travel motors are located towards the front of the cab, the machine will move in the reverse direction when travel pedals/levers are operated. SA-1294
SA-9
SAFETY DRIVE MACHINE SAFELY • Driving the machine in the incorrect direction may result in serious injury or death and/or severe damage to property.
• Before moving the machine, confirm which way to move travel pedals/levers for the corresponding direction you wish to travel.
A
• Avoid passing over any obstructions. Failure to do so may cause soil, rock fragments and/or metal pieces to be scatter around the machine. Keep bystanders away from the machine.
SA-1295
• Traveling on a grade may cause the machine to slip or to overturn, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
• When traveling up or down a grade, keep the bucket in the direction of travel, approximately 200 to 300 mm (8 to 12 in) (A) above the ground so that lowering the bucket onto the ground can quickly stop the machine. • If machine starts to skid or becomes unstable, lower the bucket immediately. • Traveling across the face of slope or steering on a slope may cause the machine to skid or to turnover. If the direction must be changed on a slope, first move the machine to level ground, then, change the traveling direction to ensure safe operation.
A SA-1296
SA-441
SA-442
SA-10
SAFETY AVOID INJURY FROM ROLLAWAY ACCIDENTS • Death or serious injury may result if you attempt to mount or try to bodily stop a moving machine.
• Park the machine in compliance with the safe parking procedures described on page S-15 to prevent the machine from running away.
• Block both tracks and lower the bucket to the ground, thrust the bucket teeth into the ground if you must park on a grade.
• Park a reasonable distance from other machines.
SA-1297
SA-11
SAFETY AVOID INJURY FROM BACK-OVER AND SWING ACCIDENTS • If any person is present near the machine when backing or swinging the upperstructure, the machine may hit or run over that person, resulting in serious injury or death.
To avoid back-over and swing accidents: • Always look around BEFORE YOU BACK UP AND SWING THE MACHINE. BE SURE THAT ALL BYSTANDERS ARE CLEAR.
• Keep the travel alarm in working condition (if equipped). ALWAYS BE ALERT FOR BYSTANDERS MOVING INTO THE WORK AREA. USE THE HORN OR OTHER SIGNAL TO WARN BYSTANDERS BEFORE MOVING MACHINE.
SA-383
• USE A SIGNAL PERSON WHEN BACKING UP IF YOUR VIEW IS OBSTRUCTED. ALWAYS KEEP THE SIGNAL PERSON IN VIEW. Use hand signals, which conform to your local regulations, when work conditions require a signal person.
• No machine motions shall be made unless signals are clearly understood by both signalman and operator.
• Learn the meanings of all flags, signs, and markings used on the job and confirm who has the responsibility for signaling.
• Keep windows, mirrors, and lights clean and in good condition.
• Dust, heavy rain, fog, etc., can reduce visibility. As visibility decreases, reduce speed and use proper lighting.
• Read and understand all operating instructions in the operator’s manual. 021-E01A-0494-8
SA-12
SA-384
SAFETY KEEP PERSONNEL CLEAR FROM WORKING AREA • If a person is present near the operating machine, the person may come in contact with the swinging front attachment or counterweight and/or may be crushed against an other object, resulting in serious injury or death.
• Before operating the machine, set up barriers to the sides and rear area of the bucket swing radius to prevent anyone from entering the work area.
• Make sure that no personnel other than the signal person or no obstacles are present in the working area before operating the machine.
SA-667
NEVER POSITION BUCKET OVER ANYONE • Never lift, move, or swing bucket above anyone or a
truck cab. Serious injury or machine damage may result due to bucket load spill or due to collision with the bucket.
• Never allow the bucket to pass over anyone to avoid personal injury or death.
SA-668
AVOID UNDERCUTTING • In order to retreat from the edge of an excavation if the footing should collapse, always position the undercarriage perpendicular to the edge of the excavation with the travel motors at the rear.
• If the footing starts to collapse and if retreat is not possible, do not panic raise the front attachment with a panic. Lowering the front attachment may be safer in most cases.
SA-1300
SA-13
SAFETY AVOID TIPPING • The danger of tipping is always present when operating on a grade, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
To avoid tipping:
• Be extra careful before operating on a grade. • Prepare machine operating area flat. • Keep the bucket low to the ground and close to the machine.
• Reduce operating speeds to avoid tipping or slipping. • Avoid changing direction when traveling on grades. • NEVER attempt to travel across a grade steeper than 15 degrees if crossing the grade is unavoidable.
• Reduce swing speed as necessary when swinging
SA-1301
loads.
• Be careful when working on frozen ground. • Temperature increases will cause the ground to become soft and make ground travel unstable. 025-E01A-0540-4
NEVER UNDERCUT A HIGH BANK • The edges could collapse or a land slide could occur causing serious injury or death.
SA-1302
SA-14
SAFETY DIG WITH CAUTION • Accidental severing of underground cables or gas lines
may cause an explosion and/or fire, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
• Before digging check the location of cables, gas lines, and water lines.
• Keep the minimum distance required, by law, from cables, gas lines, and water lines.
• If a fiber optic cable should be accidentally severed, do not look into the end. Doing so may result in serious eye injury.
• Contact your local “diggers hot line” if available in your
SA-672
area, and/or the utility companies directly. Have them mark all underground utilities.
OPERATE WITH CAUTION • If the front attachment or any other part of the machine hits against an overhead obstacle, such as a bridge, both the machine and the overhead obstacle will be damaged, and personal injury may result as well.
• Take care to avoid hitting overhead obstacles with the boom or arm.
SA-673
AVOID POWER LINES • Serious injury or death can result if the machine or front attachments are not kept a safe distance from electric lines.
• When operating near an electric line, NEVER move any part of the machine or load closer than 3 m (10 ft) plus twice the line insulator length.
• Check and comply with any local regulations that may apply.
• Wet ground will expand the area that could cause any person on it to be affected by electric shock. Keep all bystanders or co-workers away from the site.
SA-15
SA-1305
SAFETY DO NOT USE FOR CRANING OPERATIONS • NEVER use the machine for craning operations. If the
machine is used for craning operations, the machine may tip over and/or lifted load may fall, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
• This machine has been exclusively designed to engage in excavation and loading works.
• This machine is not equipped with any of the necessary safety devices that could allow the machine to be used for craning operation.
SA-014
PROTECT AGAINST FLYING DEBRIS • If flying debris such as soil, rock fragments or metal
pieces hit eyes or any other part of the body, serious injury may result.
• Guard against such injuries when working in a job site where possibility of flying pieces of metal or debris exist, or when removing or installing pins using a hammer; wear goggles or safety glasses.
• Keep bystanders away from the working area before striking any object. SA-432
SA-16
SAFETY PARK MACHINE SAFELY • Unless the machine is not correctly parked, any
hazardous situations such as running away of the machine or damage by vandalism may result, causing the machine to operate unsafely when the engine is re-started. Follow instructions described below when parking the machine.
• Park the machine on solid level surface to prevent the machine from running away.
• Lower the bucket and/or blade to the ground.
SA-1306
• Pull the lock lever to the LOCK position. • Turn the auto-idle switch (optional) OFF. Failure to do so may create a hazarduos condition as the engine speed may unexpectedly increase.
• Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes.
• Turn key switch to OFF to stop engine. Remove the key from the key switch.
• Before leaving the machine, close all windows, roof vent, and cab door. Lock all access doors and compartments
HANDLE FLUIDS SAFELY --- AVOID FIRES • Handle fuel with care; it is highly flammable. If fuel
ignites, an explosion and/or a fire may occur, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
• Do not refuel the machine while smoking or when near open flame or sparks.
• Always stop the engine before refueling the machine. • Fill the fuel tank outdoors. • All fuels, most lubricants, and some coolants are flammable.
SA-018
• Store flammable fluids well away from fire hazards. • Do not incinerate or puncture pressurized containers. • Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn spontaneously.
SA-019
SA-17
SAFETY SAFETY TRANSPORTING • The danger of tipping is present when loading/unloading the machine onto/from a truck or trailer bed.
• Be sure to observe local regulations when transporting the machine on public roads.
• Provide an appropriate truck or trailer for transporting
SA-1307
the machine.
• Be sure to have a signal person. • Take the following precautions when loading/unloading the machine. 1. Select firm level ground. 2. Be sure to use a loading dock or ramp strong enough to support the machine weight. 3. Ramps must be sufficient in width, length, and strength. Be sure that the incline of the ramp is less than 15 degrees. 4. Loading docks must be sufficient in width and strength to support the machine and have a gradient of less than 15 degrees. 5. Be sure to turn the auto-idle switch (13) OFF.
13
6. Slowly drive the machine. 7. Avoid steering while driving up or down the ramp as it is extremely dangerous. If steering is unavoidable, first move back to the ground or flatbed, modify traveling direction, and begin to drive again. 8. The top end of the ramp where it meets the flatbed is a sudden bump. Take care when traveling over it. 9. Wedge the front and rear of tracks. Securely fasten the machine to the trailer bed with chain or cables. 10. Do not operate any levers besides the travel levers when driving up or down the ramp. 11. Prevent possible injury from machine tipping while the upperstructure is rotating. 12. Keep the arm tucked under and rotate the upperstructure slowly for best stability. Refer to "transporting" chapter in operator’s manual for details
SA-18
M1M7-01-028
SAFETY PRACTICE SAFE MAINTENANCE • Inspection/maintenance work may produce hazardous
situations by contacting and/or accessing a part of body to a moving, high pressure, and/or high temperature part of the machine. To avoid serious personal injury or death, follow the instructions described below.
• Thoroughly coordinate the working procedures to be taken hereafter with the co-workers before beginning work such as inspecting/servicing the machine, or replacing the attachiment .
• Safely park the machine in accordance with the instructions for “Park Machine Safely.”
• Keep the work area clean and orderly. • Attach a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag in an easy-to-see
SA-028
location such as on a door or a control lever.
• If moisture permeates into the electrical system, malfunction and/or erroneous movement of the machine may result. Do not clean sensors, cable connectors, and the cab inside using water and/or steam.
• Wait to begin to work until the engine and hydraulic oil temperatures have cooled down to the safety range.
• In case inspection/maintenance must be performed
90 to 110°
with the engine runnning, be sure to appoint an overseer.
• Never lubricate or service the machine while moving it. • Repair the cracked windowpane before servicing the
M1M7-04-006
machine. Failure to do so may cause personal injury.
• Whe raising the machine above the ground using the front attachment function, maintain the angle between the boom and the arm in the range of 90 to 110°. Never allow anyone to enter under the machine raised with the front attachment function.
• In case working under the machine raised above the ground is unavoidably required, securely hold the machine with stays or blocks strong enough to support the machine weight.
• Never work under the raised bucket. • Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed. • Always use the specified tools correctly. • Always use a clean tool. • Fix any damage found immediately. Replace worn or broken parts.
• Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris. • When cleaning parts, use a non-combustible cleaning solvent. Never use an inflammable fluid such as dieasel fuel, or gasoline.
SA-19
SA-527
SAFETY • Disconnect battery ground cable (−) before making adjustments to electrical systems or before welding on the machine.
• Sufficiently illuminate the work site. Use a maintenance work light when working under or inside the machine.
• Always use a work light protected with a guard. In case the light bulb is broken, spilled fuel, oil, antifreeze fluid, or window washer fluid may catch fire. SA-037
WARN OTHERS OF SERVICE WORK • Unexpected machine movement can cause serious injury.
• Before performing any work on the machine, attach a “Do Not Operate” tag in an easy-to-see place such as on the cab door or control lever.
• Never attempt to operate the machine with a “Do Not Operate” tag attached.
• Make it a rule for the inspection/service person to hold the engine start key during inspection/service work. SA-287
SUPPORT MACHINE PROPERLY • Never attempt to work on the machine without securing the machine first.
• Always lower the attachment to the ground before you work on the machine.
• If you must work on a lifted machine or attachment, securely support the machine or attachment with stays or blocks strong enough to support the machine and/or attachment weight. SA-527
STAY CLEAR OF MOVING PARTS • Contact with moving parts can cause serious injury or death due to amputation or entanglement.
• To prevent accidents, care should be taken to ensure that hands, feet, clothing, jewelry and hair do not become entangled when working around rotating parts.
SA-026
SA-20
SAFETY PREVENT PARTS FROM FLYING • Grease in the track adjuster is under high pressure.
Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious injury, blindness, or death.
• Do not attempt to remove GREASE FITTINGS or VALVE ASSEMBLIES.
• As pieces of parts may fly off, be sure to keep body and face away from the valve.
• Travel reduction gears are under pressure. • As pieces of parts may fly off, be sure to keep body
SA-344
and face away from AIR RELEASE PLUG to avoid injury.
• GEAR OIL is hot. Wait for gear oil to cool, then gradually loosen the air release plug to release pressure.
STORE ATTACHMENTS SAFELY • Stored attachments such as buckets, hydraulic hammers, and blades can fall and cause serious injury or death.
• Securely store attachments and implements to prevent falling accidents.
• Keep children and bystanders away from storage areas.
SA-034
SA-21
SAFETY PREVENT BURNS Hot spraying fluids:
• After operation, engine coolant is hot and under pressure. Hot water or steam is contained in the engine, radiator and heater lines. Skin contact with escaping hot water or steam can cause severe burns.
• To prevent possible injury from hot spraying water, stop the engine. Begine to work after the engine and radiator are sufficiently cooled
• DO NOT remove the radiator cap until the engine is cool. When opening, turn the cap slowly to the stop. Allow all pressure to be release before removing the cap.
SA-039
• The hydraulic oil tank is pressurized. Again, be sure to release all pressure by slowly removing the cap. Hot fluids and surfaces:
• Engine oil, gear oil and hydraulic oil also becomes hot
during operation. The engine, hoses, lines and other parts become hot as well.
• Wait for the oil and components to cool before starting any maintenance or inspection work.
SA-225
SA-22
SAFETY REPLACE RUBBER HOSES PERIODICALLY • Rubber hoses that contain flammable fluids such as
hydraulic oil or fuel under pressure may break due to aging, fatigue, and abrasion. It is very difficult to gauge the extent of deterioration due to aging, fatigue, and abrasion of rubber hoses by visual inspection alone.
• Periodically replace the rubber hoses. (Refer to the “Periodical Replacement Parts” section in the operator’s manual.)
• Failure to periodically replace rubber hoses may cause a fire, fluid injection into skin, or the front attachment to fall on a person nearby, which may result in severe burns, gangrene, or otherwise serious injury or death.
SA-019
AVOID HIGH-PRESSURE FLUIDS • Fluids such as diesel fuel or hydraulic oil under pressure can penetrate the skin or eyes causing serious injury, blindness or death.
• Avoid this hazard by relieving pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Make sure that all connectors are completely connected before applying pressure.
• Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard; take care
SA-031
to protect hands and body from high-pressure fluids. Wear a face shield or goggles for eye protection.
• If an accident occurs, see a doctor familiar with this type of injury immediately. Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed within a few hours or gangrene may result.
SA-292
SA-044
SA-23
SAFETY PREVENT FIRES Check for Oil Leaks:
• Fuel, hydraulic oil and lubricant leaks can lead to fires, possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
• Check for missing or loose clamps, kinked hoses, lines or hoses that rub against each other, damage to the oil-cooler, and loose oil-cooler flange bolts, for oil leaks.
• Tighten, repair or replace any missing, loose or damaged clamps, lines, hoses, oil-cooler and oil-cooler flange bolts.
SA-019
• Do not bend or strike high-pressure lines. • Never install bent or damaged lines, pipes or hoses.
Check for Shorts:
• Short circuits can cause fires. • Clean and tighten all electrical connections. • Check before each shift or after eight (8) to ten (10) hours operation for loose, kinked, hardened or frayed electrical cables and wires.
• Check before each shift or after eight (8) to ten (10) hours operation for missing or damaged terminal caps.
• DO NOT OPERATE MACHINE if cable or wires are loose, kinked, etc.
SA-24
SAFETY Precautions for Handling Flammables
• Spilled fuel and oil, and trash, grease, debris,
accumulated coal dust, and other flammables may cause fires.
• Prevent fires by inspecting and cleaning the machine daily, and by removing spilled or accumulated flammables immediately.
• Don’t store flammable fluid near open flames. • Don’t burn or crush a pressurerized container. • Don’t store oily cloths. They are liable to catch fire. • Don’t wind easy-to-absorb-oil asbestos or glass wool around high-temperature parts such as a muffler or exhaust pipe. Check Heat Shield Covers around Engine Compartment
• If the engine compartment heat shield cover becomes broken or lost, fire may break out.
• If the engine compartment heat shield cover becomes broken or lost, repair or replace it before operating the machine. Check Key Switch:
• If fire breaks out, failure to stop the engine will escalate the fire, hampering fire fighting.
• Always check key switch function before operating the machine every day: 1) Start the engine and run it at slow idle. 2) Turn the key switch to the OFF position to confirm that the engine hasstopped.
If any abnormalities are found, be sure to repair them before operating the machine.
SA-25
SAFETY EVACUATING IN CASE OF FIRE • If fire breaks out during machine operation, evacuate the machine in the following way:
• Stop the engine by turning the key switch to the OFF position.
• Use a fire extinguisher if there is time. • Exit the machine using handrails and/or steps. • In an emergency, if the cab door or front window can not be opened, break the front or rear window panes with the emergency evacuation hammer to escape from the cab. Refer to the explanation pages on the “Emergency Evacuation Method” in the operator’s manual.
SA-393
SS-1510
BEWARE OF EXHAUST FUMES • Prevent asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death.
• If you must operate the machine in a building, be sure there is adequate ventilation. Either use an exhaust pipe extension to remove the exhaust fumes or open doors and windows to bring enough outside air into the area.
SA-016
SA-26
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR WELDING AND GRINDING • Welding may generate gas and/or small fires. • Be sure to perform welding in a well ventilated and prepared area. Store flammable objects in a safe place before starting welding.
• Only qualified personnel should perform welding. Never allow an unqualified person to perform welding.
• Grinding on the machine may create a fire hazard. Store flammable objects in a safe place before starting grinding.
• After finishing welding and grinding, recheck that there
SA-818
are no abnormalities such as the area surrounding the welded area still smoldering.
AVOID HEATING NEAR PRESSURIZED FLUID LINES • Flammable spray can be generated by heating near pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to yourself and bystanders.
• Do not heat by welding, soldering, or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or other flammable materials.
• Pressurized lines can be accidentally cut when heat goes beyond the immediate flame area. Install temporary fire resistant guards to protect hoses or other materials before engaging in welding, soldering, etc.
AVOID APPLYING HEAT TO LINES CONTAINING FLAMMABLE FLUIDS • Do not weld or flame cut pipes or tubes that contain flammable fluids.
• Remove flammable fluids thoroughly with nonflammable solvent before welding or flame cutting pipes or tubes that contained flammable fluids.
SA-27
SA-030
SAFETY REMOVE PAINT BEFORE WELDING OR HEATING • Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is
heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch. If inhaled, these fumes may cause sickness.
• Remove paint before welding or heating. • Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust. • Do all such work outside or in a well-ventilated area. Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
• Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes after SA-029
welding or heating.
• Use attention to the following points when removing paint. 1. If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust
which is created. Wear an approved respirator. 2. If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper
with soap and water before welding. 3. Remove solvent or paint stripper containers and
other flammable material from area.
PREVENT BATTERY EXPLOSIONS • Battery gas can explode. • Keep sparks, lighted matches, and flame away from the top of battery.
• Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.
• Do not charge a frozen battery or start engine with frozen battery. There is fear of explosion. If battery electrolyte is frozen, wait until it is liquefied completely in an atmospheric temperature room.
• Do not continue to use or charge the battery when the electrolyte level is lower than specified. Explosion of the battery may result.
• When a terminal become loose, it may induce sparks. Securely tighten all terminals.
• Battery electrolyte is poisonous. If the battery should
explode battery electrolyte may be splashed into eyes, possibly resulting in blindness. If electrolyte is splashed into eyes, flush your eyes continuosly with water for about 15 minutes. Seek medical attention immediately.
• Be sure to wear eye protection when checking electrolyte specific gravity.
SA-28
SA-032
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING REFRIGERANT • If refrigerant is splashed into eyes or spilled onto skin, blindness or a cold contact burn may result.
• Refer to the precautions described on the refrigerant container for handling refrigerant.
• Use a recovery and recycling system to avoid venting refrigerant into the atmosphere.
• Never allow the skin to directly come in contact with refrigerant.
SA-405
HANDLE CHEMICAL PRODUCTS SAFELY • Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause
serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with your machine include such items as lubricants, electrolyte, coolants, paints, and adhesives.
• A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific details on chemical products: physical and health hazards, safety procedures, and emergency response techniques.
• Check the MSDS before you start any job using a hazardous chemical. Then follow the correct procedures and use recommended equipment.
SA-309
• See your nearest Hitachi dealer for MSDS.
SA-29
SAFETY DISPOSE OF WASTE PROPERLY • Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the
environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used with HITACHI equipment includes such items as oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.
• When draining fluid, use a leakproof container with a capacity larger than the drained fluid volume to receive it.
• Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into any water source.
• Inquire on the proper way to dispose of harmful waste such as oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries from your local environmental or recycling center.
SA-226
BEFORE RETURNING THE MACHINE TO THE CUSTOMER • After maintenance or repair work is complete, confirm that:
• The machine is functioning properly, especially the safety systems.
• Worn or damaged parts have been repaired or replaced
SA-435 S517-E01A-0435
SA-30
SECTION 1
GENERAL CONTENTS Group 1 Specification Specifications ........................................... T1-1-1 Working Ranges ....................................... T1-1-3
Group 2 Component Layout Main Components.................................... T1-2-1 Electrical Component Layout (Overview) ............................................. T1-2-2 Electrical System (Controllers and Relays) ........................ T1-2-3 Electrical System (Monitor and Switches) .......................... T1-2-4 Engine ..................................................... T1-2-5 Swing Device........................................... T1-2-5 Travel Device........................................... T1-2-5 Control Valve ........................................... T1-2-6 2-Unit Solenoid Valve............................... T1-2-6 Revolution Sensing Valve / Pilot Filter ...... T1-2-6 Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve (Optional) ...... T1-2-6
Group 3 Component Specifications Engine ..................................................... T1-3-1 Engine Accessories ................................. T1-3-4 Hydraulic Component .............................. T1-3-5 Filter ........................................................ T1-3-8 Electrical Component............................... T1-3-8
1M9T-1-1
(Blank)
1M9T-1-2
GENERAL / Specifications SPECIFICATIONS ZAXIS40U-2
T1M9-01-01-001
⋅The above indicates construction for 4-Piller Canopy Version ZAXIS40U-2 Type 2-Piller Canopy 4-Piller Canopy Cab Type of Front-End Attachment Boom Swing Type 3 3 Bucket Capacity (Heaped) m (yd ) 0.14 (0.18) Operating Weight kg (lb) 4260 (9392) 4330 (9540) 4450 (9810) Basic Machine Weight kg (lb) 3190 (7030) 3230 (7121) 3380 (7452) YANMER 4TNV88 -1 Engine kW/min 29.8/2500 (PS/rpm) (40.5/2500) A: Overall Width mm (ft⋅in) 1870 (6′2″) B: Overall Height mm (ft⋅in) 2540 (8′4″) 2510 (8′3″) 2550 (8’4”) C: Rear-End Swing Radius mm (ft⋅in) 980 (3′3″) D: Minimum Ground Clearance mm (ft⋅in) 335 (1′1″) E: Counterweight Height mm (ft⋅in) 605 (1′11″) F: Engine Cover Height mm (ft⋅in) 1510 (4′11″) G: Undercarriage Length mm (ft⋅in) 2540 (8′4″) H: Undercarriage Width mm (ft⋅in) 1960 (6′5″) I: Sprocket Center to Idler Center mm (ft⋅in) 2000 (6′7″) 400 (1′4″) J: Track Shoe Width mm (ft⋅in) (Rubber Crawler) kPa 27 28 Ground Pressure 2 (kgf/cm , psi) (0.28, 3.9) (0.29, 4.1) –1 Swing Speed min (rpm) 9.3 (9.3) Travel Speed (fast/slow) km/h (mph) 4.5/2.8 (2.8/1.7) Gradeability Degree (%) 30 (58) NOTE: The dimensions do not include the height of the shoe lug. Weight for the cab version is included air conditioner unit.
T1-1-1
GENERAL / Specifications
ZAXIS50U-2
T1M9-01-01-001
Type Type of Front-End Attachment Bucket Capacity (Heaped) Operating Weight Basic Machine Weight Engine A: B: C: D: E: F: G: H: I:
Overall Width Overall Height Rear-End Swing Radius Minimum Ground Clearance Counterweight Height Engine Cover Height Undercarriage Length Undercarriage Width Sprocket Center to Idler Center
J: Track Shoe Width Ground Pressure Swing Speed Travel Speed (fast/slow) Gradeability
3
3
m (yd ) kg (lb) kg (lb) -1
kW/min (PS/rpm) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in)
kPa 2 (kgf/cm , psi) –1 min (rpm) km/h (mph) Degree (%)
⋅The above indicates construction for 4-Piller Canopy Version ZAXIS50U-2 2-Piller Canopy 4-Piller Canopy Cab Boom Swing Type 0.16 (0.21) 4610 (10163) 4650 (10251) 4800 (10582) 3520 (7760) 3560 (7848) 3710 (8179) YANMER 4TNV88 29.8/2500 (40.5/2500) 1850 (6′1″) 2540 (8′4″) 2510 (8′3″) 2550 (8’4”) 1000 (3′3″) 335 (1′1″) 605 (1′12″) 1510 (4′11″) 2540 (8′4″) 2000 (6′7″) 2000 (6′7″) 400 (1′4″) (Rubber Crawler) 29 30 (0.3, 4.2) (0.31, 4.4) 9.3 (9.3) 4.5/2.8 (2.8/1.7) 30 (58)
NOTE: The dimensions do not include the height of the shoe lug. Weight for the cab version is included air conditioner unit.
T1-1-2
GENERAL / Specifications WORKING RANGES ZAXIS40U-2
Left Right
T1M9-01-01-002
A: Maximum Digging Reach B: Maximum Digging Depth
mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in)
C: Maximum Cutting Height
mm (ft⋅in)
D: Maximum Dumping Height
mm (ft⋅in)
E: Transport Height (Rubber Crawler) F: Overall Transport Length
mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in)
G: Minimum Swing Radius
mm (ft⋅in)
⋅The above indicates construction for 4-Piller Canopy Version ZAXIS40U-2 2-Piller Canopy 4-Piller Canopy Cab 5750 (18′10″) [6050 (19′10″)] 3350 (10′12″) [3660 (12′0″)] 5600 (18′5″) 5480 (17’12”) [5840 (19′2″)] [5710 (18’9”) 3920 (12′10″) 3810 (12’6”) [4160 (13′8″)] [4040 (13’3”) 2540 (8′4″)
5340 (17′6″) [5380 (17′8″)] 2190 (7′2″) [2330 (7′8″)]
H: Boom-Swing Pivot Offset Distance mm (ft⋅in) I: Blade Bottom Highest Position (above ground level) mm (ft⋅in) J: Blade Bottom Lowest Position (above ground level) mm (ft⋅in) K: Offset Distance Maximum Boom-Swing Angle
2510 (8′3″)
2550 (8’4”) 2270 (7’5”) [2390 (7’10”)
100 (0′4″) 425 (1′5″) 335 (1′1″) L690 (L 2′3″) R860 (R 2′10″) L80°/R60°
mm (ft⋅in) Degree
NOTE: The dimensions do not include the height of the shoe lug. The dimensions for the machine equipped with the long arm are shown in brackets [
T1-1-3
].
GENERAL / Specifications
ZAXIS50U-2
Left Right
T1M9-01-01-002
A: Maximum Digging Reach B: Maximum Digging Depth
mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in)
C: Maximum Cutting Height
mm (ft⋅in)
D: Maximum Dumping Height
mm (ft⋅in)
E: Transport Height (Rubber Crawler) F: Overall Transport Length
mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in)
G: Minimum Swing Radius
mm (ft⋅in)
⋅The above indicates construction for 4-Piller Canopy Version ZAXIS50U-2 2-Piller Canopy 4-Piller Canopy Cab 6000 (19′8″) [6250 (20′6″)] 3600 (11′10″) [3860 (12′8″)] 5640 (18’6”) 5770 (18′11″) [6020 (19′9″)] [5870 (19’3”)] 4000 (13’2”) 4100 (13′5″) [4330 (12′3″)] [4200 (13’9”) 2540 (8′4″)
Maximum Boom-Swing Angle
2550 (8’4”)
5460 (17′11″) [5520 (18′1″)] 2150 (7′1″)
H: Boom-Swing Pivot Offset Distance mm (ft⋅in) I: Blade Bottom Highest Position (above ground level) mm (ft⋅in) J: Blade Bottom Lowest Position (above ground level) mm (ft⋅in) K: Offset Distance
2510 (8′3″)
[2260 (7′5″)]
2300 (7’7”) [2340 (7’’8”)
100 (0′4″) 425 (1′5″) 335 (1′1″) L690 (L 2′3″) R860 (R 2′10″) L80°/R60°
mm (ft⋅in) Degree
NOTE: The dimensions do not include the height of the shoe lug. The dimensions for the machine equipped with the long arm are shown in brackets [
T1-1-4
].
GENERAL / Component Layout MAIN COMPONENTS 31 30 1
29 28 27
2
26 25
3
24
4
23
5
22
6
7 8 9
21
20 19 13
18 17
15
12
11
10
14
16 T1M9-01-02-005
12345678-
Air Cleaner Blade Pilot Valve Front Pilot Valve Pump Device Revolution Sensing Valve Pilot Filter Travel Device Lower Roller
910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -
Back Pressure Valve Swing Device Upper Roller Control Valve Center Joint Track Adjuster 2-Unit Solenoid Valve Front Idler
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 -
T1-2-1
Travel Pilot Valve Swing Bearing Blade Cylinder Boom Cylinder Bucket Cylinder Arm Cylinder Work Light Boom Swing Cylinder
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 -
Boom Swing Pilot Valve Fuel Tank Tilt-Up Device Hydraulic Oil Tank Battery Reserve Tank Radiator/Oil Cooler
GENERAL / Component Layout ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (Overview)
1 Electrical System (Monitor and Switches) (Refer to T1-2-4.) Electrical System (Controllers and Relays) (Refer to T1-2-3.)
Engine (Refer to T1-2-5.)
2 6
5
Control Valve (Refer to T1-2-6.) T1M9-01-02-007
4 1 - Pilot Shut-Off Switch 2 - Horn
3 - Governor Actuator (EC Motor/Potentio-Sensor) 4 - 2-Unit Solenoid Valve
3 5 - Fuel Level Sensor
T1-2-2
6-
Battery
GENERAL / Component Layout ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (Controllers and Relays) 10 1
2
3
9
4
5
11
12
6
8
7
13
T1M9-01-02-003
1 - *Air Conditioner Controller 2 - *Blower Motor Relay (Mid)
5 - *Blower Motor Relay (High) 6 - Starter Relay
3 - *Blower Motor Relay (Low) 4 - *Compressor Relay
7 - Fuse Box
89-
Engine Controller *Displacement Change Relay 10 - Safety Start Relay
NOTE: *: Cab-mounted machine only.
T1-2-3
T1M9-01-02-010
11 - Horn Relay 12 - 1 Second Timer 13 - Power Relay (Air Heater)
GENERAL / Component Layout ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (Monitor and Switches)
Monitor Panel
Switch Panel (Canopy Version)
9 4
10
1
11
2
3
12
21
13
T1M9-01-02-017
20
Switch Panel (Cab Version)
19
1
14
4 18 3 2 5
17
6
16
7
15 T1M9-01-02-018
T1M9-01-02-002
8
1 - Engine Control Dial 2 - Travel Speed Selector Switch 3 - Work Light Switch 4 - Key Switch 5 - *Wiper Switch
7-
Travel Alarm Deactivation Switch (Optional) 8 - *Air Conditioner Control Panel 9 - Coolant Temperature Gauge 10 - Fuel Gauge
11 - Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
12 - Set Switch
17 - Alternator Indicator
13 - Display Selection Switch
18 - Fuel Level Indicator
14 - Auto-Idle Switch
19 - Overheat Indicator
15 - Fast Travel Indicator
20 - Engine Oil Pressure Indicator 21 - System Failure Indicator
16 - Preheat Indicator
6 - Auxiliary Flow Selector Switch (Optional)
NOTE: *: Cab-mounted machine only.
T1-2-4
GENERAL / Component Layout ENGINE 6
1
7
5
T1M9-01-02-009
4
3
2
9
T1M9-01-02-008
SWING DEVICE
8
TRAVEL DEVICE 12
13
14
10
11
T1M9-01-02-013 T1M9-01-02-012
1 - Overheat Switch 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Governor Lever 4 - Engine Oil Pressure Switch
5 - Engine Stop Solenoid 6 - Air Heater 7 - Coolant Temperature Sensor 8 - Starter
9 - Alternator 10 - Relief Valve 11 - Make-Up Valve
T1-2-5
12 - Anti-Cavitation Valve 13 - Counterbalance Valve 14 - Travel Speed Selector Valve
GENERAL / Component Layout CONTROL VALVE 2
3
2-UNIT SOLENOID VALVE
6 4
5
15 1 16
8
7
9 11
10 17
14 12
T1M9-01-02-011
13 T1M9-01-02-016
REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE / PILOT FILTER Pilot Filter
18
AUXILIARY FLOW (OPTIONAL) 20
19
SELECTOR
VALVE
21
T1M9-01-02-006
T1M9-01-02-014
1 - Main Relief Valve 2 - Make-Up Valve (Left Boom Swing) 3 - Overload Relief Valve (Boom Lower) 4 - Overload Relief Valve (Arm Roll-In) 5 - Overload Relief Valve (Bucket Roll-Out) 6 - Overload Relief Valve (Auxiliary)(Optional)
7 - Overload Relief Valve (Auxiliary)(Optional) 8 - Overload Relief Valve (Bucket Roll-In) 9 - Overload Relief Valve (Arm Roll-Out) 10 - Overload Relief Valve (Boom Raise) 11 - Boom Anti-Drift Valve
12 - Differential Reducing Valve 13 - Unload Valve
17 - Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve 18 - Differential Reducing Valve
14 - Auto-Idle Pressure Sensor
19 - Variable Metering Valve
15 - Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid valve 16 - Pilot Relief Valve
20 - Flow Selector Solenoid Valve 21 - Pressure Reducing Valve
T1-2-6
GENERAL / Component Specifications ENGINE Manufacturer···················································YANMER Model ······························································4TNV88-NHB Type ································································Diesel, 4-Cycle, Water-cooled, Inline, Direct Injection Cyl. No.-Bore×Stroke······································4 - 88 mm×90 mm (3.47 in×9.63 in) 3
3
Piston Displacement ·······································2189 cm (133.5 in ) -1
Rated Output ··················································29.8 kW / 2500 min (40.5 PS / 2500 rpm) Compression Ratio ·········································19 Dry Weight ······················································177 kg (390 lb) Firing Order·····················································1-3-4-2 Rotation Direction ···········································Clockwise (View from fan side) COOLING SYSTEM Cooling Fan ··················································· Dia. 430 mm, 7 Blades, Draw-In Type Fan Pulley Ratio ············································ Engine rpm×0.92 Thermostat (Atmospheric Pressure)·············· Cracking temp. 71 °C (160 °F) Full open temp. 85 °C (185 °F) Water Pump··················································· Centrifugal Belt Driven Type LUBRICATION SYSTEM Lubrication Pump Type ·································· Trochoid Pump Oil Filter ························································· Full-Flow Paper Element Type STARTING SYSYTEM Motor······························································ Magnetic Pinion Shift Type (Starter Relay is Separately Placement) Voltage / Output ············································· 12 V / 2.3 kW PREHEAT SYSMTEM Preheating Method ········································ Position Type Air Heater (12 V ⋅ 400 W) ENGINE STOP SYSYTEM Stop Method··················································· Fuel Shut-Off ALTERNATOR Type ······························································· Regulator Integrated AC type Voltage / Output ············································· 12 V / 55 A FUEL SYSTEM Type ······························································· YDP-MP Type Governor························································ Mechanical All Speed Control Injection Nozzle ············································· Multi-Injection Hole Type
T1-3-1
GENERAL / Component Specifications PERFORMANCE (as brand new product) IMPORTANT: This list shows design specifications, which are not servicing standards. Lubricant Consumption·································· Less than 13.5 mL/hr at Rated Output Fuel Consumption Ratio ································ Less than 256 g/kW⋅h (188 g/PS⋅h) at Rated Output Injection Timing·············································· 18° before T. D. C -1
Maximum Output Torque ······························· 138±5 N⋅m (14.1±0.5 kgf⋅m) at 1500 min 2
Injection Pressure ·········································· 19.6 MPa (200 kgf/cm , 2849 psi) 2
-1
Compression Pressure ·································· 3.43 MPa (35 kgf/cm , 499 psi) at 250 min Valve Clearance (Inlet/Exhaust) ···················· 0.15/0.25 mm (when cool) -1
No Load Speed ·············································· Slow: 1200±25 min
T1-3-2
-1
Fast:2700±25 min
GENERAL / Component Specifications Engine Performance Curve (4NTV88) Test Condition: 1. In conformity with JIS D1005 (Performance Test Method for Diesel Engine Used for Construction Machinery) under standard atmospheric pressure. 2. Equipped with the fan and alternator.
Torque N.m kgf⋅m 150
138 N⋅m / Approx. 1500 min-1 (14.1 kgf⋅m / Approx. 1500 rpm)
(15) Torque
125
(13)
100
(10) 29.8 kW/2500 min-1 (40.5 PS/2500 rpm)
(8) 75 Output kW PS 35 (48)
Fuel Consumption Ratio g/kwh g/PSh 320
(235)
(34)
300
(221)
20
(27)
280
(206)
15
(20)
260
(191)
10
(14)
240
(177)
5
(7)
220
(162)
0
(0)
200
(147)
30
(41)
25
Output
Fuel Consumption Ratio
Engine Speed min-1(rpm) T1M9-01-03-001
T1-3-3
GENERAL / Component Specifications ENGINE ACCESSORIES RADIATOR ASSEMBLY Type ............................................................... Radiator/Oil Cooler Tandem Type Assembly Radiator Capacity......................................................... Approx. 1.6 L 2 Cap Opening Pressure .................................. 90 kPa (0.9 kgf/cm , 13 psi) Weight............................................................ 4.2 kg (9.3 lb)
Oil Cooler Approx. 1.1 L − 2.9 kg (6.4 lb)
BATTERY Capacity..........................................................55 Ah (5-Hour Rate), 65 Ah (20-Hour Rate) Voltage ............................................................12 V Weight.............................................................18.5 kg (40.8 lb)
T1-3-4
GENERAL / Component Specifications HYDRAULIC COMPONENT PUMP DEVICE MAIN PUMP (Canopy Type) Model ............................................................. PVK-2B-505-N Type ............................................................... Variable Displacement Swash Plate Pump Maximum Flow (Theoretical Value) ............... 125 L/min (33 US gpm)
(Cab Type) PVK-2B-505-CN − −
PILOT PUMP Type ............................................................... Gear Pump Maximum Flow (Theoretical Value) ............... 12.5 L/min (3.39 US gpm) CONTROL VALVE Model ............................................................. DPK-T04-9P-BA Type ............................................................... All Pilot Pressure Operated Type Main Relief Set-Pressure............................... 24.5 MPa (250 kgf/cm2, 3560 psi) Overload Relief Set-Pressure........................ 26.5 MPa (270 kgf/cm2, 3840 psi) (Boom, Arm, Bucket) SWING DEVICE Type ................................................................Two-Stage Reduction Planetary Gear Reduction Gear Ratio .....................................20.615 SWING MOTOR Model ............................................................. MSF-27P Type ................................................................Swash-Plate Type SWING VALVE UNIT Type ................................................................Non Counterbalance Valve Type Relief Set-Pressure ........................................18.1±0.5 MPa (185±5 kgf/cm2, 2631±71 psi) at 30 L/min SWING PARKING BRAKE Type ............................................................... Single-Disc-Wet Negative Type Release Pressure (Full Stroke)...................... 1.5 MPa or less (15 kgf/cm2 or less, 218 psi or less)
T1-3-5
GENERAL / Component Specifications TRAVEL DEVICE Type ............................................................... Two-Stage Reduction Planetary Gear Reduction Gear Ratio .................................... 47.406 TRAVEL MOTOR Type ............................................................... Variable Displacement Swash-Plate Piston Motor TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE Type ............................................................... Counter Balance Valve Type TRAVEL PARKING BRAKE Type ............................................................... Single-Disc Wet Negative Type Cracking Pressure for Release...................... 1.3 MPa (13 kgf/cm2, 189 psi) CYLINDER ZAXIS40U-2 Rod Diameter................................................. Cylinder Bore ................................................. Stroke............................................................. Fully Retracted Length .................................. Plating Thickness...........................................
Boom (Cab) 55mm 90 mm 691 mm 1076 mm 30 µm or more
Boom (Canopy) 50 mm 90 mm 702 mm 1076 mm ←
50 mm 80 mm 698 mm 1041 mm ←
Rod Diameter................................................. Cylinder Bore ................................................. Stroke............................................................. Fully Retracted Length .................................. Plating Thickness...........................................
Bucket 40 mm 70 mm 551 mm 840 mm 30 µm or more
Boom Swing 50 mm 90 mm 662 mm 972 mm ←
Blade 50 mm 105 mm 140 mm 503.5 mm ←
Rod Diameter................................................. Cylinder Bore ................................................. Stroke............................................................. Fully Retracted Length .................................. Plating Thickness...........................................
Boom (Cab) 55 mm 95 mm 691 mm 1083 mm 30 µm or more
Boom (Canopy) 55 mm 95 mm 702 mm 1083 mm ←
50 mm 80 mm 731 mm 1074 mm ←
Rod Diameter................................................. Cylinder Bore ................................................. Stroke............................................................. Fully Retracted Length .................................. Plating Thickness...........................................
Bucket 45 mm 75 mm 551 mm 840 mm 30 µm or more
Boom Swing 50 mm 90 mm 662 mm 972 mm ←
Blade 50 mm 105 mm 140 mm 503.5 mm ←
ZAXIS50U-2
T1-3-6
Arm
Arm
GENERAL / Component Specifications FRONT ATTACHMENT PILOT VALVE Model ............................................................. HVP06F-040-101 TRAVEL PILOT VALVE Model ..............................................................HVP05U-040-101 (Standard) HVP05U-S-040-101 (Travel Alarm (Optional)) SWING⋅BLADE PILOT VALVE Model ..............................................................HVP05K-040-101 SOLENOID VALVE UNIT (2-Unit Solenoid Valve with Pilot Relief Valve) Relief Set Pressure.........................................4.1±0.2 MPa (42±2 kgf/cm2, 597±28 psi) Solenoid Valve ............................................... A Port Side: Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve B Port Side: Travel Mode Solenoid Valve OIL COOLER BYPASS CHECK VALVE Set Pressure .................................................. 0.3 MPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi)
T1-3-7
GENERAL / Component Specifications FILTER Filtration Fuel Filter······················································· 5 µm Air Filter (with mechanical indicator)·············· (Indicator Operation Pressure: -6.23 kPa±5%) Full Flow Filter (Paper Type) ························· 10 µm Suction Filter·················································· (150 Mesh) Pilot Filter······················································· 10 µm
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT FUEL SENSOR Resistance Value ··········································· Empty : 90 Ω
Full : 10 Ω
HORN Voltage / Current············································ DC 12 V⋅3 A Sound Pressure ············································· 108 dB (A) at 2 m ILLUMINATION Output ···························································· Work Light: Halogen 12V·55 W AIR CONDITIONER (Cab Version Only) Refrigerant ····················································· HFC-134a Cooling Ability ················································ 14.2±1.4 MJ/h (3400±340 kcal/h) 3 Cool Air Volume ············································· 350 m /h Heating Ability ················································ 13.6±1.4 MJ/h (3250±325 kcal/h) 3 Warm Air Volume ··········································· 350 m /h Temperature Adjusting System······················ Electronic Type Refrigerant Quantity ······································ 550±50 g 3 Compressor Oil Quantity ······························· 100 cm
T1-3-8
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
SECTION 2
SYSTEM CONTENTS Group 1 Control System Outline ..................................................... T2-1-1 Engine Control.......................................... T2-1-4 Pump Control ........................................... T2-1-8 Other Control......................................... T2-1-12
Group 2 Hydraulic System Outline ..................................................... T2-2-1 Pilot Circuit ............................................... T2-2-2 Main Circuit .............................................. T2-2-8
Group 3 Electrical System Outline ..................................................... T2-3-1 Electric Power Circuit (key Switch : OFF) ................................. T2-3-2 Electric Power Circuit (Key Switch : ON) .................................. T2-3-4 Preheat Circuit (Key Switch : HEAT) ........ T2-3-6 Starting Circuit (Key Switch : START) ...... T2-3-8 Charging Circuit (Key Switch : ON) ........ T2-3-10 Engine Stop Circuit (Key Switch : OFF)............................... T2-3-12
1M9T-2-1
(Blank)
1M9T-2-2
SYSTEM / Control System OUTLINE There are three controllers on this machine: • Monitor controller • Engine controller • Travel alarm controller (optional) Signals from the engine control dial, various sensors, and switches come to respective controllers for processing with logic circuits. Each controller drives the governor actuator, solenoid valve and others; and controls the engine and valve.
T2-1-1
SYSTEM / Control System • Monitor controller:
The monitor controller activates the hour meter, fuel gauge, coolant temperature gauge, etc. by signals from sensors and switches; and turns ON the indicators at the monitor.
• Engine controller:
The engine controller, when receiving signals from the engine control dial, governor actuator, auto-idle pressure sensor and auto-idle switch, drives the governor actuator, and controls engine speed.
• Travel alarm controller (optional):
The travel alarm controller, when receiving signals from the travel pressure sensor, sounds buzzer. Alarming can be cancelled by turning ON the buzzer deactivation switch.
T2-1-2
SYSTEM / Control System
Monitor Controller
Auto-Idle Switch
Auto-Idle Pressure Sensor
Engine Controller
Motor Driver
Engine Control Dial Engine
EC Motor Governor Actuator
T1M9-02-01-001
Governor Lever
Optional
From Fuse #8 Buzzer Deactivation Switch
Travel Alarm Controller Buzzer
Travel Pressure Sensor
T1M9-02-01-006
T2-1-3
SYSTEM / Control System ENGINE CONTROL The engine control has the following functions: • Engine Control Dial Control • Auto-Idle Control
Auto-Idle Switch
Engine Controller
Auto-Idle Pressure Sensor
Motor Driver
Engine Control Dial Engine
EC Motor Governor Actuator
T1M9-02-01-001
Governor Lever
T2-1-4
SYSTEM / Control System Engine Control Dial Control Engine Speed
Function: Controls the engine speed according to the rotational angle of the engine control dial. Operation: The motor driver of the engine controller drives the EC motor of the governor actuator according to the rotational angle of the engine control dial. As a result, the EC motor sets the governor lever in order to control engine speed.
Fast Speed
Slow Speed Slow Idle
Fast Idle
Engine Control Dial Position
Engine Controller
Motor Driver
Engine Control Dial
EC Motor Governor Actuator
T1M9-02-01-002
Governor Lever
T2-1-5
SYSTEM / Control System Auto Idle Control Function: With all control levers in neutral, sets the engine speed to the minimum speed in order to lower fuel consumption and noise level. Operation: 4 seconds later, 1. Signals from the engine control dial, auto-idle Engine engine speed is Speed reduced to auto idle pressure sensor, and governor actuator are sent speed. to the engine controller. Fast Speed 2. When turning ON the auto-idle switch at the monitor, signals from the monitor controller are sent to the engine controller. 3. When moving all control levers to neutral, signal from the auto-idle pressure sensor becomes 2.5 V Auto Idle Speed or less (2.5 MPa or less). (Slow Speed) 4. About four seconds later, the motor driver of engine controller drives the EC motor of the governor actuator, and sets the engine speed to the Fast Idle Slow Idle auto idle speed (minimum speed). 5. Move one of the control levers. When signals from the auto-idle pressure sensor becomes 2.9 V or more (3.0 MPa or more) by moving a control lever, the engine controller recognizes that the control lever is moving. 6. The engine controller immediately drives the EC motor of the governor actuator to increase the engine speed up to the original engine speed (set by the engine control dial). Auto idle cancellation conditions: • When moving control lever (Auto-idle pressure sensor signal ≧ 2.9 V) • When changing engine speed with engine control dial
T2-1-6
Engine Control Dial Position
SYSTEM / Control System
Auto-Idle Switch
Engine Controller
Auto-Idle Pressure Sensor
Motor Driver
Engine Control Dial Engine
EC Motor Governor Actuator
T1M9-02-01-001
Governor Lever
T2-1-7
SYSTEM / Control System PUMP CONTROL Power-Reduction Control (Cab-mounted Machine Only) Function: With the air conditioner in operation, decreases absorption torque of the main pump, and controls so that the total load to the main pump and compressor does not to exceed the engine horsepower. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION /Pump Device group.)
Flow Rate (Q)
Operation: 1. When turning ON the air conditioner switch, #30 terminal is grounded in the air conditioner controller. 2. When the displacement change relay is excited, current flows from #7 fuse to the torque control solenoid valve, thus switching the torque control solenoid valve. 3. As a result, pressure oil from the pilot pump passes through the control piston in the main pump. 4. The main pump swash plate is subjected to a force from the control piston to reduce its displacement angle. 5. As a result, the absorption torque of the main pump decreases, keeping it below the engine horsepower.
T2-1-8
0
Pressure (P)
SYSTEM / Control System
Air Conditioner Controller
Air Conditioner Switch
Displacement Change Relay Torque Control Solenoid Valve From Fuse #7
Pilot Pump
Main Pump Control Piston
T2-1-9
T1M9-02-01-004
SYSTEM / Control System Auxiliary Flow Selector Control (Only Machine with Optional Equipment) Function: When using the attachment such as a breaker, reduces the oil flow to the attachment by lowering the pilot pressure, thus restricting the operating speed. Also, in the combined control with the spare, controls so as to deliver more flow to other controls than the spare, maintaining the operating speed of the actuator. Operation: • Auxiliary flow selector switch: HIGH (in single operation) 1. When setting the auxiliary flow selector switch to HIGH position, current does not flow through the flow selector solenoid valve, so that the flow selector solenoid valve is not switched. 2. Pressure oil from the pilot pump passes through the flow selector solenoid valve, and acts on the end face (in spring chamber) of the pressure reducing valve. 3. Also, pilot pressure (self-pressure) passing through the pressure reducing valve acts on the end face of the pressure reducing valve. 4. A force, which works to move the pressure reducing valve downward, overcomes the opposite force, thus moving the pressure reducing valve downward. 5. As a result, the pressure reducing valve opens fully, so that pressure oil from the pilot pump flows to the auxiliary pilot valve at the pressure almost similar to the delivery pressure. 6. Thus, pilot pressure corresponding to the lever control force flows toward the auxiliary spool in the control valve, so that the actuator (attachment) operates normally.
NOTE: For operating principle of the auxiliary flow selector valve, refer to “COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure)” group.
• Auxiliary flow selector switch: LOW (in combined
operation) 1. When unlocking the auxiliary flow selector switch, and setting it to LOW position, current from #4 fuse flows to the flow selector solenoid valve, thus selecting the flow. 2. Pilot pressure oil flowing through the flow selector solenoid valve is blocked by the spool in the flow selector solenoid valve. Also, pressure oil from the spring chamber in the pressure reducing valve passes through the spool in the flow selector solenoid valve, and flows to the hydraulic oil tank 3. Pilot pressure oil (self-pressure) passing through the pressure reducing valve acts on the end face of the pressure reducing valve. 4. Because the spring chamber in the pressure reducing valve is connected to the hydraulic oil tank, only the spring force works against the pressure acting on the end face of the pressure reducing valve. 5. As a result, the pressure reducing valve moves upward until it becomes balanced with spring force. 6. Thus, pilot pressure is reduced, and pilot pressure oil (at 1.8 MPa) flows into the auxiliary pilot valve. 7. As a result, even when the auxiliary pilot valve moves at full stroke, the moving distance of the spool is shorter than usual, because pilot pressure acting on the spool in the control valve is low. 8. Thus, oil flow to the attachment is reduced, decreasing the speed of the attachment. 9. Also, in combined operation, large quantity of oil flows into other controls than the auxiliary, because the moving distance of the auxiliary spool remains unchanged, thus maintaining the operating speed of the actuator being operated.
T2-1-10
SYSTEM / Control System
Auxiliary Flow Selector Switch: LOW Position From Fuse #4
Auxiliary Pilot Valve
To Attachment
Hydraulic Oil Tank Auxiliary Spool
Spring Flow Selector Solenoid Valve
Pressure Reducing Valve Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve
Control Valve
Main Pump
Pilot Pump T1M9-02-01-013
NOTE: The illustration indicates the system operation when the auxiliary flow selector switch is placed in the LOW position.
T2-1-11
SYSTEM / Control System OTHER CONTROL Travel Alarm Control (only Machine Fitted with Optional Equipment) Function: Makes buzzer sound. Operation: During traveling, travel alarm signal is sent from the travel pressure sensor to travel alarm controller. The travel alarm controller sounds buzzer while receiving this signal. NOTE: To cancel alarming, turn ON the buzzer deactivation switch. Buzzer sounds again when resuming traveling.
From Fuse #8 Buzzer Deactivation Switch
Travel Alarm Controller Buzzer
Travel Pressure Sensor T1M9-02-01-006
T2-1-12
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System OUTLINE The hydraulic system consists of the main circuit and the pilot circuit along with their related items.
• Pilot Circuit Supplies the pressure oil which is delivered from the pilot pump to the machine operation control circuit, the pump control circuit, the travel mode control circuit, and the swing parking brake release circuit.
• Main Circuit Controls the pressure oil which is delivered from the main pump to the control valve which in turn drive the cylinders and the hydraulic motors.
T2-2-1
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System PILOT CIRCUIT The pressure oil which is delivered from the pilot pump is supplied to each circuit as is described below.
• Machine Operation Control Circuit Controls the control valve operation. The major components in this circuit are the pilot valves. In response to the control lever stroke, the pilot valve regulates the pressure oil supplied to the spool end in the control valve which in turn control the control valve operation. Also, during boom lowering operation, pressure oil from the pilot valve acts on the boom anti-drift valve and the end face of the spool in the control valve. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.)
• Pump Control Circuit (Flow Rate Control Circuit) Controls the main pump swash angle. This circuit consists of the main pump, the revolution sensing valve, and the control valve differential reducing valve. Oil pressure (PGR) from the revolution sensing valve and oil pressure (PLS) from the control valve differential reducing valve are supplied to both spool ends of the main pump PS valve respectively. The PS valve controls the main pump swash angle in response to the pressure difference between PGR and PLS pressures to regulate the main pump flow rate. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device group.)
• Travel Mode Control Circuit Controls the travel mode. This circuit consists of the travel speed selector switch, the travel speed changeover solenoid valve, and the travel speed selector valve. In response to travel speed selector switch position (Fast↔Slow), the travel speed changeover solenoid valve is shifted so that the travel speed control oil pressure is supplied to the travel motor. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device group.)
T2-2-2
• Swing Parking Brake Release Circuit Releases the swing parking brake. This circuit consists of the pilot shut-off switch, and the pilot shut-off solenoid valve. In response to the pilot control shut-off lever position raise/lower (pilot shut-off switch position (ON↔OFF)), the pilot shut-off solenoid valve is shifted so that the swing parking release oil pressure is supplied to the swing motor. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device group.)
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Pilot Valve (Left) Pilot Valve (Right) Arm Swing
Boom
Travel Pilot Valve
Bucket
Blade Pilot Valve
Boom Swing Pilot Valve
Machine Operation Control Circuit
Differential Reducing Valve
Control Valve
Boom Anti-Drift Valve Pressure PLS Swing Parking Brake Valve Pump Control Circuit
Swing Motor Travel Motor (Right)
Swing Parking Brake Release Circuit
Pilot Shut-Off Solenoid Valve
Pressure PGR PS Valve
Travel Speed Selector Valve
Main Pump Pilot Pump
Travel Motor (Left) Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve Travel Mode Control Circuit
2-Unit Revolution Solenoid Valve Sensing Valve
T2-2-3
T1M9-02-02-001
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Machine Operation Control Circuit Controls the control valve operation. The major components in this circuit are the pilot valves. In response to the control lever stroke, the pilot valve regulates the pressure oil supplied to the spool end in the control valve according to the control valve operation. Also, during boom lowering operation, pressure oil from the pilot valve acts on the boom anti-drift valve and the end face of the spool in the control valve. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) NOTE: The boom raise operation is explained here as an example. 1. When the pilot control shut-off lever is lowered, the pilot shut-off switch, located below the pilot control shut-off lever, turns ON, thus switching the pilot shut-off solenoid valve. 2. When the control lever is moved in the boom raise position, the pressure oil from the pilot pump is routed to the right pilot valve via the 2-unit solenoid valve. 3. Then, after being reduced at the pilot valve to the pressure corresponding to the control lever stroke, the pressure oil is supplied to the boom spool end so that the spool is moved in response to the control lever stroke. 4. The pressure oil from main pump (P1) is routed to the boom anti-drift valve via the boom spool. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 5. After passing through the anti-drift valve, the pressure oil is routed to the boom cylinder bottom, extending the boom cylinder so that the boom is raised.
T2-2-4
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Travel Pilot Valve
Pilot Valve (Left) Pilot Valve (Right) Arm Swing
h
f
Boom
e
b
Bucket
ad
j
c
il
Boom Swing Pilot Valve
Blade Pilot Valve
k
o
p
n
m
f
l
o
j
m
b
h
c
e
k
p
i
n
a
g
d
Boom Anti-Drift Valve
Pilot Shut-Off Solenoid Valve
Main Pump Pilot Pump
2-Unit Solenoid Valve T1M9-02-02-002
abcd-
Boom Raise Boom Lower Bucket Roll-In Bucket Roll-Out
efgh-
Left Swing Right Swing Arm Roll-In Arm Roll-Out
ijkl-
T2-2-5
Right Travel Forward Right Travel Reverse Left Travel Forward Left Travel Reverse
mnop-
Right Boom Swing Left Boom Swing Blade Lower Blade Raise
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Pump Control Circuit (Flow Rate Control Circuit) Controls the main pump swash angle. This circuit consists of the main pump, the revolution sensing valve, and the control valve differential reducing valve. Oil pressure (PGR) from the revolution sensing valve and oil pressure (PLS) from the control valve differential reducing valve are supplied to both spool ends of the main pump PS valve respectively. The PS valve controls the main pump swash angle in response to the pressure difference between PGR and PLS pressures to regulate the main pump flow rate. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device group.)
Control Valve
Differential Reducing Valve
Pressure PLS
Pressure PGR PS Valve Main Pump Pilot Pump
Revolution Sensing Valve
T1M9-02-02-003
T2-2-6
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Travel Mode Control Circuit Controls the travel mode. This circuit consists of the travel speed selector switch, the travel speed changeover solenoid valve, and the travel speed selector valve. In response to travel speed selector switch position (Fast↔Slow), the travel speed changeover solenoid valve is shifted so that the travel speed control oil pressure is supplied to the travel motor. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device group.) Swing Parking Brake Release Circuit Releases the swing parking brake. This circuit consists of the pilot shut-off switch, and the pilot shut-off solenoid valve. In response to the pilot control shut-off lever position raise/lower (pilot shut-off switch position (ON↔OFF)), the pilot shut-off solenoid valve is shifted so that the swing parking release oil pressure is supplied to the swing motor. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device group.)
Swing Parking Brake Valve
Swing Motor Travel Motor (Right) Swing Parking Brake Release Circuit
Pilot Shut-Off Solenoid Valve
Travel Speed Selector Valve
Pilot Pump
Travel Motor (Left)
Travel Mode Control Circuit
Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve
2-Unit Solenoid Valve T1M9-02-02-004
T2-2-7
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System MAIN CIRCUIT Neutral Circuit (When the control lever is in neutral) 1. Main pump (P1) draws hydraulic oil from the hydraulic oil tank and delivers it to the control valve. 2. When the control lever is in neutral, the delivered oil is blocked by the control valve spool. Accordingly, oil pressure in the circuit up to the control valve increases. 3. When the oil pressure increases more than the set pressure of the unload valve, the unload valve is unseated. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) NOTE: When the control lever is in neutral, the unload valve set pressure is kept at low pressure. 4. The delivered oil from the main pump is returned to the hydraulic oil tank via the unload valve, back pressure valve and the oil cooler. 5. The back pressure valve, provided in the return line of the main circuit (between control valve and oil cooler), maintains the pressure constant at 0.3 MPa in the main circuit. 6. As a result, the absorption ability of the actuator can be improved in the case of cavitation. 7. When the oil temperature is low (high viscosity), the oil flow resistance to pass through the oil cooler increases. Therefore, the bypass check valve is opened so that the hydraulic oil is returned directly to the hydraulic oil tank without flowing through the oil cooler, allowing the oil temperature to quickly increase.
T2-2-8
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Swing Motor
Travel Blade CylMotor Left inder
Boom Swing Boom Cylinder Cylinder
Travel Motor Right
Arm Cylinder
Bucket Cylinder
Unload Valve
Swing
Travel Left
Blade
Travel Right
Boom Swing
Boom
Pressure Compensator
Arm
Bucket
Auxiliary
Pressure Compensator
Back Pressure Main Pump (P1) Hydraulic Oil Tank Bypass Check Valve
Oil Cooler T1M9-02-02-006
T2-2-9
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Single Operation Circuit (When a control lever is operated) NOTE: The main circuits to drive the cylinders and motors are all identical except when the boom is raised, the boom anti-drift valve is employed. Only the boom raise operation is explained here. 1. The pressure oil from main pump (P1) is routed to the swing, travel (left), blade, travel (right), boom swing, boom, arm, bucket and auxiliary spools in the control valve. 2. When the boom spool is moved, the pressure oil from main pump (P1) is routed to the boom anti-drift valve via the boom spool. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 3. After passing through the boom anti-drift valve, the pressure oil is routed to the boom cylinder bottom, causing the boom to raise.
T2-2-10
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Boom Cylinder
Boom
Boom Anti-Drift Valve
Pressure Compensator
Main Pump (P1) T1M9-02-02-007
T2-2-11
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Combined Operation Circuit (Swing and Boom Combined Operation) NOTE: The swing and boom combined operation is explained here as an example. 1. The pressure oil from main pump (P1) is routed to the swing and boom spools via the pressure compensator in the control valve. The pressure oil from pilot pump (P2) is routed to the differential reducing valve in the control valve. 2. When the swing and boom control levers are operated, the pressure oil from the pilot valves moves the swing and boom spools. 3. The pressure oil from main pump (P1) flows to the swing motor and the boom cylinder via the swing spool and the boom spool. Thereby, the swing function and the boom function are operated. Pump Operation 1. When controlling pump delivery flow rate, the differential reducing valve handles a pressure difference, which is caused between pump delivery pressure and highest load pressure in either boom or swing circuit controlled by lever, as the PLS pressure. NOTE: The PLS pressure, accordingly, varies depending on the load pressure change in the control valve. 2. The PLS pressure delivered from the differential reducing valve is routed to the main pump and the pressure compensators to control their operation. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 3. The main pump flow rate is controlled so that the PLS pressure (the differential pressure in the circuit between before and after the control valve spool) supplied from the differential reducing valve and signal pressure (PGR) delivered from the revolution sensing valve become balance. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device group.) NOTE: Signal pressure (PGR) is used to control the actuator speeds. 4. As mentioned above, the differential reducing valve converts the differential pressure in the circuit between before and after the control valve spool into the PLS pressure and supplies it to control the main pump so that the main pump delivers oil flow meeting the volume the control valve requires (equivalent to the load pressure in the control valve).
T2-2-12
NOTE: Bleed-off (partial pressure) circuit: The pressure compensator for swing constitutes a bleed-off (partial pressure) circuit. PLS pressure itself acts on the pressure compensator in each section, except for only the pressure compensator for swing subjected to the PLS pressure at the throttle. As a result, this slackens the PLS surge pressure caused by switching to a single operation of swing from the combined operation of swing and boom (other actuator). This also slackens a shock caused by swing speed change when switching to a single operation of swing.
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Differential Reducing Valve Swing Motor Orifice
Bleed-Off Circuit (Partial Pressure Circuit)
Boom Cylinder
Pressure PLS
Swing Spool
Pressure Compensator
Revolution Sensing Valve
Boom Spool
Pressure PGR
Main Pump (P1)
Pilot Pump (P2) T1M9-02-02-008
T2-2-13
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Differential Reducing Valve Operation 1. The load pressure from the boom cylinder and the swing motor acts on the shuttle valve. 2. When load pressure (PL) from the boom cylinder is higher than load pressure (PL) from the swing motor, load pressure (PL) from the boom cylinder passes the shuttle valve. 3. That is, maximum load pressure (PLMAX) from among the spools is routed to the differential reducing valve. 4. Delivery pressures (P1 and P2) from main pump (P1) and pilot pump (P2) are also routed to the differential reducing valve. 5. According to maximum load pressure (PLMAX) from the actuators, the differential reducing valve control the PLS pressure and supplies the controlled PLS pressure to the main pump and the pressure compensator. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 6. The pressure relationship between PLS, pump delivery pressure (P1) and PLMAX acting on the differential reducing valve is described in the following formula: Pressure PLS = Pressure P1 – Pressure PLMAX 7. The differential reducing valve outputs pressure PLS equivalent to the differential pressure between pump delivery pressure (P1) and maximum actuator load pressure (PLMAX). 8. Depending on change in pressure PLS from the differential reducing valve, the pump control operation is performed.
Pressure Compensator Operation 1. As the swing motor load decreases, pressure (PL) after the spool is reduced, causing differential pressure (PLS) between, before and after the spool to increase. 2. As the boom cylinder load increases, pressure (PL) after the spool is raised, causing differential pressure (PLS) between, before and after the spool to decrease. 3. Both spool before pressure (PIN) and after pressure (PL) are always routed to the pressure compensator. In addition, pressure PLS from the differential reducing valve is acting on the differential reducing valve as the target differential pressure. 4. The pressure compensator operates so as to satisfy the relationship between pressures (PIN, PL, and PLS) as shown in the following formula: Pressure PIN = Pressure PL + Pressure PLS (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 5. When the swing motor load is light, high hydraulic oil pressure to drive the swing motor is not required. When the boom cylinder load is heavy, high hydraulic oil pressure is required to drive the boom cylinder. 6. Under this condition, each pressure compensator operates as described below, allowing the main pump to supply more hydraulic oil to the actuator which requires more hydraulic oil. • As differential pressure (PLS) between before spool pressure (PIN) and after spool pressure (PL) in the swing circuit is large, the pressure compensator is pushed by before spool pressure (PIN), causing the pressure compensator to move to the left. Thereby, the pressure compensator closes the opening port area, restricting the main hydraulic oil flow to the swing spool via the pressure compensator. • As differential pressure (PLS) between before spool pressure (PIN) and after spool pressure (PL) in the boom circuit is small, the pressure compensator is pushed by after spool pressure (PL + PLS), causing the pressure compensator to move to the right. Thereby, the pressure compensator open the opening port area wider, allowing the main hydraulic oil to flow more to the boom spool via the pressure compensator.
T2-2-14
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Differential Reducing Valve
Swing Motor (Load: Light)
Shuttle Valve
Boom Cylinder (Load: Heavy)
Pressure Compensator
Pressure PIN
Pressure PL
Pressure PLS Pressure PIN
Pressure PL
Pressure PLS
Pressure Compensator
Main Pump (P1)
Pilot Pump T1M9-02-02-009
T2-2-15
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System (Blank)
T2-2-16
SYSTEM / Electrical System OUTLINE The electrical system is roughly classified into the main circuit and the monitor circuit.
The main functions and construction of the main circuit are outlined here:
• Main Circuit
• Power Circuit: Supplies electrical power to all elec-
Operates the engine and accessory circuits.
• Monitor Circuit
trical systems on the machine. (key switch, battery, fuse box and slow blow fuse)
Consists of the monitors, sensors and switches to display machine operating conditions.
• Indicator Light Check Circuit: Checks for burned monitor indicators. (key switch, fuse box and monitor)
• Accessory Circuit: Works with the key switch ON. (key switch, fuse box and monitor)
• Preheating Circuit: Heats air before the inhalation
into the manifold and helps the engine to start in cold climate. (key switch, starter relay 2 and air heater)
• Engine Starting Circuit: Starts the engine. (key switch, starter and starter relay 2)
• Charging Circuit: Supplies all electric power to onboard systems and recharges the batteries. (alternator and battery)
• Engine Stop Circuit: Stops the engine with the stop solenoid. (engine stop solenoid and alternator)
T2-3-1
SYSTEM / Electrical System POWER CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: OFF) The battery negative terminal is grounded to the vehicle frame. When key switch is in OFF position, power is supplied only to the monitor (hour meter) and memory backup circuit. NOTE: The horn can be honked when key switch is in OFF position.
Battery
→ Fuse Box Terminal #1, 2
→ Slow Blow Fuse
→ Key Switch Terminal B
→ Starter Terminal B
→ Alternator Terminal B → Starter Relay Terminal R1-2 (only ZAXIS30U-2, 35U-2) Key Switch
Starter
→ Monitor Terminal #M1-2 → Radio Terminal #8 (only cab-mounted machine) → Air Conditioner Controller Terminal #2 (only cab-mounted machine) → Horn Relay Terminal #1, #3 → Power Relay Terminal #2
Monitor
Slow Blow Fuse
M1-2
Battery
Fuse Box
Radio 8
Alternator
B 1
2 2
Starter Relay 2
Air Conditioner controller
R1-2 Horn Relay 1
2
3
5
Horn Switch
Horn
Power Relay
T1MJ-02-03-007
T2-3-2
SYSTEM / Electrical System (Blank)
T2-3-3
SYSTEM / Electrical System POWER CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: ON) 1. When the key switch is turned to the ON position, terminal B is connected to terminals BR, R2 and ACC in the key switch. 2. Current from key switch terminal BR flows via the fuse box to the auxiliary power source and pilot shut-off switch as a power source respectively. 3. Current from key switch terminal R2 flows via the fuse box to the work light switch, *room light switch, *radio, *wiper switch, *washer switch and *air conditioner circuit and to supply auxiliary power as a power source respectively. 4. Current from key switch terminal ACC flows via the fuse box to travel mode selection switch, travel alarm circuit (optional), buzzer, starter relay 2, one-second timer, alternator, fuel pump, engine stop solenoid and **engine controller as a power source respectively. 5. Current from key switch terminal ACC flows to terminal #M1-1 on the monitor and check the indicators bulb. NOTE: *: Only cab-mounted machine **: Only ZAXIS30U-2, 35U-2
T2-3-4
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Key Switch
Monitor
M1-1
Fuse Box
3 4 5 6 7 8 9
Buzzer, Starter Relay 2, One-Second Timer, Alternator, Fuel Pump, Engine Stop Solenoid and **Engine Controller Travel Mode Selection Switch, Travel Alarm Circuit (Optional) *Radio and *Air Conditioner Circuit
Room Light, *Wiper Switch and *Washer Switch
Working Light Switch Auxiliary Power Source Pilot Shut-Off Switch T1MJ-02-03-002
T2-3-5
SYSTEM / Electrical System PREHEATING CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: HEAT) 1. When the key switch is turned to the HEAT position, terminal B is connected to terminals BR and R1 in the key switch. 2. Current from key switch terminal R1 flows to terminal #M1-12 of the monitor, starter relay terminal R1-2 (ZAXIS30U-2, 35U-2: current from the battery) and the air heater. 3. The air heater heats air before the inhalation into the engine when current is supplied to the air heater. NOTE: When key switch is in START position, current from key switch terminal R1 continues to be supplied to the air heater and the monitor. Thus, the starter is activated with the air heater on. NOTE: The monitor lights the preheat indicator for 15 seconds.
T2-3-6
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Key Switch
Monitor
Slow Blow Fuse
M1-2
M1-12
Fuse Box
Battery
Air Heater
2
R1-2
R1-2
Starter Relay 2 (ZAXIS 30U-2, 35U-2)
T2-3-7
Starter Relay 2 (ZAXIS 27U-2)
T1MJ-02-03-008
SYSTEM / Electrical System STARTING START)
CIRCUIT
(KEY
SWITCH:
1. When the key switch is turned to the START position, terminal B is connected to terminals BR, R1, C and ACC in the key switch. 2. Current from key switch terminal ACC is supplied to starter relay 2 terminal #4, alternator terminal IG, engine stop solenoid holding side, 1-second timer terminal #3, *engine controller and fuel pump via the fuse box as a power source respectively. 3. When current from key switch terminal ACC is supplied to 1-second timer terminal #3, current from 1-second timer terminal #2 is supplied to 1-second timer terminal #1 via power relay terminals #4-#3 and activates the power relay for 1 second. 4. Consequently, current from fuse #1 is sent to the absorbing side of engine stop solenoid via power relay terminals #2 and #1. 5. Thus, the solenoid moves to the absorbing side and the control rack is activated (the engine is ready to start.) 6. Alternator terminal L is grounded when the alternator is not or slowly rotating. Thus, terminals M1-13 on the monitor are grounded via alternator terminal L and the alternator indicator lights.
11. Current from the battery (ZAXIS27U-2: current from key switch terminal R!) is supplied to starter terminal S via starter relay 2 terminals R1-2-R1-1. 12. Current from the battery is supplied to the starter motor via starter terminal B and the contact. Thus, the starter rotates. 13. When the engine is running, the alternator generates electricity. Voltage of alternator terminals P and B increases. 14. Voltage of alternating current in proportion to rotating speed of the alternator is supplied from alternator terminal P to starter relay 2 terminal R2-6. When rotating speed of the alternator reaches -1 1350Âą210 min , starter relay 2 stops to magnetize the inside coil. 15. Thus, the contact between starter relay 2 terminals R1-1 and R1-2 is turned off. Then, the current to the starter is stopped and the starter stops.
NOTE: Current through the absorbing side is blocked one second later. The engine is kept rotating due to current through the solenoid holding side from fuse #9. 7. Current from switch terminal R1 is supplied to the air heater, terminal #M1-12 on the monitor and starter relay 2 terminal R1-2 (only ZAXIS27U-). 8. Current from switch terminal BR is supplied to the pilot shut-off switch via the fuse box. The pilot shut-off switch is turned ON by pressing the pilot shut-off lever down, and turned OFF by pulling the pilot shut-off lever up. The pilot shut-off switch must be turned OFF when the engine starts. 9. When the pilot shut-off switch is turned OFF, starter relay 2 is turned ON. 10. When starter relay 2 is turned OFF, the contact between terminals #3 and #4 becomes ON. Current from key switch terminal C is supplied to starter relay 2 terminals #3-#4 through starter relay 2 terminals #3 and #4. Thus, starter relay 2 magnetizes the inside coil, and makes the contact between terminals R1-1 and R1-2 ON.
T2-3-8
NOTE: *: Only ZAXIS30U-2, 35U-2
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Key Switch
Monitor
M1-12 M1-13 Slow Blow Fuse
Fuse Box 2
Start Relay 2
R2-1 R2-6
Starter Relay 2
4
R2-3
Battery
3
9
10
3
2
1
1
1
Pilot Shut-Off Switch
B
S
Air Heater
Contact P Starter Motor
M
ALT
Engine
B L
Alternator
IG Starter EC Motor M
Fuel Pump
Engine Stop Solenoid Holding Side
Power Relay
Absorbing Side
1 3
P *Engine Controller
1
2 4 2
1-Second 3 Timer T1MJ-02-03-004
NOTE: The illustration shows ZAXIS30U-2, 35U-2.
T2-3-9
SYSTEM / Electrical System CHARGING CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: ON) 1. The key switch is automatically returned to the ON position upon releasing it after the engine starts. With the key switch ON, terminal B is connected to terminals BR, R2 and ACC in the key switch. 2. Current from key switch terminal ACC is supplied to alternator terminal IG as a power source for the regulator. 3. When the engine is running, the alternator generates electricity and the ground of alternator terminal L is released. Thus, the alternator indicator goes off. 4. Direct current, of which voltage is constant, and not relational to rotating speed of the alternator is supplied from alternator terminal B to the battery and each circuit via the slow blow fuse. Thus, the battery is charged.
T2-3-10
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Key Switch
Monitor
Slow Blow Fuse M1-13
22 Battery Fuse Box 9 L Alternator
B IG T1MJ-02-03-005
T2-3-11
SYSTEM / Electrical System ENGINE STOP CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: OFF) 1. When the key switch is turned from the ON position to the OFF position, key switch terminal B is disconnected from terminals BR, R2 and ACC. Thus, power source for each circuit is stopped. 2. Current to the holding side of engine stop solenoid from key switch terminal ACC is stopped and the engine the stop solenoid is deactivated. Then, the control rack is moved by spring force to the stop position. Therefore, the fuel is not supplied and the engine stops. NOTE: Surge voltage to be developed when stopping the engine does not arise as the alternator terminal B is directly connected to the battery.
Fuel Dropping Direction
Control Rack
Engine Stop Solenoid
Governor T1M7-02-03-007
T2-3-12
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Key Switch
Slow Blow Fuse
Fuse Box
Battery Alternator
1
B
13
Engine Stop Solenoid Holding Side 1 3
Absorbing Side
2 Power Relay 4
1 1-Second Timer
2 3 T1MJ-02-03-011
T2-3-13
SYSTEM / Electrical System (Blank)
T2-3-14
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
SECTION 3
COMPONENT OPERATION CONTENTS Group 1 Pump Device
Group 5 Pilot Valve
Outline ..................................................... T3-1-1
Outline........................................................... T3-5-1
Main Pump P1 .......................................... T3-1-4
Operation ...................................................... T3-5-4
Power Control.......................................... T3-1-5
Shockless Function
Flow Rate Control ..................................... T3-1-6 PS Valve.................................................. T3-1-7
(Only for Travel Pilot Valve)....................... T3-5-12 Shuttle Valve (Only for Travel Pilot Valve)....................... T3-5-13
Group 2 Revolution Sensing Valve Outline ..................................................... T3-2-1 Operation ................................................. T3-2-4
Group 6 Travel Device Outline........................................................... T3-6-1 Travel Reduction Gear.................................. T3-6-2
Group 3 Swing Device Outline ..................................................... T3-3-1 Swing Motor ............................................. T3-3-2 Parking Brake........................................... T3-3-3 Valve Unit ..................................................... T3-3-4 Swing Reduction Gear.................................. T3-3-6
Travel Motor .................................................. T3-6-3 Travel Brake Valve ........................................ T3-6-4 Parking Brake ............................................... T3-6-8
Group 7 Others (Upperstructure) 2-Unit Solenoid Valve.................................... T3-7-1 Pilot Relief Valve ........................................... T3-7-3
Group 4 Control Valve Outline ..................................................... T3-4-1 Hydraulic Circuit ............................................T3-4-6 Main Relief Valve...........................................T3-4-8
Back Pressure Valve..................................... T3-7-3 Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve (Optional) ....... T3-7-4
Group 8 Others (Undercarriage)
Overload Relief Valve ....................................T3-4-9
Swing Bearing............................................... T3-8-1
Make-Up Valve ............................................T3-4-10
Center Joint................................................... T3-8-2
Boom Anti-Drift Valve...................................T3-4-12
Track Adjuster ............................................... T3-8-4
Unload Valve ...............................................T3-4-14 Differential Reducing Valve .........................T3-4-16 Pressure Compensator ...............................T3-4-18
1M9T-3-1
(Blank)
1M9T-3-2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device OUTLINE The pump device consists of main pump P1 and pilot pump P2 and is directly driven by the engine. Main pump (P1) is a swash plate type variable displacement axial plunger pump and supplies high-pressure oil to operate the actuators via the control valve. Pilot pump (P2) is a gear pump and supplies pressure oil to the pilot circuit.
Main Pump P1 Pilot Pump P2
T1M9-03-01-001
T3-1-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Hydraulic Diagram 13
1
2
12
3
14 11
4
10
9
5
8
6
7
T1M9-03-01-002
1 - Port PLS (from control valve differential reducing Valve) 2 - Port PA 3 - Valve PS 4 - Port PGR (from revolution sensing valve)
5 - Port P1 (to control valve)
9 - Spring
13 - *Port PC (from torque control solenoid valve)
6 - Port P2 (to pilot filter) 7 - Swash Plate 8 - Port S1 (from hydraulic oil tank)
10 - Plunger
14 - *Piston
11 - Control Piston 12 - Orifice
NOTE: *:Cab Version machines (equipped with the air-conditioner) only are provided with these items.
T3-1-2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device C
A
B
1 2 C
T1M9-03-01-003
D
View A
View B
13 5
6
4
9
Cross Section C-C
D
8
T1LD-03-01-004
T1M9-03-01-007
Cross Section D-D
14
3
7
10
11
12
T1M9-03-01-006 T1M9-03-01-005
NOTE: The above indicates construction of the pump for Cab Version machines.
T3-1-3
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device MAIN PUMP P1 Supplies pressure oil to the main circuit. The cylinder block is splined to the shaft. The plungers are inserted in the cylinder block. When the engine rotates, the shaft is driven so that the cylinder block is rotated together with plungers. The plunger slides along the shoe plate while oscillating in the cylinder block due to tilt of the swash plate, drawing and delivering oil. Shoe Plate
Plunger
Cylinder Block
Shaft
T1M9-03-01-004
Swash Plate
T3-1-4
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device POWER CONTROL Purpose: Controls the oil flow rate from main pump P1 so that the total power to drive main pump P1 and pilot pump P2 doesn’t exceed the engine power. Operation: 1. When the main pump P1 delivery oil pressure increases more than the load pressure, the increased pressure acts on the plunger. 2. The pressure force on the plunger pushes the swash plate around the oscillation pin until the pressure force increases to balance with the spring force. 3. Then, main pump (P1) decreases the delivery oil flow rate. 4. Accordingly, depending on the own delivery oil pressure, the delivery oil flow rate from main pump (P1) is controlled so that the total power to drive main pump P1 and pilot pump P2 is maintained lower than the engine power.
Spring
Spring Force
Oscillation Pin
Swash Plate
Plunger
T3-1-5
T1M9-03-01-004
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device FLOW RATE CONTROL Purpose: Controls the pump delivery flow rate in response to change in loads to the cylinders and the motors. NOTE: Both pressure PGR (varies in response to change in the engine speed) from the revolution sensing valve and pressure PLS (varies depending on the load pressure in the control valve) from the control valve differential reducing valve act on the PS valve. Until pressure PGR becomes equal with pressure PLS, the PS valve operates to regulate the pump delivery flow rate.
Operation: 1. The pressure oil from the PS valve is routed to the control piston via the orifice, causing the control piston to push the swash plate. 2. The swash plate is moved to tilt until the control piston force becomes to balance with the plunger swash plate pushing force. (Refer to POWER CONTROL on page T3-1-5.) 3. The delivery flow rate from main pump P1 varies. 4. As the delivery flow rate from main pump P1 varies, the pressure oil supplied to the control valve varies. 5. As pressure oil supplied to the control valve varies, pressure PLS from the differential reducing valve varies. 6. When pressure PLS and PGR, both are routed to the PS valve on the main pump, become equal, the main pump swash plate stops tilting. (Cab Version machines only) 7. If the air conditioner is switched ON, the PC pressure is sent, and the piston pushes back the swash plate, lowering the pump absorption torque.
Piston
PC Pressure
Plunger
Spring Force
Orifice
PS Valve
Swash Plate
Control Piston
T3-1-6
T1M9-03-01-006
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device PS VALVE Construction / Function The PS valve consists of the springs, the spool, and the sleeve. The PS valve controls the main pump delivery flow rate in response to the oil pressure signals in the following.
• Pressure PGR (varies in proportion to the engine speed) from the revolution sensing valve. (Refer to the revolution sensing valve group in this section.)
• Pressure PLS (varies in response to the pressure change from the actuators) from the control valve differential reducing valve. The PS valve controls the main pump delivery flow rate in response to change in pressure difference between pressures PGR and PLS.
Operation: 1. Signal pressures (PGR and PLS) are routed on both ends of the spool in the PS valve, moving the spool to either the right or the left. 2. Then, the oil ports on the PS valve are shifted. 3. In response to shifting of the oil ports, the oil pressure routed from the PS valve to the control piston in the main pump varies. 4. Then, the swash plate tilt angle is changed so that the delivery flow rate from main pump P1 is controlled. • Pressure PGR > Pressure PLS (Actuator loads have increased): The delivery flow rate from main pump P1 is increased. • Pressure PGR < Pressure PLS (Actuator loads have decreased): The delivery flow rate from main pump P1 is reduced. 5. When the actuator load increases, more oil flow is required to drive the actuator so that the PS valve increases the pump delivery flow rate. When the actual load decreases, the pump delivery flow rate is reduced.
Cross Section A-A A
Spring
PS Valve
A
T1M9-03-01-001
T3-1-7
Spring
Spool
Sleeve
T1M9-03-01-005
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Main Pump Delivery Flow Rate Increase (When a control lever is operated:) 1. Pressure PGR from the revolution sensing valve and pressure PLS from the control valve differential reducing valve are routed to chamber A (6) and B (4) in the PS valve respectively. 2. When the actuator load increases, pressure PLS becomes lower than pressure PGR (Pressure PLS < Pressure PGR). Therefore, the pressure force in chamber A (6) overcomes spring B (3) in chamber B (4) so that spool (5) is moved toward chamber B (4). 3. Then, the oil port on control piston (10) is connected to the pump suction port via PS valve spool (5) and sleeve (2), releasing the oil pressure behind control piston (10) to the pump suction port. The pilot pump delivery pressure port is blocked by PS valve spool (5). 4. The pilot oil pressure from pilot pump (P2) is routed to port PA. 5. The oil port to control piston (10) is connected to the pump suction port via PS valve spool (5) and sleeve (2). Accordingly, the oil pressure behind the control piston (10) is released to the pump suction port. 6. Although the oil pressure in the pump suction port acts on control piston (10), as it is a suction oil pressure, its pressure force cannot overcome spring (1) force in the main pump. Accordingly, control piston (10) is moved toward chamber C (9).
T3-1-8
7. The oil in chamber C (9) of control piston (10) is routed to the pump suction port via orifice (8). Since swash plate (11) is moved by spring (1) force, the tilting angle increases, causing the main pump delivery flow rate to increase. NOTE: Orifice (8) is provided to prevent swash plate (11) from being suddenly moved. Therefore, swash plate (11) is smoothly moved.
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device 2
Oil pressure from pilot pump (PA)
1
PS Valve
11
10
9
Pressure PGR
8
7
T1M9-03-01-004
P1
Pressure PGR
PA
6
5
Pump Suction Port
T1M9-03-01-005
4
3
Pressure PLS
7 5 3 PS Valve
4 8 9 Increase
10
Decrease
T1LD-03-01-008
11
1 - Spring 2 - Sleeve 3 - Spring B
4 - Chamber B 5 - Spool 6 - Chamber A
6
1
7 - Spring A 8 - Orifice 9 - Chamber C
T3-1-9
10 - Control Piston 11 - Swash Plate
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Main Pump Delivery Flow Rate Decrease (When a control lever is operated:) 1. Pressure PGR from the revolution sensing valve and pressure PLS from the control valve differential reducing valve are routed to chamber A (6) and B (4) in the PS valve respectively. 2. When the actuator load decreases, pressure PLS becomes higher than pressure PGR (Pressure PLS > Pressure PGR). Therefore, the pressure force in chamber B (4) overcomes spring A (7) in chamber A (6) so that spool (5) is moved toward chamber A (6). 3. Then, the oil port to control piston (10) is connected to pump delivery pressure port (PA) via PS valve spool (5) and sleeve (2). The pump suction port is blocked by PS valve spool (5). 4. The pilot oil pressure from pilot pump (P2) is routed to port PA. 5. When pilot pump delivery pressure delivered into chamber C (9) in control piston (10) overcomes spring (1) force, swash plate (11) is moved against spring (1) so that the main pump flow rate is reduced. NOTE: Orifice (8) is provided to prevent swash plate (11) from being suddenly moved. Therefore, swash plate (11) is smoothly moved. (Cab Version machines only) 6. If the air conditioner is switched ON, the PC pressure is sent to the pump from the torque control solenoid valve. 7. As the PC pressure pushes plunger (12), swash plate (11) slightly moves toward low tilting angle, and lowers the pump absorption torque. 8. With this, occurrence of engine stall can be prevented in the heavy load condition with the air conditioner ON.
T3-1-10
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Oil pressure from pilot Pump (PA)
12
2
1
PC Pressure
PS Valve
11
10
9
Pressure PGR
8
7
T1M9-03-01-006
P1
Pressure PGR
PA
6
Pressure PLS
5
Pump Suction Port
T1M9-03-01-005
4
3
Pressure PC
7 5 3 PS Valve
4 8 9 10 Increase Decrease
T1M9-03-01-008
11
6
1
12
NOTE: The above indicates construction of the pump for Cab Version machines. 1 - Spring 2 - Sleeve 3 - Spring B
4 - Chamber B 5 - Spool 6 - Chamber A
7 - Spring A 8 - Orifice 9 - Chamber C
T3-1-11
10 - Control Piston 11 - Swash Plate 12 - Piston
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Main Pump Flow Rate Minimization (When control levers are in neutral:) 1. When all control valve spools are in neutral (all control levers are in neutral), the system oil pressure after the control valve spools is zero. Therefore, pressure PLMAX (zero) from the main circuit after the spools is routed to the differential reducing valve at this time. 2. When the control valve spools are in neutral, the unload valve is unseated if the main pump delivery pressure increases more than spring force. Accordingly, the main pump oil pressure routed to the differential reducing valve is equal to the unload valve operation pressure (spring force). 3. As the unload valve operation pressure is higher than pressure PLMAX (zero), the differential reducing valve is moved to the left. Then, after reducing the pilot pressure to the unload valve operation pressure, the differential reducing valve delivers it as pressure PLS.
4. Pressure PLS from the differential reducing valve and pressure PGR from the revolution sensing valve are routed to the main pump PS valve. Since pressure PLS is higher than pressure PGR, spool (5) is moved to the left, causing the main pump to reduce the delivery flow rate. (Refer to this group in this section.) 5. Pilot pump delivery pressure (PA) is supplied to the PS valve. 6. Pilot pump delivery pressure (PA) is routed into chamber C (9) in control piston (10) and overcomes spring (1) force. Accordingly, control piston (10) is moved toward swash plate (11) so that swash plate (11) is held in the minimum flow rate position. Thereby, the main pump maintains the minimum flow rate.
Pilot Pressure
Differential Reducing Valve
Unload Valve
Spring
Pressure PLMAX (Zero)
(Unload Valve Operation Pressure) Pressure PLS
T3-1-12
Main Pump Delivery Pressure T1M9-03-01-009
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Oil pressure from pilot pump (PA)
1
PS Valve
11
10
Pressure PGR
9
5
T1M9-03-01-004
P1
Pressure PGR
PA
Pump Suction Port
Pressure PLS T1M9-03-01-005
Pressure PLS
5
PS Valve
9 Increase
10
Decrease
T1LD-03-01-010
11
1 - Spring 2 - Sleeve 3 - Spring B
4 - Chamber B 5 - Spool 6 - Chamber A
1
7 - Spring A 8 - Orifice 9 - Chamber C
T3-1-13
10 - Control Piston 11 - Swash Plate
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device (Blank)
T3-1-14
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve OUTLINE The revolution sensing valve converts change in the pilot pump delivery flow rate to signal pressure (PGR) to be used for controlling the pump flow rate. (The pilot pump is a fixed displacement pump so that the delivery flow rate changes directly in proportion to the engine speed.) The revolution sensing valve is located in the pilot circuit between the pilot pump and the solenoid valve. In response to change in the engine speed, the pressure PGR is routed to the main pump swash angle control system from port PGR to regulate the pump tilt angle. The revolution sensing valve consists of the variable metering valve and the differential reducing valve. Revolution Sensing Valve
Port PPHI
Port PPLO
Variable Metering Valve
Differential Reducing Valve
T566-03-02-001
Port DR A View A
T566-03-02-003
Port PGR
T3-2-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve Hydraulic Circuit Diagram 3
2
4 1 5
T1M9-03-02-001
7
1 - Port PPLO (to solenoid valve unit, main pump and torque control solenoid valve (to torque control solenoid valve for Cab version only)) 2 - Port PGR (to main pump)
6
3 - Differential Reducing Valve
5 - Port PPHI (from pilot filter)
4 - Port DR (to hydraulic tank)
6 - Variable Metering Valve
T3-2-2
7 - Orifice
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve 1
5
4
T566-03-02-001
View A
A
2
B
B T566-03-02-003
Cross Section B-B
7 6
3 T566-03-02-002
2
T3-2-3
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve OPERATION Spool (3), piston (7), and spool (8) are illustrated in the position when the engine is stopped. Spool (3) is pushed by spring (2) to the right. Both spring (6) force and spring (9) force are identical to so that piston (7) and spool (8) are held in the position illustrated. 1
2
3
4
Port PPHI
Variable Metering Valve Port PPLO
Differential Reducing Valve
Port PGR
11
1 - Sleeve 2 - Spring 3 - Spool
10
4 - Orifice 5 - Guide 6 - Spring
9
8
Port DR 7 - Piston 8 - Spool 9 - Spring
T3-2-4
T566-03-02-002
7
6
5
10 - Spring Seat 11 - Sleeve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve (Blank)
T3-2-5
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve While the Engine is Running (Output Diagram: between A and B) 1. When the engine speed increases, the differential pressure between the front and the rear of orifice (4) changes in proportion to the engine speed. 2. Spool (8) and piston (7) in the differential reducing valve are moved so that the pressure force balance satisfies the formula of “Pressure PGR × Area S3 + Pressure PPLO × Area S2 = Pressure PPHI × Area S1.” Thereby, pressure PGR becomes equal to the differential pressure between the front and the rear of orifice (4) (Pressure PPHI – Pressure PPLO) For example: (1) When pressure PGR × Area S3 + Pressure PPLO × Area S2 > Pressure PPHI × Area S1, spool (8) is moved to the right, pressure PGR is drained through notch D, reducing pressure PGR. (2) When pressure PGR × Area S3 + Pressure PPLO × Area S2 < Pressure PPHI × Area S1, piston (7) and spool (8) are moved to the left so that port PPLO is opened at notch C, allowing pressure PGR to increase. Repetition of operations (1 and 2) maintains the pressure balance “ Pressure PGR × Area S3 = Pressure PPHI × Area S1 - Pressure PPLO × Area S2.” Since S1= S2 = S3, the relation of “Pressure PGR = Pressure PPHI – Pressure PPLO” is maintained. 3. The opening area of notch C varies depending on the engine speed. Therefore pressure PGR at port PGR varies depending on the engine speed. This process corresponds to the points between A and B on the output diagram. 4. While the engine is running, the pressure oil from the pilot pump routed into port PPHI flows into orifice (4) and onto variable metering valve spool (3). 5. In proportion to the engine speed, pressure PPHI and pressure PPLO vary due to orifice (4) together with the pilot pump (fixed displacement) delivery flow rate. When the engine speed is between points A and B, spool (3) receive pressure PPLO and spring (2) force. When pressure PPLO is still high, the spring force and pressure PPLO is larger than pressure force PPHI so that spool (3) remains closed.
T3-2-6
6. The differential pressure between ports PPHI and PPLO decides whether spool (8) is moved to the left or to the right. Accordingly, the differential reducing valve operation regulates pressure PGR at port PGR corresponding to the pressure differences between points A and B on the output diagram.
Pressure PGR (Pressure at Output Port)
B
A
Engine Speed Min.
Max.
Output Diagram
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve
2
Port PPLO (Pressure PPLO)
3
Port PPHI (Pressure PPHI)
4
Variable Metering Valve Section C Section D
Chamber (b)
Chamber (a)
11
9
Port PGR (Pressure PGR)
8
7
Hydraulic Oil Tank
T566-03-02-008
S3
S2
S1 Port PPLO (Pressure PPLO)
Port PPHI (Pressure PPHI)
Section D Section C
Differential Reducing Valve
Port PGR (Pressure PGR) 2 - Spring 3 - Spool
4 -11Orifice 8 - Spool
8
9 - Spring
T3-2-7
T566-03-02-009
11 - Sleeve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve While the Engine is Running (Output Diagram: between B and C) 1. While the engine is running, the pressure oil from the pilot pump is routed into port PPHI flows into orifice (4) and onto variable metering valve spool (3). 2. When the differential pressure between pressure PPHI and Pressure PPLO increases more than the specified valve, the oil pressure at port PPHI overcomes spring (2) force, moving spool (3) to the left. 3. When spool (3) is moved to the left, some pressure oil from port PPHI is bypassed through notch (d) on variable metering valve spool (3) and sleeve (1) so that the differential pressure between ports PPHI and PPLO does not increase more than required. Pressure PGR created by the variable metering valve operation corresponds to the pressure between points B and C on the output diagram.
T3-2-8
Pressure PGR (Pressure at Output Port)
B
C
Engine Speed Min.
Max.
ă&#x192;ťOutput Diagram
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve
1
2
Port PPLO
Section (d)
3
4 Port PPHI
Variable Metering Valve Section (C)
Port PGR (Pressure PGR)
11 1 - Sleeve 2 - Spring
3 - Spool 4 - Orifice
T566-03-02-011
8 8 - Spool
T3-2-9
11 - Sleeve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve (Blank)
T3-2-10
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device OUTLINE The swing device consists of the valve unit swing motor and swing reduction gear. The valve unit prevents cavitation and overload in the swing circuit. The swing motor is a swash-plate-type axial plunger motor incorporating a parking brake. The swing motor, driven by pressure oil from the pump, transmits the rotation force to the swing reduction gear. The swing reduction gear converts the swing motor rotation power to a slow but large torque which rotates the upperstructure.
Valve Unit
Swing Motor
Swing Reduction Gear
T1M9-03-03-001
T3-3-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device SWING MOTOR The inner rotor is splined to the shaft, and the plunger is inserted in the rotor. When the pump supplies pressure oil to the swing motor, plungers are pushed down with pressure oil while sliding along the swash plate, developing turning force. As the shaft is splined to the rotor and sun gear in the swing reduction gear, the rotor torque is transmitted to the swing reduction gear unit.
Valve Plate
Shaft
Rotor
Plunger Shoe
Swash Plate Retainer
Sun Gear
T1M9-03-03-001
T3-3-2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device PARKING BRAKE The parking brake is a wet-negative-type single disc brake which is released only when the brake release pressure oil is routed into the brake piston chamber.
Brake Piston Chamber
Motor Housing
When releasing the brake: When the pilot control shut-off lever is in the UNLOCKED position, the pilot shut-off switch is ON. By this action, the pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve is ON, so that the brake release pressure (pilot pressure) is guided to the brake piston chamber. Through the inner passage in motor housing to push the brake piston upward, allowing the brake piston and the disc plate contact to free, so that the rotor can be rotated. When the brake is applied: When the pilot control shut-off lever is in the LOCKED position, the pilot shut-off switch is OFF. By this action, the pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve is OFF, so that the brake release pressure (pilot pressure) is not guided to the brake piston chamber. The brake release pressure oil in brake piston chamber flows back to the hydraulic oil tank via the pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve. Accordingly, by the spring, the disc plate splined to the rotor is pushed onto the motor housing. Therefore the rotor is secured.
Brake Piston
Disc Plate
Inner Passage Rotor Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve
T565-03-02-005
Pilot Pump
Motor Housing
Brake Piston Chamber
Spring
Disc Plate
Rotor Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve
Pilot Pump
T3-3-3
T565-03-02-006
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device VALVE UNIT The valve unit consists of the make-up valves and relief valves. The make-up valve prevents the occurrence of cavitation in the circuit. The relief valve also protects the circuit from surge pressure and overloading. Make-Up Valve When stopping swing operation, the swing spool is in neutral by returning the swing lever and the flow rate to swing motor stops flowing. But the swing motor rotates by inertia, so cavitation occurs in the circuit. To prevent cavitation, when the oil pressure in the circuit is lower than the pressure at port M (hydraulic oil tank pressure), the poppet opens to draw hydraulic oil into the circuit so that the pump oil flow rate is replenished.
Relief Valve
Made-Up Valve
From Control Port M Vavle
T3-3-4
To Control Valve
Poppet
T565-03-02-002
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device Relief Valve The relief valve functions to reduce shocks developed when starting or stopping swing movement (shockless) and to protect the circuit from overloading (relief).
• Shockless Operation
When the pressure in the circuit increases, the pressure oil enters in the piston chamber via the orifice of poppet and housing, to move the piston to the left. The pressure in the spring chamber is kept low during the movement of piston. Therefore, the pressure at port HP opposes the spring set force only, and the poppet opens to relieve the hydraulic oil under low pressure whenever the pressure at port HP is low. Therefore, the pressure stops temporally increasing and shocks are reduced when starting or stopping the swing operation. When the piston moves to the stroke end, the pressure in the spring chamber becomes equal to the pressure at port HP. As a result, the relief set force becomes to the normal pressure, so the poppet closes.
Poppet
Piston Chamber
Orifice
Spring
LP
HP
S1
S2
Housing
Spring Chamber
T561-02-03-001
• Relief Operation
When the pressure in the circuit increases, the force which acting on poppet (Pressurized Area (S1-S2)×Pressure at Port HP) exceeds the spring force, so the poppet opens to allow the hydraulic oil to be relieved.
Poppet
• Quick Return Operation of Piston
This operation is to return the piston to the original position. The shockless operation is performed as the piston moves from right to left. Therefore, when stopping the swing operation, move the piston to right. When returning the swing lever to the neutral position, the back pressure arises in the return circuit due to the swing inertial force. The piston is returned to the original position quickly by the back pressure.
LP
HP
S2
S1
T566-03-03-039
Piston LP
HP
T566-03-03-039
T3-3-5
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device SWING REDUCTION GEAR The swing reduction gear is a two-stage planetary-gear reduction type. The swing motor rotation force is transmitted to the sun gear. The rotation of sun gear is reduced by the planetary gear and ring gear. This in turn rotates the shaft via the carrier.
First stage ring gear (8) and second stage ring gear (9) are secured onto the housing. The output shaft of swing motor rotates first stage sun gear (1). The rotation force is transmitted to second stage sun gear (3) via first stage planetary gear (9) and first stage carrier (2). The rotation force of second stage sun gear (3) rotates shaft (5) (output shaft) via second stage planetary gear (7) and second stage carrier (4). Shaft (5) meshes with the internal gear on swing bearing secured onto the undercarriage to rotate the upperstructure
1 8
2
9
3
7
4
6 5
Housing
T1M9-03-03-001
1 - First Stage Sun Gear 2 - First Stage Carrier 3 - Second Stage Sun Gear
4 - Second Stage Carrier 5 - Shaft (Output Shaft)
6 - Second Stage Ring Gear 7 - Second Stage Planetary Gear
T3-3-6
8 - First Stage Ring Gear 9 - First Stage Planetary Gear
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve OUTLINE The control valve controls the oil pressure along with the flow rate and direction in the hydraulic circuit. The major components in the hydraulic circuit are the main relief valve, overload relief valve, make-up valve, unload valve, differential reducing valve, and pressure compensators. All spools are fully operated by the pilot pressure oil.
Also, the control valve is provided with an Auto-Idle pressure sensor for use in Auto-Idle control. (Refer to SYSTEM/Control System)
Installation Port of Auto Idle Pressure Sensor
Unload Valve Main Relief Valve Differential Reducing Valve
Swing Travel (Left) Blade Travel (Right) Make-Up Valve Boom Swing
Overload Relief Valve
Boom Overload Relief Valve Arm Bucket Auxiliary
T1M9-03-04-001
T3-4-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
1 37
2
123578910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 -
36 3 35 34 33 32 5 31 30 29 28 27
7 8
26 25
9 10
24 23
11
22
12
21 20 19
13 14
18
17
T1M9-03-04-002
T3-4-2
Main Relief Valve Unload Valve Load Check Valve (swing) Load Check Valve (Blade) Make-Up Valve (Boom Swing) Load Check Valve (Boom Swing) Overload Relief Valve (Boom) Load Check Valve (Boom) Overload Relief Valve (Arm) Load Check Valve (Arm) Overload Relief Valve (Bucket) Load Check Valve (Bucket) Load Check Valve (Auxiliary) Pressure Compensator (Auxiliary) Pressure Compensator (Bucket) Shuttle Valve (Bucket) Overload Relief Valve (Bucket) Pressure Compensator (Arm) Shuttle Valve (Arm) Overload Relief Valve (Arm) Pressure Compensator (Boom) Shuttle Valve (Boom) Boom Anti-Drift Valve Overload Relief Valve (Boom) Pressure Compensator (Boom Swing) Shuttle Valve (Boom Swing) Pressure Compensator (Travel Right) Shuttle Valve (Travel Right) Pressure Compensator (Blade) Shuttle Valve (Blade) Pressure Compensator (Travel Left) Shuttle Valve (Travel Left) Pressure Compensator (Swing) Shuttle Valve (Swing) Differential Reducing Valve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve
A
A
D
D
E
E
F
F
E
E
G
G
H
H
I
I
I
I
J
J
T1M9-03-04-001
Cross Section A-A
Cross Section D-D K
36
1 37
2
T1M9-03-04-005
T3-4-3
35
K
T1M9-03-04-007
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
1 37
2
123578910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 -
36 3 35 34 33 32 5 31 30 29 28 27
7 8
26 25
9 10
24 23
11
22
12
21 20 19
13 14
18
17
T1M9-03-04-002
T3-4-4
Main Relief Valve Unload Valve Load Check Valve (swing) Load Check Valve (Blade) Make-Up Valve (Boom Swing) Load Check Valve (Boom Swing) Overload Relief Valve (Boom) Load Check Valve (Boom) Overload Relief Valve (Arm) Load Check Valve (Arm) Overload Relief Valve (Bucket) Load Check Valve (Bucket) Load Check Valve (Auxiliary) Pressure Compensator (Auxiliary) Pressure Compensator (Bucket) Shuttle Valve (Bucket) Overload Relief Valve (Bucket) Pressure Compensator (Arm) Shuttle Valve (Arm) Overload Relief Valve (Arm) Pressure Compensator (Boom) Shuttle Valve (Boom) Boom Anti-Drift Valve Overload Relief Valve (Boom) Pressure Compensator (Boom Swing) Shuttle Valve (Boom Swing) Pressure Compensator (Travel Right) Shuttle Valve (Travel Right) Pressure Compensator (Blade) Shuttle Valve (Blade) Pressure Compensator (Travel Left) Shuttle Valve (Travel Left) Pressure Compensator (Swing) Shuttle Valve (Swing) Differential Reducing Valve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve Cross Section F-F
Cross Section E-E K
29、33
K
30、34
K
K
31
T1M9-03-04-008
32
T1M9-03-04-009
Cross Section H-H
Cross Section G-G K
28
26
7
25 K
27
K
Cross Section I-I
K
T1M9-03-04-011
Cross Section J-J K
17、20
9
T1M9-03-04-010
23
19、22
24
K
18、21
K
11、13
T1M9-03-04-012
Cross Section K-K
3、5、8、10、12、 14、15
T566-03-03-009
T3-4-5
16
K
T1M9-03-04-013
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT Main pump P1 supplies pressure oil to the control valve. When the spools in the control valve are in neutral, the pressure oil from main pump P1 flows back to the hydraulic oil tank via the unload valve. When the spools in the control valve are operated, the pressure oil from main pump P1 flows to the cylinders and/or the motors after passing through the pressure compensator and the operated spools. In each section of the control valve, a pressure compensator is provided. While the spools are being operated, by the function of this pressure compensator, flow corresponding to the lever input is distributed to the respective actuators regardless of load during a combined operation. Beside the pressure compensators, boom anti-drift valve, unload valve, differential reducing valve, and variable relief valve are provided in the control valve. NOTE: Only the pressure compensator for the swing motor receives PLS pressure coming through the orifice. This is for moderating swing bounce at the moment of operation change from a combined operation of swing and others to the swing operation alone.
T3-4-6
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve
Travel Motor (Left)
Swing Motor
Blade Cylinder
Travel Motor (Right)
Boom Boom Swing Cylinder Cylinder
Arm Cylinder
Bucket Cylinder
Unload Valve
Swing
Travel (Left)
Blade
Travel (Right)
Boom Swing
Boom
Pressure Compensator
Differential Reducing Valve
Arm
Bucket
Auxiliary
Pressure Compensator
Back Pressure Valve Main Pump (P1) Hydraulic Oil Tank Bypass Check Valve
T1M9-02-02-006
Oil Cooler
T3-4-7
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve MAIN RELIEF VALVE The main relief valve is provided in the primary circuit (before spools) to prevent the oil pressure in the main circuit from increasing more than the set pressure. 1. The oil pressure in port P acts on pilot poppet (10) via orifices (2 and 5) in poppet (1) and seat (6). 2. When the oil pressure in the main circuit increases more than the set pressure of spring (8), pilot poppet (10) moves to the right. 3. Then, a small quantity of the pressure oil flows to pot T via passage (7) in holder (9) and around sleeve (11). Thereby, a differential pressure arises between port P and spring chamber (4) due to orifice (2). When this differential pressure increases more than spring (3) force, poppet (1) is moved to the right so that the pressure oil in port P flows directly to port T. 4. When the oil pressure is reduced, pilot poppet (10) is closed by spring (8), causing the oil pressure in spring chamber (4) to increase. The increased pressure oil in spring chamber (4) and spring (3) cause poppet (1) to close again.
In Neutral Port T
Port P
Port T T566-03-03-016
In Operation 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
Port P
Port T
11 123456-
T3-4-8
Poppet Orifice Spring Spring Chamber Orifice Seat
78910 11 -
Passage Spring Holder Pilot Poppet Sleeve
T566-03-03-017
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE The overload relief valve is provided in the secondary (after spool) circuit of the cylinder so that even if the cylinder is moved by external loads, the overload relief valve regulates the oil pressure in the secondary circuit so as to avoid abnormal pressure increase. 1. The oil pressure on the cylinder side acts on pilot poppet (5) via passage (2) in piston (1). 2. If the oil pressure in the circuit increases more than the set pressure of spring (6), pilot poppet (5) is moved to the right. 3. A small quantity of the pressure oil flows to port T through passage (8) in holder (7) and passage (10) in sleeve (9). 4. When pilot poppet (5) is moved to the right, the oil pressure in chamber (11) decreases, causing a pressure difference to arise between the cylinder side port and chamber (11). When this differential pressure overcomes spring (4) force, poppet (3) is moved to the right, allowing the pressure oil in the cylinder side port to directly flow to port T.
In Neutral
Cylinder Side
Port T
T566-03-03-018
In Operation 1
2
4
3
5
6
Cylinder Side
NOTE: When the oil pressure in the cylinder side decreases lower than the oil pressure in port T, this overload relief valve draws oil from port T (hydraulic oil tank side), preventing cavitation from occurring (make-up function).
T3-4-9
Port T
123456-
Piston Passage Poppet Spring Pilot Poppet Spring
11 10
9
8
78910 11 -
Holder Passage Sleeve Passage Chamber
7
T566-03-03-019
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve MAKE-UP VALVE The make-up valve prevents cavitation from occurring in the boom swing cylinder. Other cylinder circuits have one overload relief valve each, by which make-up function the occurrence of cavitation in the circuit is prevented. 1. The oil pressure in the cylinder side is routed into spring chamber (4) through passage (2) in poppet (1) so that the oil pressure in the spring chamber increases to the same pressure in the cylinder side. Accordingly, when the oil pressure in the cylinder side is high, the poppet (1) closing force [pressure in spring chamber (4) Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area (S2)] overcomes the poppet (1) opening force [pressure in cylinder side Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area (S1)], causing poppet (1) to close. 2. When the oil pressure in the cylinder side becomes lower than the pressure in port T, poppet (1) is closed by spring (3) force only. Therefore, when poppet (1) opening force [pressure in port T Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area (S2-S1)] overcomes poppet (1) closing force [spring (3) force], poppet (1) is unseated, allowing the hydraulic oil to supply to the cylinder side so that occurrence of cavitation in the cylinder side is prevented.
In Neutral
Cylinder Side
Port T
T566-03-03-020
In Operation S1
2
1
3
S2
4
Cylinder Side
Port T
1 - Poppet 2 - Passage 3 - Spring
T3-4-10
6
5
4 - Spring Chamber 5 - Sleeve 6 - Passage
T566-03-03-021
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve (Blank)
T3-4-11
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve BOOM ANTI-DRIFT VALVE The boom anti-drift valve is provided in the boom cylinder bottom circuit to reduce the boom cylinder drift. When the boom spool is in neutral: 1. When the engine is stopped with the boom raised, the oil pressure in the boom cylinder bottom increases due to the front attachment weight. 2. The increased oil pressure is routed into the spring chamber via the poppet orifice and acts on the ball and pressure receiving area S1. 3. Therefore, when the ball is pushed the sleeve by the increased oil pressure, the pressure force (oil pressure in the spring chamber Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area S1) closes the poppet. Then, the poppet blocks the pressure oil in the bottom circuit, not allowing the pressure oil to leak to the spool side so that the cylinder drift is reduced.
Boom Cylinder
When Neutral: From the control valve Spring Chamber
Poppet Orifice
Ball S1
When raising the boom: 1. When the boom raise operation is made, the spool is moved to the left. 2. Pressure oil from the spool to open the poppet and to flow further to the boom cylinder bottom. 3. Thereby, the boom is raised.
Sleeve
Spool T566-03-03-024
When Raising:
Boom cylinder To the control valve Poppet
Spool T566-03-03-027
T3-4-12
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve When lowering the boom: 1. When the boom lower operation is made, the boom lower pilot oil pressure is routed to the spool end and the piston, causing the spool and the piston to move to the right. 2. When the piston is moved to the right, the right tip of the piston pushes the ball so that the ball becomes unseated from the sleeve. 3. Then, the pressure oil in the boom cylinder bottom circuit is returned to the hydraulic oil tank via the orifice in the poppet, section A, and the passage around the piston, reducing the oil pressure in the spring chamber. 4. When the oil pressure in the spring chamber is reduced, the poppet is closed by spring force only. Accordingly, when poppet opening force [oil pressure at port A2 Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area (S1-S2)] overcomes poppet closing force (spring), the poppet is opened. 5. Therefore, the pressure oil in the boom cylinder bottom circuit is returned to the hydraulic oil tank via the poppet and the spool, allowing the boom cylinder to move downwards.
Piston
Section A
Sleeve
Ball
Boom Lower Pilot Oil Pressure Spool
Circuit T
Circuit T2
T566-03-03-025
Boom Cylinder From the control valve Piston
Section A
Poppet Port A2
S2
S1
T566-03-03-026
Spring Chamber
T3-4-13
Spring
Spool
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve UNLOAD VALVE The unload valve operates in response to pump delivery pressure (P1) and maximum load pressure (PLMAX) to control the differential pressure between before and after the spool in the control valve. NOTE: The differential reducing valve outputs pressure PLS (Pressure PLS = Pressure P1 – Pressure PLMAX). Therefore, pressure P1 must be higher than pressure PLMAX to output pressure PLS. The unload valve controls the differential pressure between before and after the spool in the control valve so that pressure P1 (Pressure P1 = Pressure PLMAX) is higher than pressure PLMAX. Then, the differential reducing valve outputs pressure PLS (Pressure PLS = Pressure P1 – Pressure PLMAX), by which the pump delivery flow rate is controlled. 1. The pressure oil flow diverges from port P into two routes, to the differential reducing valve and to chamber C through the spool. 2. As pressure P1 routed into chamber C increases, the spool is pushed to the left by pressure P1 force (pressure P1 × pressure receiving area S3). 3. Hydraulic oil tank is routed into chamber A so that the spool is pushed to the right by spring force in chamber A. 4. Pressure PLMAX from port PLMAX is routed into chamber B, increasing the pressure in chamber B so that the spool is pushed to the right by pressure force (pressure PLMAX × pressure receiving area S2). 5. The pressure forces pushing the spool from both ends is expressed as below: Spring force + Pressure PLMAX × Pressure Receiving Area S2 = Pressure P1 × Pressure Receiving Area S3 6. When pressure P1 increases until spool left pushing force (Pressure P1 × Pressure Receiving Area S3) overcomes spool right pushing force (Spring force + Pressure PLMAX × Pressure Receiving Area S2), the spool is moved to the left.
7. Then, notch D is opened, oil pressure P1 is routed to port T via the spool. The opening area at notch D varies in proportion to the spool stroke (depending on variations in the spool pushing force balance). 8. As pressure areas S2, and S3 are all identical, pressure P1 is maintained so as to match the formula “Pressure P1 = Pressure PLMAX + Spring force”. T Unload Valve
Pressure PLMAX Spring
Pressure P1
Pressure P1
T1M9-03-04-019
: Oil Pressure in the circuit before the spool Pressure PLMAX : Maximum oil pressure in all circuits after the spool Pressure PLS : Reduced pilot oil pressure at the differential reducing valve
T3-4-14
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve
Chamber A
Chamber B
S2
Port P (Pressure P1)
Differential Reducing Valve
Unload Valve
Spring
Port PLMAX (PLMAX Pressure)
Spool
Chamber C
S3
T1M9-03-04-015
Pressure P1
Port T (To Hydraulic Tank)
T3-4-15
Notch D
Spool
T1M9-03-04-016
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve DIFFERENTIAL REDUCING VALVE The differential reducing valve supplies pressure PLS to main pump valve PS to regulate the pump flow rate. 1. Oil pressure P1 from the main pump is routed into chamber C so that it acts on the piston, creating pressure force (pressure P1 × pressure receiving area S3) to move the spool to the left. 2. Oil pressure PLS from port PLS is routed into chamber A via the hole in the sleeve and the passage in the spool, creating pressure force (pressure PLS × pressure receiving area S1) to move the spool to the right. 3. Oil pressure PLMAX from port PLMAX is routed into chamber B, creating pressure force (pressure PLMAX × pressure receiving area S2) to move the spool to the right. 4. Accordingly, the spool moves so as to match the force balance as expressed in the formula below: Spool left pushing force (pressure P1× pressure receiving area S3) = Spool right pushing force [(pressure PLS × pressure receiving area S1) + (pressure PLMAX × pressure receiving area S2)] When the left pushing force is stronger: (Pressure P1× S3 > pressure PLS × S1) + pressure PLMAX × S2) 5. The spool is moved to the left. 6. As notch D is opened, pressure PP1 from the pilot pump is routed to chamber A and port PLS via notch D. 7. Notch E is closed, blocking port DR1 (return port to the hydraulic oil tank). 8. As described in step 4, the spool is moved so as to keep the force balance, pressure PP1 is routed to port PLS to control the pump so that pressure PLS increases.
When the right pushing force is stronger: (Pressure P1× S3 < pressure PLS × S1) + pressure PLMAX × S2) 9. The spool is moved to the right. 10. As notch D is closed, pressure PP1 from the pilot pump cannot go through notch D. Notch E is opened, the oil pressure in chamber A and from port PLS is routed into port DR1 via notch E. 11. As described in step 4, the spool is moved so as to keep the force balance, pressure PLS to control the pump is returned to the hydraulic oil tank that pressure PLS decreases. 12. According to the repeated operation as described in step 5 to 8 and 9 to 11, pressure PLS is maintained so as to match the pressure balance (PLS = P1 – PLMAX) as described in step 4 since S1, S2, and S3 are all identical. Pressure PP1
DR1
Pressure PLS Pressure P1
Pressure PLMAX
Pressure P1:
Differential Reducing Valve
T1M9-03-04-004
: Oil Pressure in the circuit before the spool Pressure PLS : Reduced pilot oil pressure at the differential reducing valve Pressure PLMAX : Maximum oil pressure in all circuits after the spool Pressure PP1 : Primary Pilot Oil Pressure
T3-4-16
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve
S2
S1
Piston
Chamber B
Chamber A
Sleeve
Spool
S3
Chamber C
Main Pump Delivery Pressure (P1) Port PLMAX (Pressure PLMAX)
Port PLS (Pressure PLS)
T566-03-03-030
When the left pushing force is stronger: Chamber A
Notch D
Notch E
Port PLMAX (Pressure PLMAX)
Port PLS (Pressure PLS)
Port PP1 (Pressure PP1)
T566-03-03-031
Port DR1 (Pressure DR1)
When the right pushing force is stronger: Chamber A
Notch D
Notch E
Port PLS (Pressure PLS)
Port PP1 (Pressure PP1)
T3-4-17
T566-03-03-032
Port DR1 (Pressure DR1)
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve PRESSURE COMPENSATOR The pressure compensator is located in the circuit before control valve spool (2). The pressure compensator regulates the oil flow rate passing through spool (2) so that the differential pressure in the circuit between before and rear spool (2) is kept constant. 1. Oil Pressure (PIN) in circuit (1) before spool (2) is routed into chamber C (5) via passage (6) in spool (2), creating force [pressure PIN × pressure receiving area S3 (4)] that moves spool (7) to the left against piston (3). 2. Oil pressure (PLS) from the differential reducing valve is routed into chamber B (9), creating force [pressure PLS × pressure receiving area S2 (8)] that moves spool (7) to the right. 3. Oil Pressure (PL) in circuit (12) after spool (2) is routed into chamber A (11), creating force [pressure PL × pressure receiving area S1 (10)] that moves spool (7) to the right. 4. Spool (7) is moved so that pressures PIN, PLS, and PL maintain the force balance as described in the formula below: Right pushing force [pressure PLS × pressure receiving area S2 (8)] + (pressure PL × pressure receiving area S1 (10))] = Left pushing force (pressure PIN × pressure receiving area S3 (4)) When the differential pressure between pressure (PIN) and pressure (PL) is higher than pressure PLS: 5. When the differential pressure between pressure (PIN) and pressure (PL) is higher than pressure PLS, left pushing force becomes stronger than right pushing force so that spool (7) is moved to the left. 6. Then, notch (13) becomes gradually narrower, reducing the hydraulic oil passing through notch (13) so that the pressure oil routed into circuit (1) before the spool is reduced. Therefore, pressure PIN decreases, causing the differential pressure between circuits (1 and 12) to reduce. 7. When spool pushing force on both sides becomes equal, spool (7) stops moving.
When the differential pressure between pressure (PIN) and pressure (PL) is lower than pressure PLS: 8. When the differential pressure between pressure (PIN) and pressure (PL) is lower than pressure PLS, right pushing force becomes stronger than left pushing force so that spool (7) is moved to the right. 9. Then, notch (13) becomes gradually wider, increasing the hydraulic oil passing through notch (13) so that the pressure oil routed into circuit (1) before the spool increases. Therefore, pressure PIN increases, causing the differential pressure between circuits (1 and 12) to increase. 10. When spool pushing forces on both sides becomes equal, spool (7) stops moving. Spool (7) keeps moving right and left while repeating operation in steps 5 to 7 and 8 to 9. 11. Thereby, the differential pressure between pressure PIN in before spool side circuit (1) and pressure PL after spool side (2) is kept equal to pressure PLS so that the hydraulic oil flow rate passing through spool (2) is maintained constant. Pressure Compensator
To the Control Valve Main Spool
Pressure PL
Pressure PLS Pressure PIN
Pressure PIN Pressure PLS Pressure PL
T3-4-18
T1M9-03-04-020
: Oil Pressure in the circuit before the spool : Reduced pilot oil pressure at the differential reducing valve : Oil pressure in the corresponding circuit after the spool
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve 1
2
12
Pressure PL
Pressure PIN
Pressure Compensator
11
10
9
8
7
6
5 4
3 T1M9-03-04-017
Pressure PLS
When the differential pressure is high:
1
2
3
12 Pressure Compensator
7 T1M9-03-04-018
When the differential pressure is low:
1
2
3
12 Pressure Compensator
T1M9-03-04-007
7 1234-
Circuit before spool Spool Piston Pressure receiving area S3
5 - Chamber C 6 - Passage 7 - Spool
8 - Pressure receiving area S2 9 - Chamber B 10 - Pressure receiving area S1
T3-4-19
11 - Chamber A 12 - Circuit after spool 13 - Notch
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve (Blank)
T3-4-20
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve OUTLINE The pilot valve controls the pilot pressure to move the control valve spools. The 4-port pilot valve is used for front attachment, swing, and travel operation. The 2-port pilot valve is used for blade and offset operation. The blade, boom swing and auxiliary (optional) pilot valves is the same in construction except for the cam which pushes the pusher.
• Front and Swing Pilot Valve Port No. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Right
Left
HITACHI Stan- ISO Standard dard Bucket Roll-Out ← Boom Lower ← Bucket Roll-In ← ← Boom Raise Arm Roll-In Swing Right Swing Right Arm Roll-Out Arm Roll-Out Swing Left Swing Left Arm Roll-In
P T1M9-03-05-001
A
4
View A
1
3 Hydraulic Symbol
T
T1M9-03-05-002
2 3
P T
1 2
4
4
PT
2 1
3 T1M7-03-04-001
• Travel Pilot Valve Port No. 1 2 3 4
Right Travel Reverse Right Travel Forward Left Travel Forward Left Travel Reverse P
T P
T T1M9-03-05-004
B View B
1
2 4
3
4
3 T1M9-03-05-006
2
1 T1M9-03-05-005
T3-5-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve • Boom Swing Pilot Valve (Optional) Port No. 1 2 3 4 -
Right Travel Reverse Right Travel Forward Left Travel Forward Left Travel Reverse Pressure Sensor P
T P
T Pressure Sensor T1M9-03-05-007
4
3 1
2
4
3 T1M7-03-04-020
Pressure Sensor
2 1
• Blade, Boom Swing, Auxiliary (Optional) Pilot Valve Port No. 1 2
T1M9-03-05-008
Blade Lower, Left Boom Swing Auxiliary (Optional) Blade Raise, Right Boom Swing Auxiliary (Optional) P T
T P
1
2
T1CF-03-04-001
T1CF-03-04-002
1
T3-5-2
2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve (Blank)
T3-5-3
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve OPERATION â&#x20AC;˘ Front Attachment and Swing Pilot Valve
Spool (6) head comes in contact with the upper face of spring guide (3) which is kept raised by return spring (5).
Control Lever-In Neutral (Output Diagram: A to B) 1. When neutral, spool (6) totally blocks pressure oil port P (from the pilot pump). The output port is opened to port T (hydraulic oil tank) through the passage in spool (6). Therefore, oil pressure in the output port (to the control valve) is equal to that in port T. 2. When the control lever is slightly tilted, cam (1) is tilted, moving pusher (2) downward. Then, pusher (2) compress return spring (5) along with spring guide (3). At this time, as oil pressure in the output port is equal to that in port T, spool (6) moves downward while keeping the under face of the spool head in contact with spring guide (3). 3. This status continues until hole (7) on spool (6) is opened to port P.
T3-5-4
D Pilot Pressure C
A
B
Lever Stroke
Output Diagram
T567-03-04-002
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve
1
2 3 4 5
6 Port T
7
Port P
Output Port T1M7-03-04-012
1 - Cam 2 - Pusher
3 - Spring Guide 4 - Balance Spring
5 - Return Spring 6 - Spool
T3-5-5
7 - Hole
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve During Metering or Decompressing (Output Diagram: C to D) 1. When the control lever is further tilted to move pusher (2) downward more, hole (7) on spool (6) is opened to port P, allowing pressure oil in port P to flow into the output port. 2. Oil pressure in the output port acts on the bottom face of spool (6) so that spool (6) is pushed upward. 3. However, until upward force acting on the bottom face of spool (6) overcomes balance spring (4) force, balance spring (4) is not compressed. Then, spool (6) is not raised, allowing oil pressure in the output port to increase. 4. As oil pressure in the output port increases, force to push spool (6) upward increases. When, this force overcomes balance spring (4) force, balance spring (4) is compressed so that spool (6) is moved upward. 5. As spool (6) is moved upward, hole (7) is closed so that pressure oil from port P stops flowing into the output port, stopping pressure oil in the output port to increase. 6. As spool (6) is moved downward, balance spring (4) is compressed, increasing the spring force. Therefore, oil pressure in the output port becomes equal to the oil pressure acting on the bottom face of spool (6) being balanced in position with the spring force.
T3-5-6
D Pilot Pressure C
A
B
Lever Stroke
Output Diagram
T567-03-04-002
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6 Port T
7
Port T
7
Port P
Output Port
Port P
Output Port T1M7-03-04-014
1 - Cam 2 - Pusher
3 - Spring Guide 4 - Balance Spring
5 - Return Spring 6 - Spool
T3-5-7
7 - Hole
T1M7-03-04-015
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve â&#x20AC;˘ Travel Pilot Valve
Control Lever-In Neutral (Pusher Stroke: A to B) When the control lever is in neutral, spool (6) blocks the pressure oil in port P completely. The output port is connected to port T through hole (7), so the pressure at output port becomes equal to the hydraulic oil tank pressure. When the control lever is moved slightly, pusher (2) and spring guides (3) move downward together, compressing return spring (5). At this time, as the pressure under spool (6) (output port) is equal to the hydraulic oil tank pressure, spool (6) moves downwards by balance spring (4), while the top of spool is kept with spring guide (3). This state is maintained until clearance (A) of spool (6) becomes zero.
Control Lever-Full Stroke (Pusher Stroke: E to F) When the control lever is moved to full stroke, pusher (2) compresses return spring (5) more and spool (6) is moved down. Thereby, spool (6) is pressed directly by the bottom of pusher (2). As a result, the lower hole (7) of spool (6) does not close even if the pressure at output port rises. As a result, the pressure at output port becomes equal to the pressure at port P.
Control Lever-Operated (Pusher Stroke: C to D Metering) When the control lever is moved further, hole (9) of spool (6) reaches port P. The pressure oil in port P flows into the output port via the passage in spool (6), so the pressure at output port increases. The pressure at output port acts on the bottom of spool (6), to push spool (6) upwards. If the acting force on spool (6) is smaller than the spring force of balance spring (4), balance spring (4) will not be pressed. As a result, spool (6) will not be pushed up, and the pressure at output port increases continuously. If the pressure at output port increases further, the force to push up spool (6) increases. When this force becomes larger than the spring force of balance spring (4), spool (6) pushes balance spring (4) and moves upwards. When spool (6) moves upwards, hole (7) closes, so the pressure oil does not flow into the output port from port P. Thereby, the pressure at output port stops raising. Accordingly, the amount the balance spring (4) is compressed is equal to the amount spool (6) is pressed down, so the balanced pressure between the spring force and the force acting on spool (6) becomes the pressure at output port.
T3-5-8
E
Delivery Port Pressure (Pilot Pressure)
F
D C A B Pusher Stroke
Output Diagram
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve Pusher Stroke: A to B 1 2
3 4 5 6 Port T (A)
(A)
Port P
7 Output Port
T1M7-03-04-016
Pusher Stroke: C to D
T1M7-03-04-017
Pusher Stroke: E to F
2 2
4
6
Port P
Output Port
1 - Cam 2 - Pusher
34-
Port T
6
Port T
Port P
7
Output Port T1M7-03-04-018
Spring Guide Balance Spring
56-
T3-5-9
Return Spring Spool
7-
Hole
T1M7-03-04-019
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve â&#x20AC;˘ Boom Swing, Blade and Auxiliary (Optional)
Control Pedal-In Neutral (Pusher Stroke: A to B) When the control pedal is in neutral, spool (7) blocks the pressure oil in port P completely. The output port is connected to port T through the passage in spool (7), so the pressure at output port becomes equal to the hydraulic oil tank pressure. When the control pedal is moved slightly, cam (1) moves and pusher (2) and spring guide (4) move downward together, compressing return spring (6), At this time, balance spring (5) pushes spool (7) and spool (7) moves downward until clearance (A) becomes ZERO. While spool (7) moves downward, the output port is connected to port T and the pressure oil does not flow into the output port. NOTE: The pedal stroke moved until clearance (A) becomes zero, corresponds to the pedal play in the neutral position. Control Pedal-Operated (Pusher Stroke: C to D Metering) When the control pedal is moved further, the hole on spool (7) is connected to notch. The pressure oil in port P flows into the output port via the hole in spool (7) from notch, so the pressure at output port increases. The pressure at output port acts on the bottom of spool (7), to push spool (7) upwards. If the acting force on spool (7) is smaller than the spring force of balance spring (5), balance spring (5) will not be pressed. As a result, as port P is connected to the output port, the pressure at output port increases continuously. If the pressure at output port increases further, the force to push up spool (7) increases. When this force becomes larger than the spring force of balance spring (5), spool (7) pushes balance spring (5), and moves upwards. When spool (7) moves upwards, notch (B) closes, so the pressure oil does not flow into the output port from port P. Thereby, the pressure at port P stops raising. Accordingly, the amount balance spring (5) is compressed is equal to the amount spool (7) is pressed down, so the balanced pressure between the spring force and the force acting on spool (7) becomes the pressure at output port.
T3-5-10
D Pilot Pressure C
A
B
Lever Stroke
Output Diagram
T567-03-04-002
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve Pusher Stroke: A to B
1 2
4 3
5 Port T Port T
6
Clearance (A): 0 Port P
(A) Port P Hole
7
Passage
Output Port Output Port
T1M7-03-04-008
Pusher Stroke: C to D
5 Port T
Port P Hole
7
Output Port 1 - Cam 2 - Pusher
3 - Plate 4 - Spring Guide
T1M7-03-04-022
5 - Balance Spring 6 - Return Spring
T3-5-11
7 - Spool
T1M7-03-04-021
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve SHOCKLESS FUNCTION TRAVEL PILOT VALVE)
(ONLY
FOR
Damper Spring Pin
Travel Pedal
A
The travel pilot valve has the damper enabling damping of the speed change shock by the lever. The damper is composed of the support, gears 1 and 2, and others. Gear 1 is connected with the support. The support is secure to the bracket with the spring pin. And the travel lever and the travel pedal are secure to the bracket. At this time, support sway transversely around the pin in line with the movement of the travel lever.
Travel Lever Support Bracket Pin Gear 2 A Gear 1
Operation 1. If the travel lever is released from the hand during traveling, return force of the return spring returns the travel lever to the neutral position. 2. At this time, gears 1 and 2 inside the damper receive opposing force due to friction. 3. Therefore, the travel lever gradually returns to the neutral position, thus moderating the extent of sudden stop at the time of abrupt release of the travel lever.
T1M7-03-04-002
Section A-A Spring Pin
Damper Support
Pin T1M7-03-04-003
T3-5-12
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve SHUTTLE VALVE (ONLY FOR TRAVEL PILOT VALVE)
Travel Pilot Valve
The shuttle valve is for selecting necessary pilot pressure for traveling, and leads high pressure to the pressure sensors.
T1M9-03-05-009
To Pressure Sensor
T3-5-13
Shuttle Valve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve (Blank)
T3-5-14
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device OUTLINE The travel device consists of travel motor, travel reduction gear and travel brake valve. The travel motor is a variable displacement axial plunger swash plate type. The travel motor is equipped with a parking brake (wet single negative type). The motor is operated by pressure oil from the pump, and transmits the rotation to the travel reduction gear.
The travel reduction gear is a two-stage planetary gear reduction type, reducing travel motor speed, increasing travel motor torque, and allowing the sprocket and track to rotate. The travel brake valve functions to protect the travel circuit.
Travel Brake Valve
Travel Device
T1LD-03-05-001
Travel Motor
T3-6-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device TRAVEL REDUCTION GEAR The travel motor rotates shaft (1), and the rotation is transmitted to first stage sun gear (5). The rotation of first stage sun gear (5) is reduced by first stage planetary gear (4) and first stage carrier (6), and is transmitted to second stage sun gear (8). The rotation of second stage sun gear (8) is reduced by second stage planetary gear (3) and second stage carrier (2) (united with the travel motor housing).
As second stage carrier (2) and travel motor housing is united into one part, the rotation of second stage planetary gear (3) is transmitted to the sprocket via the ring gear.
1
2
3
4
5
7 1 - Shaft 2 - Second Stage Carrier
8
3 - Second Stage Planetary Gear 4 - First Stage Planetary Gear
5 - First Stage Sun Gear 6 - First Stage Carrier
T3-6-2
6
T1LD-03-05-001
7 - Ring Gear 8 - Second Stage Sun Gear
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device TRAVEL MOTOR The travel motor consists of valve plate, rotor, plungers, shoes, swash plate and shaft. The rotor is connected to the shaft by a spline joint, and the plungers are inserted in the rotor.
Valve Plate
When the pressure oil is supplied from the pump, the plungers are pushed. The swash plate is installed at an angle toward the plungers, the shoe slides on the swash plate, so the rotor rotates. This rotation is transmitted to the travel reduction gear via the shaft.
Travel Motor
Swash plate
Shaft
T1LD-03-05-001
Rotor
Plunger
T3-6-3
Shoe
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE The travel brake valve consists of a counterbalance valve, an anti-cavitation valve and a travel speed changeover valve. The counterbalance valve has two functions; one is to allow the machine to smoothly start and stop traveling and the other is to prevent the machine from running away while descending slopes.
The anti-cavitation valve reduces occurrence of cavitation in motor when the motor is stopped. The travel speed changeover valve is shifted by pressure oil from the travel speed changeover solenoid valve, moving the control piston to change the travel mode.
Travel Brake Valve
B
A
B A
Anti-Cavitation Valve
Control Piston
Counterbalance Valve
T1LD-03-05-001
Anti-Cavitation Valve (Section B-B)
Counterbalance Valve (Section A-A) Counterbalance Valve
T1LD-03-05-010
T1LD-03-05-009
Travel Speed Selector Valve
T3-6-4
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device Counterbalance Valve
â&#x20AC;˘ Travel Operation 1. When the pressure oil from control valve is supplied to port P1, the pressure oil flows to motor port M1 through inside of the spool and opens the check valve. 2. On the other hand, the return oil from motor port M2 is blocked by the check valve and spool. NOTE: The travel parking brake of the travel motor is also working in this condition. 3. Thereby, the pressure at port P1 side increases gradually, so the pressure at port P1 enters into the spring chamber from the orifice, and moves the spool to the right acting on the end surface of spool. 4. As a result, the spool notch opens and port M2 and port P2 connect, so the travel motor rotates.
â&#x20AC;˘ Descending Operation 1. When the machine travels down a slope, the travel motors are forcibly driven by the machine weight, so that the motor draws oil like a pump. 2. The pressure oil in port P1 is drawn into the travel motor, so the pressure at port P1 decreases. 3. Thereby, the spool returns to the left, and the return oil from port M2 to port P2 is restricted, so the oil pressure brake is activated. 4. When the return oil from port M2 is restricted, the pressure at port P1 increases again and moves the spool to the right, so the motor rotates.
Control Valve
Spool Orifice P1
P2
Orifice Spring Chamber
Spring Chamber
M2
M1
Check Valve
Check Valve Travel Speed Selector Valve
T1LD-03-05-009
T3-6-5
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device Anti-Cavitation Valve The anti-cavitation valve consists of spool, passage A, passage B and passage C.
â&#x20AC;˘ When traveling NOTE: Refer to Counterbalance Valve (T3-6-5) for counterbalance valve operation. The anti-cavitation valve does not operate during normal travel motor operation. 1. Pressure oil from port P1 flows to port M1 through the counterbalance. At the same time, it flows to the chamber A through passage B. Thus, pressure oil coming from port P1 and acting in chamber A causes spool to move to the right. 2. Accordingly, passage A to C is closed and the return oil from port M2 returns to port P2 through the counterbalance.
P1
P2 Counterbalance Valve
M1
M2
Passage A Passage B Passage C
Chamber A Spool
(High Pressure)
(Low Pressure)
T1LD-03-05-002
T3-6-6
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device â&#x20AC;˘ When traveling is stopped NOTE: Refer to Counterbalance Valve (T3-6-5) for counterbalance valve operation. 1. As pressure oil from port P1 decreases, the counterbalance valve gradually returns to the neutral. 2. Travel inertia forces the travel motor to rotate so that the motor works as a pump. 3. Accordingly, the pressure in port M2 increases and that in port M1 decreases. 4. Passage C is connected to port M2 so that the pressure is high. Passage A is connected to port M1 so that the pressure is low.
5. Pressure oil from port M2 flows through orifice C of counterbalance valve to passage C and to chamber B, causing spool to move to the left. 6. When spool moves to the left, passages C and A are connected through cutoff of spool, causing pressure oil to flow from port M2 to port M1. 7. This operation reduces the occurrence of cavitation in the motor when traveling is stopped.
Orifice C P1
Counterbalance Valve
P2
M1
M2
Passage C
Passage B
Passage A Chamber B
Spool
T1LD-03-05-003
T3-6-7
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device PARKING BRAKE The parking brake is a wet-type single disc brake. The brake is a negative type so that it is released only when the brake release pressure oil is routed into the brake piston chamber. Applying Brake When the travel stops, the pressure oil acting on the brake piston is returned to the drain circuit through counter balance valve. The spring pushes the brake piston, the friction plates and the plates. Therefore, the friction plates touch the plates tightly, so that the brake is applied.
Releasing Brake During the travel operation, the travel motor pressure flows into the brake piston chamber through counter balance valve and overcomes the spring force, causing the brake piston to move. Therefore, the friction plates and the plates to be freed each other so that the brake is released. Flow the Travel Motor Pressure (Brake Release Pressure Oil)
When Releasing Brake
Brake Piston Chamber Brake Piston Plate
Rotor
Spring To Drain Circuit When Applying Brake
T3-6-8
Friction Plate T1LD-03-05-004
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device (Blank)
T3-6-9
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device Motor Swash Angle (Travel Mode) Control The swash plate angle is changed by moving the control piston to control the motor rotation speed. When the swash plate is in the maximum angle position, the motor runs at slow speed and in the minimum angle position at fast speed. The maximum swash plate angle (slow) is automatically selected if travel load increases more than the specified value when the motor is running at the minimum swash angle (fast).
â&#x20AC;˘ Maximum Swash Angle (Slow Motor Speed) 1. At slow speed mode, pilot pressure from travel mode solenoid valve does to come to pilot port Ps. Thus, spool moves to the left due to motor load pressure Pin acting in chamber A plus spring force. 2. As a result, ports M1 and M2 of travel speed selector valve on its high-pressure side and low-pressure side are blocked by spool 1. NOTE: When motor is in action, pressure oils from both high and low pressure sides always act to travel speed selector valve. 3. Therefore, pressure oil does not flow to control piston. 4. Consequently, the swash plate angle increases so that the plunger stroke is extended, increasing the motor displacement. Then, the motor runs at slow speed.
T3-6-10
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device At Slow Speed: Port M1
Negative Pressure Pin in Motor
Port M2
Spool
Pilot Port Ps
Travel Speed Selector Valve Spring
Chamber A
T1LD-03-05-005
Spool 1
Swash Plate
Control Piston
Plunger
T3-6-11
T1LD-03-05-007
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device â&#x20AC;˘ Minimum Swash Angle (Fast Motor Speed) 1. When pressing fast travel speed mode switch, pressure oil flows from travel mode solenoid valve into pilot port Ps of travel speed selection valve. 2. Then, spool in travel speed selector valve moves to the right. 3. As a result, pressure oils from ports M1 and M2 on high and low pressure sides come to control piston through the rear side of spool. 4. Control piston presses swash plate, causing upper surface of swash plate to contact housing. 5. Consequently, the swash plate angle decreases so that the plunger stroke is retracted, decreasing the motor displacement. Then, the motor runs at fast speed.
T3-6-12
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device Negative Pressure Port M1 Pin in Motor Port M2
At Fast Speed:
Piston
Pilot Port Ps (From Travel Mode Solenoid Valve)
Spool
Spring
Travel Speed Selector Valve
T1LD-03-05-006
Swash Plate
Control Piston
Plunger
T3-6-13
T1LD-03-05-008
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device • Auto Swash Angle Control (Fast → Slow) At fast speed position (at small swash plate angle), switching to slow speed position (at large swash plate angle) is made automatically due to motor load. 1. When traveling at fast speed, the motor load pressure Pin acts in the oil chamber composed of the spool and piston, and pushes the spool left. If the motor load pressure increases, this force becomes larger. 2. When the force (the sum of force due to negative pressure pin in motor × pressurized area of piston and spring force), which moves spool to the left, exceeds the force due to pressure oil from travel mode solenoid valve × pressurized area of spool, which moves spool to the right, spool moves to the left. 3. Pressure oils from ports M1 and M2 are blocked with spool. Thus, pressure oil does not come to control piston. 4. Pressure oil acting on control piston is returned to hydraulic oil tank. 5. Consequently, the swash plate angle increases so that the plunger stroke is extended, increasing the motor displacement. Then, the motor runs at slow speed. 6. Also, if the motor load pressure Pin lowers resulting in the condition of [(motor pressure Pin x pressurized area of piston) + spring force] < [pressure from travel speed changeover solenoid valve x pressurized area of spool], the spool moves right again, and the motor runs at fast speed.
T3-6-14
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device At Fast Speedâ&#x2020;&#x2019;Slow Speed: Pressurized Area of Spool
Negative Port Pressurized Area M2 of Piston Chamber A Port Pressure M1 Pin in Motor To Hydraulic Oil Tank
Piston
To Hydraulic Oil Tank
Pilot Port Ps (From Travel Mode Solenoid Valve)
Spool
Spring
Travel Speed Selector Valve
T1LD-03-05-005
Swash Plate
Control Piston
Plunger
T3-6-15
T1LD-03-05-007
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device (Blank)
T3-6-16
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure) 2-UNIT SOLENOID VALVE The solenoid valves are provided as follows. The pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve for switching ON/OFF of pilot pressure and the travel speed changeover solenoid valve for travel speed mode selection are contained in the 2-unit solenoid valve. And also provided is the torque control solenoid valve for the air conditioner of a cab version machine. Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve 1. The solenoid valve is switched ON/OFF by the position of pilot control shut-off lever to control the pilot pressure to pilot valve. 2. When the pilot control shut-off lever is in the LOCK position, the pilot shut-off switch is OFF. 3. By this action, the solenoid valve is OFF, so that pilot pressure is blocked by the solenoid valve spool. 4. As a consequence, the pressure oil is not delivered to the pilot valve. 5. When the pilot control shut-off lever is in the UNLOCK position, the pilot shut-off switch is ON. 6. By this action, the solenoid valve is ON, so the pilot pressure is supplied to the pilot valve through the solenoid valve spool. Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve 1. The travel speed is controlled by the travel speed mode selector switch. 2. When the travel speed mode selector switch is in the slow speed position, the travel speed changeover mode selector is OFF. By this action, the solenoid valve is OFF, so that pilot pressure is blocked by the solenoid valve spool. 3. As a consequence, the travel speed changeover pressure is not delivered to the travel motor. 4. When the travel speed mode selector switch is in the fast speed position, the travel speed mode selector switch is ON. By this action, the solenoid valve is ON, so that pilot pressure is delivered to the travel motor as the travel mode pressure through the solenoid valve spool. NOTE: Both of above solenoid valves are same mechanism.
Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve
Travel Mode Solenoid Valve
To Pilot Valve
To Travel Motor
T1LA-03-06-001
Pilot Control Shut-Off Lever
Pilot Shut-Off Switch
T532-02-06-002
Travel Speed Mode Selector Switch
T1M9-01-02-002
T3-7-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure) Torque Control Solenoid Valve (Cab Version machine only) 1. When the air conditioner is OFF, ports A and T are connected. 2. If the air conditioner is switched ON, the solenoid valve is excited, and the spool is pushed down. 3. By this action, ports P and A are connected, and pressure oil is delivered from port A. The pressure oil acts on the control piston inside the main pump, thus decreasing the main pump swash plate tilting. Port P
Port T T1M9-03-07-003
Spool
Port A
Spring
T3-7-2
T1M9-03-07-004
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure) PILOT RELIEF VALVE
Spring
The pilot circuit of solenoid valve unit has a pilot relief valve, preventing the circuit pressure from rising more than the set pressure. The pressure oil from pilot pump always acts on the relief cap. When this pressure increases more than the set pressure (by spring force), the relief cap is moved, allowing the pressure oil to be relieved through the passage in the relief cap.
To Hydraulic Oil Tank
From Pilot Pump
Relief Cap
BACK PRESSURE VALVE Body
In the return line (control valve to oil cooler) of the main circuit, the back pressure valve is provided. The back pressure valve keeps pressure in the return line of the main circuit at a constant value (0.3 MPa), and has the improved make-up function.
Check Valve
Spring
Spring Support
T1LA-03-06-002
Snap Ring
IN OUT
T1M9-03-07-001
T3-7-3
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure) AUXILIARY FLOW SELECTOR VALVE (OPTIONAL) The auxiliary flow selector valve is composed of the flow selector solenoid valve and the pressure reducing valve, and is installed in the auxiliary pilot control circuit (manifold port P to auxiliary pilot valve port P). If the auxiliary flow selector switch is turned ON, the solenoid valve is excited, and delivers pilot pressure to the auxiliary pilot valve after reducing it to the set value. Operation: 1. When the solenoid valve is OFF, the pilot pressure oil coming from port P flows in to the passage and spring chamber. 2. At this time, the spring force and pressure oil act on the upper end of spool B, and pressure oil only acts on the lower end. 3. By this action, spool B is pressed downward, and the pressure oil is kept unchanged, and outputted from port A. 4. If the solenoid valve is switched ON, spool A moves downward, and as the oil for the spring chamber is blocked by spool A, the pressure oil from port P flows into the passage only. 5. At this time, the pressure oil in the spring chamber flows to the hydraulic oil tank through the notched part of spool A. 6. By this action, the spring force is the only force acting on the upper end of spool B, and spool B moves upward receiving pressure from port A. 7. Then, within spool B, the circuit of A to spring chamber to port T is made, reducing the pressure of port A. 8. By this action, spool B moves downward again by the spring force. 9. By repeating actions like these, the pilot pressure oil from port P is delivered to the auxiliary pilot valve from port A after being reduced to the set value.
Port T
Spring Chamber
Spool A Spool B Port P Port A
Line
T1M9-03-07-005
Port T
Spring Chamber
Spool A Spool B Port P Port A
Passage
Port T
T1M9-03-07-006
Spring Chamber
Spool B
A Port P View A Port A T1M9-03-07-007
T3-7-4
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Undercarriage) SWING BEARING The swing bearing supports the upperstructure on the undercarriage and allows the upperstructure to rotate smoothly. The swing bearing is a single-row ball-type. The major parts of swing bearing are outer race (1), inner race (2) with internal gear, ball (5), support (4) and seal (3).
Outer race (1) is bolted to the upperstructure. Inner race (2) is bolted to the undercarriage. The internal gear meshes with the pinion of the swing device.
1
4 2
3
5
T507-03-02-001
1 - Outer Race 2 - Inner Race
3 - Seal
4 - Support
T3-8-1
5 - Ball
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Undercarriage) CENTER JOINT Body (5) rotates together with the upperstructure around spindle (10) during swing operation. Oil flows into and through the passages in body (5) to spindle (10) and then out of spindle (10) to travel motor (12) and blade cylinder (13). Oil seal (11) prevents oil leaks from the clearance between spindle (10) and body (5).
The center joint is a 360° rotating joint. It allows oil to flow to and from travel motors (12) and blade cylinder (13) without twisting hoses when the upperstructure is rotated. Spindle (10) is fastened to the undercarriage with bolts (4 used) and body (5) is fastened to the upperstructure with lock pins.
DR A B C D E F G
1
9
4
6
13
2 8
7
3
G F E
A B C D DR
2
Hydraulic Circuit
1
7
8 9
6
4
3
12
T1M9-03-08-002
T3-8-2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Undercarriage) B View B
4
9
3 3
8
1
2
7
7
5
A
4
6 6
D
Mounting face to the track frame
2
11
4 10 1 9
8
A
Cross Section A-A T1M9-03-08-001
View C C
1 - Port F (Blade Lower) / Pressure Oil from Port F 2 - Port E (Blade Raise) / Pressure Oil from Port E 3 - Port G (for Travel Speed Changeover) / Pressure Oil from Port G 4 - Port DR (Drain) / Pressure Oil from Port DR
5 - Body 6 - Port A (Right Travel Forward) / Pressure Oil from Port A 7 - Port B (Right Travel Reverse) / Pressure Oil from Port B
T3-8-3
8 - Port C (Left Travel Forward) / Pressure Oil from Port C 9 - Port D (Left Travel Reverse) / Pressure Oil from Port D 10 - Spindle
11 - Seal 12 - Travel Motor 13 - Blade Cylinder
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Undercarriage) TRACK ADJUSTER The track adjuster located on the side frame is composed of spring (5) and adjuster cylinder (4). Spring (5) absorbs loads applied to the front idler. Adjuster cylinder (4) adjusts track sag.
â&#x20AC;˘ Grease is applied through the grease fitting into
chamber (B) of adjuster cylinder (4) as illustrated below. The pressure of the grease pushes piston rod (3) out and decreases track sag. â&#x20AC;˘ To increase track sag, loosen valve (2) 1 to 1.5 turns counterclockwise to release grease from the track adjuster cylinder through the grease discharge outlet.
Grease Discharge Outlet
Grease Fitting
M1LA-07-036
1
2 Section A-A
B A
3
4
5
A
6
Grease Discharge Outlet
T1LD-03-08-001
1 - Nut 2 - Valve
34-
Piston Rod Adjuster Cylinder
5-
T3-8-4
Spring
6-
Bracket
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
SECTION 4
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CONTENTS Group 1 Introduction
Group 5 Component Test
Operational Performance Test.................... T4-1-1
Primary Pilot Pressure .................................. T4-5-1
Preparation for Performance Tests ............. T4-1-2
Secondary Pilot Pressure ............................. T4-5-2 Main Relief Valve Set Pressure .................... T4-5-3
Group 2 Standard Operational Performance Standard...............T4-2-1 Main Pump P-Q Diagram ..............................T4-2-5
Group 3 Engine Test
Overload Relief Valve Set Pressure.............. T4-5-6 Swing Motor Drainage .................................. T4-5-8 Travel Motor Drainage ................................ T4-5-10 Revolution Sensing Valve
Engine Speed ................................................T4-3-1
Output Pressure........................................ T4-5-12
Engine Compression Pressure......................T4-3-2
Pump Delivery Pressure ............................. T4-5-14
Valve Clearance ............................................T4-3-4
Pump Driving Torque .................................. T4-5-16
Nozzle Check ................................................T4-3-6
Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve
Injection Timing .............................................T4-3-8
Pressure (Optional) ................................... T4-5-17
Group 6 Adjustment
Group 4 Excavator Test Travel Speed .................................................T4-4-1
Governor Adjustment .................................... T4-6-1
Track Revolution Speed ................................T4-4-2 Mistrack Check..............................................T4-4-3 Travel Motor Leakage....................................T4-4-4 Swing Speed..................................................T4-4-5 Swing Function Drift Check ...........................T4-4-6 Swing Motor Leakage....................................T4-4-7 Maximum Swingable Slant Angle ..................T4-4-8 Swing Bearing Play........................................T4-4-9 Hydraulic Cylinder Cycle Time.....................T4-4-10 Dig Function Drift.........................................T4-4-12 Control Lever Operating Force....................T4-4-13 Control Lever Stroke....................................T4-4-14 Combined Boom Raise/Swing Function Check..........................................T4-4-15
1M9T-4-1
(Blank)
1M9T-4-2
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Introduction OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST Use operational performance test procedure to quantitatively check all system and functions on the machine. Purpose of Performance Tests 1. To comprehensively evaluate each operational function by comparing the performance test data with the standard values. 2. According to the evaluation results, repair, adjust, or replace parts or components as necessary to restore the machine’s performance to the desired standard. 3. To economically operate the machine under optimal conditions.
Definition of “Allowable Limit” 1. Normal machine performance cannot be accomplished after exceeding this limit.
Kinds of Tests 1. Base machine performance test is to check the operational performance of each system such as engine, travel, swing, and hydraulic cylinders. 2. Hydraulic component unit test is to check the operational performance of each component such as hydraulic pump, motor, and various kinds of valves. Performance Standards “Performance Standard” is shown in tables to evaluate the performance test data. Precautions for Evaluation of Test Data 1. To evaluate not only that the test data are correct, but also in what range the test data are. 2. Be sure to evaluate the test data based on the machine operation hours, kinds and state of work loads, and machine maintenance conditions. The machine performance does not always deteriorate as the working hours increase. However, the machine performance is normally considered to reduce in proportion to the increase of the operation hours. Accordingly, restoring the machine performance by repair, adjustment, or replacement shall consider the number of the machine’s working hours. Definition of “Performance Standard” 1. Operation speed values and dimensions of the new machine. 2. Operational performance of new components adjusted to specifications. Allowable errors will be indicated as necessary.
T4-1-1
2. Repair or adjustment is impossible after exceeding this limit. 3. Therefore, in consideration of operation efficiency and maintenance expense, proper maintenance shall be carried out before reaching the “Allowable Limit”.
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Introduction PREPARATION TESTS
FOR
PERFORMANCE
Observe the following rules in order to carry out performance tests accurately and safely. THE MACHINE 1. Repair any defects and damage found, such as oil or water leaks, loose bolts, cracks and so on, before starting to test. TEST AREA 1. Select a hard and flat surface. 2. Secure enough space to allow the machine to run straight more than 20 m (65 ft 7 in), and to make a full swing with the front attachment extended. 3. If required, rope off the test area and provide signboards to keep unauthorized personnel away. PRECAUTIONS 1. Before starting to test, agree upon the signals to be employed for communication among coworkers. Once the test is started, be sure to communicate with each other using these signals, and to follow them without fail. 2. Operate the machine carefully and always give first priority to safety. 3. While testing, always take care to avoid accidents due to landslides or contact with high-voltage power lines. Always confirm that there is sufficient space for full swings. 4. Avoid polluting the machine and the ground with leaking oil. Use oil pans to catch escaping oil. Pay special attention to this when removing hydraulic pipings. MAKE PRECISE MEASUREMENT 1. Accurately calibrate test instruments in advance to obtain correct data. 2. Carry out tests under the exact test conditions prescribed for each test item. 3. Repeat the same test and confirm that the test data obtained can be produced repeatedly. Use mean values of measurements if necessary.
T4-1-2
T105-06-01-003
T505-06-01-003
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard OPERATIONAL DARD
PERFORMANCE
STANThe value in ( ) is shown for reference only. * The standard measurement condition is as follows; Engine Speed Control Lever: Full Stroke Hydraulic Oil Temperature: 50±5 °C (122±9 °F)
This Operational Performance Standard values are listed below. Refer to the correspondence section in T4-3 and after for the details of measurement method.
Item
ZAXIS40U-2
ENGINE SPEED min Slow Idle Speed Fast Idle Speed Fast Idle Speed (Bucket Relief Operation) Fast Idle Speed (Boom Relief Operation) ENGINE COMPRESSION PRESSURE MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)
ZAXIS50U-2
VALVE CLEARANCE (IN, EX) NOZZLE INJECTION PRESSURE
mm
MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)
INJECTION TIMING (Fuel Pump Mounting Standard Angle) deg. TRAVEL SPEED Fast Speed Mode (Rubber Crawler/Steel Crawler) Slow Speed Mode (Rubber Crawler/Steel Crawler) TRACK REVOLUTION SPEED Fast Speed Mode (Rubber Crawler/Steel Crawler) Slow Speed Mode (Rubber Crawler/Steel Crawler) MISTRACK (Fast Speed・Slow Speed) TRAVEL MOTOR LEAKAGE SWING SPEED SWING FUNCTION DRIFT SWING MOTOR LEAKAGE MAXIMUM SWINGABLE SLANT ANGLE SWING BEARING PLAY
← ← ← ←
1150±50 2650±50 2550±50 2550±50 3.43±0.1 (35±1, 499±14.5)
←
0.2±0.05
←
19.6 to 20.6 (200 to 210, 2849 to 2995)
←
25°
←
16.0±1.5 / 17.2±1.5 25.7±1.5 / 27.6±1.5
← Refer to T4-4-2
11.3±1.5 / 11.9±1.5 19.6±1.5 / 20.7±1.5
sec/3 rev. mm/90° mm/5 min
deg. mm
Refer to T4-3-8
←
sec/3 rev.
mm/3 min
After engine warm-up Refer to T4-3-2 With engine cold Refer to T4-3-4 Refer to T4-3-6
Refer to T4-4-1
sec/20 m
mm/20 m
Remarks Refer to T4-3-1
-1
← ←
200 or less
←
0 19.3±1.5 163 or less
← ← ←
0
←
21 or more
20 or more
0.4 or less
←
T4-2-1
Refer to T4-4-3 Refer to T4-4-4 Refer to T4-4-5 Refer to T4-4-6 Bucket loaded Refer to T4-4-7 Bucket loaded Refer to T4-4-8 Refer to T4-4-9
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard
Item HYDRAULIC CYLINDER CYCLE TIME Boom Raise (Canopy Version) Boom Lower (Canopy Version) Arm Roll-In Arm Roll-Out Bucket Roll-In Bucket Roll-Out Right Boom Swing Left Boom Swing Blade Raise Blade Lower DIG FUNCTION DRIFT
Arm Lever (ISO Lever Pattern: Swing) Bucket Lever Swing Lever (ISO Lever Pattern: Arm)
Boom Swing Pedal
2.0±0.3 2.6±0.3 2.6±0.5 2.1±0.3 2.3±0.3 1.7±0.3 7.0±0.5 7.0±0.5 2.5±0.5 3.1±0.5
2.2±0.3 3.0±0.3 2.7±0.5 2.2±0.3 2.6±0.3 1.8±0.3 ← ← 2.5 ± 0.6 3.1 ± 0.6
Remarks Refer to T4-4-10
Bucket loaded Refer to T4-4-12
mm/5 min
Boom Lever
Blade Lever
ZAXIS50U-2
sec
Boom Cylinder Arm Cylinder Bucket Cylinder Bucket Bottom Blade Cylinder Blade Cylinder (When jacked up) Boom Swing Cylinder CONTROL LEVER/PEDAL N (kgf, lbf) OPERATING FORCE
Travel Lever
ZAXIS40U-2
5 or less 8 or less 5 or less 100 or less 3 or less 15 or less 3 or less
← ← ← ← ← ← ← HITACHI Lever Pattern Refer to T4-4-13
11.0 or less (1.1, 2.5 or less) 11.0 or less (1.1, 2.5 or less) 11.0 or less (1.1, 2.5 or less) 11.0 or less (1.1, 2.5 or less) 17.0 or less (1.7, 3.8 or less) 19.0 or less (1.9, 4.3 or less) 54.0 or less (5.5, 12.2 or less)
T4-2-2
← ← ← ← ← ← ←
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard
Item
ZAXIS40U-2
ZAXIS50U-2
HITACHI Lever Pattern Refer to T4-4-14
CONTROL LEVER/PEDAL STROKE mm (in)
Boom Lever Arm Lever (ISO Lever Pattern: Swing) Bucket Lever Swing Lever (ISO Lever Pattern: Arm) Travel Lever Blade Lever Boom Swing Pedal BOOM RAISE/SWING (Bucket Empty) Height mm Time sec
100±10 (3.9±0.4) 95±10 (3.7±0.4) 95±10 (3.7±0.4) 100±10 (3.9±0.4) 100±10 (3.9±0.4) 55±10 (2.2±0.4) 18±5 (0.7±0.2)
← ← ← ← ← ← ←
3000 or more 2.3±0.3
← ←
PRIMARY PILOT PRESSURE MPa (kgf/cm2, psi) SECONDARY PILOT PRESSURE MPa (kgf/cm2, psi) MAIN RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)
6.6±0.5 (67±5, 960±73) 2.9±0.5 (30±5, 422±73)
Refer to T4-4-15
Travel
Swing
← ←
SWING MOTOR DRAINAGE
← ←
TRAVEL MOTOR DRAINAGE at constant speed (Fast/Slow)
Measure at Bench Refer to T4-5-6 26.5±1(270±10, 3852±145)
← Refer to T4-5-8
L/min (gal)
0.5 or less (0.1 or less)
at constant speed
Refer to T4-5-2
←
OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE MPa (kgf/cm2, psi) Boom, Arm, Bucket
Refer to T4-5-1
Measure at Machine Refer to T4-5-3 25.3±1.0 (258±10, 3678±145) 25.5±1.0 (260±10, 3707±145) 21.6±1.0 (220±10, 3140±145)
Main Pumps P1
Remarks
← Refer to T4-5-10
L/min (gal)
0.3 or less / 0.2 or less (0.08 or less / 0.05 or less)
T4-2-3
←
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard
Item
ZAXIS40U-2
ZAXIS50U-2
Remarks Measure at bench Refer to T4-5-12
REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE (Pressure PGR) MPa (kgf/cm2, psi)
Fast Idle Slow Idle PUMP DELIVERY PRESSURE MPa (kgf/cm2, psi) (Lever in Neutral) Fast Idle Slow Idle
1.96 (20, 285) 0.49 (5.0, 71)
← ←
Reference Reference Refer to T4-5-14
3.1 (31.8, 451) 2.3 (23.3, 334)
← ←
Reference Reference
T4-2-4
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard MAIN PUMP P-Q DIAGRAM • P-Q control (Torque control) (Reference: Calculated Valve) • Rated Pump Speed: 2500 min-1 (rpm) • Hydraulic Oil Temperature: 50±5 °C (122±41 °F) • Pilot Pump Pressure: 5.9 MPa (60 kgf/cm2, 858 psi)
• P-Q Point
• P-Q Point (Air conditioner: ON
(Air conditioner: OFF (PC Pressure = 0 MPa)) Delivery Pressure Flow Rate 2 MPa (kgf/cm , psi) L/min (GPM) A 1.96 (20, 285) 126 (33.2) B 4.6 (47, 669) 125 (33) C 6.67 (68, 970) [121.5] [(32)] D 8.7 (88.7, 1265) 116.5 (30.7) E 16.67 (170, 2473) [70] [(18.5)] F 24.5 (250, 3562) 47.5 (12.5) The valve indicated in [ ] is only a reference valve.
2
(PC pressure = 3.9 MPa (40 kgf/cm , 567 psi)) Delivery Pressure Flow Rate 2 MPa (kgf/cm , psi) L/min (GPM) A 1.96 (20, 285) 126 (33.2) B 4.6 (47, 669) 125 (33) C 6.67 (68, 970) [121.5] [(32)] G 15 (153, 2181) [69] [(18.2)] H 24.5 (250, 3562) [40] [(10.6)] The valve indicated in [ ] is only a reference valve.
L/min A
B
C
D
E
Flow Rate G
F
H
Delivery Pressure
T4-2-5
MPa (kgf/cm 2 )
T1M9-04-02-018
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard (Blank)
T4-2-6
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test ENGINE SPEED Summary: 1. Be sure to check the engine speed before performing all other tests, since it always affects test results.
Engine Control Dial
Preparation: 1. Warm up the machine, until the engine coolant temperature reaches 50 °C (122 °F) or more, and hydraulic oil temperature is 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). 2. Move the engine control dial from slow idle to fast idle. Confirm that the fuel injection pump governor lever comes into contact with the slow-idle and fast-idle stoppers. 3. Connect an engine tachometer to the fuel injection line. Measurement: 1. Depending upon the engine speed measured, make measurement as per the following table. Engine Control Auto Idle Switch Dial Slow Idle Slow Idle OFF (No-load) Fast Idle Fast Idle OFF (No-load)
T1M9-01-02-002
Governor Lever
2. Repeat measurement three times and calculate the mean value. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T1M9-04-02-019
Stopper
T4-3-1
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test ENGINE COMPRESSION PRESSURE Summary: 1. Measure compression pressure in the cylinders to check for a reduction in engine power. 2. Check exhaust gas color. Keep track of engine oil consumption. 3. Check for abnormalities in the intake system, including the air cleaner.
Compression Gauge Kit
Preparation: 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Disconnect the negative terminal at the battery, and then remove engine stop solenoid connectors. 3. Reconnect the negative terminal to battery. 4. Remove the fuel injection valve of the cylinder to be measured, and attach a pressure gauge (compression gauge kit for YANMAR TNV88) NOTE: Attach the gasket to the end of the adaptor, and tighten it firmly. T1M9-04-02-001
4. Confirm that the batteries are charged. Measurement: 1. Turn the starter to crank the engine. Record the compression pressure of each cylinder. 2. Repeat measurement three times and calculate the mean value. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
NOTE: Engine speed and compression pressure.
4 Compression Pressure
Compression 3 Pressure (MPa)
(kgf/cm 2) 2
Engine Speed min-1 (rpm)
T4-3-2
T1M9-04-02-020
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test (Blank)
T4-3-3
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test VALVE CLEARANCE Flywheel Side
Summary: 1. Perform the measurement when the engine is cold. 2. Before removing the head cover, clean the area around the head cover to prevent the entry of dust into the engine. Preparation: 1. Remove the head cover. 2. Locate the top dead center (TDC) in the compression stroke of piston No.1 (on the flywheel side). Turn the crank pulley counterclockwise viewed from the flywheel, and have the “mark groove” coincide with the “Mark-0” of the timing gear case cover. At this time, if both of the locker arms of the inlet and exhaust valves for cylinder No. 1 have play when operated manually, TDC for cylinder No. 1 is properly located. If not, turn the crank pulley 360 degrees, and check one more time. NOTE: For turning the crank pulley, remove the fan guard, and turn the fan with one hand while holding the fan belt with the other. If the fuel injection valve of each cylinder is removed in advance, the crank pulley can be easily rotated with no compressive force. IMPORTANT: In case no play is felt for both of the locker arms of the inlet and exhaust valves for cylinder No. 1 even after turning the pulley 4 times, abnormal wear of the valve seats is suspected, and disassembled examination is necessary.
T4-3-4
Mark-0
Crank Pulley
T1M9-04-02-002
Mark Groove
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test Measurement: 1. Measure the valve clearance between the rocker arm and valve. 2. Measure the clearances of valves marked ({) in the table below. Cylinder No.
1 Valve
Cylinder No.1 at top dead center Cylinder No.1 at overlap
I
2 E
I
3 E
I
{ { {
Rocker Arm
Adjust Screw
Lock Nut
4 E
I
E
{ × ×
× ×
T1M9-04-02-003
3. Turn flywheel 360°, then measure the valve clearances marked (×) in the above table. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Adjustment 1. Loosen the lock nut and the adjusting screw of the locker arm. 2. Confirm that the valve cap has no tilting, dust ingress, or wear. 3. Insert a thickness gauge of 0.2 mm between the locker arm and the valve head, and tighten the lock nut after adjusting the valve clearance. IMPORTANT: The valve clearances marked with { are adjustable when piston No. 1 is at TDC, and those marked with ¯ are adjustable when Piston No. 4 is at TDC. In case no play is felt for the locker arm to have play, abnormal wear of the valve seat is suspected, and disassembled examination is necessary.
T4-3-5
Normal
Abnormal T1M9-04-02-004
T1M9-04-02-005
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test NOZZLE CHECK Summary: 1. Check the injection pressure and the spray pattern with a nozzle tester. 2. Before starting work, clean the fuel injector mounting area to avoid contamination in the engine. Preparation: 1. Remove all fuel injector and fuel injection pipings from the engine. 2. Attach a fuel injector to nozzle tester.
Fuel Injector
Measurement: CAUTION: Never touch spray directly. The fuel spray from the nozzle may penetrate the skin, resulting in serious injury. If fuel penetrates into the blood stream, it may cause blood toxication. 1. Injection pressure After attaching the fuel injector to nozzle tester, strongly make several strokes of the tester to inject fuel. Then, while operating the tester at approx. 60 time strokes a minute, measure the fuel injection pressure. Use shims in the fuel injector to adjust the pressure.
T1M9-04-02-007
Fuel Injector Over Flow Pipe
Nozzle Holder
NOTE: If the shim is thickened by 0.1 mm, pres2 sure rises by about 1.9 MPa (19 kgf/cm ). 2. Spray pattern For this test, turn the pressure tester knob to bypass the pressure gauge. Attach the fuel injector to the nozzle tester. Strongly make several strokes of the tester and check the fuel spray pattern.
Shim
NOTE: Use clean diesel oil. 3. Oil tight condition Keep the pressure slightly below the injection pressure. Check for fuel leak from around the nozzle tip. T1M9-04-02-008
T4-3-6
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test Evaluation: 1. Standard Injection Pressure: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. 2. During Spray Injection 2-1. After injecting spray two to three times, gradually raise pressure, and halt it at slightly lower 2 than 2 MPa (20 kgf/cm ), and confirm that there is no fuel drop coming out of the nozzle end. 2-2. During injection with a nozzle tester, in case an extremely large amount of fuel leakage takes place out of the overflow connector, confirm by tightening it again. In case the situation is not bettered, replace the nozzle assembly. 2-3. Operate the nozzle tester lever at the speed of one or two strokes a second, and confirm that no abnormal spray takes place. 2-4. In case spray conditions shown below cannot be obtained, make readjustment or replacement of the parts. -Spray spread angles are similar. (θ) -Spray direction angles are similar. (ι) -The whole spray is like fine mist. -Injection ends with no dripping.
T4-3-7
(Normal)
(Abnormal)
T1M9-04-02-009
T1M9-04-02-010
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test INJECTION TIMING Preparation
Fuel Pump
IMPORTANT: Measurement of injection timing is impossible in the case of an engine provided with the MP type fuel injection pump. Therefore, be sure to assemble the injection pump fully carefully in accordance with the descriptions given in the engine maintenance manual. Adjustment Explanation is made here about the procedure for replacing, mounting, or dismounting of the fuel injection pump.
Fuel Pump Drive Gear
Flange Bolt (Do not disassemble) Drive Gear Fixing Bolt
CAUTION: When dismounting the fuel pump, be sure not to loosen the four screws fixing the pump flange and the fuel pump driving gear. If they are loosened, adjustment of the injection timing becomes very difficult. 1. Before dismounting the fuel pump, put mating marks with a white felt pen on the respective contacting part of the fuel pump driving gear and the idle gear.
T4-3-8
Crank gear Idle Gear T1M9-04-02-013
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test 2. Before dismounting the fuel pump, adhere to the gear case a injection angle adjustment sticker with its center line coinciding with the mark-off line on the fuel pump side. 3. Dismount the fuel pump, and read the injection angle marked on the fuel pump. 4. Read the injection angle marked on the fuel pump to be mounted, and figure out the difference from that of the dismounted fuel pump.
Center Line
1° 1°
0.5° (Injection Angle Adjustment Sticker)
NOTE: In case the same fuel pump is mounted again, the angle difference is zero. Injection angle difference (cam angle) = (injection angle of the mounted fuel pump) (injection angle of the dismounted fuel pump)
T1M9-04-02-014
Sticker
IMPORTANT: In case the injection angle of the fuel pump is difficult to read, consult the engine manufacturer for it by giving information on the fuel pump model and serial number. 5. Attach the fuel pump temporarily to the gear case. Have the mating marks put in advance during disassembling coincide with each other, mount the driving gear to the camshaft, and tighten the nut. Tightening torque of fuel pump driving gear nut: 78 to 88 N⋅m (8 to 9 kgf⋅m, 564 to 637 lbf⋅ft) 6. Read the injection angle difference figured out in procedure 5 with the adjustment sticker measure (minimum 0.5 degrees, cam angle), and adjust the mounting angle of the fuel pump. NOTE: For the injection angle difference of +1 degree, turn the fuel pump 1 degree outward in relation to the cylinder block, and for – 1 degree, turn the fuel pump 1 degree toward the cylinder block. 7. Tighten the nut for attaching the fuel pump.
T4-3-9
Fuel Pump
Gear Case Mark-off Line
Mark-off Line
T1M9-04-02-015
Adjustment Sticker
Center Line
In case of +1°
In case of +0.25°
(Adjustment of Injection Angle)
T1M9-04-02-016
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test NOTE: The standard mounting angle for the fuel pump is 25 degrees.
Cylinder Block Side
(Fuel Pump Fixing Angle)
NOTE: For advancing or delaying the injection timing, change the mounting angle of the fuel pump. For example, in case the injection angle is advanced by 2 degrees, loosen the nut for fixing the fuel pump to the gear case, turn the fuel pump 1 degree outward in relation to the cylinder block, and tighten the nut for fixing the pump. For delaying the injection timing, mount the pump the other way around.
T1M9-04-02-017
Delay Advance
Cylinder Block Side
T1M9-04-02-017
Fuel Pump Fixing Bolt (Adjustment of Injection Timing)
T4-3-10
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test TRAVEL SPEED Summary: 1. To check overall performance of travel drive system (between main pump and travel motor), measure the time required for the excavator to travel a test track. Preparation: 1. Adjust the track sag of both tracks to be equal. 2. Prepare a level and solid test track 20 m (65.5 ft) in length, with an extra length of 3 to 5 m (9.8 to 16 ft) on both ends for machine acceleration and deceleration. 3. Hold the bucket 0.3 to 0.5 m (1.0 to 1.6 ft) above the ground with the arm and bucket extended. 4. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). End
Arm Roll-in, Bucket Roll-in Start Raise bucket 0.3 to 0.5 m (1.0 to 1.6 ft) above the ground.
20 m (65.5 ft) 3 to 5 m (9.8 to 16 ft) extra length for acceleration / deceleration
Measurement: 1. The test should be performed with each mode (slow and fast travel speeds) in the fast-idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Start traveling the machine in the acceleration zone with the travel levers at full stroke. 3. Measure the time required to travel 20 m (65 ft 7 in). 4. After measuring the forward travel speed, turn the upperstructure 180° and measure the reverse travel speed. 5. Repeat steps (2) and (4) three times in each direction and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-1
3 to 5 m (9.8 to 16 ft) extra length for acceleration / deceleration
T570-06-03-001
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test TRACK REVOLUTION SPEED Summary: 1. With the track raised off ground, measure the track revolution cycle time to check the total track drive system (between main pump and travel motor). Preparation: 1. Adjust the track sag of both side tracks equally. 2. On the track to be measured, mark one shoe with chalk. CAUTION: Support the lifted track securely with wooden blocks. 3. Swing the upperstructure 90° and lower the bucket to raise the track off ground. Keep the boom-arm angle between 90 to 110° as shown. Measurement: 1. The test should be performed with each mode (slow and fast travel speeds) in the fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Operate the travel control lever of the raised track in the full forward or reverse stroke. 3. Measure the time required for 3 revolutions of shoe in both directions. 4. Raise the other track and repeat the procedures. 5. Repeat steps (2) and (4) three times for each track and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. NOTE: The measured values may vary widely. The evaluation based on the results obtained from the 20 m (65.5 ft) travel speed check is more recommendable. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-2
90 to 110° Mark
T570-06-03-009
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test MISTRACK CHECK Summary: 1. Allow the machine to travel 20 m (65.5 ft). Measure the maximum tread deviation from the tread chord line drawn between the travel start and end points to check the performance equilibrium between both sides of the travel device systems (between main pump and travel motor). 2. If measured on a concrete surface, the tread deviation has a trend to decrease. Preparation: 1. Adjust the track sag of both tracks to be equal. 2. Provide a flat, solid test yard 20 m (65.5 ft) in length, with extra length of 3 to 5 m (9.8 to 16 ft) on both ends for machine acceleration and deceleration. 3. Hold the bucket 0.3 to 0.5 m (1.0 to 1.6 ft) above the ground with the arm and bucket extended. 4. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F).
Max Distance
20 m (65.5 ft) T570-06-03-002
Measurement: 1. The test should be performed with each mode (slow and fast travel speeds) in the fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Start traveling the machine in the acceleration zone with the travel levers at full stroke. 3. Measure the distance between a straight 20 m (65.5 ft) line and the tread made by the machine. 4. After measuring the tracking in forward travel, swing the upperstructure 180° and measure that in reverse travel. 5. Repeat steps (3) and (4) three times in each direction and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T 4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-3
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test TRAVEL MOTOR LEAKAGE Summary: 1. Measure the amount of travel motor slippage on a slope, which is due to travel motor inner oil leak. Preparation: 1. The surface of the test slope must be even, with a gradient of 20% (11.31 °). 2. Raise the bucket 0.2 to 0.3 m above the ground with the arm and bucket cylinders fully extended (rolled in) 3. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Measure the slip amount of travel motor at parking. 1-1. Climb the slope and place the travel levers in neutral. 1-2. Stop the engine. 1-3. After parking the machine, makes aligning marks on the side frame and a track link or shoe. 1-4. After 3 minutes, measure discrepancy between the marks.
T570-06-03-010
Amount of slippage after 3 minutes
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T505-06-03-005
T4-4-4
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test SWING SPEED Summary: 1. Measure the time required to swing three complete turns to check the total swing drive system (between the main pump and swing motor). Preparation: 1. Check the lubrication of swing gear and swing bearing. 2. Place the machine on level, solid ground with ample space for swinging. Do not conduct this test on slopes. 3. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of arm top pin is even with the boom foot pin. The bucket must be empty. 4. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F) CAUTION: Before starting the measurement, make sure that there are no person or obstacles within the swing area. Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. Operate swing control lever fully. 2. Measure the time required to swing 3 turns in one direction. 3. Operate swing control lever fully in the opposite direction and measure the time required for 3 turns. 4. Repeat steps (2) and (3) three times each and calculate the average values. Evaluation Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-5
Even with the Boom Foot Pin. T570-06-03-003
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test SWING FUNCTION DRIFT CHECK Summary: 1. To check the valve unit performance, measure the swing drift on the bearing outer circumference when stopping after a 90° full speed swing. 2. Mechanical brake for swing parking is installed on swing motor. Preparation: 1. Check the lubrication of swing gear and swing bearing. 2. Place the machine on level, solid ground with ample space for swinging. Do not conduct this test on slopes. 3. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of bucket pin is even with the boom foot pin. The bucket must be empty. 4. Make the marks on the swing bearing and track frame. 5. Swing the upperstructure 90°. 6. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). CAUTION: Before starting the measurement, make sure that there are no person or obstacles within the swing area. Measurement: 1. Start and run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. Operate the swing control lever fully to swing the upper-structure. When the marks on the swing bearing and track frame meet, return the swing lever to the neutral position. 2. After the swing movement stops, measure the arc length between two aligning marks along the circumference of the swing bearing. 3. Align the marks again, swing 90° then test in the opposite direction. 4. Repeat steps (1) and (2) three times each and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
Make aligning marks on the swing bearing outer circumference and track frame. T570-06-03-004
Swing the upperstructure 90° to the test start position. T570-06-03-005
Measure the arc length along the circumference of swing bearing.
Mark on the track frame Mark on the swing bearing T105-06-03-010
Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-6
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test SWING MOTOR LEAKAGE Summary: 1. To check swing parking brake performance, measure the upperstructure drift after parking the machine on a slope with the upperstructure positioned 90° to the slope. (Mechanical brake for swing parking is installed on swing device.) Preparation: 1. Check the lubrication of swing gear and swing bearing. 2. Load the bucket with either soil or a weight equivalent to the weight standard. Weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 210 kg (463 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 240 kg (529 lb) 3. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of bucket pin is even with the boom foot pin. 4. Park the machine on a flat slope with a gradient of 15±1°. 5. Climb the slope, then swing the upperstructure 90°toward the slope. Make aligning marks on the swing bearing circumference and track frame. 6. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). T570-06-03-006
Measurement: 1. Start the engine and maintain engine speed at idle speed. After 5 minutes, measure the difference between the marks on the swing bearing circumference and the track frame. 2. Perform the measurement under the following two conditions: ⋅ When the brake is applied (with the pilot control shut-off lever in the LOCK position). ⋅ When the brake is released (with the pilot control shut-off lever in the UNLOCK position). 3. Perform the measurement on both right and left swing directions. 4. Perform the measurement three times in each direction and calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
Measure the arc length along the swing bearing circumference.
Mark on the track frame Mark on the swing bearing T105-06-03-010
Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-7
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test MAXIMUM SWINGABLE SLANT ANGLE Summary: 1. To measure the maximum slope angle on which the upperstructure can swing, park the machine on a slope with the upperstructure positioned 90° to the slope. Preparation: 1. Check the lubrication of swing gear and swing bearing. 2. Load the bucket with either soil or a weight equivalent to the weight standard. Weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 210 kg (463 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 240 kg (529 lb) 3. With the arm cylinder fully retracted and the bucket cylinder fully extended, hold the bucket so that the height of bucket pin is even with the boom foot pin. 4. Climb the slope, and then set the upperstructure 90° to the slope. 5. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. Operate the swing control lever fully to swing the upperstructure to the uphill side of slope. 2. If swing is possible, measure the slant angle on the cab floor. 3. Increase the slope angle. Measure on both right and left swing directions. 4. Perform the measurement three times. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-8
T570-06-03-006
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test SWING BEARING PLAY Summary: 1. Measure the swing play with a dial gauge to check the wear of bearing races and balls. Preparation: 1. Check the swing bearing mounting bolt for looseness. 2. Check the lubrication of swing bearing. Confirm that bearing rotation is smooth and noiseless. 3. Install a dial gauge with a magnetic base on the track frame as shown. 4. Position the upperstructure so that the boom aligns with the tracks facing towards the travel motors. 5. Position the dial gauge so that its needle point comes into contact with the bottom face of the bearing outer race as shown. 6. Bucket should be empty. NOTE: The measured value may differ depending on where the dial gauge magnetic base is located. Mount the magnetic base directly onto the round frame trunk or as close to the round frame trunk as possible. Measurement: 1. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of the bucket pin is even with the boom foot pin. Record the dial gauge reading (h1). 2. Lower the bucket to the ground and use it to raise the front idler 0.5 m (20 in). Record the dial gauge reading (h2). 3. Calculate bearing play (H) from this data (h1 and h2) as follows: H = h2 â&#x2C6;&#x2019; h1
Magnetic Base
Dial Gauge
T105-06-03-014
Round Frame Trunk
Magnetic Base T105-06-03-015
Measurement: [h1]
Even with the Boom Foot Pin. T570-06-03-003
Measurement: [h2]
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
0.5 m (20 in) T570-06-03-007
T4-4-9
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test HYDRAULIC CYLINDER CYCLE TIME
Boom Cylinder
Summary: 1. To totally check the front attachment function performance (between the main pump and each cylinder) by measuring each cylinder cycle time. 2. Bucket should be empty. Preparation: 1. Take the following machine position: T570-06-03-011
Arm Cylinder
1-1. When measuring the boom cylinder: With the arm cylinder fully retracted and the bucket cylinder fully extended, lower the bucket to the ground. 1-2. When measuring the arm cylinder: With the bucket cylinder fully extended, adjust the boom and arm cylinder strokes so that when the arm is moved half the full stroke, the arm longitudinal center line perpendicularly points to the ground and the bucket bottom clearance above the ground is approx. 0.5 m (20 in).
0.5 m (20 in) T570-06-03-012
Bucket Cylinder
1-3. When measuring the bucket cylinder: Adjust the boom and arm cylinder strokes so that when the bucket is moved half the full stroke, the bucket edge points to the ground perpendicularly. 1-4. When measuring the boom swing cylinder: Set the boom swing cylinder in either the right or left swing stroke end position. 1-5. When measuring the blade cylinder: Lower the bucket to the ground to raise the machine front off the ground and secure the height space to allow the blade to move up-and-down full stroke.
T105-06-03-020
Boom Swing Cylinder
2. Maintain hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F).
Blade Cylinder
T523-06-03-006
T570-06-03-007
T4-4-10
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. Operate each cylinder as follows: (The cylinder stroke excludes the cushion range.) 1-1. Measure the boom cylinder. Measure the time required to raise or lower the boom while operating the boom control lever full stroke. 1-2. Measuring the arm cylinder. Measure the time required to roll in or out the arm while operating the arm control lever full stroke. 1-3. Measuring the bucket cylinder. Measure the time required to roll in or out the bucket while operating the bucket control lever full stroke. 1-4. Measuring the boom swing cylinder Measure the time required to swing the front attachment from right to left or vice versa while operating the boom swing pedal full stroke. 1-5. Measuring the blade cylinder Measure the time required to raise or lower the blade while operating the blade control lever full stroke. 2. Repeat each measurement three times and calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T 4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-11
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test DIG FUNCTION DRIFT Summary: 1. With the bucket loaded, measure dig function drift, which can be caused by oil leakage in the control valve and / or boom, arm, bucket, blade and boom swing cylinders.
Retraction
2. When testing the dig function drift just after cylinder replacement, slowly operate each cylinder to its stroke end to purge trapped air prior to testing. Preparation: 1. Load the bucket with either soil or a weight equivalent to the weight standard. Weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 210 kg (463 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 240 kg (529 lb) 2. With the arm cylinder fully retracted and bucket cylinder fully extended, had the bucket pin height even with the boom foot pin. When measuring the boom swing cylinder, climb the slope with a gradient of 15±1 ° and set the upperstructure 90 ° to the slope. 3. Retract arm cylinder and bucket cylinder approx. 50 mm (2 in) to away from the cushion range. 4. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F).
Extension
Retraction
Arm Top Pin is even with Boom Foot Pin.
Front Drift
Extension
T570-06-03-008
T570-06-03-006
Boom, Bucket and Blade Cylinder Retraction Mark
Mark
Measurement: 1. Stop the engine. 2. After five minutes, measure the boom, bucket and blade cylinder retraction, arm and boom swing cylinder extension, and amount of the bucket drift. 3. Repeat step 2. three times and calculate the mean values.
T110-06-03-002
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
Arm Cylinder Extension
Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B". Mark
T110-06-03-001
Boom Swing Cylinder Extension
T506-06-03-001
T4-4-12
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test CONTROL LEVER OPERATING FORCE Summary: 1. Use a spring scale to measure the maximum force needed to move each control lever and pedal. 2. Measure the operating force at the center of each lever grip. Preparation: 1. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). CAUTION: Before the measurement, make sure there are no personnel or obstacles within the swing area. Measurement: 1. Start the engine. 2. Measure the maximum operating force with each boom raise, arm, bucket, swing lever, full stroke. 3. Measure the maximum operating force with the boom lower lever full stroke until the fully raised boom comes in contact with the ground. 4. Operate swing lever and measure the maximum operating force with swing relieved after securing the front attachment to prevent swinging. 5. Lower the bucket to the ground to raise one track off the ground. Operate the travel lever to full stroke and measure the maximum operating force. When finished, lower the track and then jack up the other track. 6. Repeat each measurement three times and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-4-13
T107-06-03-003
T107-06-03-004
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test CONTROL LEVER STROKE Summary: 1. Measure each lever stroke at the lever top using a ruler. 2. Measure the lever stroke at the grip center of each control lever. As for the boom swing pedal, measure the stroke from the center position to stopper. 3. In case lever stroke play is present in the neutral position, add half (1/2) the play present to both side lever strokes. Preparation: Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). T107-06-03-005
Measurement: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Measure the boom, arm, bucket, swing, travel and blade control lever strokes at the grip top center from the neutral position to the stroke end. On the boom swing pedal, measure the straight distance between the center and fully depressed positions at tip of the pedal. 3. Take the measurements by the straight stroke distances. 4. Conduct the measurement three times. Calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-4-14
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test COMBINED BOOM RAISE/SWING FUNCTION CHECK Summary: 1. Check boom raise and swing movement and speeds while operating both functions simultaneously to evaluate combined functions. 2. Confirm that no hesitation is found with the engine running at maximum speed. Preparation: 1. With the arm rolled out and the bucket rolled in, lower the bucket to the ground. The bucket should be empty. 2. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F).
M570-07-005
CAUTION: Always make sure that the area is clear and that co-workers are out of the swing area before starting the measurement. Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Raise the boom and swing simultaneously, both at full stroke. When the upperstructure rotates 90°, release the control levers to stop both functions. Measure the time required to swing 90° and the height (H) of the bucket teeth. 3. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average values.
T1M9-04-04-001
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
H
T1M9-04-04-002
T4-4-15
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test (Blank)
T4-4-16
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test PRIMARY PILOT PRESSURE Preparation: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Turn the filling cap on hydraulic oil tank to bleed air. 3. Disconnect the hose (9/16-18 UNF) at the pilot filter. Install pressure gauge assembly (ST 6932) with tee (ST 6572) to the pilot filter. : 22 mm, 19 mm 4. Start the engine and check for oil leakage from the gauge connection. 5. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Measure the pressure without load. 3. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average value.
Pilot Filter
Adjusting Screw
Hose (9/16-18 UNF)
T1M9-04-05-001
Lock Nut
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Adjustment: Adjustment the relief valve on 2-unit solenoid valve if necessary. 1. Loosen the lock nut. 2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust the pressure. : 6 mm T1LA-03-06-002
3. Tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 15 to 20 N⋅m (1.5 to 2.0 kgf⋅m, 10.8 to 14.5 lbf⋅ft) 4. After completing the adjustment, recheck the set pressure. NOTE: Standard change in pressure. Screw Turns Change in Relief Pressure
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
182
363
545
726
(kgf/cm )
(1.85)
(3.7)
(5.55)
(7.40)
(psi)
(13.4)
(26.8)
(40.1)
(53.5)
kPa 2
T4-5-1
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test SECONDARY PILOT PRESSURE Preparation: 1. Properly shut down the engine. 2. Turn the filling cap on hydraulic oil tank to bleed air. 3. Install pressure gauge (ST 6932) and tee (ST 6573) to the end of pilot hose (7/16-20 UNF) at the respective control valve spool end, as illustrated. : 19 mm, 17 mm
Pilot Hose
Tee (ST 6573) Pressure Gauge (ST 6932)
4. Start the engine and check for oil leakage at the pressure gauge connection. 5. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: CAUTION: Before measuring, check that there are no obstacles or personnel within the swing radius. When measuring the boom lower pilot pressure, raise the machine off the ground while paying attention not to allow the base machine (counterweight) to contact with the ground. Be careful not to tip-over due to a loss of balance. 1. Operate the lever to be measured. Measure the pilot pressure at its full stroke with the pressure gauge. 2. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average valve. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-5-2
T157-05-04-011
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test MAIN RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE Summary: Measure the main relief valve setting pressure at the main delivery port.
Delivery Port in Main Pump (P1)
Preparation: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Turn the filling cap on hydraulic oil tank to bleed air. 3. Disconnect the hose (1-1/16-12 UNF) onto the delivery port in main pump (P1). Install tee (ST 6652), adapter (ST 6069), and pressure gauge assembly (ST 6934). : 36 mm 4. Start the engine and check for oil leakage at the pressure gauge connection. 5. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Run the engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Slowly operate each control lever or pedal to fully extend or retract each cylinder to relieve the pressure. Measure the relief pressure at this time. 3. Repeat the measurement three times and calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-5-3
T1M9-03-01-001
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Main Relief Valve Adjustment Procedure A
Adjustment: Adjust the main relief valves if necessary. The main relief valves are installed on the position as illustrated.
A
NOTE: Before loosening the lock nut, make the alignment marks on the adjusting screw, lock nut and valve. Using these alignment marks, the number of turns of the adjusting screw can be checked easily. 1. Loosen the lock nut on main relief valve. : 17 mm IMPORTANT: Adjust the pressure so that it does not exceed the upper limit of standard. T1M9-03-04-001
2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust the pressure. : 6 mm Adjusting Screw
Section A-A
3. Tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 N⋅m (3.5 to 4 kgf⋅m, 25 to 29 lbf⋅ft)
Lock Nut
4. After completing the adjustment, recheck the set pressure. NOTE: Standard change in pressure. Screw Turns MPa Change in 2 Relief (kgf/cm ) Pressure (psi)
1/4 2.2 (22.4) (319)
1/2 4.4 (44.9) (638)
3/4 6.7 (69.4) (986)
1 (8.9) (90.9) (1290)
Main Relief Valve
Lock Nut
Pressure Increase
T1M9-03-04-005
Adjusting Screw
Pressure Decrease
W107-02-05-129
T4-5-4
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Swing Relief Pressure Adjustment Procedure Adjustment: Adjust the pressure of swing relief valve with the adjusting screw after loosening the lock nut.
Swing Relief Valve
1. Loosen the lock nut. : 17 mm 2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust the pressure referring to the table below. : 4mm 3. Retighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 15.7 ± 0.1 N⋅m (16 ± 1 kgf⋅m, 116 ± 7 lbf⋅ft) 4. Recheck the set pressure. T523-02-03-003
NOTE: Standard change in pressure. Lock Nut
Screw Turns MPa Change in 2 Relief (kgf/cm ) Pressure (psi)
Lock Nut
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
2.45
4.9
7.4
9.8
(25)
(50)
(75)
(100)
(360)
(710)
(1070)
(1420)
Adjusting Screw
Adjusting Screw T561-02-03-001
Pressure Increase
Pressure Decrease W107-02-05-129
T4-5-5
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE Summary: 1. With the return circuit from the control valve blocked, the circuit pressure must be increased by applying an external load. This checking method is hazardous and the results obtained with this method are unreliable. 2. Pressure setting of the overload relief valve must be made at a specified oil flow rate normally far smaller than the delivery flow rate of main relief valve. Accordingly, even if the main relief valve set pressure can be reset higher than the set pressure of overload relief valve, the main pump supplies too much oil to correctly measure the set pressure of overload relief valve. The main relief valve has pre-leaking function. In this case, the set pressure of main relief valve at pre-leaking function need to be set higher than that of overload relief valve. Accordingly, the main relief valve pressure setting may not be reset higher than the set pressure of overload relief valve plus the pressure at pre-leaking. Therefore, when the set pressure of overload relief valve must be checked correctly, remove the overload relief valve assembly from the machine and check the overload relief valve unit performance using the test stand and test block prepared for this purpose. If the poppet of overload relief valve seats to the body of control valve, the test block requires precise machining. Use other control valve unit for the measurement instead of the test block. 3. As an easier method, however, measure the relief pressure of each cylinder in the same method as of main relief pressure setting in previous section. Then, when each relief pressure meets its respective specifications, judge that the set pressure of overload relief valve is correct.
T4-5-6
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Adjustment: Lock Nut
NOTE: Pressure of overload relief valve shall be adjusted with test device in principle. 1. Loosen the lock nut on overload relief valve. : 17 mm 2. Turn adjusting screw to adjust the set pressure. : 6 mm 3. Tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 N⋅m (3.5 to 4 kgf⋅m, 25 to 29 lbf⋅ft)
Adjusting Screw T566-03-03-018
4. After the adjustment, check the set pressure. Lock Nut
Adjusting Screw
Overload Relief Valves: NOTE: Standard Change in Pressure. Screw Turns MPa Change in 2 (kgf/cm ) Relief Pressure (psi)
1/4 2.7 (27.5)
1/2 5.5 (56.1)
3/4 8.3 (84.7)
1 (11.0) (112)
(392)
(798)
(1200)
(1600)
Pressure Increase
Pressure Decrease
W107-02-05-129
T4-5-7
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test SWING MOTOR DRAINAGE Summary: 1. To check the performance of swing motor, measure the amount of oil draining from the swing motor while swinging the upperstructure. 2. Always secure the test personnel’s safe during the measurement. Before the measurement, make sure there are no person or obstacles within the test track. 3. The amount of drain oil will change depending on hydraulic oil temperature. Maintain hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Preparation: 1. Warm the hydraulic oil temperature to 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Rotate the swing motor to warm up the inside of motor. 2. Stop the engine. Turn the filling cap to bleed air from the hydraulic oil tank. 3. Disconnect the drain hose at swing motor. Install a plug (9/16-18 UNF) to the disconnected hose end. Connect hose (ST 6627) onto the drain port of swing motor. : 22 mm, 19 mm : 39 N⋅m (4 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft) CAUTION: Before the measurement, make sure there are no person or obstacles within the swing area. Make sure not to fall off from machine during the measurement. 4. Disconnect the make-up line at swing motor. Install plugs on the disconnected line end and motor port. Measurement Condition: 1. Before the measurement, set the engine speed control dial to the fast idle position with auto idle switch off, and then measure it.
T4-5-8
Make-Up Line Drain Hose (9/16-18 UNF)
T1LD-04-05-002
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Measurement: 1. Drain Oil Volume at Swing Operation 1-1. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of arm top pin is even with the boom foot pin. The bucket must be empty. 1-2. Start the engine. Operate the swing lever to the full stroke. After swing speed reaches a constant maximum speed, collect the hydraulic oil from drain hose. Measure the time also. 1-3. Repeat the measurement more than 3 times in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and calculate the average value. 1-4. The measurement should be at least 45 seconds. 2. Drain Oil Volume at Swing Lock Operation 2-1. Seize the ground with bucket so that the machine does not move. 2-2. Start the engine. Operate the swing lever to the full stroke. Collect the hydraulic oil from drain hose. Measure the time also. 2-3. Repeat the measurement more than 3 times in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and calculate the average value. 2-4. The measurement should be at least 45 seconds. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. * Conversion of Measured Value into the Per-Minute Value Measure the amount of drain oil using a calibrated container. Then, convert the measured drain oil into the per-minute value using the following formula; ∆Q = 60 × q / t ∆Q : Per-Minute Drain Volume (L/min) t : Time Measured (sec) q : Measured Drain Oil Volume (L)
T4-5-9
Even with the Boom Foot Pin. T570-06-03-003
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test TRAVEL MOTOR DRAINAGE Summary: 1. To check the performance of travel motor, measure the amount of oil draining from the travel motor, while rotating the travel motor with the measuring side track jacked up. 2. Always secure the test personnel’s safe during the measurement. Before the measurement, make sure there are no personnel or obstacles within the test track. 3. Evaluate the overall performance of the travel motor taking the test results such as travel speed and mistrack amount into consideration together with this test results. 4. The amount of drain oil will change depending on hydraulic oil temperature. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Preparation: 1. Warm the hydraulic oil results temperature to 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Rotate the travel motor to warm up the inside of motor. 2. Stop the engine. Turn the filling cap to bleed air from the hydraulic oil tank. 3. Disconnect the drain hose at the travel motor. Install a plug (9/16UNF-ORS) to the disconnected hose end. Connect hose (9/16-18UNF-ORS) onto the drain port of travel motor. : 19 mm : 44 N⋅m (4.5 kgf⋅m, 32.5 lbf⋅ft)
Drain Hose
Measurement Condition: 1. Set the engine speed control dial to the fast idle position with auto idle switch off and measure at slow travel speed. T1LD-04-05-003
T4-5-10
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Measurement: 1. Drain oil volume when travel motor rotating. CAUTION: When approaching to the rotation parts, take care that hands, legs or clothes are not entangled. Support the lifted machine securely with wooden block. 1-1. Start the engine. Jack-up the measuring side track. 1-2. Rotate the raised track. Collect the hydraulic oil from drain hose. Measure the time also. 1-3. Repeat the measurement more than 3 times in both forward and reverse directions, and calculate the average value. 1-4. The measurement should be at least 45 seconds.
90 to 110°
T570-06-03-009
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. * Conversion of Measured Value into the Per-Minute Value Measure the amount of drain oil using a calibrated container. Then, convert the measured drain oil into the per-minute value using the following formula; ∆Q = 60 × q / t ∆Q : Per-Minute Drain Volume (L/min) t : Time Measured (sec) q : Measured Drain Oil Volume (L)
T157-05-04-019
T4-5-11
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE (PRESSURE PGR) Summary: Measure pressure PGR at the output port of the revolution sensing valve while running the engine at the slow and fast idle speeds. Preparation: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Disconnect the hose (7/16-20 UNF) at revolution sensing valve connection. Install tee (ST 6573) and pressure gauge assembly (ST 6932). : 19 mm, 17 mm 3. Start the engine. Check for oil leakage at the pressure gauge connection. 4. Maintain hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Set the engine speed at slow idle speed and fast idle speed. 2. Measure the pressure PGR without load at slow and fast idle speed. 3. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average value. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-5-12
T1M9-04-05-001
Hose
Revolution Sensing Valve
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Revolution Sensing Valve Adjustment Procedure NOTE: Before loosening the lock nut, make the alignment marks on the adjusting screw, lock nut and valve. Using these alignment marks, the number of turns of the adjusting screw can be checked easily. 1. Loosen the variable metering valve lock nut on the revolution sensing valve. 2. Slightly tighten the variable metering valve adjusting screw so that the variable metering valve doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t operate. Tighten the adjusting screw until the adjusting screw end face is retracted from the lock nut by approximately 1 mm. : 6 mm -1 3. Run the engine at the minimum speed (1150 min (rpm)). Loosen the differential reducing valve lock nut. Turn the differential reducing valve adjusting screw so the pressure PRG matches the value below. 2 Pressure PGR: 0.5 MPa (5 kgf/cm , 71 psi) : 17 mm : 6 mm 4. Increase the engine speed to the maximum speed -1 (2500 min (rpm)). Loosen the variable metering valve lock nut. Turn the variable metering valve adjusting screw so the pressure PRG matches the value below. 2 Pressure PGR: 1.96 MPa (20 kgf/cm , 284 psi) : 17 mm : 6 mm 5. Tighten both the variable metering valve and differential reducing valve lock nuts. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 Nxm (3.5 to 4 kgfxm, 25 to 29 lbfxft) 6. After completing adjustment, recheck the set pressure.
Lock Nut
Adjusting Screw
Revolution Sensing Valve
Variable Metering Valve
Differential Reducing Valve
T566-03-02-002
Lock Nut
Adjusting Screw
(Variable Metering Valve) Lock Nut
Adjusting Screw
Pressure Decrease
Pressure Increase
W107-02-05-129
(Differential Reducing Valve) Lock Nut
Pressure Increase
Adjusting Screw
Pressure Decrease
W107-02-05-129
T4-5-13
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test PUMP DELIVERY PRESSURE Summary: Measure the pump delivery pressure at the main pump delivery port when all the control levers are in neutral. Preparation: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Turn the filling cap on hydraulic oil tank to bleed air. 3. Disconnect the hose (1-1/16-12 UNF) onto the delivery port in main pump (P1). Install tee (ST 6652), adapter (ST 6069), and pressure gauge assembly (ST 6934). : 36 mm 4. Start the engine. Check for oil leakage at the pressure gauge connection. 5. Maintain hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Set the engine speed at slow idle speed or fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Turn all the control levers into neutral. Measure the pump delivery pressure. 3. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average value. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-5-14
Delivery Port in Main Pump (P1)
T1M9-03-01-001
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Unload Valve Adjustment Procedure NOTE: Before loosening the lock nut, make the alignment marks on the adjusting screw, lock nut, and valve. Using these alignment marks, the number of turns of the adjusting screw can be checked easily.
A
A
1. Loosen the lock nut on unload valve. : 17 mm 2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust the pressure. : 6 mm 3. Tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 Nxm (3.5 to 4 kgfâ&#x2039;&#x2026;m, 25 to 29 lbfxft) 4. After the adjustment, recheck the set pressure.
NOTE: Standard change in pressure. T1M9-03-04-001
Screw Turns Change in Pressure
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
(kgf/cm )
(1.02)
(2.04)
(3.06)
(4.08)
(psi)
(14.5)
(29.1)
(43.6)
(58.2)
MPa 2
Lock Nut
Pressure Increase
Adjusting Screw
Crosse Section A-A
Unload Valve
Pressure Decrease
Lock Nut
W107-02-05-129
T4-5-15
Adjusting Screw
T1M9-03-04-005
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test PUMP DRIVING TORQUE Summary: The adjustment of pump driving torque is not recommended. If the adjustment of pump driving torque is necessary, perform the following procedures.
Adjusting Screw
Adjustment: 1. Loosen the lock nut. 2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust. (Turn clockwise to increase the driving torque. Turn counterclockwise to decrease the driving torque.) : 4 mm 3. Tighten the lock nut. NOTE: Replace the lock nut washer after every adjustment. Failure to do so may cause oil leaks. T1M9-03-01-003
: 13 mm : 10 to 14 N⋅m (1 to 1.4 kgf⋅m, 7.2 to 10 lbf⋅ft) Lock Nut
NOTE: Standard change in pressure Screw Turns Change in Pressure (difference from point A)
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
113
225
338
441
(kgf/cm )
(1.15)
(2.3)
(3.45)
(4.5)
(psi)
(16)
(33)
(49)
(64)
kPa 2
Torque Increase
Adjusting Screw
Torque Decrease W107-02-05-129
Point A Flow Rate (Q)
Torque Decrease
Torque Increase
Pressure (P)
T4-5-16
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test AUXILIARY FLOW SELECTOR VALVE (OPTION)
Adjusting Screw
Preparation 1. Stop the engine. 2. Loosen the cap of the hydraulic oil tank, and let air out. 3. Disconnect the hose (7/16-20 UNF) at the part connecting port A, and attach the pressure measurement tool (ST 6573) and the pressure gauge assembly (ST 6932). :22 mm 4. Start the engine, and confirm no oil leakage at the pressure gauge connections. 5. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50 ± 5 °C (122± 9 °F).
Lock Nut
Measurement 1. Set the engine speed at maximum speed, turn the auxiliary flow selector switch to LOW, and switch the Auto-Idle OFF. 2. Measure pressure at no load.
Connecting Port A
NOTE: Setting at shipment is 1.8 MPa (18.4 2 kgf/cm , 261.7 psi). Adjustment When necessary, adjust the pressure reducing valve. 1. Loosen the lock nut. 2. Make adjustment by turning the adjusting screw. :6 mm 3. After adjustment, tighten the lock nut. :17 mm :18.6 N⋅m (1.9 kgf⋅m, 13.7 lbf⋅ft) 4. Confirm the set pressure after adjustment. NOTE: One turn of the adjusting screw corre2 sponds to 0.54 MPa (5.5 kgf/cm , 78.5 psi of pilot pressure.
T1M9-04-05-002
NOTE: Relationship between output pressure of port A and output flow rate of auxiliary port. Pressure Port A Auxiliary Flow 2 MPa (kgf/cm ) (psi) L/min (GPM) 1.1 (11.2) (159.9) 11 (2.9) 1.2 (12.2) (174.5) 15 (4.0) 1.3 (13.3) (189.0) 19 (5.0) 1.4 (14.3) (203.5) 22 (5.8) 1.5 (15.3) (218.0) 25 (6.6) 1.6 (16.3) (232.6) 30 (7.9) 1.7 (17.3) (247.1) 39 (10.3) 1.8 (18.4) (261.7) 45 (11.9) 1.9 (19.4) (276.2) 55 (14.5) 2.0 (20.4) (290.8) 60 (15.8) 2.1 (21.4) (305.3) 66 (17.4) 2.2 (22.4) (319.8) 75 (19.8) 2.3 (23.5) (334.4) 79 (20.8) 2.4 (24.5) (348.9) 83 (21.9) 2.5 (25.5) (363.5) 85 (22.4) Full (Up to 25.5) (Up to 363.5) Up to 85 (Up to 22.4)
T4-5-17
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test (Blank)
T4-5-18
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the governor both when the following repair and inspection were made and when the engine speed deviated.
• Removal of engine, engine control cable, and governor actuator IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the slow idle stopper bolt and fast idle stopper bolt. These are sealed in advance by the engine manufacturer. Procedure 1. Remove the cable adjusting nut and cable fixing nut of the governor actuator. 2. Turn the key switch ON. 3. Put the engine control dial to FAST IDLE. 4. Turn the key switch OFF. 5. Adjust the cable adjusting nut of the governor actuator until the Fast Idle stopper bolt lightly touches the governor lever. • Clockwise: Stroke retraction direction • Counterclockwise: Stroke extension direction 6. Fasten the cable adjusting nut clockwise (stroke retraction direction) about 1 turn. 7. Fix the cable of the governor actuator by turning the cable fixing nut clockwise. 8. Turn the key switch ON. 9. Confirm that the governor lever lightly touches the Fast Idle stopper bolt when the engine control dial was operated from Fast Idle to Slow Idle, and then to Fast Idle. • When play is felt, follow procedures 1 through 14. • In case of strong contact, loosen the cable adjusting nut counterclockwise (stroke extension direction) by 1/2 to 1 turn after loosening the cable fixing nut. 10. Turn the engine control dial to the Slow Idle position. 11. Confirm that the governor lever lightly touches the Slow Idle stopper bolt. 12. Turn the key switch OFF.
Cable Fixing Nut
Stopper Bolt (Hi Idle)
Stopper Bolt (Low Idle)
T1M7-04-06-001
Cable Adjustment Nut
T4-6-1
Engine Control Cable
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment (Blank)
T4-6-2
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
SECTION 5
TROUBLESHOOTING CONTENTS Group 1 Diagnosing Procedure
How to Lower Boom when
Introduction .............................................. T5-1-1 Diagnosing Procedure ............................... T5-1-2
Engine Stops ............................................. T5-3-56 How to Prevent Horn Blowing at Key Switch Position of OFF .................. T5-3-57
Group 2 Troubleshooting A Troubleshooting A Procedure ........................T5-2-1 Error Indication List .......................................T5-2-2 Wire Breakage and Short Circuit of
Group 4 Troubleshooting C Troubleshooting C Procedure ....................... T5-4-1 Malfunction of Coolant
Engine Control Dial (System Failure
Temperature Gauge .................................... T5-4-2
Indicator: Flickering Every 1 Sec.) ...............T5-2-3 Motor Sensor Breakage and Short Circuit
Malfunction of Fuel Gauge............................ T5-4-4 Malfunction of Preheat Indicator ................... T5-4-6
(System Failure Indicator: Flickering
Malfunction of Alternator Indicator ................ T5-4-7
Every 0.5 Sec.) ............................................T5-2-4
Malfunction of Engine Oil Pressure
Abnormal Motor
Indicator ...................................................... T5-4-8
(System Failure Indicator: Lit)......................T5-2-5
Malfunction of Overheat Indicator ................. T5-4-9 Malfunction of Fuel Level Indicator ............. T5-4-10
Group 3 Troubleshooting B Troubleshooting B Procedure........................T5-3-1
Malfunction of Monitor Buzzer .................... T5-4-11
Engine System Troubleshooting....................T5-3-2
Malfunction of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)................................ T5-4-12
Actuator Operating System Troubleshooting .........................................T5-3-10
Malfunction of Hour Meter .......................... T5-4-13 Malfunction of Auto-Idle Indicator................ T5-4-14
Front Attachment System Troubleshooting .........................................T5-3-15 Swing System Troubleshooting ...................T5-3-22
Group 5 Electrical System Inspection Precautions for Inspection and
Travel System Troubleshooting ...................T5-3-24
Maintenance................................................ T5-5-1
Blade System Troubleshooting....................T5-3-27
Fuse Continuity Test ..................................... T5-5-3
Boom Swing System Troubleshooting.........T5-3-28
Battery Voltage Check .................................. T5-5-4
Air Conditioner Troubleshooting ..................T5-3-29
Voltage Check............................................... T5-5-5
Work After Replacing Components .............T5-3-45
Continuity Check ........................................... T5-5-6
Charge Air Conditioner with Refrigerant ......T5-3-46 Purging Procedure ......................................T5-3-47 Warm-up Operation.....................................T5-3-54 Inspection ....................................................T5-3-55
1M9T-5-1
(Blank)
1M9T-5-2
TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure INTRODUCTION Troubleshooting charts shown in this section indicate the orderly procedures for inspecting and finding out the cause(s) of problems in the machine. This section is comprised of five groups: Outline, Troubleshooting A (diagnosis of machine by system failure indicator), Troubleshooting B (diagnosis of machine by symptom), Troubleshooting C (diagnosis of monitor), and Electric System Inspection.
• General • Troubleshooting A (diagnosis of machine by system failure indicator) This procedure is used when system failure indicator of the monitor flickers or is lit. Example) System failure indicator: Flickering every 1 second (engine control dial wire breakage and shortcircuit)
• Troubleshooting B (diagnosis of machine by symptom) This procedure is used for diagnosis by symptoms. This is used in case flickering and lighting do not take place after diagnosis by system failure indicator. Example: Even if the engine control dial is operated, engine speed remains uncharged.
• Troubleshooting C (diagnosis of monitor) This procedure is used when there are malfunction on components regarding monitor, such as gauges or indicators. Example: Fuel gauge does not operate.
• Electric System Inspection This procedure is used when the information on precaution for electric system inspection or inspection method is needed. Example: Fuse inspection.
T5-1-1
TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure DIAGNOSING PROCEDURE Follow the five basic steps shown below for efficient troubleshooting. 1. Know the system Study the appropriate technical manuals. Know what the system is composed of and how it works, as well as the construction, functions and specifications of the system components. 2. Ask the operator Before inspecting, get the full story of malfunctions from a witness --- the operator. • How the machine has been used and properly operated? • When was the trouble noticed, and what work was the machine doing at that time? • What is the character of the trouble? Did the trouble slowly get worse, or did it appear suddenly for the first time? • Did the machine have any trouble previously? • If so, which parts were repaired or replaced before?
T107-07-01-001
3. Inspect the machine Before starting troubleshooting, check the machine's daily maintenance points, as shown in the operator's manual. Check the electrical system, including batteries. Trouble in the electrical system such as low battery voltage, loose connections and blown fuses will result in malfunction of the controllers, causing total operational failure of the machine.
T107-07-01-002
Note that if the troubleshooting is performed without noticing that the fuse is blown, it may lead to the incorrect diagnosis results which causes significant loss of time. Make sure to check the fuse before performing the troubleshooting. Fuse failure is often caused by a fine crack in the fuse, and such fine cracks are very hard to detect by visual inspection.
T107-07-01-003
T5-1-2
TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure 4. Inspect the actual trouble on the machine Reproduce the trouble on the machine and make sure the actual phenomenon. In case some trouble cannot be actually confirmed, obtain the details of the malfunction from the operator. Also check for any incomplete connections of the wire harnesses. 5. Check by Each System CAUTION: Always stop the engine before disconnecting the harnesses or lines. If they are disconnected while the engine running, it may cause improper operation of the machine, or the pressurized oil may spout.
T107-07-01-004
Use "Troubleshooting A, B, C" in this chapter to confirm the operation condition for each equipment. 6. Trace causes Before reaching a conclusion, check the most suspect causes again. Try to trace what the real cause of the trouble is. Make a plan of appropriate repairing procedure, to avoid consequential malfunctions. T107-07-01-006
T107-07-01-007
T5-1-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure (Blank)
T5-1-4
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A TROUBLESHOOTING A PROCEDURE This procedure is used when the engine controller is abnormal, and the system failure indicator flickers or is lit.
• How to Read the Troubleshoting Flow Charts YES(OK)
・
(2)
• After checking or measuring item (1), select either YES (OK) or NO (NOT OK) and proceed to item (2) or (3), as appropriate.
(1) NO(NOT OK)
(3)
• Special instructions or reference item are indicated in the spaces under the box.
・
Incorrect measuring or checking methods will render troubleshooting impossible, and may damage components as well.
· Key switch: ON
• Causes are stated in a thick-line box. Scanning through thick-line boxes, possible
・
causes can be seen without going through the flow chart.
NOTE: All harness end connector are seen from the open-end side.
Harness End Connector
Open End Side
Harness
T6L4-05-03-001
T5-2-1
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A ERROR INDICATION LIST Error Item
Judgment
Engine Control Short Circuit Dial Wire Breakage and Short Circuit
System Failure Control of Engine Body Cause Indicator Flickering Move governor lever to location • Faulty Engine Controller (every 1 1/2. Or, leave governor lever where • Faulty Harness second) it is. • Faulty Engine Control Dial
Short Motor Sensor Circuit Wire Breakage and Short Circuit
Flickering (every 0.5 second)
Fully pull engine control cable till • Faulty Engine Controller motor error is lit (more than four • Faulty Harness seconds). Then, engine stops at • Faulty Governor Actuator motor error.
Abnormal Motor Motor Error
Lit
Keep governor lever where it was • Faulty Engine Controller • Faulty Harness at time of failure. • Faulty Governor Actuator
NOTE: Control of Engine Body shown in the above list is made whenever power is supplied (whenever the key switch is turned ON). In case a failure takes place after supplying power, the governor lever is fixed where it is. If the key switch is turned ON again after being turned OFF during a failure, the control at the time of power supply shown in the above list is made similarly.
T5-2-2
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A WIRE BREAKAGE AND SHORT CIRCUIT OF ENGINE CONTROL DIAL (System failure indicator: Flickering every 1 sec.) • Check for loose harness connections before hand.
• Conditions for judgment: Output voltage: 0.5 V and below / 4.5 V and above
Check continuity in circuits shown below where connector (3P) of engine control dial and connector (12P) of engine controller are disconnected.
YES Put engine control dial to SLOW IDLE and FAST IDLE. And measure voltage at respective positions. Check if voltage of #2 (3P) terminal of harness side connector for engine control dial is 0.8 to 4.2 V.
· Terminals #1 (3P) and #11 (12P) · Terminals #2 (3P) and #7 (12P) · Terminals #3 (3P) and #10 (12P)
NO
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side)
3
2
1
Faulty engine controller.
NO
Faulty harness in disconnected circuit.
Faulty engine control dial.
· Key switch: ON
Engine Control Dial (3P)
YES
Engine Controller (12P) 4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
11 10 9
T5-2-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A MOTOR SENSOR BREAKAGE AND SHORT CIRCUIT (System failure indicator: Flickering every 0.5 sec.) • Check for loose harness connections before hand.
• Conditions for judgment: Output voltage: 0.5 V and below / 4.5 V and above
Check continuity in circuits shown below where connector (6P) of governor actuator and connector (12P) of engine controller are disconnected.
YES Put engine control dial to SLOW IDLE and FAST IDLE. And measure voltage at respective positions. Check if voltage of #8 (12P) terminal of harness side connector for engine controller is as shown below.
· · · · ·
Terminals #1 (6P) and #10 (12P) Terminals #2 (6P) and #8 (12P) Terminals #3 (6P) and #11 (12P) Terminals #5 (6P) and #3 (12P) Terminals #6 (6P) and #4 (12P)
NO
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side)
Engine Controller (12P)
1
6
4
2
5
8
3
Faulty governor actuator.
NO
Faulty harness in disconnected circuit.
Faulty engine controller.
· Key switch: ON · Voltage: 0.5 V and below / 4.5 V and above
Governor Actuator (6P)
YES
3
2
1
7
6
5
11 10 9
T5-2-4
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A ABNORMAL MOTOR (System failure indicator: Lit) • Check for loose harness connections before hand.
YES
Faulty engine controller.
Check if output voltages of engine control dial and motor center are normal. · · · ·
Key switch: ON Engine control dial: 0.8 to 4.2 V (Refer to T5-2-3.) Motor sensor: Voltage: 0.5 V and below / 4.5 V and above (Refer to T5-2-4.)
Check continuity in circuits shown below where connector (6P) of governor actuator and connector (12P) of engine controller are disconnected.
NO
· Terminals #5 (6P) and #3 (12P) · Terminals #6 (6P) and #4 (12P)
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side) Governor Actuator (6P)
Engine Controller (12P)
1
6
4
2
5
8
3
3
2
1
7
6
5
11 10 9
T5-2-5
YES
Faulty governor actuator.
NO
Faulty harness in disconnected circuit.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A (Blank)
T5-2-6
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B TROUBLESHOOTING B PROCEDURE (DIAGNOSIS OF MACHINE BY SYMPTOM) This procedure is used when operating the diagnosis by the symptom.
• How to Read the Troubleshooting Flow Charts YES (OK) ・
(2)
After checking or measuring item (1), select either YES (OK) or NO (NOT OK) and proceed to item (2) or (3) next.
(1) (3) NO (NOT OK)
・ ・ Key switch: ON
・
As shown to the left, measuring methods or items to be referred to are indicated in the spaces under the box. Take care to measure or check correctly. Incorrect measuring or checking methods may result in making troubleshooting impossible, and may damage components.
The thick-line box indicates the causes. Scanning through thick-line boxes, possible causes can be focused.
NOTE: The connector drawings show the harness end connectors seen from the open end side.
Harness End Connector
Harness
Open End Side
T6L4-05-03-001
T5-3-1
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B ENGINE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Starter does not rotate
• Check fuse and connection beforehand.
YES
No voltage or less than 12 V at terminal B in starter.
With key switch positioned as YES shown in the table below, check if each terminal voltage on starter is normal. · Pilot shut-off lever: LOCK position
YES
NO
No voltage or less than 12 V at terminal #50 (S) in starter with key switch at START position.
Check if battery voltage and electrolyte density are normal.
· Key switch: START
· Voltage: 12 V or more · Density: 1.25 to 1.28 (at 20 degrees centigrade)
Check if voltage terminal #1 of connector R1 in starter relay 2 is 12V. · Key switch: START
NO Unit: V Key Switch Terminal B (M8) #50 (S)
NO
HEAT 12 0
OFF 12 0
ON 12 0
START 12 12
(When key switch is turned to the START position, if voltage at terminal B is lower than 9 volts, battery may be faulty.)
Starter voltage check
#50(S)
1. Turn key switch to the ON or START position. 2. Contact minus (−) probe of a circuit tester to the machine (ground to unpainted area like bolt head) and plus (+) probe terminals to the starter terminal respectively, and check voltages. (Measure with the harness connected.)
B
T1M7-05-03-001
T5-3-2
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
Faulty starter.
Broken harness between battery and starter or faulty connection.
Broken harness between starter relay 2 and starter.
YES Faulty starter relay 2. YES
YES
¡ Key switch: START
Check if voltage at terminal #1 of connector R2 in starter relay 2 is 12V.
Remove connector R1 of starter relay 2. Check if voltage at terminal #2 of connector R1 in starter relay 2 is 12V.
¡ Key switch: ON
Check if voltage at terminal #3 of connector R2 in starter relay 2 is 12V.
NO
NO
Faulty safety start relay, or broken harness between starter relay 2 and fuse box.
Broken harness between starter relay 2 and fuse box. Broken harness between starter relay 2 and battery (ZAXIS27U-2: between starter relay 2 and key switch).
NO
Faulty battery.
Connector (Harness end of connector viewed from the open end side) Starter Relay 2 Connector R1 2
1
Connector R2 3
2
1
6
5
4
T5-3-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Although starter rotates, engine does not start.
• The faulty engine and the faulty electrical circuit are suspected. This page describes the troubleshooting of electrical circuit (fuel pump, engine stop solenoid). In case of faulty engine, refer to "Engine Shop Manual". • Check for loose harness connections beforehand.
YES YES Check if voltage at terminal #3 on 1-second timer is 12V. · Key switch: ON
Check if voltage at terminal #2 on power relay is 12V.
YES
NO
Broken harness between power relay and fuse box.
NO
Remove fuel line that goes to engine at fuel pump. Check if fuel is delivered when key switch is turned ON. YES
Check if fuel filter is clogged.
NO
Connector (Harness end of connector viewed from the open end side) 1-second Timer
Power Relay 1
2
YES
NO
4
2
1
3
4
3
Fuel Pump 2
Broken harness between 1-second timer and fuse box.
Remove fuel pump connector. Check if voltage at terminal #1 on harness end connector is 12V. · Key switch: ON NO
1
T5-3-4
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Connector Engine Stop Solenoid R
YES
Fuel Pump
W
2
1
YES
B
Remove engine stop solenoid connector. YES Check if voltage at terminal R on harness end connector is 12V. Check if voltage terminal #1 on *engine controller is 12V.
· Key switch: ON
Check for continuity between terminal B on harness end connector in engine stop solenoid and vehicle. NO
NO
· Key switch: ON
A
Broken harness between engine stop solenoid and ground. Broken harness between engine stop solenoid and key switch. Broken harness between *engine controller and fuse box.
NO
Engine Stop Solenoid
Pin
T573-05-02-005
Faulty fuel filter.
Check for continuity between terminal #2 on harness end connector in fuel pump and vehicle.
YES
Faulty fuel pump.
NO
Broken harness between fuel pump and ground.
YES
Broken harness between fuse box and fuel pump.
Check if voltage at fuse #9 (10A) is 12V.
Faulty key switch, or broken harness between key switch and fuse box.
· Key switch: ON NO
T5-3-5
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
YES
A
Remove engine stop solenoid from engine body. Remove starter motor lead wire. Check if the pin on top of solenoid moves when key switch is in START position.
YES
Check if driving circuit of *governor actuator is normal. NO
Faulty *governor actuator or engine.
Faulty *engine controller.
Faulty engine stop solenoid.
NO
¡ Key switch: START
Starter Motor Lead Wire
T1M7-05-03-001
NOTE: The parts with mark * are used for ZAXIS 30U-2, 35U-2 only.
T5-3-6
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Faulty Auto-Idle System (ZAXIS30U-2, 35U-2 Only)
• If the system failure indicator is lighting, refer to T5-2-2.
• Refer to the pages for Auto-Idle Control in the SYSTEM / Control System group.
• Check for loose harness connections beforehand. • Although the control lever is turned to neutral, the auto-idle system is inoperable.
YES YES
Check if voltage at terminal #4 on conYES nector M1 in monitor is lower than 1V.
Check if voltage at terminal #6 on engine controller is lower than 1V. · Auto-idle switch: ON
· Auto-idle switch: ON
Check if voltage at terminal #9 on engine controller is lower than 2.5V.
NO
· Auto-idle switch: ON · Control lever: Neutral position
NO
Faulty engine controller.
Broken harness between engine controller and monitor.
Faulty auto-idle switch or monitor.
Faulty auto-idle pressure sensor.
NO
• Although the auto-idle switch is turned OFF, the auto-idle system is operated.
Short circuited harness between engine controller and monitor, or faulty monitor .
NO Check if voltage at terminal #6 on engine controller is higher than 5V. · Auto-idle switch: OFF
Faulty engine controller.
YES
Connector (Harness end of connector viewed from the open end side) Engine Controller
Monitor Connector M1
4
3
2
1
10 9
8
7
6
5
20
4 18 17
2
1
15 14 13 12 11
11 10 9
T5-3-7
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Engine is difficult to start at low temperature. (During cold weather or in cold districts, the engine is difficult to start or does not start although pre-heated.)
• The pre-heat system operates only when coolant temperature is below 10 °C (50 °F). When coolant temperature is higher than 10 °C (50 °F), the pre-heat system does not operate. • Check battery at the same time. • Check for loose harness connections beforehand. YES
Faulty air heater.
Remove air heater terminal. Check if voltage at harness end is 12V.
YES
· Key switch: HEAT or START
NO
Broken harness between key switch and air heater.
Check if voltage at terminal R1 on key switch is 12V. · Key switch: HEAT or START
Faulty key switch. NO
T5-3-8
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)
T5-3-9
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B ACTUATOR OPERATING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING All actuators do not work or do slowly.
• As all the control circuits are pilot systems, the pilot system may be faulty.
• Confirm that the air conditioner switch is OFF in the case of a cab version machine.
• Check for loose harness connections before hand.
Disconnect pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve connector. Measure voltage at YES terminal #1 on harness end connector. Check if voltage is 12V.
Check if there is contiYES nuity between terminal #2 on harness end connector and vehicle.
· Key switch : ON · Pilot control shut-off lever : UNLOCK position YES Check if main relief pressure is normal. · Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
NO
Check if primary pilot pressure is normal. NO
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
YES
NO
Disassemble, clean, and adjust pilot relief valve. Check if symptom disappears.
Disconnect pilot shut-off switch, and check if voltage measured at terminal #1 on harness side connector is 12V.
Faulty main relief valve in control valve.
End. (Faulty pilot relief valve).
Faulty pilot pump. NO
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side) Pilot Shut-Off Switch Pilot Shut-Off Solenoid Valve
2 1
T5-3-10
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Faulty pilot shut-off solenoid valve. (Spool is stuck.)
YES
YES
Disassemble pilot shut-off solenoid valve. Check if it is abnormal.
YES
NO
Disassemble revolution sensing valve or variable metering valve. Check if it is abnormal. NO
A
Broken ground circuit between pilot shut-off solenoid valve terminal #2 and vehicle.
NO
Faulty pilot shut-off switch, or broken harness between pilot shut-off switch and pilot shut-off solenoid valve.
YES
Faulty key switch, or broken harness between key switch terminal BR and pilot shut-off switch.
NO
YES
A
Faulty revolution sensing valve.
Faulty unload valve in control valve.
Disassemble unload valve in control valve. Check if it is abnormal.
YES
NO
Disassemble differential reducing valve in control valve. Check if it is abnormal. NO
T5-3-11
Faulty differential reducing valve in control valve. (Spool is stuck.)
Faulty main pump.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B All actuators work fast.
YES
Normal.
Check if hydraulic cylinder operating time is normal. · Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
Faulty revolution sensing valve.
NO
Actuators work when control lever is in neutral.
• Refer to T5-3-13 in case the Actuator doesn’t stop even if control lever is returned to neutral.
YES
Stuck pilot valve spool.
Turn the pilot shut-off lever into LOCKED position. Check if symptom disappears. Stuck control valve spool. NO
T5-3-12
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Actuators never stop even if control lever is returned to neutral.
Boom, Arm, Bucket, Boom Swing, or Blade
Replace overload relief valve corresponding to actuators and make-up valve (boom swing) with overload relief valve with normal actuator and make-up valve (boom swing). Check if symptom disappears.
YES
NO
YES
Check which actuators are abnormal. Swing
Sticking of spools of front attachment system control valves or pilot valves.
Sticking of spools of swing control valve or pilot valve.
Adjust swing relief valve. Check if trouble still appears. · Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
NO
YES
Travel
Faulty overload relief valve or faulty make-up valve in front attachment system.
Disassemble counterbalance valve in travel device. Check if they are abnormal. NO
T5-3-13
Faulty relief valve or faulty make-up valve in swing device. Faulty counterbalance valve in travel device.
Sticking of spools of right or left travel control valve or pilot valve.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)
T5-3-14
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B FRONT ATTACHMENT SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING All front attachment functions are weak.
• Not only the front attachment but also other functions will have the problem. If the travel function is also abnormal, refer to “All actuators do not work or do slowly (T5-3-10).” In case only the front attachment is abnormal, check the pilot valve.
T5-3-15
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Only Specific cylinder(s) does not work, or it (they) does slow and weakly.
â&#x20AC;˘ In case the cylinder speeds are slow, the pump flow rate may be reduced. If the pump flow rate is reduced due to some problems, only actuators requiring more oil flow rate than the reduced pump flow rate look to be slow. â&#x20AC;˘ In case the cylinder works weakly, the relief valve set pressure may be lower than specific one. Be careful not to mix the problem of slow with that of weak because these symptoms are different from each other.
Faulty overload relief valve corresponding to cylinder.
YES Replace overload relief valve corresponding to cylinder with normal one. Check if symptom disappears.
Faulty make-up valve corresponding to cylinder.
YES
Replace make-up valve corresponding to cylinder with the NO new one. Check if symptom disappears.
YES
NO
Disassemble pressure compensator in control valve corresponding to cylinder. Check if it is abnormal. NO
T5-3-16
Faulty pressure compensator corresponding to cylinder.
Disassemble shuttle valve in control valve corresponding to cylinder. Check if it is abnormal.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
Faulty shuttle valve in control valve corresponding to cylinder.
YES
Stuck control valve spool corresponding to cylinder.
YES
NO
Disassemble control valve spool corresponding to cylinder. Check if it is abnormal.
Faulty main pump.
NO
T5-3-17
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Only specific cylinder works fast.
• Even if the pump flow rate increases due to some problems in the pump, the oil flow rate is controlled so that the optimum oil flow can be supplied to the actuators by the flow Pressure Compensator in the control valve. Accordingly, any problems in the pump will not cause the actuator speed to increase. However, in case the flow pressure compensator is stuck in the open position, the flow pressure compensator will be unable to control the optimum oil flow to the actuators (excessive oil more than required will be supplied to the actuators). Therefore, stuck flow pressure compensator in the control valve may be the most possible cause in this case.
Only boom does not work, or it does slow.
YES
Check if pilot secondary pressure is normal.
Stuck boom anti-drift valve in control valve.
YES Disassemble boom anti-drift valve in control valve. Check if it is abnormal. NO
Faulty overload relief valve in control valve.
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”. Faulty pilot valve. NO
T5-3-18
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Front attachment cylinders leaking (drift) is large.
YES
Normal.
YES Check if each front attachment cylinder drift is within standards.
NO Check if oil leaks inside cylinder.
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”. Check if symptom disappears when pilot NO control shut-off lever is turned into LOCK position.
NO
Faulty seal in cylinder.
Faulty boom anti-drift valve, faulty overload relief valve, scored control valve spool, damaged spring, or loosed spool end.
Faulty pilot valve. YES
Boom cylinder inner leak check 1. With the bucket cylinder fully retracted and the arm cylinder slightly extended from the fully retracted position, lower the bucket tooth tip to the ground. 2. Disconnect the hydraulic hose at the rod side of boom cylinder, and drain oil in the cylinder and hose. (Install a plug on disconnected hose end from vehicle.) 3. Retract the rod of the arm cylinder to raise the bucket from the ground. If oil comes out from disconnected and opened pipe on boom cylinder and the rod of that is retracted, oil is leaking in the boom cylinder. If oil does not come out from disconnected pipe on boom cylinder and the rod of that is retracted, oil is leaking in the control valve.
T5-3-19
T1M9-05-03-001
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B When control levers are operated (boom raise, arm roll-out), front attachment drops briefly, and then begins to work.
Internal leakage in cylinder.
YES
Check if load check valve in control valve is normal. ¡ Visually check after disassembling.
Faulty load check valve. NO
NOTE: 1. During the initial stage of operation, the oil pressure and flow rate from the pump are low. If the load check valve is failed, oil in the bottom side of cylinder flows back into the circuit through the load check valve, causing the boom cylinder to temporarily retract because of the load on boom cylinder. 2. If oil is leaking from bottom side (A) to rod side (B) due to the failed piston or tube of the boom cylinder, the boom cylinder temporarily retracts as oil pressure and flow rate from the pump is low during the initial stage of operation. Then, the cylinder cannot support the load, reducing cylinder force and increasing the cylinder drift in this case.
T5-3-20
(B)
At failure in load check valve
(A)
T105-07-04-012
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)
T5-3-21
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B SWING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Upperstructure does not swing, its speed is slow, or its swing power is weak.
YES
Check if problem disappears after control valve spool is disassembled and cleaned.
Check if swing motor YES oil drain amount is normal. · Refer to "OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST".
Check if swing YES motor relief pressure is normal.
Check if swing pilot secondary pressure is normal.
NO
Faulty swing motor.
· Refer to "OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST". Faulty swing motor relief valve.
NO
· Refer to "OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST". NO
Faulty pilot valve.
T5-3-22
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
YES
Faulty control valve spool (stuck).
YES Disassemble presNO sure compensator in control valve. Check if it in control valve is abnormal.
Faulty pressure compensator in control valve. YES
Check if make-up valve in swing device NO is abnormal.
Disassemble shuttle valve in control valve. Check if it is NO abnormal.
NO
Faulty make-up valve in swing device. Faulty swing reduction gear or faulty signal passage (contamination ingress) to swing pressure compensator (control valve). Faulty shuttle valve in control valve.
YES
T5-3-23
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B TRAVEL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Machine does not travel, or does slowly, or travel weakly.
• Both right and left travel motors seldom become faulty at same time. Although the trouble shooting hare is for the vehicle that both right and left travel motors become faulty. When only one side is faulty, refer to “The excavator mistracks”. Travel speed does not change to the fast speed.
• Check for loose harness connections before hand.
• In case the problem cannot be solved due to the flowchart below, the travel speed changeover valve in travel device may be faulty.
YES
Check if terminal #1 on harness end connector of travel speed changeover solenoid valve is 12V.
Check if selection movement sound of solenoid valve is heard if terminal #2 of travel speed changeover solenoid valve connector is connected to machine body. · Key switch : ON · Travel Speed Selector Switch : Fast · Ground the connector to the vehicle with a clip without disconnecting.
· Key switch : ON · Travel Speed Selector Switch : Fast · Measure voltage with a clip without disconnecting. NO
YES
NO
YES
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side)
2
1
Faulty travel speed changeover solenoid valve. (Spool is stuck.)
Faulty travel speed selector switch.
Disconnect travel speed selector switch, and check if voltage measured at terminal #2 on harness side is 12V.
NO
Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve
Broken harness in ground circuit.
Travel Speed Selector Switch
3
6
2
5
T5-3-24
Broken harness between travel speed selector switch and fuse box.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Travel speed does not change to the slow speed.
â&#x20AC;˘ Be sure to inspect wiring connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES
Fault travel speed selector valve.
Check if problem disappears after disconnecting travel speed changeover solenoid valve connector.
Faulty travel speed changeover solenoid valve. (Spool is stuck.)
NO
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side) Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve 2
1
T5-3-25
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Machine mistracks.
• Check that both side track sags are equally adjusted.
• In case the problem cannot be solved due to the flowchart below, the shuttle valve in control valve may be faulty.
Faulty pressure compensator in control valve.
YES
Disassemble pressure comYES pensator in control valve travel right or left section. Check if it is abnormal.
Check if secondary travel pilot pressure is normal.
NO Check if travel NO motor drain oil amount is normal.
NO
Check if problem is reversed when travel hoses under center joint are switched.
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
YES
Faulty travel motor.
Faulty travel motor swash angle change mechanism and travel reduction gear. Faulty center joint.
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
YES Faulty travel pilot valve.
NO
Relationship between Faulty Seal Location and Mistrack Direction Seal No. 1
When traveling straight:
When pivot turn is performed:
Right Travel Forward
2 Right Travel Reverse
2 3
1
Left Travel Forward Left Travel Reverse
3 4 5
4 5
W1M9-03-03-002
T5-3-26
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B BLADE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Blade does not move, or its speed is slow.
• When blade raise is slow, if reverse travel left is also influenced, faulty center joint (faulty sealing) is suspected. Faulty seal in cylinder.
YES
Remove rod pin of blade cylinder, and have cylinder fully retracted. Remove bottom YES hose, and attach plug on hose side. Check if oil leaks from bottom port of cylinder when blade raise operation is made. Check if pilot valve secondary pressure is normal.
NO
Disassemble pressure compensator in control valve. Check if it is abnormal.
Faulty pressure compensator in control valve.
YES
NO
Disassemble shuttle valve in control valve. Check if it is abnormal.
A
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”. Faulty blade pilot valve.
NO
NO
Faulty center joint.
YES
Faulty shuttle valve in control valve.
A
Left Travel Reverse Blade Raise Blade Lower Travel Motor Displacement Angle Control Pilot Pressure
W1M9-03-03-002
T5-3-27
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B BOOM SWING SHOOTING
SYSTEM
TROUBLE-
Boom swing does not work or does slowly.
• In case the problem cannot be solved due to the flowchart below, the shuttle valve in control valve may be faulty. • In case one side only cannot be operated or moves slowly, the make-up valve may be faulty.
Faulty seal in cylinder.
YES Operate boom swing toward left, and have cylinder fully extended. Remove piping on rod YES side, and attach plug on hose side. Check if oil leaks from port on cylinder rod side when swing left operation is made. Check if pilot valve secondary pressure is normal.
YES
NO
Disassemble pressure compensator in control valve. Check if it is abnormal.
NO
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
Faulty pressure compensator in control valve.
Spool in control valve is stuck.
Faulty boom swing pilot valve.
NO
T5-3-28
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING (Cab Version Only) NOTE: Refer to the explanation page on “AIR CONDITIONER OPERATION” in Operator’s Manual. 4
1
2
A
3 M1M7-01-004 M1M7-01-009
4
View A
5
6
7
8
9 M1M7-01-010
1 - Right Front Air Vent 1 (Defroster) 2 - Right Front Air Vent 2
4 - Air Conditioner Control Panel 5 - Air Conditioner Switch
6-
Vent Mode Switch
8-
Blower Switch
7-
Temperature Control Switch
9-
Air Conditioner Power Switch
3 - Foot Air Vent
T5-3-29
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B ※ Please fill in all sections and return this AIR CONDITIONER TROUBLE REPORT to Hitachi Works Quality Assurance Dept. after experiencing a problem with your machine’s air conditioning system.
< AIR CONDITIONER TROUBLE REPORT >
File No.
(1) What Checked by: Model (Serial No. ) Operation Type Manual Semi-Auto Full-Auto Delivery Date Year Month (2) When Date Year Month Day Operating Hour ( h) Time Morning Daytime Evening Night Frequency Every Day Once a Week Once a Month Times per (3) Where Job Site Address State County Town Access Road Condition Paved Not Paved (Gravel Sand Soil) (4) How (Operating Conditions) Weather Fine Cloudy Rain Snow Atmospheric Temperature Very Hot Hot Cold Very Cold Operating Conditions Parking Traveling Working Temperature Control Paint blanks equal to red indicators. / Fill in set-temperature when full-auto operation A/C ON OFF Air Induction Re-Circulation Fresh Air Circulation Control Panel AUTO ON OFF Not Available Fill following items when operated in manual mode or when manual control type unit is used. Vent Position Front Front / Rear Front / Foot Foot Front / Rear and Foot Fan First Second Third Fourth Fifth Sixth (5) How (Problem Symptom) Abnormal Compressor Operation <Check Result> Symptom Not turned ON (1) Is problem reproducible ? Not turned OFF Reproducible Others Not reproducible Uncontrollable air temperature (2) Pressure (To be measured at gauge manifold) Symptom No cool air Low Pressure No warm air High Pressure Others (3) Which parts have been replaced ? Uncontrollable air volume 1 Symptom Air flows in Hi mode only No air flows Small air volume Others Uncontrollable vent hole Symptom Vent hole isn’t selected Others Abnormal panel indication Faulty Indicator Vent Hole A/C AUTO Fresh Air Circulation Fan OFF Fan (Lo • •• Hi) Temperature Control Symptom Stays OFF Stays ON Blinks Others
2
∗ Before replacing the control amplifier, be sure to
check that the connectors are correctly connected while repeatedly disconnecting and reconnecting connectors.
T5-3-30
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Refrigerant Quantity ....................... 550±50 g 3 Compressor Oil Quantity ................ 100 cm
T5-3-31
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Cooling Circuit Refrigerant pressure in both high and low-pressure sides is low.
Bubbles can be seen in sight glass.
No bubbles are seen in sight glass.
Piping and/or parts are stained with oil, respond to gas detector. No oil stain is found or gas detector doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t respond. Refrigerant has not been refilled for longer than one season.
After cooling at fast speed continuously, cooling power is reduced. Air flow volume remains unchanged.
Air flow volume is reduced.
Insufficient cooling power.
Refrigerant pressure in low-pressure side is high.
Bubbles can be seen in sight glass.
Compressor cylinder is extremely hot, emitting a smell.
Refrigerant pressure in high-pressure side is low.
Compressor cylinder is extremely hot, emitting a smell.
Heater unit emits hot air.
Refrigerant pressure in high-pressure side is high.
Bubbles can be seen in sight glass.
Refrigerant pressure in low-pressure side is low.
Condenser is stained and clogged. Even if condenser is sprayed with water, few bubbles appear. Receiver dryer temperature is low.
After cooling at fast speed continuously, cooling power is reduced. Air flow volume is reduced.
Frost forms.
Thermistor doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t cool. Thermistor cools.
T5-3-32
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Gas leaks from pipe joints and/or parts.
Re-tighten or replace parts.
Normal leakage of refrigerant from hoses.
Refill refrigerant.
Improper adjustment (excessive restriction) of expansion valve.
Readjust or replace expansion valve.
Clogged expansion valve.
Remove clog, or replace receiver and/or expansion valve.
Clogged low-pressure circuit and/or evaporator.
Remove clog, or replace parts.
Frozen expansion valve or water in circuit.
After evacuation, refill refrigerant and/or replace receiver-dryer.
Gas leaks from case.
Seal gaps using vinyl tape or packing compound.
Poor contact of expansion valve temperature sensing cylinder.
Make good contact. Replace temperature sensing stay.
Improper adjustment (excessive open) of expansion valve.
Readjust or replace.
Insufficient compressor discharge (faulty gasket and/or valve).
Replace.
Improper water stop valve wire adjustment and/or faulty stop valve.
Check and readjust or replace.
Clogged high-pressure circuit before receiver dryer.
Remove clog, or replace parts. Clean Condenser.
Excessive refrigerant.
Remove excessive refrigerant to proper level.
Air is mixed in system.
After evacuation, refill refrigerant and/or replace receiver dryer.
Incorrect thermistor location.
Correct thermistor location.
Gas leaks from case.
Seal gaps using vinyl tape or packing compound.
Faulty thermistor (stays ON).
Disconnected thermistor cord.
Even if function and performance are normal, when air-conditioner is kept operated for a long time with thermistor in max. cooling position and air flow in M or L mode, frost may form.
Instruct user on correct air-conditioner operation. (Reset thermistor to either minimum or middle cooling position or increase air flow.)
T5-3-33
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Air Conditioner Electrical Circuit Diagram Key Switch Battery
Fuse Box Blower Motor Relay (Hi)
Blower Motor Relay (Mid)
Blower Motor Relay (Low)
Compressor Relay Work Light Switch
Blower Motor
Register
Pressure Switch (Receiver-Dryer)
Air Conditioner Unit Compressor Thermistor
Flow Direction Selector Motor
Water Valve
Air Conditioner Controller
Air Conditioner Control Panel T1M9-05-03-002
T5-3-34
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Air conditioner does not work, and LEDs on air conditioner control panel are not lit at all.
• Check the wire connection part first. • In case the failure also influences the radio or monitor hour meter, faulty #2 fuse is suspected.
• In case the work light is not lit, faulty #2 fuse or work light switch are suspected. Otherwise, possible disconnection of the harness wire between #5 fuse and the work light switch is suspected.
YES
Remove connector (18P) of air conditioner control panel. Check if voltage at #1 terminal on harness end connector is 12 V.
· Key switch: ON · Work light switch: ON
Remove RemoveAC1 AC1connector connector (30P) (30P) of of controller. controller. Check Checkif ifvoltage voltageatof#2 conand #5nectors terminals #2on and harness #5 on end connector harnessisside 12 is V.12 V.
YES
NO
Faulty controller.
Faulty air conditioner control panel or broken harness between work light switch and air conditioner control panel.
· Key switch: ON Faulty #7 fuse or broken harness between #2 and #7 fuses and controller.
NO
Connector Controller AC1 (30P)
Air Conditioner Control Panel (18P)
T1M9-05-03-003
T5-3-35
T1M9-05-03-005
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Air vent temperature control is impossible.
• Check the wire connection part first.
YES
NO
Faulty water valve.
Check water valve for fall of rod or smooth opening and closing if it is abnormal.
Remove AC1 connector (30P) of controller, connector (6P) of water valve, and connector (7P) of flow direction selector motor. Check for continuity between controller and terminals below on harness end connectors of water valve.
NO Check if anything prevents rotation of YES flow direction selector motor. Is there any interference? Operate temperature control switch, and confirm that 1 to 7 LEDs (orange color) for air vent temperature indication are normally lit. Do they keep on flickering?
· · · · · ·
YES
· Key switch: ON · Air conditioner switch: ON
#3 and #1 terminals #9 and #6 terminals #15 and #2 terminals #19 and #3 terminals #21 and #5 terminals #26 and #4 terminals Removal of interference or repair/replacement of failure parts.
Faulty flow direction selector motor, faulty water valve, or faulty air conditioner control valve.
NO
Connector Water Valve (6P)
Controller AC1 (30P)
T1M9-05-03-003
Flow Direction Selector Motor (7P)
T1M9-05-03-011
T5-3-36
T1M9-05-03-007
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
YES YES
Faulty water valve.
Check water valve if it is abnormal. Faulty controller. NO
NO
Broken harness in area of discontinuity.
T5-3-37
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Compressor clutch is not turned ON.
• Check the wire connection part first. • Confirm that the circuit is filled with refrigerant. • Confirm that the temperature in the cab is 2 °C (35.6 °F) and above.
YES
YES
Remove connector of compressor. Operate temperature control switch, and confirm that 1 to 7 LEDs (orange color) for air vent temperature indication are normally lit. Do they keep on flickering?
Remove AC1 connector (30P) of controller, connector (6P) of water valve, connector (7P) of flow direction selector motor, and connector (2P) of thermistor. Check for continuity between terminals below on harness end connectors of controller and thermistor.
YES
Faulty thermistor cord or faulty thermistor.
Check if thermistor is abnormal. Faulty controller. NO
Broken harness in area of discontinuity.
NO
· #4 terminal of controller and #2 terminal of thermistor · #15 terminal of controller and #1 terminal of thermistor Faulty compressor (clutch).
YES
· Key switch: ON · Air conditioner switch: ON · Blower switch: ON (I) NO
Remove connector of compressor. Check if voltage at terminals on harness end connector is 12 V. (at thermostat ON) · Key switch: ON · Air conditioner switch: ON
NO
Remove pressure switch connector of receiver-dryer. Check for continuity between terminals on switch end connector.
Connector Controller AC1 (30P)
Compressor
T1M9-05-03-012 T1M9-05-03-003
Flow Direction Selector Motor (7P)
Water Valve (6P)
T1M9-05-03-011 T1M9-05-03-007
T5-3-38
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
Faulty compressor relay or faulty compressor relay circuit.
YES
YES
Check if air conditioner works normally by replacing compressor relay with another.
NO
NO
Faulty controller.
YES
Faulty harness of compressor relay circuit.
Check if compressor relay circuit is broken or shortened.
Faulty pressure switch.
NO
Compressor Thermistor (2P)
Pressure Switch (Receiver-Dryer) (2P)
T1M9-05-03-013 T1M9-05-03-009
T5-3-39
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Blower motor does not rotate.
• Check the wire connection part first. • If blower motor is definitely abnormal, check it first.
• Confirm indication change of blower switches (I), (II), and (III).
• Confirm that compressor works normally.
NO
YES
Remove blower motor. Check if any foreign substance prevents rotation of blower fan.
Remove connector (2P) of air conditioner unit blower motor. Check for continuity between #1 and #2 terminals on motor end connector.
YES
Faulty blower motor. NO
Stall of blower motor due to foreign substance. (Remove foreign substance.)
YES Blower motor does not rotate at every flow rate settings of I, II, and III.
YES
NO
Faulty controller, faulty air conditioner control panel, or broken harness between relays on register and blower motor of air conditioner unit.
Check if blower motor rotates normally by replacing blower motor relay in failure position with another. Blower motor relay corresponding to blower switch: · Blower switch (I): Blower motor relay (Low) · Blower switch (II): Blower motor relay (Mid) · Blower switch (III): Blower motor relay (Hi)
NO
Faulty blower motor relay.
YES
Remove connector (4P) of air conditioner unit register. Check for continuity between terminals below on register end connector.
Faulty controller, faulty air conditioner control panel, or broken harness between controller and blower motor relay.
Faulty register. NO · #3 and #1 terminals · #3 and #4 terminals
Connector Register (4P)
Blower Motor (2P)
T1M9-05-03-008 T1M9-05-03-010
T5-3-40
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)
T5-3-41
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Flow rate selection is impossible.
â&#x20AC;˘ Check the wire connection part first. â&#x20AC;˘ Confirm indication change of blower switches (I), (II), and (III) of air conditioner control panel.
Flow rates I and II cannot be selected. (Flow rates of I and II are the same.)
Faulty blower motor relays (Low) or (Mid).
YES
Check if replacing blower motor relays (Low) and (Mid) with others recovers normal condition.
NO
Remove connector (4P) of air conditioner unit register. Check for continuity between vehicle frame and #1 and #4 terminals on harness end connector.
YES
NO
Short-circuited harness between register and blower motor relay (Low) or (Mid).
Faulty controller or air conditioner control panel.
Flow rates I and III cannot be selected. (Flow rates of I and III are the same.)
Faulty blower motor relay (Low) or (Hi).
YES
Check if replacing blower motor relays (Low) and (Hi) recovers normal condition.
NO
Remove connector (4P) of air conditioner unit register. Check for continuity between vehicle frame and #3 and #4 terminals on harness end connector.
Connector Register (4P)
T1M9-05-03-010
T5-3-42
YES
NO
Short-circuited harness between register and blower motor relay (Low) or (Hi).
Faulty controller or air conditioner control panel.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Flow rates II and III cannot be selected. (Flow rates of II and III are the same.) Faulty blower motor relay (Hi) or (Mid).
YES
Check if replacing blower motor relays (Hi) and (Mid) with others recovers normal condition.
NO
Remove connector (4P) of air conditioner unit register. Check for continuity between vehicle frame and #1 and #3 terminals on harness end connector.
YES
NO
Short-circuited harness between register and blower motor relay (Hi) or (Mid).
Faulty controller or air conditioner control panel.
Flow rates I, II, and III cannot be selected. (Flow rates of I, II, and III are the same.)
Faulty blower motor relay (Low), (Mid), or (Hi).
YES
Check if replacing blower motor relays (Low), (Mid), and (Hi) recovers normal condition.
NO
Remove connector (4P) of air conditioner unit register. Check for continuity between vehicle frame and #1, #3, and #4 terminals on harness end connector.
Connector Register (4P)
T1M9-05-03-010
T5-3-43
YES
NO
Short-circuited harness between register and blower motor relay (Low), (Mid), or (Hi).
Faulty controller or air conditioner control panel.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Air vent selection is impossible.
• Check the wire connection part first. Remove AC1 connector (30P) of controller, connector (6P) of water valve, and connector (7P) of flow direction selector motor. Check for continuity between terminals below on harness end connector.
NO
YES
Check if anything prevents rotation of flow direction selector motor if it is abnormal.
· · · · · ·
Operate vent mode switch, and confirm if vent mode switch LED is lit normally. Check if any one keeps on flickering.
YES
NO
#1 and #3 terminals #7 and #4 terminals #10 and #7 terminals #15 and #2 terminals #19 and #1 terminals #24 and #6 terminals
A
Broken harness in area of discontinuity.
Removal of interference or repair / replacement of failure parts.
YES
· Key switch: ON · Air conditioner switch: ON
Faulty air conditioner control panel or controller.
NO
YES
A
Check flow direction selector motor if it is abnormal. NO
Faulty flow direction selector motor.
Faulty air conditioner controller.
Connector Controller AC1 (30P) Flow Direction Selector Motor (7P)
T1M9-05-03-003
Water Valve (6P)
T1M9-05-03-007
T5-3-44
T1M9-05-03-011
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B WORK AFTER NENTS
REPLACING
COMPO-
The following work is required after replacing compressor, high pressure hose, low pressure hose, condenser, receiver-dryer, liquid hose, and air conditioner unit. The same work is required when gas leakage is found. 1. Add compressor oil 3 Compressor oil quantity: 100 cm 2. Charge air conditioner with refrigerant • Purging • Charge air conditioner with refrigerant • Warm up operation • Inspection
T5-3-45
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B CHARGE AIR REFRIGERANT
CONDITIONER
WITH
Necessity of Purging Be sure to purge the air conditioner circuit with a vacuum before charging with refrigerant (HFC-134a) because the following problems can arise if air or other gases remain in the A/C circuit. Air
1. Pressure rise in the high pressure side If air remains in the air conditioner circuit, this disturbs the heat exchange between refrigerant and air in the condenser, causing pressure to rise in the high pressure side (compressor side). Usually, refrigerant gas is easily liquefied; however, air cannot be liquefied and remains as a gas in the condenser because the temperature at which air liquefies is extremely low. That is, liquidation of the refrigerant gas in the condenser decreases by the amount of air in the circuit, and the gas pressure in the high pressure side increases accordingly.
Pressure increases if air remains in the air conditioner circuit
W115-02-10-001
2. Metal corrosion If air remains in the air conditioner circuit, a chemical reaction between refrigerant and moisture in the air takes place, and as a result, hydrochloric acid, that corrodes metals such as aluminum, copper and iron, is produced. Hydrochloric acid corrodes metals if moisture exists
Hydrochloric acid
W115-02-10-002
Metal corrosion
3. Plugging of the expansion valve by moisture When high pressure refrigerant gas passes through the expansion valve, gas pressure decreases and temperature drops. Moisture included in high pressure refrigerant gas in the air conditioner circuit freezes at the expansion valve orifice, plugging refrigerant flow. Operation of the air conditioner becomes unstable and cooling efficiency lowers.
Ice produced at the expansion valve disturbs refrigerant flow, lowering cooling efficiency
Plugged refrigerant flow W115-02-10-003
Low cooling efficiency
T5-3-46
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B PURGING PROCEDURE
Gauge Manifold
IMPORTANT: Never mistake the charge hose connections. 1. Close the high and low pressure valves on the gauge manifold. Connect the high-pressure-side charge hose and the low-pressure-side charge hoses to the high-pressure-side charge valve (“D” marked) and to the low-pressure-side charge valve (“S” marked) located on the compressor, respectively. Connect the charge hose located on the center of the manifold bottom to the vacuum pump.
Low Pressure Valve Low Pressure Charge Hose
High Pressure Valve High Pressure Charge Hose
Center Pressure Charge Hose Vacuum Pump
W115-02-10-005
Low Pressure Side S Compressor D High Pressure Side
IMPORTANT: In case refrigerant remains inside the air conditioner circuit, recover it first with the recovery machine, and then operate the vaccuum pump.
T142-02-05-018
Fully Open
Fully Open
2. Open the high pressure and low pressure valves in the gauge manifold. Perform purging for 30 minutes or more by operating the vacuum pump.
In Operation
W115-02-10-005
T5-3-47
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B IMPORTANT: If the pointer returns to 0, retighten the line connections and perform purging again.
Close
3. When the low pressure gauge reading falls below â&#x2C6;&#x2019;0.1 MPa (â&#x2C6;&#x2019;750 mmHg), stop the vacuum pump and close the high and low pressure valves. Wait for approximately five minutes and confirm that the pointer does not return to 0.
Close
In Operation
W115-02-10-005
4. With the high pressure and low pressure valves of the gauge manifold closed, connect the charge hose to the refrigerant container.
Refrigerant Container
W115-02-10-007
5. Loosen the charge hose connection to the gauge manifold and open the refrigerant container valve to purge air in the charge hose with the refrigerant pressure. Loosen
Open
W115-02-10-007
T5-3-48
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B IMPORTANT: Always stop the engine when charging the air conditioner with refrigerant. Never position the refrigerant container upside down during charging operation. When changing the refrigerant container during charging operation, be sure to purge air from the charge hose, as shown in step 10. 6. Fully tighten the charge hose connection to the gauge manifold. Open the high pressure valve and refrigerant container valve to charge with refrigerant (HFC-134a). Close the high pressure valve and refrigerant container valve when the high pressure gauge 2 reading reaches 98 kPa (1 kgf/cm , 14 psi). NOTE: Use warm water of 40 °C (104 °F) or less to warm the refrigerant container to aid in charging operation.
CAUTION: For inspection of refrigerant leakage, be sure to use a leakage tester for HFC-134a. Never use a halide lamp used for leakage inspection of refrigerant CFC-12 (R-12). HFC-134a, if exposed to fire, dissolves and generates toxic gas. 7. After finishing charging, inspect gas leakage with a tester for HFC-134a.
T5-3-49
High Pressure Gauge Tighten
Open
Open
W115-02-10-007
W115-02-10-008
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B 8. Confirm that the high pressure and low pressure valves in the gauge manifold and the refrigerant container valve are closed. Start the engine and operate the air conditioner. Operating Conditions of the Air Conditioner: Engine Speed : Slow Idle Cab Window : Fully Open Air Conditioner Switch : ON Blower Switch : Maximum Temperature Control Switch : Maximum Open
IMPORTANT: Never open the high pressure valve in the gauge manifold. 9. Open the low pressure valve in the gauge manifold and the refrigerant container valve to charge with refrigerant until the bubbles seen in the receiver-dryer sight glass disappear. Required refrigerant quantity: 550±50 g 10. If the refrigerant container becomes empty during the charging work, replace it with a new refrigerant container as follows: • Close the high pressure and low pressure valves on the manifold gauge. • Replace the empty container with a new one. • Tighten, then slightly loosen the refrigerant container joint. • Slightly open the low pressure valve on the manifold gauge. • When the refrigerant container joint starts to leak, immediately tighten the refrigerant container joint and close the low pressure valve on the manifold gauge.
Open
W115-02-10-007
Close
11. After charging, close the low pressure valve in the gauge manifold and the refrigerant container valve, and stop the engine. Close
W115-02-10-007
T5-3-50
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B IMPORTANT: If the air conditioner is operated with very low refrigerant, a bad load will be exerted on the compressor. If the air conditioner is overcharged with refrigerant, cooling efficiency will lower and abnormal high pressure will arise in the air conditioner circuit, causing danger. 12. Start the engine and operate the air-conditioner again. Observe the sight glass of the receiver-dryer to check refrigerant quantity. Operating Conditions of the Air Conditioner: Engine Speed : Slow Idle Cab Window : Fully Open Air Conditioner Switch : ON Blower Switch : Maximum Temperature Control Switch : Maximum
Sight Glass
Receiver-Dryer
NOTE: As the bubbles in the sight glass vary depending on the ambient temperature, check refrigerant quantity confirming the changes in pressure .
T5-3-51
W115-02-10-009
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B â&#x20AC;˘ Checking procedures:
Stop the air conditioner and wait until refrigerant returns to the balanced pressure. Then, start the air conditioner again.
Relation between Refrigerant Refrigerant Flow in Sight Glass: Refrigerant Quantity
Quantity
and
Refrigerant Flow in Sight Glass (approx. 1 min. after air conditioner switch is turned ON) (immediately after)
(approx. 1 mm after)
Adequate
Explanation for Refrigerant Flow in Sight Glass Immediately after the air conditioner is turned ON, few bubbles are seen. Then the flow becomes transparent and shows thin milk white color.
W115-02-10-016
No bubbles are seen after the air conditioner is turned ON.
Overcharged W115-02-10-017
Bubbles are seen continuously after the air conditioner is turned ON.
Not Enough W115-02-10-018
W115-02-10-019
115-02-10-021
Bubbles exist: Bubbles are seen in refrigerant flow as both liquid refrigerant and refrigerant gas exist, being mixed.
Milk white: Refrigerant flow shows thin milk white as oil and refrigerant are separated.
W115-02-10-020
Transparent: Refrigerant flow is transparent as only liquid refrigerant exists.
T5-3-52
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B CAUTION: Wait until the high-pressure-side pressure drops to less than 980 kPa (10 2 kgf/cm , 142 psi) before attempting to disconnect the high-pressure-side charge hose. Otherwise, refrigerant and compressor oil may spout. 13. After checking refrigerant quantity, disconnect the low-pressure-side charge hose first. Wait for the high-pressure-side pressure to drop to less than 2 980 kPa (10 kgf/cm , 142 psi). Disconnect the high-pressure-side charge hose. NOTE: For environmental protection, do not discharge residual refrigerant inside the charge hose, no matter how small the amount is.
T5-3-53
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B WARM-UP OPERATION After charting the air conditioner, carry out warm-up operation five minute to lubricate system with compressor oil. Operating Conditions of the Air Conditioner: Engine Speed : Slow Idle Cab Window : Fully Open Air Conditioner Switch : ON Blower Switch : Maximum Temperature Control Switch : Maximum
T5-3-54
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B INSPECTION After warm-up operation, carry out gas leak check and performance check. CAUTION: Refrigerant will produce poisonous material if exposed to heat of 1000 °C (1800 °F) or more. Never bring refrigerant close to a fire. 1. Check the air conditioner for gas leaks using a leak tester. • Perform checking under well-ventilated conditions. • Thoroughly wipe off dust from the charge hose connections of the compressor. • Pay special attention to check the line connections. • If any gas leaks are found, retighten the line connections. 2. Performance Check Carry out performance check of the air conditioner after checking each air conditioner component. • Check each component for abnormalities. • Carry out ON-OFF check of the compressor clutch. • Check compressor fan belt tension. • Check the coolant level in the radiator. • Operate the air conditioner and check the performance. 3. The checklist before the summer season is as follows: • Check each air conditioner component for abnormalities. • Check the line connections for oil leaks. • Check refrigerant quantity. • Check the engine cooling circuit. • Check belts for wear. Replace if necessary. 4. Off-Season Maintenance • During off-season, operate the idler pulley and compressor at least once a month for a short time to check for any abnormal sounds. • Do not remove the compressor belts during off-season. Operate the compressor occasionally at slow speed for 5 to 10 minutes with the belt slightly loosened in order to lubricate the machine parts.
T5-3-55
Leak Tester
W115-02-10-013
Retighten Line Connection
W115-02-10-014
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B HOW TO LOWER BOOM WHEN ENGINE STOPS With the boom raised if the engine stops and does not restart for some reason, lower the boom in the following procedures. If the front attachment is not loaded. CAUTION: Loosen overload relief valve slowly. If it is loosened rapidly, the boom may lower rapidly. Do not loosen it more than 3/4 turns, as the hydraulic oil may spout. 1. Observing movement of the boom, gradually release the overload relief valve in the boom raise circuit (on the cylinder bottom side). (Lower the pressure in the circuit on the boom cylinder bottom side.) : 24 mm 2. After checking that boom has lowered completely, tighten the overload relief valve.
Overload Relief Valve in the Boom Raise Circuit
T1M9-03-04-001
If the front attachment is loaded. 1. Put alignment marks on the overload relief valve lock nut and adjusting screw in the boom raise circuit (on the cylinder bottom side).
Lock Nut
CAUTION: Loosen the adjusting screw slowly. If it is loosened rapidly, the boom will lower rapidly. 2. Loosen the lock nut. Loosen adjusting screw slowly checking the movement of boom. : 6 mm : 17 mm 3. After checking that the boom is lowered completely, align the marks and tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 N⋅m (3.5 to 4 kgf⋅m, 25.3 to 29 lbf⋅ft) IMPORTANT: After re-tightening the overload relief valve or lock nut, check the set pressure of the overload relief valve.
T5-3-56
Adjusting Screw T566-03-03-018
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B HOW TO PREVENT HORN BLOWING AT KEY SWITCH POSITION OF OFF Normally, the horn can be blown even at OFF position of the key switch. In an immobilizer version machine (optional), the horn switch needs to be pressed for releasing the lock. At that time, horn blowing can be prevented by changing connection of the harnesses. In case such setting is desired that the horn does not blow on releasing lock (key switch position OFF) of the immobilizer (optional), follow the following procedure.
Under the Seat
Female Plug Receptacle (Label: ACC)
1. Detach the plug receptacle (labeled D) under the seat. 2. Connect the detached male plug receptacle (labeled D) to the female plug receptacle (labeled ACC). IMPORTANT: After work, confirm that the horn is blown at the key switch position of ON.
Plug Receptacle (Label: D)
T1M7-05-03-004
Electrical Circuit
From Battery
Plug Receptacle (Label: D)
Horn Switch Horn
Horn Relay
T5-3-57
T1M7-05-03-003
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)
T5-3-58
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C TROUBLESHOOTING C PROCEDURE (DIAGNOSIS OF MONITOR) This procedure is used when there are malfunction on components regarding monitor, such as gauge or indicators.
• How to Read the Troubleshooting Flow Charts YES (OK) ・
(2)
After checking or measuring item (1), select either Yes (OK) or No (NOT OK) and proceed to item (2) or (3) next.
(1) (3) NO (NOT OK)
・
· Key switch: ON
As shown to the left, measuring methods or items to be referred to are indicated in the spaces under the box. Take care to measure or check correctly. Incorrect measuring or checking methods may result in making troubleshooting impossible, and may damage components.
The thick-line box indicates the causes. Scanning through thick-line boxes, possible causes can be focused.
・
NOTE: The connector drawings show the harness end connectors, seen from the open end side.
Harness End Connector
Harness
Open End Side
T6L4-05-03-001
T5-4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF COOLANT TEPERATURE GAUGE NOTE: The troubleshooting here only covers the malfunction of coolant temperature gauge. For the malfunction of overheat indicator, refer to T5-4-9.
• Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
Coolant temperature monitor segments (B to F) does not light.
YES
Disconnect coolant temperature sensor terminal, and connect harness end terminal to the vehicle ground. Check if all segments blink. · Key switch: ON NO
With coolant temperature sensor terminal disconnected, remove 20P connector from monitor. Check if there is continuity between terminal #M1-15 and sensor harness end terminal.
YES
All the segments (A to F) on coolant temperature monitor light up.
When coolant temperature sensor terminal is disconnected, check if only one coolant temperature monitor segment blink. · Key switch: ON
YES With coolant temperature sensor terminal disconnected, disNO connect 12P connector from monitor. Check if there is continuity between harness end terminal #M1-15 and vehicle.
YES Coolant temperature monitor segment light moves its position unsuitably.
Disconnect coolant temperature sensor terminal, and connect harness end terminal to vehicle. Check if all coolant temperature monitor segments blink. · Key switch: ON
NO
T5-4-2
NO
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C
Faulty coolant temperature sensor. C
YES
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, or faulty monitor.
E
D
F
B
A
NO
Broken harness between coolant temperature gauge and coolant temperature sensor.
T1CF-05-05-001
Faulty coolant temperature sensor.
Short-circuited harness between monitor and coolant temperature sensor.
Segments A (Blinking) A B C D E F
Temperature °C (°F) 20°C (68°F) or less 20 to 49°C (68 to 120°F) 50 to 79°C (122 to 174°F) 80 to 94°C (176 to 201°F) 95 to 101°C (203 to 214°F) 102 to106°C (215 to 223°F) 107°C (225°F) or more
Coolant Temperature Sensor
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, or faulty monitor.
Temperature °C (°F) 25 (77 °F) 40 (104 °F) 50 (122 °F) 80 (176 °F) 95 (203 °F) 105 (221 °F) 120 (248 °F)
Faulty coolant temperature sensor.
Resistance (Ω) 7.6 4.0±0.35 2.7±0.22 0.92 0.6 0.42 0.3±0.01
Connector Monitor
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, or faulty monitor.
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MULFUNCTION OF FUEL GAUGE NOTE: The troubleshooting here only covers the malfunction of fuel level gauge. For the malfunction of fuel level indicator, refer to T5-4-10.
• Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES Fuel gauge monitor segments (B to F) light does not light · Buzzer does not sound.
Disconnect fuel level sensor connector, and connect harness end terminals #1 to #2. Check if all segments on fuel gauge monitor blink. · Key switch: ON · Use a clip to connect terminals.
NO
With fuel level sensor connector disconnected, remove 20P connector from monitor. Check if there is continuity between harness end connector #M1-14 on monitor and harness end connector terminal #2 on sensor.
YES
All segments (A to F) on fuel gauge monitor light up.
When fuel level sensor connector is disconnected, check if all segments on fuel gauge monitor blink. · Key switch: ON
YES With fuel level sensor connector disconnected, disconnect 20P connector from monitor. Check if NO there is continuity between terminal #M1-14 on harness end connector and vehicle.
YES Fuel gauge monitor segment light moves its position unsuitably.
Disconnect fuel level sensor connector, and connect harness end connector terminal #1 to #2. Check if all fuel gauge monitor segments blink stably. · Key switch: ON · Use a clip to connect terminals.
T5-4-4
NO
NO
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C D
F
E
C B A
T1M7-05-04-001
Faulty fuel level sensor.
2 (0.1)
Unit: mm (in)
17.3 (0.7) FULL
YES
NO
Faulty fuel gauge, or faulty monitor.
147.5 (5.8)
73 (2.9)
Broken harness between fuel gauge and fuel level sensor.
215.5 (8.5)
Faulty fuel level sensor.
R230 (R9.1)
1/2
Float EMPTY T1M9-05-04-001
Short-circuited harness between fuel gauge and fuel level sensor.
Faulty fuel gauge, or faulty monitor.
Faulty fuel level sensor.
Segment A B C D E F
Floating Position EMPTY 1/2 FULL
Resistance (â&#x201E;Ś) 90 40 10
Connector monitor
Faulty fuel gauge, or faulty monitor.
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF PREHEAT INDICATOR • Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
• Preheat indicator lights for 15 seconds after turning key switch to heat position. YES
Preheat indicator does not light when key switch is turned to heat position.
Faulty monitor.
Check if voltage on monitor terminal #M1-12 is higher than 12V. · Key switch: HEAT Faulty key switch. NO
YES Preheat indicator keeps lighting.
Faulty monitor.
Check if voltage on monitor terminal #M1-12 is 0V · Key switch: ON
Faulty key switch. NO
Connector Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-6
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF ALTERNATOR INDICATOR • Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting. NO
NO
When key switch is turned ON, alternator indicator does not light. · Engine: Stop
Disconnect terminal L on alternator, and connect harness end terminal to vehicle. Check if alternator indicator lights.
Check if there is continuity between harness end terminal on alternator and monitor terminal #M1-13. YES
· Key switch: ON · Engine: Stop
YES
YES
Even if engine rotates, indicator does not go out.
Broken harness between alternator and monitor.
Burnt indicator bulb, or broken harness in monitor.
Faulty alternator (regulator).
Faulty alternator (regulator).
When alternator is disconnected, does indicator go out? · Key switch: ON · Engine: Stop NO
Connector Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-7
Short-circuited harness between alternator and indicator.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR NOTE: The indicator comes on when engine oil pressure is below 49± 9.8 kPa (0.5±0.1 2 kgf/cm , 7.1±1.4 psi).
NOTE: 1 kgf/cm2=98.07 kPa
• Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES
When key switch is turned ON, indicator does not light. · Engine: Stop · The pressure might not be released for 1 to 2 minutes just after the engine stops. This is normal.
When oil pressure switch is disconnected, and harness end terminal is connected to vehicle, check if indicator comes on.
NO
Reconnect the disconnected terminal. When terminal #M2-28 NO on monitor panel is connected to vehicle, check if indicator comes on.
· Key switch: ON
· Key switch: ON · Ground the connector to the vehicle using a clip without disconnecting.
YES
After engine is started, indicator does not go out.
When oil pressure switch is disconnected, check if indicator goes out.
· Check if oil filter is clogged or not.
· Key switch: ON · Engine: Stop
Faulty engine oil pressure switch.
NO
Connector Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-8
Burnt indicator, or broken harness in monitor.
Broken harness between engine oil pressure switch YES and indicator.
Faulty engine oil pressure switch.
Short-circuited harness between engine oil pressure switch and indicator.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF OVERHEAT INDICATOR NOTE: The indicator comes on when coolant temperature is above 110 ± 2 °C (230 ± 4 °F) and keeps its temperature more than 2 seconds.
• Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
Faulty overheat switch.
YES
Overheat indicator does not light when coolant temperature gauge reads higher than 110 ℃(230 °F) · Engine: Running · Buzzer does not sound.
When overheat switch terminal (white red) is disconnected, and harness end terminal is connected to vehicle, check if segments light for warning. · Key switch: ON
NO
YES
Broken harness between overheat switch and monitor.
NO
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, or faulty monitor.
Reconnect the disconnected terminal. When terminal #M2-36 on monitor is connected to vehicle, check if indicator blink. · Key switch: ON · Ground the connector to the vehicle with a clip without disconnecting.
Faulty overheat switch.
YES
Segments on coolant temperature gauge monitor do not stop turn off.
When overheat switch terminal (white red) is disconnected, check if indicator turns off.
· Key switch: ON
· Key switch: ON NO
Connector
With overheat switch terminal disconnected, remove 16P connector from monitor. Check if there is continuity between terminal #M2-36 on harness end connector and vehicle. · Key switch: ON
Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-9
YES
NO
Short-circuited harness between overheat switch and monitor.
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, gauge or or faulty faulty monitor. monitor controller.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR • Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES
Even if fuel is empty, lowest segment does not blink for warning.
Check if fuel level indicator segment #A lights.
· Key switch: ON
· Key switch: ON
Faulty monitor.
Refer to T5-4-4. NO
YES
Even if sufficient fuel is in fuel tank, segment blinks for warning.
Check if fuel level indicator segment that is appropriate to fuel level lights.
· Key switch: ON
· Key switch: ON
Faulty monitor.
Refer to T5-4-4. NO
Connector Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-10
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF MONITOR BUZZER • Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
Faulty engine oil lubrication system or faulty engine oil pressure indicator system. (Refer to T5-4-8.)
YES
After engine is started, buzzer continues to sound.
Check if engine oil pressure indicator stays ON.
YES
· Engine: Running NO
Check if all segments of coolant temperature gauge monitor blinks. · Key switch: ON NO
Even if engine oil pressure indicator, overheat indicator or fuel level indicator lights up or blinks, buzzer does not sound.
Engine is overheated, or faulty overheat indicator system. (Refer to T5-4-9.)
Faulty monitor controller, faulty buzzer, or faulty buzzer circuit.
Faulty monitor faulty buzzer, or faulty buzzer circuit.
· Engine: Running
T5-4-11
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) When “Built-in diagnosing system” is set, items shown below are displayed.
• How to set ” Built-in diagnosing system”
1. Turn the key switch into ON position while the set switch on the monitor panel is pushed down. 2. Items shown below are displayed as the display selection switch is pushed.
No. 1. 2. 3.
Item Hour meter Trip 1 Trip 2
Troubleshooting Refer to the next page. Faulty monitor.
T5-4-12
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF HOUR METER â&#x20AC;˘ Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES
While engine is running, hour meter does not operate.
Check if alternator indicator stays ON. ¡ Engine: Running
NO
YES
Hour meter operates with key switch turned ON.
Faulty alternator, or faulty alternator indicator system. (Refer to T5-4-7.)
Faulty hour meter, or faulty monitor controller.
Faulty hour meter, or faulty monitor controller.
Disconnect terminal L on alternator. Check if there is continuity between harness end terminal and terminal #M1-13 on monitor. NO
T5-4-13
Broken harness between monitor panel and alternator.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF AUTO-IDLE INDICATOR • Failure in switches or monitor logic circuit is suspected in case of auto-idle failure occurs.
• Replace entire monitor assembly in case of auto-idle failure occurs.
T5-4-14
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 1. Disconnect the power source. Be sure to remove the negative terminals from the batteries first when taking wire harnesses and connectors off for repair or replacement work. Failure to do so can result in damage to the wire harnesses, fuses, and slow blow fuse and, in some cases, cause fire due to short circuiting. 2. Color coding of wire harnesses. The color codes of the wire harnesses in the electrical system are shown below. In cases on the design sheet where two colors are indicated for one wire, the left initial stands for the base color, while the right initial stands for the marking color.
Code R L O Y Br Gr
Color Red Blue Orange Yellow Brown Gray
Code W G Lg B P V
Color White Green Light Green Black Pink Violet
NOTE: 1) Code BW indicates a black base wire with white fine-line marking. 2) Initials “O” and “Or” both stand for the color orange. 3) Wires with longitudinal stripes printed on them are not color coded. Be sure not to confuse them with color coded wires. 3. Precautions for connecting and disconnecting terminal connectors. • When disconnecting harnesses, grasp them by their connectors. Do not pull on the wire itself. Be sure to release the lock first before attempting to separate connectors, if a lock is provided. • Water-resistant connectors keep water out so that if water enters them, water will not easily drain from them. When checking water resistant connectors, take extra care not to allow water to enter the connectors. In case water should enter the connectors, reconnect only after the connectors are thoroughly dried. • Before connecting terminal connectors, check that no terminals are bent or coming off. In addition, as, most connectors are made of brass, check that no terminals are rusting. • When connecting terminal connectors provided with a lock, be sure to insert them together until the lock "clicks."
T5-5-1
Right
Wrong
T107-07-06-001
Right Rust Wrong (Deformation) Wrong (Coming off, Separation) T107-07-06-002
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection 4. Precaution for using a circuit tester. â&#x20AC;˘ Before using a circuit tester, refer to the instructions in the circuit tester manual. Then, set the circuit tester to meet the object to be measured, voltage range and current polarity. â&#x20AC;˘ Before starting the connector test, always check the connector terminal numbers, referring to the circuit diagram. When the connector size is very small, and the standard probe size is too large to be used for testing, wind a fine piece of sharpened wire or a pin around the probe to make the test easier. â&#x20AC;˘ When performing the connector test with the circuit tester, be sure to insert the tester probe from the connector harness side in order not to damage the terminals in the connector.
T5-5-2
Wind a piece of wire
Tester Probe
Sharpen the end of wire T107-07-06-003
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection FUSE CONTINUITY TEST Fuse failure is often caused by a fine crack in the fuse, and such fine cracks are very hard to detect by visual inspection. Checking fuse continuity with a tester is far superior to sight inspection. 1. Turn the key switch ON When key switch is turned ON, the power is supplied to all circuit from key switch BR, R2 and ACC terminal (Refer to Circuit Diagram). 2. Remove the fuse box cover and set the correct voltage measurement range of the tester. (Measurement range: 0 to 14.5 V) 3. Connect the negative probe to the vehicle ground, and touch the outside terminal of each fuse with the positive probe of the tester. When normal continuity of a fuse is intact, the tester will indicate 12 volts.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
T1M9-05-05-001
Number Capacity 1 25 A 2 5A 3 5A 4 10 A 5 20 A 6 10 A 7 25 A 8 20 A 9
10 A
10
5A
Connected to Horn Relay, Power Relay Monitor (Backup), *Air Coditioner Controller, *Radio (Backup) Pilot Shut-Off Switch Auxiliary Work Light *Wiper, *Washer, *Room Light *Radio, *Air Conditioner Controller, *Blower Motor Relay, *Displacement Change Relay Travel Speed Selector Switch, Travel Alarm Controller (Optional), Travel Alarm (Optional) Monitor (Power Supply), Buzzer (Monitor), Starter Relay, 1-second Timer, Engine Controller, Alternater, Engine Stop Solenoid, Fuel Pump Safety Start Relay
NOTE: The *-marked parts are for Cab Version machines only.
T5-5-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection BATTERY VOLTAGE CHECK 1. Turn key switch OFF. Measure between battery plus terminal and the ground (vehicle) with a voltmeter. Correct Voltage Reading: 12 V NOTE: If voltage is abnormal, re-charge or replace the battery. 2. Start the engine. Measure the battery voltage again. Correct Voltage Reading: 14.5 V
V
NOTE: If voltage is abnormal, check the charging system. T505-07-01-002
T5-5-4
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection VOLTAGE CHECK Turn switches ON so that the specified voltage is supplied to the checkpoint. Measure voltage. Diagnose the circuit between power source and the checking point by checking that specified voltage is supplied or not. 12 volt circuit (example: the horn circuit) Check the circuit in either the upstream (from the power source) or downstream (from the accessory) order to locate the failed section in the circuit. Set the following check conditions: • Key switch position: ON (When checking points (4) to (8) • Relay position: ON (When checking points (9) or (10) • Tester black terminal (negative): Connected to the vehicle (ground) • Tester red terminal (positive): Connected to the checking point Power source: Batteries (12 volts)
Evaluation Measured voltage must equal 12 V (battery voltage). If the measured voltage is less than the battery voltage by 0.5 V or more, some incorrect contacts may exist at connectors.
Key Switch B
1
BR
R1
R2
C ACC
PREHEAT OFF ON START 2
4
Battery
3 5 6 Relay
8
7
9 10
An example of the checking order (Horn Circuit) 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4
T5-5-5
10
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection CONTINUITY CHECK Single-line continuity check Disconnect both end connectors of the harness and check continuity between ends: If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 Ω = Continuity ∞ Ω = Discontinuity NOTE: When the one end connector is far apart from the other, connect one end of connector (A) or the vehicle frame using a clip. Then, check continuity of the harness through the vehicle frame as illustrated. If the ohm-meter reading is:
0 Ω = Continuity ∞ Ω = Discontinuity
a
Ω Connect to the vehicle frame.
A
Connect to the vehicle frame.
Ω
a
a
A
Single-line short-circuit check Disconnect both end connectors of the harness and check continuity between one end connector of the harness and the vehicle frame: If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 Ω = Short circuit is present. ∞ Ω = No short circuit is present. Multi-line continuity check Disconnect both end connectors of the harness, and connect two terminals (A) and (B), using a jumper wire at one end of the connector, as illustrated. Then, check continuity between terminals (a) and (b) at the other connector. If the ohm-meter reading is ∞Ω, either line (A)-(a), or (B)-(b) is in discontinuity. To find out which line is discontinued, conduct the single line continuity check on both lines individually, or after changing the connected terminals from (A)-(B) to (A)-(C). Check continuity once more between terminals (a) and (c).
Harness
A
× Ω
Short circuit between the harness and the vehicle frame.
T107-07-05-003
First Connected
A B C
a b c
Second Connected
NOTE: By Conducting the multi-line continuity check twice, it is possible to find out which line is discontinued. With terminals (A) and (C) short circuited, check continuity between terminals (a) and (c).
Ω
T107-07-05-004
Short circuit between harnesses. A B C
×
If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 Ω = Line (B)-(b) has discontinuity. ∞ Ω = Line (A)-(a) has discontinuity. Multi-lines short circuit check Disconnect both end connectors of the harness, and check continuity between terminals (A) and (B) or (C). If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 Ω = Short circuit exists between the lines. ∞ Ω = No Short circuit exists between the lines.
T5-5-6
a b c
Ω
T107-07-05-005
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection 5V System Circuit • Voltage between Terminal No. 1 and the vehicle Turn OFF the key switch, and disconnect the connector. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 (5 V power supply) on the machine harness end connector and the vehicle (ground) under the following conditions.
Power Source 1
Signal or Ground 2
Two-Polarities
Key Switch: ON Black (Negative) Terminal of Tester: Vehicle (Ground) Red (Positive) Terminal of Tester: Terminal No. 1
V
T107-07-05-006 Power Source Signal Ground
Standard Voltage: If 5±0.5 V, the circuit is normal up to terminal No. 1.
1
Three-Polarities
2
3
V
• Voltage between Terminal No.1 and Ground Terminal Turn OFF the key switch, and disconnect the sensor connector. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 (5 V power supply) on the machine harness end connector and the ground terminal (terminal No. 2 for two-polarities or terminal No. 3 for three-polarities connector) under the following conditions.
T107-07-05-007
1
2
Two-Polarities
V
Key Switch: ON Black (Negative) Terminal of Tester: Connected to the ground Terminal (Terminal No. 2 or No. 3) Red (Positive) Terminal of Tester: Connect to Terminal No. 1 Standard Voltage: If 5±0.5 V, the circuit is normal up to terminal No. 1 or ground terminal (terminal No. 2 or No. 3).
T107-07-05-008
1
2
3
Three-Polarities
V
T107-07-05-009
T5-5-7
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection (Blank)
T5-5-8
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... ..................................................................................................................................................................... .....................................................................................................................................................................
Hitachi Construction Machinery Co. Ltd Attn: Publications, Marketing & Product Support Fax: 81-29-831-1162
Hitachi Ref. No.
SERVICE MANUAL REVISION REQUEST FORM NAME OF COMPANY:
MODEL: PUBLICATION NO.:
YOUR NAME: DATE: FAX:
(Located at the right top corner in the cover page)
PAGE NO.: (Located at the bottom center in the page. If two or more revisions are requested, use the comment column)
YOUR COMMENTS / SUGGESTIONS: Attach photo or sketch if required. If your need more space, please use another sheet.
REPLY:
(Copy this form for usage)
THE ATTACHED DIAGRAM LIST (The following diagrams are attached to this manual.) 1 2 3 4 5
6 7 8
9
ZAXIS40U-2/50U-2 HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 ELECTRICAL CIRCUIT DIAGRAM ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 FLOOR HARNESS ZAXIS40U-2/50U-2 MAIN HARNESS ZAXIS40U-2/50U-2 BATTERY HARNESS (1), (2)
ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 AUTO-IDLE PRESSURE SENSOR HARNESS ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 TRAVEL ALARM HARNESS (FLOOR) (Optional) ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 AIR CONDITIONER HARNESS (SOLENOID VALVE) (Cab Version Only) ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 AUXILIARY FLOW SELECTOR VALVE (SWITCH) (Optional)
ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 AIR CONDITIONER HARNESS (FLOOR) (Cab Version Only) ZAXIS40U-2/50U-2 ENGINE HARNESS ZAXIS40U-2/50U-2 BOOM LIGHT HARNESS ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 CANOPY LIGHT HARNESS ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 IMMOBILIZER HARNESS (Optional) ZAXIS40U-2/50U-2 TRAVEL ALARM HARNESS (ALARM) (Optional) ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 AIR CONDITIONER HARNESS (COMPRESSOR) (Cab Version Only) ZAXIS30U-2/35U-2/40U-2/50U-2 AUXILIARY FLOW SELECTOR VALVE (SOLENOID VALVE) (Optional)
Manual No. : KM-1M9-E Vol. No. : W1M9-E-00
40U-2 50U-2 Excavator Workshop Manual
Workshop Manual 40U-2 50U-2 Excavator
Service Manual (Manual No. KM-1M9-E) consists of the following two separate volumes; Technical Manual : Vol. No. T1M9-E Workshop Manual : Vol. No. W1M9-E
PRINTED IN SINGAPORE (PS) 2004.11
Zaxis40U-2/50U-2-Wsh
1
29/10/04, 19:24
INTRODUCTION TO THE READER • This manual is written for an experienced technician to provide technical information needed to maintain and repair this machine. • Be sure to thoroughly read this manual for correct product information and service procedures.
• If you have any questions or comments, at if you found any errors regarding the contents of this manual, please contact using “Service Manual Revision Request Form” at the end of this manual. (Note: Do not tear off the form. Copy it for usage.): Publications Marketing & Product Support Hitachi Construction Machinery Co. Ltd. TEL: 81-298-32-7173 FAX: 81-298-31-1162
ADDITIONAL REFERENCES • Please refer to the materials listed below in addition to this manual. • The Operator’s Manual • The Parts Catalog
• Operation Manual of the Engine • Parts Catalog of the Engine • Hitachi Training Material
MANUAL COMPOSITION • This manual consists of two portions: the Technical Manual and the Workshop Manual. Use the manuals according to purpose. • Information included in the Technical Manual: technical information needed for redelivery and delivery, operation and activation of all devices and systems, operational performance tests, and troubleshooting procedures.
• Information included in the Workshop Manual: technical information needed for maintenance and repair of the machine, tools and devices needed for maintenance and repair, maintenance standards, and removal/installation and assemble/disassemble procedures.
PAGE NUMBER • Each page has a number, located on the center lower part of the page, and each number contains the following information: Example : T 1-3-5 Consecutive Page Number for Each Group Group Number Section Number T: Technical Manual
W: Workshop Manual
IN-01
INTRODUCTION SAFETY ALERT SYMBOL AND HEADLINE NOTATIONS In this manual, the following safety alert symbol and signal words are used to alert the reader to the potential for personal injury of machine damage. This is the safety alert symbol. When you see this symbol, be alert to the potential for personal injury. Never fail to follow the safety instructions prescribed along with the safety alert symbol. The safety alert symbol is also used to draw attention to component/part weights. To avoid injury and damage, be sure to use appropriate lifting techniques and equipment when lifting heavy parts.
•
CAUTION: Indicated potentially hazardous situation which could, if not avoided, result in personal injury or death.
• IMPORTANT: Indicates a situation which, if not conformed to the instructions, could result in damage to the machine.
•
NOTE: Indicates supplementary technical information or know-how.
UNITS USED • SI Units (International System of Units) are used in
Example : 24.5 MPa (250 kgf/cm2, 3560 psi)
this manual. MKSA system units and English units are also indicated in parenthheses just behind SI units.
Quantity Length Volume
Weight Force Torque
To Convert From mm mm L L m3 kg N N N⋅m N⋅m
Into in ft US gal US qt yd3 lb kgf lbf kgf⋅m lbf⋅ft
A table for conversion from SI units to other system units is shown below for reference purposees.
Quantity
Multiply By 0.03937 0.003281 0.2642 1.057 1.308 2.205 0.10197 0.2248 1.0197 0.7375
Pressure Power Temperature Velocity Flow rate
IN-02
To Convert From MPa MPa kW kW °C km/h min-1 L/min mL/rev
Into
Multiply By 2
kgf/cm psi PS HP °F mph rpm US gpm cc/rev
10.197 145.0 1.360 1.341 °C×1.8+32 0.6214 1.0 0.2642 1.0
SAFETY RECOGNIZE SAFETY INFORMATION • These are the SAFETY ALERT SYMBOLS. • When you see these symbols on your machine or in this manual, be alert to the potential for personal injury. • Follow recommended precautions and safe operating practices.
SA-688
UNDERSTAND SIGNAL WORDS • On machine safety signs, signal words designating the degree or level of hazard - DANGER, WARNING, or CAUTION - are used with the safety alert symbol. • DANGER indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. • WARNING indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. • CAUTION indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury. • DANGER or WARNING safety signs are located near specific hazards. General precautions are listed on CAUTION safety signs. • Some safety signs don’t use any of the designated signal words above after the safety alert symbol are occasionally used on this machine.
• CAUTION also calls attention to safety messages in this manual.
• To avoid confusing machine protection with personal safety messages, a signal word IMPORTANT indicates a situation which, if not avoided, could result in damage to the machine.
•
NOTE indicates an additional explanation for an element of information.
SA-1
SA-1223
SAFETY FOLLOW SAFETY INSTRUCTIONS • Carefully read and follow all safety signs on the machine as well as all safety messages in this manual.
• Safety signs must be installed, maintained and replaced if damaged. • If a safety sign or this manual is damaged or missing, order a replacement from your nearest Hitachi dealer in the same way you order other replacement parts (be sure to state machine model and serial number when ordering).
• Allow only properly trained, qualified, authorized perSA-003
sonnel to operate the machine.
• Learn how to correctly operate and service the machine. • Keep your machine in proper working condition. • Always operate the machine within the specification. • Unauthorized modifications of the machine may impair the functions and/or safety and affect machine life and the warranty will become void.
• The safety messages in this SAFETY chapter are intended to illustrate basic safety procedures of machines. However it is impossible for these safety messages to cover every possible hazardous situation you may encounter. If you have any questions concerning safety, you should first consult your supervisor and/or your nearest Hitachi dealer before operating or performing maintenance work on the machine.
PREPARE FOR EMERGENCIES • Be prepared if a fire starts or if an accident occurs. • Keep a first aid kit and fire extinguisher on hand. • Thoroughly read and understand the label attached on the fire extinguisher and use it properly. • To ensure that a fire-extinguisher can be always used when necessary, check and service the fire-extinguisher at the recommended intervals as specified in the fire-extinguisher manual. • Establish emergency procedure guidelines to cope with any fire or accidents which may occur. • Keep emergency numbers for doctors, ambulance service, hospitals, and fire department posted near your telephone.
SA-2
SA-437
SAFETY WEAR PROTECTIVE CLOTHING • Wear close fitting clothing and safety equipment appropriate to the job.
You may need: A hard hat Safety belt Safety shoes Safety glasses, goggles, or face shield Heavy gloves Hearing protection Reflective clothing Wet weather gear Respirator or filter mask. Be sure to wear the correct equipment and clothing for the job. Do not take any chances.
SA-438
• Avoid wearing loose clothing, jewelry, or other items that can catch on control levers or other parts of the machine.
• Operating equipment safely requires the full attention of the operator. • Do not wear radio or music headphones while operating the machine.
PROTECT AGAINST NOISE • Prolonged exposure to loud noise can cause impairment or loss of hearing. • Wear a suitable hearing protective device such as earmuffs or earplugs to protect against objectionable or uncomfortably loud noises.
SA-434
INSPECT MACHINE DAILY • If any abnormality is found, be sure to repair it immediately before operating the machine. • In the walk-around inspection, be sure to cover all points described in the “PRE-START INSPECTION” chapter in the operator’s manual.
SA-435
SA-3
SAFETY TIDY UP INSIDE CAB • Always keep inside the cab clean by observing instructions below, to prevent any personal accidents from occurring.
• Remove mud and/or oily material from the shoe soles before entering the cab. If pedals are operated without removing mud or oily matter, the foot may slip off the pedal, possibly creating a hazardous situation.
• Do not leave parts and/or tools around the operator’s seat.
• Do not keep a transparent water bottle in the cab. The transparent water bottle may concentrate the sun light like a lens, possibly causing a fire.
• Do not wear radio or music headphones and do not use a cell phone while traveling or operating the machine.
• Never allow hazardous materials such as combustible and/or explosive material in the cab.
• Do not leave a lighter in the cab. If the temperature in the cab increases, the lighter may explode.
USE HANDHOLDS AND STEPS • Falling is one of the major causes of personal injury. • When you get on and off the machine, always face the machine. • Maintain a three-point contact with the steps and handrails. • Do not use any controls as handholds. • Never jump on or off the machine. Never mount or dismount a moving machine. • In case adhered slippery material such as oil, grease, or mud is present on steps, handrails, or platforms, thoroughly remove such material.
SA-4
SA-439
SAFETY ADJUST THE OPERATOR'S SEAT • A poorly adjusted seat for either the operator or for the work at hand may quickly fatigue the operator leading to mis-operation of the machine. • The seat should be adjusted whenever the operator for the machine changes. • The operator should be able to fully depress the pedals and to correctly operate the control levers with his back firmly against the seat back. • If not, readjust the seat forward or backward, and check again.
SA-378
FASTEN YOUR SEAT BELT • If the machine should overturn, the operator may become injured and/or thrown from the cab. Additionally the operator may be crushed by the overturning machine, resulting in serious injury or death. • Be sure to remain seated with the seat belt securely fastened whenever operating the machine. • Prior to operating the machine, thoroughly examine webbing, buckle and attaching hardware. If any item is damaged or worn, replace the seat belt or component before operating the machine. Replace the seat belt at least once every 3 years regardless of appearance
SA-5
SA-237
SAFETY MOVE AND OPERATE MACHINE SAFELY • Always be aware that there is a potential danger around the machine while operating the machine. • Take extra care not to run over bystanders. Confirm the location of bystanders before moving, swinging, or operating the machine. • Always keep the travel alarm and horn in working condition (if equipped). • Before starting to move or operate the machine, sound the travel alarm and horn to alert bystanders. • Use a signal person when moving, swinging, or operating the machine in congested areas. Locate the signal person so that the operator can always witness the signal person. • Coordinate the meanings of all safety signs, hand signals and marks before starting the machine. Appoint a person who is responsible to make a signal and/or guidance. • Never allow any persons or obstacles to enter the machine operation areas. • Use appropriate illuminations.
SA-6
SA-1291
SAFETY OPERATE ONLY FROM OPERATOR'S SEAT • Inappropriate engine starting procedures may cause the machine to runaway, possibly resulting in serious injury or death. • Start the engine only when seated in the operator's seat. • NEVER start the engine while standing on the tracks or on ground. • Do not start engine by shorting across starter terminals. A hazardous situation may be created and/or possible damage to the machine may result.
SA-444
• Before starting the engine, confirm that all control levers are in neutral.
JUMP STARTING • Failure to follow correct jump starting procedures could result in a battery explosion or a runaway machine. • If the engine must be jump started, be sure to follow the instructions shown in the “OPERATING THE ENGINE” chapter. • The operator must be seated in the operator’s seat so that the machine will be under control when the engine starts. Jump starting is a two-person operation. • Never use a frozen battery. • Failure to follow correct jump starting procedures could result in a battery explosion or a runaway machine.
SA-032
KEEP RIDERS OFF MACHINE • Riders on machine are subject to injury such as being struck by foreign objects and being thrown off the machine. • Riders also obstruct the operator’s view, resulting in the machine being operated in an unsafe manner. • Only allow the operator is allowed on the machine. Keep riders off.
SA-1292
SA-7
SAFETY INVESTIGATE JOB SITE BEFOREHAND • When working at the edge of an excavation or on a road shoulder, the machine could tip over due to collapse of the ground, possibly resulting in serious injury or death. • Investigate the configuration and ground conditions of the job site beforehand to prevent the machine from falling and to prevent the ground, stockpiles, or banks from collapsing. • Make a work plan. Use machines appropriate to the work and job site. • Reinforce ground, edges, and road shoulders as necessary. Keep the machine well back from the edges of excavations and road shoulders. • When working on an incline or on a road shoulder, employ a signal person as required. • Never allow bystanders to enter the working area such as swing radius or traveling range. • Confirm that your machine is equipped a FOPS cab before working in areas where the possibility of falling stones or debris exist. • When the footing is weak, reinforce the ground before starting work. • When working on frozen ground, be extremely alert. As ambient temperatures rise, footing may become loose and slippery. • When operating the machine near open flame, sparks, and/or dead grass, a fire may easily break out. Use special care not to cause a fire.
SA-8
SA-1293
SAFETY PROVIDE SIGNALS FOR JOBS INVOLVING MULTIPLE NUMBERS OF MACHINES • In case more than one machine is operated in the same job site, accidental collision between machines may cause serious injury or death.
• For jobs involving multiple numbers of machines, provide signals commonly known by all personnel involved. Also, appoint a signal person to coordinate the job site. Make sure that all personnel obey the signal person’s directions. SA-481
CONFIRM DIRECTION OF MACHINE TO BE DRIVEN • Incorrect travel pedal/lever operation may result in serious injury death. • Before driving the machine, confirm the position of the undercarriage in relation to the operator’s position. • If the travel motors are located towards the front of the cab, the machine will move in the reverse direction when travel pedals/levers are operated. SA-1294
SA-9
SAFETY DRIVE MACHINE SAFELY • Driving the machine in the incorrect direction may result in serious injury or death and/or severe damage to property.
• Before moving the machine, confirm which way to move travel pedals/levers for the corresponding direction you wish to travel.
A
• Avoid passing over any obstructions. Failure to do so may cause soil, rock fragments and/or metal pieces to be scatter around the machine. Keep bystanders away from the machine.
SA-1295
• Traveling on a grade may cause the machine to slip or to overturn, possibly resulting in serious injury or death. • When traveling up or down a grade, keep the bucket in the direction of travel, approximately 200 to 300 mm (8 to 12 in) (A) above the ground so that lowering the bucket onto the ground can quickly stop the machine. • If machine starts to skid or becomes unstable, lower the bucket immediately. • Traveling across the face of slope or steering on a slope may cause the machine to skid or to turnover. If the direction must be changed on a slope, first move the machine to level ground, then, change the traveling direction to ensure safe operation.
A SA-1296
SA-441
SA-442
SA-10
SAFETY AVOID INJURY FROM ROLLAWAY ACCIDENTS • Death or serious injury may result if you attempt to mount or try to bodily stop a moving machine.
• Park the machine in compliance with the safe parking procedures described on page S-15 to prevent the machine from running away.
• Block both tracks and lower the bucket to the ground, thrust the bucket teeth into the ground if you must park on a grade.
• Park a reasonable distance from other machines.
SA-1297
SA-11
SAFETY AVOID INJURY FROM BACK-OVER AND SWING ACCIDENTS • If any person is present near the machine when backing or swinging the upperstructure, the machine may hit or run over that person, resulting in serious injury or death. To avoid back-over and swing accidents: • Always look around BEFORE YOU BACK UP AND SWING THE MACHINE. BE SURE THAT ALL BYSTANDERS ARE CLEAR.
• Keep the travel alarm in working condition (if equipped). ALWAYS BE ALERT FOR BYSTANDERS MOVING INTO THE WORK AREA. USE THE HORN OR OTHER SIGNAL TO WARN BYSTANDERS BEFORE MOVING MACHINE.
SA-383
• USE A SIGNAL PERSON WHEN BACKING UP IF YOUR VIEW IS OBSTRUCTED. ALWAYS KEEP THE SIGNAL PERSON IN VIEW. Use hand signals, which conform to your local regulations, when work conditions require a signal person.
• No machine motions shall be made unless signals are clearly understood by both signalman and operator.
• Learn the meanings of all flags, signs, and markings used on the job and confirm who has the responsibility for signaling.
• Keep windows, mirrors, and lights clean and in good condition.
• Dust, heavy rain, fog, etc., can reduce visibility. As visibility decreases, reduce speed and use proper lighting.
• Read and understand all operating instructions in the operator’s manual. 021-E01A-0494-8
SA-12
SA-384
SAFETY KEEP PERSONNEL CLEAR FROM WORKING AREA • If a person is present near the operating machine, the person may come in contact with the swinging front attachment or counterweight and/or may be crushed against an other object, resulting in serious injury or death.
• Before operating the machine, set up barriers to the sides and rear area of the bucket swing radius to prevent anyone from entering the work area.
• Make sure that no personnel other than the signal person or no obstacles are present in the working area before operating the machine.
SA-667
NEVER POSITION BUCKET OVER ANYONE • Never lift, move, or swing bucket above anyone or a truck cab. Serious injury or machine damage may result due to bucket load spill or due to collision with the bucket.
• Never allow the bucket to pass over anyone to avoid personal injury or death.
SA-668
AVOID UNDERCUTTING • In order to retreat from the edge of an excavation if the footing should collapse, always position the undercarriage perpendicular to the edge of the excavation with the travel motors at the rear.
• If the footing starts to collapse and if retreat is not possible, do not panic raise the front attachment with a panic. Lowering the front attachment may be safer in most cases.
SA-1300
SA-13
SAFETY AVOID TIPPING • The danger of tipping is always present when operating on a grade, possibly resulting in serious injury or death. To avoid tipping:
• Be extra careful before operating on a grade. • Prepare machine operating area flat. • Keep the bucket low to the ground and close to the machine.
• Reduce operating speeds to avoid tipping or slipping. • Avoid changing direction when traveling on grades. • NEVER attempt to travel across a grade steeper than 15 degrees if crossing the grade is unavoidable.
• Reduce swing speed as necessary when swinging
SA-1301
loads.
• Be careful when working on frozen ground. • Temperature increases will cause the ground to become soft and make ground travel unstable. 025-E01A-0540-4
NEVER UNDERCUT A HIGH BANK • The edges could collapse or a land slide could occur causing serious injury or death.
SA-1302
SA-14
SAFETY DIG WITH CAUTION • Accidental severing of underground cables or gas lines may cause an explosion and/or fire, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
• Before digging check the location of cables, gas lines, and water lines.
• Keep the minimum distance required, by law, from cables, gas lines, and water lines.
• If a fiber optic cable should be accidentally severed, do not look into the end. Doing so may result in serious eye injury.
• Contact your local “diggers hot line” if available in your
SA-672
area, and/or the utility companies directly. Have them mark all underground utilities.
OPERATE WITH CAUTION • If the front attachment or any other part of the machine hits against an overhead obstacle, such as a bridge, both the machine and the overhead obstacle will be damaged, and personal injury may result as well.
• Take care to avoid hitting overhead obstacles with the boom or arm.
SA-673
AVOID POWER LINES • Serious injury or death can result if the machine or front attachments are not kept a safe distance from electric lines.
• When operating near an electric line, NEVER move any part of the machine or load closer than 3 m (10 ft) plus twice the line insulator length.
• Check and comply with any local regulations that may apply.
• Wet ground will expand the area that could cause any person on it to be affected by electric shock. Keep all bystanders or co-workers away from the site.
SA-15
SA-1305
SAFETY DO NOT USE FOR CRANING OPERATIONS • NEVER use the machine for craning operations. If the machine is used for craning operations, the machine may tip over and/or lifted load may fall, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
• This machine has been exclusively designed to engage in excavation and loading works.
• This machine is not equipped with any of the necessary safety devices that could allow the machine to be used for craning operation.
SA-014
PROTECT AGAINST FLYING DEBRIS • If flying debris such as soil, rock fragments or metal pieces hit eyes or any other part of the body, serious injury may result.
• Guard against such injuries when working in a job site where possibility of flying pieces of metal or debris exist, or when removing or installing pins using a hammer; wear goggles or safety glasses.
• Keep bystanders away from the working area before striking any object. SA-432
SA-16
SAFETY PARK MACHINE SAFELY • Unless the machine is not correctly parked, any hazardous situations such as running away of the machine or damage by vandalism may result, causing the machine to operate unsafely when the engine is re-started. Follow instructions described below when parking the machine.
• Park the machine on solid level surface to prevent the machine from running away.
• Lower the bucket and/or blade to the ground.
SA-1306
• Pull the lock lever to the LOCK position. • Turn the auto-idle switch (optional) OFF. Failure to do so may create a hazarduos condition as the engine speed may unexpectedly increase.
• Run engine at slow idle speed without load for 5 minutes.
• Turn key switch to OFF to stop engine. Remove the key from the key switch.
• Before leaving the machine, close all windows, roof vent, and cab door. Lock all access doors and compartments
HANDLE FLUIDS SAFELY --- AVOID FIRES • Handle fuel with care; it is highly flammable. If fuel ignites, an explosion and/or a fire may occur, possibly resulting in serious injury or death.
• Do not refuel the machine while smoking or when near open flame or sparks.
• Always stop the engine before refueling the machine. • Fill the fuel tank outdoors. • All fuels, most lubricants, and some coolants are flammable.
SA-018
• Store flammable fluids well away from fire hazards. • Do not incinerate or puncture pressurized containers. • Do not store oily rags; they can ignite and burn spontaneously.
SA-019
SA-17
SAFETY SAFETY TRANSPORTING • The danger of tipping is present when loading/unloading the machine onto/from a truck or trailer bed.
• Be sure to observe local regulations when transporting the machine on public roads.
• Provide an appropriate truck or trailer for transporting
SA-1307
the machine.
• Be sure to have a signal person. • Take the following precautions when loading/unloading the machine. 1. Select firm level ground. 2. Be sure to use a loading dock or ramp strong enough to support the machine weight. 3. Ramps must be sufficient in width, length, and strength. Be sure that the incline of the ramp is less than 15 degrees. 4. Loading docks must be sufficient in width and strength to support the machine and have a gradient of less than 15 degrees. 5. Be sure to turn the auto-idle switch (13) OFF.
13
6. Slowly drive the machine. 7. Avoid steering while driving up or down the ramp as it is extremely dangerous. If steering is unavoidable, first move back to the ground or flatbed, modify traveling direction, and begin to drive again. 8. The top end of the ramp where it meets the flatbed is a sudden bump. Take care when traveling over it. 9. Wedge the front and rear of tracks. Securely fasten the machine to the trailer bed with chain or cables. 10. Do not operate any levers besides the travel levers when driving up or down the ramp. 11. Prevent possible injury from machine tipping while the upperstructure is rotating. 12. Keep the arm tucked under and rotate the upperstructure slowly for best stability. Refer to "transporting" chapter in operator’s manual for details
SA-18
M1M7-01-028
SAFETY PRACTICE SAFE MAINTENANCE • Inspection/maintenance work may produce hazardous situations by contacting and/or accessing a part of body to a moving, high pressure, and/or high temperature part of the machine. To avoid serious personal injury or death, follow the instructions described below.
• Thoroughly coordinate the working procedures to be
• • • •
• • • • •
•
• • • • • • •
taken hereafter with the co-workers before beginning work such as inspecting/servicing the machine, or replacing the attachiment . Safely park the machine in accordance with the instructions for “Park Machine Safely.” Keep the work area clean and orderly. Attach a “DO NOT OPERATE” tag in an easy-to-see location such as on a door or a control lever. If moisture permeates into the electrical system, malfunction and/or erroneous movement of the machine may result. Do not clean sensors, cable connectors, and the cab inside using water and/or steam. Wait to begin to work until the engine and hydraulic oil temperatures have cooled down to the safety range. In case inspection/maintenance must be performed with the engine runnning, be sure to appoint an overseer. Never lubricate or service the machine while moving it. Repair the cracked windowpane before servicing the machine. Failure to do so may cause personal injury. Whe raising the machine above the ground using the front attachment function, maintain the angle between the boom and the arm in the range of 90 to 110°. Never allow anyone to enter under the machine raised with the front attachment function. In case working under the machine raised above the ground is unavoidably required, securely hold the machine with stays or blocks strong enough to support the machine weight. Never work under the raised bucket. Keep all parts in good condition and properly installed. Always use the specified tools correctly. Always use a clean tool. Fix any damage found immediately. Replace worn or broken parts. Remove any buildup of grease, oil, or debris. When cleaning parts, use a non-combustible cleaning solvent. Never use an inflammable fluid such as dieasel fuel, or gasoline.
SA-19
SA-028
90 to 110°
M1M7-04-006
SA-527
SAFETY • Disconnect battery ground cable (−) before making adjustments to electrical systems or before welding on the machine. • Sufficiently illuminate the work site. Use a maintenance work light when working under or inside the machine. • Always use a work light protected with a guard. In case the light bulb is broken, spilled fuel, oil, antifreeze fluid, or window washer fluid may catch fire. SA-037
WARN OTHERS OF SERVICE WORK • Unexpected machine movement can cause serious injury.
• Before performing any work on the machine, attach a “Do Not Operate” tag in an easy-to-see place such as on the cab door or control lever.
• Never attempt to operate the machine with a “Do Not Operate” tag attached.
• Make it a rule for the inspection/service person to hold the engine start key during inspection/service work. SA-287
SUPPORT MACHINE PROPERLY • Never attempt to work on the machine without securing the machine first.
• Always lower the attachment to the ground before you work on the machine.
• If you must work on a lifted machine or attachment, securely support the machine or attachment with stays or blocks strong enough to support the machine and/or attachment weight. SA-527
STAY CLEAR OF MOVING PARTS • Contact with moving parts can cause serious injury or death due to amputation or entanglement.
• To prevent accidents, care should be taken to ensure that hands, feet, clothing, jewelry and hair do not become entangled when working around rotating parts.
SA-026
SA-20
SAFETY PREVENT PARTS FROM FLYING • Grease in the track adjuster is under high pressure. Failure to follow the precautions below may result in serious injury, blindness, or death.
• Do not attempt to remove GREASE FITTINGS or VALVE ASSEMBLIES.
• As pieces of parts may fly off, be sure to keep body and face away from the valve.
• Travel reduction gears are under pressure. • As pieces of parts may fly off, be sure to keep body
SA-344
and face away from AIR RELEASE PLUG to avoid injury.
• GEAR OIL is hot. Wait for gear oil to cool, then gradually loosen the air release plug to release pressure.
STORE ATTACHMENTS SAFELY • Stored attachments such as buckets, hydraulic hammers, and blades can fall and cause serious injury or death.
• Securely store attachments and implements to prevent falling accidents.
• Keep children and bystanders away from storage areas.
SA-034
SA-21
SAFETY PREVENT BURNS Hot spraying fluids:
• After operation, engine coolant is hot and under pressure. Hot water or steam is contained in the engine, radiator and heater lines. Skin contact with escaping hot water or steam can cause severe burns.
• To prevent possible injury from hot spraying water, stop the engine. Begine to work after the engine and radiator are sufficiently cooled
• DO NOT remove the radiator cap until the engine is cool. When opening, turn the cap slowly to the stop. Allow all pressure to be release before removing the cap.
SA-039
• The hydraulic oil tank is pressurized. Again, be sure to release all pressure by slowly removing the cap. Hot fluids and surfaces:
• Engine oil, gear oil and hydraulic oil also becomes hot during operation. The engine, hoses, lines and other parts become hot as well.
• Wait for the oil and components to cool before starting any maintenance or inspection work.
SA-225
SA-22
SAFETY REPLACE RUBBER HOSES PERIODICALLY • Rubber hoses that contain flammable fluids such as hydraulic oil or fuel under pressure may break due to aging, fatigue, and abrasion. It is very difficult to gauge the extent of deterioration due to aging, fatigue, and abrasion of rubber hoses by visual inspection alone.
• Periodically replace the rubber hoses. (Refer to the “Periodical Replacement Parts” section in the operator’s manual.)
• Failure to periodically replace rubber hoses may cause a fire, fluid injection into skin, or the front attachment to fall on a person nearby, which may result in severe burns, gangrene, or otherwise serious injury or death.
SA-019
AVOID HIGH-PRESSURE FLUIDS • Fluids such as diesel fuel or hydraulic oil under pressure can penetrate the skin or eyes causing serious injury, blindness or death.
• Avoid this hazard by relieving pressure before disconnecting hydraulic or other lines. Make sure that all connectors are completely connected before applying pressure.
• Search for leaks with a piece of cardboard; take care
SA-031
to protect hands and body from high-pressure fluids. Wear a face shield or goggles for eye protection.
• If an accident occurs, see a doctor familiar with this type of injury immediately. Any fluid injected into the skin must be surgically removed within a few hours or gangrene may result.
SA-292
SA-044
SA-23
SAFETY PREVENT FIRES Check for Oil Leaks:
• Fuel, hydraulic oil and lubricant leaks can lead to fires, possibly resulting in personal injury or death.
• Check for missing or loose clamps, kinked hoses, lines or hoses that rub against each other, damage to the oil-cooler, and loose oil-cooler flange bolts, for oil leaks.
• Tighten, repair or replace any missing, loose or damaged clamps, lines, hoses, oil-cooler and oil-cooler flange bolts.
SA-019
• Do not bend or strike high-pressure lines. • Never install bent or damaged lines, pipes or hoses.
Check for Shorts:
• Short circuits can cause fires. • Clean and tighten all electrical connections. • Check before each shift or after eight (8) to ten (10) hours operation for loose, kinked, hardened or frayed electrical cables and wires.
• Check before each shift or after eight (8) to ten (10) hours operation for missing or damaged terminal caps.
• DO NOT OPERATE MACHINE if cable or wires are loose, kinked, etc.
SA-24
SAFETY Precautions for Handling Flammables
• Spilled fuel and oil, and trash, grease, debris, accumulated coal dust, and other flammables may cause fires.
• Prevent fires by inspecting and cleaning the machine daily, and by removing spilled or accumulated flammables immediately.
• Don’t store flammable fluid near open flames. • Don’t burn or crush a pressurerized container. • Don’t store oily cloths. They are liable to catch fire. • Don’t wind easy-to-absorb-oil asbestos or glass wool around high-temperature parts such as a muffler or exhaust pipe. Check Heat Shield Covers around Engine Compartment
• If the engine compartment heat shield cover becomes broken or lost, fire may break out.
• If the engine compartment heat shield cover becomes broken or lost, repair or replace it before operating the machine. Check Key Switch:
• If fire breaks out, failure to stop the engine will escalate the fire, hampering fire fighting.
• Always check key switch function before operating the machine every day: 1) Start the engine and run it at slow idle. 2) Turn the key switch to the OFF position to confirm that the engine hasstopped.
If any abnormalities are found, be sure to repair them before operating the machine.
SA-25
SAFETY EVACUATING IN CASE OF FIRE • If fire breaks out during machine operation, evacuate the machine in the following way:
• Stop the engine by turning the key switch to the OFF position.
• Use a fire extinguisher if there is time. • Exit the machine using handrails and/or steps. • In an emergency, if the cab door or front window can not be opened, break the front or rear window panes with the emergency evacuation hammer to escape from the cab. Refer to the explanation pages on the “Emergency Evacuation Method” in the operator’s manual.
SA-393
SS-1510
BEWARE OF EXHAUST FUMES • Prevent asphyxiation. Engine exhaust fumes can cause sickness or death.
• If you must operate the machine in a building, be sure there is adequate ventilation. Either use an exhaust pipe extension to remove the exhaust fumes or open doors and windows to bring enough outside air into the area.
SA-016
SA-26
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR WELDING AND GRINDING • Welding may generate gas and/or small fires. • Be sure to perform welding in a well ventilated and prepared area. Store flammable objects in a safe place before starting welding.
• Only qualified personnel should perform welding. Never allow an unqualified person to perform welding.
• Grinding on the machine may create a fire hazard. Store flammable objects in a safe place before starting grinding.
• After finishing welding and grinding, recheck that there
SA-818
are no abnormalities such as the area surrounding the welded area still smoldering.
AVOID HEATING NEAR PRESSURIZED FLUID LINES • Flammable spray can be generated by heating near pressurized fluid lines, resulting in severe burns to yourself and bystanders.
• Do not heat by welding, soldering, or using a torch near pressurized fluid lines or other flammable materials.
• Pressurized lines can be accidentally cut when heat goes beyond the immediate flame area. Install temporary fire resistant guards to protect hoses or other materials before engaging in welding, soldering, etc.
AVOID APPLYING HEAT TO LINES CONTAINING FLAMMABLE FLUIDS • Do not weld or flame cut pipes or tubes that contain flammable fluids.
• Remove flammable fluids thoroughly with nonflammable solvent before welding or flame cutting pipes or tubes that contained flammable fluids.
SA-27
SA-030
SAFETY REMOVE PAINT BEFORE WELDING OR HEATING • Hazardous fumes can be generated when paint is heated by welding, soldering, or using a torch. If inhaled, these fumes may cause sickness.
• Remove paint before welding or heating. • Avoid potentially toxic fumes and dust. • Do all such work outside or in a well-ventilated area. Dispose of paint and solvent properly.
• Allow fumes to disperse at least 15 minutes after SA-029
welding or heating.
• Use attention to the following points when removing paint. 1. If you sand or grind paint, avoid breathing the dust which is created. Wear an approved respirator. 2. If you use solvent or paint stripper, remove stripper with soap and water before welding. 3. Remove solvent or paint stripper containers and other flammable material from area.
PREVENT BATTERY EXPLOSIONS • Battery gas can explode. • Keep sparks, lighted matches, and flame away from the top of battery.
• Never check battery charge by placing a metal object across the posts. Use a voltmeter or hydrometer.
• Do not charge a frozen battery; it may explode. Warm the battery to 16 °C (60 °F) first.
• Do not continue to use or charge the battery when the electrolyte level is lower than specified. Explosion of the battery may result.
• When a terminal become loose, it may induce sparks. Securely tighten all terminals.
• Battery electrolyte is poisonous. If the battery should explode battery electrolyte may be splashed into eyes, possibly resulting in blindness. If electrolyte is splashed into eyes, flush your eyes continuosly with water for about 15 minutes. Seek medical attention immediately.
• Be sure to wear eye protection when checking electrolyte specific gravity.
SA-28
SA-032
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS FOR HANDLING REFRIGERANT • If refrigerant is splashed into eyes or spilled onto skin, blindness or a cold contact burn may result.
• Refer to the precautions described on the refrigerant container for handling refrigerant.
• Use a recovery and recycling system to avoid venting refrigerant into the atmosphere.
• Never allow the skin to directly come in contact with refrigerant.
SA-405
HANDLE CHEMICAL PRODUCTS SAFELY • Direct exposure to hazardous chemicals can cause serious injury. Potentially hazardous chemicals used with your machine include such items as lubricants, electrolyte, coolants, paints, and adhesives.
• A Material Safety Data Sheet (MSDS) provides specific details on chemical products: physical and health hazards, safety procedures, and emergency response techniques.
• Check the MSDS before you start any job using a hazardous chemical. Then follow the correct procedures and use recommended equipment.
SA-309
• See your nearest Hitachi dealer for MSDS.
SA-29
SAFETY SIGNS DISPOSE OF WASTE PROPERLY • Improperly disposing of waste can threaten the environment and ecology. Potentially harmful waste used with HITACHI equipment includes such items as oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries.
• When draining fluid, use a leakproof container with a capacity larger than the drained fluid volume to receive it.
• Do not pour waste onto the ground, down a drain, or into any water source.
• Inquire on the proper way to dispose of harmful waste such as oil, fuel, coolant, brake fluid, filters, and batteries from your local environmental or recycling center.
SA-226
BEFORE RETURNING THE MACHINE TO THE CUSTOMER • After maintenance or repair work is complete, confirm that:
• The machine is functioning properly, especially the safety systems.
• Worn or damaged parts have been repaired or replaced
SA-435 S517-E01A-0435
SA-30
SECTION AND GROUP CONTENTS
WORKSHOP MANUAL
SECTION 1 GENERAL INFORMATION Group 1 Precautions for disassembling and Assembling Group 2 Tightening Torque Group 3 Painting Group 4 Bleeding Air from Hydraulic Oil Tank Group 5 Floor-Tilting Device
SECTION 2 UPPERSTRUCTURE Group 1 Canopy Group 2 Counterweight Group 3 Pump Device Group 4 Control Valve Group 5 Swing Device Group 6 Pilot Valve Group 7 Solenoid Valve Group 8 Revolution Sensing Valve Group 9 Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve (Optional)
SECTION 3 UNDERCARRIAGE
All information, illustrations and specifications in this manual are based on the latest product information available at the time of publication. The right is reserved to make changes at any time without notice.
Group 1 Swing Bearing Group 2 Travel Device Group 3 Center Joint Group 4 Track Adjuster Group 5 Front Idler Group 6 Upper and Lower Roller Group 7 Track
SECTION 4 FRONT ATTACHMENT COPYRIGHT(C)2004 Hitachi Construction Machinery Co., Ltd. Tokyo, Japan All rights reserved
Group 1 Front Attachment Group 2 Cylinder
SECTION 5 ENGINE
TECHNICAL MANUAL SECTION 1 GENERAL Group 1 Specification Group 2 Component Layout Group 3 Component Specifications SECTION 2 SYSTEM Group 1 Control System Group 2 Hydraulic System Group 3 Electrical System SECTION 3 COMPONENT OPERATION Group 1 Pump Device Group 2 Revolution Sensing Valve Group 3 Swing Device Group 4 Control Valve Group 5 Pilot Valve Group 6 Travel Device Group 7 Others (Upperstructure) Group 8 Others (Undercarriage)
SECTION 4 OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST Group 1 Introduction Group 2 Standard Group 3 Engine Test Group 4 Excavator Test Group 5 Component Test Group 6 Adjustment SECTION 5 TROUBLESHOOTING Group 1 Diagnosing Procedure Group 2 Troubleshooting A Group 3 Troubleshooting B Group 4 Troubleshooting C Group 5 Electrical System Inspection
SECTION 1
GENERAL INFORMATION CONTENTS Group 1 Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling........................................... W1-1-1 Maintenance Standard Terminology ........ W1-1-7
Group 2 Tightening Tightening Torque Specifications .............. W1-2-1 Torque Chart .......................................... W1-2-2 Piping Joint ............................................ W1-2-5 Periodic Replacement of Parts ............. W1-2-10
Group 3 Painting Painting .................................................. W1-3-1
Group 4 Bleeding Air Bleed Air from Hydraulic Oil Tank ........... W1-4-1
Group 5 Floor-Tilting Device Floor-Tilting Device Operetion Procedure............................................. W1-5-1 Procedure for Floor Tilting up ................. W1-5-2 Procedure for Floor Tilting down ............. W1-5-4
1M9W-1-1
(Blank)
1M9W-1-2
GENERAL / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling PRECAUTIONS FOR AND ASSEMBLING
DISASSEMBLING
Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling
• Clean the Machine
• Precautions for Disassembling
Thoroughly wash the machine before bringing it into the shop. Bringing a dirty machine into the shop may cause machine components to be contaminated during disassembling/assembling, resulting in damage to machine components, as well as decreased efficiency in service work.
• Inspect the Machine Be sure to thoroughly understand all disassem-bling/assembling procedures beforehand, to help avoid incorrect disassembling of components as well as personal injury. Check and record the items listed below to prevent problems from occurring in the future. • The machine model, machine serial number, and hour meter reading. • Reason for disassembly (symptoms, failed parts, and causes). • Clogging of filters and oil, water or air leaks, if any. • Capacities and condition of lubricants. • Loose or damaged parts.
• Prepare and Clean Tools and Disassembly Area Prepare the necessary tools to be used and the area for disassembling work.
W1-1-1
• To prevent dirt from entering, cap or plug the removed pipes. • Before disassembling, clean the exterior of the components and place on a work bench. • Before disassembling, drain gear oil from the reduction gear. • Be sure to provide appropriate containers for draining fluids. • Use matching marks for easier reassembling. • Be sure to use the specified special tools, when instructed. • If a part or component cannot be removed after removing its securing nuts and bolts, do not attempt to remove it forcibly. Find the cause(s), then take the appropriate measures to remove it. • Orderly arrange disassembled parts. Mark and tag them as necessary. • Store common parts, such as bolts and nuts with reference to where they are to be used and in a manner that will prevent loss. • Inspect the contact or sliding surfaces of disassembled parts for abnormal wear, sticking, or other damage. • Measure and record the degree of wear and clearances.
GENERAL / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling • Precautions for Assembling
Bleeding Air from Hydraulic System
• Be sure to clean all parts and inspect them for any damage. If any damage is found, repair or replace part. • Dirt or debris on the contact or sliding surfaces may shorten the service life of the machine. Take care not to contaminate any contact or sliding surfaces. • Be sure to replace O-rings, backup rings, and oil seals with new ones once they are disassembled. Apply a film of grease before installing. • Be sure that liquid-gasket-applied surfaces are clean and dry. • If an anti-corrosive agent has been used on a new part, be sure to thoroughly clean the part to remove the agent. • Utilize matching marks when assembling. • Be sure to use the designated tools to assemble bearings, bushings and oil seals. • Keep a record of the number of tools used for disassembly/assembly. After assembling is complete, count the number of tools, so as to make sure that no forgotten tools remain in the assembled machine.
When hydraulic oil is drained, the suction filter or the suction lines are replaced, or the removal and installation of the pump, swing motor, travel motor or cylinder is done, bleed air from the hydraulic system in the following procedures: IMPORTANT: If the engine is started with air trapped in the hydraulic pump housing, damage to the pump may result. If the hydraulic motor is operated with air trapped in the hydraulic motor housing, damage to the motor may result. If the cylinder is operated with air trapped in the cylinder tube, damage to the cylinder may result. Be sure to bleed air before starting the engine.
• Bleeding Air from Hydraulic Pump • Remove the air bleeding plug from the top of the pump and fill the pump housing with hydraulic oil. • After the pump housing is filled with hydraulic oil, temporarily tighten the plug. Then, start the engine and run at slow idle speed. • Slightly loosen the plug to bleed air from the pump housing until hydraulic oil oozes out. • After bleeding all the air, securely tighten the plug.
• Bleeding Air from Travel Motor / Swing Motor • With the drain plug / hose on travel motor / swing motor removed, fill the motor case with hydraulic oil.
W1-1-2
GENERAL / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling • Bleeding Air from Hydraulic Circuit • After refilling hydraulic oil, start the engine. While operating each cylinder, swing motor and travel motor evenly, operate the machine under light loads for 10 to 15 minutes. Slowly start each operation (never fully stroke the cylinders during initial operation stage). As the pilot oil circuit has an air bleed device, air trapped in the pilot oil circuit will be bled while performing the above operation for approx. 5 minutes. • Reposition the front attachment to check hydraulic oil level. • Stop the engine. Recheck hydraulic oil level. Replenish oil as necessary.
W1-1-3
M1M7-05-024
GENERAL / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling Floating Seal Precautions
A
1. In general, replace the floating seal with a new one after disassembling. If the floating seal is to be reused, follow these procedures: (1) Keep seal rings together as a matched set with seal ring faces together. Insert a piece of cardboard to protect surfaces. B
(2) Check the slide surface on seal ring (A) for scuffing, scoring, corrosion, deformation or uneven wear. (3) Check O-ring (B) for deformation or hardening.
tears,
W105-03-05-019
breaks,
2. If incorrectly assembled, oil leakage or damage will occur. Be sure to do the following, to prevent trouble. (1) Clean the floating seal and seal mounting bores with cleaning solvent. Use a wire brush to remove mud, rust or dirt. After cleaning, thoroughly dry parts with compressed air.
Correct
Incorrect
(2) Clean the floating seal and seal mounting bores. Check the bore surface for scuffing or scoring by touching the surface with touch. (3) Check that the O-ring is not twisted, and that it is installed correctly on the seal ring. (4) After installing the floating seal, check that seal ring surface (A) is parallel with seal mating face (C) by measuring the distances (A) and (C) at point (a) and (b), as illustrated. If these distances differ, correct the O-ring seating.
W105-03-05-020
D
Correct
Incorrect
a
a
C
b a=b
b aâ&#x2030; b W110-03-05-004
W1-1-4
GENERAL / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling Precautions for Using Nylon Sling 1. Follow the precautions below to use nylon slings safely. • Attach protectors (soft material) on the corners of the load so that the nylon sling does not directly contact the corners. This will prevent the nylon sling from being damaged and the lifted load from slipping. • Lower the temperature of the lifted load to lower than 100 °C (212 °F). If unavoidably lifting a load with a temperature of 100 °C (212 °F) or more, reduce the load weight. • Do not lift acid or alkali chemicals. • Take care not to allow the sling to become wet. The load may slip. • When required to use more than one sling, use slings with the same width and length to keep the lifted load balanced. • When lifting a load using an eyehole, be sure to eliminate any gaps between the sling and load. (Refer to the right illustration.) Reduce the load weight so that it is less than 80 % of the sling breaking force. • Avoid using twisted, bound, connected, or hitched slings. • Do not place any object on twisted or bent slings. (Refer to the right illustration.) • When removing the slings from under the load, take care not to damage the nylon slings. Avoid contact with protrusions. • Avoid dragging slings on the ground, throwing slings or pushing slings with a metal object. • When using with other types of slings (wire rope) or accessories (shackle), protect the joint so that the nylon sling is not damaged. • Store the nylon slings indoors so they won’t deteriorate with heat, sun light, or chemicals.
Correct Eyehole Lifting Method
W102-04-02-016
Incorrect Eyehole Lifting Method
W105-04-01-008
Bent Sling
W1-1-5
W162-01-01-009
GENERAL / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling
CAUTION: If a load is lifted with a damaged nylon sling, serious personal injury may result. Be sure to visually check the nylon sling for any damage before using.
Damaged Appearance
Broken Sewing Thread
W162-01-01-002
Scuffing
2. Before using a nylon sling, visually check the nylon sling for any damage corresponding to examples shown to the right. If any damage is found, cut and discard the sling. Even if no damage is found, do not use slings older than 7-years.
W162-01-01-003
Fuzz Broken Sewing Thread
W162-01-01-004
Broken Sewing Thread
W162-01-01-005
Broken Sewing Thread
Scoring
Fuzz
Separation of Belt
Scuffing
W162-01-01-006
W162-01-01-007
Broken Warp
W162-01-01-008
W1-1-6
GENERAL / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling MAINTENANCE STANDARD TERMINOLOGY “Standard” 1. Dimension for parts on a new machine. 2. Dimension of new components or assemblies adjusted to specification.
“Allowable Limit” 1. Normal machine performance cannot be accomplished after exceeding this limit. 2. Repair or adjustment is impossible after exceeding this limit. 3. Therefore, in consideration of operation efficiency and maintenance expense, proper maintenance shall be carried out before reaching the “Allowable Limit”.
W1-1-7
GENERAL / Precautions for Disassembling and Assembling (Blank)
W1-1-8
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening TIGHTENING TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS No. 1. 2. 3. 4.
5.
Descriptions Engine cushion rubber mounting bolt Engine bracket mounting bolt (Front) Hydraulic oil tank mounting bolt Fuel tank mounting nut Metal face seal Union joints fitting for hydraulic for hydraulic hoses and piping hoses and pipes ORS
6. 7. 9. 10.
Pump mounting bolt Pump cover mounting bolt Control valve mounting bolt Control valve base mounting bolt Swing device mounting bolt Battery mounting nut
11.
Canopy mounting bolt
12.
Cab mounting bolt
8.
14. 15. 16. 17.
Swing bearing Upperstructure mounting bolt Undercarriage Travel device mounting bolt Sprocket mounting bolt Upper roller mounting bolt Lower roller mounting bolt
18.
Cover mounting bolt
19.
Counterweight mounting bolt
20.
Front pin lock plate bolts
21. 22
Side-cutter mounting bolts Track roller guard mounting bolt
13.
Bolt Dia. mm 12 10 12 10 7/16-20UNF
Q’ty 4 8 4 3
9/16-18UNF 3/4-16UNF 1-1/16-12UNF 1-5/16-12UNF 9/16 UNF 11/16 UNF 13/16 UNF 12 10 10 10 16 6 12 10 12 10 12 12 14 14 16 14 6 8 10 24 10 12 14 16 18 14 16
NOTE: (1) Apply lubricant (i.e. white zinc B dissolved into spindle oil) to reduce their friction coefficients. (2) Remove rust, dirt, and dust before installing fasteners.
W1-2-1
2 8 4 4 8 2 5 5 5 5 27 24 24 24 2 16
3
6 12
Wrench Size mm 19 17 19 17 17 19 22 27 36 41 19 22 27 10 (Socket) 17 17 17 24 10 19 17 19 17 19 19 22 22 24 22 10 13 17 36 17 19 22 24 27 22 24
N⋅m 88 49 88 20 24.5 29.5 39 93 175 205 44 74 103 88 49 49 49 205 5 88 49 88 49 108 108 175 175 231 177 5 9.8 49 930 49 88 137 205 390 175 265
Torque (kgf⋅m) (9) (5) (9) (2) (2.5) (3) (4) (9.5) (18) (21) (4.5) (7.5) (10.5) (9) (5) (5) (5) (21) (0.5) (9) (5) (9) (5) (11) (11) (18) (18) (23.5) (18) (0.5) (1) (5) (95) (5) (9) (14) (21) (40) (18) (27)
(lbf⋅ft) (65) (36) (65) (15) (18) (22) (29) (69) (129) (151) (32) (55) (76) (65) (36) (36) (36) (101) (3.5) (65) (36) (65) (36) (80) (80) (130) (130) (170) (130) (3.5) (7) (36) (398) (36) (65) (101) (152) (290) (130) (196)
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening TORQUE CHART CAUTION: Use tools appropriate for the work to be done. Makeshift tools and procedures can create safety hazards. For loosening and tightening nuts and bolts, use correct size tools. Otherwise, tightening tools may slip, potentially causing personal injury. Bolt Types Tighten nuts or bolts correctly to torque specifications. Four different types and grades of bolt are employed. Make sure to employ correct bolts and tighten them correctly when assembling the machine or components. Hexagon T Bolt
SA-040
Hexagon H Bolt
Hexagon M Bolt
Socket Bolt
W162-01-01-001
Specified Tightening Torque Chart
Bolt Dia.
Wrench Size
Hexagon Wrench Size
M552-07-091
M552-07-090
M157-07-225
Socket Bolt Nxm
(kgfxm)
(lbfxft)
Nxm
(kgfxm)
(lbfxft)
Nxm
(kgfxm)
M8
13
6
30
(3.1)
(22)
20
(2.0)
(15.0)
10
(1.0)
(7.4)
M10
17
8
65
(6.6)
(48)
50
(5.1)
(37)
20
(2.0)
(15.0)
M12
19
10
110
(11.0)
(81)
90
(9.2)
(66)
35
(3.6)
(26.0)
M14
22
12
180
(18.5)
(135)
140
(14.0)
(103)
55
(5.6)
(41)
M16
24
14
270
(27.5)
(200)
210
(21.5)
(155)
80
(8.2)
(59)
M18
27
14
400
(41.0)
(295)
300
(30.5)
(220)
120
(12.0)
(89)
M20
30
17
550
(56.0)
(410)
400
(41.0)
(295)
170
(17.0)
(125)
M22
32
17
750
(76.5)
(550)
550
(56.0)
(410)
220
(22.5)
(162)
M24
36
19
950
(97.0)
(700)
700
(71.5)
(520)
280
(28.5)
(205)
M27
41
19
1400
(143)
(1030)
1050
(107)
(770)
400
(41.0)
(295)
M30
46
22
1950
(200)
(1440)
1450
(148)
(1070)
550
(56.0)
(410)
M33
50
24
2600
(265)
(1920)
1950
(200)
(1440)
750
(76.5)
(550)
M36
55
27
3200
(325)
(2360)
2450
(250)
(1810)
950
(97.0)
(700)
W1-2-2
(lbfxft)
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening IMPORTANT: The following items are applied to both fine and coarse pitch threads. 1. Apply lubricant (i. e. white zinc B dissolved Into Spindle oil) to nuts and bolts to reduce their friction coefficients. The plated bolts require no lubricant. 2. Torque tolerance is Âą10 %. 3. Be sure to use bolts of correct length. Bolts that are too long cannot be tightened, as the bolt tip comes into contact with the bottom of the bolt hole. Bolts that are too short cannot develop sufficient tightening force. 4. The torques given in the chart are for general use only. Do not use these torques if a different torque is given for a specific application. 5. Make sure that nut and bolt threads are clean before installing. Remove dirt or corrosion, if any. Bolt Tightening Order When tightening two or more bolts, tighten them alternately, as shown, to ensure even tightening. Equally tighten upper and lower
Tighten from center and diagonally
Tighten 1
1st to 4th
12
9
4
1
6
7
14
13
8
5
2
3
10
11
3
6 4
5 2
2nd to 3rd W105-01-01-003
W1-2-3
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Service Recommendations for Split Flange IMPORTANT: 1. Be sure to clean and inspect sealing surfaces. Scratches / roughness cause leaks and seal wear. Unevenness causes seal extrusion. If defects cannot be polished out, replace the component. 2. Be sure to use only specified O-rings. Inspect O-rings for any damage. Take care not to file O-ring surfaces. When installing an O-ring into a groove, use grease to hold it in place. 3. While lightly tightening split flange halves, check that split is centered and perpendicular to the port. Hand-tighten bolts to hold parts in place. Take care not to pinch the O-ring. 4. Tighten bolts alternately and diagonally, as shown, to ensure even tightening. 5. Do not use air wrenches. Using an air wrench often causes tightening of one bolt fully before tightening of the others, resulting in damage to O-rings or uneven tightening of bolts.
W105-01-01-015
WRONG
W105-01-01-016
W105-01-01-008
WRONG
RIGHT
Do not bend it round
Bend along edge sharply
Nut and Bolt Locking RIGHT
• Lock Plate
WRONG
RIGHT
IMPORTANT: Do not reuse lock plates. Do not try to bend the same point twice.
• Cotter Pin IMPORTANT: Do not reuse cotter pins. Match the holes in the bolt and nut while tightening, not while loosening.
Bend along edge sharply
RIGHT
• Lock Wire
RIGHT
WRONG
W105-01-01-009
IMPORTANT: Apply wire to bolts in the bolt-tightening direction, not in the bolt-loosening direction. RIGHT
Loosen
WRONG
Tighten
W105-01-01-010
W1-2-4
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening PIPING JOINT IMPORTANT: The torques given in the chart are for general use only. Do not use these torques if a different torque is given for a specific application. Union Joint
1
3
4
2
5
Metal sealing surfaces (4) and (5) of adaptor (1) and hose (2) fit together to seal pressure oil. Union joints are used to join small-diameter lines. IMPORTANT: 1. Do not over-tighten nut (3). Excessive force will be applied to metal sealing surfaces (4) and (5), possibly cracking adaptor (1). Be sure to tighten nut (3) to specifications. 2. Scratches or other damage to sealing surfaces (4) or (5) will cause oil leakage at the joint. Take care not to damage them when connecting/disconnecting.
M202-07-051
Joint Body
37° 30°
Male Union Joint
Female Union Joint W105-01-01-017
Description 30°male
37°female
Wrench Size mm Union Nut 17 19 22 27 32 36 41 17 19 22 27 32 36 41
Wrench Size mm Hose Fittings 17 19 22 27 32 36 41 14 17 19 22 27 32 36
Tightening Torque N⋅m (kgf⋅m, lbf⋅ft) 24.5 (2.5,18) 29.5 (3.0,22) 39 (4.0,28.5) 64 (6.5,47) 137 (14,101) 175 (18,129) 205 (21,151) 24.5 (2.5,18) 29.5 (3.0,22) 39 (4.0,28.5) 64 (6.5,47) 137 (14,101) 175 (18,129) 205 (21,151)
NOTE: Tightening torque of 37°male coupling without union is similar to tightening torque of 37°female.
W1-2-5
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Piping Joint 1
Pipe Joint (Metal Joint) (Union Nut Wrench size 17 mm)
4
5
3
2
Metal sealing surfaces (3) (Metal) of pipe (2) and adapter (1) seal pressure oil. Take care not damage sealing surfaces when connecting / disconnecting pipe. Tightening Torque Chart Wrench Size (mm) N⋅m Tightening (kgf⋅m) Torque (lbf⋅ft)
M1M7-07-005
17 39 (4.0) (29) 7
6
9
O-ring Seal Joint O-ring (6) seats against the end face of adaptor (7) to seal pressure oil. IMPORTANT: 1. Be sure to replace O-ring (6) with a new one when reconnecting. 2. Before tightening nut (9), confirm that O-ring (6) is seated correctly in O-ring groove (8). Tightening nut (9) with O-ring (6) displaced will damage O-ring (6), resulting in oil leakage. 3. Take care not to damage O-ring groove (8) or sealing surface (10). Damage to O-ring (6) will cause oil leakage. 4. If nut (9) is loose and oil is leaking, do not re-tighten nut (9). Replace O-ring (6) with a new one and check that O-ring (6) is correctly seated in place, tighten nut (9).
8
Wrench Size mm Union Nut 19 22 27 32 36 41 46
W1-2-6
Wrench Size mm Hose Fittings 17 19 22 27 30,32 36 41
10
Hose Fittings M104-07-033
Tightening Torque N⋅m (kgf⋅m, lbf⋅ft) 29.5 (3.0,22) 69 (7.0,51) 93 (9.5,69) 137 (14,101) 175 (18,129) 205 (21,151) 205 (21,151)
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Quick Coupler 1. Connection Procedure
• While pulling and fully turning socket ring (1) counterclockwise, insert socket ring (1) onto plug (3) until the end face of socket ring (1) comes in contact with plug (3). • Release socket ring (1). Check that socket ring (1) is slightly move backward by the spring force and the coupler is held in position with balls (2). Be sure to check that socket ring (1) has been moved back fully to the right original position. 2. Disconnection Procedure
• While pulling and fully turning socket ring (1) counterclockwise, disconnect the coupler. As no check valve is provided in the coupler, take care that oil may flow out of the coupler when the coupler is disconnected. • After the coupler is disconnected, plug the holes with the exclusively prepared plugs. CAUTION: Take care not to damage the joint surfaces when disconnecting or connecting the coupler. Before disconnecting or connecting the coupler, clean the coupler and its surroundings with a cleaning solvent and completely wipe off the cleaning solvent. Use extra care not to allow foreign matter such as dirt to enter the coupler. Disconnect or connect the coupler in the correct procedure. Sufficiently check that no oil leak is present after connecting the coupler. After connecting the coupler, check that that socket ring (1) has been moved back fully to the right original position.
W1-2-7
3
1
M1M7-07-006
2
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Screw-In Connection PT
Depending on types of screw and sealing, different types of screw fittings are used. IMPORTANT: Be sure to confirm that the thread pitch and thread type (tapered or straight) are the correct type before using any screw-in connection.
30°
Male Tapered Thread
PF
Male Straight Thread W105-01-01-018
Wrench Size mm Hose Fittings 19 22 27 36 41 50 60
Male Tapered Thread Tightening Torque N⋅m (kgf⋅m, lbf⋅ft) FC material SS material 14.5 (1.5,10.5) 34 (3.5,25) 29.5 (3.0,21.5) 49 (5.0,36) 49 (5.0,36) 93 (9.5,69) 69 (7.0,51) 157 (16,116) 108 (11,80) 205 (21,151) 157 (16,116) 320 (33,235) 195 (20,144)
Seal Tape Application Seal tape is used to seal clearances between male and female threads, so as to prevent any leaks between threads. Be sure to apply just enough seal tape to fill up thread clearances. Do not overwrap.
Internal Thread
External Thread
Clearance
• Application Procedure
W105-01-01-019
Confirm that the thread surface is clean and, free of dirt or damage. Apply seal tape around threads as shown. Wrap seal tape in the same direction as the threads.
Leave one to two pitch threads uncovered
Low-Pressure-Hose Clamp Tightening Torque Low-pressure-hose clamp tightening torque differs depending on the type of clamp. T-Bolt Type Band Clamp: 4.4 N⋅m (0.45 kgf⋅m, 3.25 lbf⋅ft) Worm Gear Type Band Clamp: 5.9 to 6.9 N⋅m (0.6 to 0.7 kgf⋅m, 4.3 to 5.1 lbf⋅ft)
W1-2-8
M114-07-041
T-Bolt Type
Worm Gear Type
M114-07-043
M114-07-042
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening Connecting Hose
RIGHT
WRONG CAUTION: When replacing hoses, be sure to use only genuine Hitachi service parts. Using hoses other than genuine Hitachi hoses may cause oil leaks, hose rupture or Separation of fitting, possibly resulting in a fire on the machine. Do not install hoses kinked. Application of high oil pressure, vibration, or an impact to a kinked hose may result in oil leaks, hose rupture or separation of fitting. Utilize Print marks on hoses when installing to prevent hose from being kinked. If hoses rub against each other, wear to the hoses will result, leading to hose rupture. Take necessary measures to protect hoses from rubbing against each other. Take care so that hoses do not come into contact with moving parts or sharp objects.
W105-01-01-011
RIGHT
WRONG Rubbing Against Each Other
W105-01-01-012
WRONG Clamp
RIGHT Clamp
Rubbing Against Each Other W105-01-01-013
WRONG
Rubbing Against Each Other
RIGHT
Clamp W105-01-01-014
W1-2-9
GENERAL INFORMATION / Tightening PERIODIC REPLACEMENT OF PARTS To ensure safe operation, be sure to conduct periodic inspection of the machine. In addition, the parts listed below, if defective, may pose serious safety/fire hazards. It is very difficult to gauge the extent of deterioration, fatigue, or weakening of the parts listed below simply by visual inspection alone. For this reason, replace these parts at the intervals shown in the table below. However, if any of these parts are found to be defective, replace before starting operation, regardless of the interval. Also, when replacing hoses, check the clamps for deformation, cracks, or other deterioration, and replace if necessary. Be sure to perform periodic inspection of all hoses, as shown below, and replace or retighten any defective parts found, if necessary. Consult your authorized dealer for correct replacement.
Periodic Replacement Parts Fuel hose (Fuel tank to filter) Fuel hose (Fuel tank to injection pump) Heater hose (Heater to engine) Engine Engine rubber vibration insulator Floor mount rubber Pump coupling Pump suction hose Pump delivery hose Base Machine Swing hose Auxiliary hose Hydraulic Oil cooler hose (C/V to oil cooler) System Boom cylinder line hose Arm cylinder line hose Front Attachment Bucket cylinder line hose Pilot hose NOTE: Be sure to replace seals, such as O-rings and gaskets, when replacing hoses.
W1-2-10
Replacement Interval Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 5 years or 5000 hours Every 5 years or 5000 hours Every 5 years or 5000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours Every 2 years or 4000 hours
GENERAL / Painting PAINTING Section
• Upperstructure
• Undercarriage
• Front attachment
Surfaces to Be Painted Outer cover (Right, Left, Rear and Top)
Painting Color YR1-01 [TAXI yellow]
Skirt (Front, Right and Left)
SP-424 [Dark gray]
Main frame
SP-424 [Dark gray]
SP-424 [Dark gray] Inside (Oil, Fuel tank) Canopy (Pole) SP-424 [Dark gray] Stay ( Left) Black Lever (Travel, Blade) N-10 [N1.0] Pedal (Travel, Boom swing) SP-424 [Dark gray] Floor plate, Seat base SP-424 [Dark gray] Console (Right, Left) SP-424 [Dark gray] Counterweight SP-424 [Dark gray] Track frame (Including idler, upper and SP-424 [Dark gray] lower roller) Swing bearing Black Blade (Including cylinder) SP-424 [Dark gray] Boom, Arm, Bucket and Link YR1-01 [TAXI yellow] (Including cylinder) Swing post (Including cylinder) SP-424 [Dark gray]
Dark Gray
Dark Gray
Cab Type
Black Dark Gray
TAXI Yellow
Dark Gray Dark Gray
W1M9-01-03-001
Black
TAXI Yellow
Dark Gray
W1-3-1
Dark Gray
TAXI Yellow
GENERAL / Painting (Blank)
W1-3-2
GENERAL / Bleeding Air BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK CAUTION: Escaping fluid under pressure may penetrate the skin and eyes, and cause serious injury. Release the pressure before removing hydraulic or other lines. Hot hydraulic oil just after operation may spout and cause severe burns. Wait for oil in order to cool before starting any work. Do not turn the cap on hydraulic oil tank quickly. The cap may fly off by internal pressure. Release any remaining pressure and remove the cap. Preparation 1. Park the machine on a solid, level surface. Lower the front attachment onto the ground. 2. Stop the engine. Loosen cap (1) on hydraulic oil tank (2) and release any remaining pressure.
M1M7-05-024
3. Remove cap (1) on hydraulic oil tank (2).
1 2
4. Install a vacuum pump to the hole without cap (1). Operate the vacuum pump and maintain negative pressure in the hydraulic oil tank. Run the vacuum pump continuously while working.
W1M9-01-04-001
Vacuum Pump Hose
Adapter
W1M9-01-04-002
W1-4-1
GENERAL / Bleeding Air (Blank)
W1-4-2
GENERAL / Floor-Tilting Device FLOOR-TILTING PROCEDURE
DEVICE
OPERATION
Preparation • Park the machine in a flat and solid place. • Lower the blade. • Roll-in the arm and bucket, and put them on the front wooden block or something. CAUTION: Be careful because interference of the boom and canopy (cab) takes place unless the front end attachment is lowered in advance. M1M7-07-060
• Close the door of the cab (optional).
W1-5-1
GENERAL / Floor-Tilting Device PROCEDURE FOR FLOOR TILTING UP CAUTION: If tilting up operation is made with the door open, it interferes with the cover (3). 1. Remove two bolts (2), and remove (3) from the canopy or cab (1). : 17 mm IMPORTANT: Near bolts (4), two bolts for fixing the canopy or cab (1) are fitted. Never remove these two bolts in tilting up operation. A bolt never to be removed can be identified by the attached cap or red paint.
1
2 3 4
4-Pillar Canopy
M1M7-07-061
1
2. Remove three bolts (4) from the canopy or cab (1). : 19 mm
2-Pillar Canopy
Not to be removed
4
M1M7-07-063
1
Cab
Not to be removed
4
M1M7-07-062
1
M1M7-07-064
Not to be removed
W1-5-2
GENERAL / Floor-Tilting Device IMPORTANT: The operating torque of adjuster screw (5) is 24.5 Nâ&#x2039;&#x2026;m (2.5 kgfâ&#x2039;&#x2026;m) or lower. In case larger torque is required, it is probable that bolts (4) remain unremoved. Re-check from this perspective. 3. Turn adjuster screw (5). Tilt the canopy or cab (1) assembly toward front. : 17 mm 4. Turn adjuster screw (5) clockwise until disc (6) on the side face of the tilting device moves to the farthest end.
5
M1M7-07-065
2-Pillar / 4-Pillar Canopy
5
6
M1M7-07-066
CAUTION: Do not tilt up cab (1) as far as the striped region. If done so, cab (1) tilts forward because the center of gravity overhangs the balancing point, which is dangerous.
Cab
5. In cab (1) version machines, stop tilting up 50 mm before the farthest end [before the striped region (6)].
6 50 mm W1M9-01-05-001
IMPORTANT: Do not make tilting up operation by other means (e.g. by crane) than the tilting device. The tilting device or floor could be damaged otherwise. 6. In case of work done lying under the floor, put a support at the opening space of the raised floor for security.
Support
M1M7-07-067
W1-5-3
GENERAL / Floor-Tilting Device PROCEDURE FOR FLOOR TILTING DOWN CAUTION: Do not lower the floor abruptly. If adjuster screw (5) is rotated abruptly in lowering the floor, the floor trembles enormously, which is dangerous. 1. Slowly turn adjuster screw (5) anticlockwise. : 17 mm
8 9
2. Turn adjuster screw (5) counterclockwise until the farthest end contacts receiver seat (7).
7
CAUTION: After the floor has been lowered completely, if adjuster screw (5) is kept turned, it will not be turned any longer when unscrewed by about 15 mm because washer (10) touches pin (11). Be careful not to turn adjuster screw (5) further because washer (10) deforms and gets damaged, causing fall of bolt (12). 3. When the floor has been lowered completely, adjuster screw (5) is drawn. Make adjustment so that the clearance between collar (8) of adjuster screw (5) and contact face (9) becomes 2 to 5 mm.
W1-5-4
5 10
M1M7-07-068
11
12
W1M9-01-05-002
GENERAL / Floor-Tilting Device 4. Install the canopy or cab (1) with three bolts (4). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m)
2-Pillar Canopy
4
1
M1M7-07-063
4
4-Pillar Canopy
1
Cab
4
M1M7-07-062
1
M1M7-07-064
W1-5-5
GENERAL / Floor-Tilting Device (Blank)
W1-5-6
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
SECTION 2
UPPERSTRUCTURE  CONTENTS  Group 1 Canopy
Group 6 Pilot Valve
Remove and Install Canopy.................... W2-1-1
Remove and Install Front Pilot Valve ...... W2-6-1 Remove and Install Travel Pilot Valve ..... W2-6-3
Group 2 Counterweight Remove and Install Counterweight ......... W2-2-1
Remove and Install Blade Pilot Valve...... W2-6-7 Remove and Install Boom Swing Pilot Valve ...................... W2-6-9
Group 3 Pump Device Remove and Install Pump Device ........... W2-3-1
Disassemble Front Pilot Valve .............. W2-6-12
Disassemble Pump Device ................... W2-3-4
Assemble Front Pilot Valve ................... W2-6-16
Assemble Pump Device ......................... W2-3-6
Disassemble Travel Pilot Valve ............. W2-6-20
Maintenance Standard.......................... W2-3-10
Assemble Travel Pilot Valve ................. W2-6-24 Disassemble Pilot Valves for Boom Swing,
Group 4 Control Valve
Blade and Auxiliary............................ W2-6-30
Remove and Install Control Valve ........... W2-4-1
Assemble Pilot Valves for Boom Swing,
Disassemble And Assemble
Blade and Auxiliary............................ W2-6-32
Control Valve ...................................... W2-4-6 Remove and Install Relief Valve and Make-up Valve ........................... W2-4-12
Group 7 Solenoid Valve Remove and Install
Disassemble and Assemble Body ....... W2-4-14
2-Unit Solenoid Valve .......................... W2-7-1
Disassemble Unload Section ................ W2-4-16
Disassemble 2-Unit Solenoid Valve ........ W2-7-6
Assemble Unload Section..................... W2-4-18
Assemble 2-Unit Solenoid Valve ............. W2-7-8
Disassemble and Assemble Spool ........ W2-4-20
Remove and Install 1-Unit Solenoid Valve ........................ W2-7-10
Disassemble and Assemble Boom Anti-Drift Valve ........................ W2-4-22 Disassemble and Assemble Shuttle Valve and Pressure Compensation Valve .......... W2-4-24
Structure of 1-Unit Solenoid Valve ...... W2-7-12
Group 8 Revolution Sensing Valve Remove and Install Revolution Sensing Valve.................... W2-8-1
Group 5 Swing Device Remove and Install Swing Device........... W2-5-1
Disassemble Revolution Sensing Valve .. W2-8-4
Disassemble Swing Device .................... W2-5-6
Assemble Revolution Sensing Valve ....... W2-8-6
Assemble Swing Device ......................... W2-5-8
Group 9 Auxiliry Flow Selector Valve (Optional)
Disassemble Swing Motor .................... W2-5-14 Assemble Swing Motor ......................... W2-5-16
Remove and Install
Maintenance Standards ........................ W2-5-20
Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve .............. W2-9-1 Disassemble Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve............................. W2-9-4 Assemble Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve............................. W2-9-6
1M9W-2-1
(Blank)
1M9W-2-2
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Canopy REMOVE AND INSTALL CANOPY Removal
1
1. Attach a nylon sling onto the center of canopy (1).
W1M9-02-07-001
2. Remove bolts (2) (3 used) from canopy (1). : 19 mm
1
2
W1M9-02-01-002
CAUTION: Canopy (1) weight: 63 kg (140 lb)
1
3, 4
3. Remove bolts (3) (3 used) and spacers (4) (3 used) from canopy (1). Hoist and remove canopy (1) from main frame (5). : 17 mm
5
W2-1-1
W1M9-02-01-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Canopy Installation 1
CAUTION: Canopy (1) weight: 63 kg (140 lb) 1. Hoist and align canopy (1) with the mounting hole on main frame (5).
W1M9-02-07-001
5
2. Install canopy (1) onto main frame (5) with bolts (3) (3 used) and spacers (4) (3 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
1
3, 4
W1M9-02-01-001
5
3. Install canopy (1) onto main frame (5) with bolts (2) (3 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft)
1
2
W1M9-02-01-002
W2-1-2
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Counterweight REMOVE AND INSTALL COUNTERWEIGHT 1
Removal
2
CAUTION: Counterweight (2) weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 351 kg (780 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 675 kg (1490 lb) 4
1. Remove bolts (2) (3 used) from canopy (1). : 19 mm 3
2. Remove bolts (4) (3 used). Remove cover (5) from counterweight (2). : 17 mm
5
W1M9-02-01-002
3. Remove bolts (6) (2 used). Remove cover (7) from main frame (8). : 17 mm
1
6
7
W1M9-02-01-001
8
4. Turn adjusting screw (9) and lay down the canopy (1) assembly to the front side. : 17 mm
1
Tilt Device
9 W1M9-02-01-003
W2-2-1
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Counterweight 5. Remove bolts (11) (2 used). Remove cover (10) from main frame (8). : 13 mm 6. Remove bolts (12) (4 used). Remove covers (13) (2 used) from main frame (8). : 17 mm
10, 11
12
7. Open cover (14). 8. Remove bolts (15) (5 used). Remove covers (16) (2 used) from main frame (8). : 17 mm
8
12
13
W1M9-02-07-001
14
9. Install eyebolts (M16, Pitch 2.5 mm) (2 used) to counterweight (2). Hold counterweight (2).
15
8
16
15
W1M9-02-02-001
2
Eyebolt Mounting Position
W1M9-02-02-003
W2-2-2
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Counterweight 10. Remove bolts (17) (3 used) from counterweight (2). : 36 mm
11. Float counterweight (2) a little and slide backward. Hoist and remove counterweight (2) from main frame (8).
2
W1M9-02-02-002
17
W2-2-3
8
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Counterweight Installation CAUTION: Counterweight (2) weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 351 kg (780 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 675 kg (1490 lb)
2
1. Install eyebolts (M16, Pitch 2.5 mm) (2 used) to counterweight (2) and hoist counterweight (2). Place counterweight (2) onto main frame (8) and slide counterweight (2) forward.
Eyebolt Mounting Position
2. Install counterweight (2) to main frame (8) with bolts (17) (3 used). : 36 mm : 700 N⋅m (71 kgf⋅m, 520 lbf⋅ft)
W1M9-02-02-003
2
3. Install covers (16) (2 used) onto main frame (8) with bolts (15) (5 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
W1M9-02-02-002
17
8
4. Shut cover (14).
14
15
W2-2-4
8
16
15
W1M9-02-02-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Counterweight 5. Install covers (13) (2 used) onto main frame (8) with bolts (12) (4 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft) 6. Install cover (10) onto main frame (8) with bolts (11) (2 used). : 13 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft)
10, 11
12
7. Turn adjusting screw (9) and lower the canopy (1) assembly. : 17 mm
8
12
13
W1M9-02-07-001
1
8. Install cover (7) onto main frame (8) with bolts (6) (2 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
Tilt Device
9 W1M9-02-01-003
6
7
8
W2-2-5
W1M9-02-01-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Counterweight 9. Install canopy (1) with bolts (3) (3 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft)
1
10. Install cover (5) onto counterweight (2) with bolts (4) (3 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
2
4
3 5 W1M9-02-01-002
W2-2-6
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device REMOVE AND INSTALL PUMP DEVICE Removal CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 1. Remove bolts (1) (4 used). Remove covers (2, 3) from frame (4). : 17 mm 1
4
IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the removed hoses for assembling. 2. Remove hoses (9) (5 used) from pump device (6). Cap the open ends.
1
5
3
2
W1M9-02-07-001
6
ï¼&#x161; 19 mm, 22 mm, 36 mm 3. Loosen band (8). Remove rubber hose (7) from pump device (6). CAUTION: Pump device (6) weight: 19 kg (42 lb)
7
4. Remove socket bolts (5) (2 used) from pump device (6). Hoist and remove pump device (6). : 10 mm
9
W2-3-1
8
W1M9-02-03-004
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device Installation CAUTION: Pump device (6) weight: 19 kg (42 lb)
5
6
1. Install pump device (6) onto the engine flywheel housing with socket bolts (5) (2 used). : 10 mm : 108 N⋅m (11 kgf⋅m, 80 lbf⋅ft) 2. Install hoses (9) (5 used) onto pump device (6). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) : 22 mm : 39 N⋅m (4.0 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft) : 36 mm : 175 N⋅m (18 kgf⋅m, 129 lbf⋅ft)
7
3. Install rubber hose (7) to pump device (6) with band (8). 4. Install covers (2, 3) to frame (4) with bolts (1) (4 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
9
W1M9-02-03-004
8
IMPORTANT: Release any pressure in the pump device. (Refer to W1-1-2.) After completing the work, check the hydraulic oil level. Start the engine and check for any oil leaks.
1
4
W2-3-2
1
3
2
W1M9-02-07-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device (Blank)
W2-3-3
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device DISASSEMBLE PUMP DEVICE 7
29 28
6 27
26
25
5
24 23
22
21
4
20
3
19
2 1
17 16
15
11 10
8
9 18 48
47 46 14
45 44 42
13 12
41 40
39 38 32 31 30
43
36 35
37
34 33
12345678910 11 12 13 -
Retaining Ring O-Ring Seal Holder Oil Seal Shaft Ball Bearing Retaining Ring Plug O-Ring Body S Gasket Knock Pin (2 Used) Spring
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 -
Stopper Pin Control Piston Ceramic Ball (2 Used) Swash Plate Plunger (11 Used) Retainer Holder Washer Needle (3 Used) Cylinder Block Washer Spring Washer
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 -
NOTE: Control piston (15) is not equipped for the machine with the air conditioner.
W2-3-4
Retaining Ring Valve Plate Needle Bearing Spring Holder Spring Spring Guide Control Piston Sleeve O-Ring Choke LS Valve Knock Pin
W1M9-02-03-002
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 -
Body H Seal Washer Adjusting Screw Nut Socket Bolt (7 Used) Coupling Collar (2 Used) Gear Pump Washer (4 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device Disassemble Pump Device 1. Remove socket bolts (48) (4 used). Remove gear pump (46) from body H (39). : 6 mm
8. Remove control piston (33), sleeve (34) and choke (36) from body H (39). : 35 mm
2. Remove collars (45) (2 used) from gear pump (46) and remove coupling (44) from body H (39) respectively.
9. Remove spring guide (32) from body H (39) and remove spring (31), spring holder (30) and the cylinder block (23) assembly from body S (10).
IMPORTANT: Do not turn adjusting screw (41) and nut (42) as the setting of pump flow rate changes.
10. Remove plungers (18) (11 used), retainer (19), holder (20), washer (21) and needles (22) (3 used) from cylinder block (23).
3. Remove LS valve (37) from body H (39). : 24 mm
CAUTION: Push spring (25) by using a press when remove retaining ring (27) as spring (25) may fly off.
CAUTION: Use a bolt (M10, Length 60 mm (2.36 in)) for temporary assembly and remove body H (39) from body S (10) as spring (31) may fly off.
11. Remove retaining ring (27) from cylinder block (23). Remove washer (26), spring (25) and washer (24) in this order.
4. Remove socket bolts (43) (2 used) on spring (31) side. Install the bolt (M10, Length 60 mm (2.36 in)) for temporary assembly in the hole. : 8 mm
12. Remove swash plate (17) from body S (10). Remove ceramic balls (16) (2 used). Remove stopper pin (14), spring (13) and control piston (15) from body S (10).
5. Remove other socket bolts (43) (5 used). : 8 mm
IMPORTANT: Do not remove ball bearing (6) unless replacing ball bearing (6). 13. Remove retaining ring (1) from body S (10). Tap and remove the body H (39) side on shaft (5) assembly by using a plastic hammer lightly. Remove seal holder (3), retaining ring (7) and ball bearing (6) from shaft (5). Remove oil seal (4) and O-ring (2) from seal holder (3).
6. Loosen and remove the bolts (M10, Length 60 mm (2.36 in)) (2 used) for temporary assembly from body H (39) alternately. IMPORTANT: Do not fall off valve plate (28) when removing body H (39). Do not remove needle bearing (29) unless replacing needle bearing (28). 7. Remove body H (39) from body S (10). Remove gasket (11), knock pins (12) (2 used) and valve plate (28) in this order.
W2-3-5
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device ASSEMBLE PUMP DEVICE 7
30 31 20
21
24 25
26 11 27 28 29 32
40
15
42 41
2
44
1
45
3
46 47
16
48
5 4
38
10
36 39 W1M9-02-03-001
6
13 14
17
22 19 18 23 33
34
35
43
47, 48
37
W1M9-02-03-003
12345678910 11 12 13 -
Retaining Ring O-Ring Seal Holder Oil Seal Shaft Ball Bearing Retaining Ring *Plug *O-Ring Body S Gasket *Knock Pin (2 Used) Spring
14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 -
Stopper Pin Control Piston Ceramic Ball (2 Used) Swash Plate Plunger (11 Used) Retainer Holder Washer Needle (3 Used) Cylinder Block Washer Spring Washer
27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 -
NOTE: As for the item with * mark, refer to W2-3-4.
W2-3-6
Retaining Ring Valve Plate Needle Bearing Spring Holder Spring Spring Guide Control Piston Sleeve O-Ring Choke LS Valve Knock Pin
39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 -
Body H Seal Washer Adjusting Screw Nut Socket Bolt (7 Used) Coupling Collar (2 Used) Gear Pump Washer (4 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device Assemble Pump Device IMPORTANT: When replacing ball bearing (6), install ball bearing (6) to shaft (5) first and install retaining ring (7). 1. Install ball bearing (6) to shaft (5) and install retaining ring (7). Insert the shaft (5) assembly into body S (10). IMPORTANT: Apply grease onto O-ring (2) on the outer diameter on seal holder (3) and the lip part of oil seal (4). 2. Install oil seal (4) and O-ring (2) onto seal holder (3). Install seal holder (3) onto shaft (5) by using special tool (ST 7274). Install retaining ring (1). 3. Install O-ring (9) to plug (8). Install plug (8) into body S (10). : 6 mm NOTE: As for parts (8, 9), refer to W2-3-4. 4. Install spring (13), stopper pin (14) and control piston (15) to body S (10). IMPORTANT: Apply grease onto ceramic balls (16) (2 used) and swash plate (17) sliding surface. 5. Install ceramic balls (16) (2 used) on the spherical part of body S (10). Install swash plate (17). 6. Install washer (24), spring (25) and washer (26) in cylinder block (23) in this order.
8. Turn cylinder block (23) upside down and install needles (22) (3 used). Place washer (21) and holder (20). 9. Install plungers (18) (11 used) and retainer (19) to cylinder block (23). 10. Align the hole in swash plate (17) on body S (18) with the spherical part of spring holder (30). Install spring holder (30) and spring (31). 11. Install the cylinder block (23) assembly to body S (10). Install coupling (44) onto the end of shaft (5). 12. Install O-ring (35) onto sleeve (34). Install choke (36) and sleeve (34) to body H (39). Install control piston (33) to sleeve (34). (Choke) : 4 mm : 6 to 9 N⋅m (0.6 to 0.9 kgf⋅m, 4 to 6.6 lbf⋅ft) (Sleeve) : 35 mm : 50 to 60 N⋅m (5.1 to 6.1 kgf⋅m, 37 to 44 lbf⋅ft) 13. Install knock pin (38) for valve plate (28), valve plate (28), spring guide (32), knock pins (12) (2 used) and gasket (11) to body H (39).
7. Push washer (26) and spring (25) by using a press and install retaining ring (27).
W2-3-7
NOTE: As for parts (12), refer to W2-3-4.
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device
31
45 46 47 48
10 39 W1M9-02-03-001
43
47, 48
37
W1M9-02-03-003
W2-3-8
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device 14. Align knock pin (12) and cover body S (10) with body H (39). Install and tighten the bolts (M10, Length 60 mm (2.36 in)) (2 used) for temporary assembly into the socket bolt (43) holes on spring (31) side. : 8 mm 15. Tighten socket bolts (43) (5 used) into other socket bolt (44) holes in body H (39) lightly. : 8 mm 16. Remove the one of bolt (M10, Length 60 mm (2.36 in)) for temporary assembly. Install and tighten socket bolt (43) lightly. Remove the other bolt (M10, Length 60 mm (2.36 in)) for temporary assembly. Tighten socket bolt (43) lightly in the same procedures. : 8 mm 17. Tighten socket bolts (43) (7 used). : 8 mm : 51 to 65 N⋅m (5.2 to 6.6 kgf⋅m, 38 to 48 lbf⋅ft) 18. Install LS valve (37) to body H (39). : 24 mm : 59 to 69 N⋅m (6.0 to 7.0 kgf⋅m, 44 to 51 lbf⋅ft) 19. Install collars (45) (2 used) to gear pump (46). Install gear pump (46) to body H (39) with socket bolts (48) (4 used) and washers (47) (4 used). : 6 mm : 24.5 to 27.5 N⋅m (2.5 to 2.8 kgf⋅m, 18 to 20.5 lbf⋅ft)
W2-3-9
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pump Device MAINTENANCE STANDARD 1. Clearance between plunger outer diameter and cylinder block bore (D-d): 0.05 mm (0.002 in) or less. D
d
W507-02-04-009
Cylinder Block
2. Clearance between plunger and shoe bottom
Plunger
Plunger
δ: 0.2 mm (0.008 in) or less. δ
3. Wear amount of oil seal mounting surface Check that there are no damage and / or abnormal wear. Wear amount: 0.025 mm (0.001 in) or less.
W2-3-10
Shoe
W107-02-06-140
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL CONTROL VALVE Removal 1
Counterweight
CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 1. Remove bolts (2) (3 used) in canopy (1). : 19 mm
2
W1M9-02-01-002
2. Remove bolts (3) (2 used). Remove cover (4) from main frame (5). : 17 mm
3
4
5
W1M9-02-01-001
3. Turn adjusting screw (6). Lay down the canopy (1) assembly to the front side. : 17 mm
1
Tilt Device
W2-4-1
6
W1M9-02-01-003
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the disconnected hoses for assembling. 4. Disconnect all the hoses, pipes and connectors from control valve (7). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm, 22 mm, 27 mm, 36 mm, 41 mm CAUTION: Control valve (7) weight: 58 kg (130 lb) 5. Remove bolts (8) (4 used) from control valve (7). : 17 mm 6. Pass a nylon sling under the cap on control valve (7). Hoist and remove control valve (7) from main frame (9).
W2-4-2
9
7, 8
W1M9-02-07-003
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve Installation CAUTION: Control valve (7) weight: 58 kg (130 lb) 1. Pass a nylon sling under the cap on control valve (7). Hoist and install control valve (7) onto main frame (9) with bolts (4) (4 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft) 2. Install all the hoses onto control valve (7). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) : 22 mm : 39 N⋅m (4.0 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft) : 27 mm : 78 N⋅m (8.0 kgf⋅m, 58 lbf⋅ft) : 36 mm : 175 N⋅m (18 kgf⋅m, 129 lbf⋅ft) : 41 mm : 205 N⋅m (21 kgf⋅m, 151 lbf⋅ft)
9
7, 8
W1M9-02-07-003
3. Turn adjusting screw (6). Lower the canopy (1) assembly.
1
Tilt Device
W2-4-3
6
W1M9-02-01-003
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve 4. Install cover (4) onto main frame (5) with bolts (3) (2 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft) 3 4
W1M9-02-01-001
5
1
5. Install canopy (1) with bolts (2) (3 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft)
Counterweight
2
W1M9-02-01-002
W2-4-4
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve (Blank)
W2-4-5
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE CONTROL VALVE
AND
21 20
ASSEMBLE 14
18
13 18
19
23
24
9
15
16
17 28
29 11
12
7
25
30
10
8
26 27
6
5
4
3
2 1a
29
31 32
33
29a
34 45 46 44
29
9
30
47 48 49 50 39 51 52
29 85
86
87
1b 30 29b
29
31
40
41
42
58 55
43
57
56
59
53
54 1c
29b
61
60
38 47 48 49 50 51 52
37
36
46
40
41
42
43
44
39
58 55
45
57
56
59
53
54
1d
38
37
36 W1M9-02-04-010
W2-4-6
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve 88
89 90
91
89
88 92
W1M9-02-04-001
1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 1f 1g 1h 1i 1j 1k 234567899a 10 11 12 13 14 15 -
Body (Unload) Body (Piping Port) Body (Swing) Body (Travel) Body (Blade) Body (Travel) Body (Boom Swing) Body (Boom) Body (Arm) Body (Bucket) Body (Auxiliary) Steel Ball Spring Seat Spring O-Ring Retainer O-Ring Adjuster Metal Plug M6 (12 Used) Metal Plug M5 (10 Used) Differential Pressure Reducing Valve Stocking Plug Choke O-Ring Plug Plug
16 - Spring 17 - Strainer 18 - Choke (2 Used) 19 - Stocking Plug 20 - O-Ring 21 - Plug 23 - Main Relief Valve 24 - Plug 25 - O-Ring P14-1B 26 - Piston 27 - Spring 28 - Spool 29 - O-Ring (61 Used) 29a - O-Ring P8-1B 29b - O-Ring (2 Used) P12-1B 30 - O-Ring (22 Used) 31 - O-Ring (11 Used) 32 - O-Ring (11 Used) 33 - Plug 34 - O-Ring P14-1B 36 - Spring (4 Used)
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 -
Retainer (9 Used) Bolt (9 Used) O-Ring (10 Used) G25-1B Socket Bolt (18 Used) Cover (9 Used) Plug (9 Used) O-Ring (9 Used) Seat (8 Used) Backup Ring (8 Used) O-Ring (8 Used) Steel Ball (8 Used) O-Ring (8 Used) Cover (8 Used) Socket Bolt (16 Used) Plug (9 Used) O-Ring (9 Used) Piston (9 Used) Spool (9 Used) Check Valve (7 Used) Spring (7 Used) Cover
68 - Piston 69 - O-Ring P22-1B 70 - Sleeve 71 - Backup Ring 72 - O-Ring 73 - Steel Ball 74 - Choke 75 - Spring 75a - Spring 76 - Poppet 77 - Overload Relief Valve (6 Used) 78 - Make-Up Valve 79 - Plug (3 Used) 80 - O-Ring (3 Used) P20-1B 81 - Backup Ring (3 Used) 82 - O-Ring (3 Used) 83 - Plug (2 Used) 84 - O-Ring (2 Used) P18-1B 85 - Plug 86 - Choke 87 - Choke
37 38 39 40 41 -
63 64 65 66 67 -
Choke Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Plug O-Ring G25-1B
88 89 90 91 92 -
O-Ring (11 Used) Plug (11 Used) Spool (9 Used) Retainer (9 Used) Spring (9 Used)
W2-4-7
Nut (8 Used) Washer (8 Used) Tie Rod (4 Used) Block Plug
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve 45 46
47 82
48 49
81
80
79 40
41
44
39
50 51 52
59 55
42
43
58
57
56
53
54 45 1e
46 60
61 41
47 48 49 50 51 52
37 38
55
42
43
44
40 39
58
57
56
59
53
45 46
54 1f
36 38
78
47 48 49 50 51 52
37
40
41
43
39
59 55
42
44
53
58
57
56
29 30 31 29
54 1g
38
30
29
32
60
61
37
W2-4-8
W1M9-02-04-011
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve 88
89 90
91
89
88 92
W1M9-02-04-001
1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 1f 1g 1h 1i 1j 1k 234567899a 10 11 12 13 14 15 -
Body (Unload) Body (Piping Port) Body (Swing) Body (Travel) Body (Blade) Body (Travel) Body (Boom Swing) Body (Boom) Body (Arm) Body (Bucket) Body (Auxiliary) Steel Ball Spring Seat Spring O-Ring Retainer O-Ring Adjuster Metal Plug M6 (12 Used) Metal Plug M5 (10 Used) Differential Pressure Reducing Valve Stocking Plug Choke O-Ring Plug Plug
16 - Spring 17 - Strainer 18 - Choke (2 Used) 19 - Stocking Plug 20 - O-Ring 21 - Plug 23 - Main Relief Valve 24 - Plug 25 - O-RingP14-1B 26 - Piston 27 - Spring 28 - Spool 29 - O-Ring (61 Used) 29a - O-Ring P8-1B 29b - O-Ring (2 Used) P12-1B 30 - O-Ring (22 Used) 31 - O-Ring (11 Used) 32 - O-Ring (11 Used) 33 - Plug 34 - O-Ring P14-1B 36 - Spring (4 Used)
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 -
Retainer (9 Used) Bolt (9 Used) O-Ring (10 Used) G25-1B Socket Bolt (18 Used) Cover (9 Used) Plug (9 Used) O-Ring (9 Used) Seat (8 Used) Backup Ring (8 Used) O-Ring (8 Used) Steel Ball (8 Used) O-Ring (8 Used) Cover (8 Used) Socket Bolt (16 Used) Plug (9 Used) O-Ring (9 Used) Piston (9 Used) Spool (9 Used) Check Valve (7 Used) Spring (7 Used) Cover
68 - Piston 69 - O-Ring P22-1B 70 - Sleeve 71 - Backup Ring 72 - O-Ring 73 - Steel Ball 74 - Choke 75 - Spring 75a - Spring 76 - Poppet 77 - Overload Relief Valve (6 Used) 78 - Make-Up Valve 79 - Plug (3 Used) 80 - O-Ring (3 Used) P20-1B 81 - Backup Ring (3 Used) 82 - O-Ring (3 Used) 83 - Plug (2 Used) 84 - O-Ring (2 Used) P18-1B 85 - Plug 86 - Choke 87 - Choke
37 38 39 40 41 -
63 64 65 66 67 -
Choke Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Plug O-Ring G25-1B
88 89 90 91 92 -
O-Ring (11 Used) Plug (11 Used) Spool (9 Used) Retainer (9 Used) Spring (9 Used)
W2-4-9
Nut (8 Used) Washer (8 Used) Tie Rod (4 Used) Block Plug
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve 67
66
62
69
68
45
65 64
44
77
71
73
72
48
40
49 50 51 52
77
41
56
63 37
1h
60
36
61
46
39 57
44
56 45 46
59
55 54
77
1i
38
41
40 60
58
57
45
42
58
43
39
76 75a
43
53
42
59
38
77
40
41
75
74
70
47
47 48
49 50 51 52
9
77
46
44
42
44
43
39
61
37 77 59
53 55 54
57
58
56 45
60 1j 48 37 38
80 79 53 55 54
81
61 47
82 83 84 39
83 82 84
81 80 79
42
43
44
38
37
46
41 40
29
30 31 29
59
58
57
56
1k 30 38
37 38
37
29 32
60
61 W1M9-02-04-012
W2-4-10
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve 88
89 90
91
89
88 92
W1M9-02-04-001
1a 1b 1c 1d 1e 1f 1g 1h 1i 1j 1k 234567899a 10 11 12 13 14 15 -
Body (Unload) Body (Piping Port) Body (Swing) Body (Travel) Body (Blade) Body (Travel) Body (Boom Swing) Body (Boom) Body (Arm) Body (Bucket) Body (Auxiliary) Steel Ball Spring Seat Spring O-Ring Retainer O-Ring Adjuster Metal Plug M6 (12 Used) Metal Plug M5 (10 Used) Differential Pressure Reducing Valve Stocking Plug Choke O-Ring Plug Plug
16 - Spring 17 - Strainer 18 - Choke (2 Used) 19 - Stocking Plug 20 - O-Ring 21 - Plug 23 - Main Relief Valve 24 - Plug 25 - O-Ring P14-1B 26 - Piston 27 - Spring 28 - Spool 29 - O-Ring (61 Used) 29a - O-Ring P8-1B 29b - O-Ring (2 Used) P12-1B 30 - O-Ring (22 Used) 31 - O-Ring (11 Used) 32 - O-Ring (11 Used) 33 - Plug 34 - O-Ring P14-1B 36 - Spring (4 Used)
42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 -
Retainer (9 Used) Bolt (9 Used) O-Ring (10 Used) G25-1B Socket Bolt (18 Used) Cover (9 Used) Plug (9 Used) O-Ring (9 Used) Seat (8 Used) Backup Ring (8 Used) O-Ring (8 Used) Steel Ball (8 Used) O-Ring (8 Used) Cover (8 Used) Socket Bolt (16 Used) Plug (9 Used) O-Ring (9 Used) Piston (9 Used) Spool (9 Used) Check Valve (7 Used) Spring (7 Used) Cover
68 - Piston 69 - O-Ring P22-1B 70 - Sleeve 71 - Backup Ring 72 - O-Ring 73 - Steel Ball 74 - Choke 75 - Spring 75a - Spring 76 - Poppet 77 - Overload Relief Valve (6 Used) 78 - Make-Up Valve 79 - Plug (3 Used) 80 - O-Ring (3 Used) P20-1B 81 - Backup Ring (3 Used) 82 - O-Ring (3 Used) 83 - Plug (2 Used) 84 - O-Ring (2 Used) P18-1B 85 - Plug 86 - Choke 87 - Choke
37 38 39 40 41 -
63 64 65 66 67 -
Choke Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Plug O-Ring G25-1B
88 89 90 91 92 -
O-Ring (11 Used) Plug (11 Used) Spool (9 Used) Retainer (9 Used) Spring (9 Used)
W2-4-11
Nut (8 Used) Washer (8 Used) Tie Rod (4 Used) Block Plug
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL RELIEF VALVE AND MAKE-UP VALVE Auto-Idle Pressure Sensor
2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 23
10
78
78
77
77
78
38
T1M9-03-04-001
79
234-
Unload Valve Unload Valve Unload Valve
678-
Unload Valve Unload Valve Unload Valve
5-
Unload Valve
10 - Differential Pressure Reducing Valve
83
79
23 - Main Relief Valve 38 - Plug 77 - Overload Relief Valve (6 Used) 78 - Make-Up Valve
W2-4-12
79 - Plug 83 - Plug
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve Removal
Installation
1. Remove differential pressure reducing valve (10). : 24 mm
1. Install plugs (79) (2 used). : 21 mm : 64 to 68 N⋅m (6.5 to 6.9 kgf⋅m, 47 to 50 lbf⋅ft)
2. Remove main relief valve (23). : 26 mm 3. Remove overload relief valves (77) (6 used). : 26 mm 4. Remove make-up valve (78). : 26 mm 5. Remove plugs (79) (2 used). : 21 mm 6. Remove plugs (38) (2 used) and (83) (2 used). : 6 mm, 10 mm
2. Install plugs (38) (2 used) and (83) (2 used). : 6 mm : 29.5 to 34 N⋅m (3.0 to 3.5 kgf⋅m, 22 to 25 lbf⋅ft) : 10 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft) 3. Install make-up valve (78). : 26 mm : 59 to 63 N⋅m (6.0 to 6.4 kgf⋅m, 44 to 46 lbf⋅ft) 4. Install overload relief valves (77) (6 used). : 26 mm : 59 to 63 N⋅m (6.0 to 6.4 kgf⋅m, 44 to 46 lbf⋅ft) 5. Install main relief valve (23). : 26 mm : 69 to 78 N⋅m (7.0 to 8.0 kgf⋅m, 51 to 58 lbf⋅ft) 6. Install differential pressure reducing valve (10). : 24 mm : 79 to 83 N⋅m (8.1 to 8.5 kgf⋅m, 58 to 61 lbf⋅ft)
W2-4-13
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE BODY Unload Section
Tie Rod Nut
Washer
Piping Port Section B
B
Block
W1M9-02-04-003
T1M9-03-04-001
NOTE: The illustration shows the swing section. A
29
60 61
A
32 1c
Section B-B
Section A-A T566-03-03-009
1c - Body 29 - O-Ring
30 - *O-Ring 31 - *O-Ring
32 - O-Ring 60 - Check Valve
NOTE: As for the item with * mark, refer to W2-4-6 to 7.
W2-4-14
61 - Spring
T1M9-03-04-021
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve Disassemble
Assemble
IMPORTANT: Do not fall off O-rings (29 to 32). 1. Remove the nuts (4 used). Remove the washers (4 used) and tie rods (4 used). Divide the control valve into each section. : 17 mm 2. Remove O-rings (29 to 32) from each section. Remove spring (61) and check valve (60) by using a magnet. NOTE: As for parts (30, 31), refer to W2-4-6 to 7.
1. Install check valve (60) and O-rings (29 to 32) to each section. Install spring (61) to the inner bore of check valve (60). NOTE: As for parts (30, 31), refer to W2-4-6 to 7. IMPORTANT: Check the direction of tie rod. Install the tie rod with its longer thread side facing to the unload section. IMPORTANT: Place the plate under the unload section piping port and the section except block and install the function section.
W1M9-02-04-004
Plate 1 mm (0.039 in)
2. Place the plate (thickness: 1 mm (0.039 in)) under the function sections (9 used) as illustrated. Place bodies (1) in each section as before disassembling. Tighten the tie rod by using the washers (4 used) and the nuts (4 used). : 17 mm : 65.7 to 70.6 N⋅m (6.7 to 7.2 kgf⋅m, 48 to 52 lbf⋅ft)
W2-4-15
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE UNLOAD SECTION
B C
C B
W1M9-02-04-006
9
12
A
19
11 10
A
23 24 8
7
W1M9-02-04-005
16
17
6
5
4
3
2
1a
28
26
25 T1M9-03-04-005
Unload Valve
13
14
15
20
21
18
Section A-A
27
Section B-B
18
Section C-C W1M9-02-04-007
1a 234-
Body Steel Ball Spring Seat Spring
567-
O-Ring Retainer O-Ring
899a 10 -
Adjuster Metal Plug M6 (4 Used) Metal Plug M5 (9 Used) Differential Pressure Reducing Valve 11 - Stocking Plug 12 - Choke 13 - O-Ring
14 15 16 17 -
Plug Plug Spring Strainer
18 - Choke (2 Used) 19 - Stocking Plug 20 - O-Ring
W2-4-16
21 23 24 25 -
Plug Main Relief Valve Plug O-Ring
26 - Piston 27 - Spring 28 - Spool
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve Disassemble Unload Section IMPORTANT: As the setting pressure changes, do not loosen the lock nut of main relief valve (23). 1. Remove main relief valve (23) from body (1). : 27 mm IMPORTANT: Do not disassemble steel ball (2) in spring seat (3). When removing retainer (6) from body (1a), spring (4) and spring seat (3) are removed together. When removing retainer (6), do not fall off spring (4) and spring seat (3). IMPORTANT: As the setting pressure changes, do not loosen adjuster (8) and the nut of retainer (6).
IMPORTANT: As the setting pressure changes, do not loosen the lock nut of differential pressure reducing valve (10). 4. Remove differential pressure reducing valve (10) from body (1a). Remove the piston and spring from body (1a) by using a magnet. : 24 mm Guide
Spring
10
23
2. Remove retainer (6) from body (1a). Remove spring (4) and spring seat (3) by using a magnet. : 24 mm
T1M9-03-04-005
Piston
IMPORTANT: When removing piston (26) from body (1a), spring (27) is removed together. When removing piston (26), do not fall off spring (27). 3. Remove plug (24) from body (1a). Remove piston (26) and spring (27) by using a magnet. : 8 mm
1a
5. Install bolt (M8, Pitch 1.25 mm) into the pulling-out hole on guide. Remove the guide from body (1a). 6. Remove plug (15) from the side of body (1a). Remove spring (16) and strainer (17). : 8 mm IMPORTANT: Metal plug (9) and choke (18) cannot be disassembled.
W2-4-17
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve ASSEMBLE UNLOAD SECTION
B C
C B
W1M9-02-04-006
9
12
A
19
11 10
A
23 24 8
7
W1M9-02-04-005
16
17
6
5
4
3
2
1a
28
26
25 T1M9-03-04-005
Unload Valve
13
14
15
20
21
18
Section A-A
27
Section B-B
18
Section C-C W1M9-02-04-007
1a 234-
Body Steel Ball Spring Seat Spring
567-
O-Ring Retainer O-Ring
8 - Adjuster 9 - Metal Plug M6 (4 Used) 9a - Metal Plug M5 (9 Used) 10 - Differential Pressure Reducing Valve 11 - Stocking Plug 12 - Choke 13 - O-Ring
14 15 16 17 -
Plug Plug Spring Strainer
18 - Choke (2 Used) 19 - Stocking Plug 20 - O-Ring
W2-4-18
21 23 24 25 -
Plug Main Relief Valve Plug O-Ring
26 - Piston 27 - Spring 28 - Spool
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve Assemble Unload Section
• Apply grease onto the seals. 1. Wind the seal tape onto plug (15). Install strainer (17), spring (16) and plug (15) to the side of body (1a). : 8 mm : 54 to 58 N⋅m (5.5 to 5.9 kgf⋅m, 40 to 43 lbf⋅ft) 2. Install the guide, piston, and spring to differential pressure reducing valve (10). Install differential pressure reducing valve (10) to body (1a) in order not to fall off the guide, piston and spring. : 24 mm : 79 to 83 N⋅m (8.1 to 8.5 kgf⋅m, 58 to 61 lbf⋅ft) Guide
Spring
10
4. Install plug (24) to body (1a). : 8 mm : 59 to 69 N⋅m (6.0 to 7.0 kgf⋅m, 44 to 51 lbf⋅ft) 5. Insert spring (4) into retainer (6) until spring (4) comes in contact with adjuster (8). Install spring seat (3) to spring (4). 6. Install the retainer (6) assembly to body (1a) in order not to fall off spring seat (3) and spring (4). : 24 mm : 54 to 59 N⋅m (5.5 to 6.0 kgf⋅m, 40 to 44 lbf⋅ft) 7. Install main relief valve (23) into body (1a). : 27 mm : 69 to 78 N⋅m (7.0 to 8.0 kgf⋅m, 51 to 58 lbf⋅ft)
23
T1M9-03-04-005
Piston
1a
3. Install spring (27) into piston (26) in the unload valve. Install the piston (26) assembly to spool (28) in order not to fall off spring (27).
W2-4-19
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE SPOOL NOTE: The illustration shows the swing section.
55
54
1c - Body 39 - Spool 40 - Retainer
39
53
40
1c
41 - Spring 42 - Retainer 43 - Bolt
44
41
45
44 - O-Ring 45 - Socket Bolt (2 Used) 46 - Cover
W2-4-20
42
46
43
T1M9-03-04-021
53 - O-Ring 54 - Cover 55 - Socket Bolt (2 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve Disassemble
Assemble
1. Remove socket bolts (45) (2 used) from body (1c). Remove cover (46) and O-ring (44) from body (1c). : 5 mm
1. Install the spool (39) assembly to body (1c).
2. Remove spool (39) as an assembly from body (1c). NOTE: The spool (39) assembly consists of spool (39), bolt (43), retainer (42), spring (41), and retainer (40). NOTE: Replace spool (39), bolt (43), retainer (42), spring (41) and retainer (40) as an assembly.
2. Install O-ring (53) on cover (54). Install cover (54) onto body (1c). Tighten socket bolts (55) (2 used). : 5 mm : 10 to 12 N⋅m (1.0 to 1.2 kgf⋅m, 7.4 to 8.9 lbf⋅ft) 3. On the opposite side install O-ring (44) onto cover (46) in the same procedures. Install cover (46) onto body (1c). Tighten socket bolts (45) (2 used). : 5 mm : 10 to 12 N⋅m (1.0 to 1.2 kgf⋅m, 7.4 to 8.9 lbf⋅ft)
3. Remove socket bolts (55) (2 used) from body (1c). Remove cover (54) and O-ring (53) from body (1c). : 5 mm
W2-4-21
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE BOOM ANTI-DRIFT VALVE 66
70
67
69 71
72 75 76
65 68
62
73
75a
74
1h T1M9-03-04-011
1h 62 64 65 -
Body Cover *Socket Bolt (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used)
66 67 68 69 -
Plug O-Ring Piston O-Ring
70 71 72 73 -
NOTE: As for the item with * mark, refer to W2-4-10.
W2-4-22
Sleeve Backup Ring O-Ring Steel Ball
74 - Choke 75 - Spring 75a - Spring 76 - Poppet
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve Assemble
Disassemble IMPORTANT: Plug (66) and choke (74) cannot be disassembled. IMPORTANT: When removing cover (62), piston (68) is removed together. Do not fall off piston (68). 1. Remove socket bolts (64) (2 used) and (65) (2 used) from body (1h). Remove cover (62) and piston (68). : 5 mm 2. Install bolt (M12, Pitch 1.75 mm) into the pulling-out hole on sleeve (70). Remove the sleeve (70) assembly from body (1h). NOTE: The sleeve (70) assembly consists of sleeve (70), steel ball (73), choke (74) and spring (75a). IMPORTANT: Check if spring (75) stays in body (1h). 3. Remove spring (75) and poppet (76) from body (1h) by using a magnet.
1. Install poppet (76) to body (1h). Install spring (75) into the hole of poppet (76). IMPORTANT: Apply grease onto O-rings (69, 72). Install sleeve (70) so that spring (75) can be aligned with the spring (75) mounting position in sleeve (70). 2. Install O-rings (69, 72) and backup ring (71) onto sleeve (70). Install the sleeve (70) assembly to body (1h). 3. Install piston (68) and O-ring (67) into cover (62). 4. Install the cover (62) assembly to body (1h) in order not to fall off piston (68). Tighten socket bolts (65) (2 used) and washers (64) (2 used). : 5 mm : 10 to 12 N⋅m (1.0 to 1.2 kgf⋅m, 7.4 to 8.9 lbf⋅ft)
4. Remove O-rings (69, 72) and backup ring (71) from sleeve (70).
W2-4-23
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve DISASSEMBLE AND SHUTTLE VALVE AND COMPENSATION VALVE
ASSEMBLE PRESSURE
NOTE: The illustration shows the swing section.
52
38
1c 36 37 38 -
Body Spring O-Ring Plug
49
37
47 48 49 50 -
47
36
Plug O-Ring Seat Backup Ring
48
59
50
51
58
1c
57
51 - O-Ring 52 - Steel Ball 56 - Plug
W2-4-24
56
T1M9-03-04-021
57 - O-Ring 58 - Piston 59 - Spool
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve Disassemble
Assemble
1. Remove plug (47) from body (1c). : 6 mm
1. Install piston (58) into spool (59). Insert spring (36) into the spring (36) hole in spool (59) completely.
IMPORTANT: When removing seat (49), steel ball (52) is removed together. Do not fall off steel ball (52). 2. Attach seat (49) from the inside of seat (49) by using a pair of plier. Remove seat (49) and steel ball (52) from body (1c). 3. Remove O-Ring (51) and backup ring (50) from seat (49). 4. Remove plug (38) from body (1c). Remove spring (36) by using a magnet. : 8 mm NOTE: Spring (36) is equipped for the swing, boom, right travel, and left travel. IMPORTANT: When removing the spool (59) assembly, piston (58) may fall off. 5. Remove plug (56). Remove the spool (59) assembly with piston (58) attached on spool (59) from body (1c). 6. Remove piston (58) from spool (59).
NOTE: Spring (36) is equipped for the swing, boom, right travel, and left travel. 2. Install the spool (59) assembly to body (1c) in order not to fall off piston (58). 3. Install O-ring (57) to plug (56) and O-ring (37) to plug (38). Install plugs (56, 38) to body (1c) in this order. : 8 mm : 59 to 69 N⋅m (6.0 to 7.0 kgf⋅m, 44 to 51 lbf⋅ft) 4. Apply grease onto O-ring (51). Install backup ring (50), O-ring (51) and steel ball (52) onto seat (49). 5. Install the seat (49) assembly into body (1c). 6. Install plug (47) to body (1c). : 6 mm : 30 to 34 N⋅m (3.1 to 3.5 kgf⋅m, 22 to 25 lbf⋅ft)
W2-4-25
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Control Valve (Blank)
W2-4-26
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device REMOVE AND INSTALL SWING DEVICE Removal 1
Counterweight
CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 1. Remove bolts (2) (3 used) in canopy (1). : 19 mm
2
W1M9-02-01-002
2. Remove bolts (3) (2 used). Remove cover (4) from main frame (5). : 17 mm
3
4
5
W1M9-02-01-001
3. While turning adjusting screw (6), lay down the canopy (1) assembly to the front side. : 17 mm
1
Tilt Device
W2-5-1
6
W1M9-02-01-003
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device CAUTION: Swing device weight: 43 kg (95 lb) IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the removed hoses for assembling.
7
8
4. Remove hoses (7) (5 used) from swing device (8). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm, 22 mm 7
5. Remove bolts (9) (8 used). Hoist and remove swing device (8) from the main frame. : 24 mm
9
W2-5-2
W1M9-02-05-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device Installation CAUTION: Swing device weight: 43 kg (95 lb) 1. Install swing device (8) to the main frame with bolts (9) (8 used). : 24 mm : 210 N⋅m (21.5 kgf⋅m, 155 lbf⋅ft)
7
8
2. Install hoses (7) (5 used) to swing device (8). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) : 22 mm : 39 N⋅m (4.0 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft)
7
3. While turning adjusting screw (6), lower the canopy (1) assembly. 9
W1M9-02-05-001
1
Tilt Device
6
4. Install cover (4) onto main frame (5) with bolts (3) (2 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
W1M9-02-01-003
3 4
5
W2-5-3
W1M9-02-01-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device 5. Install canopy (1) with bolts (2) (3 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft)
1
Counterweight
2
W1M9-02-01-002
W2-5-4
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device (Blank)
W2-5-5
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device DISASSEMBLE SWING DEVICE
27
28
1
2
3
4 5
26 25
6
24
7
23 22 21
8
20
9
19
10
18 17
11
16
12
15 14 13
W1M9-02-05-002
12-
Swing Motor Second Stage Sun Gear
8 - Washer 9 - Collar
15 - Spring Plate 16 - Roller Bearing
3456-
First Stage Sun Gear Bolt (4 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) First Stage Carrier
10 11 12 13 -
17 18 19 20 -
7-
Plate
14 - Spacer
Ring Gear Roller Bearing Oil Seal Shaft
Housing Socket Bolt (11 Used) Second Stage Carrier Second Stage Planetary Gear (4 used) 21 - Inner Ring (4 Used)
W2-5-6
22 - Needle Bearing (4 Used) 23 - First Stage Planetary Gear (3 used) 24 - O-Ring 25 - Needle Bearing (3 Used) 26 - Inner Ring (3 Used) 27 - Plate 28 - Bolt (3 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device Disassemble Swing Device CAUTION: Swing motor weight: 18 kg (40 lb) 1. Remove socket bolts (5) (2 used) from swing motor (1). Remove swing motor (1) from ring gear (10). : 10 mm
6. Remove collar (9) and washer (8) from shaft (13).
2. Remove the first stage carrier (6) assembly, second stage sun gear (2) and the second stage carrier (19) assembly.
8. Remove the inner race of roller bearing (16), spring plate (15) and spacer (14) from shaft (13) by using a press.
3. Remove socket bolts (18) (11 used) from ring gear (10). Remove ring gear (10) from housing (17). : 10 mm
IMPORTANT: Do not remove the outer races of roller bearings (16, 11) from housing (17). Failure to follow these instructions will shorten service life of roller bearings (16, 11) as press-fit force of roller bearings (16, 11) outer races is reduced. Replace housing (17) with a new one if roller bearings (16, 11) are removed. 9. Remove oil seal (12) from housing (17).
4. Remove bolts (28) (3 used) from the first stage carrier (6) assembly. Remove plate (27), first stage sun gear (3), first stage planetary gears (23) (3 used), needle bearings (25) (3 used) and inner rings (26) (3 used). : 4 mm
7. Remove shaft (13) from housing (17) by using a plastic hammer.
5. Remove bolts (4) (4 used) from the second stage carrier (19) assembly. Remove second stage planetary gears (20) (4 used), needle bearings (22) (4 used) and inner rings (21) (4 used). : 4 mm
W2-5-7
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device ASSEMBLE SWING DEVICE
27
28
1
2
3
4 5
26 25
6
24
7
23 22 21
8
20
9
19
10
18 17
11
16
12
15 14 13
W1M9-02-05-002
12-
Swing Motor Second Stage Sun Gear
8 - Washer 9 - Collar
15 - Spring Plate 16 - Roller Bearing
3456-
First Stage Sun Gear Bolt (4 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) First Stage Carrier
10 11 12 13 -
17 18 19 20 -
7-
Plate
14 - Spacer
Ring Gear Roller Bearing Oil Seal Shaft
Housing Socket Bolt (11 Used) Second Stage Carrier Second Stage Planetary Gear (4 used) 21 - Inner Ring (4 Used)
W2-5-8
22 - Needle Bearing (4 Used) 23 - First Stage Planetary Gear (3 used) 24 - O-Ring 25 - Needle Bearing (3 Used) 26 - Inner Ring (3 Used) 27 - Plate 28 - Bolt (3 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device Assemble Swing Device IMPORTANT: Install oil seal (12) with the metallic surface facing upward (motor side). 1. Install oil seal (12) to housing (17). 2. Remove roller bearings (16, 11). If roller bearings (16, 11) are replaced with new ones together with housing (17), install the outer races of roller bearings (16, 11) to housing (17) by using a press. 3. Install spacer (14), spring plate (15) and the inner race of roller bearing (16) to shaft (13) by using a press. 4. Apply grease to roller bearing (16). Grease: 60g IMPORTANT: Do not damage oil seal (12) by the spline part of shaft (13). 5. Install the shaft (13) assembly into housing (17). 6. Install roller bearing (11).
W2-5-9
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device
8 9
17
11 12
13
W1M9-02-05-002
W2-5-10
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device 7. Adjust the roller bearing pre-load. • Push roller bearing (11) by using special tool.
• Measure clearance A between roller bearing (11) and shaft (13).
ST 4147
A
W1M9-02-05-003
• Turn housing (17) over 10 turns with the pushing force (3430 N (350 kgf, 780 lbf)) by special tool (ST 4147) kept.
W1M9-02-05-004
• Check the table and select washer (8) according
3430 N
to clearance A. ST 4147
Measured value of clearance A (mm)
Thickness of washer (mm)
Parts No.
6.54 to 6.65
6.70
4613141
6.66 to 6.80
6.85
4613142
6.81 to 6.95
7.00
4613143
6.96 to 7.10
7.15
4613144
7.11 to 7.25
7.30
4613145
7.26 to 7.40
7.45
4613146
17 11
NOTE: 1 mm=0.03937 in 12
13
W1M9-02-05-005
8. Push roller bearing (11) with the pushing force (1618 N (165 kgf, 370 lbf)) further and install washer (8). 9. Install collar (9).
W2-5-11
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device
27
28
1
2
3
4 5
26 25
6
24
7
23 22 21 20 19
10
18 17
W1M9-02-05-002
W2-5-12
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device 10. Apply THREEBOND #1215 onto ring gear (10) mounting surface of housing (17). Install ring gear (10) to housing (17). Tighten socket bolts (18) (11 used). : 10 mm : 108 N⋅m (11 kgf⋅m, 80 lbf⋅ft) IMPORTANT: As reused bolts (4, 28) are loosened, use new bolts (4, 28). 11. Install inner rings (26) (3 used), needle bearings (25) (3 used) and first stage planetary gears (23) (3 used) to first stage carrier (6). Install plate (27) with bolts (28) (3 used). : 4 mm : 15 N⋅m (1.5 kgf⋅m, 11 lbf⋅ft)
14. Install O-ring (24) to ring gear (10). 15. Add approx. 0.6 litter (0.63 US qt) of hydraulic oil to the swing reduction gear. 16. Install swing motor (1) to ring gear (10) with socket bolts (5) (2 used). : 10 mm : 108 N⋅m (11 kgf⋅m, 80 lbf⋅ft)
12. Tighten inner rings (21) (4 used), needle bearings (22) (4 used) and second stage planetary gears (20) (4 used) to second stage carrier (19). Tighten plate (7) with socket bolts (4) (4 used). : 4 mm : 15 N⋅m (1.5 kgf⋅m, 11 lbf⋅ft) 13. Install the second carrier (20) assembly, second stage sun gear (2), the first stage carrier (6) assembly and second stage sun gear (3) to the housing (17) assembly.
W2-5-13
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device DISASSEMBLE SWING MOTOR
8 7 6 5 4 3 2
1
17 16 15
12
13
14
11 10 9
26 24
25
23 22 21 19 20
27
19 18
28
W1M9-02-05-008
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-
Casing Socket Bolt (2 Used) Bearing Shaft Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Retainer
8910 11 12 13 14 -
Holder Pin (3 Used) Rotor Collar Spring Washer Retaining Ring
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
-
Disc Plate O-Ring O-Ring Brake Piston Spring Seat (2 Used) Disc Spring (2 Used) O-Ring
W2-5-14
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
-
Valve Plate Pin (2 Used) Bearing Pin (2 Used) Cover Socket Bolt (5 Used) O-Ring (2 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device Disassemble Swing Motor IMPORTANT: When removing cover (26), valve plate (22) may fall off first. 1. Remove socket bolts (27) (5 used). Remove cover (26), valve plate (22) and O-ring (21). : 10 mm 2. Remove bearing (24) and O-rings (28) (2 used) from cover (26). 3. Remove disc springs (20) (2 used) and spring seats (19) (2 used) from casing (1).
CAUTION: Push spring (12) by using a press when removing retaining ring (14). If only retaining ring (14) is removed, washer (13) and spring (12) may fly out. 8. Remove retaining ring (14) from rotor (10). Remove washer (13), spring (12), and collar (11). 9. Tap and remove shaft (4) from casing (1) by using a plastic hammer lightly. 10. Remove bearing (3) from shaft (4) by using a press.
4. Remove brake piston (18) from casing (1). 5. Remove O-rings (16, 17) from brake piston (18). IMPORTANT: Do not damage the sliding surface of swash plate (5). 6. Remove rotor (10), the plunger (6) assembly, swash plate (5) and disc plate (15) from casing (1). 7. Remove plungers (6) (9 used), retainer (7), holder (8) and pins (9) (3 used) from rotor (10).
W2-5-15
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device ASSEMBLE SWING MOTOR
28
27
26 20
19
22
12
13
24
14
23
10
18
25 21 11
17 16
15
6 1
9
7 5
8
4
3 W1M9-02-05-006
1 2 3 4 5 6 7
-
Casing *Socket Bolt (2 Used) Bearing Shaft Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Retainer
8910 11 12 13 14 -
Holder Pin (3 Used) Rotor Collar Spring Washer Retaining Ring
15 16 17 18 19 20 21
-
Disc Plate O-Ring O-Ring Brake Piston Spring Seat (2 Used) Disc Spring (2 Used) O-Ring
NOTE: As for the item with *, refer to W2-5-14.
W2-5-16
22 23 24 25 26 27 28
-
Valve Plate Pin Bearing Pin (2 Used) Cover Socket Bolt (5 Used) O-Ring (2 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device Assemble Swing Motor IMPORTANT: Install bearing (3) with its retaining ring upward as illustrated. 1. Install bearing (3) on shaft (4).
6. Install the assembly of plungers (6) and retainer (7) into rotor (10). IMPORTANT: Insert swash plate (5) with the chamfered surface facing downward. 7. Install swash plate (5) into casing (1).
4 Retaining Ring
8. Install the assembly of rotor (10) and plunger (6) to casing (1). 3 W1M9-02-05-007
IMPORTANT: Push shaft (4) until the retaining ring of bearing (3) comes in contact with casing (1). 2. Install the assembly of shaft (4) and bearing (3) to casing (1). IMPORTANT: Insert collar (11) with its chamfered surface facing downward. 3. Install collar (11), spring (12) and washer (13) into rotor (10). 4. Push washer (13) and spring (12) by using a press and install retaining ring (14). 5. Apply grease onto pins (9) (3 used). Install pins (9) (3 used) into rotor (10). Place holder (8) onto pin (9).
W2-5-17
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device
28
27
26 20
19
22
24
18
21 17 16
1
W1M9-02-05-006
W2-5-18
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device 9. Install O-rings (16, 17) onto brake piston (18). Install brake piston (18) into casing (1). IMPORTANT: Install spring seat (19) and disc spring (20) as illustrated. 10. Install spring seats (19) (2 used) and disc springs (20) (2 used) to casing (1). 19
20
19
W565-02-05-004
11. Install O-ring (21) to casing (1). 12. Install bearing (24) onto cover (26). 13. Install O-rings (28) (2 used) and valve plate (22) onto cover (26). NOTE: Apply grease onto valve plate (22) in order to prevent valve plate (22) from falling from cover (26). 14. Install cover (26) to casing (1). Tighten cover (26) with socket bolts (27) (5 used). : 10 mm : 128 N⋅m (13 kgf⋅m, 94 lbf⋅ft)
W2-5-19
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Swing Device MAINTENANCE STANDARD 1. Clearance between plunger outer diameter and rotor inner bore (D-d): 0.04 mm (0.002 in) or less.
D
d
Rotor
Plunger
W507-02-04-009
2. Clearance between plunger and shoe δ: 0.4 mm (0.016 in) or less.
Plunger
δ
Shoe
W107-02-06-140
δ
W107-02-06-141
W2-5-20
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL FRONT PILOT VALVE Removal CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 1. Remove cap (3) and bolts (4) (7 used). Remove covers (2, 5) from lever stand (11). : 10 mm 1
2. Remove the clip band and plug from pilot valve (13). (Left stand only)
2
3. Move boots (1) (2 used) up and remove (12) (4 used). Remove plates (14) (4 used) from lever stand (11). 4. Move boots (1) (2 used) up and loosen lock nuts (9) (2 used). Remove levers (8) (2 used) with grip (6) together. : 19 mm
3, 4
5. Remove boots (1) (2 used).
5
IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the removed hoses for assembling. 6. Remove the hoses (12 used) from pilot valves (13) (2 used). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm IMPORTANT: Put the matching marks on pilot valve (13) and lever stand (11) for assembling. 7. Remove bolts (10) (8 used). Remove pilot valves (13) (2 used) from lever stand (11). : 13 mm
7
6
W1M9-02-06-004
8
9
10
11
14 Pilot Shut-Off Lever
12 13
W1M9-02-06-005
W2-6-1
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Installation 1. Align the matching marks and insert pilot valves (13) (2 used) into lever stand (11).
7
6
2. Install pilot valves (13) (2 used) to lever stand (11) with bolts (10) (8 used). : 13 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft) 3. Install the hoses (12 used) onto pilot valves (13) (2 used). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft)
8
9
10
11
14 Pilot Shut-Off Lever
12 13
4. Insert levers (8) (2 used) (with grip (6)) into boots (1) (2 used). Install levers (8) (2 used) to pilot valves (13) (2 used). Install lever (8) with the horn button on the left side. 5. Tighten and secure levers (8) (2 used) to pilot valves (13) (2 used) with lock nuts (9) (2 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft)
W1M9-02-06-005
1
6. Install the clip band and plug to pilot valve (13). (Left stand only)
2
7. Install boots (1) (2 used) with plates (14) (4 used) and bolts (12) (4 used). : 10 mm : 3.3 to 4.2 N⋅m (0.3 to 0.4 kgf⋅m, 2.4to 3.1 lbf⋅ft)
3, 4
8. Install covers (2, 5) on lever stand (11) with bolts (4) (7 used). Install cap (3) to bolt (4) (7 used). 9. After completing the work, check the oil level. Start the engine and check for any oil leaks.
W2-6-2
5
W1M9-02-06-004
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL TRAVEL PILOT VALVE 1
Removal
2
CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 1. Remove bolts (2) (4 used). Remove the levers (1) (2 used) assembly from pilot valve (4). : 17 mm
4, 5
3
6
W1M9-02-06-008
Counterweight
2. Remove bolts (7) (3 used) from canopy (6). : 19 mm
7
W1M9-02-01-002
8
3. Remove bolts (8) (2 used). Remove cover (9) from main frame (10). : 17 mm 9
10
W2-6-3
W1M9-02-01-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve 4. Turn adjusting screw (11). Lay down the canopy (6) assembly to the front side. : 17 mm
6
Tilt Device
W1M9-02-01-003
11
4, 5
3
IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the disconnected hoses for assembling. 5. Disconnect pilot hoses (12) (6 used) from pilot valve (4). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm 6. Remove bolts (5) (2 used). Remove pilot valve (4) from bracket (3). : 17 mm
12
W1M9-02-06-003
12
W2-6-4
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Installation
4, 5
3
1. Install pilot valve (4) to bracket (3) with bolts (5) (2 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft) 2. Install hoses (12) (6 used) onto pilot valve (4). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft)
12
W1M9-02-06-003
12
3. Turn adjusting screw (11). Lower the canopy (6) assembly.
6
11
Tilt Device
4. Install cover (9) onto main frame (10) with bolts (8) (2 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
8 9
10
W2-6-5
W1M9-02-01-003
W1M9-02-01-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve 5. Install canopy (6) with bolt (7) (3 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft)
6
Counterweight
7
6. Install the levers (1) (2 used) assembly to pilot valve (4) with bolts (2) (4 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
W1M9-02-01-002
1
7. After completing the work, check the oil level. Start the engine and check for any oil leaks.
4
W2-6-6
2
W1M9-02-06-008
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL BLADE PILOT VALVE Removal CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 1. Remove cap (3) and bolts (4) (7 used). Remove cover (1) from lever stand (2). : 10 mm 2. Remove bolts (6) (4 used) from bracket (5). : 13 mm 3. Move the pilot valve (7) assembly up. 4. Secure hoses (8) (4 used) by using a wire in order not to fall off. IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the disconnected hoses for assembling. 5. Disconnect hoses (8) (4 used) from pilot valve (7). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm
1
M1M7-05-009
6
5
3, 4
2
6. Remove the pilot valve (7) assembly from lever stand (2).
5 7
2
8
W2-6-7
W1M9-02-06-007
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Installation 1. Insert the pilot valve (7) assembly into lever stand (2). 2. Install hoses (8) (4 used) onto pilot valve (7). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft)
5
3. Install bracket (5) in the pilot valve (7) assembly to lever stand (2) with bolts (6) (4 used). : 13 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft)
7
2
4. Install cover (1) onto lever stand (2) with bolts (4) (7 used). : 10 mm : 3.3 to 4.2 N⋅m (0.3 to 0.4 kgf⋅m, 2.4 to 3.1 lbf⋅ft)
W1M9-02-06-007
8
5. Install cap (3) to bolt (4) (7 used). 6. After completing the work, check the oil level. Start the engine and check for any oil leaks.
1
M1M7-05-009
6
W2-6-8
5
3, 4
2
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL BOOM SWING PILOT VALVE Auxiliary Pilot Valve
Removal CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-3-1.) 1. Remove bolts (2) (2 used). Remove pedal (1) from bracket (6). : 13 mm 2. Remove bolts (7) (2 used). Remove bracket (6) from pilot valve (3). : 13 mm
W1M9-02-06-008
Boom Swing Pilot Valve
3. Lay down the canopy assembly to the front side.
1
NOTE: Refer to the “REMOVE AND INSTALL TRAVEL PILOT VALVE” section.
2 3
IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the disconnected hoses for assembling. 4. Disconnect hoses (9) (4 used) from pilot valve (3). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm
8
6, 7
5
4
W1M9-02-06-009
5. Remove bolts (4) (2 used). Remove pilot valve (3) and cover (5) from main frame (8). : 13 mm
9 3
9
W2-6-9
W1M9-02-06-003
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Installation 1. Install bracket (5) and pilot valve (3) to main frame (8) with bolts (4) (2 used). : 13 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft) 2. Install hoses (9) (4 used) onto pilot valve (3). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) 3. Lower the canopy assembly. 9
4. Install bracket (6) to pilot valve (3) with bolts (7) (2 used). : 13 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft)
3
W1M9-02-06-003
9
5. Install pedal (1) to pilot valve (3) with bolts (2) (2 used). : 13 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft)
1
6. After completing the work, check the oil level. Start the engine and check for any oil leaks. 2 3
8
W2-6-10
6, 7
5
4
W1M9-02-06-009
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve (Blank)
W2-6-11
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve DISASSEMBLE FRONT PILOT VALVE
17 16 15
14
13 12 11 10 22
9 8 7 6
21
5 4
20
3
18
19
2 1
W178-02-07-064
123456-
Spacer (4 Used) Shim (Several) Balance Spring A (2 Used) Balance Spring B (2 Used) Return Spring A (2 Used) Return Spring B (2 Used)
78910 11 12 -
Spring Guide (4 Used) Retaining Ring (4 Used) Pusher A (2 Used) Pusher B (2 Used) Oil Seal (4 Used) Sleeve (4 Used)
13 14 15 16 17 -
W2-6-12
O-Ring (4 Used) Plate Universal Joint Cam Screw Joint
18 19 20 21 22 -
Retaining Ring Plug O-Ring Spool (4 Used) Casing
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Disassemble Front Pilot Valve IMPORTANT: Casing (22) is made of aluminium. As too strong a force can deform, or damage them, handle them with care. IMPORTANT: Spool (21) has been selected to match the hole of casing (22). The dimensions of balance springs A (3), B (4) and return springs A (5), B (6) as well as those of pushers A (9), B (10) are different. Indicate the port number from which it is removed. Port numbers are stamped on casing (22). IMPORTANT: Do not remove screw joint (17) while clamping casing (22) in a vise. The strong torque may act on screw joint (17). 1. Clamp screw joint (17) in a vise. Turn cam (16) by using a spanner. Remove screw joint (17). : 19 mm, 32 mm 2. Clamp the flat surface of casing (22) in a vise lightly. Remove cam (16) from universal joint (15). : 32 mm 3. Attach a spanner onto the upper surface of universal joint (15) and remove universal joint (15). : 17 mm
IMPORTANT: Insert the soft rubber between sleeve (12) and the tool in order not to damage the surface of sleeve (12). Oil seal (11) cannot be removed from sleeve (12). Sleeve (12) and oil seal (11) must be replaced as an assembly. 5. Pull up sleeve (12) by using a pair of pliers. IMPORTANT: The dimensions of pushers (9, 10) for ports 1, 3 and ports 2, 4 are different. Indicate the port number from which it is removed in order to keep by the port number. 6. Remove pushers (9, 10) from casing (22). 7. Install special tool (ST 4145) to the port hole on casing (22) in order not to lower the spool when pushing the spring. : 6 mm 8. Install special tool (ST 4145) to the pusher hole on casing (22). Push special tool and compress the spring. Tighten special tool (ST 4146) by using the socket bolt (M14, Pitch 2.0 mm). Remove retaining rings (8) (4 used) by using a screwdriver. : 12 mm
ST 4146
NOTE: Universal joint (15) has been secured on casing (22) by using LOCTITE. 4. Remove plate (14).
22
W178-02-07-048
ST 4145
W2-6-13
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve
17 16
22
7 6
21
5 4
19
3
18
2 1
W178-02-07-064
W2-6-14
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve 9. Remove special tool (ST 4146). Remove spring guides (7) (4 used), return springs A (5) (2 used), B (6) (2 used), balance springs A (3) (2 used) and B (4) (2 used). IMPORTANT: The quantity of shims (2) has been determined for each port during the performance testing at the factory. Do not lose shims (2). Keep shims (2) carefully in order to install shims (2) to each former port when assembling. 10. Remove shim (2) and spacers (1) (4 used) from spools (21) (4 used). IMPORTANT: Spool (21) has been selected to match the hole of casing (22). Replace spool (21) and casing (22) as an assembly. 11. Remove special tool (ST 4145) from casing (22). Slowly turn and remove spool (21). 12. Remove retaining ring (18) by using a screwdriver. Install the bolt (M8, Pitch 1.25 mm) to plug (19) and remove plug (19). ďź&#x161; 13 mm
W2-6-15
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve ASSEMBLE FRONT PILOT VALVE
17
15
16
14
9, 10
11
12
13
8 7 3, 4 5, 6 2
19 19
1
22
21
18 W178-02-06-055
123456-
Spacer (4 Used) Shim (Several) Balance Spring A (2 Used) Balance Spring B (2 Used) Return Spring A (2 Used) Return Spring B (2 Used)
78910 11 12 -
Spring Guide (4 Used) Retaining Ring (4 Used) Pusher A (2 Used) Pusher B (2 Used) Oil Seal (4 Used) Sleeve (4 Used)
13 14 15 16 17 -
W2-6-16
O-Ring (4 Used) Plate Universal Joint Cam Screw Joint
18 19 20 21 22 -
Retaining Ring Plug O-Ring Spool (4 Used) Casing
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Assemble Front Pilot Valve IMPORTANT: The pilot valve is susceptible to contamination. Keep the parts clean when assembling. NOTE: Table below shows the relations between each port and the components. Do not confuse them when assembling. Port No. 1 2
Spool (21)
Shim (2)
Same to the former one
Same to the former one
3 4
Port No. 1 2 3 4
Return Springs (5, 6) 43 (1.69) 48 (1.89) 43 (1.69) 48 (1.89)
Pushers A, B (9, 10) Outer Groove (3 Used) without outer groove Outer Groove (3 Used) without outer groove
IMPORTANT: Refer to the table in order to assemble them correctly. 3. Install spacer (1), shim (2) and balance springs (3, 4) to spool (21). Install return springs (5, 6) to casing (22). 4. Install spring guide (7) onto return spring (5, 6) with the protrusion facing upward. 5. Install special tool (ST 4146) to the pusher hole on casing (22). Push special tool (ST 4146) and compress the spring. Tighten special tool (ST 4146) by using the bolt (M14, Pitch 2.0 mm). : 12 mm ST 4146 ST 4144
Unit: mm (in) Blance Springs A, B (3, 4) 29.9 (1.18) 30.1 (1.19) 29.9 (1.18) 30.1 (1.19) ST 4145
IMPORTANT: Spool (21) has been selected to match the port hole. Spool (21) and casing (22) must be replaced as an assembly. IMPORTANT: When inserting the parts into casing (22), apply hydraulic oil onto the parts. 1. Check the port hole number and insert spool (21) to the original port. Insert the thinner end of spool (21) to the port hole in casing (22) while rotating.
W178-02-07-049
6. Install retaining ring (8) to ring holder (ST 4144).
2. Install special tool (ST 4145) to the port hole on casing (22) in order not to lower the spool when pushing the spring. : 6 mm
W2-6-17
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve
17
15
16
14
11 13
9, 10 12 8
3, 4
22
W178-02-06-055
W2-6-18
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve 7. Install retaining ring (8) to the groove on the head of spool (21) out of special tool (ST 4146). IMPORTANT: Check the mounting positions of pushers (9, 10). 8. Install pushers (9, 10). Push pushers (9, 10) by hand several times and remove pushers (9, 10). Check if retaining ring (8) falls off or springs (3, 4) are located correctly. After checking, install pushers (9, 10) to casing (22). 9. Apply grease to the ball at the ends of pushers (9, 10).
14. Align the bolt hole on plate (14) and the screw hole on casing (22). Place plate (14) onto casing (22). Tighten universal joint (15). : 17 mm : 24.5 N⋅m (2.5 kgf⋅m, 18 lbf⋅ft) IMPORTANT: Check the tightness of cam (16). 15. Install cam (16) to universal joint (15). The clearance between cam (16) and pushers (9, 10) should be 0 to 0.2 mm (0 to 0.008 in). 16. Secure cam (16) by using a spanner. Tighten screw joint (17) by using a spanner. : 19 mm, 32 mm : 68.4 N⋅m (7.0 kgf⋅m, 50 lbf⋅ft)
10. Apply grease to the joint part of universal joint (15). 11. Apply grease to the inner surface of oil seals (11) (4 used). NOTE: Sleeve (12) and oil seal (11) must be replaced as an assembly. 12. Install the sleeve (12) assembly. Push the sleeve (12) assembly by hand until O-ring (13) is inserted into the hole on casing (22). 13. Clamp casing (22) in a vise lightly.
W2-6-19
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve DISASSEMBLE TRAVEL PILOT VALVE 1
2 3 4 5 6 35 34
7
33 32
8
31 30
9 10
29
11 28 27
14 12
26 15
13
25 16 24
17 18
23 19 20 21
22 W178-02-07-063
123456789-
Bolt (2 Used) Cover Spring Pin (2 Used) Spring Pin (2 Used) Cam (2 Used) Bushing (4 Used) Holder Spring Washer (4 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -
Spring Pin (2 Used) Bracket (2 Used) Spring Pin (2 Used) Spring Pin (2 Used) O-Ring (4 Used) Bushing (4 Used) Pusher (4 Used) Spring Guide (4 Used) Balance Spring (4 Used)
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 -
W2-6-20
O-Ring (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Spool (4 Used) Spring (4 Used) Spacer (4 Used) Shim (12 Used)
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 -
Oil Seal (4 Used) Spring Washer (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Rubber Seat (2 Used) Damper (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Pin (2 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Disassemble Travel Pilot Valve IMPORTANT: Casing (23) is made of aluminium. As too strong a force can deform, or damage them, handle them with care. IMPORTANT: Spool (24) has been selected to match the hole of casing (23). Indicate the port number from which it is removed. Port numbers are stamped on the periphery of casing (23). 1. Clamp casing (23) in a vise. Remove bolts (1) (2 used). Remove cover (2) from holder (7). : 10 mm
IMPORTANT: The quantity of shims (27) has been determined for each port during the performance testing at the factory. Do not lose shims (27). Keep shims (27) carefully in order to install shims (27) to each former port when assembling. 6. Push balance spring (18). Remove spring guides (17) (4 used), balance springs (18) (4 used), shims (27) (12 used) and spacers (26) (4 used) from spools (24) (4 used). 7. Remove springs (25) (4 used) from casing (23).
2. Remove socket bolts (30) (2 used) and spring washers (29) (2 used). Remove the holder (7) assembly from casing (23). : 8 mm 3. Remove pushers (16) (4 used) from casing (23). 4. Remove pushers (16) (4 used) from bushings (15) (4 used). By using a bamboo spatula, remove oil seals (28) (4 used) from bushings (15) (4 used). Remove O-rings (14) (4 used). IMPORTANT: Put the mark on spools (24) (4 used) in order to easily install spool (17) into the original hole. 5. Turn and remove the spools (24) (4 used) assembly from casing (23). Spring guide (17), balance spring (18), shim (27) and spacer (26) are removed with spool (24) together. NOTE: Spool (24) has been selected to match the hole of casing (23). Replace spool (24) and casing (23) as an assembly.
W2-6-21
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve
3 4 6
3 4
10
5
11
5
6
12
6
13
35 34
7
33 32 31
9 10
31
11
32 33 34 35 12
13
23 19 20 21
22 W178-02-07-063
W2-6-22
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve IMPORTANT: Place a stand under bracket (11) and form a reaction force. If holder (7) bears the reaction force, a strong force acts on pin (35) and pin (35) may be deformed. 8. Place a stand under bracket (11). Remove both spring pins (12, 13) from bracket (11) at the same time by using special tool (ST 1237). NOTE: The hole insides of spring pins (12, 13) in bracket (11) are in stepped-shape. The spring pin can only be removed in one direction. 9. Remove bracket (11) from pin (35). (2 places) NOTE: The outside end of spring pin (10) has been crimped. Do not remove spring pin (10) on bracket (11) unless necessary.
11. Remove O-ring (33) from pin (35). (2 places) 12. Place holder (7) with the casing (23) mounting surface facing upward. 13. Remove spring pins (3, 4) from cam (5) at the same time by using special tool (ST 1237). The hole insides of spring pins (3, 4) in cam (5) are in stepped-shape. Tap the bottom of cam (5). As the holes of spring pins (3, 4) are crimped, spring pins (34, 35) may feel tight when removing. 14. Remove pin (35) by using a round bar and hammer. At the same time cam (5) is also removed. Do not remove bushings (6) (4 used) in holder (7) unless necessary. When removing, tap bushing (6) by using special tool (ST7256). 15. Remove plugs (20) (2 used) from casing (23). O-ring (19) is removed with plug (20) together. 16. Remove plugs (21) (2 used) from casing (23). O-ring (22) is removed together with plug (21).
12, 13 11 35
10 Crimped Here Stand
W176-02-07-019
10. Remove socket bolts (9) (2 used). Remove damper (32) and rubber seat (31) from pin (35). O-ring (34) is removed together. (2 places) : 5 mm
W2-6-23
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve ASSEMBLE TRAVEL PILOT VALVE 11
32
31 1
2
35
6
12
10
13
7
5
3, 4
29
34 9
15
33 28
8
30
17 18
14
25 27
16
26 24 23
W178-02-06-056
123456789-
Bolt (2 Used) Cover Spring Pin (2 Used) Spring Pin (2 Used) Cam (2 Used) Bushing (4 Used) Holder Spring Washer (4 Used) Socket Bolt (4 Used)
10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 -
Spring Pin (2 Used) Bracket (2 Used) Spring Pin (2 Used) Spring Pin (2 Used) O-Ring Bushing (4 Used) Pusher (4 Used) Spring Guide (4 Used) Balance Spring (4 Used)
19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 -
NOTE: As for the parts with * mark, refer to W2-6-20.
W2-6-24
*O-Ring (2 Used) *Plug (2 Used) *Plug (2 Used) *O-Ring (2 Used) Casing Spool (4 Used) Spring (4 Used) Spacer (4 Used) Shim (12 Used)
28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 -
Oil Seal (4 Used) Spring Washer (2 Used) Socket Bolt (2 Used) Rubber Seat (2 Used) Damper (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Pin (2 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Assemble Travel Pilot Valve IMPORTANT: Check the direction to install spring guide (17). 1. Assemble spool (24) into the assembly. (4 used) • Insert spacer (26), shim (27) and balance spring (18) into spool (24) in this order. Install the shim as the same condition before disassembling. • Push the balance spring by hand. Install spring guide (17) to spool (24) with the stepped-end facing downward.
6. If bushing (6) has been removed from holder (7), install bushing (6) on holder (7) by using special tool (ST 7256) in the following procedures. NOTE: Bushings (6)(4 used) are identical.
• Insert bushing (6) into special tool (ST 7256). Tap special tool (ST 7256) and install bushing (6) into the hole of holder (7) by using a hammer. Stop tapping when bushing (6) end is flush with the inside wall.
IMPORTANT: Before inserting the parts into holder (7) and casing (23), apply hydraulic oil onto the parts. 2. Insert spring (25) into casing (23). (4 places) 3. Insert the spool (24) assembly into the former port. Turn and install the spool (24) assembly into casing (23). (4 places) 4. Assemble plunger (16) into the assembly. (4 used) • Install oil seal (28) onto bushing (15). • Apply grease to the inner surface on oil seal (28). • Install O-ring (14) to bushing (15). • Insert pusher (16) into bushing (15). • Apply grease to the head of pusher (16).
ST 7256
7
W176-02-07-016
6
• Install bushing (6) on the opposite side in the same procedure. 6 ST 7256
7
W176-02-07-015
• Install bushing (6) in near side as illustrated. Stop tapping when the bushing (6) end is flush with the outside of holder (7).
5. Insert the pusher (16) assembly into casing (23). (4 places)
6 ST 7256
7
Outside of Holder W176-02-07-014
• Install bushing (6) in the near and opposite side as illustrated. 6 ST 7256
7
W176-02-07-01313
W2-6-25
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve
32 31
35
31 32
7
5
3, 4
30
29 9
34
8
33
23
W178-02-06-056
W2-6-26
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve 7. Install O-ring (33) to pin (35). Assemble pin (35) to holder (7) with cam (5). (2 places)
11. Install rubber seat (31) to pin (35). (2 places) 12. Apply grease to O-ring (33). (2 places)
IMPORTANT: Check the direction to install spring pins (3, 4). 8. Install spring pins (3, 4) to cam (5) by using special tool (ST 1237). Secure cam (5) and pin (35). Spring pins (3, 4) should be displaced with their slits at 90°. (2 places) Tap and install spring pins (3, 4) until spring pins (34, 35) make contact with the stepped part in the hole. 3
4
Slit
IMPORTANT: Check the direction of damper (32). The inner bore of damper (32) is edged-shape. If damper (32) is pried when installing, O-ring (33) will be damaged. 13. Install damper (32) to pin (35) with the lever facing upward. (2 places) 14. Secure damper (32) and rubber seat (31) to holder (7) with socket bolts (9) (2 used) and spring washers (8) (2 used). (2 places) : 5 mm : 7 N⋅m (0.7 kgf⋅m, 5.2 lbf⋅ft)
Slit
W178-02-07-050
15. Apply grease to O-ring (34). Push O-ring (34) to the endmost of pin (35). (2 places)
9. Crimp the hole edge of cam (5) where spring pins (3, 4) are inserted by using a punch. 10. Place holder (7) on the casing (23) assembly. Install holder (7) with socket bolts (30) (2 used) and spring washers (29) (2 used). Check the mark direction and install holder (7). : 8 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
W2-6-27
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve
11
32
1
2
35
12
10
13
7
1
1
W178-02-06-056
W2-6-28
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve 16. As for the direction to install bracket (11), refer to the figure in the disassemble section. Install bracket (11) to pin (35). Align the inserting holes of spring pins (12, 13). IMPORTANT: Place a stand under bracket (26) and form a reaction force. If holder (7) bears the reaction force, a strong force acts on pin (35) and pin (35) may be deformed. 17. Place a stand under bracket (11). Tap spring pins (12, 13) into bracket (11) until spring pins (12, 13) comes to the stepped end by using special tool (ST 1237). The spring pins (2 used) are displaced with their slits in 90°.
Crimped Here
11
Stand
Crimped Here
35
12, 13
W176-02-07-011
18. Crimp the hole edge of bracket (11) where spring pins (12, 13) are inserted by using a punch. (2 places) (Refer to the figure.) 19. Install bracket (11) on the opposite side to pin (35) in the same procedures as steps 16 to 18. 20. Install cover (2) to holder (7) with bolts (1) (2 used). : 10 mm : 5 N⋅m (0.5 kgf⋅m, 3.7 lbf⋅ft) 21. Apply grease to the spring pin (10) contact part of damper (32). (2 places)
W2-6-29
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve DISASSEMBLE PILOT VALVES FOR BOOM SWING, BLADE AND AUXILIARY
17
16
18
1
2 15 3 4 14 5
6 7 13 8 12 9
10
11
12345-
Spacer (2 Used) Cam Socket Bolt (2 Used) Boot Holder
W1CF-02-07-001
678910 -
Spring Guide (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Spacer (2 Used) Spool (2 Used)
11 12 13 14 -
W2-6-30
Casing O-Ring (2 Used) Bushing (2 Used) Oil Seal (2 Used)
15 16 17 18 -
Pusher (2 Used) Pin Bushing (2 Used) Set Screw
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Disassemble Pilot Valves for Boom Swing, Blade and Auxiliary 1. Remove boot (4) and spacers (1) (2 used) from holder (5). 2. Secure the pilot valve in a vise. Loosen set screw (18) and remove pin (16) by using a round bar. Remove the cam (2) assembly from holder (5). : 2.5 mm 8 mm or less IMPORTANT: Record the positions for casing (11). The pusher (15) assembly may fly off by spring (8). 3. Loosen and remove socket bolts (3) (2 used) alternately. Remove holder (5) and the pusher (15) assemblies (2 used) from casing (11). : 6 mm 4. Remove pushers (15) (2 used), O-rings (12) (2 used) and oil seals (14) (2 used) from bushings (13) (2 used). IMPORTANT: Indicate the port number in order not to confuse. 5. Remove the spool (10) assemblies (2 used) and springs (8) (2 used) from each port of casing (11). 6. Push spring (7). Remove spring guide (6) from spool (10). Remove spacer (9) from spool (10). (2 places)
W2-6-31
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve ASSEMBLE PILOT VALVES FOR BOOM SWING, BLADE AND AUXILIARY
17
16
18
1
2 15 3 4 14 5
6 7 13 8 12 9
10
11 W1CF-02-07-001
12345-
Spacer (2 Used) Cam Socket Bolt (2 Used) Boot Holder
678910 -
Spring Guide (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Spacer (2 Used) Spool (2 Used)
11 12 13 14 -
W2-6-32
Casing O-Ring (2 Used) Bushing (2 Used) Oil Seal (2 Used)
15 16 17 18 -
Pusher (2 Used) Pin Bushing (2 Used) Set Screw
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve Assemble Pilot Valves for Boom Swing, Blade and Auxiliary IMPORTANT: Install spring guide (6) with the groove side facing to spring (7). When installing spring guide (6), do not lower spring guide (6) over 6 mm. 1. Install spacers (9) (2 used) and springs (7) (2 used) to spools (10) (2 used). While pushing spring (7), install spring guides (6) (2 used) to spool (10).
4. Place the pusher (15) assemblies (2 used) onto the spool (10) assemblies (2 used). Place holder (5). Alternately tighten socket bolts (3) (2 used) and install holder (5) to casing (11). : 5 mm : 11.5 to 21.5 N⋅m (1.2 to 2.2 kgf⋅m, 8.5 to 16 lbf⋅ft)
IMPORTANT: Insert the spool (10) assembly to the original condition. 2. Insert springs (8) (2 used) and the spool (10) assembly into casing (11). (2 places)
6. Apply LOCTITE #262 to set screw (18). Install set screw (18) to cam (2). : 2.5 mm : 7.0 N⋅m (0.7 kgf⋅m, 5.2 lbf⋅ft)
IMPORTANT: Check the direction of oil seals (14) (2 used). Apply grease to the lips of oil seal (14) and to the inside of bushing (13). 3. Install oil seals (14) (2 used) and O-rings (12) (2 used) to bushings (13) (2 used). Insert pushers (15) (2 used) into bushing (13).
7. Tilt cam (2) and apply grease to the ends of pushers (15) (2 used).
5. Install cam (2) on holder (5) with pin (16).
8. Install boot (4) and spacers (1) (2 used) on holder (5).
Use one of the following greases.
• Apolloil Autorex C (Idemitsu) • Ocean 7 (Nihon Ore Louve) • Screw Bar L60 (NOK)
W2-6-33
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Pilot Valve (Blank)
W2-6-34
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL SOLENOID VALVE 2-Unit Solenoid Valve Removal
1
Counterweight
CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 2
1. Remove bolts (2) (2 used) in canopy (1). : 19 mm
W1M9-02-01-002
2. Remove bolts (3) (2 used). Remove cover (4) from main frame (5). : 17 mm
3
4 5 W1M9-02-01-001
3. Turn adjusting screw (6) and lay down the canopy (1) assembly to the front side. : 17 mm
1
Tilt Device
W2-7-1
6
W1M9-02-01-003
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the removed hoses for assembling. 4. Remove hoses (7) (6 used) from solenoid valve (8). Cap the open ends. : 17 mm, 19 mm, 22 mm
7
5. Remove bolts (10) (2 used). Remove solenoid valve (8) from bracket (9). : 17 mm 8
7
W2-7-2
9
10
W1M9-02-07-003
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve Installation
7
1. Install solenoid valve (8) to bracket (9) with bolts (10) (2 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft) 2. Install hoses (7) (6 used) and the connector to solenoid valve (8). : 17 mm : 24.5 N⋅m (2.5 kgf⋅m, 18 lbf⋅ft) : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) : 22 mm : 39 N⋅m (4.0 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft)
8
3. Turn adjusting screw (6) and lower the canopy (1) assembly.
7
9
10
W1M9-02-07-003
1
Tilt Device
6
4. Install cover (4) onto main frame (5) with bolts (3) (2 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
W1M9-02-01-003
3 4
5
W2-7-3
W1M9-02-01-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve 5. Install canopy (1) with bolt (2) (3 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft)
1
Counterweight
2
W1M9-02-01-002
W2-7-4
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve (Blank)
W2-7-5
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve DISASSEMBLE 2-UNIT SOLENOID VALVE
17 5
16 6 15 14
4
7 12 8
3
9
2
13 12
1
10 11
W1LD-02-07-001
12345-
Check Valve Spring O-Ring Adjuster Plate (2 Used)
678910 -
Solenoid (2 Used) Pin (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Spool (2 Used) Spring (2 Used)
11 12 13 14 -
W2-7-6
Body O-Ring (4 Used) Solenoid (2 Used) Plate (2 Used)
15 - Wave Washer (2 Used) 16 - Casing (2 Used) 17 - Lock Nut (2 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve Disassemble 2-Unit Solenoid Valve IMPORTANT: As the right and left of solenoid (3) are different, attach an identification tag onto solenoid (13) for assembling. 1. Remove lock nuts (17) (2 used) and remove casings (16) (2 used). IMPORTANT: When removing solenoid coils (13) (2 used), pins (7) (2 used) may fall off. Do not lose pin (7). 2. Remove the solenoid (13) assemblies (2 used) from body (11). 3. Remove spools (9) (2 used) and springs (10) (2 used) from body (11) by using a magnet. 4. Remove adjuster (4) and O-ring (3) from body (11). 5. Remove spring (2) and check valve (1) from body (11) by using a magnet.
W2-7-7
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve ASSEMBLE 2-UNIT SOLENOID VALVE 17 15 12
16
14
13 11
6 7 5
4
3
2
1
12 11
8 9 10 T1LA-03-06-001
12345-
Check Valve Spring O-Ring Adjuster Plate (2 Used)
678910 -
Solenoid (2 Used) Pin (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Spool (2 Used) Spring (2 Used)
T1LA-03-06-002
11 12 13 14 -
W2-7-8
Body O-Ring (4 Used) Solenoid (2 Used) Plate (2 Used)
15 - Wave Washer (2 Used) 16 - Casing (2 Used) 17 - Lock Nut (2 Used)
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve Assemble 2-Unit Solenoid Valve 1. Install check valve (1) and spring (2) to body (11) with adjuster (4). 2. Install springs (10) (2 used) and spools (9) (2 used) to body (11). 3. Install pins (7) (2 used) into solenoids (6)(2 used). Install solenoid (6) to body (11). 4. Install plates (5) (2 used), O-rings (8) (2 used), solenoids (13) (2 used), O-rings (12) (2 used), plates (14) (2 used) and wave washers (15) (2 used) to solenoids (6) (2 used). 5. Install casings (16) (2 used) to the solenoid (6) assemblies (2 used) with lock nuts (17) (2 used).
W2-7-9
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve REMOVE AND INSTALL 1-UNIT SOLENOID VALVE Removal CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 1. Remove bolts (1) (4 used). Remove covers (2) (2 used) from main frame (3). : 19 mm 1
W1M9-02-07-001
1
3
2
4, 5
IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the removed hoses for assembling. 2. Remove hoses (6) (3 used) and connector (7) from solenoid valve (4). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm
3. Remove bolts (5) (2 used). Remove solenoid valve (4) from main frame (3). : 13 mm
6
7
Pilot Filter
3 W1M9-02-07-002
W2-7-10
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve Installation
4, 5
1. Install solenoid valve (4) to main frame (3) with bolts (5) (2 used). : 13 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft) 2. Install hoses (6) (3 used) and connector (7) to solenoid valve (4). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft)
6
Pilot Filter
7
3 W1M9-02-07-002
3. Install covers (2) (2 used) onto main frame (3) with bolts (1) (4 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft) 1
W1M9-02-07-001
1
W2-7-11
3
2
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Solenoid Valve STRUCTURE VALVE
OF
1-UNIT
SOLENOID A
1
2
3 4
16
5
15
6 14
7
13
8 9 10 12
Section A
11 W1M9-02-07-004 T1M9-03-07-003
Part Name 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16
Main Pipe Lock Nut Casing Plunger Shim Shaft Solenoid Coil O-Ring Bushing Spool Spring Block Casing Plate O-Ring Plate Wave Washer
Qty
Wrench Size
N⋅m
Tightening Torque (kgf⋅m)
1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 2 1 1
(lbf⋅ft)
Remark
(1A-1.9×13.8)
(1A-1.5×13.5)
W2-7-12
UPPERSTRUCTURE / REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE REMOVE AND INSTALL REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE Removal CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.)
Pilot Filter
1
2
1. Remove bolts (5) (7 used). Remove cover (4) from frame (7). : 17 mm 3
IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the removed hoses for assembling. 2. Remove hoses (1) (6 used) from revolution sensing valve (3). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm, 22 mm 3. Remove bolts (2) (2 used). Remove revolution sensing valve (3) from bracket (6). : 13 mm
W2-8-1
7
6
4, 5
W1M9-02-08-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE Installation 1. Install revolution sensing valve (3) to bracket (6) with bolts (2) (2 used). : 13 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft) 2. Install hoses (1) (6 used) onto revolution sensing valve (3). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) : 22 mm : 39 N⋅m (4.0 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft)
Pilot Filter
1
2
3
3. Install cover (6) to frame (7) with bolts (5) (7 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
7
W2-8-2
6
4, 5
W1M9-02-08-001
UPPERSTRUCTURE / REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE (Blank)
W2-8-3
UPPERSTRUCTURE / REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE DISASSEMBLE REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE 5 4
4
6
4
7 3
1 2 W566-02-08-001
3
11 12 13
4
14
4 6 5 4
15
2
22
10
21
1
20
9
8
18
17
7
19
16 W566-02-08-002
123456-
Body Differential Pressure Reducing Valve Variable Orifice Valve Plug (3 Used) Plug Orifice
78-
Plug O-Ring
13 - Spool 14 - O-Ring
18 - Piston 19 - Backup Ring
910 11 12 -
O-Ring O-Ring O-Ring Spring
15 - Spring 16 - O-Ring 17 - Guide
20 - Spool 21 - Spring 22 - Spring Guide
W2-8-4
UPPERSTRUCTURE / REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE Disassemble Revolution Sensing Valve IMPORTANT: Do not remove plugs (5, 7). IMPORTANT: Do not turn the lock nuts of differential reducing valve (2) and variable orifice valve (3) as the setting pressure changes. Lock Nut Cartridge
W176-02-06-017
1. Remove differential pressure reducing valve (2) from body (1). Remove piston (18) and spring (15) from body (1) by using a magnet. : 24 mm 2. Install bolt (M8, Pitch 1.25 mm) into the pulling-out hole on guide (17). Remove guide (17) from body (1). IMPORTANT: When removing variable orifice valve (3) from body (1), spool (13) and spring (12) may be left inside body (1). Remove spool (13) and spring (12) by using a magnet. 3. Remove variable orifice valve (3), spring (12) and spool (13) from body (1). : 24 mm 4. Remove plugs (4) (3 used) and orifice (6) from body (1). : 5 mm, 6 mm
W2-8-5
UPPERSTRUCTURE / REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE ASSEMBLE VALVE
REVOLUTION
SENSING 5 4
4
6
4
7 3
1 2 W566-02-08-001
3
11 12 13
4
14
4 6 5 4
15
2
10
1
9
8
18
17
7
19
16 W566-02-08-002
12-
Body Differential Pressure Reducing Valve 3 - Variable Orifice Valve 4 - Plug (3 Used) 5 - Plug
67-
Orifice Plug
11 - O-Ring 12 - Spring
16 - O-Ring 17 - Guide
8 - O-Ring 9 - O-Ring 10 - O-Ring
13 - Spool 14 - O-Ring 15 - Spring
18 - Piston 19 - Backup Ring
W2-8-6
UPPERSTRUCTURE / REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE Assemble Revolution Sensing Valve 1. Install orifice (6) and plugs (4) (3 used) to body (1). : 5 mm : 9.8 to 11 N⋅m (1.0 to 1.1 kgf⋅m, 7.2 to 8.1 lbf⋅ft) : 6 mm : 30.5 to 34 N⋅m (3.1 to 3.5 kgf⋅m, 22.5 to 25 lbf⋅ft) IMPORTANT: Apply grease onto O-rings (14, 11). 2. Install spring (12) and spool (13) to variable orifice valve (3). IMPORTANT: Install variable orifice valve (3) with spool (13) and spring (12) upward. In case variable orifice valve (3) cannot be installed to body (1) by hand, spool (13) may be off. Check if the sliding surface of spool is damaged after removing variable orifice valve (3) from body (1). 3. Install variable orifice valve (3) to body (1) and turn 1 to 2 turns. Tighten variable orifice valve (3). : 24 mm : 54 to 59 N⋅m (5.5 to 6.0 kgf⋅m, 40 to 44 lbf⋅ft)
IMPORTANT: Install differential pressure reducing valve (2) with the guide (17) assembly facing upward. In case differential pressure reducing valve (2) cannot be installed to body (1) by hand, the guide (17) assembly may be off from differential pressure reducing valve (2). Check if the sliding surfaces of piston (18) and guide (17) are damaged after removing differential reducing valve (2) from body (1). 5. Install differential pressure reducing valve (2) to body (1) and turn 1 to 2 turns. Tighten differential reducing valve (2). : 24 mm : 79 to 83 N⋅m (8.1 to 8.5 kgf⋅m, 58 to 61 lbf⋅ft)
IMPORTANT: Apply grease on O-rings (10, 9, 8, 16) and spring (16). 4. Install piston (18) and spring (15) to guide (17). Install the guide (17) assembly to differential pressure reducing valve (2).
W2-8-7
UPPERSTRUCTURE / REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE (Blank)
W2-8-8
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Auxiliary Selector Valve(Optional) REMOVE AND INSTALL SELECTOR VALVE
AUXILIRY
Removal IMPORTANT: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) CAUTION: The auxiliary flow selector valve is located under the right console box. A
W1M9-02-09-004
Detail A
1. Remove hoses (4) (3 used) and connector (5) from auxiliary flow selector valve (2). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm
1
2. Remove bolts (3) (3 used). Remove auxiliary flow selector valve (2) from main frame (1). : 13 mm 5 2
W1M9-02-09-005
3
W2-9-1
4
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Auxiliary Selector Valve(Optional) Installation
Detail A
1. Install auxiliary flow selector valve (2) to main frame (1) with bolts (3) (3 used). : 13 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft)
1
2. Install hoses (4) (3 used) and connector (5) to auxiliary flow selector valve (2). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) 5 2
W1M9-02-09-005
3
W2-9-2
4
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Auxiliary Selector Valve(Optional) (Blank)
W2-9-3
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Auxiliary Selector Valve(Optional) DISASSEMBLE AUXILIARY SELECTOR VALVE
FLOW Flow Selector Solenoid Valve
2
Pressure Valve
Reducing
1
21 20
19
3 4
18 17 16
5
15 6 7
14
8 9 10 11
10
13 12
11
W1M9-02-09-002
123456-
Solenoid Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Spool Sleeve Washer
78910 11 12 -
Spring Stopper Body O-Ring (4 Used) Plug (4 Used) Plug
13 14 15 16 17 -
W2-9-4
O-Ring Spool Spring O-Ring Plug
18 19 20 21 -
O-Ring Plug Adjusting Screw Lock Nut
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Auxiliary Selector Valve(Optional) Disassemble Flow Selector Solenoid Valve
Disassemble Pressure Reducing Valve
1. Clamp the flow selector solenoid valve in a vise. Remove socket bolt (2) and remove solenoid (1) from body (9). The push rod may fall off. : 4 mm
1. Remove the plug (19) assembly from body (9). Remove O-ring (18) from plug (19). : 27 mm IMPORTANT: Adjust the disassembling assembly.
1
pressure when the plug (19)
2. Remove lock nut (21), adjusting screw (20) and plug (17) from the plug (19) assembly. Remove O-ring (16) from plug (17). : 17 mm 3. Remove spring (15) from body (9).
Push Rod W1M9-02-09-003
2. Remove O-ring (3) from solenoid (1). 3. Remove the sleeve (5) assembly from body (9). Remove spool (4) from sleeve (5).
4. Remove spool (14) from body (9) by using a magnet. 5. Remove plugs (11) (4 used), O-rings (10) (4 used), plug (12) and O-ring (13) from body (19). : 4 mm, 6 mm
4. Remove washer (6), spring (7) and stopper (8) from body (9) by using a magnet.
W2-9-5
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Auxiliary Selector Valve(Optional) ASSEMBLE AUXILIARY FLOW SELECTOR VALVE Flow Selector Solenoid Valve
Pressure Reducing Valve
20
1
21 19
16 2
17
3
18
4 15 11 5 10
11
6 7 8
14 13
9
10
123456-
Solenoid Socket Bolt (2 Used) O-Ring Spool Sleeve Washer
78910 11 12 -
Spring Stopper Body O-Ring (4 Used) Plug (4 Used) Plug
11
13 14 15 16 17 -
W2-9-6
O-Ring Spool Spring O-Ring Plug
W1M9-02-09-001
12
18 19 20 21 -
O-Ring Plug Adjusting Screw Lock Nut
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Auxiliary Selector Valve(Optional) Assemble Pressure Reducing Valve
Assemble Auxiliary Flow Selector Solenoid Valve
1. Install O-ring (13) to plug (12). Install O-rings (10) (4 used) to plugs (11) (4 used).
1. Install stopper (8) to body (9).
2. Install plug (12) and the plug (11) assemblies (4 used) to body (9). : 4 mm : 4.9 N⋅m (0.5 kgf⋅m, 3.6 lbf⋅ft) : 6 mm : 26.5 N⋅m (2.7 kgf⋅m, 19.5 lbf⋅ft)
2. Remove the body (9) assembly from the vise. Place the body (9) assembly onto the workbench with the flow selector solenoid valve facing upward. 3. Apply hydraulic oil onto spool (4), sleeve (5), washer (6) and spring (7).
3. Clamp body (9) in a vise. Apply hydraulic oil onto spool (14) and spring (15). Install spool (14) and spring (15) to body (9).
4. Install spool (4) into sleeve (5). Install washer (6) and spring (7) to spool (4).
4. Install O-rings (16, 18) to plugs (17, 19).
5. Install the spool (4) assembly to body (9) in order not to fall off spring (7).
5. Install the plug (17) assembly, adjusting screw (20) and lock nut (21) to plug (19). : 17 mm : 78.6 N⋅m (8.0 kgf⋅m, 58 lbf⋅ft) NOTE: Change in pressure reducing of pressure 2 reducing valve: 540 kPa (5.5 kgf/cm , 78.5 psi) / 1turn 6. Install the plug (19) assembly to body (9). : 27 mm : 49 N⋅m (5.0 kgf⋅m, 36 lbf⋅ft)
6. Clamp the body (9) assembly in a vise. Check if spool (4) moves by fingers. 7. Install O-ring (3) to solenoid (1). Apply hydraulic oil onto O-ring (3). 8. Install solenoid (1) to body (9) with socket bolts (2) (2 used). : 4 mm : 6.2 N⋅m (0.6 kgf⋅m, 4.6 lbf⋅ft)
W2-9-7
UPPERSTRUCTURE / Auxiliary Selector Valve(Optional) (Blank)
W2-9-8
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
SECTION 3
UNDERCARRIAGE CONTENTS Group 1 Swing Bearing
Group 6 Upper and Lower Roller
Remove and Install Swing Bearing ......... W3-1-1
Remove and Install Upper Roller ............ W3-6-1 Remove and Install Lower Roller ............ W3-6-3
Group 2 Travel Device
Disassemble and Assemble
Remove and Install Travel Device .......... W3-2-1
Lower Roller ......................................... W3-6-6
Disassemble Travel Device .................... W3-2-4
Maintenance Standard ............................ W3-6-8
Assemble Travel Device ....................... W3-2-12
Group 7 Track
Disassemble and Assemble Brake Valve ........................................ W3-2-20
Remove and Install Rubber Track........... W3-7-1
Maintenance Standard ........................ W3-2-23
Maintenance Standard ............................ W3-7-3
Group 3 Center Joint Remove and Install Center Joint............. W3-3-1 Disassemble Center Joint....................... W3-3-4 Assemble Center Joint ........................... W3-3-6
Group 4 Track Adjuster Remove and Install Track Adjuster ......... W3-4-1 Disassemble Track Adjuster ................... W3-4-2 Disassemble Track Adjuster ................... W3-4-8
Group 5 Front Idler Remove and Install Front Idler................ W3-5-1 Disassemble and Assemble Front Idler............................................. W3-5-2 Maintenance Standard............................ W3-5-4
1M9W-3-1
(Blank)
1M9W-3-2
UNDERCARRIAGE / Swing Bearing REMOVE AND INSTALL SWING BEARING In this section, the procedure starts on the premise that the upperstructure has already been removed. Removal 1. Put the matching marks on inner race (1) of swing bearing (4) and track frame (2).
Matching Mark
1
2. Remove bolts (3) (24 used) from swing bearing (4). : 19 mm
2
W105-03-01-001
1
3
CAUTION: Swing bearing (4) weight: 59 kg (130 lb) 3. Attach lifting tools (ST 0052) onto the outer race of swing bearing (4). Hoist and remove swing bearing (4).
W3-1-1
4
W1M9-03-01-002
UNDERCARRIAGE / Swing Bearing Installation Machine Front
Clean the mounting surfaces of track frame and swing bearing. Position for Grease Fitting
1. Apply THREEBOND # 1102 to the mounting surfaces of track frame and swing bearing.
“S” (Soft Zone) Marking Position on Outer Race
6.5°
Hole for Knock Pin
CAUTION: Swing bearing (4) weight: 59 kg (130 lb) IMPORTANT: Otherwise, the soft zone position will be dislocated. 2. Hoist swing bearing (4). Align the matching marks on track frame and inner race of swing bearing (4).
9° Hole for Knock Pin
7.5° S “S” (Soft Zone) Marking Position on Inner Race W1M9-03-01-001
1
3. Tighten bolts (3) (24 used) to the inner race of swing bearing (4). : 19 mm : 110 N⋅m (11 kgf⋅m, 81 lbf⋅ft)
3
4
W3-1-2
W1M9-03-01-002
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device REMOVE AND INSTALL TRAVEL DEVICE Removal 1
2
IMPORTANT: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 1. Remove bolts (1) (3 used) and remove travel motor cover (3) from track frame (2). : 8 mm IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the removed hoses for assembling. 2. Remove hoses (4) (4 used) from travel motor (5). Cap the open ends. ï¼&#x161; 19 mm, 24 mm, 27 mm
W1M9-03-02-001
3 4
6
2
CAUTION: Travel device (5) weight: 65 kg (145 lb) 3. Remove bolts (6) (12 used) and remove travel device (5) from track frame (2). : 22 mm
5
W3-2-1
W1M9-03-02-002
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device Installation CAUTION: Travel device (5) weight: 65 kg (145 lb) 4
6
2
1. Hoist and install travel device (5) to track frame (2) with bolts (6) (12 used). : 22 mm : 176.4 N⋅m (18 kgf⋅m, 130 lbf⋅ft) 2. Install hoses (4) (4 used) to travel device (5). : 19 mm : 36 to 63 N⋅m (3.7 to 6.4 kgf⋅m, 26.5 to 46 lbf⋅ft) : 24 mm : 59 to 98 N⋅m (6.0 to 10 kgf⋅m, 44 to 72 lbf⋅ft) : 27 mm : 84 to 132 N⋅m (8.6 to 13.5 kgf⋅m, 62 to 97 lbf⋅ft)
5
1
W1M9-03-02-002
2
IMPORTANT: After completing the work, check the oil level. Start the engine and check for any oil leaks. In order to prevent the travel motor from seizing, perform the break-in operation after installation. Conditions: 1.Engine speed: Minimum speed 2.Travel pedal: Low speed 3.Operation duration: Over 2 minutes W1M9-03-02-001
3. Install cover (3) to track frame (2) with socket bolts (1) (3 used). : 8 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
W3-2-2
3
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device (Blank)
W3-2-3
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device DISASSEMBLE TRAVEL DEVICE
7
6
8
9
11
10
12
13
5 4
27
3 1
2
26 25 24 23 20
15
16
17
19
18
37
22
14
61
62
36
63
35
21
64
65
66
67
34 31 54
30 29
55
28 33
32
83 48
82
57
60
40 39
41
42
68
49
47
69
47
43
74 71 70
76
46 44
73 59
58
53
52 51 50 81
74 56
45 80 79
78 77
75 74
72 75 74
38
W1LD-03-02-001
W3-2-4
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device 12345678910 11 12 13 14 -
Plug (3 Used) O-Ring (3 Used) Cover O-Ring Wire Thrust Plate First Stage Planetary Gear (3 used) Needle Bearing (3 Used) Inner Race (3 Used) Thrust Washer First Stage Carrier Drive Gear Sun Gear Screw (4 Used)
15 - Thrust Plate 16 - Second Stage Planetary Gear (4 used) 17 - Needle Bearing (4 Used) 18 - Inner Race (4 Used) 19 - Thrust Washer (4 Used) 20 - Ring Gear 21 - Plug (2 Used) 22 - Plug (2 Used)
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
-
Bearing Nut Bearing Steel Ball (99 Used) Floating Seal (2 Used) Body Oil Seal Ball Bearing
44 45 46 47 48 49 50
-
30 31 32 33 34 35 36
-
Shaft Steel Ball (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Piston (2 Used) Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Retainer Plate
51 52 53 54 55 56 57
-
Valve Plate Ball Bearing O-Ring Disc Plate (2 Used) Friction Plate Sleeve Spool
65 66 67 68 69 70 71
-
Spool Valve Body Socket Bolt (3 Used) O-Ring (3 Used) Plug Brake Valve Body Spring (8 Used)
72 73 74 75 76 77 78
-
O-Ring (3 Used) Orifice (2 Used) Plug (3 Used) Orifice (4 Used) Piston Backup Ring O-Ring
37 - Holder 38 - Pin (3 Used)
Spring Spring Seat Plug Cap (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Counterbalance Valve (2 Used) 58 - Pin (4 Used) 59 - Plug (2 Used)
79 - O-Ring 80 - Backup Ring
39 40 41 42 43
60 61 62 63 64
81 82 83 84 85
-
Rotor Collar Spring Washer Retaining Ring
-
NOTE: As for the item with *, refer to W3-2-12.
W3-2-5
O-Ring (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Spring Seat (2 Used)
-
Collar O-Ring Backup Ring *Socket Bolt (8 Used) *Pin
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device
5
7
6
8
9
10
11
12
13
4
27
3 1
2
26 25 24 23 20
15
16
17
19
18
37
22
14
61
62
36
63
35
21
64
65
66
67
34 31 54
30
55
29 28 33
32
83 48
82
57
60
40 39
41
42
68
49
47
69
47
43
74 71 70
76
46 44
73 59
58
53
52 51 50 81
74 56
45 80 79
78 77
75 74
72 75 74
38
W1LD-03-02-001
W3-2-6
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device Disassemble Travel Device IMPORTANT: When removing socket bolts (84) (8 used), brake valve body (70) is floated by the reacting force of spring (71). Record the clearance between brake valve body (70) and body (27) or between the flange part of brake valve body (70) and the end of body (27) for assembling. IMPORTANT: When removing brake valve body (70), do not fall off valve plate (44). CAUTION: Travel device weight: 65 kg (145 lb) 1. Remove socket bolts (84) (8 used). Remove brake valve body (70) and valve plate (44). : 14 mm IMPORTANT: Do not remove pin (85) forcedly. Pin (85) has been crimped at two places. 2. Remove pins (85, 58) (4 used) and O-rings (72) (3 used) from brake valve body (70). 3. Remove springs (71) (8 used) and O-ring (46) from body (27). IMPORTANT: When removing the piston (76) assembly, put the matching mark on piston (76) and body (27). 4. Remove the piston (76) assembly from body (27). 5. Remove backup rings (77, 80) and O-rings (78, 79) from the piston (76) assembly.
6. Remove the collar (81) assembly from body (27). 7. Remove backup ring (83) and O-ring (82) from the collar (81) assembly. 8. Remove disc plates (47) (2 used) and friction plate (48) from body (27). 9. Remove the rotor (39) assembly, swash plate (34), steel balls (31) (2 used), control pistons (33) (2 used) and springs (32) (2 used) from body (27). 10. Remove plungers (35) (9 used), retainer plate (36), holder (37) and pins (38) (3 used) from rotor (39). CAUTION: Push washer (42) and spring (41) by using a press when remove retaining ring (43) as washer (42) and spring (41) may fly off. 11. Remove retaining ring (43) from rotor (39). Remove washer (42), spring (41) and collar (40). 12. Install eyebolt (M12, Pitch 1.75 mm) into the mounting hole for socket bolt (84) on body (27). Hoist and turn over body (27) onto the wooden block (50 mm Ă&#x2014; 400 mm (1.97 in Ă&#x2014; 15.7 in)). 13. Remove plugs (1) (3 used) from cover (3) and remove plugs (21) (2 used) from ring gear (20). Plug (21) : 5 mm Plug (1) : 8 mm
W3-2-7
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
4
27
3 1
13
2 25 23 20
15
16
17
18
19
22
14 21
30 29
W1LD-03-02-001
W3-2-8
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device 14. Install eyebolts (PF1/4) (2 used) into the plug (1) mounting hole on cover (3). Insert a steel pipe into the hole on eyebolt.
22. Install the bolts (M14, Pitch 2.0 mm) (3 used) into the sprocket mounting hole. Tighten the bolts evenly and remove body (27) from ring gear (20). : 22 mm
15. While rotating cover (3) by using a steel pipe, pull out wire (5) through the plug (21) mounting hole on the cover (3) mounting side in ring gear (20). NOTE: Rotate cover (3) until wire (5) is seen from plug (21) mounting hole. When wire (5) is seen, pull out wire (5) by using a screwdriver.
20
Plate
16. Move eyebolt (1 place) on cover (3). Hoist and remove cover (3) from ring gear (20). Wooden Block
17. Remove O-ring (4) from cover (3).
27 Wooden Block W1LA-03-02-011
18. Remove thrust plate (6), drive gear (12), the first stage carrier (11) assembly and sun gear (13) from ring gear (20). 19. Remove first stage planetary gears (7) (3 used), needle bearings (8) (3 used), inner races (9) (3 used) and thrust washers (10) (3 used) from first stage carrier (11). 20. Remove screws (14) (4 used), thrust plate (15), second stage planetary gears (16) (4 used), needle bearings (17) (4 used), inner races (18) (4 used) and thrust washers (19) (4 used) from body (27). 21. Remove steel balls (25) (99 used) from plug (21) mounting hole.
IMPORTANT: Attach a bar onto the shaft (30) assembly. Lightly tap by using a plastic hammer and remove the shaft (30) assembly. Do not remove ball bearing (29) unless replacement is required. 23. Remove the shaft (30) assembly from body (27). 24. Remove plugs (22) (2 used) from bearing nut (23). : 8 mm 25. Clamp body (27) in a vise. Remove bearing nut (23) by using special tool (ST 3150).
W3-2-9
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device
27 26 24
28
W1LD-03-02-001
W3-2-10
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device IMPORTANT: Attach a bar onto the groove for steel ball of bearing (24). Lightly tap by using a hammer and remove bearing (24). Replace bearing (24) with a new one if disassembling bearing (24). 26. Remove bearing (24) from body (27). 27. Remove floating seals (26) (2 used) from body (27). NOTE: For handling of floating seal, refer to the section â&#x20AC;&#x153;Precautions for Floating Seal Handling" on page W1-1-4. 28. Remove oil seal (28) from body (27).
W3-2-11
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device ASSEMBLE TRAVEL DEVICE
72
35 79 80 36 34
27
26
21 25 24 23 22 20 28 11
7
21
39 58
68
42
4
43
2
45
1
73
3
67
9 8 10 12
61
13 66
6
30
14
70 44 41 85 40 71 84 46 76 77 78 82 83
81 48 47 38 37 29 33 32 19 16 17
18 15
5
T1LD-03-05-001
W3-2-12
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device 12345678910 11 12 13 14 -
Plug (3 Used) O-Ring (3 Used) Cover O-Ring Wire Thrust Plate First Stage Planetary Gear (3 used) Needle Bearing (3 Used) Inner Race (3 Used) Thrust Washer First Stage Carrier Drive Gear Sun Gear Screw (4 Used)
15 - Thrust Plate 16 - Second Stage Planetary Gear (4 used) 17 - Needle Bearing (4 Used) 18 - Inner Race (4 Used) 19 - Thrust Washer (4 Used) 20 - Ring Gear 21 - Plug (2 Used) 22 - Plug (2 Used)
23 24 25 26 27 28 29
-
Bearing Nut Bearing Steel Ball (99 Used) Floating Seal (2 Used) Body Oil Seal Ball Bearing
44 45 46 47 48 49 50
-
Valve Plate Ball Bearing O-Ring Disc Plate (2 Used) Friction Plate Sleeve Spool
65 66 67 68 69 70 71
-
Spool Valve Body Socket Bolt (3 Used) O-Ring (3 Used) Plug Brake Valve Body Spring (8 Used)
30 31 32 33 34 35 36
-
Shaft *Steel Ball (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Piston (2 Used) Swash Plate Plunger (9 Used) Retainer Plate
51 52 53 54 55 56 57
-
72 73 74 75 76 77 78
-
O-Ring (3 Used) Orifice (2 Used) *Plug (3 Used) *Orifice (4 Used) Piston Backup Ring O-Ring
37 - Holder 38 - Pin (3 Used)
Spring Spring Seat Plug Cap (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Counterbalance Valve (2 Used) 58 - Pin (4 Used) 59 - Plug (2 Used)
39 40 41 42 43
60 61 62 63 64
81 82 83 84 85
-
Rotor Collar Spring Washer Retaining Ring
-
O-Ring (2 Used) Plug (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used) Spring (2 Used) Spring Seat (2 Used)
NOTE: As for the item with *, refer to W3-2-4.
W3-2-13
79 - O-Ring 80 - Backup Ring -
Collar O-Ring Backup Ring Socket Bolt (8 Used) Pin
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device
72
35 79 80 36 34
27
26
21 25 24 23 22 20 28 11
7
21
39 58
68
42
4
43
2
45
1
73
3
67
9 8 10 12
61
13 66
6
30
14
70 44 41 85 40 71 84 46 76 77 78 82 83
81 48 47 38 37 29 33 32 19 16 17
18 15
5
T1LD-03-05-001
W3-2-14
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device Assemble Travel Device 1. Install oil seal (28) to body (27). 2. Install floating seal (26) into body (27) and ring gear (20). NOTE: For handling of floating seal, refer to the section “Precautions for Floating Seal Handling" on page W1-1-4. 3. Install bearing (24) to body (27). Tighten bearing nut (23) by using special tool (ST 3150). : 235±9.8 N⋅m (24±1.0 kgf⋅m, 175±7.2 lbf⋅ft)
IMPORTANT: Apply LOCTITE #262 to screw (14). 8. Install thrust washers (19) (4 used), inner races (18) (4 used), needle bearings (17) (4 used), second stage planetary gears (16) (4 used) and thrust plate (15) to body (27) in this order with screws (14) (4 used). : 12.7±0.6 N⋅m (1.3±0.06 kgf⋅m, 9.4±0.4 lbf⋅ft) 9. Install sun gear (13) into ring gear (20). 10. Install first stage carrier (11) onto sun gear (13).
27 23
11. Install thrust washers (10) (3 used), inner races (9) (3 used), needle bearings (8) (3 used) and first stage planetary gears (7) (3 used) onto first stage carrier (11) in this order.
24
12. Install drive gear (12) into ring gear (20).
ST 3150
20
13. Install thrust plate (6) onto first stage carrier (11). 14. Install O-ring (4) on cover (3). 15. Install cover (3) onto ring gear (20). W505-03-02-003
4. Install plugs (22) (2 used) to bearing nut (23). : 8 mm : 34.3±4.9 N⋅m (3.5±0.5 kgf⋅m, 25.5±3.6 lbf⋅ft)
16. Install eyebolts (PF1/4) (2 used) into the plug (1) mounting hole on cover (3). Insert a steel pipe into the hole on eyebolt.
5. Crimp plug (22) at two places by using a punch in order not to loosen. 6. Tap and install ring gear (20) into body (27) by using a plastic hammer. IMPORTANT: Wind the seal tape onto plug (21). 7. Insert steel balls (25) (99 used) into the plug (21) mounting hole. Tighten plug (21). : 5 mm : 7.8±1 N⋅m (0.8±0.1 kgf⋅m, 5.8±0.7 lbf⋅ft)
W3-2-15
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device
35 79 80 36 34
27
20
21
39
42 43
3
30
41
40 71
46 76 77 78 82 83
81 48 47 38 37
33 32
5
T1LD-03-05-001
W3-2-16
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device 17. Bend wire (5) 90°at approximately 6 mm (0.24 in) from its tip and insert wire (5) into the plug (21) mounting hole. While turning cover (3) by using a steel pipe, wind up wire (5).
26. Install disc plate (47), friction plate (48) and disc plate (47) to body (27) in this order.
IMPORTANT: Wind the seal tape onto plug (21). 18. Install plug (21) to ring gear (20). : 5 mm : 7.8±1.0 N⋅m (0.8±0.1 kgf⋅m, 5.8±0.7 lbf⋅ft)
28. Install O-rings (78, 79) and backup rings (77, 80) into piston (76).
19. Install the shaft (30) assembly into body (27) by using a plastic hammer. IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the sliding surface of swash plate (34). 20. Install steel balls (31) (2 used), springs (32) (2 used), pistons (33) (2 used), and swash plate (34) into body (27). NOTE: As for steel ball (31), refer to W3-2-4. 21. Install collar (40), spring (41), and washer (42) into rotor (39) in this order. 22. Push washer (42) and spring (41) by using a press and install retaining ring (43).
27. Install O-ring (82) and backup ring (83) into collar (81).
81
83 82 80
78
79 77 76
W1LD-03-02-002
29. Install the collar (81) assembly to the piston (76) assembly. 30. Tap and install the piston (76) assembly into body (27) by using a plastic hammer evenly. 31. Install O-ring (46) to body (27). 32. Install springs (71) (8 used) onto piston (76).
23. Install pins (38) (3 used) into rotor (39). Place holder (37) onto pin (38). 24. Install plungers (35) (9 used) and the retainer plate (36) assembly to rotor (39). 25. Install the rotor (39) assembly to body (27).
W3-2-17
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device
72
27
58
2 1 3
70 44
84
T1LD-03-05-001
W3-2-18
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device IMPORTANT: Apply grease onto the contacting surfaces of brake valve body (70) and valve plate (44) in order not to fall off. 33. Install O-rings (72) (3 used) and valve plate (44) to brake valve body (70). IMPORTANT: When placing brake valve body (70) onto body (27) while aligning the pin (58) holes, check if the clearance between body (27) and brake valve body (70) is equal to that recorded when disassembling. In case the clearance is not equal, the parts are not installed correctly. Disassemble and assemble the parts again. 34. Install brake valve body (70) on body (27) with socket bolts (84) (8 used). : 8 mm : 63.7±4.9 N⋅m (6.5±0.5 kgf⋅m, 47±3.6 lbf⋅ft) 35. Add gear oil through the plug (1) mounting hole on cover (3). Tighten plug (1). : 6 mm : 22.6±1.0 N⋅m (2.3±0.1 kgf⋅m, 16.5±0.7 lbf⋅ft) NOTE: Mitsubishi Diamond Hypoid Gear Oil #90 or equivalent (GL-4 or equivalent) Gear oil amount: 0.9 L (1.0 US qt)
W3-2-19
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE BRAKE VALVE 73
74
57 87
59
86 56
60
55
54 70
53 69 49 75
52 50
74
51 T1LD-03-05-009
61
62 67
66
65
64
63 T1LD-03-05-010
49 - Sleeve 50 - Spool 51 52 53 54 55 -
Spring Spring Seat Plug Cap (2 Used) O-Ring (2 Used)
56 - Spring (2 Used) 57 - Counterbalance Valve (2 Used) 59 - Plug (2 Used) 60 - O-Ring (2 Used) 61 - Plug (2 Used) 62 - O-Ring (2 Used) 63 - Spring (2 Used)
64 - Spring Seat (2 Used) 65 - Spool
73 - Orifice (2 Used) 74 - Plug (3 Used)
66 67 68 69 70 -
75 - Orifice (4 Used) 86 - Collar (2 Used) 87 - Orifice (2 Used)
NOTE: As for the item with *, refer to W3-2-4.
W3-2-20
Valve Body Socket Bolt (3 Used) *O-Ring (3 Used) Plug Brake Valve Body
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device Disassemble Brake Valve
Assemble Brake Valve
1. Remove plugs (61) (2 used), springs (63) (2 used), spring seat (64) and spool (65) from valve body (66). : 8 mm
1. Install plugs (59) (2 used) to brake valve body (70). : 12 mm : 31.9±2.45 N⋅m (3.3±0.2 kgf⋅m, 23.5±1.8 lbf⋅ft)
2. Remove socket bolts (67) (3 used) and remove valve body (66) from brake valve body (70). : 6 mm 3. Remove plug (53), spring seat (52) and spring (51) from brake valve body (70). : 8 mm 4. Remove plug (69), sleeve (49) and spool (50) from brake valve body (70). : 22 mm 5. Remove caps (54) (2 used) from brake valve body (70) and remove springs (56) (2 used). : 36 mm NOTE: Counterbalance valve (57) cannot be disassembled. When removing counterbalance valve (57), do not fall off collars (86) (2 used). 6. Remove counterbalance valves (57) (2 used) in brake valve body (70) straightly. Remove collars (86) (2 used) from counterbalance valve (57). 7. Remove plug (59) from brake valve body (70). : 8 mm
2. Install counterbalance valves (57) (2 used), collars (86) (2 used) and springs (56) (2 used) to brake valve body (70) with caps (54) (2 used). : 36 mm : 240±5.0 N⋅m (24.5±0.5 kgf⋅m, 175±3.7 lbf⋅ft) 3. Install plug (69) to brake valve body (70). : 22 mm : 53.9±4.9 N⋅m (5.5±0.5 kgf⋅m, 40±3.6 lbf⋅ft) 4. Install spool (50), sleeve (49), spring (51) and spring seat (52) to brake valve body (70). Tighten plug (53) to brake valve body (70). : 8 mm : 53.9±4.9 N⋅m (5.5±0.5 kgf⋅m, 40±3.6 lbf⋅ft) 5. Install valve body (66) to brake valve body (70) with socket bolts (67) (3 used). : 6 mm : 36.9±1.9 N⋅m (3.8±0.2 kgf⋅m, 27±1.4 lbf⋅ft) 6. Install spool (65), spring seat (64) and spring (63) to valve body (66). Tighten plug (61) to valve body (66). : 8 mm : 53.9±4.9 N⋅m (5.5±0.5 kgf⋅m, 40±3.6 lbf⋅ft)
W3-2-21
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device MAINTENANCE STANDARD Travel Motor 1. Clearance between plunger outer diameter and rotor inner bore (D-d): 0.04 mm (0.002 in) or less.
D
Rotor
d
Plunger
W507-02-04-009
2. Clearance between plunger and shoe bottom δ: 0.4 mm (0.016 in) or less.
δ Plunger
Shoe
3. Wear amount of sliding surface against valve plate of rotor Check that there are no damage, wear, or seizure. Damage or wear amount is 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less. 4. Wear amount of sliding surface against rotor of valve plate. Check that there are no damage, wear, or seizure. Damage or wear amount is 0.02 mm (0.0008 in) or less.
W3-2-22
W107-02-06-141
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device
Sprocket
C
B
A W1LD-03-02-003
Unit: mm (in) Standard
Allowable Limit
A
33.0 (1.30)
30 (1.18)
B
380.3 (15)
368 (14.5)
C D
423.99 (16.7) 26.0 (1.02)
412 (16.2)
Remedy Bulid up and finishing
24 (0.94)
W3-2-23
D W1LD-03-02-004
UNDERCARRIAGE / Travel Device (Blank)
W3-2-24
UNDERCARRIAGE / Center Joint REMOVE AND INSTALL CENTER JOINT Removal IMPORTANT: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.) 1. Lay down the canopy assembly to the front side.
1
2
NOTE: As for the procedure to lay down the canopy assembly to the front side, refer to the section for solenoid valve.
1
IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the removed hoses for assembling. 2. Remove hoses (1) (9 used) from center joint (2). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm, 22 mm, 27 mm
W1M9-02-05-001
4
3. Remove bolts (4) (2 used) from center joint (2) in the frame. Remove lock plate (3). : 19 mm
3
4. Remove bolts (5) (4 used) from the frame. Remove under cover (6). : 17 mm 5
5. Remove hoses (7) (10 used) from center joint (2). Cap the open ends. : 22 mm, 27 mm CAUTION: Center joint (2) weight: 17 kg (37 lb)
6
6. Install eyebolt to center joint (2). Attach a wire rope. Hoist center joint (2) and take up the slack of wire rope. Remove bolts (8) (4 used). Slowly lower and remove center joint (2). : 19 mm
W1M9-03-03-003
7
2
8
W3-3-1
7
W1M9-03-03-004
UNDERCARRIAGE / Center Joint Installation
7
CAUTION: Center joint (2) weight: 17 kg (37 lb) 1. Install center joint (2) onto the frame with bolts (8) (4 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft)
2
2. Install hoses (7) (10 used) in the spindle side to center joint (2). : 22 mm : 39 N⋅m (4.0 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft) : 27 mm : 78 N⋅m (8.0 kgf⋅m, 58 lbf⋅ft)
8
W1M9-03-03-004
7
3. Install under cover (6) onto the frame with bolts (5) (4 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
5
4. Install lock plate (3) onto center joint (2) in the frame with bolts (4) (2 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft) 5. Install hoses (1) (9 used) in the body side to center joint (2). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) : 22 mm : 39 N⋅m (4.0 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft) : 27 mm : 78 N⋅m (8.0 kgf⋅m, 58 lbf⋅ft)
6
1
W1M9-03-03-003
2
6. Return the canopy assembly to the original position. NOTE: As for the procedure to return the canopy assembly, refer to the section for solenoid valve.
1
IMPORTANT: After completing the work, start the engine and check for any oil leaks.
W1M9-02-05-001
4
W3-3-2
3
UNDERCARRIAGE / Center Joint (Blank)
W3-3-3
UNDERCARRIAGE / Center Joint DISASSEMBLE CENTER JOINT
1 2 3 4 5 6
13 7
8
9
15
14 10 11 12
W1M9-03-03-001
1234-
Socket Bolt (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Retaining Ring
5678-
Thrust Washer Body Plug (5 Used) PF1/8 Plug PF1/4
910 11 12 -
W3-3-4
Oil Seal (7 Used) O-Ring Backup Ring Dust Seal
13 - Spindle 14 - Plug (5 Used) PT1/8 15 - Plug (4 Used) PT1/4
UNDERCARRIAGE / Center Joint Disassemble Center Joint CAUTION: Center joint weight: 17 kg (37 lb) 1. Clamp the center joint in a vise. 2. Remove socket bolts (1) (4 used) from body (6). Remove cover (2). : 6 mm 3. Remove O-ring (3), retaining ring (4) and thrust washer (5) from body (6). 4. Install special tool onto body (6) with bolts (M8, Pitch 1.25 mm) (2 used). : 13 ă&#x17D;&#x153;
IMPORTANT: Do not damage the seal sliding surface of spindle (13). When laying spindle (13) horizontally on the ground, do not damage or contaminate the spindle surfaces with hard materials such as sand. Put the matching marks on body (6) and spindle (13). 5. Remove body (6) from spindle (13). IMPORTANT: For easy removal, use the pins (2 used) when removing oil seals (9). Do not damage the seal groove by the pins. 6. Remove oil seals (7) (7 used) from body (6).
1
6
W1M9-03-03-005
W1M9-03-03-006
7. Remove dust seal (12), backup ring (11) and O-ring (10) from body (6).
W3-3-5
UNDERCARRIAGE / Center Joint ASSEMBLE CENTER JOINT 1
2
5
3
4
9 6
7
8
10 11 12 13
W1M9-03-03-002
1234-
Socket Bolt (4 Used) Cover O-Ring Retaining Ring
5678-
Thrust Washer Body Plug (5 Used) PF1/8 Plug PF1/4
910 11 12 -
NOTE: As for the item with *, refer to W3-3-4.
W3-3-6
Oil Seal (7 Used) O-Ring Backup Ring Dust Seal
13 - Spindle 14 - *Plug (3 Used) PF1/8 15 - *Plug (4 Used) PF1/4
UNDERCARRIAGE / Center Joint Assemble Center Joint IMPORTANT: Before installing kinds of seals into the seating grooves, apply grease or hydraulic oil onto the seals. After installing O-ring (10), dust seal (12) and oil seals (9), apply grease onto the lips. CAUTION: Center joint weight: 17 kg (37 lb) 1. Install O-ring (10), backup ring (11), dust seal (12) and oil seals (9) (7 used) to body (6).
IMPORTANT: Install retaining ring (4) with the chamfered surface facing to inside (downward). Check that retaining ring (4) is correctly installed. 5. Install retaining ring (4) to spindle (13). Install O-ring (3) to body (6). 6. Install cover (2) onto body (6) with socket bolts (1) (4 used). : 6 mm : 20 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 15 lbf⋅ft)
IMPORTANT: Align the matching marks made when disassembling. 2. Place spindle (13) onto a workbench. Install body (6) to spindle (13). IMPORTANT: When installing body (6), face body (6) upward. Push spindle (13) into body (6) slowly. If spindle (13) is rapidly pushed in, the seal may be damaged. 3. Lightly tap and install body (6) to spindle (13). 4. Install thrust washer (5) onto body (6).
W3-3-7
UNDERCARRIAGE / Center Joint (Blank)
W3-3-8
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster REMOVE AND ADJUSTER
INSTALL
TRACK
CAUTION: Track adjuster weight: 16 kg (35 lb) Before removing and installing the track adjuster, the tracks and front idler must be removed first. As for removal and installation of the track and the front idler, refer to REMOVE AND INSTALL TRACK (W3-7-1) and REMOVE AND INSTALL FRONT IDLER (W3-5-1). In this section, the procedure starts on the premise that the tracks and front idler have already been removed.
2
1
Removal 1. Remove track adjuster (1) from track frame (2) by using a crane or forklift. 1
W1LA-03-04-001
Installation
3
2
IMPORTANT: Check that track adjuster (1) is installed in the hole on track frame (2) and bracket (3) is installed completely. Check that bracket (3) comes into contact with the end of plate (4). 1. Install track adjuster (1) to track frame (2) as illustrated.
4 W1M9-03-04-001
W3-4-1
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster DISASSEMBLE TRACK ADJUSTER
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
W1LD-03-04-004
7
9
3
6
W1LD-03-04-003
10
1234-
Fitting Valve Cylinder Lock Bolt
5678-
Bracket Spring Rod Nut
11
12
9 - Retaining Ring 10 - Spacer 11 - Dust Seal
W3-4-2
13
12 - Ring 13 - O-Ring (1B, P40)
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster Disassemble Track Adjuster CAUTION: Special tool weight: 225 kg (496 lb) Use special tool (ST 4943) when assembling/disassembling the track adjuster. As the spring force of track adjuster is extremely large, carry out the disassembly and assembly work carefully. Inspect special tool for any damage thoroughly in order to perform the work safely.
CAUTION: Plate (ST 4140) weight: 36 kg (79 lb) 2. Loosen the nuts (4 used) and remove plate (ST 4140). : 46 mm
Plate (ST 4140)
1. Place an oil jack (30 ton) between the holder and base of special tool (ST 4943).
Nut W105-03-04-007
Special Tool (ST4943)
3. Attach a wire rope onto the track adjuster. Hoist and set the track adjuster onto the holder of special tool.
Holder Track Adjuster Oil Jack
Base W105-03-04-006
Holder
W105-03-04-009
4. Place plate (ST 4140) on special tool (ST 4943) in order to cover the track adjuster.
Plate (ST 4140)
Special Tool (ST4943) Track Adjuster
W105-03-04-011
W3-4-3
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster
6
5
4
3
2
8
W1LD-03-04-004
3
6
W1LD-03-04-003
W3-4-4
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster 5. Operate an oil jack. Jack up the holder by the specified amount (64 mm) (2.52 in). NOTE: Spring free length: 302 mm (11.9 in) set length of Spring: 202.2mm (7.96 in)
8. Remove lock bolt (4) and remove nut (2) from cylinder (3). : 13 mm, 36 mm
Holder
8
3
4
Oil Jack
W105-03-04-013
IMPORTANT: Loosen and remove valve (2) slowly because of the pressure of cylinder (3). 6. Remove valve (2) from cylinder (3). : 19 mm CAUTION: Plate (ST 4140) weight: 36 kg (79 lb) 7. Install the nuts (4 used) on plate (ST 4140) and secure the track adjuster. Operate the oil jack and jack up until the clearance between bracket (5) and nut (8) is about 10 mm (0.39 in). : 46 mm
W105-03-04-014
CAUTION: Plate (ST 4140) weight: 36 kg (79 lb) Remove the nut and plate (ST 4140) after lowering the oil jack. If not lowering the oil jack, bracket (5) and spring (6) fly off by the reaction of spring (6). 9. Lower the oil jack slowly. Remove the nuts (4 used) and plate (ST 4140). Remove bracket (5) from cylinder (3).
Plate (ST 4140) Nut
Plate (ST 4140)
5 6
W105-03-04-012
W105-03-04-016
W3-4-5
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster
7
6
3
W1LD-03-04-004
7
9
3
6
W1LD-03-04-003
10
11
W3-4-6
12
13
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster 10. Install eyebolt (M16, Pitch 1.5 mm) to cylinder (3). Remove the spring (6) assembly from special tool. 6 Special Tool
W105-03-04-017
11. Remove spring (6) from cylinder (3). 12. Remove rod (7) from cylinder (3). 13. Remove retaining ring (9), Spacer (10), and dust seal (11) from cylinder (3). 14. Remove ring (12) and O-ring (13) from cylinder (3).
W3-4-7
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster ASSEMBLE TRACK ADJUSTER
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
W1LD-03-04-004
7
9
3
6
Chamber B
W1LD-03-04-003
10
1234-
Fitting Valve Cylinder Lock Bolt
5678-
Bracket Spring Rod Nut
11
12
9 - Retaining Ring 10 - Spacer 11 - Dust Seal
W3-4-8
13
12 - Ring 13 - O-Ring (1B, P40)
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster Assemble Track Adjuster 5. Install spring (6) on cylinder (3). Place the spring (6) assembly on special tool (ST 4944).
1. Install O-ring (13) and ring (12) to cylinder (3). 2. Apply hydraulic oil onto spacer (10) and retaining ring (9). Install dust seal (11) with the lips of dust seal (11) facing to the retaining ring (9) side. Install dust seal (11), spacer (10), and retaining ring (9) on cylinder (3). 3. Apply hydraulic oil to cylinder (3) and rod (7). Fill grease in chamber B of cylinder (3). Push rod (7) in cylinder (3) and release the pressure in cylinder (3) completely.
ST 4944
4. Install eyebolt (M16, Pitch 1.5 mm) to cylinder (3).
W105-03-04-017
6. Install bracket (5) on cylinder (3). CAUTION: Plate (ST 4140) weight: 36 kg (79 lb) 7. Hoist and place plate (ST 4140) in order to cover the track adjuster. Secure with the nuts (4 used). : 46 mm
Plate (ST 4140)
W105-03-04-012
W3-4-9
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster
7
6
5
4
3
2
1
8
W1LD-03-04-004
7
9
3
6
W1LD-03-04-003
10
11
W3-4-10
12
13
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster 8. Operate the oil jack and push spring (6) to the specified length. Rubber crawler: 202.2 mm (7.96 in) Iron crawler: 238.2 mm (9.38 in)
CAUTION: Plate (ST 4140) weight: 36 kg (79 lb) 10. Lower the oil jack and loosen the nuts (4 used). Remove plate (ST 4140). : 46 mm
6 Plate (ST 4140)
Oil Jack
W105-03-04-011
W105-03-04-026
11. Attach a wire rope onto the track adjuster. Remove the track adjuster from special tool.
9. Install nut (8) on cylinder (3). Install lock bolt (4) on nut (8). : 36 mm : 13 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) 8
3
Track adjuster
4
W105-03-04-027
W105-03-04-014
12. Remove eyebolt from cylinder (3). Install valve (2). : 19 mm
W3-4-11
UNDERCARRIAGE / Track Adjuster (Blank)
W3-4-12
UNDERCARRIAGE / Front Idler REMOVE AND INSTALL FRONT IDLER Before removing and installing the front idler, the rubber track must be removed first. For removal and installation of the rubber track, refer to “REMOVE AND INSTALL TRACK” section. In this section, the procedure starts on the premise that the rubber track has already been removed. Removal CAUTION: Front idler weight: 36 kg (79 lb) If the track adjuster is broken, the parts may fly out. Do not stand in front of the track adjuster (the direction to shaft).
W1M3-03-05-001
1
1. Remove the front idler (1) assembly from track frame (2). Insert a pry bar between front idler (1) and track frame (2). Hoist and remove front idler (1) with the yoke. CAUTION: When storing the front idler for a while, place the front idler horizontally on wooden blocks.
W1LD-03-05-003
2
Installation 1. Install the front idler in the reverse procedures when removing. • Clean and apply grease onto the sliding part in track frame and yoke.
Track Frame Sliding Part
W1M9-03-05-001
W3-5-1
UNDERCARRIAGE / Front Idler DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE FRONT IDLER 3
4
5
6
7
2
1
8
9
11
1 - Axle 2 - Bushing (2 Used) 3 - Idler
10
4 - Yoke (2 Used) 5 - O-Ring (2 Used) 6 - Plate
4
7 - Cover 8 - Bolt (2 Used) 9 - Bolt (4 Used)
W3-5-2
W1LD-03-05-002
10 - Bolt (2 Used) 11 - Floating Seal (2 Used)
UNDERCARRIAGE / Front Idler Disassemble
Assemble
1. Remove bolts (8) (2 used) and remove cover (7) from plate (6). : 19 mm
1. Install bushings (2) (2 used) into idler (3) by using a press. 2. Install axle (1) to idler (3).
2. Remove bolts (9) (4 used) and plate (6) from yokes (4) (2 used). : 19 mm 3. Remove bolts (10) (2 used) from yoke (4) (2 used). : 17 mm IMPORTANT: For handling of floating seals (11) (2 used), refer to the section “Precautions for Floating Seal Handling” on page W1-1-4. 4. Remove yokes (4) (2 used) and floating seals (11) (2 used) from idler (3). 5. Remove O-rings (5) (2 used) from axle (1). 6. Remove axle (1) from idler (3) by using a press. IMPORTANT: Do not remove bushings (2) (2 used) unless necessary. 7. Weld four places, 90 degrees apart from each others on the bushing (2) (2 used) bore as illustrated. Shrink and remove bushings (2). 90°
3. Install O-ring (5) (2 used) to axle (1). IMPORTANT: For handling of floating seals (11) (2 used), refer to the section “Precautions for Floating Seal Handling” on page W1-1-4. 4. Install floating seals (11) (2 used) and yokes (4) (2 used) into idler (3). 5. Apply liquid adhesive onto bolts (8, 9, 10). Install bolts (10) (2 used) to yokes (4) (2 used). : 17 mm : 65 N⋅m (6.5 kgf⋅m, 47 lbf⋅ft) 6. Install plate (6) to yokes (4) (2 used) with bolts (9) (4 used). : 19 mm : 110.5±12.5 N⋅m (11.5±1.3 kgf⋅m, 83±9.4 lbf⋅ft)
7. Install cover (7) to plate (6) with bolts (8) (2 used). : 19 mm : 110.5±12.5 N⋅m (11.5±1.3 kgf⋅m, 83±9.4 lbf⋅ft)
90°
W105-03-05-012
W3-5-3
UNDERCARRIAGE / Front Idler MAINTENANCE STANDARD
C D F
E
A B W503-03-05-001
Unit: mm (in) Standard
Allowable Limit
A
39 (1.54)
−
B
75 (2.95)
−
C
42 (1.65)
−
D
335 (13.2)
−
E
9 (0.35)
−
F
377 (14.8)
−
Remedy
Cladding by welding and finish, or replace
Axle and Bushing
Axle
Unit: mm (in) Standard
Allowable Limit
Outer Dia.
35.0 (1.38)
−
Inner Dia.
35.0 (1.38)
−
Flange Thickness
3.5 (0.14)
−
Bushing
NOTE: Lubrication Oil Engine Oil: SAE30 CD Class. Engine Oil Amount: 20 mL (0.02 US qt)
W3-5-4
Remedy
Replace
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper And Lower Roller REMOVE AND INSTALL UPPER ROLLER Removal
1
CAUTION: Grease pressure in the track adjuster is high. Do not loosen valve (1) quickly or too much as valve (1) may fly off or high-pressure grease in the track adjuster may gush out. Keep body parts and face away from valve (1) and loosen valve (1) carefully. Do not loosen grease fitting (2).
W105-03-07-002
2
1
Grease Outlet
IMPORTANT: Remove gravel or mud between sprockets and tracks before loosening valve (1). It is enough to loosen valve (1) by only one turn. 1. Loosen valve (1) on the track adjuster. Drain grease and loosen the track tension. : 19 mm M1LA-07-036
IMPORTANT: Use a nonskid cloth between track frame (3) and oil jack (4) in order not to slip.
2. Jack up track (6) by using oil jack (4) in order to get clearance between track (6) and upper roller (5). Place wooden blocks between track frame (3) and track (6).
1
3. Remove bolt (7) and remove upper roller (5). : 22 mm W507-03-06-001
6
Wooden Block
5
7
3
4
W507-03-06-003
W3-6-1
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper And Lower Roller Installation 1. Install upper roller (5) onto track frame (3) with bolt (7). : 22 mm : 137 N⋅m (14 kgf⋅m, 101 lbf⋅ft)
6
Wooden Block
5
7
3
2. Remove the wooden blocks. 4
3. Lower oil jack (4). Lower track (6) and remove oil jack (4).
W507-03-06-003
4. Tighten valve (1) on the track adjuster. : 19 mm : 88 N⋅m (9.0 kgf⋅m, 65 lbf⋅ft)
1
2
CAUTION: Support the jacked up machine firmly by using wooden blocks. 5. Jack up the track to be adjusted and rotate the track in reverse direction a little. 6. Apply grease through valve fitting (2) and adjust the track tension. Track sag specifications (A): 10 to 15 mm (0.39 to 0.59 in) (Rubber track)
W507-03-06-005
Lower Roller
A 90 to 110°
Rubber Track M503-05-050
7. Jack up the machine by using the front attachment. Remove the wooden blocks under the track frame.
W3-6-2
M1M7-04-006
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper And Lower Roller REMOVE AND INSTALL LOWER ROLLER Removal CAUTION: Support the jacked up machine firmly by using wooden blocks. 90 to 110°
1. Jack up the machine by using the front attachment.
M1M7-04-006
CAUTION: Grease pressure in the track adjuster is high. Do not loosen valve (1) quickly or too much as valve (1) may fly off or high-pressure grease in the track adjuster may spurt out. It is enough to loosen valve (1) by only one turn. Keep body parts and face away from valve (1) and loosen valve (1) carefully. Do not loosen grease fitting (2).
2
1
IMPORTANT: Remove gravel or mud from the sprocket. 2. Loosen valve (1) in the track adjuster slowly. Drain grease until the clearance is enough to remove lower roller (4) in the track. : 19 mm
Grease Outlet
M1LA-07-036
3. After loosening the track, tighten valve (1) as the original condition. : 19 mm : 88 N⋅m (9.0 kgf⋅m, 65 lbf⋅ft) 4. Remove bolts (3) (2 used) and remove lower roller (4). : 22 mm
3
M588-07-052
4
W3-6-3
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper And Lower Roller Installation • The work should be carried out with the track being jacked up.
1
1. Install lower roller (4) under the track frame. Align the bolt (3) holes.
2
2. Apply LOCTITE #262 on bolts (3) (2 used). Install lower roller (4) with bolts (3) (2 used). : 22 mm : 156.9 to 215.8 N⋅m (16 to 22 kgf⋅m, 116 to 159 lbf⋅ft) 3
3. Apply grease through valve fitting (2) and adjust the track tension. NOTE: The joint part of track (rubber track) should be in the center when measuring the rubber track tension. Turn the rubber track in reverse direction so that the rubber track sag faces downward.
M588-07-052
4
Track sag specifications (A): 10 to 15 mm (0.39 to 0.59 in) (Rubber track) Lower Roller
A
Rubber Track Side a
M503-05-050 W567-03-07-007
Joint Part
4. Jack up the machine by using the front attachment. Remove the wooden blocks under the track frame. Joint Part M102-07-075
W3-6-4
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper And Lower Roller (Blank)
W3-6-5
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper And Lower Roller DISASSEMBLE AND ASSEMBLE LOWER ROLLER
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
9
W1LA-03-06-001
1 - Floating Seal 2 - Roller 3 - Bushing (2 Used)
4 - Axle 5 - Floating Seal
6 - Collar 7 - O-Ring
W3-6-6
8 - Plug 9 - Stopper Ring
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper And Lower Roller Assemble Lower Roller
Disassemble Lower Roller 1. Remove plug (8) from collar (6). Drain engine oil from the roller. : 5 mm IMPORTANT: The collar (6) without axle (4) and the plug (8) cannot be removed. Replace the parts with the axle (4) assembly. 2. Remove stopper ring (9) from collar (6). Remove the axle (4) assembly from roller (2) through collar (6) side by using a press. IMPORTANT: As for the handling of floating seal (1, 5), refer to “Precautions for Floating Seal Handling” on page W1-1-4. 3. Remove collar (6) from roller (2). Remove floating seals (1, 5) from the both sides of roller (2). IMPORTANT: Do not remove bushings (3) (2 used) from roller (2). In case bushing (3) must be replaced, replace the roller (2) assembly.
IMPORTANT: As for the handling of floating seal (1, 5), refer to “Precautions for Floating Seal Handling” on page W1-1-4. 1. Install floating seal (1) to roller (2) and the axle (4) assembly. Install the axle (4) assembly in roller (2) through the side installing floating seal (1) by using a press. 2. Install floating seal (5) to roller (2) and collar (6). 3. Install O-ring (7) onto axle (4). Align axle (4) and the stopper ring (9) mounting groove of collar (6). Install collar (6) and stopper ring (9) onto axle (4). 4. Add engine oil 35 mL (SAE30, class CD) through the plug (8) hole on collar (6). 5. Apply LOCTITE #503 to plug (8). Install plug (8) to collar (6). : 5 mm : 9.8 N⋅m (1.0 kgf⋅m, 7.2 lbf⋅ft)
W3-6-7
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper And Lower Roller MAINTENANCE STANDARD
Upper Roller A
B
W1LA-03-06-002
Unit: mm (in)
A B
Standard 100 (3.94) 70 (2.76)
Allowable Limit -
IMPORTANT: The upper roller cannot be disassembled. Replace as an assembly. Lubricant Oil Engine Oil SAE30 CD class. Engine Oil Amount: 30 mL (0.03 US qt)
W3-6-8
Remedy Replace
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper And Lower Roller
Lower Roller
B A
C
D
E
W1LA-03-06-001
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
Allowable Limit
A
41 (1.61)
[35 (1.38)]
B
110 (4.33)
-
C
42 (1.65)
-
D
95 (3.74)
87 (3.43)
E
123 (4.84)
-
Remedy Cladding by welding and finishing, or replace
Axle and Bushing
Unit: mm (in)
Axle
Outer Dia. Inner Dia.
Bushing
Flange Thickness
NOTE: Values in [
Standard 35.0 (1.38) 35.0 (1.38)
Allowable Limit -
Remedy
-
Replace
3.5 (0.14)
-
] are just for reference.
Lubricant Oil Engine Oil SAE30 CD class. Engine Oil Amount: 70 mL (0.07 US qt)
W3-6-9
UNDERCARRIAGE / Upper and Lower Roller (Blank)
W3-6-10
UNDERCARRIAGE/ Track REMOVE AND INSTALL TRACK Removal CAUTION: Rubber track weight: 238 kg (530 lb) 90ď˝&#x17E;110Âş
CAUTION: Support the jacked up machine firmly by using wooden blocks. 1. Jack up the machine by using the front attachment.
M1M7-04-006
CAUTION: Grease pressure in the track adjuster is high. Do not loosen valve (1) quickly or too much as valve (1) may fly off or high-pressure grease in the track adjuster may gush out. It is enough to loosen valve (1) by only one turn. Keep body parts and face away from valve (1) and loosen valve (1) carefully. Do not loosen grease fitting (2).
2
1
Grease Outlet
IMPORTANT: Remove gravel or mud from the sprocket. 2. Loosen valve (1) in the track adjuster slowly and drain grease. : 19 mm
M1LA-07-036
NOTE: If rotating the sprocket with valve (1) loosened, removal and installation of the track is easy. 3. Insert a steel pipe into the track. Rotate the sprocket in reverse direction. Float the track from the front idler by using the steel pipe. Slide the track transversely and remove the track.
Rotating Direction
Steel Pipe
W3-7-1
M503-07-062
UNDERCARRIAGE/ Track Installation CAUTION: Rubber track weight: 238 kg (530 lb) CAUTION: Support the jacked up machine firmly by using wooden blocks.
Rotating Direction
1. Jack up the machine by using the front attachment. Steel Pipe
2. Mesh the sprocket with the track and install the track to the front idler. Rotate the sprocket in reverse direction and push the track.
M503-07-062
1
IMPORTANT: Check that the track is securely engaged with the sprocket and front idler. 3. Insert a steel pipe into the track. Rotate the sprocket in reverse direction. Attach the track onto the front idler.
2
4. Tighten valve (1). : 19 mm : 88 N⋅m (9.0 kgf⋅m, 65 lbf⋅ft) 5. Apply grease through valve fitting (2) and adjust the track tension.
M588-07-052
NOTE: The joint part of track (rubber track) should be in the center when measuring the rubber track tension. Turn the track in reverse direction so that the track sag faces downward.
a
Track sag specifications (A): 10 to 15 mm (0.39 to 0.59 in) (Rubber track) Lower Roller Joint Part
M1LG-07-021
A
Joint Part
Rubber Track Side
M503-05-050
W3-7-2
M102-07-075
UNDERCARRIAGE/ Track MAINTENANCE STANDARD Rubber Track Crack 1. Outside of Rubber Track If there is a crack on lug base (1) in depth of 3 mm (0.12 in) or more, repair the track. If there is a crack between lugs (2) with depth of 3 mm (0.12 in) or more, repair track. If there is a crack on lugs (3) or between lugs (2) that reaches to steel code (5) or steel core (4) with length of 30 mm (1.2 in) or more, immediately repair track.
1
4 5
2
3
2. Inside of Rubber Track (Roller Side) If there is a crack that reaches to steel code (5) or steel core (4), immediately repair track.
W190-03-07-001
4
Lug Wear 1. If the lug height (A) is less than 5 mm (0.2 in), replace the rubber track as an assembly.
5
W190-03-07-002
Lower Roller
Rubber Track
2. If any part of steel code (5) appeared on track, replace the worn rubber track as an assembly.
A
Lug
W190-03-07-003
5 W190-03-07-004
W3-7-3
UNDERCARRIAGE/ Track
A
A 2 3
1 A-A
1 2 3
Standard 25 (0.98) 47 (1.85) 23 (0.91)
W1LA-03-07-001
Unit: mm (in) Remedy
Allowable Limit 5 (0.2) 60 (2.36) 27 (1.06)
Replace
Rubber Track and Steel Code Cutting 1. When either of the two rows of steel code (5) has cut, replace the rubber track as an assembly.
5
Steel Core Separation
W190-03-07-005
1. When any steel core (4) has separated, replace the rubber track as an assembly.
4 W190-03-07-006
W3-7-4
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
SECTION 4
FRONT ATTACHMENT CONTENTS Group 1 Front Attachment Remove and Install Front Attachment ..... W4-1-1 Maintenance Standards .......................... W4-1-6
Group 2 Cylinder Remove and Install Cylinders ................. W4-2-1 Disassemble Boom Cylinder................. W4-2-14 Assemble Boom Cylinder ..................... W4-2-18 Disassemble Arm Cylinder .................. W4-2-24 Assemble Arm Cylinder ........................ W4-2-28 Disassemble Bucket Cylinder ............. W4-2-34 Assemble Bucket Cylinder .................... W4-2-38 Disassemble Boom Swing Cylinder....... W4-2-44 Assemble Boom Swing Cylinder ........... W4-2-48 Disassemble Blade Cylinder ................. W4-2-54 Assemble Blade Cylinder .................... W4-2-58 Maintenance Standards ....................... W4-2-64
1M9W-4-1
(Blank)
1M9W-4-2
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Front Attachment REMOVE AND ATTACHMENT
INSTALL
FRONT
Removal 1. Remove bolt (5). Remove cover (3) from boom cylinder (2). : 19 mm
1 2
CAUTION: Boom cylinder (2) weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 55 kg (110 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 60 kg (130 lb) IMPORTANT: As for handling of the nylon slings, refer to “Precautions for the Handling of Nylon Slings” on page W1-1-5. 2. Attach a nylon sling onto boom cylinder (2). Hold boom cylinder (2) lightly. Remove bolt (1) and pin (4). : 22 mm NOTE: When pin (4) cannot be removed, start the engine and operate the boom lever in order to adjust the hole position of boom cylinder (2) piston rod end.
5
4
3
W1LD-04-01-002
2 Wire
3. Operate the boom lever and retract the boom cylinder (3). 4. Place the boom cylinder (2) rod side on the support. In order not to extend the rod, pass a wire through the rod hole and secure the rod. Stop the engine. NOTE: Height of support: 700 mm (27.6 in) or more.
W4-1-1
W554-02-03-007
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Front Attachment ZAXIS40U-2
CAUTION: Front attachment weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 555 kg (1230 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 582 kg (1290 lb)
Boom Center of Gravity
5. Attach a nylon sling onto the boom. Take up slack of nylon sling.
B
Front Attachment Center of Gravity Arm and Bucket Center of Gravity
A
W1M9-04-02-001
ZAXIS50U-2 Boom Center of Gravity
B
NOTE: Attach an identification tag onto the removed hoses for assembling. 6. Remove hoses (6) (6 used). Cap the open ends. : 22 mm, 27 mm
Front Attachment Center of Gravity Arm and Bucket Center of Gravity
A W1M9-04-02-002
Unit: mm (in) ZAXIS40U-2
ZAXIS50U-2
A
2579 (101.5)
2660 (104.7)
B
867 (34.1)
783 (30.8)
6
6
W4-1-2
W1M9-04-02-006
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Front Attachment 7. Remove nuts (9) (2 used) of bolt (7) from boom foot pin (7). Remove bolt (7). : 22 mm
7 8
9
CAUTION: Front attachment weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 555 kg (1230 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 582 kg (1290 lb) 8. Remove boom foot pin (8). 9. Hoist and remove the front attachment. Remove the thrust plate from left and right sides of the boom foot pin.
W4-1-3
W1M9-04-02-008
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Front Attachment Installation
ZAXIS40U-2
Boom Center of Gravity
CAUTION: Front attachment weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 555 kg (1230 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 582 kg (1290 lb) 1. Hoist the front attachment. Align the boom foot pin hole with that on swing post. Insert the thrust plate to both right and left of the boom foot part and adjust the right and left clearances within 1 mm (0.039 in).
B
A Front Attachment Center of Gravity
Arm and Bucket Center of Gravity
W1M9-04-02-001
ZAXIS50U-2 Boom Center of Gravity
B
A
2. Align the boom foot with the mounting hole swing post. Install boom foot pin (8).
on
Front Attachment Arm and Bucket Center of Gravity Center of Gravity
IMPORTANT: Apply LOCTITE #262 onto the double nut part. Tighten the double nut so that the clearance of boss may become 2 to 3 mm (0.079 to 0.12 in). 3. Install bolt (7) and nuts (9) (2 used) to boom foot pin (8). : 22 mm : 137 N⋅m (14 kgf⋅m, 101 lbf⋅ft)
W1M9-04-02-002
Unit: mm (in) ZAXIS40U-2
ZAXIS50U-2
A
2579 (101.5)
2660 (104.7)
B
867 (34.1)
783 (30.8) 7 8
9
W1M9-04-02-008
W4-1-4
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Front Attachment 4. Install hoses (6) (6 used). : 22 mm : 39 N⋅m (4.0 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft) : 27 mm : 78 N⋅m (8.0 kgf⋅m, 58 lbf⋅ft) CAUTION: Boom cylinder weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 55 kg (120 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 60 kg (130 lb)
6
5. Remove the boom cylinder. Refer to “Install Boom Cylinder (W4-2-6). IMPORTANT: After completing the work, add hydraulic oil to the specified level. Operate every cylinder fully to the stroke end several times and release the pressure in the circuit. Check for any oil leaks.
W4-1-5
6
W1M9-04-02-006
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Front Attachment MAINTENANCE STANDARD Pin, Bushing
M
B
N L
A
W1M9-04-01-002
F
C
A B
E
D I
G
K
J
H P Q
O
W1M9-04-01-001
Unit: mm (in) Item A B C D E F G
Standard
Allowable Limit
Pin
50 (1.97)
49.0 (1.93)
Bushing (Boom)
50 (1.97)
51.5 (2.03)
Pin
50 (1.97)
49.0 (1.93)
Bushing (Boom Cylinder)
50 (1.97)
51.5 (2.03)
Pin
50 (1.97)
49.0 (1.93)
Bushing (Boom Cylinder)
50 (1.97)
51.5 (2.03)
Pin
50 (1.97)
49.0 (1.93)
Bushing (Arm)
50 (1.97)
51.5 (2.03)
Pin
45 (1.77)
44.0 (1.73)
Bushing (Arm Cylinder)
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
Pin
45 (1.77)
44.0 (1.73)
Bushing (Arm Cylinder)
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
Pin
45 (1.77)
44.0 (1.73)
Bushing (Bucket Cylinder)
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
W4-1-6
Remedy
Replace
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Front Attachment
Unit: mm (in) Item
H
I
J K L
M
Standard
Allowable Limit
Pin
45 (1.77)
44.0 (1.73)
Bushing (Bucket Cylinder)
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
Bushing (Link A)
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
Bushing (Link B)
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
Pin
45 (1.77)
44.0 (1.73)
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
Link B
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
Pin
45 (1.77)
44.0 (1.73)
Bushing (Link A)
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
Pin
45 (1.77)
44.0 (1.73)
Bushing (Arm)
45 (1.77)
46.5 (1.83)
Pin
90 (3.54)
89.0 (3.50)
Bushing (Main Frame)
90 (3.54)
91.5 (3.60)
Pin
50 (1.97)
49.0 (1.93)
50 (1.97)
51.5 (2.03)
50 (1.97)
49.0 (1.93)
50 (1.97)
51.5 (2.03)
Pin
35 (1.38)
34.0 (1.34)
Bushing (Blade)
35 (1.38)
36.5 (1.44)
Pin
55 (2.17)
54.0 (2.13)
Bushing (Blade Cylinder)
55 (2.17)
56.5 (2.22)
Pin
55 (2.17)
54.0 (2.13)
Bushing (Blade Cylinder)
55 (2.17)
56.5 (2.22)
Bushing (Arm)
Bushing (Boom Swing Cylinder) Pin
N
Bushing (Boom Swing Cylinder)
O P Q
W4-1-7
Remedy
Replace
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Front Attachment Side Cutter
C D A
B W505-04-01-001
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
Allowable Limit
A
127 (5.00)
85 (3.35)
B
163 6.42)
-
C
223 (8.78)
-
D
130 (5.12)
-
Remedy
Replace
Point
C
B
A
D
W554-04-01-003
Unit: mm (in)
Standard
Allowable Limit
A
128 (5.04)
65 (2.56)
B
56 (2.20)
-
C
62 (2.44)
-
D
51 (2.01)
-
W4-1-8
Remedy
Replace
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder REMOVE AND INSTALL CYLINDER Remove Bucket Cylinder
1 7
CAUTION: Release any pressure in the hydraulic oil tank before doing any work. (Refer to BLEED AIR FROM HYDRAULIC OIL TANK on W1-4-1.)
3 2
1. Insert wooden block (3) under the arm (2) top and between arm (2) and bucket cylinder (1).
3 W554-04-02-006
IMPORTANT: Before removing pin (7), fasten the link by using a wire in order not to fall off. 2. Remove ring (4) and stopper pin (6) from the link. Remove pin (7).
4
5
3. Secure piston rod (5) by using a wire in order not to extend.
6 Link
7 W527-04-02-002
Link
CAUTION: Bucket cylinder weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 27 kg (60 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 32 kg (71 lb) 4. Attach a nylon sling to bucket cylinder (1) and hold bucket cylinder (1).
1
8
5. Remove bolt (9). Remove pin (8) from arm (10). Remove bucket cylinder (1). : 22 mm
9
10
W571-04-02-002
1
6. Disconnect hoses (11) (2 used) from the bottom of bucket cylinder (1). Cap the open ends. : 22 mm 11
7. Hoist and remove bucket cylinder (1).
W1M9-04-02-007
W4-2-1
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Install Bucket Cylinder 8
CAUTION: Bucket cylinder (1) weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 27 kg (60 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 32 kg (71 lb)
10
9
1
1. Hoist bucket cylinder (1). Connect hoses (11) (2 used) to bucket cylinder (1). : 22 mm : 39 N⋅m (4.0 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft) 11 W1M9-04-02-007
2. Align the pin holes on the cylinder tube and arm. Install pin (8) and secure with bolt (9). : 22 mm : 137 N⋅m (14 kgf⋅m, 101 lbf⋅ft)
7
3. Start the engine. Extend piston rod (5). Align the piston rod hole on piston rod (5) with the hole on link. Install pin (7).
5 W507-04-02-004
4. Insert stopper pin (6) into the link and pin (7). Install ring (4).
4
IMPORTANT: After completing the work, operate the bucket cylinder several times to the stroke end and release the pressure in the circuit.
6 7 Link Link
W4-2-2
W527-04-02-002
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Remove Arm Cylinder 1
1. Insert wooden block (3) between arm cylinder (1) and boom (2).
6
5 4
2. Remove bolt (5). Remove pin (6) from arm (4). : 22 mm 3. In order not to extend the arm cylinder, secure the piston rod by using a wire. 4. Disconnect hoses (7) (2 used) from arm cylinder (5). Cap the open ends. : 27 mm
2 3 W571-04-02-004
CAUTION: Arm cylinder (1) weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 42 kg (93 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 43 kg (95 lb)
1
5. Attach a nylon sling to arm cylinder (1) and hold arm cylinder (1).
7 W527-04-02-006
1
W571-04-02-006
8
6. Remove bolt (9). Remove pin (10) from boom (8). ďź&#x161; 22 mm
1
7. Hoist and remove arm cylinder (1).
10
W4-2-3
9
W527-04-02-008
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Install Arm Cylinder
8
CAUTION: Arm cylinder (1) weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 42 kg (93 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 43 kg (95 lb)
1
1. Hoist arm cylinder (1) and align the pin holes on the cylinder bottom side and boom (8). 2. Install pin (10). Secure pin (10) with bolt (9). : 22 mm : 137 N⋅m (14 kgf⋅m, 101 lbf⋅ft)
9
10
W527-04-02-008
3. Connect hoses (7) (2 used) to arm cylinder (1). : 27 mm : 78 N⋅m (8.0 kgf⋅m, 58 lbf⋅ft)
1
7 W527-04-02-006
4. Start the engine. Extend arm cylinder (1). Align the piston rod hole on arm cylinder (1) with the hole on arm.
1 5
6
4
5. Install pin (6). Secure pin (6) with bolt (5). : 22 mm : 137 N⋅m (14 kgf⋅m, 101 lbf⋅ft) IMPORTANT: When completing the work, operate the arm cylinder several times to the stroke end and release the pressure in the circuit.
2 3
W4-2-4
W571-04-02-004
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Remove Boom Cylinder 1
1. Remove bolt (5). Remove cover (3) from boom cylinder (2). : 19 mm
2
2. Attach a nylon sling onto boom cylinder (2). Hoist boom cylinder (2) slightly and remove bolt (1). Remove pin (4) bolt (6). : 22 mm CAUTION: Boom cylinder (2) weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 55 kg (120 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 60 kg (130 lb)
6
4
5
3 W1LD-04-01-002
3. Place a support under the end of boom cylinder (2) tube. Operate the boom lever and retract the boom cylinder. In order not to extend the piston rod, pass a wire through the piston rod hole and secure boom cylinder (2).
2
Wire
W554-02-03-007
4. Disconnect hoses (7) (2 used) from boom cylinder (2). Cap the open ends. : 27 mm
7
2
5. Remove nuts (10) (2 used) and bolt (8). Remove pin (9) from swing post (11). : 19 mm
W1M9-04-02-006
8 2
6. Hoist and remove boom cylinder (2).
11
W4-2-5
10
9
W1M9-04-02-009
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Install Boom Cylinder CAUTION: Boom cylinder (2) weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 55 kg (120 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 60 kg (130 lb)
8 2
1. Hoist boom cylinder (2) and align the pin holes on the cylinder bottom side and swing post (11). IMPORTANT: Apply LOCTITE #262 onto the double nut part. Tighten the double nut so that the clearance between double nut and boss should be 2 to 3 mm. 2. Install pin (9). Secure with bolt (8) and nuts (10) (2 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft)
11
10
W1M9-04-02-009
9
3. Connect hoses (7) (2 used) to boom cylinder (2). : 27 mm : 78 N⋅m (8.0 kgf⋅m, 58 lbf⋅ft) 7
2
W1M9-04-02-006
1
4. Hoist boom cylinder (2). Start the engine. Extend the piston rod of boom cylinder (2). Align the pin hole on boom (6).
2
5. Install pin (4). Secure pin (4) with bolt (1). : 22 mm : 137 N⋅m (14 kgf⋅m, 101 lbf⋅ft) 6. Install cover (3) onto boom cylinder (2) with bolt (5). : 19 mm : 88 N⋅m (9.0 kgf⋅m, 65 lbf⋅ft) IMPORTANT: When all work is completed, operate the boom cylinder for several times to stroke end and bleed air from the circuit.
W4-2-6
6
5
4
3 W1LD-04-01-002
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Remove Boom Swing Cylinder 1
2
3
CAUTION: Boom swing cylinder weight: 44 kg (97 lb) 1. Make the front attachment swing to left and remove the cover.
2. Insert a wooden block between boom swing cylinder (1) and main frame (6) and support boom swing cylinder (1). Remove nuts (5) (2 used) and remove bolt (4). Remove pin (2) from swing post (3). : 19 mm NOTE: Pin (2) may come off when removing bolt (4). It is easy to align the bolt (4) holes if putting the matching marks on the boss of swing post (3) and pin (2). 3. Start the engine. Retract the piston rod to the stroke end. In order not to extend the piston rod, pass a wire through the boss of piston rod.
W4-2-7
6
4, 5
W1M9-04-02-010
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder 4. Remove bolts (9) (9 used). Remove covers (8) (2 used) from main frame (6). : 17 mm
10, 11, 12
1
IMPORTANT: Attach an identification tag onto the disconnected hoses for assembling. 5. Disconnect hoses (7) (2 used) from boom swing cylinder (1). Cap the open ends. : 19 mm
W1M9-04-01-004
6
6. Remove bolt (11). Remove pin (10) from main frame (6). Remove spacer (12). : 19 mm 7. Remove boom swing cylinder (1).
W4-2-8
8, 9
7
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Install Boom Swing Cylinder
10, 11, 12
1
1. Apply grease onto the lip of dust seal for boom swing cylinder (1). 2. Attach a nylon sling onto boom swing cylinder (1). Hoist boom swing cylinder (1). Place the cylinder tube boss on main frame (6). Insert a wooden block between boom swing cylinder (1) and main frame (6) and support boom swing cylinder (1). W1M9-04-01-004
3. Apply grease onto the surface of pin (10). Align the pin (10) holes on main frame (6) and boom swing cylinder (1). Install spacer (12) to pin (10). Insert pin (10). Secure pin (10) to main frame (6) with bolt (11). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft) 4. Connect hoses (7) (2 used) onto boom swing cylinder (1). : 19 mm : 29.5 N⋅m (3.0 kgf⋅m, 22 lbf⋅ft) 5. Install cover (8) onto main frame (6) with bolts (9) (9 used). : 17 mm : 50 N⋅m (5.1 kgf⋅m, 37 lbf⋅ft)
W4-2-9
6
8, 9
7
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: If the air in a cylinder is suddenly compressed, the temperature inside will rise. As the temperature of the hydraulic oil will rise, the seals and rings may be damaged. 5. Start the engine with the piston rod retracted fully to the stroke end. Extend the piston rod slowly. Align the pin (2) holes on boom swing cylinder (1) and swing post (3).
1
2
3
NOTE: When the work in step 5 is finished, almost all air in the cylinder has been released. 6. Apply grease onto the surface of pin (2). Align the bolt (4) holes on swing post (3) and pin (2). Install pin (2). IIMPORTANT: Install nut (5) so that the clearance between swing post (3) boss and nut (5) should be 2 to 3 mm (0.079 to 0.12 in). 7. Apply LOCTITE #262 on nuts (5) (2 used). Install bolt (4) and nuts (5) (2 used). : 19 mm : 90 N⋅m (9.2 kgf⋅m, 66 lbf⋅ft) 8. Install the cover onto main frame (6) with the bolts (2 used). : 13 mm : 19.5 N⋅m (2.0 kgf⋅m, 14.5 lbf⋅ft) IMPORTANT: After completing the work, fill hydraulic oil to the specified level. Operate every cylinder fully to the stroke end several times and release the pressure in the circuit. Check each connection of hoses for any oil leaks.
W4-2-10
6
4, 5
W1M9-04-02-010
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Remove Blade Cylinder CAUTION: Metal fragments may fly off when a hammer is used. Wear necessary protection, such as goggle, hard hats, etc in order to prevent personal injury. 1. Remove bolts (1) (3 used). Remove cover (2) from blade cylinder (3). : 17 mm
1
2
3 4
CAUTION: Blade cylinder (3) weight: 34 kg (75 lb) 2. Attach a nylon sling onto blade cylinder (3). Hold blade cylinder (3).
8
7
6
4
3. Disconnect hoses (5) (2 used) from blade cylinder (3). Cap the open ends. : 27 mm 4. Remove bolts (8) (4 used) and plates (7) (2 used). Remove pins (6) (2 used) from blade (9). Remove thrust plate (4) between blade cylinder (3) cylinder tube and blade (9), piston rod and track frame. : 19 mm 5. Hoist and remove blade cylinder (3) from blade (9).
W4-2-11
5
6 9
8
7 W1LD-04-02-012
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Install Blade Cylinder CAUTION: Blade cylinder (3) weight: 34 kg (75 lb) 1. Hoist blade cylinder (3) and align the pin holes on bottom and blade (9), piston rod and track frame. Insert thrust plates (4). Install pins (6) (2 used). Secure pin (6) with bolts (8) (4 used) and plates (7) (2 used).
1
2
3 4
8
7
6
4
2. Connect hoses (5) (2 used) onto blade cylinder (3). : 27 mm : 78 N⋅m (8.0 kgf⋅m, 58 lbf⋅ft)
5
3. Install cover (2) onto blade cylinder (3) with bolts (1) (3 used). IMPORTANT: When all work is completed, operate the blade cylinder for several times to stroke end and bleed air from the circuit.
W4-2-12
6 9
8
7 W1LD-04-02-012
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder (Blank)
W4-2-13
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE BOOM CYLINDER
14
8 12
5
3
6
7
10
11
13
9
4 2
19
1
20 18
21 22 17 18 16
15
W1M9-04-02-013
123456-
Wiper Ring Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing U-Ring Backup Ring
78910 11 12 -
O-Ring Holder Collar Backup Ring O-Ring Cushion Seal
13 14 15 16 17 18 -
Spacer Piston Rod Cylinder Tube Cushion Bearing Piston Slide Ring (2 Used)
W4-2-14
19 20 21 22 -
Seal Ring O-Ring Set Screw Steel Ball
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Disassemble Boom Cylinder â&#x20AC;˘ The procedures start on the premise that the pipe has been removed. CAUTION: Boom cylinder weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 55 kg (120 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 60 kg (130 lb)
3. Loosen cylinder head (2) by using a hooked spanner with the protective cover attached on piston rod (14). Remove piston rod (14) from cylinder tube (15). Diameter of cylinder head (2) ZAXIS40U-2: 110 mm ZAXIS50U-2: 115 mm
IMPORTANT: Move piston rod (14) slowly and drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder. 1. Clamp the bottom side of cylinder tube (15) horizontally in a vise. Drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder.
Hooked Spanner
15
IMPORTANT: The lock washer in cylinder head (2) is provided on cylinder tube (15) and forms an integral part. Do not damage cylinder tube (15) and cylinder head (2) when bending and extending the lock washer. 2. Pull out piston rod (14) approximately 200 mm (7.87 in). Install a protective cover on piston rod (14). Extend the lock washer in cylinder head (2).
2
14
W506-04-02-004
IMPORTANT: Set screw (21) was crimped by using a punch at two places. Loosen set screw (21) after cutting the crimped part by using a hand drill. Lock Washer 4. Secure piston rod (14) horizontally. Remove set screw (21) and steel ball (22) from piston (17). : 5 mm 5. Remove piston (17) and cushion bearing (16) from piston rod (14). : 65 mm
14
2 W506-04-02-003
W4-2-15
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
14
8 12
5
3
6
7
10
11
13
9
4 2
19
1
20 18 17 18
15
W1M9-04-02-013
W4-2-16
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder 6. Wind the tape onto the thread part of piston rod (14) in order to protect the seal of cylinder head (2). Remove the cylinder head (2) assembly from piston rod (14). IMPORTANT: Slide rings (18) (2 used) cannot be reused. When disassembling the cylinder, replace slide rings (18) with the new one. 7. Clamp piston (17) in a vise. Remove slide rings (18) (2 used) from piston (17). IMPORTANT: When removing the seals, do damage piston (17). 8. Insert the screwdriver between piston (17) seal ring (19). Raise seal ring (19). Cut seal (19) by using a pair of pliers. Remove seal (19) from piston (17). Remove O-ring (20) in the same procedures.
not and ring ring
9. Remove the holder (8) assembly from cylinder head (2). 10. Remove backup ring (10) and O-ring (11) from the outer side of holder (8). 11. Remove spacer (13), cushion seal (12) and collar (9) from the inner side of holder (8). 12. Remove wiper ring (1) and U-ring (5) from the inner side of cylinder head (2). 13. Remove O-ring (3), backup ring (6) and O-ring (7) from the outer side of cylinder head (2). IMPORTANT: Bushing (4) cannot be reused. When removing bushing (4), replace bushing (7) with the new one. 14. Remove bushing (7) by using special tool (copper spatula). NOTE: Bushing (4) cannot be tapped and removed from cylinder head (2). Cut off bushing (4) by using a lathe. Insert special tool (copper spatula) strongly and remove bushing (4).
17 19, 20
W506-04-02-007
W4-2-17
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder ASSEMBLE BOOM CYLINDER 8
Hole (1 Place)
1 2
3
4
5
9 10
11 12
13
Detail A
6
7
14
15
16
17
18 19
20
21
22
A
W1M9-04-02-003
123456-
Wiper Ring Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing U-Ring Backup Ring
78910 11 12 -
O-Ring Holder Collar Backup Ring O-Ring Cushion Seal
13 14 15 16 17 18 -
Spacer Piston Rod Cylinder Tube Cushion Bearing Piston Slide Ring (2 Used)
W4-2-18
19 20 21 22 -
Seal Ring O-Ring Set Screw Steel Ball
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Assemble Boom Cylinder IMPORTANT: Check the mounting direction of U-ring (5). 2. Install U-ring (5) to cylinder head (2).
CAUTION: Boom cylinder weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 55 kg (120 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 60 kg (130 lb)
2
IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the inside of cylinder head (2). Check that bushing (4) is not out from the mounting part for U-ring (5) in cylinder head (2) in order not to damage U-ring (5).
5
4 2 Check that bushing (4) is not out.
W1LD-04-02-004
3. Install wiper ring (1) to cylinder head (2) by using special tool (ST 8048).
W1M9-04-02-011
ST 8048
1. Install bushing (4) into cylinder head (2) by using special tool (ST 7275).
2
ST 7275
1
4
W506-04-02-012
2
4. Install O-ring (3), backup ring (6) and O-ring (7) to the outer of cylinder head (2). 5. Install collar (9), cushion seal (12) and spacer (13) to the inner side of holder (8). Install O-ring (11) and backup ring (10) to the outer side of holder (8). W506-04-02-010
6. Install the holder (8) assembly to cylinder head (2).
W4-2-19
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
8
Hole (1 Place)
1 2
3
4
5
9 10
11 12
13
Detail A
6
7
14
15
16
17
18 19
20
21
22
A
W1M9-04-02-003
W4-2-20
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Check that O-ring (20) is not twisted. 7. Install O-ring (20) to piston (17). Install seal ring (19) by using special tool 1 and 2. Special tool 1 ZAXIS40U-2: ST 2594 ZAXIS50U-2: ST 2335 Special tool 2 ZAXIS40U-2: ST 2590 ZAXIS50U-2: ST 2334 Special Tool 1
24
9. Install slide rings (18) (2 used) to piston (17) in order not to align their split portions. 10. Wind the tape onto the thread of piston rod (14). Rotate and install the cylinder head (2) assembly to piston rod (14). 11. Install cushion bearing (16) and the piston (17) assembly to piston rod (14). ZAXIS40U-2 : 65 mm : 1950 N⋅m (200 kgf⋅m, 1440 lbf⋅ft) ZAXIS50U-2 : 65 mm : 2170 N⋅m (220 kgf⋅m, 1600 lbf⋅ft)
Special Tool 2
20
12. Install steel ball (22) into piston (17). Install set screw (21). Crimp set screw (21) by using a punch (2 places). : 5 mm : 31.5 N⋅m (3.2 kgf⋅m, 23 lbf⋅ft)
17
W566-04-02-010
IMPORTANT: If not adjusting seal ring (19), piston (17) cannot be installed to cylinder tube (15). 8. Pass special tools through piston (17). Adjust seal ring (19). Special tool ZAXIS40U-2: ST2598 ZAXIS50U-2: ST2336
IMPORTANT: When inserting the piston rod (14) assembly, do not drop slide rings (18) (2 used) from piston (17). Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 13. Secure cylinder tube (15) in a vise horizontally. Insert the piston rod (14) assembly into cylinder tube (15) straightly in order not to damage.
17 19 Special Tool
W566-04-02-011
W4-2-21
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
Hole (1 Place)
Detail A
2
15
A
W1M9-04-02-003
W4-2-22
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 14. Tighten cylinder head (2) to cylinder tube (15) by using a hooked spanner. Bend the lock washer in order not to loosen. ZAXIS40U-2: 110 mm : 530 N⋅m (54 kgf⋅m, 390 lbf⋅ft) ZAXIS50U-2: 115 mm : 569 N⋅m (58 kgf⋅m, 420 lbf⋅ft) Hooked Spanner
15 W506-04-02-019
W4-2-23
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE ARM CYLINDER
14
7 3 4
9
13
12
8
10
11
6
5
2 1 23 21 22
16
18
19
20
18
24
25
26
17
15
W1M9-04-02-014
1234567-
Wiper Ring Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing U-Ring Backup Ring O-Ring
8910 11 12 13 14 -
Holder Collar Backup Ring O-Ring Cushion Seal Spacer Piston Rod
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 -
Cylinder Tube Cushion Bearing Piston Slide Ring (2 Used) Seal Ring O-Ring Set Screw
W4-2-24
22 23 24 25 26 -
Steel Ball Retaining Ring Cushion Seal Cushion Bearing Stopper
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Disassemble Arm Cylinder â&#x20AC;˘ The procedures start on the premise that the pipe has been removed. CAUTION: Arm cylinder weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 42 kg (93 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 43 kg (95 lb)
3. Loosen cylinder head (2) by using a hooked spanner with the protective cover attached on piston rod (14). Remove piston rod (14) from cylinder tube (15). Diameter of cylinder head (2): 100 mm Hooked Spanner
IMPORTANT: Move piston rod (14) slowly and drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder. 1. Clamp the bottom side of cylinder tube (15) horizontally in a vise. Drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder. IMPORTANT: The lock washer in cylinder head (2) is provided on cylinder tube (15) and forms an integral part. Do not damage cylinder tube (15) and cylinder head (2) when bending and extending the lock washer. 2. Pull out piston rod (14) approximately 200 mm (7.87 in). Install a protective cover on piston rod (14). Extend the lock washer in cylinder head (2).
Lock Washer
15
2 14
W506-04-02-004
IMPORTANT: Set screw (21) was crimped by using a punch at two places. Loosen set screw (21) after cutting the crimped part by using a hand drill. 4. Secure piston rod (14) horizontally. Remove set screw (21) and steel ball (22) from piston (17). : 5 mm 5. Remove piston (17) and cushion bearing (16) from piston rod (14). : 60 mm
14
6. Remove retaining ring (23) from piston rod (14).
2 W506-04-02-003
7. Slide cushion bearing (25) to the thread side of piston rod (14) and remove stopper (26). 8. Remove cushion bearing (25). Remove cushion seal (24) from piston rod (14).
W4-2-25
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
14
7 3 4
9
12
13
8
10
11
6
5
2 1 23 21 22
16
18
19
20
18
24
25
26
17
15
W1M9-04-02-014
W4-2-26
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder 9. Wind the tape onto the thread part of piston rod (14) in order to protect the seal of cylinder head (2). Remove the cylinder head (2) assembly from piston rod (14). IMPORTANT: Slide rings (18) (2 used) cannot be reused. When disassembling the cylinder, replace slide ring (18) with the new one. 10. Clamp piston (17) in a vise. Remove slide rings (18) (2 used) from piston (17). IMPORTANT: When removing the seals, do damage piston (17). 11. Insert the screwdriver between piston (17) seal ring (19). Raise seal ring (19). Cut seal (19) by using a pair of pliers. Remove seal (19) from piston (17). Remove O-ring (20) in the same procedures.
not
14. Remove spacer (13), cushion seal (12) and collar (9) from the inner side of holder (8). 15. Remove wiper ring (1) and U-ring (5) from the inner side of cylinder head (2). 16. Remove O-ring (3), backup ring (6) and O-ring (7) from the outside of cylinder head (2). IMPORTANT: Bushing (4) cannot be reused. When removing bushing (4), replace bushing (4) with the new one. 17. Remove bushing (4) by using special tool (copper spatula).
and ring ring
17 19, 20
W506-04-02-007
12. Remove the holder (8) assembly from cylinder head (2). 13. Remove backup ring (10) and O-ring (11) from the outer side of holder (8).
W4-2-27
NOTE: Bushing (4) cannot be tapped and removed from cylinder head (2). Cut off bushing (4) by using a lathe. Insert special tool (copper spatula) strongly and remove bushing (4).
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder ASSEMBLE ARM CYLINDER
8
9
Hole (1 Place)
1 2
3 4
5
6
10 11 12
13
24
Detail B
Detail A
7
14
15
16 17
18
19
20
21
22 23
25 26
B
A
W1M9-04-02-004
1234567-
Wiper Ring Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing U-Ring Backup Ring O-Ring
8910 11 12 13 14 -
Holder Collar Backup Ring O-Ring Cushion Seal Spacer Piston Rod
15 16 17 18 19 20 21 -
W4-2-28
Cylinder Tube Cushion Bearing Piston Slide Ring (2 Used) Seal Ring O-Ring Set Screw
22 23 24 25 26 -
Steel Ball Retaining Ring Cushion Seal Cushion Bearing Stopper
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Assemble Arm Cylinder IMPORTANT: Check the mounting direction of U-ring (5). 2. Install U-ring (5) to cylinder head (2).
CAUTION: Arm cylinder weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 42 kg (93 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 43 kg (95 lb) IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the inside of cylinder head (2). Check that bushing (4) is not out from the mounting part for U-ring (5) in cylinder head (2) in order not to damage U-ring (5).
2 5
4 2 Check that bushing (4) is not out.
W1LD-04-02-004
3. Install wiper ring (1) to cylinder head (2) by using special tool (ST 8047). W1M9-04-02-011
1. Install bushing (4) into cylinder head (2) by using special tool (ST 7325).
ST 8047
2 ST 7325
4 2 1 W506-04-02-012
4. Install O-ring (3), backup ring (6) and O-ring (7) to the outer side of cylinder head (2). W506-04-02-010
5. Install collar (9), cushion seal (12) and spacer (13) to the inner side of holder (8). Install O-ring (11) and backup ring (10) to the outer side of holder (8). 6. Install the holder (8) assembly to cylinder head (2).
W4-2-29
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
24
Hole (1 Place)
Detail B
Detail A
2
14
15
16 17
18
19
20
21
22 23
25 26
B
A
W1M9-04-02-004
W4-2-30
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Check that O-ring (20) is not twisted. 7. Install O-ring (20) to piston (17). Install seal ring (19) by using special tools (ST 2625, ST 2623).
10. Wind the tape onto the thread of piston rod (14). Rotate and install the cylinder head (2) assembly to piston rod (14). 11. Install cushion seal (24) and cushion bearing (25) to piston rod (14).
ST 2625
19 ST 2623
20 Face the slit side to the piston.
17
W566-04-02-010
IMPORTANT: If not adjusting seal ring (19), piston (17) cannot be installed to cylinder tube (15). 8. Install special tool (ST 2627) through piston (17). Adjust seal ring (19). 17
W1M9-04-02-012
12. Install stopper (26) and retaining ring (23) to piston rod (14). 13. Install cushion bearing (16) and the piston (17) assembly to piston rod (14). : 60 mm : 1435 N⋅m (146 kgf⋅m, 1060 lbf⋅ft) 14. Install steel ball (22) into piston (17). Install set screw (21). Crimp set screw (21) at two places by using a punch in order not to loosen. : 5 mm : 16.2 N⋅m (1.7 kgf⋅m, 12 lbf⋅ft)
19
ST 2627
W566-04-02-011
9. Install slide rings (18) (2 used) to piston (17) in order not to align their split portions.
IMPORTANT: When inserting the piston rod (14) assembly, do not drop slide rings (18) (2 used) from piston (17). Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 15. Secure cylinder tube (15) in a vise horizontally. Insert the piston rod (14) assembly into cylinder tube (15) straightly in order not to damage.
W4-2-31
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
Hole (1 Place)
Detail B
Detail A
2
15
B
A
W1M9-04-02-004
W4-2-32
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 16. Tighten cylinder head (2) to cylinder tube (15) by using a hooked spanner. Bend the lock washer in order not to loosen. Diameter of cylinder head (2): 100 mm : 451 N⋅m (46 kgf⋅m, 330 lbf⋅ft) Hooked Spanner
15 W506-04-02-019
W4-2-33
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE BUCKET CYLINDER
8
12 13 11 10
14 15
11 7 3
6
5 4 2 1
9
W1M9-04-02-015
1234-
Wiper Ring Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing
5678-
U-Ring Backup Ring O-Ring Piston Rod
910 11 12 -
Cylinder Tube Piston Slide Ring (2 Used) Seal Ring
W4-2-34
13 - O-Ring 14 - Set Screw 15 - Steel Ball
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Disassemble Bucket Cylinder â&#x20AC;˘ The procedures start on the premise that the pipe has been removed. CAUTION: Bucket cylinder weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 27 kg (60 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 32 kg (71 lb)
3. Loosen cylinder head (2) by using a hooked spanner with the protective cover attached on piston rod (8). Remove the piston rod (8) assembly from cylinder tube (9). Diameter of cylinder head (2) ZAXIS40U-2: 90 mm ZAXIS50U-2: 92 mm
IMPORTANT: Move piston rod (1) slowly and drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder. 1. Clamp the bottom side of cylinder tube (9) horizontally in a vise. Drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder.
Hooked Spanner
IMPORTANT: The lock washer in cylinder head (2) is provided on cylinder tube (9) and forms an integral part. Do not damage cylinder tube (9) and cylinder head (2) when bending and extending the lock washer. 2. Pull out piston rod (8) approximately 200 mm (7.87 in). Install a protective cover on piston rod (8). Extend the lock washer in cylinder head (2).
Lock Washer
9
2
8
W506-04-02-004
IMPORTANT: Set screw (14) was crimped by using a punch at two places. Remove set screw (14) after cutting the crimped part by using a hand drill. 4. Secure piston rod (8) horizontally. Remove set screw (14) and steel ball (15) from piston (10). : 4 mm 5. Remove piston (10) from piston rod (8). ZAXIS40U-2 : 50 mm
9
2
ZAXIS50U-2 : 55 mm
W506-04-02-003
6. Wind the tape onto the thread part of piston rod (8) in order to protect the seal of cylinder head (2). Remove cylinder head (2) from piston rod (8).
W4-2-35
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
12 13 11 10 11 7 3
6
5 4 2 1
W1M9-04-02-015
W4-2-36
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Slide rings (11)(2 used) cannot be reused. When disassembling the cylinder, replace slide ring (11) with the new one. 7. Clamp piston (10) in a vise. Remove slide rings (11) (2 used) from piston (10). IMPORTANT: When removing the seals, do damage piston (10). 8. Insert the screwdriver between piston (10) seal ring (12). Raise seal ring (12). Cut seal (12) by using a pair of pliers. Remove seal (12) from piston (10). Remove O-ring (13) in the same procedures.
IMPORTANT: Bushing (4) cannot be reused. When removing bushing (4), replace bushing (4) with the new one. 11. Remove bushing (4) by using special tool (copper spatula).
not and ring ring
10 12, 13
W506-04-02-007
9. Remove wiper ring (1) and U-ring (5) from the inner side of cylinder head (2). 10. Remove O-ring (7), backup ring (6) and O-ring (3) from the outer side of cylinder head (2).
W4-2-37
NOTE: Bushing (4) cannot be tapped and removed from cylinder head (2). Cut off bushing (4) by using a lathe. Insert special tool (copper spatula) strongly and remove bushing (4).
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder ASSEMBLE BUCKET CYLINDER
1
Hole (1 Place)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
W1M9-04-02-005
1234-
Wiper Ring Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing
5678-
U-Ring Backup Ring O-Ring Piston Rod
910 11 12 -
Cylinder Tube Piston Slide Ring (2 Used) Seal Ring
W4-2-38
13 - O-Ring 14 - Set Screw 15 - Steel Ball
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Assemble Bucket Cylinder IMPORTANT: Check the mounting direction of U-ring (5). 2. Install U-ring (5) to cylinder head (2).
CAUTION: Bucket cylinder weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 27 kg (60 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 32 kg (71 lb) IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the inside of cylinder head (2). Check that bushing (4) is not out from the mounting part for U-ring (5) in cylinder head (2) in order not to damage U-ring (5).
2
5
4 2 Check that bushing (4) is not out.
W1M9-04-02-011
1. Install bushing (4) into cylinder head (2) by using special tools. Special Tool ZAXIS40U-2: ST 7277 ZAXIS50U-2: ST 7276 Special Tool
W1LD-04-02-004
3. Install wiper ring (1) to cylinder head (2) by using special tools. Special tool ZAXIS40U-2: ST 8045 ZAXIS50U-2: ST 8046
Special Tool
2 4 2
1 W506-04-02-012
W506-04-02-010
4. Install O-ring (3), backup ring (6) and O-ring (7) to the outer side of cylinder head (2).
W4-2-39
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
Hole (1 Place)
2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
W1M9-04-02-005
W4-2-40
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Check that O-ring (13) is not twisted. 5. Install O-ring (13) to piston (10). Install seal ring (12) by using special tool 1 and 2. Special tool 1 ZAXIS40U-2: ST 2624 ZAXIS50U-2: ST 2596 Special tool 2 ZAXIS40U-2: ST 2622 ZAXIS50U-2: ST 2592 Special Tool 1
7. Install slide rings (11) (2 used) to piston (10) in order not to align their split portions. 8. Wind the tape onto the thread of piston rod (8). Rotate and install the cylinder head (2) assembly to piston rod (8). 9. Install the piston (10) assembly to piston rod (8). ZAXIS40U-2 : 50 mm : 679 N⋅m (69 kgf⋅m, 500 lbf⋅ft) ZAXIS50U-2 : 55 mm : 861 N⋅m (88 kgf⋅m, 640 lbf⋅ft)
12 Special Tool 2
10. Install steel ball (15) into piston (10). Install set screw (14). Crimp set screw (14) at two places by using a punch in order not to loosen. : 4 mm : 16.2 N⋅m (1.7 kgf⋅m, 12 lbf⋅ft)
13 10
W566-04-02-010
IMPORTANT: If not adjusting seal ring (12), piston (10) cannot be installed to cylinder tube (9). 6. Install special tool through piston (10). Adjust seal ring (12). Special tool ZAXIS40U-2: ST 2626 ZAXIS50U-2: ST 2600 10 12
Special Tool
W566-04-02-011
W4-2-41
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
Hole (1 Place)
2
8
9
10
W1M9-04-02-005
W4-2-42
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: When inserting the piston rod (8) assembly, do not drop slide rings (11)(2 used) from piston (10). Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 11. Secure cylinder tube (9) in a vise horizontally. Insert the piston rod (8) assembly into cylinder tube (9) straightly in order not to damage. IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 12. Tighten cylinder head (2) to cylinder tube (9) by using a hooked spanner. Bend the lock washer in order not to loosen. Diameter of cylinder head (2) ZAXIS40U-2: 90 mm : 382 N⋅m (39 kgf⋅m, 280 lbf⋅ft) ZAXIS50U-2: 92 mm : 422 N⋅m (43 kgf⋅m, 310 lbf⋅ft) Hooked Spanner
9 W506-04-02-019
W4-2-43
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE BOOM SWING CYLINDER
8
12 13 11 10
14 15
11 7 6 3 4
5
2 1 9
W1M9-04-02-016
1234-
Wiper Ring Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing
5678-
U-Ring Backup Ring O-Ring Piston Rod
910 11 12 -
Cylinder Tube Piston Slide Ring (2 Used) Seal Ring
W4-2-44
13 - O-Ring 14 - Set Screw 15 - Steel Ball
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Disassemble Boom Swing Cylinder â&#x20AC;˘ The procedures start on the premise that the pipe has been removed. CAUTION: Boom swing cylinder weight: 44 kg (97 lb)
3. Loosen cylinder head (2) by using a hooked spanner with the protective cover attached on piston rod (8). Remove the piston rod (8) assembly from cylinder tube (9). Diameter of cylinder head (2): 110 mm Hooked Spanner
IMPORTANT: Move piston rod (8) slowly and drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder. 1. Clamp the bottom side of cylinder tube (9) horizontally in a vise. Drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder.
9
IMPORTANT: The lock washer in cylinder head (2) is provided on cylinder tube (9) and forms an integral part. Do not damage cylinder tube (9) and cylinder head (2) when bending and extending the lock washer. 2. Pull out piston rod (8) approximately 200 mm (7.87 in). Install a protective cover on piston rod (8). Extend the lock washer in cylinder head (2).
2
8
W506-04-02-004
IMPORTANT: Set screw (14) was crimped by using a punch at two places. Loosen set screw (14) after cutting the crimped part by using a hand drill. Lock Washer 4. Secure piston rod (8) horizontally. Remove set screw (14) and steel ball (15) from piston (10). : 4 mm 5. Remove piston (10) from piston rod (8). : 60 mm
8
6. Wind the tape onto the thread part of piston rod (8) in order to protect the seal of cylinder head (2). Remove cylinder head (2) from piston rod (8).
2 W506-04-02-003
W4-2-45
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
12 13 11 10 11 7 6 3 4
5
2 1
W1M9-04-02-016
W4-2-46
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Slide rings (11)(2 used) cannot be reused. When disassembling the cylinder, replace slide ring (11) with the new one. 7. Clamp piston (10) in a vise. Remove slide rings (11) (2 used) from piston (10). IMPORTANT: When removing the seals, do damage piston (10). 8. Insert the screwdriver between piston (10) seal ring (12). Raise seal ring (12). Cut seal (12) by using a pair of pliers. Remove seal (12) from piston (10). Remove O-ring (13) in the same procedures.
IMPORTANT: Bushing (4) cannot be reused. When removing bushing (4), replace bushing (4) with the new one. 11. Remove bushing (4) by using special tool (copper spatula).
not and ring ring
10 12, 13
W506-04-02-007
9. Remove wiper ring (1) and U-ring (5) from the inner side of cylinder head (2). 10. Remove O-ring (3), backup ring (6) and O-ring (7) from the outer side of cylinder head (2).
W4-2-47
NOTE: Bushing (4) cannot be tapped and removed from cylinder head (2). Cut off bushing (4) by using a lathe. Insert special tool (copper spatula) strongly and remove busing (4).
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder ASSEMBLE BOOM SWING CYLINDER
1
Hole (1 Place)
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
W1M9-04-02-005
1234-
Wiper Ring Cylinder Head O-Ring Bushing
5678-
U-Ring Backup Ring O-Ring Piston Rod
910 11 12 -
Cylinder Tube Piston Slide Ring (2 Used) Seal Ring
W4-2-48
13 - O-Ring 14 - Set Screw 15 - Steel Ball
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Assemble Boom Swing Cylinder IMPORTANT: Check the mounting direction of U-ring (5). 2. Install U-ring (5) to the inside of cylinder head (2).
CAUTION: Boom swing cylinder weight: 44 kg (97 lb) IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the inside of cylinder head (2). Check that bushing (4) is not out from the mounting part for U-ring (5) in cylinder head (2) in order not to damage U-ring (5).
2
5
4 2 Check that bushing (4) is not out. W1LD-04-02-004
3. Install wiper ring (1) to cylinder head (2) by using special tool. W1M9-04-02-011
1. Install bushing (4) into cylinder head (2) by using special tool.
ST 8047
2 ST 7325
4 2 1 W506-04-02-012
4. Install O-ring (3), backup ring (6) and O-ring (7) to the outer side of cylinder head (2). W506-04-02-010
W4-2-49
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
Hole (1 Place)
2
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
W1M9-04-02-005
W4-2-50
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Check that O-ring (13) is not twisted. 5. Install O-ring (13) to piston (10). Install seal ring (12) by using special tool.
8. Wind the tape onto the thread of piston rod (8). Rotate and install the cylinder head (2) assembly to piston rod (8). 9. Install the piston (10) assembly to piston rod (8). : 60 mm : 1820 N⋅m (185 kgf⋅m, 1340 lbf⋅ft)
ST 2192
12
10. Install steel ball (15) into piston (10). Install set screw (14). Crimp set screw (14) at two places by using a punch in order not to loosen. : 4 mm : 16.2 N⋅m (1.7 kgf⋅m, 12 lbf⋅ft)
ST 2180
13 10
W566-04-02-010
IMPORTANT: If not adjusting seal ring (14), piston (10) cannot be installed to cylinder tube (9). 6. Install special tool through piston (10). Adjust seal ring (12).
IMPORTANT: When inserting the piston rod (8) assembly, do not drop slide rings (11) (2 used) from piston (10). Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 11. Secure cylinder tube (9) in a vise horizontally. Insert the piston rod (8) assembly into cylinder tube (9) straightly in order not to damage.
10 12 ST 2598
W566-04-02-011
7. Install slide rings (11) (2 used) to piston (10) in order not to align their split portions.
W4-2-51
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
Hole (1 Place)
2
9
W1M9-04-02-005
W4-2-52
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 12. Tighten cylinder head (2) to cylinder tube (9) by using a hooked spanner. Bend the lock washer in order not to loosen. Diameter of cylinder head (2): 110 mm : 530 N⋅m (54 kgf⋅m, 390 lbf⋅ft) Hooked Spanner
9 W506-04-02-019
W4-2-53
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder DISASSEMBLE BLADE CYLINDER
8 6
9
7
5 4 3 2
1
14 13 12 11 10
W1LA-04-02-012
1234-
Piston Rod Snap Ring Wiper Ring Cylinder Head
5678-
Bushing U-Ring O-Ring Backup Ring
910 11 12 -
O-Ring Piston Ring Piston Seal Ring
W4-2-54
13 - Nut 14 - Cylinder Tube
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Disassemble Blade Cylinder â&#x20AC;˘ The procedures start on the premise that the pipe has been removed. CAUTION: Blade cylinder weight: 34 kg (75 lb)
3. Loosen cylinder head (4) by using a hooked spanner with the protective cover attached on piston rod (1). Remove the piston rod (1) assembly from cylinder tube (14). Cylinder head (4) diameter: 125 mm Hooked Spanner
IMPORTANT: Move piston rod (1) slowly and drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder. 1. Clamp the bottom side of cylinder tube (14) horizontally in a vise. Drain hydraulic oil from the cylinder.
14
IMPORTANT: The lock washer in cylinder head (4) is provided on cylinder tube (14) and forms an integral part. Do not damage cylinder tube (14) and cylinder head (4) when bending and extending the lock washer. 2. Pull out piston rod (1) approximately 200 mm (7.78 in). Install a protective cover on piston rod (1). Extend the lock washer in cylinder head (4).
4
1
W506-04-02-004
4. Remove nut (13) from piston rod (1). : 55 mm Lock Washer
5. Remove piston (11) from piston rod (1). 6. Wind the tape onto the thread part of piston rod (1) in order to protect the seal of cylinder head (4). Remove cylinder head (4) from piston rod (1). 7. Clamp piston (11) in a vise. Remove piston ring (10) from piston (11).
1
4 W506-04-02-003
W4-2-55
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
8 6
9
7
5 4 3 2
12 11
W1LA-04-02-012
W4-2-56
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: When removing the seals, do damage piston (11). 8. Insert the screwdriver between piston (11) seal ring (12). Raise seal ring (12). Cut seal (12) by using a pair of pliers. Remove seal (12) from piston (11).
not and ring ring
11 12
W506-04-02-007
9. Remove U-ring (6) and snap ring (2) from the inner side of cylinder head (4). Remove wiper ring (3) from cylinder head (4). 10. Remove O-ring (9), backup ring (8) and O-ring (7) from the outer side of cylinder head (4). IMPORTANT: Bushing (5) cannot be reused. When removing bushing (5), replace bushing (5) with the new one. 11. Remove bushing (5) from cylinder head (4).
W4-2-57
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder ASSEMBLE BLADE CYLINDER
2
3
4
5
7
8
6
14
9
1
11
10
13
12 W1LA-04-02-013
1234-
Piston Rod Snap Ring Wiper Ring Cylinder Head
5678-
Bushing U-Ring O-Ring Backup Ring
910 11 12 -
W4-2-58
O-Ring Piston Ring Piston Seal Ring
13 - Nut 14 - Cylinder Tube
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder Assemble Blade Cylinder CAUTION: Blade cylinder weight: 34 kg (75 lb) IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the inside of cylinder head (4). Check that bushing (5) is not out from the mounting part for U-ring (6) in cylinder head (4) in order not to damage U-ring (6).
4
IMPORTANT: Check the mounting direction of U-ring (6). 2. Install U-ring (6) to the inner side of cylinder head (4). 4
6
5
Check that bushing (5) is not out. W1LD-04-02-004
3. Install wiper ring (3) to cylinder head (4) with snap ring (2) by using special tool. W577-04-02-007
Special Tool
1. Install bushing (5) into cylinder head (4) by using special tool.
4
Special Tool
5 4 3 W506-04-02-012
4. Install O-ring (7), backup ring (8) and O-ring (9) to the outer side of cylinder head (4). W506-04-02-010
W4-2-59
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
4
14
1
11
10
13
12 W1LA-04-02-013
W4-2-60
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder 5. Install O-ring (15) to piston (11). Install piston ring (10) and seal ring (12) by using special tool. ST 7339
7. Wind the tape onto the thread of piston rod (1). Rotate and install the cylinder head (4) assembly to piston rod (1). 8. Install the piston (11) assembly to piston rod (1) with nut (13). : 55 mm : 1420±140 N⋅m (145±14.5 kgf⋅m, 1050±103 lbf⋅ft)
12 ST 7338
10 11 W1LD-04-02-014
IMPORTANT: If not adjusted piston ring (10) and seal ring (12), piston (11) cannot be installed to cylinder tube (14). 6. Install special tool through piston (11). Adjust piston ring (10) and seal ring (12).
IMPORTANT: When inserting the piston rod (1) assembly, do not drop piston ring (10) and seal ring (12) from piston (11). Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 9. Secure cylinder tube (14) in a vise horizontally. Insert the piston rod (1) assembly into cylinder tube (14) straightly in order not to damage.
11 10 12 ST 7340
W1LD-04-02-015
W4-2-61
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder
4
14
W1LA-04-02-013
W4-2-62
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder IMPORTANT: Apply hydraulic oil onto the packing parts. 10. Tighten cylinder head (4) to cylinder tube (14) by using a hooked spanner. Bend the lock washer in order not to loosen. Cylinder head (4) diameter: 125 mm : 863±86.5 N⋅m (88±8.8 kgf⋅m, 640±64 lbf⋅ft) Hooked Spanner
14 W506-04-02-019
W4-2-63
FRONT ATTACHMENT / Cylinder MAINTENANCE STANDARD Piston Rod
Rod Bend and Run Out
A
Dial Gauge Piston Rod
W105-04-02-094
ZAXIS40U-2
Unit: mm (in)
Cylinder Name
1 m (39.4 in)
Recommended Size After
V Block
Re-manufacturing (A) +0.023
Boom
55 -0.043
(2.17 -0.0017
+0.0009
)
Arm
50 +0.023
(1.97 -0.0017
+0.0009
)
+0.0009 -0.0017 +0.0009 -0.0017 +0.0009 -0.0017
)
Bucket
40
Boom Swing
50
Blade
50
-0.043 +0.023 -0.043 +0.023 -0.043 +0.023 -0.043
(1.58 (1.97 (1.97
ZAXIS50U-2
W166-04-02-022
)
Unit: mm (in)
Bend 0.5 (0.020) 1.0 (0.039)
Run Out 1.0 (0.039) 2.0 (0.079)
Remedy Repair Replace
) NOTE: 1 mm=0.039 in
Unit: mm (in)
Cylinder Name
Recommended Size After Re-manufacturing (A)
Boom
55 -0.043
+0.023
(2.17 -0.0017 )
+0.0009
Arm
50 +0.023
(1.97 -0.0017 )
Bucket
45
(1.77 -0.0017 )
Boom Swing
50
Blade
50
+0.0009
-0.043 +0.023 -0.043 +0.023 -0.043 +0.023 -0.043
+0.0009 +0.0009
(1.97 -0.0017 ) +0.0009
(1.97 -0.0017 )
Wear to Inner Diameter of Rod Bushing Unit: mm (in)
Cylinder Name
Standard Inner Diameter (C)
Allowable Remedy Limit
Boom
55
+0.21 +0.16
(
+0.008 +0.006
)
+0.3 (+0.012)
Replace
Arm
50
+0.21 +0.16
(
+0.008 +0.006
)
+0.3 (+0.012)
Replace
40U-2 40 +0.11 ( +0.006 )
+0.3 (+0.012)
Replace
+0.16
Bucket
50U-2 45
Boom Swing
50
+0.008
+0.16 +0.11
(
+0.008 +0.006
)
+0.3 (+0.012)
Replace
+0.21 +0.16
(
+0.008 +0.006
)
+0.3 (+0.012)
Replace
W4-2-64
C
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
SECTION 5
ENGINE AND ACCESSORY CONTENTS General
Lubrication System
Engine Nomenclature ....................................... 1
Lubrication System Diagram .........................111
Specifications ................................................... 1
Trochoid Pump Components . ...................... 112
Fuel Oil, Lubricating Oil and Cooling Water .... 14
Disassembly (Reverse the Procedure
Engine External Views.................................... 18
below for Assembly) .................................. 112
Structural Description ..................................... 19
Servicing Points............................................ 112
Exhaust Gas Emission Regulation.................. 20
Parts Inspection and Measurement .............. 113
Inspection and Adjustment
Cooling System
Periodic Maintenance Schedule...................... 24
Cooling Water System. ................................. 115
Periodic Inspection and
Cooling Water Pump Components ................ 115
Maintenance Procedure .............................. 25
Disassembly (Reverse the Procedure
Adjusting the No-load Maximum or
below for Assembly) .................................. 116
Minimum Speed .......................................... 52 Sensor Inspection .......................................... 53 Water Leak Check in Cooling Water System .. 53
Servicing Points............................................ 116
Fuel Injection Pump / Governor
Radiator Cap Inspection ................................. 54
Introduction .................................................. 117
Thermostat Inspection .................................... 54
Fuel Injection Pump...................................... 117
Adjusting Operation........................................ 55 Long Storage.................................................. 55
Turbocharger: Disassembly, Inspection and Reassembly Structure and Functions................................ 121
Troubleshooting Preparation before Troubleshooting................ 56 Quick Reference Table for Troubleshooting .... 57 Troubleshooting by Measuring Compression Pressure ............................... 60
Disassembly, Inspection and Reassembly of Engines Complete Disassembly and Reassembly ........ 62
Service Standards and Tightening Torque..... 124 Periodic Inspection Procedure ...................... 126 Disassembly Procedure ................................ 130 Washing and Inspection Procedure .............. 133 Reassembly Procedure ................................ 137 Handling after Disassembly and Reassembly .............................................. 140 Troubleshooting............................................ 141
Cylinder Head: Disassembly, Inspection and Reassembly ......................................... 73 Gear Train and Camshaft ............................... 86 Cylinder Block ................................................ 93
1M9W-5-1
Starting Motor For 4TNV94L/ 98.......................................... 143 For 4TNV106 (T) .......................................... 159
Alternator The 40A Alternator for 3TNV84 and Other Models ............................................ 179
Electric Wiring Electric Wiring Diagram................................ 183 Precaution on Electric Wiring ....................... 184
Service Standards Engine Tuning .............................................. 188 Engine Body ................................................. 189 Lubricating Oil System (Trochoid Pump)....... 198
Tightening Torque for Bolts and Nuts Tightening Torques for Main Bolts and Nuts .......................................... 199 Tightening Torques for Standard Bolts and Nuts .......................................... 200
1M9W-5-2
PREFACE This manual describes the service procedures for the TNV series engines of indirect injection system that have been certified by the US EPA, California ARB and/or the 97/68/EC Directive for industrial use. Please use this manual for accurate, quick and safe servicing of the said engine. Since the explanation in this manual assumes the standard type engine, the specifications and components may partially be different from the engine installed on individual work equipment (power generator, pump, compressor, etc.). Please also refer to the service manual for each work equipment for details. The specifications and components may be subject to change for improvement of the engine quality without notice. If any modification of the contents described herein becomes necessary, it will be notified in the form of correction information each time.
&DOLIRUQLD 3URSRVLWLRQ :DUQLQJ
&DOLIRUQLD 3URSRVLWLRQ :DUQLQJ
'LHVHO HQJLQH H[KDXVW DQG VRPH PH RI I LWV FRQVW RQVWLWXHQWV WXHQWV DUH UH NQRZQ QRZQ WR R WKH 6W 6WDWH DWH RI &DOLIRUQLD WR FDXVH FDQFHU ELUWK GHIHFWV DQG RWKHU UHSURGXFWLYH KDUP
%DWWHU\ SRVWV RVWV WHUPLQDOV DQG UHODWHG DFFHVVRULHV DFFHV RULHV FRQWDLQ OHDG DQG OHDG FRPSRXQGV PSRXQGV FKHPLFDOV NQRZQ Q WR WKH KH 6WDWH 6W DWH RI &DOLIRUQLD DOLIRUQLD WR FDXVH DXVH FDQF DQFHU U DQG UHSURGXFWLYH KDUP :DVK KDQGV DIWHU KDQGOLQJ
c 2003 YANMAR CO., LTD All rights reserved. This manual may not be reproduced or copied, in whole or in part, without the written permission of YANMAR CO., LTD.
(R.1)
SAFETY LABELS • Most accidents are caused by negligence of basic safety rules and precautions. For accident prevention, it is important to avoid such causes before development to accidents.
Please read this manual carefully before starting repair or maintenance to fully understand safety precautions and appropriate inspection and maintenance procedures. Attempting at a repair or maintenance job without sufficient knowledge may cause an unexpected accident. • It is impossible to cover every possible danger in repair or maintenance in the manual. Sufficient consideration for safety is required in addition to the matters marked
. Especially for safety precautions
in a repair or maintenance job not described in this manual, receive instructions from a knowledgeable leader. • Safety marks used in this manual and their meanings are as follows:
DANGER-indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, WILL result in death or serious injury.
WARNING-indicates
a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, COULD result in death or serious injury.
CAUTION-indicates
a potentially hazardous situation which, if not
avoided, MAY result in minor or moderate injury.
•
NOTICE-indicates that if not observed, the product performance or quality may not be guaranteed.
Safety Precautions (1) SERVICE AREA •Sufficient Ventilation Inhalation of exhaust fumes and dust particles may be hazardous to ones health. Running engines welding, sanding, painting, and polishing tasks should be only done in well ventilated areas.
•Safe / Adequate Work Area The service area should be clean, spacious, level and free from holes in the floor, to prevent “slip” or “trip and fall” type accidents.
•Bright, Safely Illuminated Area The work area should be well lit or illuminated in a safe manner. For work in enclosed or dark areas, a “drop cord” should be utilized. The drop cord must have a wire cage to prevent bulb breakage and possible ignition of flammable substances.
•Safety Equipment Fire extinguisher(s), first aid kit and eye wash / shower station should be close at hand (or easily accessible) in case of an emergency.
(2) WORK – WEAR (GARMENTS •Safe Work Clothing Appropriate safety wear (gloves, special shoes/boots, eye/ear protection, head gear, harness’, clothing, etc.) should be used/worn to match the task at hand. Avoid wearing jewelry, unbuttoned cuffs, ties or loose fitting clothes around moving machinery. A serious accident may occur if caught in moving/ rotating machinery.
(3) TOOLS •Appropriate Lifting / Holding When lifting an engine, use only a lifting device (crane, jack, etc.) with sufficient lifting capacity. Do not overload the device. Use only a chain, cable, or lifting strap as an attaching device. Do not use rope, serious injury may result. To hold or support an engine, secure the engine to a support stand, test bed or test cart designed to carry the weight of the engine. Do not overload this device, serious injury may result. Never run an engine without being properly secured to an engine support stand, test bed or test cart, serious injury may result.
•Appropriate Tools Always use tools that are designed for the task at hand. Incorrect usage of tools may result in damage to the engine and or serious personal injury.
(4) GENUINE PARTS and MATERIALS •Genuine Parts Always use genuine YANMAR parts or YANMAR recommended parts and goods. Damage to the engine, shortened engine life and or personal injury may result.
(5) FASTENER TORQUE •Torquing Fasteners Always follow the torque values and procedures as designated in the service manual. Incorrect values, procedures and or tools may cause damage to the engine and or personal injury.
(6) ELECTRICAL •Short Circuits Always disconnect the (-) Negative battery cable before working on the electrical system. An accidental “short circuit” may cause damage, fire and or personal injury. Remember to connect the (-) Negative battery cable (back onto the battery) last. Fasten the terminals tightly.
•Charging Batteries Charging wet celled batteries produces hydrogen gas. Hydrogen gas is extremely explosive. Keep sparks, open flame and any other form of ignition away. Explosion may occur causing severe personal injury.
•Battery Electrolyte Batteries contain sulfuric acid. Do NOT allow it to come in contact with clothing, skin and or eyes, severe burns will result.
(7) WASTE MANAGEMENT Observe the following instructions with regard to hazardous waste disposal. Negligence of these will have a serious impact on environmental pollution concerns. 1)Waste fluids such as lube oil, fuel and coolant shall be carefully put into separate sealed containers and disposed of properly. 2)Do NOT dispose of waste materials irresponsibly by dumping them into the sewer, overland or into natural waterways. 3)Waste materials such as oil, fuel, coolant, solvents, filter elements and batteries, must be disposed of properly according to local ordinances. Consult the local authorities or reclamation facility.
(8) FURTHER PRECAUTIONS •Fueling / Refueling Keep sparks, open flames or any other form of ignition (match, cigarette, etc.) away when fueling/refueling the unit. Fire and or an explosion may result.
•Hot Surfaces. Do NOT touch the engine (or any of its components) during running or shortly after shutting it down. Scalding / serious burns may result. Allow the engine to cool down before attempting to approach the unit.
•Rotating Parts Be careful around moving/rotating parts. Loose clothing, jewelry, ties or tools may become entangled causing damage to the engine and or severe personal injury.
•Preventing burns from scalding 1)Never open the radiator filler cap shortly after shutting the engine down. Steam and hot water will spurt out and seriously burn you. Allow the engine to cool down before attempt to open the filler cap. 2)Securely tighten the filler cap after checking the radiator. Steam can spurt out during engine running, if tightening loose.
Precautions for Service Work (1) Precautions for Safety Read the safety precautions given at the beginning of this manual carefully and always mind safety in work.
(2) Preparation for Service Work Preparation is necessary for accurate, efficient service work. Check the customer ledger file for the history of the engine. • Preceding service date • Period/operation hours after preceding service • Problems and actions in preceding service • Replacement parts expected to be required for service • Recording form/check sheet required for service
(3) Preparation before Disassembly • Prepare general tools, special service tools, measuring instruments, oil, grease, nonreusable parts, and parts expected to be required for replacement. • When disassembling complicated portions, put match-marks and other marks at places not adversely affecting the function for easy reassembly.
(4) Precautions in Disassembly • Each time a parts is removed, check the part installed state, deformation, damage, roughening, surface defect, etc. • Arrange the removed parts orderly with clear distinction between those to be replaced and those to be used again. • Parts to be used again shall be washed and cleaned sufficiently. • Select especially clean locations and use clean tools for disassembly of hydraulic units such as the fuel injection pump.
(5) Precautions for Inspection and Measurement Inspect and measure parts to be used again as required to determine whether they are reusable or not.
(6) Precautions for Reassembly • Reassemble correct parts in correct order according to the specified standards (tightening torques, and adjustment standards). Apply oil important bolts and nuts before tightening when specified. • Always use genuine parts for replacement. • Always use new oil seals, O-rings, packing and cotter pins. • Apply sealant to packing depending on the place where they are used. Apply of grease to sliding contact portions, and apply grease to oil seal lips.
(7) Precautions for Adjustment and Check Use measuring instruments for adjustment to the specified service standards.
How to Read this Manual (1) Range of Operation Explanation This manual explains the troubleshooting, installation/removal, replacement, disassemble/reassembly, inspection, adjustment and adjusting operation procedures for the TNV series engines with direct injection system. Refer to the manufacturer’s manual for each of the fuel injection pump, governor, starting motor and alternator except for their installation.
(2) How to Read the Explanations • An exploded view, sectional views, a system diagram, etc. are shown at the beginning of each section as required for easy understanding of the mounted states of the components. • For the removal/installation of each part, the procedure is shown with the procedural step No. in the illustration. • Precautions and key points for disassembly and reassembly of parts are described as points. In the explanation for each point, detailed operation method, information, standard and precautions are described. Description Example ԠFlywheel Flywheel housing ԟStarter
ԢGear case flange ԡCamshaft
ԙCooling water pump
ԝ Idle gear
Fuel pump spacer
Camshaft driving gear
ԜFuel injection pump
Don't disassemble!
Pump flange Fuel pump drive gear Flange bolt
Crankshaft gear ԛGear case ԣOil seal ԚCrankshaft pulley Note) This figure shows the 3TNV84.
The job contents are described in the disassembly procedure for Nos. not shown in the illustration. • Disassembly procedure 1)Follow steps (1) to (15) of the cylinder head disassembly procedure. 2)Remove the cooling water pump. 3)Remove the crankshaft pulley. (Point 1) I Operation point to be explained on a later page. • Operation points Disassemble: Service point for removal Reassemble: Service point for installation Disassemble-Reassemble: Service point required in both removal and installation.
â&#x20AC;˘ Contents omitted in this manual Though the following jobs are omitted in the explanation in this manual, they should be conducted in actual work: 3)Jacking up and lifting 4)Cleaning and washing of removed parts as required 5)Visual inspection
(3) Definition of Terms [NOTICE]: Instruction whose negligence is very likely to cause an accident. Always observe it. Standard: Allowable range for inspection and adjustment. Limit: The maximum or minimum value that must be satisfied during inspection or adjustment.
(4) Abbreviations Abbreviation
Meaning
Abbreviation
Meaning
Assy
assembly
T.D.C.
top dead center
Sub-Assy
sub-assembly
B.D.C.
bottom dead center
a.T.D.C
after top dead center
OS
oversize
b.T.D.C
before top dead center
US
undersize
STD
Standard
Min-1
revolutions per minute
IN
Intake
PS
Output (metric horsepower)
EX
Exhaust
T
Bolt/nut tightening torque
CONTENTS 1. General ............................................................................................................................ 1 1.1 Engine nomenclature ...............................................................................................................1 1.2 Specifications ...........................................................................................................................1 1.3 Fuel oil, lubricating oil and cooling water ...............................................................................14 1.3.1 Fuel oil ............................................................................................................................................ 14 1.3.2 Lubricating oil.................................................................................................................................. 16 1.3.3 Cooling water .................................................................................................................................. 17
1.4 Engine external views ...........................................................................................................18 1.5 Structural description ............................................................................................................19 1.6 Exhaust gas emission regulation ...........................................................................................20 1.6.1 The emission standard in USA ...................................................................................................... 20 1.6.2 Engine identification........................................................................................................................ 21 1.6.3 Guarantee conditions for the EPA emission standard .................................................................... 22
2. Inspection and adjustment ............................................................................................. 24 2.1 Periodic maintenance schedule .............................................................................................24 2.2 Periodic inspection and maintenance procedure ...................................................................25 2.2.1 Check before daily operation .......................................................................................................... 25 2.2.2 inspection after initial 50 hours operation ....................................................................................... 27 2.2.3 Inspection every 50 hours............................................................................................................... 30 2.2.4 Inspection every 250 hours or 3 months......................................................................................... 34 2.2.5 Inspection every 500 hours or 6 months......................................................................................... 37 2.2.6 Inspection every 1,000 hours or one year....................................................................................... 39 2.2.7 Inspection every 2000 hours or 2 years.......................................................................................... 48
2.3 Adjusting the no-load maximum or minimum speed ..............................................................52 2.4 Sensor inspection ...................................................................................................................53 2.4.1 Oil pressure switch.......................................................................................................................... 53 2.4.2 Thermo switch................................................................................................................................. 53
2.5 Water leak check in cooling water system .............................................................................53 2.6 Radiator cap inspection ..........................................................................................................54 2.7 Thermostat Inspection ............................................................................................................54 2.8 Adjusting operation ................................................................................................................55 2.9 Long storage ..........................................................................................................................55
3. Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................. 56 3.1 Preparation before troubleshooting ........................................................................................56 3.2 Quick reference table for troubleshooting ..............................................................................57 3.3 Troubleshooting by measuring compression pressure ..........................................................60
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines .................................................... 62 4.1 Complete disassembly and reassembly .................................................................................62 4.1.1 Introduction ..................................................................................................................................... 62 4.1.2 Special service tools ....................................................................................................................... 63 4.1.3 Complete disassembly.................................................................................................................... 68 4.1.4 Precautions before and during reassembly .................................................................................... 72 4.1.5 Adjusting operation ......................................................................................................................... 72
4.2 Cylinder head: Disassembly, inspection and reassembly ......................................................73 4.2.1 Components (2-valve cylinder head) .............................................................................................. 73 4.2.2 Disassembly procedure: ................................................................................................................. 73 4.2.3 Reassembly procedure: .................................................................................................................. 74 4.2.4 Servicing points............................................................................................................................... 75 4.2.5 Parts Inspection and measurement ................................................................................................ 79 4.2.6 Valve seat correction ...................................................................................................................... 83 4.2.7 Valve guide replacement ................................................................................................................ 84 4.2.8 Valve stem seal replacement.......................................................................................................... 85
4.3 Gear train and camshaft .........................................................................................................86 4.3.1 Components.................................................................................................................................... 86 4.3.2 Disassembly procedure: ................................................................................................................. 86 4.3.3 Reassembly procedure: .................................................................................................................. 86 4.3.4 Servicing points............................................................................................................................... 87 4.3.5 Parts inspection and measurement ................................................................................................ 90 4.3.6 Oil seal replacement (Gear case side)............................................................................................ 92 4.3.7 Camshaft bushing replacement ...................................................................................................... 92
4.4 Cylinder block .........................................................................................................................93 4.4.1 Components.................................................................................................................................... 93 4.4.2 Disassembly procedure: ................................................................................................................. 93 4.4.3 Reassembly procedure: .................................................................................................................. 93 4.4.4 Servicing points............................................................................................................................... 94 4.4.5 Parts inspection and measurement ................................................................................................ 98 4.4.6 Cylinder bore correction................................................................................................................ 109 4.4.7 Piston pin bushing replacement.................................................................................................... 110 4.4.8 Oil seal replacement (Flywheel housing side) .............................................................................. 110
5. Lubrication system ....................................................................................................... 111 5.1 Lubrication system diagram .................................................................................................111 5.2 Trochoid pump components .................................................................................................112 5.3 Disassembly (Reverse the procedure below for assembly) .................................................112 5.4 Servicing points ....................................................................................................................112 5.5 Parts Inspection and measurement .....................................................................................113
5.5.1 Trochoid pump inspection and measurement............................................................................... 113
6. Cooling system ............................................................................................................ 115 6.1 Cooling water system ...........................................................................................................115 6.2 Cooling water pump components .........................................................................................115 6.3 Disassembly (Reverse the procedure below for assembly) .................................................116 6.4 Servicing points ....................................................................................................................116
7. Fuel injection pump / Governor ................................................................................... 117 7.1 Introduction ..........................................................................................................................117 7.2 Fuel injection pump ..............................................................................................................117 7.2.1 Fuel system diagram..................................................................................................................... 117 7.2.2 External view and components ..................................................................................................... 118 7.2.3 Disassembly procedure: ............................................................................................................... 118 7.2.4 Assembly procedure ..................................................................................................................... 119 7.2.5 Servicing points............................................................................................................................. 119 7.2.6 C.S.D. (Cold Start Device) ............................................................................................................ 120
8. Turbocharger: Disassembly, inspection and reassembly ............................................ 121 8.1 Structure and functions ........................................................................................................121 8.1.1 Main specifications........................................................................................................................ 121 8.1.2 Construction.................................................................................................................................. 121 8.1.3 Structural and functional outline.................................................................................................... 122 8.1.4 Components.................................................................................................................................. 123
8.2 Service standards and tightening torque ..............................................................................124 8.2.1 Service standards ......................................................................................................................... 124 8.2.2 Tightening torque .......................................................................................................................... 125
8.3 Periodic inspection procedure ..............................................................................................126 8.3.1 Periodic inspection intervals ......................................................................................................... 126 8.3.2 Inspection procedure .................................................................................................................... 127 8.3.3 Waste gate valve adjustment procedure....................................................................................... 128
8.4 Disassembly procedure ........................................................................................................130 8.4.1 Preparation for disassembly ......................................................................................................... 130 8.4.2 Inspection before disassembly...................................................................................................... 131 8.4.3 Disassembly.................................................................................................................................. 131
8.5 Washing and inspection procedure ......................................................................................133 8.5.1 Washing ........................................................................................................................................ 133 8.5.2 Inspection procedure .................................................................................................................... 134
8.6 Reassembly procedure ........................................................................................................137 8.6.1 Preparation for reassembly........................................................................................................... 137 8.6.2 Reassembly .................................................................................................................................. 137
8.7 Handling after disassembly and reassembly ........................................................................140
8.7.1 Instructions for turbocharger installation ....................................................................................... 140
8.8 Troubleshooting ...................................................................................................................141 8.8.1 Excessively exhaust smoke .......................................................................................................... 141 8.8.2 White smoke generation ............................................................................................................... 141 8.8.3 Sudden oil decrease ..................................................................................................................... 142 8.8.4 Decrease in output........................................................................................................................ 142 8.8.5 Poor (slow) response (starting) of turbocharger ........................................................................... 142 8.8.6 Abnormal sound or vibration ......................................................................................................... 142
9. Starting motror ............................................................................................................. 143 9.1 For 4TNV94L/ 98 ..................................................................................................................143 9.1.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................ 143 9.1.2 Components.................................................................................................................................. 144 9.1.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................ 145 9.1.4 Names of parts and disassembly procedure................................................................................. 146 9.1.5 Inspection and maintenance ......................................................................................................... 150 9.1.6 Service standards ......................................................................................................................... 155 9.1.7 Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 156 9.1.8 Characteristic test ......................................................................................................................... 158
9.2 For 4TNV106 (T) ..................................................................................................................159 9.2.1 Specifications................................................................................................................................ 159 9.2.2 Congiguration drawing .................................................................................................................. 159 9.2.3 Troubleshooting ............................................................................................................................ 160 9.2.4 Component names and disassembly procedure........................................................................... 161 9.2.5 Disassembly procedure ................................................................................................................ 162 9.2.6 Inspection and maintenance ......................................................................................................... 170 9.2.7 Assembly ...................................................................................................................................... 176 9.2.8 Adjustment .................................................................................................................................... 177 9.2.9 Service standards ......................................................................................................................... 178
10. Alternator ................................................................................................................... 179 10.1 The 40A alternator for 3TNV84 and other models .............................................................179 10.1.1 Components................................................................................................................................ 179 10.1.2 Specifications.............................................................................................................................. 180 10.1.3 Wiring diagram............................................................................................................................ 180 10.1.4 Standard output characteristics .................................................................................................. 181 10.1.5 Inspection.................................................................................................................................... 181 10.1.6 Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................... 182
11. Electric wiring ............................................................................................................ 183 11.1 Electric wiring diagram .......................................................................................................183 11.2 Precaution on electric wiring ..............................................................................................184
11.2.1 Alternator .................................................................................................................................... 184 11.2.2 Starter ......................................................................................................................................... 185 11.2.3 Current limiter ............................................................................................................................. 186 11.2.4 Section area and resistance of electric wire ............................................................................... 187
12. Service standards ...................................................................................................... 188 12.1 Engine tuning .....................................................................................................................188 12.2 Engine body .......................................................................................................................189 12.2.1 Cylinder head.............................................................................................................................. 189 12.2.2 Gear train and camshaft ............................................................................................................. 192 12.2.3 Cylinder block ............................................................................................................................. 193
12.3 Lubricating oil system (Trochoid pump) .............................................................................198
13. Tightening torque for bolts and nuts .......................................................................... 199 13.1 Tightening torques for main bolts and nuts ........................................................................199 13.2 Tightening torques for standard bolts and nuts ..................................................................200
1. General
1. General 1.1 Engine nomenclature
4 TNV ٤٤ (A) (T) - ٤٤ ٤ Destination code Nominal engine speed or output code T: With turbocharger None: Natural aspirated engine The subdivision code of the model name Cylinder bore (in mm) Model series Number of cylinders
The engine specification class Classification
Load
Engine speed
Available engine speed (min-1)
CL
Constant load
Constant speed
1500/1800
VM
Variable load
Variable speed
2000-3000
Ú The engine specification class (CL or VM) is described in the specifications table.
1.2 Specifications NOTE: 1)The information described in the engine specifications tables (the next page and after) is for "standard" engine. To obtain the information for the engine installed in each machine unit, refer to the manual provided by the equipment manufacturer. 2)Engine rating conditions are as follows (SAE J1349, ISO 3046/1) • Atmospheric condition: Room temp. 25 °C, Atmospheric press. 100 kPa (750 mm Hg), Relative humidity 30 % • Fuel temp: 25 °C (Fuel injection pump inlet) • With cooling fan, air cleaner, exhaust silencer (Yanmar standard parts) • After running-in hours. Output allowable deviation: ± 3 %
1
1. General
(1) 3TNV82A Engine name
Unit
3TNV82A
Engine specification class
-
CL
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
3
mm × mm
82 × 84
L
1.331
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed
VM
Min-1
1500 1800
-
kW (ps)
9.9 12.0 (13.5) (16.3)
-
Min-1
1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
kW (ps)
11.0 13.2 14.6 16.0 17.5 18.2 19.0 20.4 21.9 (14.9) (17.9) (19.9) (21.8) (23.8) (24.8) (25.8) (27.8) (29.8)
min-1
1600 1895 2180 2375 2570 2675 2780 2995 3180
Ignition order
-
1-3-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Total
L
5.5
Effective
L
1.9
L
1.8
Rated output
Output Max. no-load speed (± 25)
Lubricant capacity (oil pan) *
Cooling water capacity (engine only) Overall Engine Dimensions ** length (with flyw Crankshaft Overall V pulley diameter & width heel housing) * Overall height Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
mm
553
528
mm
489
mm
565
kg
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
138
128 335 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
120 × 90
110 × 110
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
2
1. General
(2) 3TNV84 Engine name
Unit
3TNV84
Engine specification class
-
CL
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
3
mm × mm
84 × 90
L
1.496
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed
VM
Min-1
1500 1800
-
kW (ps)
11.3 13.5 (15.3) (18.3)
-
Min-1
1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
kW (ps)
12.4 14.8 16.4 18.1 19.7 20.5 21.3 23.0 24.6 (16.8) (20.1) (22.3) (24.6) (26.8) (27.9) (29.0) (31.3) (33.5)
min-1
1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2690 2810 2995 3210
Ignition order
-
1-3-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD
Total
L
6.7
Effective
L
2.8
L
2.0
Rated output
Output Max. no-load speed (± 25)
Lubricant capacity (oil pan) *
Cooling water capacity (engine only) Overall length
* Overall Engine dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
mm
589
564
mm
486
mm
622
kg
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
161
155 335 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
120 × 90
110 × 110
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
3
1. General
(3) 3TNV84T Engine name
Unit
3TNV84T
Engine specification class
-
CL
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
3
mm × mm
84 × 90
L
1.496
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Rated output
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed Output
Max. no-load speed (± 25)
VM
Min-1
1500 1800
-
kW (ps)
14.0 16.5 (19.0) (22.5)
-
Min-1
1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
kW (ps)
15.8 18.8 (21.5) (25.5)
25.0 26.0 26.8 29.1 30.9 (34.0) (35.3) (36.5) (39.5) (42.0)
min-1
1600 1895
2590 2700 2810 2995 3210
Ignition order
-
1-3-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Total
L
6.7
Effective
L
2.8
L
2.0
Lubricant capacity (oil pan) *
Cooling water capacity (engine only) Overall length
* Overall Engine dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
mm
589
564
mm
486
mm
622
kg
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
161
155 350 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
120 × 90
110 × 110
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
4
1. General
(4) 3TNV88 Engine name
Unit
3TNV88
Engine specification class
-
CL
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
3
mm × mm
88 × 90
L
1.642
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed
VM
Min-1
1500 1800
-
kW (ps)
12.3 14.8 (16.7) (20.1)
-
Min-1
1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
kW (ps)
13.5 16.3 18.0 19.9 21.6 22.6 23.5 25.2 27.1 (18.4) (22.1) 24.5) (27.0) (29.4) (30.7) (31.9) (34.2) (36.8)
min-1
1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2700 2810 2995 3210
Ignition order
-
1-3-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan) * Effective
L
6.7
L
2.8
L
2.0
Rated output
Output Max. no-load speed (± 25)
Cooling water capacity (engine only) Overall length
* Overall Engine dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height
mm
589
564
mm
486
mm
622
kg
155
Cooling fan (std.) *
Mm
335 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
Mm
Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
120 × 90
120 × 90
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
5
1. General
(5) 4TNV84 Engine name
Unit
4TNV84
Engine specification class
-
CL
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
4
mm × mm
84 × 90
L
1.995
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous Rating
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed
VM
Min-1
1500 1800
-
kW (ps)
14.9 17.7 (20.3) (24.1)
-
Min-1
1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
kW (ps)
16.4 19.5 21.9 24.1 26.3 27.4 28.5 30.7 32.9 (22.3) (26.5) (29.8) (32.8) (35.8) (37.3) (38.7) 41.7) (44.7)
min-1
1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2700 2810 2995 3210
Ignition order
-
1-3-4-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan) * Effective
L
7.4
L
3.4
L
2.7
Rated output
Output Max. no-load speed (± 25)
Cooling water capacity (engine only) Overall length
* Overall Engine dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
mm
683
658
mm
498.5
mm
617
kg
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
183
170 370 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
120 × 90
110 × 110
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
6
1. General
(6) 4TNV84T Engine name
Unit
4TNV84T
Engine specification class
-
CL
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
4
mm × mm
84 × 90
L
1.995
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Rated output
Revolving speed
Min-1 KW (ps)
Output Revolving speed
Min-1 KW (ps)
Output Max. no-load speed (± 25)
min-1
1500
VM
1800
-
19.1 24.3 (26.0) (33.0)
-
1500
1800
2000
2200
2400
2600
2800
21.3 26.9 27.9 30.5 33.5 35.7 38.6 41.2 (29.0) (36.5) (38.0) (41.5) (45.5) (48.5) (52.5) (56.0) 1600
1895
2180
2400
2590
2810
2995
Ignition order
-
1-3-4-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Total
L
7.4
Effective
L
3.4
L
3.2
Lubricant capacity (oil pan) *
Cooling water capacity (engine only)
Engine dimensions *,**
Overall length
mm
Overall width
mm
498.5
Overall height
mm
713
Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
kg
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
3000
683
183
649
170 370 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
120 × 90
110 × 110
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
7
3210
1. General
(7) 4TNV88 Engine name
Unit
4TNV88
Engine specification class
-
CL
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
4
mm × mm
88 × 90
L
2.190
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed
VM
Min-1
1500 1800
-
kW (ps)
16.4 19.6 (22.3) (26.7)
-
Min-1
1500 1800 2000 2200 2400 2500 2600 2800 3000
kW (ps)
18.0 21.6 24.1 26.5 28.8 30.1 31.3 33.7 35.4 (24.5) (29.4) (32.7) (36.0) (39.2) (40.9) (42.5) (45.8) (48.1)
min-1
1600 1895 2180 2400 2590 2700 2810 2995 3210
Ignition order
-
1-3-4-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan) * Effective
L
7.4
L
3.4
L
2.7
Rated output
Output Max. no-load speed (± 25)
Cooling water capacity (engine only) Overall length
* Overall Engine dimensions ** width (with wheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
mm
683
658
mm
498.5
mm
618
kg
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
183
170 370 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
120 × 90
110 × 110
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
8
1. General
(8) 4TNV94L Engine name
Unit
4TNV94L
Engine specification class
-
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
4
mm × mm
94 × 110
L
3.054
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Rated output
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed Output
Max. no-load speed (± 25)
CL
VM
Min-1
1500
1800
-
kW (ps)
26.1 (35.5)
31.3 (42.5)
-
Min-1
1500
1800
2000
2200
2400
2500
kW (ps)
29.1 (39.5)
34.6 (47.0)
35.3 (48.0)
38.2 (52.0)
41.6 (56.5)
43.0 (58.5)
min-1
1600
1895
2180
2400
2590
2700
Ignition order
-
1-3-4-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Total
L
10.5
Effective
L
4.5
L
4.2
mm
719
mm
498
mm
742
Lubricant capacity (oil pan) *
Cooling water capacity (engine only) Overall length
* Overall Engine dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
kg
245 (equivalent to SAE # 3)
235 (equivalent to SAE # 4)
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
410 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
130 × 130
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
9
1. General
(9) 4TNV98 Engine name
Unit
4TNV98
Engine specification class
-
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
4
mm × mm
98 × 110
L
3.319
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Rated output
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed Output
Max. no-load speed (± 25)
CL
VM
Min-1
1500
1800
-
kW (ps)
30.9 (42.0)
36.8 (50.0)
-
Min-1
1500
1800
2000
2200
2400
2500
kW (ps)
34.6 (47.0
41.2 (56.0)
41.9 (57.0)
45.6 (62.0)
49.3 (67.0)
51.1 (69.5)
min-1
1600
1895
2180
2400
2590
2700
Ignition order
-
1-3-4-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan) * Effective
L
10.5
L
4.5
L
4.2
mm
719
mm
498
mm
742
Cooling water capacity (engine only) Overall length
* Overall Engine dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
kg
248 (equivalent to SAE # 3)
235 (equivalent to SAE # 4)
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
410 mm O/D, 6 blades pusher type F
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
130 × 130
* Engine oil capacity may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
10
1. General
(10)4TNV98T Engine name
Unit
4TNV98T
Engine specification class
-
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
4
mm × mm
88 × 110
L
3.319
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Rated output
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed Output
Max. no-load speed (± 25)
CL
VM
Min-1
1500
1800
-
kW (ps)
37.9 (51.5)
45.6 (62.0)
-
Min-1
1500
1800
2000
2200
2400
2500
2600
kW (ps)
41.9 (57.0)
50.4 (68.5)
50.7 (69.0)
55.5 (75.5)
60.3 (82.0)
62.5 (85.0)
64.0 (87.0)
min-1
1600
1895
2180
2400
2590
2700
2810
Ignition order
-
1-3-4-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Total
L
10.5
Effective
L
4.5
L
4.2
mm
715
mm
575
mm
804
Lubricant capacity (oil pan) *
Cooling water capacity (engine only) Overall length
* Overall Engine dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) *,** (with flywheel housing)
kg
258 (equivalent to SAE # 3)
245 (equivalent to SAE # 4)
Cooling fan (std.)
mm
430 mm O/D, 8 blades suction type
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
130 × 130
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
11
1. General
(11)4TNV106 Engine name
Unit
4TNV106
Engine specification class
-
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
4
mm × mm
106 × 125
L
4.412
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Rated output
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed Output
Max. no-load speed (± 25)
CL
VM
Min-1
1500
1800
-
kW (ps)
41.2 (56.0)
49.3 (67.0)
-
Min-1
1500
1800
2000
2200
2400
2500
kW (ps)
45.6 (62.0
54.4 (74.0)
56.6 (77.0)
61.4 (83.5)
65.5 (89.0)
67.7 (92.0)
min-1
1600
1895
2180
2400
2590
2700
Ignition order
-
1-3-4-2-1 (No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan) * Effective
L
14.0
Cooling water capacity (engine only)
L
9.0
L Overall length
7.5 6.0
mm
808
776
mm
629
629
mm
803
803
kg
345 (equivalent to SAE # 3)
330 (equivalent to SAE # 3)
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
500 mm O/D, 7 blades pusher type
500 mm O/D, 7 blades suction type
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
* Overall Engine dimensions ** width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) *, ** (with flywheel housing)
150 × 150
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
12
1. General
(12)4TNV106T Engine name
Unit
4TNV106T
Engine specification class
-
Type
-
Vertical, in-line, 4-cycle, water-cooled diesel engine
Combustion chamber
-
Direct injection
Number of cylinders
-
4
mm × mm
106 × 125
L
4.412
Cylinder bore × stroke Displacement Continuous rating
Rated output
Revolving speed Output Revolving speed Output
Max. no-load speed (± 25)
CL
VM
Min-1
1500
1800
-
kW (ps)
51.5 (70.0)
61.8 (84.0)
-
Min-1
1500
1800
2000
2200
kW (ps)
56.8 (77.2
68.0 (92.5)
69.9 (95.0)
72.0 (97.9)
min-1
1600
1895
2180
2400
Ignition order
-
1-3-4-2-1(No.1 cylinder on flywheel side)
Power take off
-
Flywheel
Direction of rotation
-
Counterclockwise (viewed from flywheel)
Cooling system
-
Radiator
Lubrication system
-
Forced lubrication with trochoid pump
Starting system
-
Electric
Applicable fuel
-
Diesel oil-ISO 8217 DMA, BS 2869 A1 or A2 (Cetane No.45 min.)
Applicable lubricant
-
API grade class CD or CF
Lubricant capacity Total (oil pan) * Effective
L
14.0
Cooling water capacity (engine only)
L
9.0
7.5
L Overall length
6.0
mm
808
776
mm
629
629
mm
866
866
kg
355 (equivalent to SAE # 3)
340 (equivalent to SAE # 3)
Cooling fan (std.) *
mm
500 mm O/D, 7 blades pusher type
500 mm O/D, 7 blades suction type
Crankshaft V pulley diameter & Fun V pulley diameter (std.) *
mm
*
Engine dimensions ** Overall width (with flywheel housing) Overall height Engine mass (dry) *, ** (with flywheel housing)
150 × 150
* Items marked * may differ from the above depending on an engine installed on a machine unit. ** Engine mass and dimensions without radiator
13
1. General
1.3 Fuel oil, lubricating oil and cooling water 1.3.1 Fuel oil IMPORTANT: Only use the recommended fuel to obtain the best engine performance and to keep the durability of the engine, also to comply with the emission regulations.
(1) Selection of fuel oil Diesel fuel oil should comply with the following specifications. • The fuel specifications need to comply with each national standard or international standards. • ASTM D975 No.1-D No.2-D ------------- for USA • EN590:96-------------------------------------- for EU • ISO 8217 DMX -------------------------------------- International • BS 2869-A1 or A2 ---------------------------------- for UK • JIS K2204 ---------------------------------------- for JAPAN The following requirements also need to be fulfilled. • Cetane number should be equal to 45 or higher. • Sulphur content of the fuel It should not exceed 0.5%by volume. (Preferably it should be below 0.05 %) • For alternative fuel (Bio fuel such as FAME, JP-8), please contact YANMAR. • Water and sediment in the fuel oil should not exceed 0.05% by volume. • Ash should not exceed 0.01%by mass. • 10% Carbon residue content of the fuel It should not exceed 0.35%by volume. (Preferably it should be below 0.1 %) • Aromatics(total) content of the fuel It should not exceed 35% by volume. (Preferably it should be below 30% and aromatics(PAH*) content of the fuel preferably it should be below 10%) PAH*:polycyclic aromatic hydrocarbons • DO NOT use Biocide. • DO NOT use Kerosene, residual fuels. • DO NOT mix winter fuel and summer fuel.
Note : Engine breakdown can be attributed to insufficient quality of fuel oil.
14
1. General
(2) Fuel handling â&#x20AC;˘ Water and dust in the fuel oil can cause operation failure. Use containers which are clean inside to store fuel oil. Store the containers away from rain water and dust.
Pump up only the fuel in the upper half to leave dregs near the bottom
â&#x20AC;˘ Before supplying fuel, let the fuel container rest for several hours so that water and dust in the fuel are deposited on the bottom. Pump up only the clean fuel.
(3) Fuel tank Fuel tank inside should be always clean enough and dry it inside for the first use. Drain the water according to the maintenance (section 5) with a drain valve.
Filler port Fuel return connection Primary strainer Outlet (to engine) Drain cock
15
1. General
1.3.2 Lubricating oil IMPORTANT: Only use the recommended engine oil to keep the durability of the engine.
(1) Selection of lube oil Engine oil shoud comply with the following specifications. 1)Classification â&#x20AC;˘ API classification Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â? CD, CF, CF-4, CI-4 TBN value : Âş9(CD), Âş9(CF), Âş7(CF-4), Âş7(CI-4) â&#x20AC;˘ ACEA classification Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â? E-3, E-4, E-5 TBN value : Âş10(E-3), Âş10(E-4), Âş10(E-5) â&#x20AC;˘ JASO classification Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â?Â? DH-1 TBN value : Âş10(DH-1) The oil must be changed when the Total Base Number (TBN) has been reduced to 2.0. *TBN(mgKOH/g) test method; JIS K-2501-5.2-2(HCI), ASTM D4739(HCI) DO NOT use The following engine oils. â&#x20AC;˘ API : CG-4 , CH-4 â&#x20AC;˘ ACEA : E-1, E-2 , B grade â&#x20AC;˘ JASO : DH-2 , DL-1 Reason API CG-4, CH-4 In case CG-4, CH-4 is to be used for YANMAR TNV diesel engine series, there is a possibility that excessive wears occur on the valve train system due to the content of oil. ACEA E-1,E-2, B These fuels are developed for the different type of diesel engines. JASO DH-2, DL-1 These fuels are developed for the different type of diesel engines. 2)Viscosity Selection of viscosity will be determined depending on the ambient temperature.
Selection of viscosity (SAE Service grade) 9 9
(Refer to the chart on the right.) The following requirements are also need to be
9 9
fulfilled. â&#x20AC;˘ Standard engine oil service interval is 250 hrs or
every 12 months. â&#x20AC;˘ DO NOT add any additives to the engine oil.
â&#x20AC;Ť Ţ&#x201C; Ţ&#x201C; Ţ&#x201C; Ţ&#x201C; Ţ&#x201C; Ţ&#x201C; Ţ&#x201C;â&#x20AC;Ź
â&#x20AC;˘ DO NOT mix the different types (brand) of engine oil.
Atmospheric temperature ( C) 15W-40/10W-30 can be used almost throughout the year.
â&#x20AC;˘ DO NOT use synthetic oil.
16
1. General
(2) Handling of lube oil • Keep the engine oil carefully in store in order to prevent any dust or dirt entrance. • When filling the engine oil to the engine, avoid the spillage and pay attention to be clean around the filler port. Contact with engine oil may result in the roughened skin. Care should be taken so as not to contact with engine oil wearing protective gloves and clothing. If contact, wash with soap and water thoroughly. When handling the engine oil, make sure to use the protective gloves at any time. In case of contact, wash your hand or body with soap and water thoroughly.
1.3.3 Cooling water Use clean soft water and always be sure to add LLC (Long Life Coolant) in order to prevent rust built up and freezing. (Do not use water only.) The recommended LLC conform to the following specifications. • JIS K-2234 • SAEbJ814C, J1941, J1034, J2036 • ASTM D4985 IMPORTANT: • Always be sure to add LLC to soft water. In particular, in cold season, to add LLC is important. • Without LLC, • Cooling performance will decrease due to scale and rust in the cooling water system. • Cooling water may freeze to form ice; it expands approx. 9% in volume. • This causes serious damage in the cooling system. • Be sure to use the proper amount of coolant concentrate specified by the LLC manufacturer depending on the ambient temperature. • LLC concentration should be 30%as a minimum and 60%as a maximum. • DO NOT mix the different types of brand of LLC, otherwise harmful sludge may yield. • DO NOT use hard water. • Water should be free from sludge and/or particles. • Replace the coolant every once a year. When handling LLC, use protective gloves to avoid skin contact. In case you have a contact with your skin or eyes, wash out it with clean water.
17
1. General
1.4 Engine external views Filler port (engine oil) Turbocharger* Air intake port [from air cleaner(optional)]
Lifting eye
Lifting eye Cooling water pump
Fuel filter mounting Fuel oil inlet Fuel filter Intake manifold Governor lever Fuel injection pump
Cooling fan Crank shaft V-pulley Dipstick (engine oil) Engine oil filter
V-belt Filler port (engine oil) Drain plug (engine oil) Engine oil cooler (4TNV98T, 4TNV106, 4TNV106T)
Engine name plate Rocker arm cover
Flywheel Alternator
Exhaust manifold Starter motor Note) เกฎThis illustration shows the 4TNV98T engine (with turbocharger). เกฎThe drain plug (engine oil) location depends on the engine installed on the machine unit to be on the fuel injection pump side (above illustration) or starter motor side.
18
1. General
1.5 Structural description
2-valve cylinder head Noise Reduction
Emission Reduction Injection Nozzle Low Suck Volume Multi Injection Holes
New Lub. Oil Pump Change Rotor Shape for Low Pulsation Driven by Crankshaft Directly Emission Reduction New fuel injection pump Mono Plunger Higher Injection Pressure Injection Timing Control Speed Timer, _oad Timer, Cold Start timer
Emission Reduction Cylinder Head Optimal Nozzle Angle Optimal Swirl Ratio Optimal Valve Timing
Emission Reduction Piston New Combustion Chamber
Noise Reduction Higher Stiffness Cylinder Block Noise Reduction Higher Stiffness Gear-Case
4-valve cylinder head Emission Reduction Cylinder Head 4Valve / Cylinder (intake-2, exhaust-2) Optimal Installation of the Injection Nozzle Vertical Installation and Location of the Center of Cylinder Optimal Valve Timing
Noise Reduction (only applied for 4TNV84T) New Lub. Oil Pump Change Rotor Shape for Low Pulsation Driven by Crankshaft Directly
Emission Reduction New Fuel Inj. Nozzle Low Suck Volume Multi Injection Holes
Emission Reduction Piston New Combustion Chamber
Emission Reduction New Fuel Injection Pump Mono Plunger Higher Injection Pressure Mechanical Control of Injection Timing Speed Timer, Load Timer, Cold Start Timer
4TNV84T/4TNV94L/4TNV98(T)
19
1. General
1.6 Exhaust gas emission regulation The engines in this manual have been certified by the US EPA, California ARB and/or the 97/68/EC Directive. California Proposition 65 Warning Diesel engine exhaust and some of its constitutions are known to the State of California to cause cancer, birth defects, and other reproductive harm. California Proposition 65 Warning Battery posts,terminals,and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and reproductive harm.
1.6.1 The emission standard in USA (1) EPA Nonroad Diesel Engine Emission Standards g/kW•hr (g/bhp•hr) Tier
Model Year
NOx
HC
NMHC + NOx
CO
PM
kW < 8 (hp < 11)
Tier 1
2000
-
-
10.5 (7.8)
8.0 (6.0)
1.0 (0.75)
Tier 2
2005
-
-
7.5 (5.6)
8.0 (6.0)
0.80 (0.60)
8 <= kW < 19 (11 <= hp < 25)
Tier 1
2000
-
-
9.5 (7.1)
6.6 (4.9)
0.80 (0.60)
Tier 2
2005
-
-
7.5 (5.6)
6.6 (4.9)
0.80 (0.60)
19<= kW < 37 (25 <= hp < 50)
Tier 1
1999
-
-
9.5 (7.1)
5.5 (4.1)
0.80 (0.60)
Tier 2
2004
-
-
7.5 (5.6)
5.5 (4.1)
0.60 (0.45)
Tier 1
1998
9.2 (6.9)
-
-
-
-
Tier 2
2004
-
-
7.5 (5.6)
5.0 (3.7)
0.40 (0.30)
Tier 3
2008
-
-
4.7 (3.5)
5.0 (3.7)
Tier 1
1997
9.2 (6.9)
-
-
-
-
Tier 2
2003
-
-
6.6 (4.9)
5.0 (3.7)
0.30 (0.22)
Tier 3
2007
-
-
4.0 (3.0)
5.0 (3.7)
Engine Power
37 <= kW < 75 (50 <= hp < 100)
75 <= kW < 130 (100 <= hp < 175)
Note1) The EPA emission regulation under 130 kW is mentioned below. Note2) As for Model year, the year which a regulation is applicable to is shown.
Engine classification
Transient smoke standards % opacity (acceleration/lug/peak modes)
Constant speed engine
Not regulated
Variable speed engine
20/15/50 or less
(2) California ARB Emission Regulation The ARB emission standard is based on that of the EPA.
20
1. General
1.6.2 Engine identification (1) Emission control labels of US EPA
# /1&'. ;'#4 7 5 '2# 4')7.#6+105 01041#& % + '0)+0'5 %1056#06 52''& 10.; " 75 & " (7'. %
# /1&'. ;'#4 7 5 '2# 4')7.#6+105 01041#& %1/24'55+10 +)0+6+10 '0)+0'5 " 75 & " (7'.
&
'
% (
)
*
+
)
EPA label for constant speed engines
* #
'
% (
( *
+
EPA label for variable speed engines
(2) Emission control label for both EPA and ARB
$ &
&
'
)
(3) 97/68EC Directive label
'% &+4'%6+8' # $ %
21
1. General
1.6.3 Guarantee conditions for the EPA emission standard The following guarantee conditions are set down in the operation manual. In addition to making sure that these conditions are met, check for any deterioration that may occur before the required periodic maintenance times.
(1) Requirement on engine installation condition (a)Intake air depression kPa (mmAq) Initial
Permissible
<= 2.94 (300)
<= 6.23 (635)
(b)Exhaust gas back pressure kPa (mmAq) Engine type
Initial
Permissible
Naturally aspirated engines
<= 12.75 (1300)
<= 15.30 (1560)
4TNV98T, 4TNV106T
<= 9.81 (1000)
<= 11.77 (1200)
3,4TNV84T
<= 4.90 (500)
<= 5.88 (600)
(2) Fuel oil and lubricating oil (a)Fuel: The diesel fuel oil US No.2 diesel fuel oil. (b)Lube oil: API grade, class CD or CF
(3) Do not remove the seals restricting injection quantity and engine speed.
Sealing cap Gasket Cap nut Gasket Plate Nut Injection quant limit bc Tamper Seal washer resistance Assy Tamper resistance device for engines certified by ARB/EPA
22
1. General
(4) Perform maintenance without fail. Note: Inspections to be carried out by the user and by the maker are divided and set down in the "List of Periodic Inspections" and should be checked carefully.
(5) Maintenance period and quality guarantee period for exhaust emission related parts The maintenance of the parts related to the exhaust emission must be carried out in the maintenance period as shown in the below table. A guarantee period is that either the operation hours or years shown in the table come first in the condition that the maintenance inspection was carried out based on the "List of Periodic Inspections". Maintenance period Parts â&#x20AC;˘Fuel nozzle cleaning Power Rating
Quality Guarantee Period
Adjustment, cleaning, repairs for fuel nozzle, fuel pump, turbocharger, electronic control unit etc.
For nozzle, fuel pump, turbocharger
37 <= kW < 130
Every 1500 hours (applied from Tier 2)
Every 3000 hours (applied from Tier 2)
3000 hours / 5 years
19 <= kW < 37 except constant speed engines >= 3000 min-1
Every 1500 hours
Every 3000 hours
3000 hours / 5 years
Every 1500 hours KW < 19 And constant speed engines beyond 3000 min-1 under 37 kW
Every 3000 hours
1500 hours / 2 years
23
2. Inspection and adjustment
2. Inspection and adjustment 2.1 Periodic maintenance schedule The engine periodic inspection timing is hard to determine as it varies with the application, load status, qualities of the fuel and lubricating oils used and handling status. General rules are described here. c: User-maintenance
Classification
Whole
Item
Daily
c c
Visual check around engine Fuel tank level check and fuel supply
c c c
Fuel tank draining Fuel oil system
Every 50 hours
: Parts replacement z: Shop-inspection Maintenance period Every Every Every Every 250 500 1000 2000 hours or hours hours hours 3 or 6 or one or two months months year years
Water separator (Option) draining Bleeding the fuel system
c
Water separator cleaning Fuel filter element replacement
c
Lube oil level check and replenishment Lubricating oil system
Lube oil replacement 1st time
Lube oil filter replacement Coolant water level check and replenishment Radiator fin cleaning Cooling water system
2nd time and thereafter
c
c
V-belt tension check
st
1 time
c c 2nd time and thereafter
Coolant water replacement
Rubber house Governor
Air intake system
Electrical system Cylinder head
Coolant water path flushing and maintenance Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement
c
z
c
c
z
c z
Diaphragm assy inspection
(2 years)
z*
Turbocharger blower cleaning* Warning lamp & instruments function check Battery electrolyte level check and battery recharging Intake/exhaust valve head clearance adjustment Intake/exhaust valve seat lapping
c c z z z*
Fuel injection nozzle pressure inspection Fuel injection pump Fuel injection timing adjustment and Fuel injection pump inspection and nozzle adjustment
z*
*) EPA allows to maintain the emission related parts every 1,500 or 3,000 hours as shown in 1.6.3 of chapter1.
24
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.2 Periodic inspection and maintenance procedure 2.2.1 Check before daily operation Be sure to check the following points before starting an engine every day. No.
Inspection Item
(1)
Visual check around engine
(2)
Fuel tank level check and fuel supply
(3)
Lube oil level check and replenishment
(4)
Coolant water level check and replenishment
(5)
Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance
(6)
Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator
(7)
Warning lamp & instruments function check
(1) Visual check around engine If any problem is found, do not use before the engine repairs have been completed. • Oil leak from the lubrication system • Fuel leak from the fuel system • Coolant water leak from the cooling water system • Damaged parts • Loosened or lost bolts • Fuel, radiator rubber hoses, V belt cracked, loosened clamp
(2) Fuel tank level check and fuel supply Check the remaining fuel oil level in the fuel tank and refuel the recommended fuel if necessary. (Refer to 1.3.(1))
(3) Lube oil level check and replenishment (a)Checking oil level
Filler cap
Check the lube oil level with the dipstick, after adjusting the posture of the machine unit so that an
Filler port (engine oil)
engine may become a horizontality. Insert the dipstick fully and check the oil level. The oil shall not be contaminated heavily and have appropriate viscosity. No coolant water or diesel fuel shall be mixed. When lube oil is supplied after the engine running, check the lube oil level after about 10 minutes pass after the engine shutdown so that the lube oil inside may be retuned the oil pan. Dipstick
Dipstick
Standard The level shall be between the upper and lower limit lines on the dipstick.
φ Upper limit φ Lower limit
25
2. Inspection and adjustment
(Unit: liter) Model
Total volume (L)
Effective volume (L)
3TNV82A
5.5
1.9
3TNV84 (T)•88
6.7
2.8
4TNV84 (T)•88
7.4
3.4
4TNV94L98•(T)
10.5
4.5
4TNV106 (T) (CL class)
14.0
9.0
4TNV106 (T) (VM class)
14.0
7.5
Lube oil capacity may differ from the above volume depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.
(b)Replenishing oil pan with lube oil If the remaining engine oil level is low, fill the oil pan with the specified engine oil to the specified level through the filler port. [NOTICE] The oil should not be overfilled to exceed the upper limit line. Otherwise a naturally-aspirated engine may intake lube oil in the combustion chamber during the operation, then white smoke, oil hummer or urgent rotation may occur, because the blowby gas is reduced in the suction air flow. In case of turbo-charged engine oil may jet out from the breather or the engine may become faulty.
(4) Coolant water inspection Daily inspection of coolant water should be done only by Coolant recovery tank. •Never open the radiator filler cap while the engine and radiator are still hot. Steam and hot water will spurt out and seriously burn you. Wait until the radiator is cooled down after the engine has stopped, wrap the filler cap with a rag piece and turn the cap slowly to gently release the pressure inside the radiator. •Securely tighten the filler cap after checking the radiator. Steam can spurt out during operation, if the cap is tightened loosely. (a)Checking coolant water volume Check the coolant water level in the Coolant recovery tank. If the water level is close to the LOW mark, open the Coolant recovery tank cap and replenish the Coolant recovery tank with clean soft water to the FULL mark. Standard The water level of the Coolant recovery tank shall be between the upper and lower limit lines.
(b)Replenishing engine with water If the Coolant recovery tank water level is lower than the LOW mark, open the radiator cap and check the coolant water level in the radiator. Replenish the radiator with the coolant water, if the level is low. • Check the coolant water level while the engine is cool. Checking when the engine is hot is dangerous. And the water volume is expanded due to the heat.
Tighten
Loosen
• Daily coolant water level check and replenishing shall be done only at the Coolant recovery tank. Usually do not open the radiator cap to check or replenish. 26
Radiator cap
2. Inspection and adjustment
IMPORTANT: If the coolant water runs short quickly or when the radiator runs short of water with the Coolant recovery tank level unchanged, water may be leaking or the air tightness may be lost. Increase in the Coolant recovery tank water level during operation is not abnormal. The increased water in the Coolant recovery tank returns to the radiator when the engine is cooled down. If the water level is normal in the Coolant recovery tank but low in the radiator, check loosened clamping of the rubber hose between the radiator and Coolant recovery tank or tear in the hose. Standard Engine: The radiator shall be filled up. (Unit: liter) Model
Coolant water volume In an engine
3TNV82A
1.8
3TNV84 (T) 3TNV88
2.0
4TNV84 (T) 4TNV88
2.7
4TNV94L 4TNV98 (T)
4.2
4TNV106 (T)
6.0
Engine coolant water capacity may differ from the above volume depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.
(5) Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance Check the rubber hoses for fuel and coolant water pipes cracked. If the cracked hose is found, replace it with new one. Check the loosened clamp. If found, tighten it.
(6) Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator Make sure the accelerator of the machine unit can be operated smoothly before starting the engine. If it feels heavy to manipulate, lubricate the accelerator cable joints and pivots. Adjust the accelerator cable if there is a dislocation or excessive play between the accelerator and the governor lever. Refer to 3.2.3.
(7) Warning lamp & instruments function check Before and after starting the engine, check to see that the alarm function normally. Failure of alarm cannot warn the lack of the engine oil or the coolant water. Make it a rule to check the alarm operation before and after starting engine every day. Refer to each manual for machine units in details.
2.2.2 inspection after initial 50 hours operation Be sure to check the following points after initial 50 hours operation, thereafter every 250 hours or 3 months operation. No.
Inspection Item
(1)
Lube oil and filter replacement
(2)
V-belt tension check
(1) Lube oil and filter replacement (1st time) When an engine is still hot, be careful with a splash of engine oil which may cause burns. Replace engine oil after the engine oil becomes warm. It is most effective to drain the engine oil while the engine is still warm.
27
2. Inspection and adjustment In early period of use, the engine oil gets dirty rapidly because of the initial wear of internal parts. Replace the engine oil earlier. Lube oil filter should also be replaced when the engine oil is replaced. The procedure of lube oil and lube oil filter replacement is as follows.
(a)Drain engine oil • Prepare a waste oil container collecting waste oil.
Dipstick
• Remove the oil filler cap to drain easily while draining the lube oil. Oil pan
• Loosen the drain plug using a wrench (customer procured) to drain the lube oil. • Securely tighten the drain plug after draining the lube oil. [NOTICE] Use a socket wrench or a closed wrench when
Drain plug The location depends on the engine installed on the machine unit
removing or tightening a drain plug. Don’t use a spanner because it has the possibility that the spanner will slip and it will get hurt.
(b)Replacing oil filter • Turn the lube oil filter counter-clockwise using a filter wrench (customer procured) to remove it. • Clean the mounting face of the oil filter. • Moisten the new oil filter gasket with the engine oil and install the new engine oil filter manually turning it ing surface, and tighten it further to 3/4 of a turn with the filter wrench. Tightening torque: 20 to 24 N•m (2.0 to 2.4 kgf•m) Model
Applicable oil filter Part No.
3TNV82A to 4TNV98 (T)
129150-35151
4TNV106 (T)
119005-35100
(c)Filling oil and inspection • Fill with new engine oil until it reaches the specified level. IMPORTANT: Do not overfill the oil pan with engine oil. Be sure to keep the specified level between upper and lower limit on the dipstick. • Warm up the engine by running for 5 minutes while checking any oil leakage • Stop the engine after warming up and leave it stopping for about 10 minute to recheck the engine oil level with dipstick and replenish the engine oil. If any oil is spilled, wipe it away with a clean cloth. 28
Loosen
clockwise until it comes into contact with the mount-
n
te
gh Ti
Engine oil filter
2. Inspection and adjustment
(2) V-belt tension check When there is not enough tension in the V-belt, the V-
Radiator fan
belt will slip making it impossible for the alternator to
$
Set bolt
generate power and cooling water pump and cooling Alternator
fan will not work causing the engine to overheat. Check and adjust the V-belt tension (deflection) in
Deflection
the following manner.
%
[NOTICE] Be especially careful not to splash engine oil on the
V-belt,
because
it
will
cause
#
V-belt Crankshaft V-pulley
slipping,
Press with thumb
stretching and aging of the belt. 1)Press the V-belt with your thumb [approx. 98N (10 kgf)] at the middle of the V-belt span to check the tension (deflection). Available positions to check and adjust the V-belt tension (deflection) are at the A, B or C direction as shown in the illustration right. You may choose a position whichever you can easily carry out the check and adjustment on the machine unit. â&#x20AC;˘ "New V-belt" refers to a V-belt which has been used less than 5 minutes on a running engine. â&#x20AC;˘ "Used V-belt" refers to a V-belt, which has been used on a running engine for 5 minutes or more. The specified deflection to be measured at each position should be as follows. (Unit: mm) Direction
A
B
C
For used V-belt
10 to 14
7 to 10
9 to 13
For new V-belt
8 to 12
5 to 8
7 to 11
2)If necessary, adjust the V-belt tension (deflection). Adjust the V-belt tension inserting a bar
To adjust the V-belt tension, loosen the set bolt and move the alternator to tighten the V-belt. After replacing with a new V-belt and adjusting it, run the engine for 5 minutes and readjust the deflec-
Adjuster
tion to the value in the table above. 3)After replacing with a new V-belt and adjusting it, run the engine for 5 minutes and readjust the deflection to the value in the table above.
Alternator
Tension adjustment 4)Visually check the V-belt for cracks, oiliness or wear. If any, replace the V-belt with new one.
29
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.2.3 Inspection every 50 hours Be sure to check the following points every 50 hours operation. No.
Inspection Item
(1)
Fuel tank draining
(2)
Water separator draining
(3)
Bleeding the fuel system
(4)
Battery electrolyte level check and battery recharging
(1) Fuel tank draining 1)Prepare a waste oil container. 2)Remove the drain plug of the fuel tank to drain
Fuel tank
(water, dust, etc.) from the fuel tank bottom. 3)Drain until fuel with no water and dust flow out. Then tighten the drain plug firmly.
Drain plug
OPTION
(2) Water separator draining Drain off the water separator whenever there is a lot of
Air bleeding bolt
drain collected in the water separator at the bottom of
Inlet
the cup even if not the time for periodic inspection hour.
Close
The cup of the water separator is made from semi-
Outlet
Fuel cock
transparency material and in the cup, the red colored float ring which rises on the surface of the drain is installed to visualize the amount of drain. Also, the water separator with sensor to detect the drain for warning device on a control panel is provided as the
Open Cup Float ring Drain cock Water separator
optional. Drain off the water separator in the following manner. 1)Prepare a waste oil container. 2)Close the fuel cock. 3)Loosen the drain cock at the bottom of the water separator, and drain off any water collected inside. 4)Tighten the drain cock with hand. 5)Be sure to bleed air in the fuel system.
NOTE: If no drain drips when the drain cock is opened, loosen the air bleeding bolt on the top of the water separator by turning counter-clockwise 2 to 3 times using screw driver. (This may occur in case of the water separator position is higher than the fuel oil level in the fuel tank). After draining, be sure to tighten the air bleeding bolt.
30
2. Inspection and adjustment
(3) Bleeding the fuel system Bleed the fuel system according to the following
Fuel filter
Fuel return hose
procedures. When there is air in the fuel system, the fuel injection pump will not be able to function. 1)Check the fuel oil level in the fuel tank. Refuel if insufficient. 2)Open the cock of the water separator. 3)Loosen the air bleeding bolt on the water separator Fuel injection pump
by turning 2 to 3 times to the counter-clockwise using screw driver or spanner. 4)When the fuel coming out is clear and not mixed with any bubble, tighten the air bleeding bolt.
Air bleeding bolt Inlet
5)Feed the fuel with the fuel priming pump or electro-
Outlet
Close
magnetic fuel feed pump. • In case of the engine using the electro-magnetic fuel
Fuel cock Fuel priming pump Air bleeding bolt
feed pump. Turn the starter switch to the ON position and hold it in the position for 10 to 5 seconds to operate the fuel feed pump.
Open
• In case of the engine installed the fuel filter mounting with the fuel priming pump. The priming pump is on the top of the fuel filter mounting. Move the priming pump up and down to feed fuel until feel your hand slightly heavy.
Drain cock Water separator (installed on the pipe line) Fuel filter Fuel filter mounting with fuel priming pump (option)
(4) Battery electrolyte level check and battery recharging
Fire due to electric short-circuit •Make sure to turn off the battery switch or disconnect the negative cable (-) before inspecting the electrical system. Failure to do so could cause shortcircuiting and fires. •Always disconnect the (-) Negative battery cable first before disconnecting the battery cables from battery. An accidental "Short circuit" may cause damage, fire and or personal injury. And remember to connect the (-) Negative battery cable (back onto the battery) LAST.
Proper ventilation of the battery area Keep the area around the battery well ventilated, paying attention to keep away any fire source. During operation or charging, hydrogen gas is generated from the battery and can be easily ignited.
Do not come in contact with battery electrolyte Pay sufficient attention to avoid your eyes or skin from being in contact with the fluid. The battery electrolyte is dilute sulfuric acid and causes burns. Wash it off immediately with a large amount of fresh water if you get any on you. 31
2. Inspection and adjustment Battery structure Terminal
Cap Cover
Cathode plate Separator Glass mat
Battery case
Anode plate
(1) Electrolyte level • Check the level of fluid in the battery. When the amount of fluid nears the lower limit, fill
GREASE
with battery fluid (available in the market) to the upper limit. If operation continues with insufficient battery fluid, the battery life is shortened, and the battery may overheat and explode.
Upper limit
UPPER LEVEL LOWER LEVEL
OK
Too low
• Battery fluid tends to evaporate more quickly in the
Lower limit
summer, and the fluid level should be checked earlier than the specified times.
Excessive
• If the engine cranking speed is so slow that the engine does not start up, recharge the battery. • If the engine still will not start after charging, replace the battery.
Electrolyte level
• Remove the battery from the battery mounting of the machine unit after daily use if letting the machine unit leave in the place that the ambient temperature could drop at -15 °C or less. And store the battery in a warm place until the next use the unit to start the engine easily at low ambient temperature.
(2) Battery charge Use a battery tester or hydrometer and check the battery condition. If the battery is discharged, recharge it.
(a)Measurement with a battery tester When checking the battery with the batter tester, connect the red clip of the tester to the battery positive (+) terminal and black clip to the battery negative (-) terminal by pinching them securely, and judge the battery charge level from the indicator position. Green zone: Normal Yellow zone: Slightly discharged
Battery tester
Red zone: Defective or much discharged
Battery charge measurement with battery tester 32
2. Inspection and adjustment
(b)Measurement with hydrometer When using a hydrometer, the measured specific gravity must be corrected according to the temperature at the time of measurement. The specific gravity of battery electrolyte is defined with 20 °C as the standard. Since
Float
the specific gravity increases or decreases by 0.0007 when the temperature varies by 1 °C, correct the value according to the equation below.
S20 = St + 0.007(t-20) Electrolyte temperature at measurement Specific gravity at measurement Converted specific gravity at 20͠
Battery charge measurement with a hydrometer
(c)Specific gravity and remaining battery charge Rubber bulb
Specific gravity (20 °C)
Discharged quantity of electricity (%)
Remaining charge
Glass tube
(%)
1.28
0
100
1.26
10
90
1.24
20
80
1.23
25
75
Float
Hydrometer structure
(3) Terminals Clean if corroded or soiled.
(4) Mounting bracket Repair or replace it if corroded. Retighten if loosened.
(5) Battery appearance Replace the battery if cracked or deformed.
How to read hydrometer
Clean with fresh water if contaminated.
33
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.2.4 Inspection every 250 hours or 3 months Be sure to check the following points every 250 hours or 3 months operation, whichever comes first. No.
Inspection Item
(1)
Lube oil and filter replacement
(2)
Radiator fin cleaning
(3)
V-belt tension check
(4)
Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator
(5)
Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement
(1) Lube oil and filter replacement (The second replacement and after) Replace the engine oil every 250 hours operation from 2nd time and on. Replace the engine oil filter at the same time. Refer to 2.2.1.(1).
(2) Radiator fin cleaning
Beware of dirt from air blowing Wear protective equipment such as goggles to protect your eyes when blowing compressed air. Dust or flying debris can hurt eyes.
Dirt and dust adhering on the radiator fins reduce the cooling performance, causing overheating. Make it a rule to check the radiator fins daily and clean as
Dust, dirt
Radiator fins
needed. â&#x20AC;˘ Blow off dirt and dust from fins and periphery with compressed air [0.19MPa (2 kgf/cm2) or less] not to damage the fins with compressed air. â&#x20AC;˘ If contaminated heavily, apply detergent, thoroughly clean and rinse with tap water shower. IMPORTANT: Never use high pressure water or air from close by fins or never attempt to clean using a wire brush. Radiator fins can be damaged.
(3) V-belt tension check (The second time and after) Check and adjust the V-belt tension. Refer to 2.2.2(2)
34
Air blow
2. Inspection and adjustment
(4) Inspection and adjustment of governor lever and accelerator The
governor
lever
and
accelerating
devices
(accelerating lever, pedal, etc.) of the machine unit are connected by an accelerating wire or rod. If the wire becomes stretched or the connections loose, the deviation in the position may result and make operation unsafe. Check the wire periodically and adjust if
Low idle limiting bolt Govenor lever
necessary. Do not strongly move the accelerating wire or
Low
High
accelerating pedal. It may deform the governor lever or
Accelerating wire bracket
stretch the wire to cause irregular engine speed control. Checking and adjusting procedure are as follows. 1)Check that the governor lever of the engine makes uniform contact with the high idling and low idling limiting bolt when the accelerating devices is in the
High idle limiting bolt
high idling speed or low idling speed position.
Accelerating wire fixing nut Accelerating wire bracket
2)If either the high or the low idling speed side does
MP2 Fuel Injection pump
not make contact with the limiting bolt, adjust the accelerating wire. Loosen the accelerating wire fixing nut and adjust the wire to contact with the limiting bolt.
Never release the limiting bolts. It will impair the safety and performance of the product and functions and result in shorter engine life.
(5) Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement
Beware of dirt from air blowing Wear protective equipment such as goggles to protect your eyes when blowing compressed air. Dust or flying debris can hurt eyes.
The engine performance is adversely affected when the Air cleaner case Arrow mark
air cleaner element is clogged by dust. So periodical cleaning after disassembly is needed.
Element
1)Undo the clamps on the dust pan and remove the
Arrow mark
dust pan. 2)Loosen the wing bolt on the element and pull out the element. Air blow
Dust pan latch
OPTION
35
2. Inspection and adjustment 3)Blow air [0.29 to 0.49 MPa (3.0 to 5.0 kgf/cm2)] from inside the element to blow dust off as shown in the illustration right. Apply the air blowing pressure as low as possible so
Dust indicator (optional) Air cleaner case Arrow mark Inner element Outer element
as not to damage the element.
Arrow mark Dust pan
If having the air cleaner with double elements, never remove and clean the inner element. The aim of installing the inner element is for back up protecting from intaking dust during engine running when leaving the outer element to reinstall after removing it or when damaging the outer element unexpectedly during engine running. 4)Replace the element with new one, If the element is damaged, excessively dirty or oily. 5)Remove the inside dust cover of the dust pan, and clean inside of the dust pan. 6)Reinstall the element with the wing bolt. (do not leave the gasket.) Reattach the inside dust cover to the dust pan and install the dust pan to the air cleaner case placing the TOP mark upward. IMPORTANT: â&#x20AC;˘ When the engine is operated in dusty conditions, clean the element more frequently. â&#x20AC;˘ Do not run the engine with removed air cleaner or element, as this may cause foreign material to enter and damage the engine.
36
OPTION
latch Double elements type air cleaner with inner and outer element
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.2.5 Inspection every 500 hours or 6 months Be sure to check the following points every 500 hours or 6 months operation, whichever comes first. No.
Inspection Item
(1)
Water separator cleaning
(2)
Fuel filter element replacement
(3)
Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement
(1) Water separator cleaning Periodically wash the water separator element and inside cup with clean fuel oil. 1)Prepare a waste oil container. 3)Loosen the drain cock and drain.
Fuel cock
Refer to 2.2.3.(2) 4)Turn the retaining ring counter-clockwise and
Open Cup
remove the cup. (Disconnect the coupler of the lead wire for drain sensor before removing the cup if it is with drain sensor). 5)Wash the element and inside cup with clean fuel oil. Replace the element with new one if any damaged.
3TNV82A to 4TNV106 (T)
Outlet
Close
2)Close the fuel cock.
Model
Air bleeding bolt Inlet
Applicable element Part No. 119802-55710
6)Insert the element to the bracket (O-ring) and after putting the float ring in the cup, install it to the bracket by tightening the retaining ring clockwise. Tightening torque: 15 to 20 Nâ&#x20AC;˘m (1.5 to 2.0 kgfâ&#x20AC;˘m) 7)Close the drain cock (connect the coupler if with drain sensor). 8)Bleed the fuel system. Refer to 2.2.3.(3)
37
Float ring Drain cock Water separator
2. Inspection and adjustment
(2) Fuel filter element replacement Replace the fuel filter at specified intervals, before it is clogged with dust to adversely affect the fuel flow. Also, replace the fuel filter after the engine has fully been cooled. 1)Close the fuel cock of the water separator. 2)Remove the fuel filter using a filter wrench (customer procured). When removing the fuel filter, hold the
Loosen
φ
ߪࠆ Tighten
ψ ψ
bottom of the fuel filter with a piece of rag to prevent the fuel oil from dropping. If you spill fuel, wipe such spillage carefully. 3)Clean the filter mounting surface and slightly apply fuel oil to the gasket of the new fuel filter. 4)Install the new fuel filter manually turning until it comes into contact with the mounting surface, and tighten it further to 1/2 of a turn using a filter wrench. Tightening torque for 3TNV82A to 4TNV106 (T): 20 to 24 N•m (2.0 to 2.4 kgf•m) Model
Applicable fuel filter Part No.
3TNV82A to 4TNV88
119802-55800
4TNV98 (T) to 4TNV106 (T)
123907-55800
5)Bleed the fuel system. Refer to 2.2.3.(3) IMPORTANT: Be sure to use genuine Yanmar part (super fine mesh filter). Otherwise, it results in engine damage, uneven engine performance and shorten engine life.
(3) Air cleaner cleaning and element replacement Replace the air cleaner element periodically even if it is not damaged or dirty. When replacing the element, clean inside of the dust pan at the time. If having the air cleaner with double elements, do not remove the inner element. If the engine output is still not recover (or the dust indicator still actuates if having the air cleaner with a dust indicator) even though the outer element has replaced with new one, replace the inner element with new one.
38
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.2.6 Inspection every 1,000 hours or one year Be sure to check the following points every 1,000 hours or one year operation, whichever comes first. No.
Inspection Item
(1)
Cooling water replacement
(2)
Diaphragm assy inspection
(3)
Turbocharger blower cleaning*
(4)
Intake/exhaust valve clearance adjustment
(5)
Fuel injection nozzle pressure inspection
(1) Cooling water replacement Cooling water contaminated with rust or water scale
OPTION
reduces the cooling effect. Even when antifreeze agent
Radiator cap
(LLC) is mixed, the cooling water gets contaminated due to deteriorated ingredients. Replace the cooling water at least once a year. Rubber hose
Beware of scalding by hot water Wait until the temperature
Coolant recovery tank
FULL (Max.limit)
goes down before draining the coolant water. Otherwise, hot water may splash to cause scalding.
LOW (Min.limit)
Drain plug (Drain plug location depends on the machine unit)
1)Remove the radiator cap. 2)Loosen the drain plug at the lower portion of the radiator and drain the cooling water. 3)After draining the cooling water, tighten the drain plug. 4)Fill radiator and engine with cooling water. a)Before filling, check to be sure the drain plug is closed.
b)Remove the radiator cap of the radiator by turning the radiator cap counter-clockwise about 1/3 of a turn. c)Pour the cooling water slowly into the radiator up to the lip of the filler port so that air bubbles do not develop. d)After supplying the cooling water, surely tighten the radiator cap. To fasten the radiator cap, align the detents on the back face of the radiator cap with the slot of the filler port and turn clockwise pushing it downward approx. 1/3 of a turn until contact with each other. e)Remove the cap of the coolant recovery tank, supply the cooling water to the FULL mark and fasten the cap. f)Check the rubber hose connecting the coolant recovery tank to the radiator. Be sure the rubber is securely connected and there is no looseness or damage. When the rubber hose is not water tight, an excessive amount of cooling water will be consumed.
39
2. Inspection and adjustment g)When filling with the cooling water for the first time or replacing, the air contains in the cooling water system. So, as the air in the cooling water system is self-bleeded during engine operation, the cooling water level in the radiator and coolant recovery tank will be lowered. Replenish the cooling water into the radiator and coolant recovery tank until it reaches the FULL mark of the coolant recovery tank. Daily check of the cooling water level and refilling can be done by observing the coolant recovery tank. The cooling water capacity of the radiator depends on the machine unit. Refer to the operation manual provided by the equipment manufacturer. Check the cooling water level when the engine is cold. Cooling water flows to the coolant recovery tank when the radiator is still hot and makes accurate checks impossible. Check the radiator and hoses for leakage.
(2) Diaphragm assy inspection Inspect the diaphragm assy on the rocker arm cover every 1000 hours or 2 years. Refer to 4.2.4 point 6 for the function of the diaphragm. 1)Loosen screws, and remove a diaphragm assy, and
Spring Center plate Diaphragm
check whether oil and so on doesn’t enter between
Diaphragm cover Rocker arm cover
the diaphragm and the cover. If oil and so on enters into the diaphragm assy, the diaphragm doesn’t work Breather pipe
well. 2)Check the damages of the diaphragm rubber and the spring. If necessary, replace with new ones. [NOTICE] • When a diaphragm is damaged, pressure control inside the crankcase becomes insufficient, and troubles such as combustion defect and so on occur. • At lubricating oil replacement or lubricating oil supply, the amount of lubricating oil isn’t to be beyond the standard upper limit. If the lubricating oil quantity is beyond the upper limit or an engine is operated beyond the allowable maximum angle of an engine, the amount of oil mist may be inducted in the combustion chamber and the oil hammer sometimes may occur.
40
Breather baffle Intake maniforld
Baffle plate
Breather system componert
2. Inspection and adjustment
(3) Turbocharger blower cleaning* When engine speed seems sluggish or the exhaust color looks poor, the blades of the turbocharger-blower may be dirty. Wash the turbine blower in such a case.
(a)General items 1)As for washing, use washing liquid and clear water. 2)Washing time is the time when about 10% of the boost pressure decreases more than that of usual operation state as a standard. 3)Disassemble and clean a turbocharger periodically because the whole of the turbocharger canâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t be cleaned in this method.
(b)Washing point 1)A specified quantity of washing liquid/water is poured with a filler (ex. Oil sprayer) from the air inlet of the blower gradually (about ten seconds) at the normal load (3/4-4/4) of an engine. And, perform this work at no-load after load running of the engine, if it is difficult to pour the liquid into the blower at load running. Specified quantity of washing liquid/water Turbocharger model
RHB31, RHB51
Injection amount, one time
20 cc
It causes an accident when large quantity of washing liquid is poured rapidly into a turbocharger. 2)Pour the same amount of clear water as washing liquid/water into the blower about 3-5 minutes later after the washing liquid/water injection and wash it.
It causes an accident when large quantity of water is poured rapidly into a turbocharger. 3)Repeat the washing after then minutes when there is no change with the boost pressure or the exhaust gas temperature after washing. When there is no change at all even if it repeats 3-4 times, disassemble and maintain the turbocharger because of the cruel dirt of the blower or other causes. 4)Operate the engine at load for at least 15 minutes after washing, and dry.
41
2. Inspection and adjustment
(4) Intake/exhaust valve clearance adjustment Make measurement and adjustment while the engine is No.1 cylinder
cold.
(a)Valve clearance measurement 1)Remove the rocker arm cover above cylinder head. 2)Set the No.1 cylinder in the compression TDC Turn the crankshaft to bring the piston of the No.1 cylinder to its compression top dead center while watch-
4TNV94L
Crankshaft pulley
ing the rocker arm motion, timing scale and the top mark position of the crankshaft pulley. (Position where both the intake and exhaust valves
Top mark Rotational direction Top mark
are closed.) Notes: • The crankshaft shall be turned clockwise as seen from the radiator side. • The No.1 cylinder position is on the opposite side of the radiator and the ignition order shall be 1-3-4-2-1 at 180° intervals.
Rocker arm
• Since the intake and exhaust valve rocker arms are operated the same and there is a clearance between
Valve clearance
Adjusting screw Lock nut
the arm and valve generally at the top dead center, the position can be checked by means of the play when the arm head is held with a hand. Also see that the crankshaft pulley top mark is positioned at zero on the timing scale. If there is no valve clearance, inspection
Valve clearance (2-valve head)
in the disassembled state is necessary since the valve seat may be worn abnormally. 3)Valve clearance measurement In case of 2-valve cylinder head insert a thickness gage between the rocker arm and valve cap, and
Valve clearance Rocker arm Valve bridge
record the measured valve clearance. In case of 4-valve head insert a thickness gage between the rocker arm and the valve bridge, and record the measured valve clearance. (Use it as the data for estimating the wear state.) 4)Adjusting other cylinders In case of 4-cylinder engines, turn the crankshaft 180° and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Then adjust the No.4 and No.2 cylinders in this order. The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center after turning, and make adjustment for other cylinders in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 180° each time. In case of 3-cylinder engines, turn the crankshaft 240° and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Then adjust the No.2 cylinder in this order. 42
Valve clearance (4-valve head)
2. Inspection and adjustment
The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center after turning, and make adjustment for other cylinders in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 240° each time. The adjustment method of reducing the flywheel turning numbers (for reference): For 3 cylinder engines Set No.1 cylinder to the compression T.D.C.and adjust the clearance of the z mark of the below table. Next, turn the flywheel once (the suction / exhaust valve of No.1 cylinder is in the position of the overlap T.D.C. at this time), and adjust the clearance of the c mark. Ignition order of 3 cylinder engines: 1J3J2 Cylinder No. 1 2 Valve No.1 compression T.D.C
3
Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust z
z
z
No.1 overlap T.D.C
The first time
z
c
The second time
c
For 4 cylinder engines Set No.1 cylinder to the compression T.D.C. and adjust the clearance of the z mark of the bottom table. Next, turn the flywheel once, and adjust the clearance of the c mark. Ignition order of 4 cylinder engines: 1J3J4J2 Cylinder No. 1 2 Valve No.1 compression T.D.C
3
4
Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust Suction Exhaust z
z
z
No.4 compression T.D.C
The first time
z
c
c
c
c
The second time
(b)Valve clearance inspection and adjustment 1) Loosen adjusting bolts In case of 2-valve cylinder head loosen the lock nut and adjusting screw, and check the valve for Valve cap
any inclination of valve cap, entrance of dirt or wear.
Normal
Abnormal
In case of 4-valve cylinder head loosen the lock nut and adjusting screw of rocker arm. Be careful
Loosen
that excessive tension isn't applied to the valve bridge, and loosen a locknut of valve bridge. [NOTICE] When loosening a locknut of a valve bridge, loosen the locknut while fixing the valve bridge with a wrench so that the valve may not lean.
Adjusting bolt Loosen
Valve bridge Wrench 4 Valve cylinder head
(R.1) 43
2. Inspection and adjustment Push the bridge head so that a valve bridge and two Hold
valve stem heads may contact each other uniformly, and adjust an adjusting bolt so that a gap of the valve
Adjusting bolt
stem head may become 0. Tighten a locknut after a
Rock nut
Valve bridge
valve bridge is fixed with a wrench.
Clearance 0 Adjust clearance to 0
4-Valve cylinder head
2)Measuring valve clearance Insert a 0.2 or 0.3 mm thickness gage between the rocker arm and valve cap / valve bridge, and adjust the valve clearance. Tighten the adjusting screw. mm Model
Standard valve clearance
3TNV82A to 98
0.15 to 0.25
4TNV106 (T)
0.25 to 0.35
[NOTICE] When tightening a valve bridge locknut of 4-valve head,
Valve clearance adjustment
tighten a locknut after fixing a valve bridge with a wrench so that a bridge may not rotate and a valve may not lean. 3)Apply oil to the contact surface between adjusting Tighten
screw and push rod. 4)Adjusting other cylinders In case of 4-cylinder engines turn the crankshaft 180째 then and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Then adjust the No.4 and No.2 cylinders in this order. The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center after turning, and make adjustment for other cylinders in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 180째 each time. In case of 3-cylinder engines turn the crankshaft 240째 then and make adjustment for the No.3 cylinder. Then adjust the No.2 cylinder in this order. The cylinder to be adjusted first does not have to be the No.1 cylinder. Select and adjust the cylinder where the piston is the nearest to the top dead center after turning, and make adjustment for other cylinders in the order of ignition by turning the crankshaft 240째 each time. 44
Adjusting bolt Tighten
Valve bridge Wrench 4 Valve cylinder head
2. Inspection and adjustment
(5) Fuel injection nozzle pressure inspection
Wear protective glasses when testing injection from the fuel injection valve. Never approach the injection nozzle portion with a hand. The oil jetting out from the nozzle is at a high pressure to cause loss of sight or injury if coming into careless contact with it.
(a)Injection pressure measurement Model 3TNV82A to TNV88 (CL) 3TNV82A to TNV88 (VM) 4TNV94L4 to TNV106(T)
Standard MPa (kgf/cm2) 19.6-20.6 (200-210) Nozzle tester
21.6-22.6 (220-230)
[NOTICE] As for the opening pressure of the brand-new fuel
Injection nozzle
nozzle, about 0.5 Mpa (5 kgf/cm) declines by the engine operation for about 5 hours because of the initial wear-out of a spring etc. Therefore, adjust
Injection pressure measurement with nozzle tester
0.5 MPa (5 kgf/cm) higher than the standard value of the above table when adjusting a new fuel nozzle of a spare part. Remove carbon deposit at the nozzle hole thoroughly before measurement. 1)Connect the fuel injection valve to the high pressure pipe of the nozzle tester. 2)Operate the nozzle tester lever slowly and read the pressure at the moment when the fuel injection from the nozzle starts. 3)If the measured injection pressure is lower than the standard level, replace the pressure adjusting shim with a thicker one. Thickness of pressure adjusting shims mm
Injection pressure adjustment
0.13, 0.15, 0.18, 0.4, 0.5, 0.8
The injection pressure is increased by approx. l.9 MPa (l9 kgf/cm2), when the adjusting shim thickness is increased by 0.l mm.
45
2. Inspection and adjustment [Informative: Fuel injection valve structure]
F.O. return pipe joint
Nozzle holder
Nozzle holder
Pressure adjusting shim
Pressure adjusting shim
Nozzle spring
Nozzle spring
Nozzle spring seat Valve stop spacer
Nozzle spring seat Valve stop spacer
Nozzle valve
Nozzle valve Nozzle
Nozzle
Nozzle body
Nozzle body
Nozzle case nut Tightening torque: 39.2 to 44.1 Nm (4 to 4.5 kgfm)
Nozzle case nut Tightening torque: 39.2 to 44.1 Nm (4 to 4.5 kgfm)
2-valve head
4-valve head
(b)Spray pattern inspection After adjustment to the specified valve opening pressure, use a nozzle tester and check the spray
Normal
pattern and seat oil-tightness. Seat oil tightness check • After injecting a few times, increase the pressure gradually. Hold the pressure for about 5 seconds at a
ǰ
ǰ
little before the valve opening pressure of 1.96 MPa (20 kgf/cm2), and check to see that oil does not drip from the tip end of the nozzle. • If extreme oil leak from the overflow joint exists during injection by the nozzle tester, check after retightening. If much oil is leaking, replace the nozzle assembly.
46
Uniform spray pattern from each nozzle
2. Inspection and adjustment
Spray and injection states • Operate the nozzle tester lever at a rate of once or twice a second and check no abnormal injection. • If normal injection as shown below cannot be obtained, replace the fuel injection valve. • No extreme difference in angle (θ) • No extreme injection angle difference (α) • Finely atomized spray • Excellent spray departure
(c)Nozzle valve sliding test Wash the nozzle valve in clean fuel oil. Place the nozzle body vertically and insert the nozzle into the body to about 1/3 of its length. The valve is normal if it smoothly falls by its own weight into the body. In case of a new nozzle, remove the seal peel, and immerse it in clean diesel oil or the like to clean the inner and outer surfaces and to thoroughly remove rust-preventive oil before using the nozzle. Note that a new nozzle is coated with rust-preventive oil and is pasted with the seal peel to
Nozzle valve sliding check by gravity
shut off outer air.
(d)Nozzle punch mark A 150 P 24
4
JO
Design code Number of hole (4 holes) Diameter of hole (Ǟ0.24) Size: sizeP sizeS Injection angle Nozzle insertion angle CodeA: angled No code: no angle
YANMAR
Punch mark
47
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.2.7 Inspection every 2000 hours or 2 years Be sure to check the following points every 2,000 hours or two years operation, whichever comes first. No. Inspection Item (1) Coolant water path flushing and maintenance (2) Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance (3) Intake/exhaust valve seat lapping Fuel injection timing adjustment (4) Fuel injection pump inspection and adjustment
(1) Coolant water path flushing and maintenance Rust and water scale will accumulate in the cooling system through many hours of operation. This lowers the engine cooling effect. Oil coolers (attached to turbocharged engines and some of naturally aspirated engines) quickly deteriorate the lube oil. The cleaning and maintenance of the following parts are necessary in accordance with the coolant water replacement. Cooling system parts: radiator, cooling water pump, thermostat, cylinder block, cylinder head, oil cooler.
(2) Fuel pipe and coolant water pipe inspection and maintenance Regularly check the rubber hoses of the fuel system and cooling water system. If cracked or degraded, replace them with new one. Replace the rubber hoses at least every 2 years even if 2,000 hours doesn’t come.
(3) Intake/exhaust valve seat lapping The adjustment is necessary to maintain proper contact of the valves and seats. Refer to 4.2.6 in Chapter 4.
(4) Fuel injection timing adjustment / Fuel injection pump inspection and adjustment The fuel injection timing and the fuel injection pump are adjusted so that engine performance may become the best condition. As for the inspection and adjustment of the fuel pump, it is based on the service manual of the MP pump of the separate volume. The fuel injection timing is adjusted by the following procedure. As for the engine, which adopts a MP type fuel injection pump, the fuel injection angle θi (note) is adjusted for the fuel injection timing adjustment. Note) The fuel injection angle θi (cam angle) is the difference from the injection valve opening angle(FIR) while the fuel injection pump being driven by a motor and the angle(FIR) at the plunger lift 2.5mm of the fuel pump.
Fuel injection angle i
T.D.C Nozzle lift
0
Cam angle
Valve opening angle (FIR) Angle (FIT) at plunger lift 2.5 mm
Fuel injection angle
And, as for the actual fuel injection angle θi , the measured value is recorded on the pump body by each every fuel pump as shown in the right figure. The engraved mark is shown by the value that 10 is mulitiplied by the injection angle θi as shown in
Engraved mark position
the below table. (Examle) Fuel injection angle θi (degree, cam angle)
Mark
8.5
85
7.7
77
Non operation side (Engine side)
Operation side
(R.1) 48
2. Inspection and adjustment The adjustment of fuel injection angle θi In case that the fuel pump are removed, and Fuel injection pump
reassembled, the procedure of fuel injection angle adjustment is as follows. (As for the disassembly of a
I.D.mark
fuel injection pump, refer to 7.2.3 in chapter 7.) [NOTICE] Never loosen four flange bolts, which fasten a pump flange and a fuel pump drive gear at the time of the removal of the fuel pump. When it is loosened, the adjustment of the fuel injection timing becomes very difficult. 1)Before removing a fuel pump drive gear, make ID marks on the gearing part of the pump drive gear and the idle gear with paint and so on.
Flange bolt Don't loosen! Gear installation nut Idle gear
Fuel pump drive gear
Fuel pump installation angle
2)Make the mark-off line to the gear case precisely in accordance with the position of mark-off line of the fuel pump.
Fuel pump side Mark-off line on fuel pump
Gear case side Mark-off line on gear case
Marking
Marking on gear case 3)Before removing a fuel pump, put the standard mark of a sticker for fuel injection angle adjustment in
Standard mark
accordance with the mark-off line of the fuel pump
1 cam 2 cam
and paste it on the gear case.
0.5 cam
Sticker for adjusting injection angle
Mark sticker
Fuel injection pump Gear case Mark-off line
(R.1) 49
2. Inspection and adjustment 4)Remove a fuel pump, and read the fuel injection angle recorded in that fuel pump. 5)Read the injection angle recorded on a newly assembled fuel pump and calculate the difference from the injection angle of the disassembled fuel pump. (When re-installation does the same fuel pump, the angular difference is zero.) Fuel injection angle difference ∆ θi (cam angle) = (the fuel injection angle θi2 of a new fuel pump) - (the fuel injection angle θi1 of a disassembled previous fuel pump) Calculation example Fuel injection angle of a new fuel pump θi2 (degree, cam angle) (degree, cam angle) Fuel injection angle difference
+0.5
-0.3
Fuel injection angle of a disassembled Fuel pump installation method fuel pump θi1 (degree, cam angle)
8.5
7.7
8.0
Turn the fuel pump body in the outside directon of the cylinder block at 0.5 degree(cam angle). [Advanced injection timing]
8.0
Turn the fuel pump body in the inside direction of the cylinder block at 0.3 degree(cam angle). [Delayed injection timing]
[NOTICE] Tell the fuel pump number to Yanmar, and inquire the injection angle of the pump when it is hard to find out. 6)Put the fuel pump on the gear case temporarily and install the drive gear on the cam shaft with checking the ID marks, which were put on the fuel pump drive gear and the idle gear at the time of the disassembling. Tighten the installation nut of a pump drive gear. Model
Tightening torque N•m (kgf•m)
Fuel pump model
3TNV82A to TNV88
MP2
78 to 88 (8 to 9)
4TNV94L/98/106 (T)
MP4
113 to 123 (11.5 to 12.5)
Lubricating oil application (thread portion, and seat surface) Not applied
7)Adjust the installation angle of the fuel pump while reading the injection angle difference, calculated in
Mark-off ling on fuel pump Mark sticker
the above 5), withe the mark (minimum 0.5°, cam angle) of the adjustment mark sticker..
1 cam
[NOTICE] Push down the fuel pump in the outside direction of the
Standard mark
1 cam
0.5 cam 0.5 cam
cylinder block at +0.5 degree(cam) when a injection angle difference ∆ θi is +0.5 degree(cam).
In case of + 0.5 cam
And, push it down to the cylinder block side at 0.3 degree(cam) when a difference is -0.3 degree(cam). 8)Tighten the fuel pump installation nuts.
(R.1) 50
Incase of -0.3 cam
Injection angle adjustment
2. Inspection and adjustment
(Supplementary explanation 1)
Ç°
The installation angle of the fuel pump is as follows. Model
Installation angle θ (deg.)
3TNV82A to TNV88
25
4TNV94L/98/106 (T)
13
4TNV106 (T)
Cylinder block side
11.5
Fuel pump installation angle (Supplementary explanation 2) When fuel injection timing is advanced or delayed, the installation angle of the fuel pump is adjusted.
Delayed Advanced
When fuel injection timing is advanced for example at 0.5 degrees(cam), loosen the nuts, which fix the fuel
Cylinder block side
pump on the gear case, and turn the fuel pump body in the inside direction of the cylinder block at 0.5 degree(cam), and tighten the pump installation nuts. And, when fuel injection timing is delayed, a pump is turned in that reverse direction.
Pump installation bolts
Injection timing adjustment
(R.1) 51
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.3 Adjusting the no-load maximum or minimum speed 1)After warming the engine up, gradually raise the speed and set it at the no-load maximum revolution. 2)If the no-load maximum speed is out of the standard, adjust it by turning the high idle limiting bolt. The no-load maximum speed standard is shown in the specification tables in 1.2 of the chapter 1. 3)Then set the no-load minimum speed by adjusting the low idle limiting bolt. High
(Unit: min-1)
No-load minimum speed standards Engine application class
No-load minimum speed (Âą 25)
CL
1200
VM
800 (1100 for 4TNV106 (T))
Low
Low idle limiting bolt Govenor lever Accelerating wire bracket
High idle limiting bolt
Accelerating wire fixing nut Accelerating wire bracket
Note) The engine speed may differ from the above standard depending on an engine installed on a machine unit.
52
MP2 Fuel Injection pump
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.4 Sensor inspection 2.4.1 Oil pressure switch Disconnect the connector from the oil pressure switch. Keep the voltameter probes in contact with the switch terminal and cylinder block while operating the engine. It
Cylinder block (flywheel side)
Oil pressure switch Tester probes
is abnormal if circuit is closed.
Continuity test
2.4.2 Thermo switch Place the thermo switch in a container filled with antifreeze or oil. Heat it while measuring the fluid
Thermometer
temperature. The switch is normal if the voltameter
Tester probes
shows continuity when the fluid temperature is 107 to 113 deg C. Thermo switch Hot water
2.5 Water leak check in cooling water system Check coolant water leakage from the cooling water system visually. If any problem is found, Inspect as follows. 1)Fill coolant water to the normal level in the radiator, and install the cap tester on the radiator. 2)Operate the manual pump to set the pressure to 0.09 Âą 0.015 MPa (0.9 Âą 0.15 kgf/cm2). If the cap tester pressure gage reading drops then, water is
Cap tester
leaking from the cooling water system. Check the water leaking point.
Water leak check in cooling water system
53
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.6 Radiator cap inspection Install the radiator cap on the cap tester. Set the tester pressure to 0.09 Âą 0.015 MPa (0.9 Âą 0.15 kgf/cm2) and see that the cap is opened. If the cap does not open, replace the cap since it is abnormal.
Radiator cap
Radiator cap inspection
2.7 Thermostat Inspection Place the thermostat in a container filled with water. Heat it while measuring the water temperature, and see
To radiator
that the thermostat is actuated at temperature of following table.
Model All models
Cover
Valve opening Temperature (deg C)* 69.5 to 72.5
Full open lift (Temperature) (mm)
Thermostat
8 or more (85 deg C)
* Valve opening temperature is carved on the flange.
Thermo switch
Thermometer
Thermostat
54
2. Inspection and adjustment
2.8 Adjusting operation Perform the adjusting operation of a engine as follows after the maintenance job: 1)Supply the fuel oil, lubricating oil and coolant water. Note: Check the levels of the lubricating oil and coolant water again after test running (for about 5 minutes) and add as required. 2)Start the engine, and carry out idling at a low revolution (700 to 900 rpm) for a few minutes. 3)Run in the engine for about five minutes at the rated revolution (no-load). Check any water, fuel or oil leak and existence of abnormal vibration or noise. Also check the oil pressure, coolant water temperature and exhaust gas color. 4)Adjust the no-load minimum and maximum revolutions according to the specifications. 5)Perform loaded operation as required.
2.9 Long storage Observe the following instructions when the engine is to be stored for a long period without operation: 1)Be sure to use clean soft water added Long Life Coolant Antifreeze (LLC) in the cooling water system and do not drain the coolant before long-term storage. If drain the cooling water, it will cause to built up rust due to the residual water in the cooling water system. 2)Remove the mud, dust and oil deposit and clean the outside. 3)Perform the nearest periodic inspection before the storage. 4)Drain or fill the fuel oil fully to prevent condensation in the fuel tank. 5)Disconnect the battery cable from the battery negative (-) terminal. 6)Cover the silencer, air cleaner and electric parts with PVC (Poly Vinyl Chloride) cover to prevent water and dust from depositing or entrance. 7)Select a well-ventilated location without moisture and dust for storage. 8)Perform recharging once a month during storage to compensate for self-discharge. 9)When storing an engine for long time, run the engine or do motoring periodically according to the following procedure. Because the rust occurrence inside the engine, the rack agglutination of the fuel pump, and so on are likely to occur. (In case that the engine is equipped with a machine unit,) a)Replace the lube oil and the filter before the engine running. b)Supply fuel if the fuel in the fuel tank was removed, and bleed the fuel system. c)Confirm that there is the coolant in the engine. d)Operate the engine at the low idling speed for about five minutes. (If it can be done, one a month)
55
3. Troubleshooting
3. Troubleshooting 3.1 Preparation before troubleshooting If the signs of a trouble appear, it is important to lecture on the countermeasure and treatment before becoming a big accident not to shorten the engine life. When the signs of a trouble appear in the engine or a trouble occurs, grasp the trouble conditions fully by the next point and find out the cause of sincerity according to the troubleshooting. Then repair the trouble, and prevent the recurrence of the trouble. 1)What’s the occurrence phenomenon or the trouble situation? ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅ (e.g. Poor exhaust color) 2)Investigation of the past records of the engine Check a client control ledger, and examine the history of the engine. • lInvestigate the engine model name and the engine number. (Mentioned in the engine label.) Examine the machine unit name and its number in the same way. • lWhen was the engine maintained last time? • lHow much period and/or time has it been used after it was maintained last time? • lWhat kind of problem was there on the engine last time, and what kind of maintenance was dane? 3)Hear the occurrence phenomenon from the operator of the engine in detail. 5W1H of the occurrence phenomenon : the investigation of when (when), where (where), who (who), what (what), why (why) and how (how) • lWhen did the trouble happen at what kind of time? • lWas there anything changed before the trouble? • lDid the trouble occur suddenly, or was there what or a sign? • lWas there any related phenomenon. ⋅⋅⋅⋅⋅. (e.g. Poor exhaust color and starting failure at the same time) 4)After presuming a probable cause based on the above investigation, investigate a cause systematically by the next troubleshooting guide, and find out the cause of sincerity.
56
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.2 Quick reference table for troubleshooting
Improper clearance of intake/exhaust valve
c
c
Blowout from cylinder head gasket
Engine system
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
Worn piston ring, piston or cylinder
c
c
c
c
Seized crankpin metal or bearing
c
c
c
c
c
c
Worn crankpin and journal bearing
c
c
c
c
c
Loosened connecting rod bolt
c
c
c c
Improper open/close timing of intake/exhaust valves c
c
c
c
Correct or replace. Replace the gasket. (See 4.2.2-12) in Chapter4.) c Replace the piston ring. (See 4.4.2-5) & 10) in Chapter4.)
c
c
c
c
c
Perform honing and use oversize parts. (See 4.4.5-1)4) and 4.4.6 in Chapter4.)
c
Repair or replace.
c
c
Correct the ring joint positions. (See 4.4.4-point 6 in Chapter4.)
c
c
Reassemble correctly. (See 4.4.4-point 6 in Chapter4.) Measure and replace. (See 4.4.5-(2) in Chapter4.)
c
c
Tighten to the specified torque. (See 4.4.4-point 2 in Chapter4.)
c
c
Disassemble and repair. Adjust gear meshing. (See 4.3.4-point 2 in Chapter4.)
c c
Exhaust temperature rise
c
c
c c
Pressure rise
c Lap the valve seat. (See 4.2.6 in Chapter4.)
c
c c
Pressure drop c
c c
Low water temperature
Overheat
Much blow-by gas c
c
c
Worn intake/exhaust valve guide
Corrective action
c Adjust the valve clearance. (See 2.2.6 (4) in Chapter2.)
c
c
c
c
Defective governor
Low L.O. pressure
c
c
Reverse assembly of piston rings
Mixture with water
Dilution by fuel oil
Excessive consumption
Excessive fuel consumption
Difficulty in returning to low speed
Large engine vibration c
Air intake
c
c
Excessive gear backlash
Turbocharger
c
c
Improper arrangement of piston ring joints
Cooling water
Lubricating oil
c
Seized or broken piston ring
Foreign matter trapped in combustion chamber
During work
Black
White
Black
c
Compression leakage from valve seat Seizure of intake/exhaust valve
White
Much
Little
Exhaust smoke
During idling
c
During work
Uneven combustion sound
c
Exhaust color
Hunting
Abnormal engine sound
None
Cause
Engine does not start.
Engine starts but stops soon.
Poor Insufficient exhaust engine output color
Ordinary
Trouble symptom
Starting failure
High knocking sound during combustion
The following table summarizes the general trouble symptoms and their causes. If any trouble symptom occurs, take corrective action before it becomes a serious problem so as not to shorten the engine service life.
c
c
c
c
Measure and replace. (See 4.2.5-(2) and 4.2.7 in Chapter4.) Make adjustment. Adjust the valve clearance. (See 2.2.6-(4) in Chapter2.)
c
Fouled blower
c
c
Wash the blower.
Waste gate malfunction
c
c
Disassemble and inspect.
Worn floating bearing
c
Disassemble and inspect.
c
57
Cooling Water System
c
c
Exhaust temperature rise
Pressure rise
Pressure drop
Low water temperature
Overheat
Much blow-by gas
Low L.O. pressure
Mixture with water
Dilution by fuel oil
Excessive consumption
Excessive fuel consumption
Difficulty in returning to low speed
Large engine vibration
During work
During idling
Uneven combustion sound
Black
Cooling Air water intake
Lubricating oil
Corrective action
Defective thermostat (kept closed) (See 2.2.7 in Chapter2.)
c
Insufficient cooling effect of radiator
c
c
c
Defective thermostat (kept opened) (See 2.2.7 in Chapter2.) or slipping fan belt (See 2.2.2-2) in Chapter2.)
Insufficient coolant water level
c
c
c
Check water leakage from cooling water system. (See 2.2.1-4) in Chapter2.)
Cracked water jacket
c
Slackened fan belt
c
Defective thermostat
c
Improper properties of lubricating oil Lubricating System
White
Black
White
Much
Little
Excessive cooling effect of radiator
c
c
c
Repair or replace.
c
c Adjust the belt tension. (See 2.2.2-2) in Chapter2.)
c c
c
c
Check or replace. (See 2.2.7 in Chapter2.)
c
Use proper lubricating oil. (See 1.3.2 in Chapter1.)
c
c
c
c
Repair.
Insufficient delivery capacity of trochoid pump
c
Check and repair. (See 5.5 in Chapter5.)
Clogged lubricating oil filter
c
Defective pressure regulating valve
c
Clean, adjust or replace.
c
Add proper lubricating oil. (See 2.2.1-3) in Chapter2.)
Leakage from lubricating oil piping system
Insufficient lubricating oil level
c
Too early timing of fuel injection pump Too late timing of fuel injection pump Improper properties of fuel oil
Fuel system
During work
Hunting
Abnormal engine sound
Exhaust color
Exhaust smoke
None
Cause
Engine does not start.
Engine starts but stops soon.
Poor Insufficient exhaust engine output color
Ordinary
Trouble symptom
Starting failure
High knocking sound during combustion
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
Clean or replace.
c
Check and adjust. (See 2.2.7-4) in Chapter2.)
c
c Check and adjust. (See 2.2.7-4) in Chapter2.)
c
Use proper fuel oil. (See 1.3.1 in Chapter1.)
c
Water entrance in fuel system
c
Clogged fuel filter
c
c
c
Clean or replace. (See 2.2.5 in Chapter2.)
Air entrance in fuel system
c
c
c
Perform air bleeding. (See 2.2.3 in Chapter2.)
Clogged or cracked fuel pipe
c
c
c
Clean or replace.
Insufficient fuel supply to fuel injection pump
c
c
c
Check the fuel tank cock, fuel filter, fuel pipe, and fuel feed pump.
c
c
Uneven injection volume of fuel injection pump
c
c
c
c
Excessive fuel injection volume
Clogged strainer at feed pump inlet
c
c
c
c
Perform draining from the fuel filter. (See 2.2.3 and 2.2.5 in Chapter2.)
c
c
c Check and adjust.
c
c
Poor spray pattern from fuel injection nozzle Priming failure
c
c
c
c
c
c c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c
c Check and adjust. Check and adjust. (See 2.2.6 in Chapter2.) Foreign matter trapped in the valve inside the priming pump. (Disassemble and clean.)
c
Clean the strainer.
c
58
Electrical System
Air/Exhaust Gas System
Clogged air filter
c
c
Engine used at high temperatures or at high altitude
c
c
Clogged exhaust pipe
c
c
c c
c
Exhaust temperature rise
Pressure rise
Air intake
Pressure drop
Low water temperature
Much blow-by gas
Low L.O. pressure
Mixture with water
Dilution by fuel oil
Excessive consumption
Excessive fuel consumption
Difficulty in returning to low speed
Overheat
Cooling water
Lubricating oil
Large engine vibration
During work
During idling
Black
White
Black
White
Much
Little
c
Uneven combustion sound
During work
Hunting
Abnormal engine sound
Exhaust color
Exhaust smoke
None
Cause
Engine does not start.
Engine starts but stops soon.
Poor Insufficient exhaust engine output color
Ordinary
Trouble symptom
Starting failure
High knocking sound during combustion
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
Corrective action
c
Clean. (See 2.2.4 in Chapter2.)
c
Study output drop and load matching. c Clean.
c
Starting motor defect
c
Repair or replace. (See Chapter8.)
Alternator defect
c
Repair or replace. (See Chapter9.)
Open-circuit in wiring
c
Repair. (See Chapter10.)
Battery voltage drop
c
Inspect and change the battery. (See 2.2.3 in Chapter2.)
59
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3.3 Troubleshooting by measuring compression pressure Compression pressure drop is one of major causes of increasing blowby gas (lubricating oil contamination or increased lubricating oil consumption as a resultant phenomenon) or starting failure. The compression pressure is affected by the following factors: 1)Degree of clearance between piston and cylinder 2)Degree of clearance at intake/exhaust valve seat 3)Gas leak from nozzle gasket or cylinder head gasket In other words, the pressure drops due to increased parts wear and reduced durability resulting from long use of the engine. A pressure drop may also be caused by scratched cylinder or piston by dust entrance from the dirty air cleaner element or worn or broken piston ring. Measure the compression pressure to diagnose presence of any abnormality in the engine.
(1) Compression pressure measurement method 1)After warming up the engine, remove the fuel injection pipe and valves from the cylinder to be measured. 2)Crank the engine before installing the compression gage adapter. *1) Perform cranking with the stop handle at the
Compression gage
stop position (no injection state). *2) See 12.2-18 in Chapter 12 for the compression gage and compression gage adapter. 3)Install the compression gage and compression gage adapter at the cylinder to be measured.
Measurement of the compression pressure
*1) Never forget to install a gasket at the tip end of the adapter. 4)With the engine set to the same state as in 2)*1), crank the engine by the starter motor until the compression gage reading is stabilized.
(2) Standard compression pressure Engine compression pressure list (reference value)
Engine mode
Compression pressure at 250 min-1 MPa (kgf/cm2) Standard
Limit
3TNV82A
3.16 ± 0.1 (31 ± 1)
2.45 ± 0.1 (25 ± 1)
3/4TNV84
3.24 ± 0.1 (33 ± 1)
2.55 ± 0.1 (26 ± 1)
3/4TNV84T
2.94 ± 0.1 (30 ± 1)
2.45 ± 0.1 (25 ± 1)
TNV88 to 106 (T) 3.43 ± 0.1 (35 ± 1)
2.75 ± 0.1 (28 ± 1)
60
Deviation among cylinders MPa (kgf/cm2)
0.2 to 0.3 (2 to 3)
3. TROUBLESHOOTING
3/4TNV88㨪4TNV106(T)
4
40 3/4TNV84 35
3
30 3TNV82A
25 3/4TNV84T
2
20
200
250
300
350
Engine speed
Compression pressure (MPa)
Compression pressure (kgf/cm2)
(3) Engine speed and compression pressure (for reference)
400
(min-1)
(4) Measured value and troubleshooting When the measured compression pressure is below the limit value, inspect each part by referring to the table below. No.
Item • Air cleaner element
1
Cause
Corrective action
• Clogged element
• Clean the element.
• Broken element
• Replace the element.
• Defect at element seal portion
2 3
• Valve clearance
• Excessive or no clearance
• valve timing
• Adjust the valve clearance. (See 3.5 in Chapter 3.)
• Incorrect valve clearance • Adjust the valve clearance. (See 3.5 in Chapter 3.)
• Cylinder head gasket
• Gas leak from gasket
• Replace the gasket. • Retighten the cylinder head bolts to the spec-
4
ified torque. (See 4.2 (2) 12) in Chapter 4.) • Intake/exhaust vale
5
• Valve seat
• Gas leak due to worn valve seat or foreign mat-
• Lap the valve seat. (See 4.2 (6) in Chapter 4.) • Replace the intake/exhaust valve.
ter trapping • Sticking valve • Piston
6
• Piston ring
• Gas leak due to scratching or wear
• Perform honing and use an oversized part. (See 4.4 (5)-(5-1), (5-4) and (6) in Chapter 4.)
• Cylinder
61
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines 4.1 Complete disassembly and reassembly 4.1.1 Introduction Make preparation as follows before starting engine inspection and service: 1)Fix the engine on a horizontal base.
Be sure to fix the engine securely to prevent injury or damage to parts due to falling during the work. 2)Remove the coolant water hose, fuel oil pipe, wire harness, control wires etc. connecting the driven machine and engine, and drain coolant water, lubricating oil and fuel. 3)Clean soil, oil, dust, etc. from the engine by washing with solvent, air, steam, etc. Carefully operate so as to prevent any foreign matter from entering the engine.
Always wear glasses or other protectors when using compressed air or steam to prevent any foreign matter from getting in the eyes. [NOTICE] â&#x20AC;˘ Any part which is found defective as a result of inspection or any part whose measured value does not satisfy the standard or limit shall be replaced. â&#x20AC;˘ Any part predicted to dissatisfy the standard or limit before the next service as estimated from the state of use should be replaced even when the measured value then satisfies the standard or limit.
62
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.1.2 Special service tools (1) Special Tools No.
Tool name Valve guide tool (for extracting valve guide)
1
Illustration
Applicable model and tool size চ Model 3TNV82A 4TNV94L 98(T) 4TNV106(T) 4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88 4TNV84T
L1
L2
d1
d2
20
75
6.5
10
20
75
7.5
11
20
75
5.5
9
̪Locally manufactured Valve guide tool (for inserting valve guide)
2
চ Model
L1
L2
d1
d2
3TNV82A
12
60
13
19
4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88
15
65
14
20
4TNV84T
8.5
60
11
17
7
60
13
16
13.6
65
13
16
L1
L2
d1
d2
3TNV82A
25
85
23
26
TNV84 88
20
100
26
29
4TNV94L 98
20
100
30
33
4TNV106(T)
20
100
37
40
4TNV94L 98(T) 4TNV106(T)
̪Locally manufactured Connecting rod bushing replacer (for removal / installation of connecting rod bushing) 3
চ Model
Allowance: d1-- 00..36 d2 -- 00..36 ̪Locally manufactured
4
Valve spring compressor (for removal / installation of valve spring)
yanmar code No. 129100-92630
63
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
No.
Tool name Stem seal inserter (for inserting stem seal)
Illustration
Applicable model and tool size চ Model
5
d1
d2
d3
L1
L2
L3
3TNV82A
15.2
21
12
15.8
65
4
4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 4TNV88
16.2
22
13.5
18.8
65
4
4TNV84T
12.9
19
11.5
10.0
65
4
4TNE94L 98
15.2
21
12
11.8
65
4
4TNE106(T)
15.2
21
12
15.5
65
4
̪ Locally manufactured
6
Filter wrench (for removal / installation of L.O. filter) Camshaft bushing tool (for extracting camshaft bushing)
Available on the market
চ Model
7
L1
L2
d1
d2
TNV82A 88
18
70
45
48
4TNV94L 98
18
70
50
53
4TNV106(T)
18
70
58
61
Allowance: d1 -- 00..36 d2 -- 00..36
̪Locally manufactured Flex-Hone (For re-honing of cylinder liner)
8
9
10
Piston insertion tool (for inserting piston) Piston ring replacer (for removal / installation of piston ring) Crankshaft pulley installing tool
11
Model
Parts No.
Cylinder bore (চ)
TNV82A
129400-92420
78 84
TNV88 4TNV94L
129400-92430
83 95
4TNV98
129400-92440
89 101
4TNV106(T)
129400-92450
95 108
Yanmar code No. 95550-002476 ̪The above piston insertion tool is applicable to 60-125 mm diameter pistons.
Available on the market
Locally manufactured (for 4TNV94L) (Refer to 4.3.6 in detail)
64
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(2) Measuring instruments No.
Instrument name
Application Measurements of shaft bending, and strain and gap of surfaces
1
Dial gage
Measurements of narrow or deep portions that cannot be measured by dial gage 2
Test indicator
For holding the dial gage when measuring using a dial gage, standing angles adjustable
3
Magnetic stand
For measuring the outside diameters of crankshaft, pistons, piston pins, etc. 4
Micrometer
For measuring the inside diameters of cylinder liners, rod metal, etc. 5
Cylinder gage
For measuring outside diameters, depth, thickness and width 6
Calipers
For measuring of valve sink 7
Depth micrometer
For measuring valve spring inclination and straightness of parts 8
Square
65
Illustration
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
No.
Instrument name
Application
Illustration
For measuring shaft bend
9
V-block
For tightening nuts and bolts to the specified torque 10 Torque wrench
For measuring gaps between ring and ring groove, and shaft joints during assembly 11 Thickness gage
For checking water leakage
12 Cap tester
For checking concentration of antifreeze and the battery electrolyte charge status 13 Battery coolant tester
For measuring injection spray pattern of fuel injection nozzle and injection pressure 14 Nozzle tester
For measuring temperatures abcdefghijklmn abcd efghijk
abcdefghijklmn
abcdefghijklmn abcdefghijklmn abcdefghijklmnabcdefghijklmn abcdefghijklmnabcdefghijklmn
15 Digital thermometer Float
66
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines (R.1) No.
Instrument name
Application
Illustration
For measuring revolution by contacting the mortise in the revolving shaft Contact type
16 Speedometer
For measuring revolution by sensing the reflecting mark on the outer periphery of the revolving shaft
Revolving shaft
Photoelectric type Reflection mark
For measuring resistance, voltage and continuity of electrical circuits 17 Circuit tester
For measuring compression pressure Gauge set code NO. TOL-97190080
Adapter for direct injection 2-valve head Adapter code No. 119802-92950 130
18 Compression gage kit Adapter for direct injection 4-valve head for 4TNV94L/98/98T Adapter code No. 129906-92950 165
Adapter for direct injection 4-valve head for 4TNV106/106T Adapter code No. 123907-92950 179
67
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.1.3 Complete disassembly Peripheral parts such as air cleaner, muffler and radiator differ in installation and types for each application. Therefore, description in this Chapter is started with the steps to be taken just after the peripheral parts have been removed. Step
Removal Parts
Remarks
1
1)Thoroughly remove sand, dust, dirt and soil from the surface of the engine. 2)Drain coolant water and lubricating oil from the engine.
2
1)Remove turbocharger and exhaust manifold. 2)Remove intake manifold and surge tank.
3
1)If nozzle seat is left on the cylinder head, 1)Close the fuel cock valve of the fuel tank. remove the cylinder head before extracting noz2)Remove high-pressure fuel pipe. zle seat. 3)Remove fuel return pipe. 4)Loosen the tightening nut on fuel injection noz- 2)To prevent dust from entering fuel injection nozzle retainer and extract the retainer and fuel zle, fuel injection pump and high-pressure fuel pipe, seal their respective threads with a tape or injection nozzle. the like. *) Fuel injection nozzle for Indirect injection 3)Whenever extracting fuel injection nozzle, system is screwed type. replace nozzle protector with a new one. 1)Remove rocker arm cover assembly.
4 1)Remove valve rocker arm shaft assembly. 2)Remove push rod. 5
1)Attach a tag to push rod for each cylinder No. to put the push rod in order. 2)Remove valve cap from the intake/exhaust valve head. 3)Note that tappet of the indirect injection system can be removed at the same time when push rod is extracted. 4)Attach a tag to tappet for each cylinder No. to put the tappet in order.
6
1)Remove fan mounting bolt, and then remove 1)Never turn down alternator vigorously toward the cylinder block. Otherwise, your finger may fan. 2)Loosen adjusting bolt for the V-belt adjuster, and be nipped and alternator broken. then remove V-belt. 3)Remove alternator. 4)Remove the spacer for cooling fan and V-pulley.
7
1)Remove lubricating oil filter assembly. 2)Extract dipstick form the oil dip-stick hole.
8
1)Disconnect fuel return pipes to. 2)Remove fuel filter.
68
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Step
Removal Parts
Remarks
9
1)Disconnect coolant water pipe from the cooling water pump. 2)Remove thermostat assembly. 3)Remove cooling water pump. 1)Lay a cardboard or the like on the floor and place cylinder head assembly on it so as not to damage the combustion surface. 2)Order of loosening the cylinder head tightening bolts. Disassembly
Camshaft side
8
2
5
14 12 10
4
6
3
9 11
1
13
Fan side
1)Remove cylinder head tightening bolt. 2)Remove cylinder head assembly. 3)Remove cylinder head gasket.
7
Head bolt disassembly order
3 cylinder head 10
18
9
3
11
12
4 2
10
17 13
5
6
14
16
7 1
Camshaft side
15
Fan side
Disassembly
8
Head bolt disassembly order
4 cylinder head 3)To remove the intake/exhaust valves from cylinder head assembly, take the following steps. a)Using a valve spring compressor (see Chapter 5, 5-1), compress valve spring and remove valve cotter. b)Remove valve retainer and valve spring. c)Remove intake valve and exhaust valve. 11
1)Remove crankshaft V-pulley clamping bolt. 2)Using a puller, extract crankshaft V-pulley.
1)Extract crankshaft V-pulley by hitting the bolt of the puller using a plastic hammer or the like.
12
1)Remove oil pan mounting bolt under gear case. 1)Never fail to removes stiffener bolt at the center 2)Remove gear case mounting bolt. of the gear case. 3)Remove gear case. 2)When removing the gear case, carefully protect oil seal from damage.
13
1)Remove the nut from fuel injection pump drive 1)Before removing fuel injection pump, make sure gear. Extract fuel injection pump drive gear of the position of the arrow of the pump body for using a puller. adjusting fuel injection timing as well as the position of the scribed line of the gear case flange. (Applies only to direct injection system.)
69
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Step 14
Removal Parts
Remarks
1)Remove lubricating oil pump.
15
1)Remove starting motor from flywheel housing sing.
16
1)Remove flywheel mounting bolt. 2)Remove flywheel.
17
1)Carefully protect the ring gear from damage mage.
1)Carefully protect the oil seal from damage. 1)Remove flywheel housing. 2)Remove oil seal case with a screwdriver or the like by utilizing grooves on both sides of oil seal case. 1)Remove oil pan and spacer.
18
1)Put the cylinder block with the attaching surface of the cylinder head facing down. 2)Carefully protect the combustion surface of the cylinder block from damage. 3)For indirect injection system, be careful to the possibility of the tapped to drop off when the cylinder block is turned upside down, because the tappet is cylindrical in shape.
19
1)Remove idle gear shaft, and then remove idle 1)Turn the cylinder block aside and carefully prevent tappet from jamming on the cam. gear. 2)Remove mounting bolt of thrust bearing through 2)Preheat camshaft gear and camshaft assembly the hole of the camshaft gear. Remove cam- to 180° to 200° which are shrink fitted, before removing them. shaft assembly.
20 21
22
1)Remove gear case flange. 1)Remove lubricating oil strainer. 1)Remove crankpin side cap of the connecting 1)Before extracting piston, remove carbon deposits from the upper wall of the cylinder using fine rod. sandpaper, while taking care not to damage the While turning crankshaft, place piston in the inner surface of the cylinder. bottom dead center (BDC). 2)Make sure than cap No. of connecting rod agrees with cylinder No. 3)Take care not to let crankpin metal fall when removing connecting rod crankpin side cap.
70
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Step
Removal Parts
Remarks
1)Remove main bearing cap bolt. While shaking 1)Before extracting crankshaft, measure the side main bearing cap, remove main bearing cap gap around it. together with lower main bearing metal. 2)Extract crankshaft, taking care not to damage it. 3)Remove upper main bearing metal.
Dial gauge Crankshaft
23
Apply a dial gauge to the end of crankshaft. Force the crankshaft on both sides in the axial direction to measure the thrust gap. Alternatively, insert a thickness gauge directly between the base thrust metal and the thrust surface of the crankshaft to measure the gap. If the limit size is exceeded, replace the thrust metal with a new one. Thrust gap (All models) 2)Notice on the removal of thrust metal. a)When removing thrust metal, ascertain the position and direction where thrust metal is installed in relation to the cap. b)Make sure that the thrust metal groove is outward in relation to the cap. 1)Remove piston and connecting rod assembly.
1)To selectively remove a desired piston and connecting rod assembly without extracting crankshaft, take the steps itemized below: a)Remove carbon deposits from the upper wall of the cylinder using fine sandpaper, taking care not to damage the inner surface of the cylinder.
24
b)While turning the crankshaft, with the connecting rod cap removed, raise the piston up to the top dead center (TDC). c)Extract the piston/connecting rod assembly while tapping the connecting rod at the large end with the handle of a plastic hammer or the like.
25
2)Remove tappet.
71
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.1.4 Precautions before and during reassembly To reassemble engine components, reverse the procedure of disassembly. However, follow the precautions below and the precautions from in chapter 4 to in chapter 7 particularly before and during reassembly.
(1) Cleaning the component Use particular care to clean the cylinder block, cylinder head, crankshaft, and camshaft. Ensure that they are free from chips, dust, sand, and other foreign matter.
(2) Parts to be replaced during reassembly Be sure to replace the following parts with new ones during assembly. • Valve stem seal • Head gasket packing • Nozzle protector and nozzle seat of the fuel injection valve • Various copper packing, O-rings and gasket packing.
4.1.5 Adjusting operation Make sure to perform adjusting operation after completing reassembly. Refer to section 2.5 in chapter 2 for the operation procedure.
72
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.2 Cylinder head: Disassembly, inspection and reassembly 4.2.1 Components (2-valve cylinder head)
ԡRocker arm cover
ԞFuel injection pipe
ԠExhaust manifold
Cylinder head
ԛFuel filter
ԘOil cooler
Joint ԚThermostat ԟIntake maniforld Head gasket Cooling water pump
Thermo switch Oil/water separator
ԙV-pulley
Cylinder block
Spacer
ԙFan
ԝOil filter
Gear case Note) This figure shows the 3TNV84.
4.2.2 Disassembly procedure: Disassemble in the order of the numbers shown in the illustration. 1)Remove the alternator assy. (Point1) 2)Remove the fan, pulley and V belt. 3)Remove the thermostat case. (Point2) 4)Remove the fuel filter and fuel oil piping. (Point3) 5)Remove the oil level gage assy. 6)Remove the oil filter. (Point4) 7)Remove the fuel injection pipes. (Point5) 8)Remove the intake manifold assy. 9)Remove the exhaust manifold assy. 10)Remove the rocker arm cover assy. 11)Remove the rocker shaft assy, push rods and valve caps. (Point6) 12)Remove the cylinder head assy and head gasket. (Point7) 13)Remove the fuel injection valves and fuel return pipe. (Point8) 14)Remove the intake/exhaust valves, stem seals and valve springs. (Point9) 15)Remove the rocker arms from the rocker shaft. 73
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Rocker arm cover Rocker arm suport Rocker arm cover
Rocker arm shaft Rocker arm shaft
Rocker arm
Rocker arm
Adjusting bolt Valve bridge
Valve cap Cotter Spring holder Valve spring Stem seal Valve guide
Cotter Spring holder Valve spring Rocker arm suport Stem seal Valve guide Cylinder head
Cylinder head
Exhaust valve Exhaust vlave
Suction valve
Suction valve
2-Valve cylinder head
4-Valve cylinder head
4.2.3 Reassembly procedure: Reverse order of the disassembly procedure.
74
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.2.4 Servicing points Point1
Adjust the V-belt tension inserting a bar
[Disassemble] • Loosen the mounting bolt while supporting the alternator.
Adjuster
Do not tilt the alternator toward the cylinder block in haste since it may damage the alternator or pinch a finger. [Reassemble] • The belt deflection shall be checked according to
Alternator Tension adjustment
2.2.2. in Chapter2. [Reassemble] • Replace the belt with a new one if cracked, worn or
98N (10kgf) Set bolt
damaged. • Carefully prevent the belt from being smeared with oil
Deflection Alternator
or grease. C.W. pump
V belt Crank pulley V-belt tention
Point2 [Reassemble] • Check the thermostat function. (See3.9 in Chapter 3 for the check procedure.) Pont3 [Reassemble] • Replace the fuel filter element with a new one. [Disassemble] • Cover the fuel pipe opening with tape to prevent intrusion of foreign matters. Point4 [Reassemble] • Replace the oil filter with a new one. • After fully tightening the filter manually, retighten it with a filter wrench (see 11.1-6 in Chapter 11) by 3/4 turn. Point5 [Disassemble] • Cover the fuel injection pipe and pump inlets and outlets with tape or the like to prevent intrusion of foreign matters.
75
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Point6 Pipe seal
1)Removing pipe seals of 4 valve head. [Disassemble] • Take off a rocker arm cover in case of 4 valve head after removing fuel injection pipes and pipe seals. [NOTICE] Attention is necessary because a fuel nozzle is caught
Fuel injection pipe Fuel nozzle
in a pipe seal and the pipe seal is damaged when a rocker arm cover is lifted with a pipe seal sticking to Slit of bonnet Pipe seal
the rocker arm cover. • Insert a minus driver in the slit part of the rocker arm cover, and remove it when removing a pipe seal.
Minus driver
[Reassemble] • Replace the used pipe seal with a new one when removing a pipe seal. Cap nut of fuel injection pipe
Pipe seal replacement
2)Breather system (A redactor to intake air system of blowby gas) Emitting blowby gas is harmful to natural environ-
Spring Center plate Diaphragm
Diaphragm cover Rocker arm cover
ment. Therefore blowby gas redactor is adopted to TNV series naturally- aspirated engines as breather system (Turbocharged engines emitblowby gas). The system of model 3/4TNV84 is shown as a repre-
Breather pipe
sentative of that breather system in the right figure. Breather baffle
Some of the combustion gas passes through the clearance between the cylinder and the piston, piston ring, and flows to the crankcase. This is said as
Intake maniforld
Baffle plate
blowby gas. While it passes into the cylinder head and the rocker arm cover, the blowby gas mixes with
Breather system componert
splash oil, and becomes oil mist-blowby gas mixes with splash oil, and becomes oil mist-blowby gas it passing through the baffle plate inside a rocker arm cover. And it passes through a diaphragm assy, and a intake manifold, and is reduced in the combustion chamber. Pressure inside a crankcase is controlled by the function of the diaphragm assy, and suitable amount of blowby gas is reduced in intake air system.
Diaphragm Spring Cover Center plate Blowby gas flow Rocker arm cover Blowby gas flow to diaphragm Baffle plate space Diaphragm part
[Disassemble] When a rocker arm cover is taken off, check whether oil or the like enter the diaphragm space from a small hole on the side of a diaphragm cover or not without Blowby gas flow
disassembling the diaphragm.
76
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines [NOTICE] 1)When a diaphragm is damaged, pressure control inside the crankcase becomes insufficient, and troubles occur. When the internal pressure of the crankcase decreases too much due to the damage of a spring, much blowby gas containing oil is reduced in intake air system, and it may cause the combustion defect by the early dirt of the intake valve or the urgent rotation of the engine by the oil burning. When pressure progresses in the crank case too much due to the wrong operation of the diaphragm and so on, it is considered that oil leakage from the joint of a oil pan, a oil seal and so on will occur. When a diaphragm is damaged, blowby is discharged from the breathing hole on the side of diaphragm cover, and not reduced in the intake manifold. Therefore, be careful of the diaphragm trouble. 2)At lubricating oil replacement or lube oil supply The amount of lubricating oil isn't to be beyond the standard upper limit (in the engine horizontally, the upper limit mark of the dip stick). Since the blowby gas redactor is adopted, be careful that the amount of oil mist may be inducted in the combustion chamber and the oil hammer sometimes may occur, when the lubricating oil quantity is beyond the upper limit or an engine is operated beyond the allowable maximum angle of an engine. [Reassembly] Replace the diaphragm with new one, when it is damaged. Point7 Disassembly
ing corresponding cylinder Nos.
8
2
[Reassemble] • Always apply oil to the contact portions of the push
3
1
[Reassemble] • Remove the head gasket with a new one.
14
2
9
12
4
5
11
10
6
Fan side
Camshaft side
7
13
vent the combustion face from any damage.
8
Head bolt tightning order
3 cylinder head Disassembly
• They shall be tightened in two steps in the reverse of 3
• Tightening torque
11
4 2
10 8
15
Head bolt disassembly order
4 cylinder head Assembly
Camshaft side 10
1 6
13 15
7
2
8 14
5
3
12 18 16
4TNV106 (T) 88.3 to 98.1 (9.0 to 10.0) 188.0 to 197.8 (19.0 to 20.0)
12
17 13
5
N•m (kgf•m) TNV84-88 41.1 to 46.9 (4.2 to 4.8) 85.3 to 91.1 (8.7 to 9.3)
18
9
6
14
16
7 1
the order for disassembly.
Camshaft side
9 4
17 11
Head bolt tightning order
4 cylinder head
77
Fan side
ing oil on the threaded and seat portions.
Fan side
• Uniformly install the head bolts manually after apply-
Second step
7
3 cylinder head
• Place the cylinder head assy on a paper board to pre-
First step
1
13
Assembly
illustrated order.
4TNV94L/98 49.0 to 58.8 (5.0 to 6.0) 103.1 to 112.9 (10.5 to 11.5)
11
6
Head bolt disassembly order
[Disassemble] • Loosen the cylinder head bolts in two steps in the
Second step
3
9
10
4
Point8
First step
5
14 12
rods and clearance adjusting screws.
TNV82A 30.0 to 34.0 (3.1 to 3.5) 61.7 to 65.7 (6.3 to 6.7)
Camshaft side Fan side
[Disassemble] • Keep the removed push rods by attaching tags show-
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Point9 [Disassemble] • Carefully remove the fuel injection valve so as not to leave the top end protector from being left inside the cylinder. [Reassemble] • Replace the fuel injection valve protector with a new one. Point10 [Disassemble] • When removing each intake/exhaust valve from the cylinder head, use a valve spring compressor (see 11.1-4 in Chapter 11) and compress the valve spring and remove the valve cotter.) • Keep each removed intake/exhaust valve after attaching a tag showing the corresponding cylinder No. • If cotter burr is seen at the shaft of each intake/ exhaust valve stem, remove it with an oilstone and extract the valve from the cylinder head. [Reassemble] • Replace the stem seal with a new one when an intake/exhaust valve is disassembled. • Carefully install each valve after oil application so as not to damage the stem seal. • Different stem seals are provided for the intake and exhaust valves. Do not confuse them since those for exhaust valves are marked with yellow paint. • After assembling the intake/exhaust valve, stem seal, valve spring, seat, and cotter, tap the head of the valve stem lightly for settling. • Do not forget to install the valve cap.
78
Valve spring compressor
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.2.5 Parts Inspection and measurement (1) Cylinder head Clean the cylinder head, mainly the combustion surface, valve seats and intake/exhaust ports, remove carbon deposit and bonding agent, and check the surface state.
Straight-edge
(a)Appearance check Check mainly discoloration and crack. If crack is suspected, perform color check.
(b)Combustion surface distortion Apply a strait-edge in two diagonal directions and on four sides of the cylinder head, and measure distortion with a thickness gage. Thickness gage
mm Distortion
Standard
Limit
0.05 or less
0.15
Distortion at combustion surface
(c)Valve sink Measure with the valve inserted to the cylinder head. mm Standard
Limit
0.35 to 0.55
0.8
3TNV82A (2-valve head)
Intake
Exhaust 0.30 to 0.50
0.8
4TNV84 3TNV84 (T) 3/4TNV88 (2-valve head)
Intake
0.30 to 0.50
0.8
Exhaust 0.30 to 0.50
0.8
Intake 0.36 to 0.56 4TNV84T 4TNV94/98 (T) (4-valve head) Exhaust 0.35 to 0.55
0.8
Intake
0.5 to 0.7
1.0
Exhaust
0.7 to 0.9
1.2
4TNV106 (T) (4-valve head)
Depth micrometer
Valve sink
Valve sinking depth
0.8
Valve sink depth
(d)Seat contact Apply a thin coat of minimum on the valve seat. Insert the valve in the cylinder and push it against the seat to check seat contact. Standard: Continuous contact all around
Seat Valve seat contact
79
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(2) Valve guide Mainly check damage and wear on the inside wall. Measuring positions
Apply the service part code when replacing a part. Model 3TNV82A (2-valve) 4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88 (2-valve)
Service part code Suction
124060-11800
Exhaust
119802-11810
Suction
120130-11860
b
c
A
Valve guide inside diameter
Exhaust
129150-11810
4TNV84T (4-valve)
Suc./Exh.
119717-11800
4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) (4-valve)
Suc./Exh.
129907-11800
Suction
123907-11800
Exhaust
123907-11810
4TNV106(T) (4-valve)
a
Measuring positions
Valve stem outside diameter
Valve stem clearance Model
Part name Intake value
3TNV82A (2-valve head) Exhaust value
4TNV84 3TNV84 (T) 3/4TNV88 (2-valve head)
Intake value
Exhaust value
Intake value 4TNV84T (4-valve head) Exhaust value
4TNV94L 4TNV98 (T) (4-valve head)
Intake value
Exhaust value
Intake value 4TNV106(T) (4-valve head) Exhaust value
Place Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance Guide I.D. Stem O.D. Clearance 80
Standard 7.000 to 7.015 6.945 to 6.960 0.040 to 0.070 7.000 to 7.015 6.940 to 6.955 0.045 to 0.075 8.010 to 8.025 7.955 to 7.975 0.035 to 0.070 8.015 to 8.030 7.955 to 7.970 0.045 to 0.075 6.000 to 6.015 5.960 to 5.975 0.025 to 0.055 6.000 to 6.015 5.945 to 5.960 0.040 to 0.070 7.000 to 7.015 6.945 to 6.960 0.040 to 0.070 7.000 to 7.015 6.940 to 6.955 0.045 to 0.075 7.008 to 7.020 6.960 to 6.975 0.033 to 0.060 7.008 to 7.020 6.945 to 6.960 0.048 to 0.075
Limit 7.08 6.90 0.18 7.08 6.90 0.18 8.10 7.90 0.18 8.10 7.90 0.18 6.08 5.90 0.15 6.08 5.90 0.17 7.08 6.90 0.17 7.08 6.90 0.17 7.08 6.92 0.16 7.08 6.90 0.18
B
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(3) Intake/exhaust valve Mainly clean and check damage and wear at the valve stem and seat. (a)Seat contact: See (1)-(d) above. (b)Stem outside diameter: See (2) above. (c)Valve head thickness mm Model 3TNV82A to 88 4TNV84 (2-valve head) 4TNV84T (4-valve head) 4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98 (T) (4-valve head) 4TNV106(T) (4-valve head)
Part
Standard
Limit
Intake
1.24-1.44
0.8
Exhaust
1.35-1.55
0.8
Intake
1.00-1.20
0.6
Exhaust
1.00-1.20
0.6
Intake
1.44-1.84
1.0
Exhaust
1.70-2.10
1.0
Intake
1.60-2.00
1.2
Exhaust
1.80-2.20
1.2
Thickness
Valve head thickness
Length
(d)Valve stem bend Stool
mm Limit
0.01
(e)Overall length
Valve bend and length
mm 3TNV82A
Intake/Exhaust
Standard
Limit
97.2-97.8
97.0
3/4TNV84 to 88 Intake/Exhaust 108.7-109.3
108.5
4TNV84T
99.8
Intake/Exhaust 100.0-100.6
4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) 4TNV106(T)
Intake
102.3-103.1
102.1
Exhaust
102.4-103.2
102.2
Intake
117.3-118.1
117.1
Exhaust
117.1-117.9
116.9
Free length
Valve spring
(4) Valve spring Mainly inspect damage and corrosion.
Inclination
mm Free length
Inclination limit
Standard
Limit
3TNV82A
44.4
43.9
3/4TNV84 to 88
42.0
41.5
4TNV84T
37.4
36.9
1.3
4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98(T)
39.7
39.2
1.4
4TNV106(T)
50.6
50.1
1.5
1.4 Valve spring
81
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(5) Valve rocker arm Mainly inspect valve head cap contact surface, inside surface defects and wear. Slight surface defects shall be corrected with an oilstone.
mm Model 3TNV82A 3/4TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88
4TNV94L/98(T) 4TNV106(T)
Items
Standard
Limit
Arm hole diameter
16.00 to 16.02 16.07
Shaft O.D.
15.97 to 15.98 15.94
Clearance
0.016 to 0.054
Arm hole diameter
18.50 to 18.52 18.57
Shaft O.D.
18.47 to 18.49 18.44
Clearance
0.01 to 0.05
0.13
Rocker arm hole diameter
0.13
(6) Rocker arm shaft Mainly inspect seizure and wear at the surface in sliding contact with the arm. The rocker shaft diameter shall be as specified in (5) above.
Rocker shaft outside diameter
(7) Push rod Mainly inspect the surface in contact with the tappet and adjusting screw. Slight defects shall be corrected with an oilstone. Bend limit
0.03 mm
(8) Valve clearance adjusting screw
Thickness gage
Mainly inspect the surface in contact with the push rod. Slight defects shall be corrected with an oilstone. Push rod bend
(9) Rocker arm spring Mainly inspect surface defects and corrosion.
(R.1) 82
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.2.6 Valve seat correction [NOTICE] Always check the oil clearance between the valve and valve guide before correcting the valve seat. If it exceeds the limit, replace the valve or valve guide first to make the clearance satisfy the standard. After correction, wash the valve and the cylinder head sufficiently with diesel oil to remove all grinding powder or compound. 1)If the seat surface is slightly roughened: perform [A] and [B] below. [A]: Lap the valve and seat with a mixture of valve compound and engine oil. [B]: Lap with engine oil only.
2)If the seat is heavily roughened but the width is almost normal, correct with a seat grinder or seat 150q
cutter first. Then perform lapping [A] and [B]. Seat cutter angle
intake
Exhaust
120
90
Seat angle 40q
Seat width
Seat cutter Cylinder head correction angle
3)If the seat is heavily roughened and the width is much enlarged, grind the seat inner surface with a seat grinder whose center angle is 40°, then grind
Grinder
the seat outer surface with a grinder whose center angle is 150° to make the seat width match the standard. Then perform seat correction as described in 2), and then carry out lapping [A] and [B]. Grinding wheel angle
θ1
θ2
40
150
Grindstone Seat grinder
83
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.2.7 Valve guide replacement 1)Use a valve guide extraction tool (12.1-1 in Chapter 12) and extract the valve guide from the cylinder head. 2)Put liquid nitrogen or ether (or alcohol) with dry ice added in a container and put the valve guide for replacement in it for cooling. Then insert it in with a valve guide inserting tool (Refer to No.2 of 4.1.2 in Chapter 4).
Do not touch the cooled valve guide with bare hands to avoid skin damage. 3)Check the inside diameter and finish to the standard inside diameter as required with a reamer. 4)Check the projection from the cylinder head. Valve guide extracting & inserting tool
mm Model
Number of valves
3TNV82A 4TNV84 3TNV84 (T) 4TNV88
4TNE106(T)
Projection
11.7 to 12.0 2 valves
4TNV84T 4TNV94L 4TNV98(T)
Projection Cylinder head
14.7 to 15.0 8.2 to 8.5
4 valves
Valve guide
9.7 to 10.
Valve guide replacement
13.4 to 13.6
84
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.2.8 Valve stem seal replacement Always use a new seal after the intake/exhaust valve is disassembled. Since the one for the exhaust valve is
Valve stem seal inserting tool
marked with yellow paint, do not confuse the intake and exhaust valves. 1)Apply engine oil to the lip. 2)Push with the inserting tool (Refer to No.5 of 4.1.2 in Chapter 4) for installation. Stem seal Valve guide Cylinder head
Stem seal insertion
3)Measure and check the projection of valve stem seal to keep proper clearance between valve guide and stem seal. mm Number of valves
3TNV82A 4TNV84 3TNV84 (T) 4TNV88
15.7 to 16.0 2 valves
4TNV84T 4TNV94L 4TNV98 (T) 4TNE106 (T)
Projection Clearance
Model
Stem seal
18.7 to 19.0
Valve guide
9.9 to 10.2 4 valves
11.7 to 12.0 15.4 to 15.6 Valve guide projection Stem seal projection
85
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.3 Gear train and camshaft 4.3.1 Components
ԠFlywheel Flywheel housing ԟStarter
ԢGear case flange ԡCamshaft
ԙCooling water pump
ԝ Idle gear
Fuel pump spacer
Camshaft driving gear
ԜFuel injection pump
Don't disassemble!
Pump flange Fuel pump drive gear Flange bolt
Crankshaft gear ԛGear case ԣOil seal ԚCrankshaft pulley Note) This figure shows the 3TNV84.
4.3.2 Disassembly procedure: Disassemble in the order of the numbers in the illustration. 1)Perform steps 1) to 12) of the cylinder head disassembly procedure. 2)Remove the cooling water pump. 3)Remove the crankshaft pulley. (See Point 1 of 4.3.4) 4)Remove the gear case cover. (See Point 2 of 4.3.4) 5)Remove the fuel injection pump. (See Point 3 of 4.3.4) 6)Remove the idle gear assy. (See Point 4 of 4.3.4) 7)Remove the PTO drive gear. (See Point 5 of 4.3.4) 8)Remove the starting motor. 9)Remove the flywheel. (See Point 6 of 4.3.4) 10) Remove the camshaft assy. (See Point 7 of 4.3.4) 11) Remove the gear case. (See Point 8 of 4.3.4) 12) Remove the oil seal from the gear case cover. (See 4.3.6)
4.3.3 Reassembly procedure: Reverse of the disassembly procedure. 86
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.3.4 Servicing points Point1 [Disassemble] • Remove the crankshaft pulley using a gear puller after removing the crankshaft pulley set bolt. When removing the pulley using the gear puller, use a pad and carefully operate so as not to damage the thread. Set the gear puller securely to prevent the pulley from being damaged. [Reassemble] • Apply lithium grease to the oil seal lips. For the oil seal with double lips dust seal, further slightly apply engine oil on the lips so as not to damage them. • Clean by wiping off any oil on both taper surfaces using detergent. • Be sure to use the crankshaft pulley installing tool so as not to damage the oil seal lips. (See 4.3(6) Oil seal replacement) • When installing the crankshaft pulley, apply lube oil to the set bolt to tighten and carefully assemble so as not to damage the oil seal. N•m (kgf•m) Model
Tightening torque
3TNV82A to TNV88
112.7 to 122.7 (11.5 to 12.5)
4TNV94L/98/106(T)
107.9 to 127.5 (11.0 to 3.0)
Fuel injection pump drive gear Camshaft gear
Point2 [Reassemble] • When installing the gear case, do not forget to install
B
the two reinforcing bolts at the center. • Measure the backlash of each gear.
B
4TNV94L-106(T) Crankshaft gear, Camshaft gear, Fuel injection pump gear, Idle gear, PTO gear, Balancer gear (only 4TNV106(T)) Lubricating oil pump gear
Standard 0.07 to 0.15
Idle gear
Limit
Limit
0.08 to 0.14
0.16
0.20
0.09 to 0.15
0.17
Direction of rotation
Gear train (4TNV94L to 106) Fuel injection pump drive gear
B
0.12 to 0.18
PTO gear Crankshaft gear
Lubricating oil pump gear
0.17
Standard
C
A A
mm 3TNV82A to 88 Crankshaft gear, Camshaft gear, Fuel injection pump gear, Idle gear, PTO gear,
C
Idle gear
B
C
Camshaft gear
C
A PTO gear
• Apply sealant and install the gear case by correctly Crankshaft gear Direction of rotation
positioning the two dowel pins.
Gear train (3TNV82A to 4TNV88)
(R.1) 87
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Point3: (Refer to 7.2.5 in chapter 7) [Disassemble] • Remove the mounting nut of the fuel injection pump drive gear, remove the gear using the gear puller, and remove the fuel injection pump. Do not forget to remove the stay on the rear side. When extracting the gear using the gear puller, use a pad at the shaft and carefully operate so as not to damage the thread. [Reassemble] • Tightening torque for fuel pump drive gear nut (without lube. Oil) N•m (kgf•m) Model
Tightening torque
TNV82A to 88
78 to 88 (8.0 to 9.0)
4TNV94L/98/106 (T)
113 to 123 (11.5 to 12.5)
Point4 [Reassemble] • Assemble crankshaft gear A, fuel injection pump drive gear B and camshaft gear C at the same time by aligning with idle gear A, B and C marks. • Install the idle gear shaft with the oil hole facing upward. Point5 [Reassemble] • Install the PTO drive gear with its inner spline side facing the flywheel. Point6 [Disassemble] • Install a bolt as a handle in the hole at the end face of the flywheel and remove carefully so as not to damage the ring gear. [Reassemble] Flywheel mounting bolt : apply lube oil N•m (kgf•m) Model 3TNV82A to 88 4TNV94L/98/106 (T)
Tightening torque 83.3 to 88.2 (8.5 to 9.0)
Fuel injection pump drive gear
186.2 to 205.8 (19.0 to 21.0)
Camshaft gear
Point7 [Disassemble]
B
• Measure the camshaft side gap. mm Item Side gap
Standard
Limit
0.05 to 0.20
0.30
Idle gear
B
C
C
A PTO gear
• If the measured side gap exceeds the limit, replace the thrust metal.
Crankshaft gear Direction of rotation
Gear train (3TNV82A to 4TNV88) 88
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines [Disassemble] • Since the camshaft gear is shrink-fit, heat it to 180°C to 200°C for extraction. • For camshaft removal, raise the engine with its mounting flange at the bottom. After removing the thrust metal mounting bolt from the camshaft gear hole, extract the camshaft carefully so as not to damage the bearing bushing. • Rotate the camshaft a few turns before extracting it to prevent the tappet from being caught by the cam. • After removing the camshaft, set the engine horizontal and fix it on the base.
Unforeseen injury may arise due to falling of slipping when raising the engine vertically or returning it to the horizontal position. Proceed carefully so as not to lose balance. Point8: Gear case [Reassemble] • Do not forget to install the oil pan mounting bolts on the bottom side when installing the gear case. • Apply sealant (code No.977770-01212) and install the gear case by matching the two dowel pints.
89
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.3.5 Parts inspection and measurement (1) Camshaft Mainly check the contact between the tappet and cam contact surface, bearing seizure and wear, and gear damage.
(a)Shaft bend measurement Support the camshaft with V blocks. Rotate the camshaft and measure the runout at the center of the camshaft and at each journal with a dial gage. Half of the runout is the bend. mm Item
Standard
Limit
Bend
0 to 0.02
0.05
Cap tester
Water leak check in cooling water system
(b)Intake/exhaust cam height measurement mm Model
Standard
Limit
3TNV82A to 88
38.600 to 38.800
38.350
4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98
43.400 to 43.600
43.150
4TNV106 (T)
50.900 to 51.100
50.650
(c)Camshaft and bearing hole measurement Measure the camshaft outside diameter with
a
micrometer. The oil clearance shall be calculated by subtracting the measured camshaft outside diameter
Flywheel side Micrometer
from the inside diameter of the camshaft bearing or bushing. The camshaft bushing at gear case side is measured with a cylinder gage after insertion to the cylinder. Camshaft outside diameter
90
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
mm Model
Place Gear side
3TNV82A to TNV88 Intermediate position
Wheel side
Gear side
TNV94L/98 (T)
Intermediate position
Wheel side
Gear side
4TNV106(T)
Intermediate position
Wheel side
Item
Standard
Limit
Bushing I.D.
44.990 to 45.055
45.130
Camshaft O.D.
44.925 to 44.950
44.890
Oil clearance
0.040 to 0.130
0.240
Bushing I.D.
45.000 to 45.025
45.100
Camshaft O.D.
44.910 to 44.935
44.875
Oil clearance
0.065 to 0.115
0.225
Bushing I.D.
45.000 to 45.025
45.100
Camshaft O.D.
44.925 to 44.950
44.890
Oil clearance
0.0500.100
0.210
Bushing I.D.
49.990 to 50.055
50.130
Camshaft O.D.
49.925 to 49.950
49.890
Oil clearance
0.040 to 0.130
0.240
Bushing I.D.
50.000 to 50.025
50.100
Camshaft O.D.
49.910 to 49.935
49.875
Oil clearance
0.065 to 0.115
0.225
Bushing I.D.
50.000 to 50.025
50.100
Camshaft O.D.
49.925 to 49.950
49.890
Oil clearance
0.05 to 0.100
0.210
Bushing I.D.
57.980 to 58.050
58.105
Camshaft O.D.
57.910 to 57.940
57.875
Oil clearance
0.040 to 0.140
0.250
Bushing I.D.
58.000 to 58.030
58.105
Camshaft O.D.
57.895 to 57.925
57.860
Oil clearance
0.075 to 0.135
0.245
Bushing I.D.
58.000 to 58.030
58.105
Camshaft O.D.
57.910 to 57.940
57.875
Oil clearance
0.050 to 0.120
0.230
(2) Idle gear Mainly check the bushing seizure and wear, and gear
measurement mm Item
Standard
Limit
Shaft outside diameter
45.950 to 49.975
45.900
Bushing inside diameter
46.000 to 46.025
46.075
0.025 to 0.075
0.175
Clearance
(3) PTO drive gear Mainly check sticking of bearings on both sides, gear damage and looseness, and gear shaft damage and wear. 91
Inside diameter
Shaft outside diameter and bushing inside diameter
Idle gear
Shaft Shaft diameter
damage.
Idle gear
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.3.6 Oil seal replacement (Gear case side) 1)Replace the oil seal with a new one when the gear case is disassembled. Extract the used oil seal. 2)Insert a new oil seal. Fit the position of the oil seal insertion to the end face of the gear case. (Refer to the below figure.) 3)Apply lithium grease to the oil seal tips. For the oil seal with double lips dust seal, further, slightly apply engine oil on the oil seal lip so as not to damage them, when installing the pulley. [NOTICE] Pay attention not to drop any oil on the taper surface of the crankshaft. If dropped, clean by wiping off using detergent. 4)Carefully install the crankshaft pulley so as not to damage the oil seal lips. Especially for the engine installed the oil seal with double lips dust seal, be sure to use the crankshaft pulley-installing tool. Crankshaft pulley
25
Oil seal with doule lips dust seal 0.2
A
46
Guiding
26 Knurled head (Rollet)
1.6
20 A
Ç&#x17E;35
Ç&#x17E;39
1
C1
Crankshaft pulley installing tool
.5 C0 .5 C0
.5 C0
Ç&#x17E; #
M14Â&#x2DC;1.5
16
17
Detail of crankshaft pulley installing tool (Scale: free) (Local supply) For 4TNV94L engine installed the oil seal with double lips dust seal
Oil seal with double lips dust seal
4.3.7 Camshaft bushing replacement Replace the bushing using the special service tool (Refer to No.7 of 4.1.2 in Chapter 4).
92
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.4 Cylinder block 4.4.1 Components ԡPiston ring ԜPiston & Connecting rod
Flywheel ԝFlywheel hausing
Gear case flange
ԠTappet
Oil seal ԢOil seal case Oil filter
ԛOil suction pipe
ԞBearing cap
ԚOil pan spacer ԟCrankshaft
ԚOil pan
Note) This figure shows the 3TNV84.
4.4.2 Disassembly procedure: Disassemble in the order of the numbers in the illustration. 1)Perform steps 1) to 12) in the cylinder head disassembly procedure. 2)Perform steps 1) to 12) in the gear train disassembly procedure. 3)Remove the oil pan. (See Point 1 of 4.4.4) 4)Remove the lubricating oil suction pipe. 5)Remove the piston w/rod. (See Point 2 of 4.4.4) 6)Remove the mounting flange. (See Point 3 of 4.4.4) 7)Remove the bearing metal caps. (See Point 4 of 4.4.4) 8)Remove the crankshaft. (See Point 5 of 4.4.4) 9)Remove the tappets. 10)Remove the pistons and rings. (See Point 6 of 4.4.4) 11)Remove the oil seal from the mounting flange. (See 4.4.8 of 4.4.4)
4.4.3 Reassembly procedure: Reverse of the disassembly procedure. 93
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.4.4 Servicing points Point1: Oil pan [Disassemble] • Sealant is applied to the oil pan mounting surface on the block. Carefully operate soas not to damage or distort the bonding surface. [Reassemble] • Apply sealant (code No.977770-01212) before reassembly. Point2: Piston w/rod
Crankshaft
[Disassemble]
Thickness gage
• Measure the connecting rod side gap. mm Standard
0.20 to 0.40
Connecting rod side gap
• Carefully remove the carbon deposit on top of the cylinder so as not to damage the inner side of the cylinder. • Set the piston at the BDC position and remove the connecting rod cap. Then set the piston at the TDC position, and push the connecting rod big end with the wooden shaft of a hammer. Proceed carefully so as not to cause the cylinder block catch the rod big end. Set the rod caps and crankpin metals in their correct combinations. [Reassemble] • Apply oil especially carefully to the sliding contact surfaces of the pistons, rods and rings. • Use the piston insertion tool (see 12.1-9 in Chapter 12) to insert each piston w/rod in the cylinder block and install the bearing metal cap. Rod bolt tightening torque Model
N•m (kgf•m)
Standard (apply lube oil)
3TNV82A
37.2 to 41.2 (3.8 to 4.2)
TNV84 to 88
44.1 to 49.0 (4.5 to 5.0)
4TNV94L•98
53.9 to 58.8 (5.5 to 6.0)
4TNV106(T)
78.5 to 83.4 (8.0 to 8.5)
Point3: mounting flange [Disassemble] Place the engine on a stable base with the cylinder block upper surface facing down, and remove the mounting flange carefully so as not to damage the combustion surface.
94
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines [Reassemble] Apply sealant (code No.977770-01212) and install the mounting flange by matching the two dowel pins. After assembly, raise the engine with its mounting flange on the bottom side.
Unforeseen injury may arise due to falling of slipping when raising or reversing the engine. Carefully operate so as not to lose balance. Point4: Journal bearing cap [Disassemble] • Before removing the journal bearing, measure the crankshaft side gap. Measure it in either method because there are the next two methods. 1)Install a dial gage on the cylinder block, and move a crankshaft in front and back, and measure the side gap as shown in the right figure.
Side gap measurement 1
2)Put a thickness gauge in the clearance between Cylinder block
thrust metal and crankshaft directly, and measure it. Side gap standard mm Model 3TNV82A to 88 4TNV94L to 106
Standard 0.140 to 0.220 0.130 to 0.230
Limit 0.28 0.28
Crankshaft Standard width
[Reassemble] • If the side gap exceeds the standard, replace the
Thrust metal
Thrust face
Bearing cap
thrust metal with an oversize one. Machine the standard width of the crankshaft thrust
Thickness gauge
part into the dimension of the below table at the same time. Refer to a parts catalog when ordering the part. The surface finishing precision (refer to 4.4.5(2) in Chapter4):
1.6
0.25 mm Oversized thrust metal (0.25 DS) mm 0.25DS Thrust metal assy code Standard thickness 3TNV82A 119810-02940 2.055 to 2.105 TNV84 to 88 129150-02940 2.055 to 2.105 4TNV94L•98 129900-02940 2.055 to 2.105 4TNV106(T) The standard width 123900-02940 of the crankshaft thrust2.555 part to 2.605 Model 3TNV82A TNV84 to 88 4TNV94L•98 4TNV106(T)
mm Standard thickness 25.250 to 25.271 28.250 to 28.271 32.250 to 32.275 36.250 to 36.275
(R.1) 95
Side gap measurement 2
[Disassemble] • Remove the bearing caps, cap side bearings, and thrust metals. Place each thrust metal with identification of the position and direction. The position number of reassembling is punched on
Wheel side
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Block side main bearing metals Cap side main bearing metals
a metal cap (except for both ends) and a cylinder Gear side
block. Thrust metals
Main bearing
[Reassemble] • Carefully install each thrust metal so that the grooved one is positioned away from the cap. • Do not confuse the upper and lower main bearing
Upper main bearing metal Oil hole Lower Thrust metal
metals. The upper main bearing metal (block side) has an oil hole, and the lower one does not. The “arrow” marks on the cap shall face the flywheel. Tighten main bearing cap bolts.
Groove Main bearing cap
Main bearing cap bolt tightening torque (apply lube oil) N•m (kgf•m) Model
Standard
3TNV82A
76.4 to 80.4 (7.8 to 8.2)
TNV848 to 8
93.2 to 98.1 (9.5 to 10.5)
4TNV94L•98
108.1 to 117.9 (11.0 to 12.0)
4TNV106(T)
186.2 to 205.8 (19.0 to 21.0)
(9 ࡎࠗ࡞
Mark Position number of reassembling
Point5: Crankshaft [Disassemble] • Remove the crankshaft. Remove each main bearing metal upper (block side) and pair it with the metal cap side lower metal.
Carefully prevent damage to the bearing or finger injury when removing the crankshaft because it is heavy.
96
Journal bearing cap
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines Point6: Piston pin and rings [Disassemble] • Using the piston ring replacer (see 4.1.2 in Chapter 4), remove the piston rings.
Make the punched manufacturer's mark face upward.
• Remove the circlip and remove the piston pin by
Piston ring
pushing it out. [Reassemble] • Install each piston ring on the piston, with the
Oil ring joint
punched manufacturer’s mark facing upward. [Reassemble] • The piston ring joints shall be staggered at by 120° intervals. Do not position the top ring joint vertical to
Second ring joint Top ring joint
the piston pin. The coil expander joint shall be opposite to the oil ring joint.
Expander joint
[Reassemble] • When installing the piston pin to the rod and piston,
Ring joints
the punched match mark on the big end of the conPiston ID mark
punched mark on the big end of the rod on the nozzle side. (The embossed mark at the connecting rod Ibeam section shall be on the flywheel side.)
Nozzle side
piston top. [Reassemble] • Install the piston in the cylinder clock with the
Camshaft side
necting rod shall be opposite to the size mark on the
(Flywheel side) Cylinder size mark Piston ID mark
Camshaft side
Engraved mark
Embossed mark (Flywheel side) Match mark Flywheel side
direction of connecting ( Assembly ) rod and piston
direction of connecting ( Assembly ) rod and piston
4TNV106(T)
(R.1) 97
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
4.4.5 Parts inspection and measurement (1) Cylinder block Especially clean head surface, cylinder bores and oil holes, and check after removing any carbon deposit and bonding agent. (a)Appearance inspection Check if there is any discoloration or crack. If crack is suspected, perform color check. Sufficiently clean the oil holes and check they are not clogged.
(b)Cylinder bore and distortion Measure at 20 mm below the crest of the liner, at 20 mm from the bottom end and at the center. Roundness: Roundness is found as follows though it is the simple method. Measure cylinder diameters of the A direction
Cylinder bore
and the B direction on each section of a, b and c. Roundness is the maximum value among those difference values. Cylindricity:
a
Cylindricity is found as follows though it is the simple
20mm
A
method. b
Measure cylinder diameters of a, b and c sections in the A direction, and calculate the difference in maximum value and minimum value of the measured
c
diameters. In the same way measure and calculate the difference
B Measure in two directions A and B at points a,b and c. 20mm
Cylinder bore measurement positions
in the B direction. Cylindricity is the maximum value between those difference values. mm Item
Model
Cylinder inside diameter
Standard
Limit
3TNV82A
82.000 to 82.030
82.200
TNV84
84.000 to 84.030
84.200
TNV88
88.000 to 88.030
88.200
4TNV94L
94.000 to 94.030
94.130
4TNV98
98.000 to 98.030
98.130
106.000 to 106.030
106.130
0.01 or less
0.03
4TNV106(T) Cylinder bore
Roundness Cylindricity
all TNV
98
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(c)If the limit is exceeded or any surface defect is found, repair by boring and honing. Use an oversized piston (and new piston rings) as required. Oversized piston (0.25 mm, with piston rings) Model Code No. Standard (mm) 3TNV82A
719802-22900
82.250
3TNV84 (T) 4TNV84
129004-22900
84.250
4TNV84T
129508-22900
84.250
3/4TNV88
129005-22900
88.250
4TNV94L
729906-22900
94.250
4TNV98
129902-22700
98.250
4TNV106
729907-22900
106.250
4TNV106T
723907-22910
106.250
Piston ring assy for oversized (0.25 mm) Model Piston ring code No. 3TNV82A
719802-22950
3TNV84 (T) 4TNV84
129004-22950
4TNV84T
129004-22950
3/4TNV88
129005-22950
4TNV94L
729906-22950
4TNV98
729907-22950
4TNV106 (T)
723907-22950
Cylinder dimension after boring and honing Cylinder dimension Honing angle Model Surface roughness (mm) (deg.) 3TNV82A
82.250 to 82.280
3TNV84 (T) 4TNV84
84.250 to 84.280
3/4TNV88
88.250 to 88.280
4TNV94L
94.250 to 94.280
4TNV98
98.250 to 98.280
4TNV106 (T)
30 to 40 deg.
106.250 to 106.280
99
Rmax 1.0 to 3.5S
Roundness/Cylindricity (mm)
0.01 or less
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(2) Crankshaft Mainly check seizure and wear of the crankpins and journals. Since the crankshaft gear is shrink-fitted, heat to 180 to 200°C when extraction is necessary.
(a)Shaft portion color check After washing the crankshaft, inspect it by means of color check or a magnaflux inspector. Replace it if cracked or heavily damaged. Slight defects shall be corrected by grinding. Inspection by color check
(b)Crankshaft bend Support the crankshaft journals at both ends with Vblocks. Use a dial gage and measure the runout at the
Bend
center journal while rotating the shaft to inspect the bend. Limit
0.02 mm or less Deflection Dial gage
V-block
V-block
Crankshaft bend measurement
(c)Crankpin and journal measurement Measure the outside diameter, roundness and taper at each crankpin and journal. Correct by grinding if unevenly wear, roundness exceeding the limit or insufficient outside diameter is found. Replace if the defect is excessive.
Item
Limit (Diameter) (mm)
Roundness Taper
0.01
To look for the oil clearance of crank pin, measure the inside diameter of crank pin metal according to (5) (d) described later and calculate. Crankshaft journal Crankpin Measuring position of the crankpin and crank journal
100
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Crankpin
mm Model & Item
Standard
Limit
42.952 to 42.962
42.902
Metal thickness
1.487 to 1.500
-
Oil clearance
0.038 to 0.090
0.150
47.952 to 47.962
47.902
Metal thickness
1.492 to 1.500
-
Oil clearance
0.038 to 0.074
0.150
57.952 to 57.962
57.902
Metal thickness
1.492 to 1.500
-
Oil clearance
0.038 to 0.074
0.150
63.952 to 63.962
63.902
Metal thickness
1.984 to 1.992
-
Oil clearance
0.054 to 0.090
0.150
Pin outside diameter 3TNV82A
Pin outside diameter TNV84 to 88
Pin outside diameter 4TNV94L•98
Pin outside diameter 4TNV106(T)
If the oil clearance exceeds the limit, use an undersized bearing.
Undersized crankpin bearing (0.25 mm) Model Code No.
Standard thickness (mm)
3TNV82A
119810-23610
1.612 to 1.625
TNV84 to 88
129150-23610
1.617 to 1.625
4TNV94L•98
129900-23610
1.617 to 1.625
4TNV106(T)
123900-23610
2.109 to 2.117
Pin machining dimension Model Pin machining dimension (mm) 3TNV82A
ø 42.702 to 42.712
TNV84 to 88
ø 47.702 to 47.712
4TNV94L•98
ø 57.702 to 57.712
4TNV106 (T)
ø 63.702 to 63.712
101
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Crank journal
mm
Model
Item
Standard
Limit
46.952 to 46.962
46.902
Metal thickness
1.987 to 2.000
-
Oil clearance
0.038 to 0.080
0.150
Journal O.D.
53.952 to 53.962
53.902
Metal thickness
1.995 to 1.990
-
Oil clearance
0.038 to 0.068
0.150
Journal O.D.
64.952 to 64.962
64.902
Metal thickness
1.995 to 2.010
-
Oil clearance
0.038 to 0.068
0.150
Journal O.D.
75.952 to 75.962
75.902
Metal thickness
2.488 to 2.503
-
Oil clearance
0.052 to 0.082
0.150
Journal O.D. 3TNV82A
TNV84 to 88 (Selective assembly)
4TNV94•98 (Selective assembly)
4TNV106(T) (Selective assembly)
If the clearance limit is exceeded, use an undersized bearing. Undersized bearing (0.25 mm) Model Code No.
Standard thickness (mm)
3TNV82A
119810-02870
2.112 to 2.125
TNV84 to 88
129150-02870
2.112 to 2.125
4TNV94L•98
129900-02340
2.112 to 2.125
4TNV106 (T)
12900-02340
2.605 to 2.618
Crankshaft Journal machining dimension Model Journal machining dimension (mm) 3TNV82A
ø 46.702 to 46.712
TNV84 to 88
ø 53.702 to 53.712
4TNV94/98
ø 64.702 to 64.712
4TNV106 (T)
ø 75.702 to 75.712
102
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines â&#x20AC;˘ Dimension R and finishing precision of crankshaft journal and pin As for grinding processing of journal and pin,
Super polishing
machine it by using the grinding wheel of the dimen-
Ry=0.8S
sion R of below table.
Super polishing
Surface finishing precision standard on journal and
Ry=0.8S
Ry=0.8S super polishing Surface finishing precision standard on the thrust
R
R
Crank Pin
1.6
R
R
R
pin:
side of crankshaft arm:
Thrust face
Crank Journal
Crankshaft R machining
mm Model
Finishing precision standard of dimension R
3TNV82A 3/4TNV84(T) to 88
3.5 +0.3/ 0
4TNV94L/98(T) 4TNV106(T)
4.0 +0.3/ 0
[NOTICE] 1)If the oil clearance is excessive though the thicknesses of the journal and crankpin metals are normal or if partial uneven wear is observed, re-grind the crankshaft and use an oversized metals. 2)If rust or surface roughening exists on the rear side of the metals, coat it with blue or minimum. Then assemble the crankpin metal to the connecting rod, and tighten the rod bolt to the specified torque to check the metal for contact. If the contact surface occupies 75% or more, the metal is normal. If the contact surface is insufficient, the metal interference is insufficient. Replace the metal with a new one.
(3) Thrust metal inspection (a)Inspect any damage or wear. (b)Measure side gap and thrust metal thickness Side gap and thrust metal thickness Model
mm
Side gap Standard
3TNV82A 3/4TNV84 (T) to 88
0.14 to 0.22
4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98
0.13 to 0.23
4TNV106 (T)
0.13 to 0.23
Thrust metal thickness Limit
0.28
Standard
Limit
1.930 to 1.980
1.850
1.930 to 1.980
1.850
2.430 to 2.480
2.35
If the side gap is exceeded, use an oversized thrust metal. (Refer to point 4 of 4.4.4.) Oversized metal (0.25 mm) Model
Code No. (Up-down combination)
3TNV82A
119810-02940
3/4TNV84(T) to 88
129150-02940
4TNV94L to 4TNV106 (T)
129900-02940
103
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(4) Piston Especially clean the combustion surface, circumference, ring grooves and piston pin bosses, and check after removing any carbon deposit. Any burr at a ring groove or snap ring groove shall be removed. If crack is suspected, inspect by color check.
(a)Piston outside diameter measurement Measure the long diameter at H mm from the bottom end of the piston of the oval hole in the vertical direction to
Measurement position H mm
the piston pin hole.
Piston outside diameter
Piston outside diameter mm Model
Outside diameter Standard
Limit
Clearance between piston and cylinder
3TNV82A
81.950 to 81.980
81.905
0.040 to 0.060
3,4TNV84(T)
83.940 to 83.970
83.895
3,4TNV88
87.940 to 87.970
87.895
4TNV94L
93.935 to 93.965
93.900
4TNV98 (T)
97.930 to 97.960
97.895
4TNV106 (T)
105.930 to 105.960
105.880
Measurement position (H) 16 24
0.050 to 0.070
24
0.055 to 0.075
22 22
0.060 to 0.080
30
If the piston outside diameter exceed the limit, replace the piston with new one. If the clearance between piston and cylinder exceeds the limit, use an oversized piston. (Refer to the tables of oversized pistons, oversized piston rings and cylinder boring dimension in (1) (c) above.) Selective pairing of cylinder and piston Piston must be paired with cylinder according to the below table. The size mark of a piston is shown on the top surface of the piston and the size mark of a cylinder block is shown on the non-operating side of the cylinder block. The service parts of pistons are provided.
Tolerance Size mark Cylinder inside diameter D1
+0.030 max. +0.020 min. below +0.020 +0.010 min. below +0.010 0 min.
+0.015 max. +0.005 min. L
Piston outside diameter. D2 below +0.005 below 0 below -0.005 0 min. -0.005 min. -0.015 min. ML MS S
L
c
c
°
°
M
°
c
c
°
S
°
°
c
c
Model
Cylinder inside diameter D1
Piston outside diameter. D2
3TNV82A
82
81.965
3,4TNV84 (T)
84
83.955
3,4TNV88
88
87.955
4TNV94L
94
93.950
4TNV98 (T)
98
97.945
4TNV106 (T)
106
105.945
104
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines (b)Piston pin hole measurement Measure the outside diameter of piston pin and the inside diameter of piston pin hole. Calculate the clearance between piston pin and piston pin hole. If any
Measure at positions a,b and c in directions A and B. a
b
A
data exceeds the limit, replace the part with a new one. mm Model 3TNV82A
Item
Standard
Limit
Pin I.D.
23.000 to 23.009
23.039
Pin O.D.
22.995 to 23.000
22.965
0.000 to 0.014
0.074
26.000 to 26.009
26.039
25.995 to 26.000
25.965
0.000 to 0.014
0.074
Pin I.D.
30.000 to 30.009
30.039
Pin O.D.
29.989 to 30.000
29.959
0.000 to 0.020
0.080
37.000 to 37.011
37.039
36.989 to 37.000
36.959
0.000 to 0.022
0.080
Clearance Pin I.D. TNV84 to 88 Pin O.D. Clearance 4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘ 4TNV98 (T)
Clearance Pin I.D.
4TNV106 (T) Pin O.D. Clearance
B Piston pin outside diameter
(c)Piston ring, ring groove and end clearance
measurement â&#x20AC;˘ Except for the top ring, to measure the piston ring
Top ring
groove width, first measure the width of the piston ring. Then insert the piston ring into the ring. Then
Second ring
insert the piston ring into the ring groove. Insert a thickness gage in between the piston ring and groove to measure the gap between them. Obtain the ring
Oil ring
groove width by adding ring width to the measured side clearance. â&#x20AC;˘ To measure the end clearance, push the piston ring into the sleeve using the piston head, insert a thick-
Ring components
ness gage in end clearance to measure. The ring shall be pushed in to approx. 30 mm above the bottom end of the cylinder. For the top ring, measure only the piston ring joint end clearance in normal
Head surface
state. Cylinder block
Pistonring Approx. 30mm
Width
Joint end clearance
Thickness Measuring side clearance
Ring joint end clearance measurement
105
c
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
Piston ring dimension mm Model
Part Top ring
TNV82A/84
Second ring
Oil ring
Top ring
TNV88
Second ring
Oil ring
Top ring
4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98
Second ring
Oil ring
Top ring
4TNV106 (T)
Second ring
Oil ring
Item Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance
106
Standard 2.065 to 2.080 1.970 to 1.990 0.075 to 0.110 0.200 to 0.400 2.035 to 2.050 1.970 to 1.990 0.045 to 0.080 0.200 to 0.400 4.015 to 4.030 3.970 to 3.990 0.025 to 0.060 0.200 to 0.400 2.060 to 2.075 1.970 to 1.990 0.070 to 0.105 0.200 to 0.400 2.025 to 2.040 1.970 to 1.990 0.035 to 0.070 0.200 to 0.400 4.015 to 4.030 3.970 to 3.990 0.025 to 0.060 0.200 to 0.400 2.040 to 2.060 1.940 to 1.960 0.080 to 0.120 0.250 to 0.450 2.080 to 2.095 1.970 to 1.990 0.090 to 0.125 0.450 to 0.650 3.015 to 3.030 2.970 to 2.990 0.025 to 0.060 0.250 to 0.450 2.520 to 2.540 2.440 to 2.460 0.060 to 0.100 0.300 to 0.450 2.070 to 2.085 1.970 to 1.990 0.080 to 0.115 0.450 to 0.600 3.015 to 3.030 2.970 to 2.990 0.025 to 0.060 0.300 to 0.500
Limit 1.950 0.490 2.150 1.950 0.200 0.490 4.130 3.950 0.180 0.490 1.950 0.490 2.140 1.950 0.190 0.490 4.130 3.950 0.180 0.490 1.920 0.540 2.195 1.950 0.245 0.730 3.130 2.950 0.180 0.550 2.420 0.540 2.185 1.950 0.235 0.680 3.130 2.950 0.180 0.600
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(5) Connecting rod (a)Appearance inspection Inspect the portion near the boundary of the chamfered m
0m
portion and I-beam section of the big and small ends of
10
the connecting rod as well as the portion near the oil hole of the bushing at the small end for cracks, deformation,
m
0m
10
Parallelism
and discoloration.
(b)Twist and parallelism measurement Use a connecting rod aligner and measure the twist and bend.
Twist
mm Item
Standard dimension
Limit dimension
0.03 or less per 100 mm
0.08
Twist and parallelism
Mandrel
Twist and parallelism measurement
(c)Rod small end measurement Measure the pin outside diameter according to 4.4.5.(4) (a) described above. Model
Item Piston pin I.D. bushing 3TNV82A Pin O.D. Clearance Piston pin I.D. bushing TNV84 to 88 Pin O.D. Clearance Piston pin I.D. bushing 4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98 Pin O.D. Clearance Piston pin I.D. bushing 4TNV106 (T) Pin O.D. Clearance
Standard
mm Limit
23.025 to 23.038 23.068 22.995 to 23.000 22.967 0.025 to 0.043 0.101 26.025 to 26.038 26.068
Connecting rod aligner
25.995 to 26.000 25.967 0.025 to 0.043 0.101 30.025 to 30.038 30.068 29.987 to 30.000 29.959 0.025 to 0.051 0.109
Twist measurement using a connecting rod aligner
37.025 to 37.038 37.068 36.989 to 37.000 36.961 0.025 to 0.049 0.107
If the bushing is to be replaced because the oil clearance exceeds the limit, use spare part. Model
Service part code
3TNV82A
119810-23910
TNV84 to 88
129100-23910
4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98 (T)
129900-23910
4TNV106 (T)
123900-23910
Cylinder gage
Connecting rod small end
107
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(d)Rod big end measurement Measure the crankpin and bushing according to 4.4.5.(2) (c) described above. Calculate the oil clearance of a crank pin metal and a crank pin from the measured values of the crank pin metal inner diameter and the crank pin outside diameter. Replace a crank pin metal if the oil clearance becomes about the limit dimension of the below table. Correct
by
grinding
if
unevenly
wear,
roundness
exceeding the limit or insufficient outside diameter is
Cylinder gage
found. Also use an undersized metal. (Refer to the above (2) c.) [NOTICE] When measuring the inside diameter of the rod big end, install the crankpin metals in the rod big end not to mistake the top and bottom of the metals and tighten the rod bolts by the standard torque.
Rod bushing I.D. measurement
Tightening torque of rod bolt Tightening torque Lubricating oil application Model Nâ&#x20AC;˘m (kgfâ&#x20AC;˘m) (threaded portion, and bearing seat surface) 3TNV82A
37.2 to 41.2 (3.8 to 4.2)
TNV84/88
44.1 to 49.0 (4.5 to 5.0)
4TNV94L/98
53.9 to 58.8 (5.5 to 6.0)
4TNV106 (T)
78.5 to 83.4 (8.0 to 8.5)
Lube. oil applied
Standard of rod big end Model
3TNV82A
TNV84/88
4TNV94L/98
4TNV106 (T)
mm Item
Standard
Limit
Rod I.D. bushing
42.952 to 42.962
42.902
Crankpin O.D.
43.000 to 43.042
-
Metal thickness
1.487 to 1.500
-
Clearance
0.038 to 0.090
0.150
Rod I.D. bushing
47.952 to 47.962
47.902
Crankpin O.D.
48.000 to 48.026
-
Metal thickness
1.492 to 1.500
-
Clearance
0.038 to 0.074
0.150
Rod I.D. bushing
57.952 to 57.962
57.902
Crankpin O.D.
58.000 to 58.026
-
Metal thickness
1.492 to 1.500
-
Clearance
0.038 to 0.074
0.150
Rod I.D. bushing
63.952 to 63.962
63.902
Crankpin O.D.
64.016 to 64.042
-
Metal thickness
1.984 to 1.992
-
Clearance
0.054 to 0.090
0.150
108
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
(6) Tappet Mainly check the tappet contact surface with the cam and push rod. Slight surface defects shall be corrected with an oilstone.
(a)Tappet stem outside diameter measurement mm Model
TNV82A to 88
Item
12.000 to 12.025 12.045
Stem O.D.
11.975 to 11.990 11.955 0.010 to 0.050
12.000 to 12.018 12.038
Stem O.D.
11.975 to 11.990 11.955 0.010 to 0.043
14.000 to 14.018 14.038
Stem O.D.
13.966 to 13.984 13.946 0.015 to 0.052
Normal contact surface
Tappet
0.083
Tappet hole I.D. Clearance
Abnormal contact surface
0.090
Tappet hole I.D. Clearance
4TNV106 (T)
Limit
Tappet hole I.D. Clearance
4TNV94L•98
Standard
0.092 Tappet stem outside diameter measuremen
4.4.6 Cylinder bore correction 1)Slight uneven worn, flawed, etc. shall be corrected by
Flex-Hone
honing only. If the cylinder is unevenly worn partially, flawed or otherwise damaged and cannot be repaired simply by honing, rebore the cylinder first and then
Electric drill
hone. See 4.4.5.(1) (c) for the boring dimension.
Lube oil Diesel oil 50% 50%
2)Items to be prepared for honing • Flex-Hone (see No.8 of 4.1.2 in Chapter 4)
Flex-Hone
• Electric drill
Honing fluid
Items to be prepared for honing
• Honing fluid (50:50 mixture of lube oil and diesel oil)
109
4. Disassembly, inspection and reassembly of engines
3)Apply the honing fluid to the Flex-Hone and turn the electric drill at 300 to 1200 rpm. Then insert the FlexHone into the cylinder bore while turning it, and move it up and down for about 30 sec. to obtain a honing mark with a cross hatch angle of 30 to 40°. 30q 㨪40q
[NOTICE] 1)Avoid faster revolution than 1200 rpm since it may cause breakdown. 2)Do not insert or extract the Flex-Hone in stopped state because the cylinder will be damaged.
Honing cross hatch
Service life of cylinder block (H3) (H3=3H1) Boring and honing interval (H2) (H2=1.5H1) Time for honing (H1)
Increase in L.O.C. or blow-by
Increase in L.O.C. or blow-by
Honing
Increase in L.O.C. or blow-by
Increase in L.O.C. or blow-by
Boring
Honing
Study if an oversized piston or piston ring is usable
4.4.7 Piston pin bushing replacement Replace bushing by using the special service tool (see 4.1.2 No.3 in Chapter 4).
4.4.8 Oil seal replacement (Flywheel housing side) 1)Replace oil seal, when a flywheel housing is removed. Extract the used oil seal. 2)Insert a new oil seal with the oil seal insertion tool. 3)Apply lithium grease.
110
5. Lubrication system
5. Lubrication system 5.1 Lubrication system diagram
Oil filter Bypass valve
Fuel injection pump
Hydraulic swich Cylinder bodyเกฎ Main gallery Regulator valve Oil pump
Oil suction pipe (strainer)
Camshaft bearing
Crank journal
Rocker arm bearing
Crank pin
Intermediate gear syaft
Rocker arm
Tappetเกฎ Cam face Oil pan
Note: It varies in the specifications of each model whether Oil cooler and Piston cooling of the * mark are attached.
111
5. Lubrication system
5.2 Trochoid pump components Trochoid pump (3TNV82A to TNV88)
Trochoid pump (4TNV94L/98/106) Gear case
Outer rotor Crankshaft
Inner rotor Outer rotor Control valve
Pump cover Control valve Plug
Punch mark
Gear case
Crankshaft
5.3 Disassembly (Reverse the procedure below for assembly) 1)Loosen the belt, and remove the radiator pulley, fan and V-belt. See 4.2.2. 2) in Chapter 4. 2)Remove the crankshaft pulley. See 4.3.2.3) in Chapter 4. 3)Remove the gear case cover. See 4.3.2. 4) in Chapter 4. 4)Remove the lubricating oil pump assy from the gear case for 4TNV94/98/106. (5.4 Point 1) Remove the lube oil cover from gear case cover for 3TNV82A-88. (5.4 Point 1) 5)Remove the pressure regulating valve from the lubricating oil pump body. (5.4 Point 2)
5.4 Servicing points Point 1 [Disassemble] • Check if the pump rotates smoothly and see that there is no play between the shaft and gear, and inner rotor. [Reassemble] [NOTICE] Always check if the pump rotates smoothly after installation on the gear case. Running the engine when the pump rotation is heavy may cause the pump to be burnt. 1)3TNV82A-88 • Apply lube oil to rotor (outer/inner) insertion part. • Assemble the outer rotor so that the mark of the end face may become a cover side when inserting it in the gear case. • Fasten a lube oil pump cover by the standard torque. • Tightening torque: 6.9 ± 1.5 N•m (0.7 ± 0.15 kgf•m) • When replacing the lube oil pump, replace the whole assy. 2)4TNV94L/98/106 • Apply lube oil to lube oil pump insertion part of gear case. • Install the outer rotor in the gear case so that the punch mark on the end face is seen. • When replacing the lube oil pump, replace the whole assy. Point 2 [Disassemble-Reassemble] • Only wash the pressure regulating valve. Disassembly is unnecessary unless any abnormality in operation is detected. (R.1) 112
5. Lubrication system
5.5 Parts Inspection and measurement 5.5.1 Trochoid pump inspection and measurement (1) Outside clearance and side clearance of outer rotor Insert a gap gage between a outer rotor and a pump
Outer rotor Gear case
body, and measure the clearance.
Outside clearance
mm
Model
Standard
Limit
3TNV82A to 88
0.12 to 0.21
0.30
4TNV94L/98
0.100 to 0.155
0.25
4TNV106(T)
0.100 to 0.165
0.25
Outer diameter clearance
(2) Tip clearance between outer rotor and inner rotor Insert a gap gage between an outer rotor and an inner rotor, and measure the tip clearance. Tip clearance
mm
Standard
Limit
-
0.16 Side clearance
(3) Side clearance of outer rotor When measuring a side clearance, put a right-angle gage to the pump body, insert a gap gage and measure the clearance. Side clearance
mm
Model
Standard
Limit
3TNV82A to 88
0.02 to 0.07
0.12
4TNV94L/98
0.05 to 0.10
0.15
4TNV106(T)
0.03 to 0.12
0.17
(R.1) 113
5. Lubrication system
(4) Inner rotor and gear boss clearance (3TNV82A-4TNV88)
Item Inside clearance of inner rotor
Standard dimension (mm)
Part Gear boss diameter
53.05 to 53.15
Rotor inner diameter
53.45 to 53.55
Width across flat of gear boss Width across flat clearance of inner rotor Width across flat of rotor
49.45 to 49.75 49.95 to 50.05
Standard Standard clearance clearance limit (mm) (mm) 0.3 to 0.5
0.6
0.2 to 0.6
0.7
Width across flat of rotor
Crank gear Rotor inner diameter Inner rotor
(5) Rotor shaft clearance (4TNV94L/98/106)
Rotor shaft
Measure the outside diameter of rotor shaft and the shaft hole diameter of gear case. Calculate the clearance from
Shaft O.D.
that difference.
Bearing I.D. Gear case Lube oil pump bearing
Model 4TNV94L/98
4TNV106(T)
Inspection item
Standard
Limit
Gear case bearing I.D.
12.980 to 13.020
13.05
Rotor shaft O.D.
12.955 to 12.970
12.945
Rotor clearance
0.035 to 0.065
0.105
Gear case bearing I.D.
13.000 to 13.020
13.05
Rotor shaft O.D.
12.955 to 12.965
12.945
Rotor clearance
0.035 to 0.065
0.105
114
6. Cooling system
6. Cooling system 6.1 Cooling water system Thermostat
Radiator
Bypass
Cylinder head
Cylinder block
Coolant recovery tank
Cooling water pump
L.O. cooler
6.2 Cooling water pump components Cylinder head Thermostat cover
Joint
Thermostat
Cooling water pump
Thermo switch
V-pulley Spacer
Note) This figure shows the 4TNV84
115
Fan
6. Cooling system
6.3 Disassembly (Reverse the procedure below for assembly) 1)Remove the alternator. See 4.2.2. 1) in Chapter 4. 2)Remove the fan, V-belt and pulley. See 4.2.2. 2) in Chapter 4. 3)Remove the cooling water pump. (Point 1, in below 6.4) 4)Remove the thermostat. (Point 2 in below 6.4)
6.4 Servicing points Point 1 Disassemble-Reassemble: â&#x20AC;˘ Check to see that the cooling water pump bearing is free from abnormal noise, sticking or play and water leakage from the bearing. If replacement is necessary, replace the whole cooling water pump assy. [NOTICE] Replace the O-ring of the cooling water pump with new one when disassembling. And, be sure to use the
O-Ring
special O-ring for each engine model, because the material is different, although the dimension is the same as a commercial part. (Refer to the right figure.) Point 2
Joint Cooling water pump
Disassemble: â&#x20AC;˘ Check the thermostat function. See 2.7 in Chapter 2 for the inspection method.
116
7. Fuel injection pump / Governor
7. Fuel injection pump / Governor Only the outline of the MP fuel pump is explained in this chapter. Refer to the MP pump service manual of the separate volume for the disassembly and assembly.
7.1 Introduction It is described about the features of the fuel injection pump, YDP-MP, manufactured by Yanmar, disassembly, assembly and adjustment procedure. Fuel injection pump is the most important equipment, which is enable to make the sensitive adjustment according to the variable load of the engine. Therefore all of the parts are required not only very precise machining but also finest, assembling with top level. The careful arrangement of keeping off the dust and the rust when disassemble, adjustment and reassemble of the fuel injection pump is made in the market. Yanmar YDP-MP Pump is a distributor type pump which is unified of Mono-plunger, a distributing shaft, a hydraulic head which equipped the delivery valve for each cylinder, pump housing which has a cam shaft internally and governor. The fuel, which is pressurized by the up and down movement of the plunger driven by the cam-rotation, is supplied through the distributor shaft, which is rotating accordingly. There are a model YDP-MP2 and a model YDP-MP4, and plunger diameter and fuel cam speed are different.
7.2 Fuel injection pump 7.2.1 Fuel system diagram
117
7. Fuel injection pump / Governor
7.2.2 External view and components ԙFuel injection pipe Cylinder head
Fuel filter Fuel injection valve Cooling water pump ԘV-belt/V-pulley ԘCooling fan
Intake maniforld Water separator ԜFuel pump spacer
Camshaft driving gear ԟFuel injection pump Crankshaft gear
Don't disassemble!
Pump flange ԛFuel pump drive gear ԜDrive gear nut
Gear case Oil seal
Note) This figure shows the 3TNV84
Crankshaft pulley
7.2.3 Disassembly procedure: Disassembly from the engine body 1)Remove the cooling fan, pulley and V-belt. 2)Remove the fuel injection pipe, fuel oil piping, fuel return pipe and rear stay. See point 1 of 7.2.5. 3)Remove the fuel injection pump cover (the cover of the drive gear). 4)Make ID marks on the gearing part of the pump drive gear and the idle gear with paint and so on. See Point 2 of 7.2.5. 5)Loosen a fuel pump drive gear nut, and remove a pump drive gear from the fuel pump by using a gear puller. See Point 3 of 4.3.4. 6)Remove a drive gear nut carefully not to drop it to the inside of the gear case. 7)Record the installation angle of the fuel pump precisely by using a mark-off line and a sticker. See (4) of 2.2.7. 8)Remove the fuel injection pump. See Point 3 of 7.2.5.
118
7. Fuel injection pump / Governor
Cylinder No. 1
3
2
Engine
2 Governor side
Governor side B
Cylinder No. 1
Injection pipe
3
C
B Fuel pump
Engine
Fuel injection pipe
4
A
Fuel pump
C
Drive side A
Drive side
D Fuel pump (3 cylinder)
Fuel pump (4 cylinder)
7.2.4 Assembly procedure Reverse the disassembly procedure and adjust the fuel injection timing finally. See (4) of 2.2.7.
7.2.5 Servicing points Fuel injection pump
Point 1 [Disassemble] • Block an entrance with the tape so that trash may not enter the fuel injection pipe and the fuel injection pump.
I.D. mark Flange bolt
Point 2 [Disassemble] • After putting the I.D. marks on the gearing part of the pump drive gear and the idle gear with paint and so on, remove the gear installation nut. [NOTICE] Don't remove four flange bolts.
Gear installation nut Idle gear Fuel pump driving gear Fuel pump driving gear
[Reassemble] • Reassemble the pump driving gear while checking the I.D. marks on the driving gear and idle gear. Tightening torque of the gear installation nut Model TNV82A to 88 4TNV94 to 106 (T)
Lubricating oil application (thread portion, and seat surface)
N•m (kgf•m) 78 to 88 (8 to 9)
Not applied
113 to 123 (11.5 to 12.5)
119
7. Fuel injection pump / Governor
Point 3 [Disassemble] There is an acoustic material part to name as fuel pump spacer between the fuel pump and the cylinder block. Loosen fuel pump installation bolts with a closed wrench when disassembling a fuel pump. [NOTICE] An intake manifold may obstruct the disassembly of the fuel pump by the engine model. Remove the fuel pump after removing the intake manifold first.
Cylinder block
Cylinder head
Fuel pump spacer
Suction manifold
Closed wren Fuel pump Fuel pump
Disassembling a fuel pump
[Reassemble] When installing a fuel pump on the gear case, put a fuel pump spacer between the cylinder blocks, and install it.
7.2.6 C.S.D. (Cold Start Device) In order to facilitate easy engine starting under cold temperature, the cold starting advancer senses the cooling water temperature and advances the fuel injection timing. [NOTICE] When engine starts under cold temperature, the minimum engine speed is automatically about 100-300 min-1 higher than the normal low speed by the function of C.S.D.. A few minutes later the engine speed will reduce gradually to the normal minimum speed. Therefore it has the possibility that the machine unit begins to work because of the higher engine speed right after the engine start, and very dangerous. Attention is especially necessary when the throttle lever of the governor is put in half-throttle position to hasten the warming up of the engine.
(R.1) 120
8. TURBOCHARGER
8. Turbocharger: Disassembly, inspection and reassembly 8.1 Structure and functions 8.1.1 Main specifications Applicable engine model (application)
3TNV84T (CL, VM) 4TNV84T (CL)
3TNV84T (VM)
4TNV106T (CL, VM)
RHB31
RHB51
RHF5
Turbocharger model Turbocharger specification
Standard (w/waste gate)
Turbine type
Radial flow
Blower (compressor) type
Centrifugal
Lubrication method
External lubrication 250,000
Max.continuous allowable speed
180,000
Max.continuous allowable gas inlet temperature
750
Dry weight N (kgf)
24 (2.4)
41 (4.2)
46 (4.7)
Note) VM application is provided with the waste gate.
8.1.2 Construction
13 14 12 15
8
9
10
17
Air outlet
Oil inlet
Air inlet Gas outlet
19 18 Oil outlet 2 Gas inlet 11
1
121
20
3
5
16
6
4
7
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.1.3 Structural and functional outline No. 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20
Part name Turbine shaft OiN thrower Turbine side seal ring Seal plate Journal bearing Thrust bearing Compressor housing M5 hexagon bolt M5 spring washer Compressor side clamp Turbine housing M6 hexagon bolt Turbine side clamp Lock washer Bearing housing Retaining ring M3 countersunk flat head screw Compressor wheel Shaft end nut Heat protector
(1) Turbine The exhaust gas from the engine is accelerated at the nozzle portion in the turbine housing and blown onto the turbine impeller to rotate the turbine shaft. This is called the turbine. A seal ring and heat insulating plate are installed to prevent the bearing from adverse influence of the gas.
(2) Compressor The compressor impeller installed on the turbine shaft rotates with the shaft to suck and compress air for feeding into the intake manifold. This is called the blower or compressor.
(3) Bearings Thrust bearing As the turbine shaft is constantly applied with a thrust force, this bearing prevents the shaft from being moved by the thrust force. Radial bearing A floating bearing is adopted. Since the bearing moves with the turbine shaft as the oil films are formed both inside and outside the bearing, the bearing sliding speed is slower than the turbine shaft speed, resulting in higher dynamic stability.
(4) Compressor side sealing mechanism To prevent the intake air and oil form leaking, a seal ring and a seal plate are provided to form a double wall structure on the rear side of the compressor impeller.
(5) Waste gate When the blower side pressure (intake air pressure) exceeds the specified level, the exhaust gas at the turbine inlet is partially bypassed to the exhaust discharge side to control the turbine rpm so as to maintain the intake pressure at the specified level for improving the response to load variation in the low to medium speed range and to minimize black smoke generation. It consists of a control assembly separated from the turbocharger and a valve assembly installed in the turbine impeller chamber.
122
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.1.4 Components
12
14 13
8
15 9 11 3
45 23 22
2 20
21 28 10
29
24
27
6 19
1
29
14 13 17 18
25
16
31
No.
30
26
32
Part name
No.
Part name
1
Turbine shaft
17 Bolt
2
Thrust bushing
18 Lock plate
3
Oil thrower
19 Bearing housing
4
Seal ring
20 Retaining ring
5
Seal ring
21 Screw
6
Seal ring (turbine side)
22 Screw
7
Lock nut
23 Lock washer
8
Impeller
24 Heat protector
9
Seal plate
25 Liquid gasket
10 Journal bearing
26 Waste gate actuator
11 Thrust bearing
27 Hose
12 Compressor housing
28 Adapter
13 Flanged bolt
29 Clip
14 Spring washer
30 Retaining ring
15 Clamp
31 Waste gate valve
16 Turbine housing
32 Link plate 123
7
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.2 Service standards and tightening torque 8.2.1 Service standards
J
F
B
D
C
H2 H1
A
K Turbine side
Compresson side G1 G2
E
(1) RHF5 type Unit: mm Standard dimension
Wear limit
Turbine shaft journal outside diameter (A)
7.99 to 8.00
7.98
Turbine shaft seal ring groove width (E)
1.25 to 1.28
1.29
Compressor side seal ring groove width (G1)
1.22 to 1.23
1.31
Compressor side seal ring groove width (G2)
1.02 to 1.03
1.11
0.002
0.011
8.01 to 8.03
8.04
Journal bearing outside diameter (D)
12.32 to 12.33
12.31
Bearing housing inside diameter (B)
12.40 to 12.41
12.42
Thrust bearing width (J)
3.99 to 4.01
3.98
Thrust bushing groove dimension (K)
4.04 to 4.05
4.07
15.00 to 15.02
15.05
12.40 to 12.42
12.45
10.00 to 10.02
10.05
Rotor play in axial direction
0.03 to 0.06
0.09
Rotor play in radial direction
0.08 to 0.13
0.17
Turbine shaft
Turbine shaft run-out Journal bearing inside diameter (C) Bearing
Thrust bearing
Turbine side (bearing housing) (F) Seal ring fixing Compressor side (seal ring) (H1) area Compressor side (seal ring) (H2)
124
8. TURBOCHARGER
(2) RHB31/RHB51 type Unit: mm Standard dimension
Turbine shaft
RHB31
RHB51
RHB31
RHB51
Turbine shaft journal outside diameter (A)
6.257 to 6.263
7.99 to 8.00
6.25
7.98
Turbine shaft seal ring groove width (E)
1.038 to 1.062
1.25 to 1.28
1.07
1.29
Compressor side seal ring groove width (G1)
1.02 to 1.03
1.22 to 1.23
1.04
1.31
Compressor side seal ring groove width (G2)
0.82 to 0.83
1.02 to 1.03
0.84
1.11
0.002
0.002
0.005
0.011
Journal bearing inside diameter (C)
6.275 to 6.285
8.01 to 8.03
6.29
8.04
Journal bearing outside diameter (D)
9.940 to 9.946
12.32 to 12.33
9.93
12.31
Bearing housing inside diameter (B)
9.995 to 10.005 12.40 to 12.41
10.01
12.42
Turbine shaft run-out Bearing
Thrust bearing
Wear limit
Thrust bearing width (J) Thrust bushing groove dimension (K)
3.59 to 3.61
3.99 to 4.01
3.58
3.98
3.632 to 3.642
4.04 to 4.05
3.65
4.07
Turbine side (bearing housing) (F) Seal ring Compressor side (seal ring) (H1) fixing area Compressor side (seal ring) (H2)
11.00 to 11.018 15.00 to 15.02
11.03
15.05
9.987 to 10.025 12.40 to 12.42
10.04
12.45
7.968 to 8.00
10.00 to 10.02
8.01
10.05
Rotor play in axial direction
0.022 to 0.053
0.03 to 0.06
0.07
0.09
Rotor play in radial direction
0.061 to 0.093
0.08 to 0.13
0.12
0.17
8.2.2 Tightening torque (1) RHF5 type N•m (kgf•cm) Part
Thread diameter
Tightening torque
Turbine housing set bolt
M8
27 to 29 (275 to 295)
Compressor housing set bolt
M5
4.2 to 5.2 (43 to 53)
Thrust bearing set screw
M3
1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
Seal plate set screw
M3
1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
Blower impeller set nut (left-handed screw)
M5
1.8 to 2.2 (18 to 22)
(2) RHB31/ RHB51 type N•m (kgf•cm) Part
Tightening torque
Thread diameter
RHB31
RHB51
M5
3.9 to 4.9 (40 to 50)
3.9 to 4.9 (40 to 50)
M6
11.8 to 12.8 (120 to 130)
11.8 to 12.8 (120 to 130)
M8
11.8 to 12.8 (120 to 130)
27.0 to 28.9 (275 to 295)
Thrust bearing set screw
M3
1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
Seal plate set screw
M3
1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
1.2 to 1.4 (12 to 14)
Blower impeller set nut (left-handed screw)
M5
0.9 to 1.1 (9 to 10)
1.8 to 2.2 (18 to 22)
Waste gate actuator set bolt Lock plate set bolt
125
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.3 Periodic inspection procedure 8.3.1 Periodic inspection intervals Periodically inspect the turbocharger for the overall conditions and fouling. The inspection interval varies with the operating conditions, but refer to the table below for the guideline for each application.
Application
Inspection interval
For vehicles (automobiles)
Every 6 months or 60,000km
Every 12 months or 150,000km
Every 24 months or 300,000km
For construction machinery
Every 6 months or 500hrs
Every 12 months or 1,000hrs
Every 24 months or 2,000hrs
For faming machinery
Every 6 months or 200hrs
Every 12 months or 400hrs
Every 24 months or 800hrs
For marine use
Every 6 months or 1,500hrs
Every 12 months or 3,000hrs
Every 24 months or 6,000hrs
Rotor rotation
c
Rotor play
c
Overhaul and overall inspection Oil filter cleaning and inspection
c
Based on engine operation manual
Engine oil replacement
126
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.3.2 Inspection procedure (1) Rotor rotation inspection Inspect the rotor rotation by listening to any abnormal sound generation during rotation. For inspection with a sound detecting bar, bring the tip end of the bar into strong contact with the turbocharger case and raise the engine speed gradually. If any high pitch sound is generated at intervals of 2 to 3 seconds, the rotation is abnormal. Since the bearing or rotor may be defective in this state, either replace or overhaul the turbocharger.
(2) Rotor play inspection Remove the turbocharger from the engine and inspect the rotor play in the axial and radial directions according to the procedure below. After removing the turbocharger from the engine, always bind the oil inlet and outlet holes with adhesive tape.
Rotor play in axial direction
Turbine wheel chamber Magnet base
Move the turbine shaft in the axial direction. Dial gage
Service standard: 0.03 to 0.06 mm Wear limit : 0.09 mm
Axial play
127
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.3.3 Waste gate valve adjustment procedure Rotor play in radial direction
Dial gage Magnet base
Oil outlet
Move the turbine shaft in the radial direction at the same time on the left and right sides.
Radial play
Oil inlet Service standard: 0.08 to 0.13 mm Wear limit : 0.17 mm
It is indispensable to adjust the waste gate valve opening pressure and lift after its overhaul or inner parts replacement. Negligence of this adjustment will adversely affect the engine performance. [NOTICE] If the adjustment is impossible, give up overhaul but replace the whole turbocharger assembly.
(1) Method for checking the waste gate valve opening pressure and lift (a)Equipment Prepare the equipment shown in the figure below.
128
8. TURBOCHARGER
(b)Measuring instruments and devices Dial gage
Capable of measuring 0 to 10 mm (A flat head type is recommendable.)
Manometer
Mercury column or electrical type (capable of measuring 0 to 1500 mmHg)
Pressure regulating valve
Allowing gradual adjustment in a range between 0 and 2 kgf/cm2 (0.196 Mpa)
Pressure reducing valve
Used for suppressing the air supply pressure at 5 kgf/cm2 (0.49 Mpa) or less.
Pressure gage
Bourdon tube pressure gage (0 to 10 kgf/cm2 (0.98 Mpa))
Waste gate actuator Rod Pressure gage Clip
Dial gage
Hose Compressed air <5 kg/cm2 (0.49 Mpa)
Adapter Waste gate valve
Pc
Pressure regulating valve Pressure reducing valve
Manometer [Note] Pc (controller pressure) varies with the set output in a range between 600 and 750 mmHg.
(c)Check method 1)Set the manometer control pressure (Pc) applied to the waste gate actuator to 0 and set the dial gage to the zero point. 2)Gradually open the pressure regulating valve and measure the Pc value when the actuator rod is operated by 2 mm. 3)For the hysteresis, let the rod move to 3 mm first. The gradually close the pressure regulating valve, measure the pressure when the rod is moved to 2mm and obtain the difference from the pressure measured in b. above. 4)Precautions • Set the dial gage on the extension line of the actuator rod. • The piping and joints shall completely be free from leak. • Fix the turbocharger and dial gage securely. • If an electric manometer is used, it shall have sufficient precision. • Even when an electric manometer is used, use of a mercury column type manometer in combination is recommended for calibration and daily check. • The speed for increasing/decreasing Pc by means of the pressure regulating valve shall be very slow near the measuring point. If the mm position is exceeded, restart from the beginning. • Do not apply over 0.49 MPa (5 kgf/cm2) to the actuator.
(2) Waste gate actuator leak test Apply 0.12 Mpa (1.2 kgf/cm2) to the actuator and hold the state for minute. The actuator is good if the pressure then is 0.11 Mpa (1.1 kgf/cm2) or above.
129
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.4 Disassembly procedure 8.4.1 Preparation for disassembly In addition to the general tools, the following special tools are required for turbocharger disassembly and reassembly: Tool name
Use
Illustration
For removing thrust bearing and thrust bushing
75
Bar
(mm) Ǟ7.5
Material: Copper or brass For removing floating bearing circlip Pliers
For removing seal ring Pliers
Item sold on market
For thrust bearing installation (for M3) : 1.3 N•m (13 kgf•cm) Torque driver for TORX bolt For seal plate installation (multifunctional type) 0.5 to 4.9 N•m (5 to 50 kgf•cm) (for M3) : 1.3 N•m (13 kgf•cm)
(Type: TORX TT20 or equivalent) For fixing turbine shaft (mm × dodecagonal) Box wrench Box only may be used. Torque wrench (single purpose)
For following bolts and nuts: M8 : mm, kgf•cm (N•m) M5 : mm, kgf•cm (N•m) M5 : mm, kgf•cm (N•m) For measuring play in axial and radial directions: To be installed on a dial gage
To be knurled here
Probe
Ǟ5(0.1968) mm (in.)
R10 (0.3937) R5(0.1968)
1(0.0393) 40 (1.5748) (0.3149)
M2.6 P0.45
8
130
10 (0.3937)
15 (0.5905)
7(0.2755)
Mount to dial gauge
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.4.2 Inspection before disassembly 1)Inspect the turbine wheel and compressor impeller for any undesirable contact and the rotor for smooth rotation. 2)Measure the rotor play as described in section 8.3 (2.2). â&#x20AC;˘ Rotor axial play Wear limit: mm â&#x20AC;˘ Rotor radial play Wear limit : mm
8.4.3 Disassembly The mounting angles of the turbine housing, bearing housing and compressor housing are determined according to its mounting state on the engine. Put match marks before starting disassembly. Note: The number after each part is the one described in the structural drawing in 8.1(2).
(1) Compressor housing removal 1)Remove flanged hexagon bolt 8 and compressor side keep plate 10. 2)Remove compressor housing 7. Note: 1)Liquid gasket is applied on the surface of compressor housing 7 where bearing housing 15 is mounted. 2)When disassembling compressor housing 7, carefully operate so as not to damage the compressor impeller.
(2) Compressor impeller removal 1)Set a box spanner (10 mm) on the turbine side end of the turbine shaft, and remove shaft end clamp 18. Note: Pay attention to the loosening direction since the shaft end nut has left-handed screw. 2)Remove compressor impeller 18.
(3) Turbine housing removal 1)Remove hexagon nut 12 and turbine side keep plate 13. 2)Remove turbine housing 11.
(4) Turbine shaft extraction 1)Hold heat insulating plate 20 lightly with a hand, and extract turbine shaft 1. Note: If the turbine shaft is hard to be extracted, tap the compressor side end of the shaft lightly with a wooden hammer. 2)Remove heat insulating plate 20.
(5) Seal plate removal 1)Use the Torx driver and loosen M3 Torx T-type machine screw 17 for seal plate mounting. 2)Remove seal plate 4. Note: Liquid gasket has been applied to the seal plate and bearing housing mounting surface. 3)Remove oil thrower 2 from the seal plate.
(6) Slide bearing and thrust bushing removal 1)Use the Torx driver and loosen the M3 Torx T-type machine screw for thrust bearing installation. 2)Use the bar (copper) and remove thrust bearing 6 and thrust bushing.
131
8. TURBOCHARGER
(7) Floating bearing removal 1)Use the stop ring pliers and remove circlip 16 from bearing housing 15. 2)Remove floating bearing 5 from bearing housing 15.
(8) Seal ring removal 1)Remove turbine side seal ring 3 from turbine shaft 1. 2)Remove compressor side seal ring (small) and compressor side seal ring (large) from oil thrower 2.
132
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.5 Washing and inspection procedure 8.5.1 Washing (1) Inspection before washing Visually inspect each part before washing to check trace of seizure, wear, foreign matter or carbon adhesion. Carefully inspect for identifying the cause of trouble especially when a fault has occurred. Major inspection items Check point
Checking position
Carbon adhesion state
1)Turbine shaft 1, turbine side seal ring and rear side of turbine wheel 2)Heat insulating plate 20 mounting portion and inside of bearing housing 15
Lubrication status (wear, seizure, discoloration, etc.)
1)Turbine shaft 1, journal portion and thrust bushing oil thrower 2 2)Floating bearing 5 and thrust bearing 6 3)Bearing housing 15 and inner wall of bearing fitting ring
Oil leak state
1)Inner wall of turbine housing 11 2)Outer surface of bearing housing 11 and heat insulating plate 20 mounting portion 3)Turbine shaft 1 turbine side seal ring portion and rear side of turbine wheel 4)Inner wall of compressor housing 7 5)Rear side of compressor impeller 18 6)Surface and seal ring inserting portion of seal plate 4
(2) Washing procedure Keep the following in mind when washing the parts. Part
Tools and detergent
Procedure
a)Turbine s haft •Tools 1)Bucket (500 × 500) 2)Heat source: Steam or gas burner 3)Brush •Detergent Standard carbon removing agent
1)Boil the turbine in the washing bucket. Do not strike the blade to remove the carbon. 2)Immerse in the detergent until the carbon and other deposits are softened. 3)Use a plastic scraper or hand hair scrubber to remove the softened deposits. 4)Protect the bearing surface and seal ring groove on the turbine shaft so as not to be damaged. 5)Any deposit remaining on the turbine shaft due to improper washing may cause unbalancing. Be sure to remove thoroughly. Never use a wire brush.
b)Turbine wheel •Tools chamber Same as for turbine shaft
1)Boil the turbine in the washing bucket. 2)Immerse in the detergent until the carbon and other deposits are softened. 3)Use a plastic scraper or hard hair scrubber to remove the softened deposits.
•Detergent Same as for turbine shaft c)Blower blade and chamber
•Tools 1)Bucket (500 × 500) 2)Brush •Detergent
d)Others
1)Immerse in the washing bucket until the deposit is softened. 2)Use a plastic scraper or hard hair scrubber to remove the softened deposits. Never use a wire brush.
1)Wash all other parts with diesel oil. 2)Clean the lubricating oil path by blowing with compressed air. 3)Be especially careful so as not to damage or corrode the parts.
133
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.5.2 Inspection procedure (1) Compressor housing 7 Inspect the compressor housing for any contact trace with the compressor impeller, surface defect, dent or crack at joint surface, and replace it if defective.
(2) Turbine housing 11 Inspect any trace of contact with the turbine wheel, exfoliation due to degradation by oxidation of the cast surface, thermal deformation or crack. Replace with a new one of defective.
(3) Compressor impeller 18 Inspect any contact trace, chipping, corrosion or deformation. Replace with a new one if defective.
(4) Turbine shaft 1 1)Inspect any contact trace, chipping, thermal discoloration or deformation at the turbine wheel. Check the
E
shaft portion for bend, the journal portion for thermal discoloration or abnormal wear, and the seal ring groove for surface defect or wear. Replace with a
A
new one if defective. 2)Measure the turbine shaft journal outside diameter (A) and seal ring groove width (E). Replace with a new turbine shaft if beyond the wear limit. Wear limit of journal outside diameter (A) RHF5 7.98 mm RHB51 7.98 mm RHB31 6.25 mm Wear limit of ring groove width (E) RHF5 1.29 mm RHB51 1.29 mm RHB31 1.07 mm 3)Measure the turbine shaft run-out, and replace with a new turbine shaft if it exceeds 0.011 mm.
(5) Heat insulating plate 20 Inspect the heat insulating plate for any contact trace, thermal deformation or corrosion Replace with a new one if defective.
134
V block
8. TURBOCHARGER
(6) Thrust bushing, oil thrower 2 and thrust bearing 6 Inspect each part for wear, surface defect and discoloration.
Thrust bushing
G1 G2
Replace with a new one if defective even within the wear limit.
(a)Thrust bushing Measure the distance between grooves (K) of the thrust bushing, and replace with a new one if the wear limit is exceeded.
K
Oil throwe
Wear limit RHF5 4.07 mm RHB51 4.07 mm RHB31 3.65 mm
(b)Oil thrower 2 Measure the seal ring groove widths (G1) and (G2), and replace with a new one if the wear limit is exceeded. Wear limits RHF5--- G1: 1.31 mm, G2: 1.11 mm RHB51--- G1: 1.31 mm, G2: 1.11 mm RHB31--- G1: 1.04 mm, G2: 0.84 mm
(c)Thrust bearing 6 Measure the thrust bearing width (J), and replace with a new one if the wear limit is exceeded. Wear limit RHF5 3.98 mm RHB51 3.98 mm RHB31 3.58 mm
(7) Floating bearing 5 1)Inspect the floating bearing for abnormal wear, discoloration or surface defect. Replace with a new one if defective. 2)Measure the inside diameter (C) and outside diameter (D). Replace the bearing if either wear limit is exceeded. Wear limits RHF5 Outside diameter (D): 12.31 mm, Inside diameter (C): 8.04 mm RHB51 Outside diameter (D): 12.31 mm, Inside diameter (C): 8.04 mm RHB31 Outside diameter (D): 9.93 mm, Inside diameter (C): 6.29 mm
135
8. TURBOCHARGER
(8) Bearing housing 15 Bearing fitting ring
1)Inspect the housing for cast surface exfoliation due to oxidation and degradation, dent or crack.
Inner plate
2)Inspect circlip 16 for chipping or crack, and replace with a new one if defective. 3)Measure the (B) and (F) portions of the bearing housing shown in the figure below. Replace with a new one if either wear limit is F
exceeded. Wear limit of bearing housing inside diameter (B) RHF5 12.42 mm RHB51 12.42 mm RHB31 10.01 mm Wear limit of turbine side seal ring inserting
Compresser side
Turbine side
portion (F) RHF5 15.05 mm RHB51 15.05 mm RHB31 11.03 mm
(9) Seal plate 4 1)Inspect the seal plate for any contact trace, joint surface defect, dent or crack. Replace it if defective. 2)Measure the seal ring inserting dimensions (H1 and H2) on the compressor side, and replace the seal ring with a new one if either wear limit is exceeded. Wear limits RHF5 H1: 12.45 mm, H2: 10.05 mm RHB51 H1: 12.45 mm, H2: 10.05 mm RHB31 H1: 10.04 mm, H2: 8.01 mm
(10)Seal rings Replace seal rings with new ones.
(11)Inspect keep plates 10, 13 and bolts for any deformation, and replace defective parts with new ones. Also replace M3 Torx machine screws with new ones.
136
H1
H2
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.6 Reassembly procedure
Applicable only to the one closest to the turbine
8.6.1 Preparation for reassembly
Lubricating oil inlet
1)Prepare general tools, special tools, liquid gasket
Circlip
(Three Bond No.1207) and Locktite No.242 before Floating metal
reassembling the turbocharger. 2)Always replace the following parts with new ones: • Compressor side seal ring (large) 1pc. • Compressor side seal ring (small) 1pc.
Match up contact surface
• M3 machine screws 3pcs.
Lubricating oil inlet
• M3 machine screws 4pcs.
8.6.2 Reassembly (1) Floating bearing installation 1)Use the snap ring pliers and install inner circlip 16 on bearing housing 15. 2)Install floating bearing 5 in bearing housing 15.
For all other than above
3)Use the snap ring pliers and install outer circlip 16 on bearing housing 15. Note: 1)The circlip joint shall be positioned as shown in the figure at right above. The rounded side of the circlip shall face the bearing. 2)Apply lubricating oil on the floating bearing before reassembly.
(2) Turbine shaft installation 1)Fit the seal ring onto turbine shaft 1. 2)Install heat insulating plate 20 on the turbine side of bearing housing 15. 3)Apply lubricating oil on the journal portion of the turbine shaft and insert the shaft from the turbine side of bearing housing 15. Note: Carefully operate so as not to damage the floating bearing by the turbine shaft. The seal ring joint shall be positioned on the lubricating oil inlet side after centering with the turbine shaft.
137
View from the turbine
• Turbine side seal ring 1pc.
8. TURBOCHARGER
(3) Thrust bearing installation 1)Fit thrust bushing on turbine shaft 1. 2)Apply lubricating oil on the bearing portion of thrust bearing 6 and install it in bearing housing 15. 3)Apply Locktite on the threaded portion of M3 Torx T machine screw 17 for thrust bearing installation, and use Torx torque driver for installation by tightening to the specified torque. Tightening torque: 1.3 ± 0.1 N•m (13 ± 1 kgf•cm)
(4) Seal plate installation
L.O. inlet
1)Fit the seal ring on oil thrower 2. 2)Insert oil thrower 2 into seal plate 4. Note: The seal ring joint portion shall be positioned as illustrated at right. 3)Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond No.1207) on the seal plate mounting surface on the compressor side of bearing housing 15.
45q
Note: See the illustration below for the applying position. Applying thickness: 0.1 to 0.2 mm
View from the compressor
4)Install seal plate 4 on bearing housing 15. 5)Apply Locktite on the threaded portion of M3 machine screw for seal plate mounting, and tighten it with a torque screwdriver. Tightening torque: 1.3 ± 0.1 N•m (131 kgf•cm)
Liquid gasket applying position
138
Carefully prevent the liquid gasket from leaking out to this area
8. TURBOCHARGER
(5) Compressor impeller installation 1)Fit compressor impeller 18 onto turbine shaft 1. 2)Set a box spanner (10 mm) on the turbine side end of turbine shaft 1, and tighten shaft end nut 19. Note: Since the shaft end nut has left-handed screw, pay attention to the tightening direction. Tightening torque: 2.0 ± 0.2 N•m (20 ± 2 kgf•cm)
(6) Turbine housing installation 1)Install bearing housing 15 on turbine housing 11 by aligning the match marks put before disassembly. Note: In case of part replacement, check the oil inlet and outlet positions and the exhaust gas inlet position before reassembly. 2)Install the turbine side keep plate and tighten M8 hexagon bolt 12. Tightening torque: 285 ± 10 N•m (28 ± 1 kgf•cm)
(7) Compressor housing installation 1)Apply liquid gasket (Three Bond No.1207) on the compressor side flange of bearing housing 15. Note: See section (4)3) for the portion to be applied. Applying thickness: 0.1 to 0.2 mm 2)Check the mark and install the compressor housing 7 on the bearing housing 15. Note: When a part is replaced, confirm a position of an oil entrance and a position of an air exit, and assemble it. 3)Install the keep plate 10 on compressor side, and tighten M8 hexagon bolt 8. Tightening torque: 48 N•m (4.7 ± 0.5 kgf•cm)
(8) Rotor play measurement See the inspection procedure in section 8.3.2 for the measurement method. If the rotor play does not satisfy the standard, reassembly is necessary since assembly error or use of a wrong part is conceivable. Service standard of rotor play in axial direction RHF5 0.03 to 0.06 mm RHB51 0.03 to 0.06 mm RHB31 0.022 to 0.053 mm Service standard of rotor play in radial direction RHF5 0.08 to 0.13 mm RHB51 0.08 to 0.13mm RHB31 0.061 to 0.093mm
139
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.7 Handling after disassembly and reassembly When installing the turbocharger on the engine or handling the turbocharger after installation, strictly observe the instructions given below. Especially pay careful attention for preventing foreign matter entrance into the turbocharger.
8.7.1 Instructions for turbocharger installation Lubrication system 1)Pour new lubricating oil through the oil filler port before installation on the engine, and manually turn the turbine shaft to lubricate the floating and thrust bearings. 2)Flush the oil inlet pipe from the engine and outlet pipe, and check no crushed pipe nor dirt or foreign matter remaining in the pipes. 3)Connect the pipes securely so as to ensure no oil leak from joints. Intake system 1)Check no foreign matter or dirt in the intake line. 2)Connect securely to prevent any air leak from joints with the intake duct and air cleaner. Exhaust system 1)Check no dirt or foreign matter in the exhaust system. 2)Since heat resistant steel is used for the bolts and nuts, do not use general bolts and nuts for installation. Always apply anti-seizure agent on fastening bolts and nuts to be tightened. (Use heat-resistant hexagon bolts for the turbine housing.) 3)Connect exhaust pipes securely to prevent gas leak from each pipe joint.
140
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.8 Troubleshooting Sufficient turbocharger performance and required engine output cannot be obtained if there is any fault. In such a case, first check each engine part to see there is no engine fault. Then inspect the turbocharger for troubleshooting according to the procedure shown below.
8.8.1 Excessively exhaust smoke (1) Insufficient intake air volume Cause
Corrective action
1)Clogged air cleaner element 2)Blocked air intake port 3)Leak from a joint in intake line
•Replace or wash the element. •Correct to the normal state. •Inspect and repair.
(2) Turbocharger revolution failure Cause
Corrective action
1)Deposit of impurities in oil sticking on the turbine •Turbocharger overhaul (disassembly and washing) with lubricating oil replacement side seal portion to make turbine revolution heavy 2)Sticking bearing •Insufficient lubrication or clogged lubrication piping •Excessively high oil temperature •Unbalanced rotating part •Insufficient warming up or sudden stoop from loaded operation (no-load operation)
•Turbocharger overhaul (disassembly and repair) •Lubricating oil line inspection, repair of defective portion and lubricating oil replacement •Rotating part replacement or washing •Strict observance of instructions in operation manual
3)Contact or breakdown of turbine wheel or blower •Inspection and repair of each engine part •Perfect foreign matter elimination in disassembled vane state, followed by inspection and repair of individual •Excessive revolution air cleaner and engine components •Excessive exhaust temperature rise •Turbocharger overhaul (disassembly and repair) •Foreign matter invasion •Reassembly •worn bearing •Assembly defect
(3) Influence of exhaust resistance Cause
Corrective action
1)Exhaust gas leak before the turbocharger to •Joint inspection and correction decrease its revolutions 2)Deformed or clogged exhaust pipe to decrease tur- •Correct to the normal state. bocharger revolutions
8.8.2 White smoke generation Cause
Corrective action
1)Clogged or deformed oil return pipe causing oil flow •Repair or pipe replacement to the blower or turbine side 2)Excessive bearing wear causing abnormal wear or •Turbocharger disassembly and repair damage of seal ring
141
8. TURBOCHARGER
8.8.3 Sudden oil decrease Cause
Corrective action
1)Excessive bearing wear causing abnormal wear or •Turbocharger disassembly and repair damage of seal ring
8.8.4 Decrease in output Cause
Corrective action •Inspection and repair of defective portion
1) Gas leak from any part in exhaust piping 2)Air leak from discharge side of blower 3)Clogged air cleaner element 4)Fouled or damaged turbocharger
•Element cleaning or replacement •Turbocharger disassembly and repair or replacement
8.8.5 Poor (slow) response (starting) of turbocharger Cause
Corrective action
1)Hard carbon deposit on the turbine side (wheel seal- •Turbocharger disassembly and washing with lubricating oil replacement ing portion) to make turbine shaft revolution heavy •Engine combustion state inspection, followed by improvement of combustion to normal state
2)Incomplete combustion
8.8.6 Abnormal sound or vibration (1) Abnormal sound generation Cause
Corrective action
1)Excessively narrowed gas path due to clogged noz- •Turbocharger disassembly and washing zle in turbine wheel chamber or reverse flow of blower discharge in acceleration (generally called surging) 2)Contact rotating part •Turbocharger disassembly and repair or replacement
(2) Vibration Cause
Corrective action
1)Loosened intake, exhaust or oil pipe connection with the turbocharger 2) Damaged bearing, contact between rotating part and adjacent part, or chipping of turbine wheel or blower vane due to foreign matter in version 3) Unbalanced rotating part
•Turbocharger installation status check and repair of defective portion •Turbocharger disassembly with repair or replacement, or perfect removal of foreign matters in case of foreign matter invasion •Repair or replacement of rotating part
142
9. Starting motror
9. Starting motror As a representative example of starter, the one for 4TNV94L98 and 4TNV106 (T) is shown in this chapter.
9.1 For 4TNV94L/ 98 9.1.1 Specifications Manufacturer’s model (Hitachi)
-
S13-204
S13-205
Yanmar code
-
129900-77010
129900-77020
Nominal output
kW
2.3
←
Weight
kg
5.5
←
Revolution direction (as viewed from pinion)
-
Clockwise
←
Engagement system
-
Magnetic shift
←
Terminal voltage/current
V/A
11/140 or less
←
Revolution
rpm
4100 or above
←
Terminal voltage/current
V/A
2.5/1050 or less
←
N•m (kgf•m)
24.5 (2.5) or above
←
Clutch system
-
Overrunning
←
Pinion projection voltage (at 100 °C)
V
8.6 or less
←
Pinion DP or module/number of teeth
-
M3/9
←
difference (O-ring, oil seal)
-
Dry (none)
Wet (with)
Application
-
Standard
Option
No-load Loaded
Torque
143
Through bolt
Brush
Rear cover
Field coil
Armature
Magnetic switch
Clutch Assy
Shift lever
144 O-ring
Bearing retainer
Pinion shaft
Oil seal
Gear case
9. Starting motror
9.1.2 Components
145
Inspection item
Causes and remedies
Inspect the fuel systems
YES
Is the revolution normal?
YES
Can the engine be cranked?
YES
Engine starting failure?
Is the shift lever at the neutral position?
NO
NO
YES
NO
NO
Inspect the inside of the engine.
Slow revolution
Does the engine run when the starting motor is replaced with a new one?
YES
Is the Lube oil viscosity normal?
YES
Are the battery charge and terminal connection normal without any corrosion?
Pinion roller clutch damage, inspection and replacement Reduction gear damage, inspection and replacement
YES
Pinion and ring gear meshing normal?
YES
Is the starting motor sound heard?
Set the shift lever at the neutral position
NO (slow revolution)
NO
NO
Repair or replace the starting motor.
Replace the Lube oil.
̪
Magnetic switch contact defect. Replace it.
YES
Connect the M terminal of the individual starting motor with the battery. Does the motor run?
YES
Is the starting motor magnetic switch actuating sound head?
YES
Are the battery charge and terminal connection normal without any corrosion? or replace the battery the battery terminal and repair corrosion.
/ dimension. the shift lever for deformation, the return spring for fatigue and the pinion for sliding. ٨ Repair meshing between pinion and ring gear or replace as needed.. the brush and replace if worn. brushes are not worn, replace the motor (yoke assy or armature).
٨ If
٨ Inspect
٨ Inspect
٨ Adjust
Inspect the wiring up to the magnetic switch and repair if necessary. switch ٨ Safety relay ٨ Magnetic switch ٨ Connection state ٨ Key
٨ Connect
٨ Charge
Repair or replace the key switch, starting motor relay or magnetic switch.
The motor does not stop even when the key switch is turned OFF.
For an abnormality (Immediately disconnect the battery negative terminal.)
ψ When the starting motor is wetted with water, always replace the magnetic switch even if the function is normal.
NO
NO
NO
9. Starting motror
9.1.3 Troubleshooting
9. Starting motror
9.1.4 Names of parts and disassembly procedure (1) Disassembling order 1)Nut M8 (Disconnect the connecting wire.) See the disassembly drawing. 2)Screw M4 (2) 3)Through bolt M5 (2) 4)Rear cover 5)Brush holder 6)Yoke assy. 7)Armature 8)Bolt M6 (2) 9)Magnetic switch 10)Dust cover 11)Shift lever 12)Screw M4 (3) 13)Bearing retainer 14)Gear case 15)Pinion stopper clip 16)Pinion stopper 17)Return spring 18)Pinion shaft 19)Clutch assy. Disassembly drawing
9
8
14
12 10 1 3
11
17
15 16
19 18
2
13 4 5 6 7
146
9. Starting motror
(2) Disassembly procedure 1)Nut M8 1
Remove the magnetic switch nut M8 (12 mm), and disconnect the connecting wire.
Connecting wire
Fig. 1
2)Screw M4 (2) 3)Through bolt M5 (2)
3
4)Rear cover Remove the M4 screw fastening the brush holder and remove through bolt M5 for rear cover removal.
2 4 Fig. 2
5)Brush holder Pull the brush spring up with the brush spring puller. On the negative (-) side, bring the brush spring into contact with the side of the brush for lifting from the commutator surface. On the positive (+) side, extract the brush from the brush holder.
Fig. 3
147
9. Starting motror
6)Yoke Assy.
5
7)Armature Remove the brush holder. The armature and yoke assy can now be removed.
6 7 Fig. 4
8)Bolt M6 (2)
9
9)Magnetic switch
8
Remove bolt M6 (10 mm), and the magnetic switch can be removed.
Fig. 5
10)Dust cover 11)Shift lever
10
Take the dust cover out from the gear case. The shift lever can be removed. 11 Fig. 6
148
9. Starting motror 12)Screw M4 (3) 14
13)Bearing retainer 14)Gear case
19
Remove screw M4, and the bearing retainer and clutch assy can be removed. 12 13 Fig. 7
15)Pinion stopper clip Remove the bearing retainer at the edge and the
15
Pinion stopper clip
bearing, and shift the pinion stopper toward the pinion. Use a plain screwdriver and pry to remove the pinion stopper clip.
Plain
( straight-edge screwdriver )
Fig. 8
16)Pinion stopper
15 16 17
19
17)Return spring
18
18)Pinion shaft 19)Clutch Assy Remove the pinion stopper clip. The pinion stopper, return spring, pinion shaft and bearing retainer can be removed. Disassembly is completed now.
149
13 Fig. 9
9. Starting motror
9.1.5 Inspection and maintenance (1) Armature (a)Commutator outside diameter Measure the commutator outside diameter and replace the commutator if the measured value is less than the limit. mm Standard
Limit
36.5
35.5
Fig. 10
(b)Armature coil continuity test Check continuity between commutator segments with a
Multimeter
multimeter. Good if continuity exists. In case of no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the armature.
Fig. 11
(c)Armature coil insulation test Inspect the continuity between a commutator segment
Multimeter
and the shaft or core with a multimeter. Good if no continuity exists. If continuity exists (coil short circuit), replace the armature.
Fig. 12
150
9. Starting motror
(d)Armature and commutator run-out Use a dial gage and measure the armature core run-out and commutator run-out. Correct or replace if the limit is
Armature Commutator
exceeded. mm Standard
Limit
Armature
0.03
0.2
Commutator
0.03
0.2
Fig. 13
(e)Commutator surface inspection If the commutator surface is roughened, grind with #500 to #600 emery cloth.
Fig. 14
(f)Commutator insulation depth Measure the depth of the insulating material between Hack-saw
commutator segments, and correct it if it is less than the limit.
Commutator
mm Standard
Limit
0.5 to 0.8
0.2
Commutator Insulating segment material
Abnormal
Normal Fig. 15
151
Commutator 0.5㨪0.8mm
9. Starting motror
(2) Field coil (a)Field coil continuity test Check continuity between field coil terminals. Good if
Multimeter
continuity exists. If no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the field coil.
Fig. 16
(b)Field coil insulation test Check continuity between field coil terminal and yoke.
Multimeter
Good if no continuity exists. If continuity exists (coil short circuit), replace the armature.
Fig. 17
(3) Brush Measure the length of the brush. Replace with a good one if the length is less than the limit. mm Standard
Limit
15
9
Brush
Fig. 18
152
9. Starting motror
(4) Brush holder (a)Brush holder insulation test Check the continuity between the brush holder (+ side) and base (- side) with a multimeter. Good if no continuity exists. If continuity exists (insulation defect), replace the brush holder. Multimeter
Fig. 19
(b)Brush spring inspection Inspect the brush spring pressure. N (kgf) Standard spring force 31 to 39 (3.1 to 3.9)
Fig. 20
(5) Magnetic switch When the starting motor is wetted with water, always replace the magnetic switch with a new even if the function is normal.
(a)Shunt coil continuity test
Multimeter
Check the continuity between the S terminal and the switch body. Good if continuity exists. If no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the magnetic switch. Fig. 21
153
9. Starting motror
(b)Series coil continuity test Check continuity between the S and M terminals. Good if continuity exists. If no continuity (coil disconnection), replace the Multimeter
magnetic switch.
Fig. 22
(c)Contact continuity test Depress the magnetic switch with the plunger at the
Multimeter
bottom. Check continuity between the B and M terminals with a multimeter. Good if continuity exists. If no continuity (coil continuity defect), replace the magnetic switch.
Fig. 23
(6) Pinion clutch (a)Pinion inspection Manually rotate the pinion. Inspect if it is rotated smoothly in the driving direction, and is locked in the opposite direction. Replace the pinion clutch if abnormal.
Fig. 24
154
9. Starting motror
(b)Pinion sliding inspection Check if the pinion slide smoothly in the axial direction. If damaged, rusted or heavy in sliding, repair it. If grease is applied too much on the pinion shaft, sliding becomes heavy.
Fig. 25
(c)Ball bearing inspection Rotate the ball bearing while holding the outer race with fingertips. Inspect if it is sticking or it there is play.
Fig. 26
9.1.6 Service standards
Brush
Spring force Standard height/wear limit
Magnetic switch resistance, series coil/shunt coil (at 20°C) Standard diameter/limit diameter
N (kgf)
35 (3.6)
mm
15/9
â&#x201E;Ś
0.27/0.60
mm
36.5/35.5
Difference between maximum and minimum diameter
Repair limit/repair accuracy
mm
0.2/0.03
Mica undercut depth chips
Repair limit/repair accuracy
mm
0.2/0.5 to 0.8
-
6903DDU
-
608DDU
-
60004DDU
Pinion rear
-
6904DDU
L dimension (pinion projection length)
mm
0.3-1.5
Commutator
Armature fount Bearing type
Armature rear Pinion front
Nominal number
155
9. Starting motror
9.1.7 Assembly The assembly procedure is the reverse of the disassembly procedure, but pay attention to the following points:
(1) Grease application points • Gears in the gear case • Shift lever operating portion • Pinion sliding portion • Magnetic switch plunger sliding portion Use the specified grease as below table at all points. Pinion and magnetic switch plunger sliding portions
NPCFG-6A
Gears
MALTEMP SRL
Shift lever operating portion
ALBANIA No.1
(2) Magnetic switch assembly 1)Install the shift lever on the magnetic switch with the torsion spring in-between.
Fig. 27
2)For installation on the gear case, install the magnetic switch with the shift lever on the gear case after pulling the pinion out. Fix the magnetic switch by tightening a built-in bolt M6. Do not forget to install the dust cover (adjusting shim).
Fig. 28
156
9. Starting motror
(3) Pinion projection length Connect the positive (+) lead from the battery to terminal S and negative (-) lead to terminal M. Turn the switch
S M
ON and measure the pinion moving distance L in the thrust direction. Perform this test within 10 seconds. mm
l 0.3㨪1.5mm
Standard L
Fig. 29
0.31.5
Note: Before measuring the dimension, pull the pinion out lightly in the direction of the arrow. If the measured L dimension is outside the standard range, either insert or remove the dust cover (adjusting shim 0.5 mm, 0.8 mm) for adjustment. Dust cover (adjusting shim: 0.5mm, 0.8mm)
Fig. 30
157
9. Starting motror
9.1.8 Characteristic test Since the characteristics can be checked roughly by means of a simple no-load test as explained below. NOTE: Complete the test quickly since the rating of the starting motor is 30 seconds.
(1) No-load test Fix the starting motor on a test bench and connect wiring as shown in Fig.31. When the switch is closed, a current flows in the starting motor, which is rotated at no-load. Measure the current, voltage and number of revolutions then and check if they satisfy the specified characteristics.
SW
B Ammeter S
Voltmeter Battery E
Fig. 31
158
9. Starting motror
9.2 For 4TNV106 (T) 9.2.1 Specifications Manufacturer’s model (Hitachi)
-
S13-138
Yanmar code
-
129953-77010
Nominal voltage
V
12
Nominal output
kW
3.0
Rating
Sec
30
Revolution direction (as viewed from pinion)
-
Clockwise
Clutch system
-
Roller clutch
Engagement system
-
Magnetic shift
Pinion: Module/number of teeth
-
M3/9
Weight
kg
7.3
Pinion projection voltage (at 100)
V
8 or less
Terminal voltage/current
V/A
12/180 or less
Revolution
rpm
3000 or more
Terminal voltage/current
V/A
9/500
N•m (kgf•m)
16.7 (1.7) or more
min-1
1270 or more
No-load
Loaded
Torque Revolution
9.2.2 Congiguration drawing Magnetic switch
Gear case Shift lever
Brush
Pinion Gear shaft
O-ring
Ball bearing
Terminal, E
Pinion stopper
Through bolt Rear cover Armature Yoke
Ball bearing
159
Needle bearing Oil seal
Does the gear shift revolve?
NO
NO
YES
160
Inspect the ignition and fuel systems.
YES
Inspect the inside of the engine.
NO
Does the engine run when the starting motor is replaced with a new one?
YES
Is the engine oil viscosity normal?
YES
NO
YES
NO
NO Are pinion and ring gear engaging normally?
YES
Does the motor ravolve when M terminal of starting motor is connected to the battery?
YES
Are pinion and ring gear engaging normally?
YES
Is the starting motor magnetic switch actuating sound heard?
YES
Does the starting motor relay operate?
YES
Are the battery charge and terminal connection normal without any corrosion?
Repair or replace the starting motor.
Replace the engine oil.
̪
Inspect pinion roller clutch for damage and replace if necessary.
NO (slow revolution) Are the battery charge and terminal connection Is the revolution normal? normal without any corrosion?
YES
Does the starting motor revolve?
Inspect the reduction gear (armature, gear shaft) for damage and replace if necessary.
YES
Can the engine be cranked?
Engine does not start.
or replace the battery the battery terminal or repair corrosion.
the brush and replace if worn. brushes are not worn, replace the motor (yoke assy or armature). ٨ If
٨ Inspect
٨ Inspect
the dimension. the shift lever for deformation, the return spring for fatigue and the pinion for sliding. ٨ Repair engagement between pinion and ring gear or replace as needed.
the wiring up to the magnetic switch and repair if necessary.
٨ Adjust
٨ Inspect
Inspect the starting motor relay wiring system and repair if necessary. ٨ Key switch ٨ Starting motor relay ٨ Connection state
٨ Connect
٨ Charge
Repair or replace the key switch, starting motor relay or magnetic switch.
The motor does not stop even when the key switch is turned OFF.
Inspection Causes and item remedies Upon abnormality: Immediately disconnect the battery negative terminal.
NO
NO
NO
NO
NO
9. Starting motror
9.2.3 Troubleshooting
9. Starting motror
9.2.4 Component names and disassembly procedure (1) Disassembly procedure 1)Disconnect the lead. 2)Remove the magnetic switch. 3)Remove the rear cover. 4)Remove the brush holder. 5)Disassemble the gear case and center bracket. 6)Remove the shift lever pin. 7)Remove the gear case dust cover. 8)Remove the pinion.
(2) Disassembly diagram
ԙ ԟ
ԝ
Ԝ Ԟ
Ԙ
Ԛ
ԛ
161
9. Starting motror
9.2.5 Disassembly procedure (1) Disconnecting the lead Loosen the M8 nut (12 mm) of the magnetic switch and disconnect the lead.
162
9. Starting motror
(2) Removal of magnetic switch Remove the M6 bolts (10 mm Ă&#x2014; 2).
163
9. Starting motror
(3) Removal of rear cover Remove the brush holder tightening screws (4 mmø × 2) and the M5 through bolts (× 2). Next, disconnect the rear cover from the yoke using a – screwdriver.
164
9. Starting motror
(4) Removal of brush holder For the negative (â&#x20AC;&#x201C;) brush, bring the brush spring into contact with the side of the brush for lifting from the commutator surface. For the positive (+) brush, extract the pull out the brush from the brush holder. After the brush holder is removed, the armature and yoke can be disassembled.
165
9. Starting motror
(5) Separating gear case from center bracket Remove three M6 bolts (10 mm) fastening the gear case to the center bracket. After removal of the M6 bolts, the center bracket and oil seal can be removed.
166
9. Starting motror
(6) Removal of shift lever pin Remove the M6 nut (10 mm) and pull out the shift lever pin. Now. the dustcover, shift lever, gear case and gear shaft can be removed.
167
9. Starting motror
(7) Removal of gear case dust cover Remove the two M5 bolts (using 4 mm hexagon wrench) to disassemble the dust cover from the gear case.
168
9. Starting motror
(8) Removal of pinion Slide the pinion stopper towards the pinion and remove the pinion stopper clip using a â&#x20AC;&#x201C; screwdriver.
169
9. Starting motror
9.2.6 Inspection and maintenance (1) Armature 1)Check the commutator for rough surface. If so, smooth the surface using #500 to #600 emery cloth. If the outside periphery of the commutator has been deflected over 0.2 mm, repair by a lathe.
2)Measure the depth of the insulating material between commutator segments, and correct if it is less than 0.2 mm.
0.5㨪0.8 OO
Undercut method
170
9. Starting motror 3)Armature coil continuity and earth tests Test type
Measurement point
Continuity test
Across commutator
Earth test
Between commutator and shaft or armature
Replace if needed .
171
Normal
Abnormal (cause)
Yes
None (open circuit)
None
Yes (short-circuiting)
9. Starting motror
(2) Field coil 1)Field coil continuity and earth tests Test type
Measurement point
Continuity test
Across commutator
Earth test
Between commutator and shaft or armature
Replace if needed .
172
Normal
Abnormal (cause)
Yes
None (open circuit)
None
Yes (short-circuiting)
9. Starting motror
(3) Brush 1)Check wear of the brush and the brush spring force.
12 18 6 Limit
New
Used
3.5 kg
2.9 kg
173
9. Starting motror
2)Check of brush movement If the brush does not move smoothly, inspect the brush holder for bending and the brush holder sliding surface for dirt. Repair or clean as needed. 3)Check the continuity between the insulated brush holder (positive (+)) and the brush holder base (negative (-)). If they are electrically continuous, replace since the holder is grounded.
174
9. Starting motror
(4) Magnetic switch continuity test Test type
Measurement point
Shunt coil
Between C and ground
Series coil
C and M
Normal
Abnormal (cause)
Yes
None (open circuit)
None
Yes (short-circuiting)
Replace if needed. C
S13-138 Resistance (at 20°C) Shunt coil
0.6
Series coil
0.218
B
M
175
9. Starting motror
(5) Pinion 1)Check the pinion teeth for wear and damage. Replace with a new one, if necessary. 2)Check if the pinion slides smoothly. If it is damaged or rusted or does not slide smoothly, repair. 3)Check springs for damage, and replace if necessary.
(6) Ball bearing If abnormalities such as irregular noises are detected to the ball bearing, replace with a new one.
9.2.7 Assembly The assembly procedure is reverse of the disassembly procedure, but pay attention to the following points.
(1) Apply grease as instructed below. Greasing point
Grease type
Sliding portions and head of plunger Pinion metal and metal portions of gear case Spline portions of pinion Sliding portions of shift lever Deceleration gear
NPC-FC6A Grease MALTEMP SRL Grease
(2) Armature thrust No adjustments are needed for the thrust.
(3) Gear shaft thrust Some thrust washers of 1.0 and 0.25 mm thickness are provided between the center bracket and gear shaft supporting surface. Make sure to check them at reassembly. If washers are deformed or worn, replace them with new ones. The appropriate thrust is from 0.05 to 0.3mm. If it is over 0.3mm, and the appropriate thrust washer, but pay attention so that the thrust is not 0.
176
9. Starting motror
9.2.8 Adjustment (1) Pinion projection length L by magnetic switch
l Switch
Battery
l
Measure the pinion moving distance L (0.3 to 1.5 mm) in the thrust direction when the pinion is protruded by the magnetic switch. If the distance L is outside the standard range, adjust by the dust cover as shown below.
177
9. Starting motror
Dust cover
l
9.2.9 Service standards
Brush
Spring force N (kgf) Standard / Limit height Outside diameter
Commutator
Deflection Depth of insulation mica Armature shaft diameter
Standard dimensions
Bearing on gear case side Sliding portion of pinion
Ball bearing
31.4 (3.2)
Armature
18/6 Standard
37
Limit
36
Limit
0.2
Correction accuracy
0.05
Limit
0.2
Correction accuracy
0.5 to 0.8
Front
25
Rear
12
Gear shaft diameter
13.95 to 13.968
Hole diameter
14.00 to 14.018
Shaft diameter
13.95 to 13.968
Hole diameter
14.03 to 14.05
Front
6905DDU
Rear
6001DDU
Length L (pinion projection length)
0.3 to 1.5
178
10. Alternator
10. Alternator As a representative example of alternator, the alternator of 40A is shown in this chapter.
10.1 The 40A alternator for 3TNV84 and other models 10.1.1 Components (1) Parts related to the alternator
(2) Alternator components of the disassembly and assembly
179
10. Alternator
10.1.2 Specifications Manufacturer’s model (Hitachi)
-
ACFA68
Yanmar code
-
129423-77200
Rating
-
Continuous
Battery voltage
V
12
Nominal output (13.5 V heat)
A
40
Rated revolution
min-1
5,000
Operating revolution
min-1
1,350 to 18,000
Grounding characteristics
-
Minus side grounding
Direction of revolution (viewed from pulley)
-
Clockwise
Integrated regulator
IC regulator
Weight Pulley (outside diameter)
kg
2.8
mm
69.2
-
Type A
Belt shape
10.1.3 Wiring diagram WIRING DIAGRAM B Key switch
IG P
IG B PI
P
F 0.5ǴF
IC
L Charge lamp (Max. 3.4W)
L
L O A D
E E ALTERNATOR ASSY
IC REGURATOR
[NOTICE] 1)Don't do miss-wiring and short-circuit of each terminal. 2)Don’t short-circuit between IG and L. (Connect it through the charge lamp.) 3)Don’t connect a load between L and E. 4)Don't remove a battery terminal and a B terminal when rotating. 5)Shut out a battery switch during the alternator stop. 6)Tightening torque of each terminal: 1.7-2.3 N•m (17-23 kgf•cm)
180
B Battery A T
L O A D
10. Alternator
10.1.4 Standard output characteristics STANDAED CHAEACTERISTICS 13.5V CONSTANT AMBIENT TEMP:25Í 60
The standard output characteristics of this alternator are shown as the right figure.
Cold
OUTPUT CURRENT
50 Hot 40
30
20
(A) 10
0
1
2
3
4
5
ALTERNATOR SPEED
6 (X103
7 8 min-1)
10.1.5 Inspection (1) V belt inspection Normal
1)Inspect the matter whether there are not crack, stickiness
Defect
and wear on the belt visually. Check that a belt doesn't touch the bottom part of the pulley groove. If necessary, replace the V belt set. 2)V belt tension:
Clearance
Push the center of the V belt and check the belt deflection. The V belt tension is normal if the deflection is within the standard. If not, adjust the V belt tension by the alter-
Inspection of V pulley
nator adjuster. (Refer to 2.2.2 in Chapter 2.)
(2) Visual check of wiring and check of unusual sound 1)Confirm whether wiring is right or there is no looseness of the terminal part. 2)Confirm that there is no unusual sound from the alternator during the engine operation.
(3) Inspection of charge lamp circuit 1)Move a start switch to the position of on. Confirm lighting of the charge lamp. 2)Start an engine, and confirm the lights-out of the lamp. Repair a charge lamp circuit when a lamp doesn't work.
181
182 : Alternator : IC regulator : BAT terminal voltage :L-terminal voltage
GN IC-RG VB VL
Turn the light switch to ON during idling
Measure VB and VL at BAT L-terminal during idling
1) Use a fully charged battery 2) DC voltmeter: 0 to 30 V, 0.5 class 3) The check method is also applicable to the bench test
VB = 13㨪15
VB > 15.5
The lamp is lit dimly
The lamp is lit dimly
The lamp flashes
ON
Disconnect GN coupler (L, IG)
Explanation on abbreviations:
OFF
ĚŞ Remarks
Measure VB at BAT terminal with the engine running at 1500 rpm
OFF
Does the charge lamp come ON?
Increase the engine speed to 1500 rpm and turn the light switch to ON.
OFF
Does the charge lamp goes OFF?
At idling
Turn the key switch to START. (The engine starts.)
ON
Turn key switch to ON. Does the charge lamp come ON? OFF
OFF
Does the charge lamp come ON?
VB - VL < 0.5V
VB - VL > 0.5V
ON
Ground L-terminal of the driven machine side coupler (L, IG). Does the charge lamp come ON?
ON
Not abnormal
Inspect the auxiliary diode
Replace IC-RG
L-terminal defective conduction Inspect the diode ( - side)
Excessive voltage drop between BAT and batt ( + side) terminal
Inspect the diode ( + side)
Inspect or replace the fan belt, and inspect the alternator
Inspect the rotor coil and brush IC-RG
The charge lamp is available from the driven machine manufacturer.
Replace the charge lamp
10. Alternator
10.1.6 Troubleshooting
11. Electric wiring
11. Electric wiring 11.1 Electric wiring diagram
183
11. ELECTRIC WIRING
11.2 Precaution on electric wiring 11.2.1 Alternator In the cases listed below the warranty shall not be deemed to apply. Please be sure to read these conditions carefully when planning to use it with other equipment. Also be certain to give appropriate guidance on usage to the user.
(1) When the battery cable can be connected backwards The alternator diode will be damaged and recharging made impossible if the plus and minus ends of the battery cable are confused. The stator coil will also be burned as a result. To prevent this, supply the user with a cable of such a length or structure that the plus and minus ends cannot be confused. Also warn the user not to connect the cable backwards.
(2) When charging output voltage is used for control purposes The engine speed at starting is not proportional to the output voltage of the alternator, so this output voltage must not be used for any control systems. It is especially wrong to use it for the control signal of the safety relay for cutting the starter motor because this will damage the starter motor and cause engine starting failure.
(3) When the L line is used for control purposes Consult with Yanmar first before connecting any load other than the charge lamp to the L line. Damage to the alternator and related equipment will not be warranted without such prior consultation.
(4) Non-use of the Yanmar wiring diagram Use without prior consultation of any wiring diagram other than that provided by Yanmar removes any breakdown of any electrical equipment from the warranty.
(5) Regarding lamp control Once the charge lamp goes out after the start of charging, it does not come on again even if the engine speed falls and charging is insufficient. The lamp will not light again if the charging circuit is normal. The lamp only comes on during operation if the alternator itself is broken or the drive V-belt breaks. However, when an LED is used for the charge lamp, the LED will shine faintly even during normal operation. This is due to the control system for the alternator lamp and is not an abnormality.
(6) Use of a non-specified V-belt Use of a non-specified V-belt will cause inadequate charging and shorten the life of the belt. Use a belt of the specified type.
(7) Direct high pressure washing is prohibited Water will enter the brush if the alternator is washed directly at high pressure, causing inadequate charging. Warn users not to use direct, high-pressure washing.
(8) Use of agricultural or other chemicals (direct contact or airborne) Adhesion of agricultural and other chemicals, especially those with high sulfur content, to the IC regulator corrodes the conductor on the substrate, leading to over-charging (battery boiling) and charging malfunctions. Consult with Yanmar prior to use in such an environment. Use without prior consultation removes any breakdown from the warranty.
184
11. ELECTRIC WIRING
11.2.2 Starter In the cases listed below the warranty shall not be deemed to apply. Please be sure to read these conditions carefully when planning to use it with other equipment. Also be certain to give appropriate guidance on usage to the user.
(1) Starting performance in the case of using an untested battery The starting performance of the engine is closely dependent on the battery capacity. This battery capacity is itself affected by the climate and the type of equipment installation. The details regarding ambient temperature and equipment installation vary depending on the OEM, so Yanmar cannot decide the battery capacity on its own. Confer with Yanmar in advance after checking these conditions and fix the battery capacity on the basis of confirmatory tests.
(2) When the resistance of the battery cable exceeds the specified value The combined total resistance of the battery cable in both directions between the starting motor and battery should be within the value indicated on the wiring diagram. The starting motor will malfunction or break down if the resistance is higher than the specified value.
(3) When the resistance of the starter circuit exceeds the specified value The combined total resistance of the wiring between the starting motor and key switch (or power relay or safety relay, depending on the application) should be within the value indicated on the wiring diagram. Engine starting will be difficult if the resistance is higher than the specified value. This can also cause welding of the magnet switch at the point of contact and resultant burning of the armature coil.
(4) When there is no safety relay Over-running (when the electric current flows for too long) is a major cause of starting failure. This burns the armature coil and causes clutch failure. Excessive work and failure of the key switch to return properly are the main causes of over-running. The user must be given sufficient warning about this. Be sure to use the safety relay to prevent over-running. This safety relay is supplied as an option. Consult Yanmar first when planning to install a safety relay at your own company. In the case of failure to consult with Yanmar, our warranty will not be applied to all the electrical equipment.
(5) When there is too much rust due to the entry of water The water-proofing of the starting motor is equivalent to R2 of JIS D 0203. This guarantees that there will be no damage from the sort of exposure encountered in rain or when water is poured on from a bucket. You should, however, avoid the use of high-pressure washing and steeping in water.
(6) Regarding the heat resistance of the starter motor The starter motor has heat resistance for an ambient temperature of 80°C and surface temperature of 100°C. Insulators must be installed to prevent overheating when used near high temperature parts such as the exhaust system.
(7) Corrosion of magnet switch contact point by corrosive gas. When using equipment with a dry clutch, ammonium gas generated by friction is liable to corrode the contact of the magnet switch. Be sure to install a vent in the clutch case.
185
11. ELECTRIC WIRING
11.2.3 Current limiter In the cases listed below the warranty shall not be deemed to apply. Please be sure to read these conditions carefully when planning to use it with other equipment. Also be certain to give appropriate guidance on usage to the user.
(1) When an over-discharged battery is used Use of booster starting with an over-discharged battery (when the voltage has dropped to 8 V or less) will destroy other electrical equipment by generating an abnormally high voltage. A specialized battery charger should be used to recharge such an over-discharged battery (when the voltage has dropped to 8 V or less).
(2) When checks for malfunctioning are not performed When high voltage noise from other electrical equipment is impressed on the current limiter upon turning off the key switch, the current limiter can be damaged and cause loss of control over the output voltage. Other electrical equipment may also be damaged if this happens, so surge killers should be fitted to the electrical equipment whenever necessary. Be sure to check prior to mass production whether electrical noise might damage the current limiter by turning the key switch and other electrical equipment on and off while the engine is running, using both the vehicle and the wire harness that will be used in mass production.
(3) Removal of the battery cable during operation The current limiter may malfunction if the battery cable and/or battery are removed during operation, depending on the kind of electrical equipment being used, causing loss of control over the output voltage. In such cases, the current limiter and other electrical equipment will be damaged by the generation of a continuous high voltage of 24-43 V (for 5,000 rpm dynamo). All electrical equipment falls outside the scope of the warranty under these circumstances. Be sure to warn the user not to remove the battery cable and/or battery during operation.
(4) If the battery cable can be attached in reverse The current limiterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s SCR diode will be destroyed if the plus and minus ends of the battery cable are connected the wrong way around. This causes charging malfunctioning and burns the harness. Give the user a cable of such a length that it cannot be connected the wrong way and warn the user against connecting the cable backwards.
(5) Non-use of the Yanmar wiring diagram Use without prior consultation of any wiring diagram other than that provided by Yanmar removes any breakdown of any electrical equipment from the warranty.
(6) Installation environment Observe the following when installing the current limiter: 1)Do not install it on the engine. 2)Place it in a well-ventilated place with an ambient temperature of 65 °C or less. 3)Ensure that the cooling air flows in the right direction for the current limiterâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;s cooling fins. 4)Do not use the earth wire of the current limiter to earth any other electrical equipment.
186
11. ELECTRIC WIRING
11.2.4 Section area and resistance of electric wire (1) Allowable maximum cable length (Terminal resistance is not included.) Cable construction Cable size 2 mm Element No. Cable dia.
Resistance (Ω/m)
2 mΩ Note1 (m)
20 mΩ Ref. (m)
50 mΩ Note2 (m)
3
41
ø 0.32
0.005590
0.36
3.58
8.94
5
65
ø 0.32
0.003520
0.57
5.68
14.20
8
50
ø 0.45
0.002320
0.86
8.62
21.55
15
84
ø 0.45
0.001380
1.45
14.49
36.23
20
41
ø 0.80
0.000887
2.25
22.55
56.37
30
70
ø 0.80
0.000520
3.85
38.46
96.15
40
85
ø 0.80
0.000428
4.67
46.73
116.82
50
108
ø 0.80
0.000337
5.93
59.35
148.37
60
127
ø 0.80
0.000287
6.97
69.69
174.22
85
169
ø 0.80
0.000215
9.30
93.02
232.56
100
217
ø 0.80
0.000168
11.90
119.05
297.62
Note1) Allowable maximum resistance of Battery cable Note2) Allowable maximum resistance of Starting motor circuit
(2) Terminal resistance Generally, a terminal resistance is 15 mΩ per coupler and 0 Ω per screw setting. This resistance should be included in allowable maximum resistance when the cable length is planned.
187
12. Service standards
12. Service standards 12.1 Engine tuning No.
Inspection item
TNV82 to A98 Gap at intake/exhaust valve heads mm 4TNV106(T) Between alternator Used part and crank pulley New part V-belt tension Between alternator Used part 2 mm and radiator fan New part at 98N (10 kgf) Between radiator fan Used part and crank pulley New part 3TNV82A to TNV88(VM) Fuel injection 4TNV94L to 106(T) 3 pressure MPa (kgf/cm2) 3TNV82A to TNV88(CL) 1
Compression pressure 4 (at 250 min-1) MPa (kgf/cm2)
5
6
7
8
9
Standard
Limit
0.15 to 0.25 0.25 to 0.35 10 to 14 8 to 12 7 to 10 5 to 8 9 to 13 7 to 11 21.57 to 22.55 (220 to 230) 19.6 to 20.6 (200 to 210) 3.16 (31) ± 0.1 (1) 3.24 (33) ± 0.1 (1) 2.94 (30) ± 0.1 (1) 3.43 (35) ± 0.1 (1) 1.8 2.0 2.7 4.2 6.0 Full Effective 5.5 1.9 6.7 2.8 7.4 3.4 10.5 4.5 14.0 9.0 14.0 7.5 at rated speed 0.29(3.0) to 0.39(4.0)
-
TNV82A TNV84 3/4TNV84T TNV88-106 Coolant water 3TNV82A, 84 3TNV84T, 88 Capacity (Only engine 4TNV84(T), 88 body) 4TNV94L•98(T) (Liter) 4TNV106(T) 3TNV82A Lubricating oil 3TNV84(T)/88 capacity 4TNV84(T)/88 (oil pan) 4TNV94L/98(T) (Liter) 4TNV106(T)(CL class) 4TNV106(T)(VM class) 3TNV82A to 98 4TNV98T Lubricating oil 4TNV106(T) 0.39(4.0) to 0.49(5.0) pressure (VM, WO balancer) MPa (kgf/cm2) 4TNV106(T) 0.31(3.2) to 0.49(5.0) (CL, WO balancer) 4TNV106(T) 0.34(3.5) to 0.44(4.5) (VM, W balancer) Oil pressure switch operating pressure 0.05 ± 0.01 (0.5 ± 0.1) MPa (kgf/cm2) valve opening temperature deg. C Thermostat All models 69.5 to 72.5
All models option 10 Thermo switch actuating temperature
80 to 84 (deg.C)
188
107 to 113
Reference page 2.2.6.(4)
2.2.2.(2)
-
2.2.6.(3)
2.45(25) ± 0.1(1) 2.55(26) ± 0.1(1) 3.3 2.45(25) ± 0.1(1) 2.75(28) ± 0.1(1) 2.2.1.(4) 2.2.1.(3) at low idle speed -
0.06 (0.6) or above
-
-
-
Full opening lift (mm) (temperature) 8 or above (85 deg.C) 10 or above (95 deg.C) -
2.7
2.4.2
12. Service standards
12.2 Engine body 12.2.1 Cylinder head (1) Cylinder head Inspection item Combustion surface distortion
Valve sink mm
Valve seat (2-valve, 4-valve)
mm
Standard
Limit
0.05 or less
0.15
3TNV82A (2-valve head)
Intake
0.35 to 0.55
0.8
Exhaust
0.30 to 0.50
0.8
TNV84 to 88 (2-valve head) 4TNV84T(4-valve)
Intake
0.30 to 0.50
0.8
Exhaust
0.30 to 0.50
0.8
4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98(T) (4-valve head)
Intake
0.36 to 0.56
0.8
Exhaust
0.35 to 0.55
0.8
4TNV106(T) (4-valve head)
Intake
0.5 to 0.7
1.0
Exhaust
0.7 to 0.9
1.2
Intake
120
-
Exhaust
90
-
40, 150
-
Seat angle Deg. Seat correction angle
deg.
189
Reference page
4.2.5.(1)
4.2.6.
12. Service standards
(2) Intake/exhaust valve and guide mm Inspection item
Intake 3TNV82A (2-valve head)
Standard
Limit
Guide inside diameter
7.000 to 7.015
7.08
Valve stem outside diameter
6.945 to 6.960
6.90
Clearance
0.040 to 0.070
0.18
Guide inside diameter
7.000 to 7.015
7.08
6.940 to 6.955
6.90
Clearance
0.045 to 0.075
0.18
Guide inside diameter
8.010 to 8.025
8.10
Valve stem outside diameter
7.955 to 7.975
7.90
Clearance
0.035 to 0.070
0.18
Guide inside diameter
8.015 to 8.030
8.10
7.955 to 7.960
7.90
Clearance
0.045 to 0.075
0.18
Guide inside diameter
6.000 to 6.015
6.08
Valve stem outside diameter
5.960 to 5.975
5.90
Clearance
0.025 to 0.055
0.15
Guide inside diameter
6.000 to 6.015
6.08
5.945 to 5.960
5.90
Clearance
0.040 to 0.070
0.17
Guide inside diameter
7.000 to 7.015
7.08
Valve stem outside diameter
6.945 to 6.960
6.90
Clearance
0.040 to 0.070
0.17
Guide inside diameter
7.000 to 7.015
7.08
6.940 to 6.955
6.90
Clearance
0.045 to 0.075
0.17
Guide inside diameter
7.008 to 7.020
7.08
Valve stem outside diameter
6.945 to 6.960
6.92
Clearance
0.048 to 0.075
0.16
Guide inside diameter
7.008 to 7.020
7.08
6.960 to 6.975
6.90
Clearance
0.033 to 0.060
0.18
3TNV82A
11.7 to 12.0
-
4TNV84, 3TNV84(T), 4TNV88
14.71 to 5.0
-
4TNV84T
8.2 to 8.5
-
4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T)
9.7 to 10.0
-
4TNV106(T)
13.4 to 13.6
-
Cold-fitted
-
Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter
4TNV84 3TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88 (2-valve head)
Intake
Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter
Intake 4TNV84T (4-valve head)
Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter
Intake 4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) (4-valve head)
Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter
Intake 4TNV106(T) (4-valve head)
Exhaust Valve stem outside diameter
Valve guide projection from cylinder head
Valve guide driving-in method
190
Reference page
4.2.5.(2)
4.2.7.
12. Service standards
(3) Valve spring mm Inspection item
Free length
Inclination
Standard
Limit
3TNV82A(2-valve)
44.4
43.9
4TNV84,3TNV84(T), 4TNV88(2-valve)
42.0
41.5
4TNV84T(4-valve)
37.4
36.9
4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T),(4-valve)
39.7
39.2
4TNV106(T)(4-valve)
50.6
50.1
3TNV82A(2-valve)
-
1.4
4TNV84, 3TNV84(T), 4TNV88(2-valve)
-
1.4
4TNV84T(4-valve)
-
1.3
4TNV94L, 4TNV98(T), (4-valve)
-
1.4
4TNV106(T)(4-valve)
-
1.5
Reference page
4.2.5.(4)
(4) Rocker arm and shaft mm Model
TNV82A to 88
Inspection item
Standard
Limit
Arm shaft hole diameter
16.000 to 16.020
16.07
Shaft outside diameter
15.966 to 15.984
15.94
0.016 to 0.054
0.13
Arm shaft hole diameter
18.500 to 18.520
18.57
Shaft outside diameter
18.470 to 18.490
18.44
0.010 to 0.050
0.13
Clearance 4TNV94L/98(T)/106(T)
Clearance
(5) Push rod mm Inspection item Bend
Standard
Limit
Reference page
Less than 0.03
0.03
4.2.5.(7)
(R.1) 191
Reference page
4.2.5.(5)
12. Service standards
12.2.2 Gear train and camshaft (1) Camshaft mm Standard
Limit
Reference page
0.05 to 0.20
0.30
4.3.4
0 to 0.02
0.05
3TNV82A-TNV88
38.600 to 38.800
38.350
4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98
43.400 to 43.600
43.150
4TNV106(T)
50.900 to 51.100
50.650
44.990 to 45.055
45.130
Camshaft outside diameter 44.925 to 44.950
44.890
Clearance
0.040 to 0.130
0.240
45.000 to 45.025
45.100
TNV82A to TNV88 Intermediate Camshaft outside diameter 44.910 to 44.935
44.875
Inspection item Side gap Bending (1/2 the dial gage reading) Cam height
4.3.5.(1)
Shaft outside diameter / Metal inside diameter Bushing inside diameter Gear side
Bushing inside diameter Clearance
0.065 to 0.115
0.225
45.000 to 45.025
45.100
Camshaft outside diameter 44.925 to 44.950
44.890
Clearance
0.050 to 0.100
0.210
49.990 to 50.055
50.130
Camshaft outside diameter 49.925 to 49.950
49.890
Clearance
0.040 to 0.130
0.240
50.000 to 50.025
50.100
Intermediate Camshaft outside diameter 49.910 to 49.935
49.875
Bushing inside diameter Wheel side
Bushing inside diameter Gear side
Bushing inside diameter 4TNV94L/98(T)
Clearance
0.065 to 0.115
0.225
50.000 to 50.025
50.100
Camshaft outside diameter 49.925 to 49.950
49.890
Clearance
0.05 to 0.100
0.210
57.980 to 58.050
58.105
Camshaft outside diameter 57.910 to 57.940
57.875
Clearance
0.040 to 0.140
0.250
58.000 to 58.030
58.105
Intermediate Camshaft outside diameter 57.895 to 57.925
57.860
Bushing inside diameter Wheel side
Bushing inside diameter Gear side
Bushing inside diameter 4TNV106(T)
Clearance
0.075 to 0.135
0.245
58.000 to 58.030
58.105
Camshaft outside diameter 57.910 to 57.940
57.875
Clearance
0.230
Bushing inside diameter Wheel side
0.050 to 0.120
192
4.3.5.(1)
12. Service standards
(2) Idle gear shaft and bushing mm Inspection item
Standard
Limit
Shaft outside diameter
45.950 to 45.975
45.900
Bushing inside diameter
46.000 to 46.025
46.075
0.025 to 0.075
0.175
Clearance
Reference page 4.3.5.(2)
(3) Backlash of each gear mm Model 3TNV82A 3/4TNV84(T) 3/4TNV88 4TNV94L 4TNV98(T) 4TNV106(T)
Inspection item
Standard
Limit
Crank gear, cam gear, idle gear, fuel injection pump gear and PTO gear
0.07 to 0.15
0.17
Crank gear, cam gear, idle gear, fuel injection pump gear and PTO gear
0.08 to 0.14
0.16
Lubricating oil pump gear
0.09 to 0.15
0.17
Balancer drive gear (only for 4TNV106(T))
0.12 to 0.18
0.20
Reference page
4.3.4.
12.2.3 Cylinder block (1) Cylinder block mm Inspection item
Cylinder inside diameter
Standard
Limit
3TNV82A
82.000 to 82.030
82.200
3/4TNV84(T)
84.000 to 84.030
84.200
3/4TNV88
88.000 to 88.030
88.200
4TNV94L
94.000 to 94.030
94.130
4TNV98
98.000 to 98.030
98.130
106.000 to 106.030
106.130
0.01 or less
0.03
4TNV106(T) Cylinder bore
Roundness Inclination
193
Reference page
4.4.5.(1)
12. Service standards
(2) Crankshaft mm Inspection item
Standard
Limit
-
0.02
Pin outside diameter
42.952 to 42.962
42.902
Metal inside diameter
43.000 to 43.042
-
Metal thickness
1.487 to 1.500
-
Clearance
0.038 to 0.090
0.150
Pin outside diameter
47.952 to 47.962
47.902
Metal inside diameter
48.000 to 48.026
-
Metal thickness
1.492 to 1.500
-
Clearance
0.038 to 0.074
0.150
Pin outside diameter
57.952 to 57.962
57.902
Metal inside diameter
58.000 to 58.026
-
Metal thickness
1.492 to 1.500
-
Clearance
0.038 to 0.074
0.150
Pin outside diameter
63.952 to 63.962
63.902
Metal inside diameter
64.016 to 64.042
-
Metal thickness
1.984 to 1.992
-
Clearance
0.054 to 0.090
0.150
Journal outside diameter
46.952 to 46.962
46.902
Metal inside diameter
47.000 to 47.032
-
Metal thickness
1.987 to 2.000
-
Clearance
0.038 to 0.080
0.150
Journal outside diameter
53.952 to 53.962
53.902
Metal inside diameter
54.000 to 54.020
-
1.995 to 1.990
-
0.038 to 0.068
0.150
Journal outside diameter
64.952 to 64.962
64.902
Metal inside diameter
65.000 to 65.020
-
1.995 to 2.010
-
0.038 to 0.068
0.150
Journal outside diameter
75.952 to 75.962
75.902
Metal inside diameter
76.014 to 76.034
-
2.488 to 2.503
-
0.052 to 0.082
0.150
Bending (1/2 the dial gauge reading)
3TNV82A
TNV84 to 88 Crank pin 4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98
4TNV106(T)
3TNV82A
TNV84 to 88
Crank journal
Selective pairing Metal thickness Clearance 4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98
Selective pairing Metal thickness Clearance 4TNV106(T)
Selective pairing Metal thickness Clearance
194
Reference page
4.4.5.(2)
12. Service standards
(3) Thrust bearing mm Inspection item Crankshaft side gap
All models
Standard
Limit
Reference page
0.13 to 0.23
0.28
4.4.4
(4) Piston and ring Piston mm Inspection item
Piston outside diameter (Measure in the direction vertical to the piston pin.)
Piston diameter measure position (Upward from the bottom end of the piston)
3TNV82A
Standard
Limit
3TNV82A
81.950 to 81.980
81.905
3,4TNV84(T)
83.940 to 83.970
83.895
3,4TNV88
87.940 to 87.970
87.895
4TNV94L
93.935 to 93.965
93.900
4TNV98(T)
97.930 to 97.960
97.895
4TNV106(T)
105.930 to 105.960
105.880
3TNV82A
16
-
3,4TNV84(T)
24
-
3,4TNV88
24
-
4TNV94L
22
-
4TNV98(T)
22
-
4TNV106(T)
30
-
Hole inside diameter
23.000 to 23.009
23.039
Pin outside diameter
22.995 to 23.000
22.965
0.000 to 0.014
0.074
Hole inside diameter
26.000 to 26.009
26.039
Pin outside diameter
25.995 to 26.000
25.965
0.000 to 0.014
0.074
Hole inside diameter
30.000 to 30.009
30.039
Pin outside diameter
29.989 to 30.000
29.959
0.000 to 0.020
0.080
Hole inside diameter
37.000 to 37.011
37.039
Pin outside diameter
36.989 to 37.000
36.959
0.000 to 0.022
0.080
Clearance 3,4TNV84(T) 3,4TNV88 Piston pin 4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98
Clearance
Clearance 4TNV106(T)
Clearance
195
Reference page
4.4.5.(4)
12. Service standards
Piston ring Model
Inspection item
Top ring
3TNV82A TNV84
Second ring
Oil ring
Top ring
TNV88
Second ring
Oil ring
Top ring
4TNV94L/98
Second ring
Oil ring
Top ring
4TNV106(T)
Second ring
Oil ring
Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance Ring groove width Ring width Side clearance End clearance 196
Standard
limit
2.065 to 2.080 1.970 to 1.990 0.075 to 0.110 0.200 to 0.400 2.035 to 2.050 1.970 to 1.990 0.045 to 0.080 0.200 to 0.400 4.015 to 4.030 3.970 to 3.990 0.025 to 0.060 0.200 to 0.400 2.060 to 2.075 1.970 to 1.990 0.070 to 0.105 0.200 to 0.400 2.025 to 2.040 1.970 to 1.990 0.035 to 0.070 0.200 to 0.400 4.015 to 4.030 3.970 to 3.990 0.025 to 0.060 0.200 to 0.400 2.040 to 2.060 1.940 to 1.960 0.080 to 0.120 0.250 to 0.450 2.080 to 2.095 1.970 to 1.990 0.090 to 0.125 0.450 to 0.650 3.015 to 3.030 2.970 to 2.990 0.025 to 0.060 0.250 to 0.450 2.520 to 2.540 2.440 to 2.460 0.060 to 0.100 0.300 to 0.450 2.070 to 2.085 1.970 to 1.990 0.080 to 0.115 0.450 to 0.600 3.015 to 3.030 2.970 to 2.990 0.025 to 0.060 0.300 to -0.500
1.950 0.490 2.150 1.950 0.200 0.490 4.130 3.950 0.180 0.490 1.950 0.490 2.140 1.950 0.190 0.490 4.130 3.950 0.180 0.490 1.920 0.540 2.195 1.950 0.245 0.730 3.130 2.950 0.180 0.550 2.420 0.540 2.185 1.950 0.235 0.680 3.130 2.950 0.180 0.600
mm Reference page
4.4.5.(4)
12. Service standards
(5) Connecting rod mm Inspection item Thrust clearance
Standard
Limit
Reference page
0.2 to 0.4
-
4.4.4
Rod small end
mm
Model
3TNV82A
Item
Standard
Limit
Bushing inside diameter
23.025 to 23.038
23.068
Pin outside diameter
22.995 to 23.000
22.967
0.025 to 0.043
0.101
Bushing inside diameter
26.025 to 26.038
26.068
Pin outside diameter
25.995 to 26.000
25.967
0.025 to 0.043
0.101
Bushing inside diameter
30.025 to 30.038
30.068
Pin outside diameter
29.987 to 30.000
29.959
0.025 to 0.051
0.109
Bushing inside diameter
37.025 to 37.038
37.068
Pin outside diameter
36.989 to 37.000
36.961
0.025 to 0.049
0.107
Clearance TNV84-88
Clearance 4TNV94L/98
Clearance 4TNV106(T)
Clearance
Reference page
4.4.5.(5)
(6) Tappet mm Inspection item
TNV82A-88
Standard
Limit
Tappet hole (block) inside diameter
12.000 to 12.025
12.045
Tappet stem outside diameter
11.975 to 11.990
11.955
0.010 to 0.050
0.090
12.000 to 12.018
12.038
11.975 to 11.990
11.955
0.010 to 0.043
0.083
Tappet hole (block) inside diameter
14.000 to 14.018
14.038
Tappet stem outside diameter
13.966 to 13.984
13.946
0.015 to 0.052
0.092
Clearance Tappet hole (block) inside diameter 4TNV94Lâ&#x20AC;˘98 Tappet stem outside diameter Clearance 4TNV106(T)
Clearance
197
Reference page
4.4.5.(6)
12. Service standards
12.3 Lubricating oil system (Trochoid pump) (1) Outside clearance of outer rotor mm Model
Standard
Limit
0.12 to 0.21
0.30
4TNV94L/98
0.100 to 0.155
0.25
4TNV106(T)
0.100 to 0.165
0.25
3TNV82A to 88
Reference page 5.5.1.(1)
(2) Side clearance of outer rotor mm Model
Standard
Limit
3TNV82A to 88
0.02 to 0.07
0.12
4TNV94L/98
0.05 to 0.10
0.15
4TNV106(T)
0.03 to 0.12
0.17
Reference page 5.5.1.(1)
(3) Tip clearance between outer rotor and inner rotor Insert a gap gage between an outer rotor and an inner rotor, and measure the tip clearance. Tip clearance
mm
Standard
Limit
-
0.16
(4) Inside clearance of inner rotor mm Item Inside clearance of inner rotor Width across flat clearance of inner rotor
Parts
Standard
Gear boss diameter
53.05 to 53.15
Rotor diameter
53.45 to 53.55
Width across flat of Gear boss
49.45 to 49.75
Width across flat of rotor
49.95 to 50.05
Standard
Limit
0.3 to 0.5
0.6
Reference page
5.5.1.(2) 0.2 to 0.6
0.7
(5) Rotor shaft clearance mm Model
4TNV94L/ 98
4TNV106(T)
Inspection item
Standard
Limit
Gear case bearing I.D.
12.980 to 13.02
13.05
Rotor shaft O.D.
12.955 to 12.975
12.945
Rotor clearance
0.035 to 0.065
0.105
Gear case bearing I.D.
13.00 to 13.02
13.05
Rotor shaft O.D.
12.955 to 12.965
12.945
Rotor clearance
0.035 to -0.065
0.105
Reference page
5.5.1.(3)
(R.1) 198
13. Tightening torque for bolts and nuts
13. Tightening torque for bolts and nuts 13.1 Tightening torques for main bolts and nuts Part and engine model
3TNV82A Cylinder head bolt
TNV84 to 88 4TNV94L•98 4TNV106(T) 3TNV82A
Connecting rod bolt
TNV84 to 88 4TNV94L•98 4TNV106(T)
Flywheel set bolt
TNV82A to 88 4TNV94L•98•106(T) 3TNV82A
Bearing cap set bolt
TNV84 to 88 4TNV94L•98 4TNV106(T)
Crankshaft pulley set bolt
Fuel nozzle set bolt Fuel pump drive gear set nut Fuel injection pipe set bolt Fuel return pipe joint bolt Rocker arm cover set bolt EPA flange set bolt
TNV82A to 88 4TNV94L•98•106(T) TNV82A to 88 4TNV94L•98•106(T) TNV82A to 88 4TNV94L•98•106(T) TNV82A to 88 4TNV94L•98•106(T) 4TNV94L98106(T) 4TNV106(T) 4TNV106(T)
Lubricating oil Thread application Reference diameter Tightening torque (thread portion, page × pitch N•m (kgf•m) and seat surface) mm 61.7 to 65.7 M9 × 1.25 (6.3 to 6.7) 85.3 to 91.1 M10 × 1.25 (8.7 to 9.3) Applied 4.2.4 103.1 to 112.9 M11 × 1.25 (10.511.5) 188.0 to 197.8 M13 × 1.5 (19.0 to 20.0) 37.2 to 41.2 M8 × 1.0 (3.8 to 4.2) 44.1 to 49.0 M9 × 1.0 (4.5 to 5.0) Applied 4.4.4 53.9 to 58.8 M10 × 1.0 (5.5 to 6.0) 78.5 to 83.4 M11 × 1.0 (8.0 to 8.5) 83.3 to 88.2 M10 × 1.25 (8.5 to 9.0) Applied 4.3.4 186.2 to 205.8 M14 × 1.5 (19 to 21) 76.4 to 80.4 M10 × 1.25 (7.8 to 8.2) 93.2 to 98.1 M12 × 1.5 (9.5 to 10.5) Applied 4.4.4 108.1 to 117.9 M11 × 1.25 (11.0 to 12.0) 186.2 to 205.8 M14 × 1.5 (19 to 21) 112.7 to 122.7 M14 × 1.5 (11.5 to 12.5) Applied 4.3.4 107.9 to 127.5 M14 × 1.5 (11.0 to 13.0) 24.4 to 28.4 M8 × 1.25 (2.5 to 2.9) Not applied 22.6 to 28.4 M8 × 1.25 (2.3 to 2.9) M14 × 1.5 78 to 88 (8 to 9) Not applied 4.3.4 113 to 123 M18 × 1.5 (11.5 to 12.5) 29.4 to 34.3 M12 × 1.5 (3.0 to 3.5) Not applied 19.6 to 24.5 M12 × 1.5 (2.0 to 2.5) 7.8 to 9.8 M6 × 1.0 Not applied (0.8 to 1.0) 16.7 to 22.5 M8 × 1.25 Not applied (1.7 to 2.3) 113 to 123 M18 × 1.5 Not applied (11.5 to 12.5)
(R.1) 199
13. Tightening torque for bolts and nuts
13.2 Tightening torques for standard bolts and nuts Item
Hexagon bolt (7T) and nut
Nominal thread diameter × pitch
Tightening torque N•m (kgf•m)
M6 × 1
9.8 to 11.8 (1.0 to 1.2)
M8 × 1.25
22.6 to 28.4 (2.3 to 2.9)
M10 × 1.5
44.1 to 53.9 (4.5 to 5.5)
M12 × 1.75
78.4 to 98.0 (8.0 to 10)
M14 × 1.5
127.5 to 147.1 (13 to 15)
M16 × 1.5
215.7 to 235.4 (22 to 24)
1/8
9.8 (1.0)
1/4
19.6 (2.0)
3/8
29.4 (3.0)
1/2
58.8 (6.0)
M8
12.7 to 16.7 (1.3 to 1.7)
M10
19.6 to 25.4 (2.0 to 2.6)
M12
24.5 to 34.3 (2.5 to 3.5)
M14
39.2 to 49.0 (4.0 to 5.0)
M16
49.0 to 58.8 (5.0 to 6.0)
PT plug
Pipe joint bolt
Note) Lubricating oil is not applied to threaded portion and seat surface.
200
Remarks Use 80 % of the value at left when the tightening part is aluminum. Use 60 % of the value at left for 4T bolts and lock nuts.
-
-
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
MEMO .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... .................................................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................................................
Hitachi Construction Machinery Co. Ltd Attn: Publications, Marketing & Product Support Fax: 81-29-831-1162
Hitachi Ref. No.
SERVICE MANUAL REVISION REQUEST FORM NAME OF COMPANY:
MODEL: PUBLICATION NO.:
YOUR NAME: DATE: FAX:
(Located at the right top corner in the cover page)
PAGE NO.: (Located at the bottom center in the page. If two or more revisions are requested, use the comment column)
YOUR COMMENTS / SUGGESTIONS: Attach photo or sketch if required. If your need more space, please use another sheet.
REPLY:
(Copy this form for usage)
SECTION 1
GENERAL CONTENTS Group 1 Specification Specifications ............................................ T1-1-1 Working Ranges ........................................ T1-1-3
Group 2 Component Layout Main Components .................................... T1-2-1 Electrical Component Layout (Overview) .............................................. T1-2-2 Electrical System (Controllers and Relays) ......................... T1-2-3 Electrical System (Monitor and Switches) ........................... T1-2-4 Engine ...................................................... T1-2-5 Swing Device............................................ T1-2-5 Travel Device............................................ T1-2-5 Control Valve ............................................ T1-2-6 2-Unit Solenoid Valve ............................... T1-2-6 Revolution Sensing Valve / Pilot Filter ...... T1-2-6 Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve (Optional) ..... T1-2-6
Group 3 Component Specifications Engine ...................................................... T1-3-1 Engine Accessories .................................. T1-3-4 Hydraulic Component ............................... T1-3-5 Filter ......................................................... T1-3-8 Electrical Component ............................... T1-3-8
1M9T-1-1
(Blank)
1M9T-1-2
GENERAL / Specifications SPECIFICATIONS ZAXIS40U-2
T1M9-01-01-001
⋅The above indicates construction for 4-Piller Canopy Version ZAXIS40U-2 Type 2-Piller Canopy 4-Piller Canopy Cab Type of Front-End Attachment Boom Swing Type Bucket Capacity (Heaped) m3 (yd3) 0.14 (0.18) Operating Weight kg (lb) 4260 (9392) 4330 (9540) 4450 (9810) Basic Machine Weight kg (lb) 3190 (7030) 3230 (7121) 3380 (7452) YANMER 4TNV88 Engine kW/min-1 29.8/2500 (PS/rpm) (40.5/2500) A: Overall Width mm (ft⋅in) 1870 (6′2″) B: Overall Height mm (ft⋅in) 2540 (8′4″) 2510 (8′3″) 2550 (8’4”) C: Rear-End Swing Radius mm (ft⋅in) 980 (3′3″) D: Minimum Ground Clearance mm (ft⋅in) 335 (1′1″) E: Counterweight Height mm (ft⋅in) 605 (1′11″) F: Engine Cover Height mm (ft⋅in) 1510 (4′11″) G: Undercarriage Length mm (ft⋅in) 2540 (8′4″) H: Undercarriage Width mm (ft⋅in) 1960 (6′5″) I: Sprocket Center to Idler Center mm (ft⋅in) 2000 (6′7″) 400 (1′4″) J: Track Shoe Width mm (ft⋅in) (Rubber Crawler) kPa 27 28 Ground Pressure (kgf/cm2, psi) (0.28, 3.9) (0.29, 4.1) Swing Speed min–1 (rpm) 9.3 (9.3) Travel Speed (fast/slow) km/h (mph) 4.5/2.8 (2.8/1.7) Gradeability Degree (%) 30 (58) NOTE: The dimensions do not include the height of the shoe lug. Weight for the cab version is included air conditioner unit.
T1-1-1
GENERAL / Specifications
ZAXIS50U-2
T1M9-01-01-001
Type Type of Front-End Attachment Bucket Capacity (Heaped) Operating Weight Basic Machine Weight Engine A: B: C: D: E: F: G: H: I:
Overall Width Overall Height Rear-End Swing Radius Minimum Ground Clearance Counterweight Height Engine Cover Height Undercarriage Length Undercarriage Width Sprocket Center to Idler Center
J: Track Shoe Width Ground Pressure Swing Speed Travel Speed (fast/slow) Gradeability
m3 (yd3) kg (lb) kg (lb) kW/min-1 (PS/rpm) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in) kPa (kgf/cm2, psi) min–1 (rpm) km/h (mph) Degree (%)
⋅The above indicates construction for 4-Piller Canopy Version ZAXIS50U-2 2-Piller Canopy 4-Piller Canopy Cab Boom Swing Type 0.16 (0.21) 4610 (10163) 4650 (10251) 4800 (10582) 3520 (7760) 3560 (7848) 3710 (8179) YANMER 4TNV88 29.8/2500 (40.5/2500) 1850 (6′1″) 2540 (8′4″) 2510 (8′3″) 2550 (8’4”) 1000 (3′3″) 335 (1′1″) 605 (1′12″) 1510 (4′11″) 2540 (8′4″) 2000 (6′7″) 2000 (6′7″) 400 (1′4″) (Rubber Crawler) 29 30 (0.3, 4.2) (0.31, 4.4) 9.3 (9.3) 4.5/2.8 (2.8/1.7) 30 (58)
NOTE: The dimensions do not include the height of the shoe lug. Weight for the cab version is included air conditioner unit.
T1-1-2
GENERAL / Specifications WORKING RANGES ZAXIS40U-2
Left Right
T1M9-01-01-002
A: Maximum Digging Reach B: Maximum Digging Depth
mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in)
C: Maximum Cutting Height
mm (ft⋅in)
D: Maximum Dumping Height
mm (ft⋅in)
E: Transport Height (Rubber Crawler) F: Overall Transport Length
mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in)
G: Minimum Swing Radius
mm (ft⋅in)
⋅The above indicates construction for 4-Piller Canopy Version ZAXIS40U-2 2-Piller Canopy 4-Piller Canopy Cab 5750 (18′10″) [6050 (19′10″)] 3350 (10′12″) [3660 (12′0″)] 5600 (18′5″) 5480 (17’12”) [5840 (19′2″)] [5710 (18’9”) 3920 (12′10″) 3810 (12’6”) [4160 (13′8″)] [4040 (13’3”) 2540 (8′4″)
5340 (17′6″) [5380 (17′8″)] 2190 (7′2″) [2330 (7′8″)]
H: Boom-Swing Pivot Offset Distance mm (ft⋅in) I: Blade Bottom Highest Position (above ground level) mm (ft⋅in) J: Blade Bottom Lowest Position (above ground level) mm (ft⋅in) K: Offset Distance Maximum Boom-Swing Angle
2510 (8′3″)
2550 (8’4”) 2270 (7’5”) [2390 (7’10”)
100 (0′4″) 425 (1′5″) 335 (1′1″) L690 (L 2′3″) R860 (R 2′10″) L80°/R60°
mm (ft⋅in) Degree
NOTE: The dimensions do not include the height of the shoe lug. The dimensions for the machine equipped with the long arm are shown in brackets [ ].
T1-1-3
GENERAL / Specifications
ZAXIS50U-2
Left Right
T1M9-01-01-002
A: Maximum Digging Reach B: Maximum Digging Depth
mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in)
C: Maximum Cutting Height
mm (ft⋅in)
D: Maximum Dumping Height
mm (ft⋅in)
E: Transport Height (Rubber Crawler) F: Overall Transport Length
mm (ft⋅in) mm (ft⋅in)
G: Minimum Swing Radius
mm (ft⋅in)
⋅The above indicates construction for 4-Piller Canopy Version ZAXIS50U-2 2-Piller Canopy 4-Piller Canopy Cab 6000 (19′8″) [6250 (20′6″)] 3600 (11′10″) [3860 (12′8″)] 5640 (18’6”) 5770 (18′11″) [6020 (19′9″)] [5870 (19’3”)] 4000 (13’2”) 4100 (13′5″) [4330 (12′3″)] [4200 (13’9”) 2540 (8′4″)
Maximum Boom-Swing Angle
2550 (8’4”)
5460 (17′11″) [5520 (18′1″)] 2150 (7′1″)
H: Boom-Swing Pivot Offset Distance mm (ft⋅in) I: Blade Bottom Highest Position (above ground level) mm (ft⋅in) J: Blade Bottom Lowest Position (above ground level) mm (ft⋅in) K: Offset Distance
2510 (8′3″)
[2260 (7′5″)]
2300 (7’7”) [2340 (7’’8”)
100 (0′4″) 425 (1′5″) 335 (1′1″) L690 (L 2′3″) R860 (R 2′10″) L80°/R60°
mm (ft⋅in) Degree
NOTE: The dimensions do not include the height of the shoe lug. The dimensions for the machine equipped with the long arm are shown in brackets [ ].
T1-1-4
GENERAL / Component Layout MAIN COMPONENTS 31 30 1
29 28 27
2
26 25
3
24
4
23
5
22
6
7 8 9
21
20 19 13
18 17
15
12
11
10
14
16 T1M9-01-02-005
12345678-
Air Cleaner Blade Pilot Valve Front Pilot Valve Pump Device Revolution Sensing Valve Pilot Filter Travel Device Lower Roller
910 11 12 13 14 15 16 -
Back Pressure Valve Swing Device Upper Roller Control Valve Center Joint Track Adjuster 2-Unit Solenoid Valve Front Idler
17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 -
T1-2-1
Travel Pilot Valve Swing Bearing Blade Cylinder Boom Cylinder Bucket Cylinder Arm Cylinder Work Light Boom Swing Cylinder
25 26 27 28 29 30 31 -
Boom Swing Pilot Valve Fuel Tank Tilt-Up Device Hydraulic Oil Tank Battery Reserve Tank Radiator/Oil Cooler
GENERAL / Component Layout ELECTRICAL COMPONENT LAYOUT (Overview)
1 Electrical System (Monitor and Switches) (Refer to T1-2-4.) Electrical System (Controllers and Relays) (Refer to T1-2-3.)
Engine (Refer to T1-2-5.)
2 6
5
Control Valve (Refer to T1-2-6.) T1M9-01-02-007
4 1 - Pilot Shut-Off Switch 2 - Horn
3 - Governor Actuator (EC Motor/Potentio-Sensor) 4 - 2-Unit Solenoid Valve
3 5 - Fuel Level Sensor
T1-2-2
6-
Battery
GENERAL / Component Layout ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (Controllers and Relays) 10 1
2
3
9
4
5
11
12
6
8
7
13
T1M9-01-02-010
T1M9-01-02-003
1 - *Air Conditioner Controller 2 - *Blower Motor Relay (Mid)
5 - *Blower Motor Relay (High) 6 - Starter Relay
3 - *Blower Motor Relay (Low) 4 - *Compressor Relay
7 - Fuse Box
89-
Engine Controller *Displacement Change Relay 10 - Safety Start Relay
NOTE: *: Cab-mounted machine only.
T1-2-3
11 - Horn Relay 12 - 1 Second Timer 13 - Power Relay (Air Heater)
GENERAL / Component Layout ELECTRICAL SYSTEM (Monitor and Switches)
Monitor Panel
Switch Panel (Canopy Version)
9 4
10
1
11
2
3
12
21
13
T1M9-01-02-017
20
Switch Panel (Cab Version)
19
1
14
4 18 3 2 5
17
6
16
7
15 T1M9-01-02-018
T1M9-01-02-002
8
1 - Engine Control Dial 2 - Travel Speed Selector Switch 3 - Work Light Switch 4 - Key Switch 5 - *Wiper Switch
7-
Travel Alarm Deactivation Switch (Optional) 8 - *Air Conditioner Control Panel 9 - Coolant Temperature Gauge 10 - Fuel Gauge
12 - Set Switch
17 - Alternator Indicator
13 - Display Selection Switch
18 - Fuel Level Indicator
14 - Auto-Idle Switch
19 - Overheat Indicator
15 - Fast Travel Indicator
11 - Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)
16 - Preheat Indicator
20 - Engine Oil Pressure Indicator 21 - System Failure Indicator
6 - Auxiliary Flow Selector Switch (Optional)
NOTE: *: Cab-mounted machine only.
T1-2-4
GENERAL / Component Layout ENGINE 6
1
7
5
T1M9-01-02-009
4
3
2
9
T1M9-01-02-008
SWING DEVICE
8
TRAVEL DEVICE 12
13
14
10
11
T1M9-01-02-013 T1M9-01-02-012
1 - Overheat Switch 2 - Fuel Pump 3 - Governor Lever 4 - Engine Oil Pressure Switch
5 - Engine Stop Solenoid 6 - Air Heater 7 - Coolant Temperature Sensor 8 - Starter
9 - Alternator 10 - Relief Valve 11 - Make-Up Valve
T1-2-5
12 - Anti-Cavitation Valve 13 - Counterbalance Valve 14 - Travel Speed Selector Valve
GENERAL / Component Layout CONTROL VALVE 2
3
2-UNIT SOLENOID VALVE
6 4
5
15 1 16
8
7
9 11
10 17
14 12
T1M9-01-02-011
13 T1M9-01-02-016
REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE / PILOT FILTER Pilot Filter
18
AUXILIARY FLOW (OPTIONAL) 20
19
SELECTOR
VALVE
21
T1M9-01-02-006
T1M9-01-02-014
1 - Main Relief Valve 2 - Make-Up Valve (Left Boom Swing) 3 - Overload Relief Valve (Boom Lower) 4 - Overload Relief Valve (Arm Roll-In) 5 - Overload Relief Valve (Bucket Roll-Out) 6 - Overload Relief Valve (Auxiliary)(Optional)
7 - Overload Relief Valve (Auxiliary)(Optional) 8 - Overload Relief Valve (Bucket Roll-In) 9 - Overload Relief Valve (Arm Roll-Out) 10 - Overload Relief Valve (Boom Raise) 11 - Boom Anti-Drift Valve
12 - Differential Reducing Valve 13 - Unload Valve
17 - Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve 18 - Differential Reducing Valve
14 - Auto-Idle Pressure Sensor
19 - Variable Metering Valve
15 - Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid valve 16 - Pilot Relief Valve
20 - Flow Selector Solenoid Valve 21 - Pressure Reducing Valve
T1-2-6
GENERAL / Component Specifications ENGINE Manufacturer ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・YANMER Model・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・4TNV88-NHB Type ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Diesel, 4-Cycle, Water-cooled, Inline, Direct Injection Cyl. No.-Bore×Stroke ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・4 - 88 mm×90 mm (3.47 in×9.63 in) Piston Displacement ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・2189 cm3 (133.5 in3) Rated Output ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・29.8 kW / 2500 min-1 (40.5 PS / 2500 rpm) Compression Ratio ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・19 Dry Weight ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・177 kg (390 lb) Firing Order・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・1-3-4-2 Rotation Direction ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Clockwise (View from fan side) COOLING SYSTEM Cooling Fan ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Dia. 430 mm, 7 Blades, Draw-In Type Fan Pulley Ratio・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Engine rpm×0.92 Thermostat (Atmospheric Pressure) ・・・・・・・・Cracking temp. 71 °C (160 °F) Full open temp. 85 °C (185 °F) Water Pump ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Centrifugal Belt Driven Type LUBRICATION SYSTEM Lubrication Pump Type ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Trochoid Pump Oil Filter ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Full-Flow Paper Element Type STARTING SYSYTEM Motor ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Magnetic Pinion Shift Type (Starter Relay is Separately Placement) Voltage / Output ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・12 V / 2.3 kW PREHEAT SYSMTEM Preheating Method ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Position Type Air Heater (12 V ⋅ 400 W) ENGINE STOP SYSYTEM Stop Method ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Fuel Shut-Off ALTERNATOR Type ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Regulator Integrated AC type Voltage / Output ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・12 V / 55 A FUEL SYSTEM Type ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・YDP-MP Type Governor ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Mechanical All Speed Control Injection Nozzle ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Multi-Injection Hole Type
T1-3-1
GENERAL / Component Specifications PERFORMANCE (as brand new product) IMPORTANT: This list shows design specifications, which are not servicing standards. Lubricant Consumption・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Less than 13.5 mL/hr at Rated Output Fuel Consumption Ratio ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Less than 256 g/kW⋅h (188 g/PS⋅h) at Rated Output Injection Timing ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・18° before T. D. C Maximum Output Torque ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・138±5 N⋅m (14.1±0.5 kgf⋅m) at 1500 min-1 Injection Pressure ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・19.6 MPa (200 kgf/cm2, 2849 psi) Compression Pressure ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・3.43 MPa (35 kgf/cm2, 499 psi) at 250 min-1 Valve Clearance (Inlet/Exhaust) ・・・・・・・・・・・0.15/0.25 mm (when cool) No Load Speed ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Slow: 1200±25 min-1 Fast:2700±25 min-1
T1-3-2
GENERAL / Component Specifications Engine Performance Curve (4NTV88) Test Condition: 1. In conformity with JIS D1005 (Performance Test Method for Diesel Engine Used for Construction Machinery) under standard atmospheric pressure. 2. Equipped with the fan and alternator.
Torque N.m kgf⋅m 150
(15)
125
(13)
100
(10)
-1
138 N⋅m / Approx. 1500 min (14.1 kgf⋅m / Approx. 1500 rpm) Torque
-1
29.8 kW/2500 min (40.5 PS/2500 rpm)
(8) 75 Output kW PS 35 (48)
Fuel Consumption Ratio g/kwh g/PSh 320
(235)
(34)
300
(221)
20
(27)
280
(206)
15
(20)
260
(191)
10
(14)
240
(177)
5
(7)
220
(162)
0
(0)
200
(147)
30
(41)
25
Output
Fuel Consumption Ratio
Engine Speed
min-1(rpm) T1M9-01-03-001
T1-3-3
GENERAL / Component Specifications ENGINE ACCESSORIES RADIATOR ASSEMBLY Type ...............................................................Radiator/Oil Cooler Tandem Type Assembly Radiator Capacity ......................................................... Approx. 1.6 L Cap Opening Pressure .................................. 90 kPa (0.9 kgf/cm2, 13 psi) Weight ............................................................ 4.2 kg (9.3 lb)
Oil Cooler Approx. 1.1 L â&#x2C6;&#x2019; 2.9 kg (6.4 lb)
BATTERY Capacity ......................................................... 55 Ah (5-Hour Rate), 65 Ah (20-Hour Rate) Voltage ........................................................... 12 V Weight ............................................................ 18.5 kg (40.8 lb)
T1-3-4
GENERAL / Component Specifications HYDRAULIC COMPONENT PUMP DEVICE MAIN PUMP (Canopy Type) Model ............................................................. PVK-2B-505-N Type ............................................................... Variable Displacement Swash Plate Pump Maximum Flow (Theoretical Value)................ 125 L/min (33 US gpm)
(Cab Type) PVK-2B-505-CN − −
PILOT PUMP Type ............................................................... Gear Pump Maximum Flow (Theoretical Value)................ 12.5 L/min (3.39 US gpm) CONTROL VALVE Model ............................................................. DPK-T04-9P-BA Type ............................................................... All Pilot Pressure Operated Type Main Relief Set-Pressure ............................... 24.5 MPa (250 kgf/cm2, 3560 psi) Overload Relief Set-Pressure ........................ 26.5 MPa (270 kgf/cm2, 3840 psi) (Boom, Arm, Bucket) SWING DEVICE Type ............................................................... Two-Stage Reduction Planetary Gear Reduction Gear Ratio .................................... 20.615 SWING MOTOR Model ............................................................. MSF-27P Type ............................................................... Swash-Plate Type SWING VALVE UNIT Type ............................................................... Non Counterbalance Valve Type Relief Set-Pressure........................................ 18.1±0.5 MPa (185±5 kgf/cm2, 2631±71 psi) at 30 L/min SWING PARKING BRAKE Type ............................................................... Single-Disc-Wet Negative Type Release Pressure (Full Stroke)...................... 1.5 MPa or less (15 kgf/cm2 or less, 218 psi or less)
T1-3-5
GENERAL / Component Specifications TRAVEL DEVICE Type ...............................................................Two-Stage Reduction Planetary Gear Reduction Gear Ratio ....................................47.406 TRAVEL MOTOR Type ............................................................... Variable Displacement Swash-Plate Piston Motor TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE Type ............................................................... Counter Balance Valve Type TRAVEL PARKING BRAKE Type ............................................................... Single-Disc Wet Negative Type Cracking Pressure for Release ...................... 1.3 MPa (13 kgf/cm2, 189 psi) CYLINDER ZAXIS40U-2 Rod Diameter................................................. Cylinder Bore ................................................. Stroke ............................................................. Fully Retracted Length................................... Plating Thickness ...........................................
Boom (Cab) 55mm 90 mm 691 mm 1076 mm 30 µm or more
Boom (Canopy) 50 mm 90 mm 702 mm 1076 mm ←
50 mm 80 mm 698 mm 1041 mm ←
Rod Diameter................................................. Cylinder Bore ................................................. Stroke ............................................................. Fully Retracted Length................................... Plating Thickness ...........................................
Bucket 40 mm 70 mm 551 mm 840 mm 30 µm or more
Boom Swing 50 mm 90 mm 662 mm 972 mm ←
Blade 50 mm 105 mm 140 mm 503.5 mm ←
Rod Diameter................................................. Cylinder Bore ................................................. Stroke ............................................................. Fully Retracted Length................................... Plating Thickness ...........................................
Boom (Cab) 55 mm 95 mm 691 mm 1083 mm 30 µm or more
Boom (Canopy) 55 mm 95 mm 702 mm 1083 mm ←
50 mm 80 mm 731 mm 1074 mm ←
Rod Diameter................................................. Cylinder Bore ................................................. Stroke ............................................................. Fully Retracted Length................................... Plating Thickness ...........................................
Bucket 45 mm 75 mm 551 mm 840 mm 30 µm or more
Boom Swing 50 mm 90 mm 662 mm 972 mm ←
Blade 50 mm 105 mm 140 mm 503.5 mm ←
ZAXIS50U-2
T1-3-6
Arm
Arm
GENERAL / Component Specifications FRONT ATTACHMENT PILOT VALVE Model ............................................................. HVP06F-040-101 TRAVEL PILOT VALVE Model ............................................................. HVP05U-040-101 (Standard) HVP05U-S-040-101 (Travel Alarm (Optional)) SWING⋅BLADE PILOT VALVE Model ............................................................. HVP05K-040-101 SOLENOID VALVE UNIT (2-Unit Solenoid Valve with Pilot Relief Valve) Relief Set Pressure ........................................ 4.1±0.2 MPa (42±2 kgf/cm2, 597±28 psi) Solenoid Valve ............................................... A Port Side: Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve B Port Side: Travel Mode Solenoid Valve OIL COOLER BYPASS CHECK VALVE Set Pressure .................................................. 0.3 MPa (3.1 kgf/cm2, 44 psi)
T1-3-7
GENERAL / Component Specifications FILTER Filtration Fuel Filter ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・5 µm Air Filter (with mechanical indicator)・・・・・・・・(Indicator Operation Pressure: -6.23 kPa±5%) Full Flow Filter (Paper Type) ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・10 µm Suction Filter・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・(150 Mesh) Pilot Filter ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・10 µm
ELECTRICAL COMPONENT FUEL SENSOR Resistance Value ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Empty : 90 Ω Full : 10 Ω HORN Voltage / Current ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・DC 12 V⋅3 A Sound Pressure ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・108 dB (A) at 2 m ILLUMINATION Output ・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・・Work Light : Halogen 12V·55 W
T1-3-8
SECTION 2
SYSTEM CONTENTS Group 1 Control System Outline ...................................................... T2-1-1 Engine Control .......................................... T2-1-4 Pump Control ............................................ T2-1-8 Other Control.......................................... T2-1-12
Group 2 Hydraulic System Outline ...................................................... T2-2-1 Pilot Circuit................................................ T2-2-2 Main Circuit ............................................... T2-2-8
Group 3 Electrical System Outline ...................................................... T2-3-1 Electric Power Circuit (key Switch : OFF) .................................. T2-3-2 Electric Power Circuit (Key Switch : ON) ................................... T2-3-4 Preheat Circuit (Key Switch : HEAT)......... T2-3-6 Starting Circuit (Key Switch : START) ....... T2-3-8 Charging Circuit (Key Switch : ON) ........ T2-3-10 Engine Stop Circuit (Key Switch : OFF) ............................... T2-3-12
1M9T-2-1
(Blank)
1M9T-2-2
SYSTEM / Control System OUTLINE There are three controllers on this machine: â&#x20AC;˘ Monitor controller â&#x20AC;˘ Engine controller â&#x20AC;˘ Travel alarm controller (optional) Signals from the engine control dial, various sensors, and switches come to respective controllers for processing with logic circuits. Each controller drives the governor actuator, solenoid valve and others; and controls the engine and valve.
T2-1-1
SYSTEM / Control System â&#x20AC;˘ Monitor controller: The monitor controller activates the hour meter, fuel gauge, coolant temperature gauge, etc. by signals from sensors and switches; and turns ON the indicators at the monitor.
â&#x20AC;˘ Engine controller: The engine controller, when receiving signals from the engine control dial, governor actuator, auto-idle pressure sensor and auto-idle switch, drives the governor actuator, and controls engine speed.
â&#x20AC;˘ Travel alarm controller (optional): The travel alarm controller, when receiving signals from the travel pressure sensor, sounds buzzer. Alarming can be cancelled by turning ON the buzzer deactivation switch.
T2-1-2
SYSTEM / Control System
Monitor Controller
Auto-Idle Switch
Auto-Idle Pressure Sensor
Engine Controller
Motor Driver
Engine Control Dial Engine
EC Motor Governor Actuator
T1M9-02-01-001
Governor Lever
Optional
From Fuse #8 Buzzer Deactivation Switch
Travel Alarm Controller Buzzer
Travel Pressure Sensor
T1M9-02-01-006
T2-1-3
SYSTEM / Control System ENGINE CONTROL The engine control has the following functions: • Engine Control Dial Control • Auto-Idle Control
Auto-Idle Switch
Engine Controller
Auto-Idle Pressure Sensor
Motor Driver
Engine Control Dial Engine
EC Motor Governor Actuator
T1M9-02-01-001
Governor Lever
T2-1-4
SYSTEM / Control System Engine Control Dial Control Engine Speed
Function: Controls the engine speed according to the rotational angle of the engine control dial. Operation: The motor driver of the engine controller drives the EC motor of the governor actuator according to the rotational angle of the engine control dial. As a result, the EC motor sets the governor lever in order to control engine speed.
Fast Speed
Slow Speed Slow Idle
Fast Idle
Engine Control Dial Position
Engine Controller
Motor Driver
Engine Control Dial
EC Motor Governor Actuator
T1M9-02-01-002
Governor Lever
T2-1-5
SYSTEM / Control System Auto Idle Control Function: With all control levers in neutral, sets the engine speed to the minimum speed in order to lower fuel consumption and noise level. Operation: 1. Signals from the engine control dial, auto-idle pressure sensor, and governor actuator are sent to the engine controller. 2. When turning ON the auto-idle switch at the monitor, signals from the monitor controller are sent to the engine controller. 3. When moving all control levers to neutral, signal from the auto-idle pressure sensor becomes 2.5 V or less (2.5 MPa or less). 4. About four seconds later, the motor driver of engine controller drives the EC motor of the governor actuator, and sets the engine speed to the auto idle speed (minimum speed). 5. Move one of the control levers. When signals from the auto-idle pressure sensor becomes 2.9 V or more (3.0 MPa or more) by moving a control lever, the engine controller recognizes that the control lever is moving. 6. The engine controller immediately drives the EC motor of the governor actuator to increase the engine speed up to the original engine speed (set by the engine control dial).
Engine Speed
4 seconds later, engine speed is reduced to auto idle speed.
Fast Speed
Auto Idle Speed (Slow Speed)
Auto idle cancellation conditions: â&#x20AC;˘ When moving control lever (Auto-idle pressure sensor signal â&#x2030;§ 2.9 V) â&#x20AC;˘ When changing engine speed with engine control dial
T2-1-6
Slow Idle
Fast Idle
Engine Control Dial Position
SYSTEM / Control System
Auto-Idle Switch
Engine Controller
Auto-Idle Pressure Sensor
Motor Driver
Engine Control Dial Engine
EC Motor Governor Actuator
T1M9-02-01-001
Governor Lever
T2-1-7
SYSTEM / Control System PUMP CONTROL Power-Reduction Control (Cab-mounted Machine Only) Function: With the air conditioner in operation, decreases absorption torque of the main pump, and controls so that the total load to the main pump and compressor does not to exceed the engine horsepower. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION /Pump Device group.)
Flow Rate (Q)
Operation: 1. When turning ON the air conditioner switch, #30 terminal is grounded in the air conditioner controller. 2. When the displacement change relay is excited, current flows from #7 fuse to the torque control solenoid valve, thus switching the torque control solenoid valve. 3. As a result, pressure oil from the pilot pump passes through the control piston in the main pump. 4. The main pump swash plate is subjected to a force from the control piston to reduce its displacement angle. 5. As a result, the absorption torque of the main pump decreases, keeping it below the engine horsepower.
T2-1-8
0
Pressure (P)
SYSTEM / Control System
Air Conditioner Controller
Air Conditioner Switch
Displacement Change Relay Torque Control Solenoid Valve From Fuse #7
Pilot Pump
Main Pump Control Piston
T2-1-9
T1M9-02-01-004
SYSTEM / Control System Auxiliary Flow Selector Control (Only Machine with Optional Equipment) Function: When using the attachment such as a breaker, reduces the oil flow to the attachment by lowering the pilot pressure, thus restricting the operating speed. Also, in the combined control with the spare, controls so as to deliver more flow to other controls than the spare, maintaining the operating speed of the actuator. Operation: • Auxiliary flow selector switch: HIGH (in single operation) 1. When setting the auxiliary flow selector switch to HIGH position, current does not flow through the flow selector solenoid valve, so that the flow selector solenoid valve is not switched. 2. Pressure oil from the pilot pump passes through the flow selector solenoid valve, and acts on the end face (in spring chamber) of the pressure reducing valve. 3. Also, pilot pressure (self-pressure) passing through the pressure reducing valve acts on the end face of the pressure reducing valve. 4. A force, which works to move the pressure reducing valve downward, overcomes the opposite force, thus moving the pressure reducing valve downward. 5. As a result, the pressure reducing valve opens fully, so that pressure oil from the pilot pump flows to the auxiliary pilot valve at the pressure almost similar to the delivery pressure. 6. Thus, pilot pressure corresponding to the lever control force flows toward the auxiliary spool in the control valve, so that the actuator (attachment) operates normally.
NOTE: For operating principle of the auxiliary flow selector valve, refer to “COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure)” group.
• Auxiliary flow selector switch: LOW (in combined operation) 1. When unlocking the auxiliary flow selector switch, and setting it to LOW position, current from #4 fuse flows to the flow selector solenoid valve, thus selecting the flow. 2. Pilot pressure oil flowing through the flow selector solenoid valve is blocked by the spool in the flow selector solenoid valve. Also, pressure oil from the spring chamber in the pressure reducing valve passes through the spool in the flow selector solenoid valve, and flows to the hydraulic oil tank 3. Pilot pressure oil (self-pressure) passing through the pressure reducing valve acts on the end face of the pressure reducing valve. 4. Because the spring chamber in the pressure reducing valve is connected to the hydraulic oil tank, only the spring force works against the pressure acting on the end face of the pressure reducing valve. 5. As a result, the pressure reducing valve moves upward until it becomes balanced with spring force. 6. Thus, pilot pressure is reduced, and pilot pressure oil (at 1.8 MPa) flows into the auxiliary pilot valve. 7. As a result, even when the auxiliary pilot valve moves at full stroke, the moving distance of the spool is shorter than usual, because pilot pressure acting on the spool in the control valve is low. 8. Thus, oil flow to the attachment is reduced, decreasing the speed of the attachment. 9. Also, in combined operation, large quantity of oil flows into other controls than the auxiliary, because the moving distance of the auxiliary spool remains unchanged, thus maintaining the operating speed of the actuator being operated.
T2-1-10
SYSTEM / Control System
Auxiliary Flow Selector Switch: LOW Position From Fuse #4
Auxiliary Pilot Valve
To Attachment
Hydraulic Oil Tank Auxiliary Spool
Spring Flow Selector Solenoid Valve
Pressure Reducing Valve Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve
Control Valve
Main Pump
Pilot Pump T1M9-02-01-013
NOTE: The illustration indicates the system operation when the auxiliary flow selector switch is placed in the LOW position.
T2-1-11
SYSTEM / Control System OTHER CONTROL Travel Alarm Control (only Machine Fitted with Optional Equipment) Function: Makes buzzer sound. Operation: During traveling, travel alarm signal is sent from the travel pressure sensor to travel alarm controller. The travel alarm controller sounds buzzer while receiving this signal. NOTE: To cancel alarming, turn ON the buzzer deactivation switch. Buzzer sounds again when resuming traveling.
From Fuse #8 Buzzer Deactivation Switch
Travel Alarm Controller Buzzer
Travel Pressure Sensor T1M9-02-01-006
T2-1-12
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System OUTLINE The hydraulic system consists of the main circuit and the pilot circuit along with their related items.
â&#x20AC;˘ Pilot Circuit Supplies the pressure oil which is delivered from the pilot pump to the machine operation control circuit, the pump control circuit, the travel mode control circuit, and the swing parking brake release circuit.
â&#x20AC;˘ Main Circuit Controls the pressure oil which is delivered from the main pump to the control valve which in turn drive the cylinders and the hydraulic motors.
T2-2-1
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System PILOT CIRCUIT The pressure oil which is delivered from the pilot pump is supplied to each circuit as is described below.
• Machine Operation Control Circuit Controls the control valve operation. The major components in this circuit are the pilot valves. In response to the control lever stroke, the pilot valve regulates the pressure oil supplied to the spool end in the control valve which in turn control the control valve operation. Also, during boom lowering operation, pressure oil from the pilot valve acts on the boom anti-drift valve and the end face of the spool in the control valve. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.)
• Pump Control Circuit (Flow Rate Control Circuit) Controls the main pump swash angle. This circuit consists of the main pump, the revolution sensing valve, and the control valve differential reducing valve. Oil pressure (PGR) from the revolution sensing valve and oil pressure (PLS) from the control valve differential reducing valve are supplied to both spool ends of the main pump PS valve respectively. The PS valve controls the main pump swash angle in response to the pressure difference between PGR and PLS pressures to regulate the main pump flow rate. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device group.)
• Travel Mode Control Circuit Controls the travel mode. This circuit consists of the travel speed selector switch, the travel speed changeover solenoid valve, and the travel speed selector valve. In response to travel speed selector switch position (Fast↔Slow), the travel speed changeover solenoid valve is shifted so that the travel speed control oil pressure is supplied to the travel motor. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device group.)
T2-2-2
• Swing Parking Brake Release Circuit Releases the swing parking brake. This circuit consists of the pilot shut-off switch, and the pilot shut-off solenoid valve. In response to the pilot control shut-off lever position raise/lower (pilot shut-off switch position (ON↔OFF)), the pilot shut-off solenoid valve is shifted so that the swing parking release oil pressure is supplied to the swing motor. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device group.)
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Pilot Valve (Left) Pilot Valve (Right) Arm Swing
Boom
Travel Pilot Valve
Bucket
Blade Pilot Valve
Boom Swing Pilot Valve
Machine Operation Control Circuit Differential Reducing Valve
Control Valve
Boom Anti-Drift Valve Pressure PLS Swing Parking Brake Valve Pump Control Circuit
Swing Motor Travel Motor (Right)
Swing Parking Brake Release Circuit
Pilot Shut-Off Solenoid Valve
Pressure PGR PS Valve
Travel Speed Selector Valve
Main Pump Pilot Pump
Travel Motor (Left) Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve Travel Mode Control Circuit
2-Unit Solenoid Valve
Revolution Sensing Valve T1M9-02-02-001
T2-2-3
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Machine Operation Control Circuit Controls the control valve operation. The major components in this circuit are the pilot valves. In response to the control lever stroke, the pilot valve regulates the pressure oil supplied to the spool end in the control valve according to the control valve operation. Also, during boom lowering operation, pressure oil from the pilot valve acts on the boom anti-drift valve and the end face of the spool in the control valve. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) NOTE: The boom raise operation is explained here as an example. 1. When the pilot control shut-off lever is lowered, the pilot shut-off switch, located below the pilot control shut-off lever, turns ON, thus switching the pilot shut-off solenoid valve. 2. When the control lever is moved in the boom raise position, the pressure oil from the pilot pump is routed to the right pilot valve via the 2-unit solenoid valve. 3. Then, after being reduced at the pilot valve to the pressure corresponding to the control lever stroke, the pressure oil is supplied to the boom spool end so that the spool is moved in response to the control lever stroke. 4. The pressure oil from main pump (P1) is routed to the boom anti-drift valve via the boom spool. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 5. After passing through the anti-drift valve, the pressure oil is routed to the boom cylinder bottom, extending the boom cylinder so that the boom is raised.
T2-2-4
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Travel Pilot Valve
Pilot Valve (Left) Pilot Valve (Right) Arm Swing
h
f
Boom
e
b
Bucket
ad
j
c
il
Boom Swing Pilot Valve
Blade Pilot Valve
k
o
p
n
m
f
l
o
j
m
b
h
c
e
k
p
i
n
a
g
d
Boom Anti-Drift Valve
Pilot Shut-Off Solenoid Valve
Main Pump Pilot Pump
2-Unit Solenoid Valve T1M9-02-02-002
abcd-
Boom Raise Boom Lower Bucket Roll-In Bucket Roll-Out
efgh-
Left Swing Right Swing Arm Roll-In Arm Roll-Out
ijkl-
T2-2-5
Right Travel Forward Right Travel Reverse Left Travel Forward Left Travel Reverse
mnop-
Right Boom Swing Left Boom Swing Blade Lower Blade Raise
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Pump Control Circuit (Flow Rate Control Circuit) Controls the main pump swash angle. This circuit consists of the main pump, the revolution sensing valve, and the control valve differential reducing valve. Oil pressure (PGR) from the revolution sensing valve and oil pressure (PLS) from the control valve differential reducing valve are supplied to both spool ends of the main pump PS valve respectively. The PS valve controls the main pump swash angle in response to the pressure difference between PGR and PLS pressures to regulate the main pump flow rate. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device group.)
Control Valve
Differential Reducing Valve
Pressure PLS
Pressure PGR PS Valve Main Pump Pilot Pump
Revolution Sensing Valve
T1M9-02-02-003
T2-2-6
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Travel Mode Control Circuit Controls the travel mode. This circuit consists of the travel speed selector switch, the travel speed changeover solenoid valve, and the travel speed selector valve. In response to travel speed selector switch position (Fastâ&#x2020;&#x201D;Slow), the travel speed changeover solenoid valve is shifted so that the travel speed control oil pressure is supplied to the travel motor. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device group.) Swing Parking Brake Release Circuit Releases the swing parking brake. This circuit consists of the pilot shut-off switch, and the pilot shut-off solenoid valve. In response to the pilot control shut-off lever position raise/lower (pilot shut-off switch position (ONâ&#x2020;&#x201D;OFF)), the pilot shut-off solenoid valve is shifted so that the swing parking release oil pressure is supplied to the swing motor. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device group.)
Swing Parking Brake Valve
Swing Motor Travel Motor (Right) Swing Parking Brake Release Circuit
Pilot Shut-Off Solenoid Valve
Travel Speed Selector Valve
Pilot Pump
Travel Motor (Left)
Travel Mode Control Circuit
Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve
2-Unit Solenoid Valve T1M9-02-02-004
T2-2-7
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System MAIN CIRCUIT Neutral Circuit (When the control lever is in neutral) 1. Main pump (P1) draws hydraulic oil from the hydraulic oil tank and delivers it to the control valve. 2. When the control lever is in neutral, the delivered oil is blocked by the control valve spool. Accordingly, oil pressure in the circuit up to the control valve increases. 3. When the oil pressure increases more than the set pressure of the unload valve, the unload valve is unseated. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) NOTE: When the control lever is in neutral, the unload valve set pressure is kept at low pressure. 4. The delivered oil from the main pump is returned to the hydraulic oil tank via the unload valve, back pressure valve and the oil cooler. 5. The back pressure valve, provided in the return line of the main circuit (between control valve and oil cooler), maintains the pressure constant at 0.3 MPa in the main circuit. 6. As a result, the absorption ability of the actuator can be improved in the case of cavitation. 7. When the oil temperature is low (high viscosity), the oil flow resistance to pass through the oil cooler increases. Therefore, the bypass check valve is opened so that the hydraulic oil is returned directly to the hydraulic oil tank without flowing through the oil cooler, allowing the oil temperature to quickly increase.
T2-2-8
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Swing Motor
Travel Blade CylMotor Left inder
Boom Swing Boom Cylinder Cylinder
Travel Motor Right
Arm Cylinder
Bucket Cylinder
Unload Valve
Swing
Travel Left
Blade
Travel Right
Boom Swing
Boom
Pressure Compensator
Arm
Bucket
Auxiliary
Pressure Compensator
Back Pressure Valve Main Pump (P1) Hydraulic Oil Tank Bypass Check Valve
Oil Cooler T1M9-02-02-006
T2-2-9
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Single Operation Circuit (When a control lever is operated) NOTE: The main circuits to drive the cylinders and motors are all identical except when the boom is raised, the boom anti-drift valve is employed. Only the boom raise operation is explained here. 1. The pressure oil from main pump (P1) is routed to the swing, travel (left), blade, travel (right), boom swing, boom, arm, bucket and auxiliary spools in the control valve. 2. When the boom spool is moved, the pressure oil from main pump (P1) is routed to the boom anti-drift valve via the boom spool. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 3. After passing through the boom anti-drift valve, the pressure oil is routed to the boom cylinder bottom, causing the boom to raise.
T2-2-10
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Boom Cylinder
Boom
Boom Anti-Drift Valve
Pressure Compensator
Main Pump (P1) T1M9-02-02-007
T2-2-11
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Combined Operation Circuit (Swing and Boom Combined Operation) NOTE: The swing and boom combined operation is explained here as an example. 1. The pressure oil from main pump (P1) is routed to the swing and boom spools via the pressure compensator in the control valve. The pressure oil from pilot pump (P2) is routed to the differential reducing valve in the control valve. 2. When the swing and boom control levers are operated, the pressure oil from the pilot valves moves the swing and boom spools. 3. The pressure oil from main pump (P1) flows to the swing motor and the boom cylinder via the swing spool and the boom spool. Thereby, the swing function and the boom function are operated. Pump Operation 1. When controlling pump delivery flow rate, the differential reducing valve handles a pressure difference, which is caused between pump delivery pressure and highest load pressure in either boom or swing circuit controlled by lever, as the PLS pressure. NOTE: The PLS pressure, accordingly, varies depending on the load pressure change in the control valve. 2. The PLS pressure delivered from the differential reducing valve is routed to the main pump and the pressure compensators to control their operation. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 3. The main pump flow rate is controlled so that the PLS pressure (the differential pressure in the circuit between before and after the control valve spool) supplied from the differential reducing valve and signal pressure (PGR) delivered from the revolution sensing valve become balance. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device group.) NOTE: Signal pressure (PGR) is used to control the actuator speeds. 4. As mentioned above, the differential reducing valve converts the differential pressure in the circuit between before and after the control valve spool into the PLS pressure and supplies it to control the main pump so that the main pump delivers oil flow meeting the volume the control valve requires (equivalent to the load pressure in the control valve).
T2-2-12
NOTE: Bleed-off (partial pressure) circuit: The pressure compensator for swing constitutes a bleed-off (partial pressure) circuit. PLS pressure itself acts on the pressure compensator in each section, except for only the pressure compensator for swing subjected to the PLS pressure at the throttle. As a result, this slackens the PLS surge pressure caused by switching to a single operation of swing from the combined operation of swing and boom (other actuator). This also slackens a shock caused by swing speed change when switching to a single operation of swing.
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System
Differential Reducing Valve Swing Motor Orifice
Bleed-Off Circuit (Partial Pressure Circuit)
Boom Cylinder
Pressure PLS
Swing Spool
Pressure Compensator
Revolution Sensing Valve
Boom Spool
Pressure PGR
Main Pump (P1)
Pilot Pump (P2) T1M9-02-02-008
T2-2-13
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Differential Reducing Valve Operation 1. The load pressure from the boom cylinder and the swing motor acts on the shuttle valve. 2. When load pressure (PL) from the boom cylinder is higher than load pressure (PL) from the swing motor, load pressure (PL) from the boom cylinder passes the shuttle valve. 3. That is, maximum load pressure (PLMAX) from among the spools is routed to the differential reducing valve. 4. Delivery pressures (P1 and P2) from main pump (P1) and pilot pump (P2) are also routed to the differential reducing valve. 5. According to maximum load pressure (PLMAX) from the actuators, the differential reducing valve control the PLS pressure and supplies the controlled PLS pressure to the main pump and the pressure compensator. (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 6. The pressure relationship between PLS, pump delivery pressure (P1) and PLMAX acting on the differential reducing valve is described in the following formula: Pressure PLS = Pressure P1 – Pressure PLMAX 7. The differential reducing valve outputs pressure PLS equivalent to the differential pressure between pump delivery pressure (P1) and maximum actuator load pressure (PLMAX). 8. Depending on change in pressure PLS from the differential reducing valve, the pump control operation is performed.
Pressure Compensator Operation 1. As the swing motor load decreases, pressure (PL) after the spool is reduced, causing differential pressure (PLS) between, before and after the spool to increase. 2. As the boom cylinder load increases, pressure (PL) after the spool is raised, causing differential pressure (PLS) between, before and after the spool to decrease. 3. Both spool before pressure (PIN) and after pressure (PL) are always routed to the pressure compensator. In addition, pressure PLS from the differential reducing valve is acting on the differential reducing valve as the target differential pressure. 4. The pressure compensator operates so as to satisfy the relationship between pressures (PIN, PL, and PLS) as shown in the following formula: Pressure PIN = Pressure PL + Pressure PLS (Refer to COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve group.) 5. When the swing motor load is light, high hydraulic oil pressure to drive the swing motor is not required. When the boom cylinder load is heavy, high hydraulic oil pressure is required to drive the boom cylinder. 6. Under this condition, each pressure compensator operates as described below, allowing the main pump to supply more hydraulic oil to the actuator which requires more hydraulic oil. • As differential pressure (PLS) between before spool pressure (PIN) and after spool pressure (PL) in the swing circuit is large, the pressure compensator is pushed by before spool pressure (PIN), causing the pressure compensator to move to the left. Thereby, the pressure compensator closes the opening port area, restricting the main hydraulic oil flow to the swing spool via the pressure compensator. • As differential pressure (PLS) between before spool pressure (PIN) and after spool pressure (PL) in the boom circuit is small, the pressure compensator is pushed by after spool pressure (PL + PLS), causing the pressure compensator to move to the right. Thereby, the pressure compensator open the opening port area wider, allowing the main hydraulic oil to flow more to the boom spool via the pressure compensator.
T2-2-14
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System Differential Reducing Valve
Swing Motor (Load: Light)
Shuttle Valve
Boom Cylinder (Load: Heavy)
Pressure Compensator
Pressure PIN
Pressure PL
Pressure PLS Pressure PIN
Pressure PL
Pressure PLS
Pressure Compensator
Main Pump (P1)
Pilot Pump T1M9-02-02-009
T2-2-15
SYSTEM / Hydraulic System (Blank)
T2-2-16
SYSTEM / Electrical System OUTLINE The electrical system is roughly classified into the main circuit and the monitor circuit.
The main functions and construction of the main circuit are outlined here:
• Main Circuit
• Power Circuit: Supplies electrical power to all elec-
Operates the engine and accessory circuits.
trical systems on the machine. (including key switch, battery, fuse box and slow blow fuse)
• Monitor Circuit Consists of the monitors, sensors, and switches to display machine operating conditions.
• Indicator Light Check Circuit: Checks for burned monitor indicators. (including key switch, fuse box and controller)
• Accessory Circuit: Works with the key switch ON. (including key switch, fuse box and controller)
• Preheating Circuit: Heats air before the inhalation into the manifold to help the engine to start in cold climate. (including key switch, air heater)
• Engine Starting Circuit: Starts the engine. (including key switch, starter and starter relay)
• Charging Circuit: Supplies all electric power to onboard systems and recharges the batteries. (including alternator and battery)
• Engine Stop Circuit: Stops the engine with the stop solenoid. (including stop solenoid and alternator)
T2-3-1
SYSTEM / Electrical System POWER CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: OFF) The battery negative terminal is grounded to the vehicle frame. When key switch is in OFF position, power is supplied only to the monitor (hour meter) and memory backup circuit. NOTE: The horn can be honked when key switch is in OFF position.
Battery
Slow Blow Fuse
→ Fuse Box Terminal #19
Key Switch
→ → → →
Monitor Terminal #M1-2 Radio Circuit (Optional) Air Conditioner Circuit (Optional) Horn Relay
Monitor
Slow Blow Fuse
M1-2 12V Battery
Radio Circuit (Optional)
Fuse Box
19
1
2
Horn Relay Air Conditioner Circuit (Optional)
3
5
1
2
Horn Horn Switch
T1M7-02-03-001
T2-3-2
SYSTEM / Electrical System (Blank)
T2-3-3
SYSTEM / Electrical System POWER CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: ON) 1. When the key switch is turned to the ON position, terminal B is connected to terminals BR, R2 and the ACC terminal in the key switch. 2. Current from key switch terminal BR flows via the fuse #3 to the pilot shut-off switch. 3. The pilot shut-off switch is turned on by pressing the pilot shut-off lever down. 4. When the pilot shut-off switch is in ON position, the solenoid valve is activated and pilot pressure oil is led to the pilot valve through the solenoid valve. Thus the machine is ready to be controlled by the control lever. 5. Current from key switch terminal R2 flows via the fuse box to operate the work light switch, washer switch, room light switch, wiper switch, radio circuit, air conditioner circuit and to supply auxiliary power. 6. Current from key switch terminal ACC flows via the fuse box to operate the buzzer (monitor), alternator, starting circuit, fuel pump, auto-idle circuit, engine stop circuit, travel alarm circuit, travel speed selector circuit and to supply auxiliary power. 7. Current from the fuse box is supplied to the terminal #M1-1 on the monitor and operate the monitor.
T2-3-4
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Key Switch
Monitor
Slow Blow Fuse
19
12V Battery
20
Fuse Box 1 2 3
21 22
M1-1 M1-2
M1-10
5 6 7 8 9
M2-6
BZ
Buzzer Alternator
B IG
Horn Relay 3
5
1
2
Horn Horn Switch
Work Light Switch 2
3
Pilot Shut-Off Pilot Shut-Off Switch Solenoid Valve
Work Light
Washer Motor M Wiper Motor
Washer Switch Starting Circuit Wiper Switch
S Radio Circuit (Optional)
Room Light Switch
M L
Room Light
P
Fuel Pump
Air Conditioner Circuit (Optional)
Travel Alarm Circuit (Optional)
Auto-Idle Circuit
Travel Speed Selector Circuit
Engine Stop Circuit
T1M7-02-03-002
T2-3-5
SYSTEM / Electrical System PREHEATING CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: HEAT) 1. When the key switch is turned to the HEAT position, terminal B is connected to terminals BR and R1 inside the key switch. 2. Current from terminal R1 flows to the air heater and terminal #M1-12 of the monitor. 3. The air heater heats air before the inhalation into the engine when electric current is supplied to the air heater. NOTE: When key switch is in START position, electric current from the terminal R1 on the key switch continues to be supplied to the air heater and the monitor. Thus the starter is activated with the air heater on. NOTE: The monitor lights the glow signal for 15 seconds.
T2-3-6
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Key Switch
Monitor
Slow Blow Fuse
M1-12 12V Battery
Air Heater
M1-2
19
2
T1M7-02-03-003
T2-3-7
SYSTEM / Electrical System STARTING CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: START POSITION) 1. When the key switch is turned to the START position, terminal B is connected to terminals BR, R1, C, and ACC in the key switch. 2. The current from the ACC terminal in key switch is supplied to the terminal #4 on starter relay, terminal IG on alternator, stop solenoid holding side, terminal #3 on 1-second timer, auto-idle circuit and fuel pump. 3. When electric current from the terminal ACC is supplied to the terminal #3 on the 1 second timer, electric current from the terminal #2 on the 1 second timer is supplied to the terminal #3 and #4 on the power relay and the terminal #1 on the 1 second timer, and activates the power relay for 1 second. 4. Consequently, electric current from the terminal #1 on the fuse box is sent to the absorbing side of the stop solenoid through the terminals #2 and #1 on the power relay. 5. Thus, the solenoid moves to the engine start position and the control rack is activated (the engine is ready to start.) 6. The terminal L on the alternator is grounded when the alternator is not or slowly rotating. Thus, the terminals #1-13 are grounded through the terminal L on the alternator, and the alternator indicator lights. 7. Electric current from the terminal R1 on key switch is supplied to the air heater and the terminal #M1-12 on the monitor. 8. Electric current from the terminal BR on key switch is supplied to the pilot shut-off switch through the fuse box. The pilot shut-off switch is turned on by pressing the pilot shut-off lever down, and turned off by pulling the pilot shut-off lever up. The pilot shut-off switch must be turned off when the engine starts. 9. When the pilot shut-off switch is turned off, electrical current from the terminal BR on key switch supplied to the terminal #1 on the safety start relay through the fuse box is stopped. Thus, the safety start relay is turned off. 10. When the safety start relay is turned off, the contact between the terminals #3 and #4 becomes on, and electric current from the terminal C on key switch is supplied to the terminal #3 on the starter relay through the terminals #3 and #4 on the safety start relay. Thus, the starter relay magnetize the inside coil, and make the contact between the terminals #1 and #2.
11. Electric current from the battery is supplied to the terminal S on the starter through the slow blow fuse and the terminals #2 and #1 on the starter relay. 12. Electric current from the battery is supplied to the starter through the contact point of the terminal B on the relay and thus, the starter rotates. 13. When the engine is running, the alternator generates electricity and the voltage of the terminals P and B on the alternator increase. 14. An alternating current is supplied from the terminal P on the alternator to the terminal #6 on the starter relay. The voltage of the current is relational to the rotating speed of the alternator. When the rotation speed of the alternator reaches 1350Âą210/min-1, the starter relay stops to magnetize the inside coil. 15. Thus, the contact between the terminals #1 and #2 is cut off. Then, the electrical current to the starter is stopped, and the starter stops.
T2-3-8
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Monitor
Key Switch
M1-12
Slow Blow Fuse
M1-13
19 20
22 23 Fuse Box
2
Starter Relay
Safety Start Relay
4 6
12V Battery
4
3
1
3
9
10
3
2
1
1
Pilot Shut-Off Switch
B
S
Air Heater
Relay P M
ALT
Engine
B L
Alternator
IG Starter EC Motor
Engine Stop Solenoid
M Fuel Pump
Power Relay
Hold
P
1 3
Pull
1
Auto-Idle Circuit
2 4 2
1 Second 3 Timer
T1M7-02-03-004
T2-3-9
SYSTEM / Electrical System CHARGING CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: ON) 1. The key switch is automatically returned to the ON position upon releasing it after the engine starts. With the key switch ON, terminal B is connected to terminals BR, R2 and ACC in the key switch. 2. Current from the terminal ACC on key switch is supplied to the terminal IG on the alternator to power the regulator. 3. When the engine is running, the alternator generates electricity and the ground of the terminal L on the alternator is released. Thus, the alternator indicator goes off. 4. A direct current is supplied from the terminal B on the alternator to the battery and each circuit through the slow blow fuse. The voltage of the current is constant, and not relational to the rotating speed of the alternator.
T2-3-10
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Key Switch
Monitor
Slow Blow Fuse M1-13 19
22
12V Battery
Fuse Box L
Alternator
B IG T1M7-02-03-005
T2-3-11
SYSTEM / Electrical System ENGINE STOP CIRCUIT (KEY SWITCH: OFF) 1. When the key switch is turned from the ON position to the OFF position, key switch terminal B is disconnected from terminals BR, R2 and ACC in the key switch. 2. Current to the each circuit from key switch terminal R2 and ACC are stopped. 3. Current to the holding side of the stop solenoid from key switch terminal BR is stopped, deactivating the stop solenoid. Then, the control rack is moved by spring force to the stop position. Therefore, the fuel is not supplied, causing the engine to stop. NOTE: Surge voltage to be developed when stopping the engine does not arise because the alternator generation circuit is directly connected to the battery. (The batteries function as a condenser.)
T2-3-12
Fuel Dropping Direction
Control Rack
Engine Stop Solenoid
Governor T1M7-02-03-007
SYSTEM / Electrical System
Key Switch
19
22
Fuse Box
Engine Stop Solenoid
1
9
Hold Pull
2 Power Relay 4
1 3 1
2 1 Second Timer
3
START ON Key Switch Position
OFF
ACC Terminal Output
OFF
ON OFF
ON (12V)
OFF
1 sec ON
1 Second Timer Output
OFF
OFF
HOLD
12V
Engine Stop Solenoid Input Voltage
0V 12V
PULL
0V T1M7-02-03-006
T2-3-13
SYSTEM / Electrical System (Blank)
T2-3-14
SECTION 3
COMPONENT OPERATION CONTENTS Group 1 Pump Device
Group 5 Pilot Valve
Outline ...................................................... T3-1-1
Outline...........................................................T3-5-1
Main Pump P1........................................... T3-1-4
Operation ......................................................T3-5-4
Power Control........................................... T3-1-5
Shockless Function
Flow Rate Control...................................... T3-1-6 PS Valve ................................................... T3-1-7
(Only for Travel Pilot Valve).......................T3-5-12 Shuttle Valve (Only for Travel Pilot Valve).......................T3-5-13
Group 2 Revolution Sensing Valve Outline ...................................................... T3-2-1 Operation .................................................. T3-2-4
Group 6 Travel Device Outline...........................................................T3-6-1 Travel Reduction Gear ..................................T3-6-2
Group 3 Swing Device Outline ...................................................... T3-3-1 Swing Motor .............................................. T3-3-2 Parking Brake............................................ T3-3-3 Valve Unit...................................................... T3-3-4 Swing Reduction Gear ................................. T3-3-6
Travel Motor ..................................................T3-6-3 Travel Brake Valve ........................................T3-6-4 Parking Brake ...............................................T3-6-8
Group 7 Others (Upperstructure) 2-Unit Solenoid Valve....................................T3-7-1 Pilot Relief Valve ...........................................T3-7-3
Group 4 Control Valve Outline ...................................................... T3-4-1 Hydraulic Circuit ........................................... T3-4-6 Main Relief Valve.......................................... T3-4-8
Back Pressure Valve.....................................T3-7-3 Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve (Optional).......T3-7-4
Group 8 Others (Undercarriage)
Overload Relief Valve ................................... T3-4-9
Swing Bearing ...............................................T3-8-1
Make-Up Valve ........................................... T3-4-10
Center Joint...................................................T3-8-2
Boom Anti-Drift Valve.................................. T3-4-12
Track Adjuster ...............................................T3-8-4
Unload Valve .............................................. T3-4-14 Differential Reducing Valve ........................ T3-4-16 Pressure Compensator .............................. T3-4-18
1M9T-3-1
(Blank)
1M9T-3-2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device OUTLINE The pump device consists of main pump P1 and pilot pump P2 and is directly driven by the engine. Main pump (P1) is a swash plate type variable displacement axial plunger pump and supplies high-pressure oil to operate the actuators via the control valve. Pilot pump (P2) is a gear pump and supplies pressure oil to the pilot circuit.
Main Pump P1 Pilot Pump P2
T1M9-03-01-001
T3-1-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Hydraulic Diagram 13
1
2
12
3
14 11
4
10
9
5
8
6
7
T1M9-03-01-002
1 - Port PLS (from control valve differential reducing Valve) 2 - Port PA 3 - Valve PS 4 - Port PGR (from revolution sensing valve)
5 - Port P1 (to control valve)
9 - Spring
13 - *Port PC (from torque control solenoid valve)
6 - Port P2 (to pilot filter) 7 - Swash Plate 8 - Port S1 (from hydraulic oil tank)
10 - Plunger
14 - *Piston
11 - Control Piston 12 - Orifice
NOTE: *:Cab Version machines (equipped with the air-conditioner) only are provided with these items.
T3-1-2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device C
A
B
1 2 C
T1M9-03-01-003
D
View A
View B
13 5
6
4
9
Cross Section C-C
D
8
T1LD-03-01-004
T1M9-03-01-007
Cross Section D-D
14
3
7
10
11
12
T1M9-03-01-006 T1M9-03-01-005
NOTE: The above indicates construction of the pump for Cab Version machines.
T3-1-3
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device MAIN PUMP P1 Supplies pressure oil to the main circuit. The cylinder block is splined to the shaft. The plungers are inserted in the cylinder block. When the engine rotates, the shaft is driven so that the cylinder block is rotated together with plungers. The plunger slides along the shoe plate while oscillating in the cylinder block due to tilt of the swash plate, drawing and delivering oil. Shoe Plate
Plunger
Cylinder Block
Shaft
T1M9-03-01-004
Swash Plate
T3-1-4
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device POWER CONTROL Purpose: Controls the oil flow rate from main pump P1 so that the total power to drive main pump P1 and pilot pump P2 doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t exceed the engine power. Operation: 1. When the main pump P1 delivery oil pressure increases more than the load pressure, the increased pressure acts on the plunger. 2. The pressure force on the plunger pushes the swash plate around the oscillation pin until the pressure force increases to balance with the spring force. 3. Then, main pump (P1) decreases the delivery oil flow rate. 4. Accordingly, depending on the own delivery oil pressure, the delivery oil flow rate from main pump (P1) is controlled so that the total power to drive main pump P1 and pilot pump P2 is maintained lower than the engine power.
Spring
Spring Force
Oscillation Pin
Swash Plate
Plunger
T3-1-5
T1M9-03-01-004
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device FLOW RATE CONTROL Purpose: Controls the pump delivery flow rate in response to change in loads to the cylinders and the motors. NOTE: Both pressure PGR (varies in response to change in the engine speed) from the revolution sensing valve and pressure PLS (varies depending on the load pressure in the control valve) from the control valve differential reducing valve act on the PS valve. Until pressure PGR becomes equal with pressure PLS, the PS valve operates to regulate the pump delivery flow rate.
Operation: 1. The pressure oil from the PS valve is routed to the control piston via the orifice, causing the control piston to push the swash plate. 2. The swash plate is moved to tilt until the control piston force becomes to balance with the plunger swash plate pushing force. (Refer to POWER CONTROL on page T3-1-5.) 3. The delivery flow rate from main pump P1 varies. 4. As the delivery flow rate from main pump P1 varies, the pressure oil supplied to the control valve varies. 5. As pressure oil supplied to the control valve varies, pressure PLS from the differential reducing valve varies. 6. When pressure PLS and PGR, both are routed to the PS valve on the main pump, become equal, the main pump swash plate stops tilting. (Cab Version machines only) 7. If the air conditioner is switched ON, the PC pressure is sent, and the piston pushes back the swash plate, lowering the pump absorption torque.
Piston
PC Pressure
Plunger
Spring Force
Orifice
PS Valve
Swash Plate
Control Piston
T3-1-6
T1M9-03-01-006
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device PS VALVE Construction / Function The PS valve consists of the springs, the spool, and the sleeve. The PS valve controls the main pump delivery flow rate in response to the oil pressure signals in the following.
• Pressure PGR (varies in proportion to the engine speed) from the revolution sensing valve. (Refer to the revolution sensing valve group in this section.)
• Pressure PLS (varies in response to the pressure change from the actuators) from the control valve differential reducing valve. The PS valve controls the main pump delivery flow rate in response to change in pressure difference between pressures PGR and PLS.
Operation: 1. Signal pressures (PGR and PLS) are routed on both ends of the spool in the PS valve, moving the spool to either the right or the left. 2. Then, the oil ports on the PS valve are shifted. 3. In response to shifting of the oil ports, the oil pressure routed from the PS valve to the control piston in the main pump varies. 4. Then, the swash plate tilt angle is changed so that the delivery flow rate from main pump P1 is controlled. • Pressure PGR > Pressure PLS (Actuator loads have increased): The delivery flow rate from main pump P1 is increased. • Pressure PGR < Pressure PLS (Actuator loads have decreased): The delivery flow rate from main pump P1 is reduced. 5. When the actuator load increases, more oil flow is required to drive the actuator so that the PS valve increases the pump delivery flow rate. When the actual load decreases, the pump delivery flow rate is reduced.
Cross Section A-A A
Spring
PS Valve
A
T1M9-03-01-001
T3-1-7
Spring
Spool
Sleeve
T1M9-03-01-005
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Main Pump Delivery Flow Rate Increase (When a control lever is operated:) 1. Pressure PGR from the revolution sensing valve and pressure PLS from the control valve differential reducing valve are routed to chamber A (6) and B (4) in the PS valve respectively. 2. When the actuator load increases, pressure PLS becomes lower than pressure PGR (Pressure PLS < Pressure PGR). Therefore, the pressure force in chamber A (6) overcomes spring B (3) in chamber B (4) so that spool (5) is moved toward chamber B (4). 3. Then, the oil port on control piston (10) is connected to the pump suction port via PS valve spool (5) and sleeve (2), releasing the oil pressure behind control piston (10) to the pump suction port. The pilot pump delivery pressure port is blocked by PS valve spool (5). 4. The pilot oil pressure from pilot pump (P2) is routed to port PA. 5. The oil port to control piston (10) is connected to the pump suction port via PS valve spool (5) and sleeve (2). Accordingly, the oil pressure behind the control piston (10) is released to the pump suction port. 6. Although the oil pressure in the pump suction port acts on control piston (10), as it is a suction oil pressure, its pressure force cannot overcome spring (1) force in the main pump. Accordingly, control piston (10) is moved toward chamber C (9).
T3-1-8
7. The oil in chamber C (9) of control piston (10) is routed to the pump suction port via orifice (8). Since swash plate (11) is moved by spring (1) force, the tilting angle increases, causing the main pump delivery flow rate to increase. NOTE: Orifice (8) is provided to prevent swash plate (11) from being suddenly moved. Therefore, swash plate (11) is smoothly moved.
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device 2
Oil pressure from pilot pump (PA)
1
PS Valve
11
10
9
Pressure PGR
8
7
T1M9-03-01-004
P1
PA
Pressure PGR
6
5
Pump Suction Port
T1M9-03-01-005
4
3
Pressure PLS
7 5 3 PS Valve
4 8 9 Increase
10
Decrease
T1LD-03-01-008
11
1 - Spring 2 - Sleeve 3 - Spring B
4 - Chamber B 5 - Spool 6 - Chamber A
6
1
7 - Spring A 8 - Orifice 9 - Chamber C
T3-1-9
10 - Control Piston 11 - Swash Plate
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Main Pump Delivery Flow Rate Decrease (When a control lever is operated:) 1. Pressure PGR from the revolution sensing valve and pressure PLS from the control valve differential reducing valve are routed to chamber A (6) and B (4) in the PS valve respectively. 2. When the actuator load decreases, pressure PLS becomes higher than pressure PGR (Pressure PLS > Pressure PGR). Therefore, the pressure force in chamber B (4) overcomes spring A (7) in chamber A (6) so that spool (5) is moved toward chamber A (6). 3. Then, the oil port to control piston (10) is connected to pump delivery pressure port (PA) via PS valve spool (5) and sleeve (2). The pump suction port is blocked by PS valve spool (5). 4. The pilot oil pressure from pilot pump (P2) is routed to port PA. 5. When pilot pump delivery pressure delivered into chamber C (9) in control piston (10) overcomes spring (1) force, swash plate (11) is moved against spring (1) so that the main pump flow rate is reduced. NOTE: Orifice (8) is provided to prevent swash plate (11) from being suddenly moved. Therefore, swash plate (11) is smoothly moved. (Cab Version machines only) 6. If the air conditioner is switched ON, the PC pressure is sent to the pump from the torque control solenoid valve. 7. As the PC pressure pushes plunger (12), swash plate (11) slightly moves toward low tilting angle, and lowers the pump absorption torque. 8. With this, occurrence of engine stall can be prevented in the heavy load condition with the air conditioner ON.
T3-1-10
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Oil pressure from pilot Pump (PA)
12
2
1
PC Pressure
PS Valve
11
10
9
Pressure PGR
8
7
T1M9-03-01-006
P1
Pressure PGR
PA
6
Pressure PLS
5
Pump Suction Port
T1M9-03-01-005
4
3
Pressure PC
7 5 3 PS Valve
4 8 9 10 Increase Decrease
T1M9-03-01-008
11
6
1
12
NOTE: The above indicates construction of the pump for Cab Version machines. 1 - Spring 2 - Sleeve 3 - Spring B
4 - Chamber B 5 - Spool 6 - Chamber A
7 - Spring A 8 - Orifice 9 - Chamber C
T3-1-11
10 - Control Piston 11 - Swash Plate 12 - Piston
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Main Pump Flow Rate Minimization (When control levers are in neutral:) 1. When all control valve spools are in neutral (all control levers are in neutral), the system oil pressure after the control valve spools is zero. Therefore, pressure PLMAX (zero) from the main circuit after the spools is routed to the differential reducing valve at this time. 2. When the control valve spools are in neutral, the unload valve is unseated if the main pump delivery pressure increases more than spring force. Accordingly, the main pump oil pressure routed to the differential reducing valve is equal to the unload valve operation pressure (spring force). 3. As the unload valve operation pressure is higher than pressure PLMAX (zero), the differential reducing valve is moved to the left. Then, after reducing the pilot pressure to the unload valve operation pressure, the differential reducing valve delivers it as pressure PLS.
4. Pressure PLS from the differential reducing valve and pressure PGR from the revolution sensing valve are routed to the main pump PS valve. Since pressure PLS is higher than pressure PGR, spool (5) is moved to the left, causing the main pump to reduce the delivery flow rate. (Refer to this group in this section.) 5. Pilot pump delivery pressure (PA) is supplied to the PS valve. 6. Pilot pump delivery pressure (PA) is routed into chamber C (9) in control piston (10) and overcomes spring (1) force. Accordingly, control piston (10) is moved toward swash plate (11) so that swash plate (11) is held in the minimum flow rate position. Thereby, the main pump maintains the minimum flow rate.
Pilot Pressure
Differential Reducing Valve
Unload Valve
Spring
Pressure PLMAX (Zero)
(Unload Valve Operation Pressure) Pressure PLS
T3-1-12
Main Pump Delivery Pressure T1M9-03-01-009
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device Oil pressure from pilot pump (PA)
1
PS Valve
11
10
Pressure PGR
9
5
T1M9-03-01-004
P1
Pressure PGR
PA
Pump Suction Port
Pressure PLS T1M9-03-01-005
Pressure PLS
5
PS Valve
9 Increase
10
Decrease
T1LD-03-01-010
11
1 - Spring 2 - Sleeve 3 - Spring B
4 - Chamber B 5 - Spool 6 - Chamber A
1
7 - Spring A 8 - Orifice 9 - Chamber C
T3-1-13
10 - Control Piston 11 - Swash Plate
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pump Device (Blank)
T3-1-14
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve OUTLINE The revolution sensing valve converts change in the pilot pump delivery flow rate to signal pressure (PGR) to be used for controlling the pump flow rate. (The pilot pump is a fixed displacement pump so that the delivery flow rate changes directly in proportion to the engine speed.) The revolution sensing valve is located in the pilot circuit between the pilot pump and the solenoid valve. In response to change in the engine speed, the pressure PGR is routed to the main pump swash angle control system from port PGR to regulate the pump tilt angle. The revolution sensing valve consists of the variable metering valve and the differential reducing valve. Revolution Sensing Valve
Port PPLO
Port PPHI
Variable Metering Valve
Differential Reducing Valve
T566-03-02-001
Port DR A View A
T566-03-02-003
Port PGR
T3-2-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve Hydraulic Circuit Diagram 3
2
4 1 5
T1M9-03-02-001
7
1 - Port PPLO (to solenoid valve unit, main pump and torque control solenoid valve (to torque control solenoid valve for Cab version only)) 2 - Port PGR (to main pump)
6
3 - Differential Reducing Valve
5 - Port PPHI (from pilot filter)
4 - Port DR (to hydraulic tank)
6 - Variable Metering Valve
T3-2-2
7 - Orifice
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve 1
5
4
T566-03-02-001
View A
A
2
B
B T566-03-02-003
Cross Section B-B
7 6
3 T566-03-02-002
2
T3-2-3
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve OPERATION Spool (3), piston (7), and spool (8) are illustrated in the position when the engine is stopped. Spool (3) is pushed by spring (2) to the right. Both spring (6) force and spring (9) force are identical to so that piston (7) and spool (8) are held in the position illustrated. 1
2
3
4
Port PPHI
Variable Metering Valve Port PPLO
Differential Reducing Valve
Port PGR
11
1 - Sleeve 2 - Spring 3 - Spool
10
4 - Orifice 5 - Guide 6 - Spring
9
8
Port DR 7 - Piston 8 - Spool 9 - Spring
T3-2-4
T566-03-02-002
7
6
5
10 - Spring Seat 11 - Sleeve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve (Blank)
T3-2-5
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve While the Engine is Running (Output Diagram: between A and B) 1. When the engine speed increases, the differential pressure between the front and the rear of orifice (4) changes in proportion to the engine speed. 2. Spool (8) and piston (7) in the differential reducing valve are moved so that the pressure force balance satisfies the formula of “Pressure PGR × Area S3 + Pressure PPLO × Area S2 = Pressure PPHI × Area S1.” Thereby, pressure PGR becomes equal to the differential pressure between the front and the rear of orifice (4) (Pressure PPHI – Pressure PPLO) For example: (1) When pressure PGR × Area S3 + Pressure PPLO × Area S2 > Pressure PPHI × Area S1, spool (8) is moved to the right, pressure PGR is drained through notch D, reducing pressure PGR. (2) When pressure PGR × Area S3 + Pressure PPLO × Area S2 < Pressure PPHI × Area S1, piston (7) and spool (8) are moved to the left so that port PPLO is opened at notch C, allowing pressure PGR to increase. Repetition of operations (1 and 2) maintains the pressure balance “ Pressure PGR × Area S3 = Pressure PPHI × Area S1 - Pressure PPLO × Area S2.” Since S1= S2 = S3, the relation of “Pressure PGR = Pressure PPHI – Pressure PPLO” is maintained. 3. The opening area of notch C varies depending on the engine speed. Therefore pressure PGR at port PGR varies depending on the engine speed. This process corresponds to the points between A and B on the output diagram. 4. While the engine is running, the pressure oil from the pilot pump routed into port PPHI flows into orifice (4) and onto variable metering valve spool (3). 5. In proportion to the engine speed, pressure PPHI and pressure PPLO vary due to orifice (4) together with the pilot pump (fixed displacement) delivery flow rate. When the engine speed is between points A and B, spool (3) receive pressure PPLO and spring (2) force. When pressure PPLO is still high, the spring force and pressure PPLO is larger than pressure force PPHI so that spool (3) remains closed.
T3-2-6
6. The differential pressure between ports PPHI and PPLO decides whether spool (8) is moved to the left or to the right. Accordingly, the differential reducing valve operation regulates pressure PGR at port PGR corresponding to the pressure differences between points A and B on the output diagram.
Pressure PGR (Pressure at Output Port)
B
A
Engine Speed Min.
Max.
Output Diagram
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve
2
Port PPLO (Pressure PPLO)
3
Port PPHI (Pressure PPHI)
4
Variable Metering Valve Section C Section D
Chamber (b)
Chamber (a)
11
9
Port PGR (Pressure PGR)
8
7
Hydraulic Oil Tank
T566-03-02-008
S3
S2
S1 Port PPLO (Pressure PPLO)
Port PPHI (Pressure PPHI)
Section D Section C
Differential Reducing Valve
Port PGR (Pressure PGR) 2 - Spring 3 - Spool
4 -11Orifice 8 - Spool
8
9 - Spring
T3-2-7
T566-03-02-009
11 - Sleeve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve While the Engine is Running (Output Diagram: between B and C) 1. While the engine is running, the pressure oil from the pilot pump is routed into port PPHI flows into orifice (4) and onto variable metering valve spool (3). 2. When the differential pressure between pressure PPHI and Pressure PPLO increases more than the specified valve, the oil pressure at port PPHI overcomes spring (2) force, moving spool (3) to the left. 3. When spool (3) is moved to the left, some pressure oil from port PPHI is bypassed through notch (d) on variable metering valve spool (3) and sleeve (1) so that the differential pressure between ports PPHI and PPLO does not increase more than required. Pressure PGR created by the variable metering valve operation corresponds to the pressure between points B and C on the output diagram.
T3-2-8
Pressure PGR (Pressure at Output Port)
B
C
Engine Speed Min.
Max.
ă&#x192;ťOutput Diagram
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve
1
2
Port PPLO
Section (d)
3
4 Port PPHI
Variable Metering Valve Section (C)
Port PGR (Pressure PGR)
11 1 - Sleeve 2 - Spring
3 - Spool 4 - Orifice
T566-03-02-011
8 8 - Spool
T3-2-9
11 - Sleeve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Revolution Sensing Valve (Blank)
T3-2-10
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device OUTLINE The swing device consists of the valve unit swing motor and swing reduction gear. The valve unit prevents cavitation and overload in the swing circuit. The swing motor is a swash-plate-type axial plunger motor incorporating a parking brake. The swing motor, driven by pressure oil from the pump, transmits the rotation force to the swing reduction gear. The swing reduction gear converts the swing motor rotation power to a slow but large torque which rotates the upperstructure.
Valve Unit
Swing Motor
Swing Reduction Gear
T1M9-03-03-001
T3-3-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device SWING MOTOR The inner rotor is splined to the shaft, and the plunger is inserted in the rotor. When the pump supplies pressure oil to the swing motor, plungers are pushed down with pressure oil while sliding along the swash plate, developing turning force. As the shaft is splined to the rotor and sun gear in the swing reduction gear, the rotor torque is transmitted to the swing reduction gear unit.
Valve Plate
Shaft
Rotor
Plunger Shoe
Swash Plate Retainer
Sun Gear
T1M9-03-03-001
T3-3-2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device PARKING BRAKE The parking brake is a wet-negative-type single disc brake which is released only when the brake release pressure oil is routed into the brake piston chamber.
Brake Piston Chamber
Motor Housing
When releasing the brake: When the pilot control shut-off lever is in the UNLOCKED position, the pilot shut-off switch is ON. By this action, the pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve is ON, so that the brake release pressure (pilot pressure) is guided to the brake piston chamber. Through the inner passage in motor housing to push the brake piston upward, allowing the brake piston and the disc plate contact to free, so that the rotor can be rotated. When the brake is applied: When the pilot control shut-off lever is in the LOCKED position, the pilot shut-off switch is OFF. By this action, the pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve is OFF, so that the brake release pressure (pilot pressure) is not guided to the brake piston chamber. The brake release pressure oil in brake piston chamber flows back to the hydraulic oil tank via the pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve. Accordingly, by the spring, the disc plate splined to the rotor is pushed onto the motor housing. Therefore the rotor is secured.
Brake Piston
Disc Plate
Inner Passage Rotor Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve
T565-03-02-005
Pilot Pump
Motor Housing
Brake Piston Chamber
Spring
Disc Plate
Rotor Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve
Pilot Pump
T3-3-3
T565-03-02-006
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device VALVE UNIT The valve unit consists of the make-up valves and relief valves. The make-up valve prevents the occurrence of cavitation in the circuit. The relief valve also protects the circuit from surge pressure and overloading. Make-Up Valve When stopping swing operation, the swing spool is in neutral by returning the swing lever and the flow rate to swing motor stops flowing. But the swing motor rotates by inertia, so cavitation occurs in the circuit. To prevent cavitation, when the oil pressure in the circuit is lower than the pressure at port M (hydraulic oil tank pressure), the poppet opens to draw hydraulic oil into the circuit so that the pump oil flow rate is replenished.
Relief Valve
Made-Up Valve
From Control Port M Vavle
T3-3-4
To Control Valve
Poppet
T565-03-02-002
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device Relief Valve The relief valve functions to reduce shocks developed when starting or stopping swing movement (shockless) and to protect the circuit from overloading (relief).
• Shockless Operation When the pressure in the circuit increases, the pressure oil enters in the piston chamber via the orifice of poppet and housing, to move the piston to the left. The pressure in the spring chamber is kept low during the movement of piston. Therefore, the pressure at port HP opposes the spring set force only, and the poppet opens to relieve the hydraulic oil under low pressure whenever the pressure at port HP is low. Therefore, the pressure stops temporally increasing and shocks are reduced when starting or stopping the swing operation. When the piston moves to the stroke end, the pressure in the spring chamber becomes equal to the pressure at port HP. As a result, the relief set force becomes to the normal pressure, so the poppet closes.
Poppet
Piston Chamber
Orifice
Spring
LP
HP
S1
S2
Housing
Spring Chamber
T561-02-03-001
• Relief Operation When the pressure in the circuit increases, the force which acting on poppet (Pressurized Area (S1-S2)×Pressure at Port HP) exceeds the spring force, so the poppet opens to allow the hydraulic oil to be relieved.
Poppet
• Quick Return Operation of Piston
LP
This operation is to return the piston to the original position. The shockless operation is performed as the piston moves from right to left. Therefore, when stopping the swing operation, move the piston to right. When returning the swing lever to the neutral position, the back pressure arises in the return circuit due to the swing inertial force. The piston is returned to the original position quickly by the back pressure.
HP
S2
S1
T566-03-03-039
Piston LP
HP
T566-03-03-039
T3-3-5
COMPONENT OPERATION / Swing Device SWING REDUCTION GEAR The swing reduction gear is a two-stage planetary-gear reduction type. The swing motor rotation force is transmitted to the sun gear. The rotation of sun gear is reduced by the planetary gear and ring gear. This in turn rotates the shaft via the carrier.
First stage ring gear (8) and second stage ring gear (9) are secured onto the housing. The output shaft of swing motor rotates first stage sun gear (1). The rotation force is transmitted to second stage sun gear (3) via first stage planetary gear (9) and first stage carrier (2). The rotation force of second stage sun gear (3) rotates shaft (5) (output shaft) via second stage planetary gear (7) and second stage carrier (4). Shaft (5) meshes with the internal gear on swing bearing secured onto the undercarriage to rotate the upperstructure
1 8
2
9
3
7
4
6 5
Housing
T1M9-03-03-001
1 - First Stage Sun Gear 2 - First Stage Carrier 3 - Second Stage Sun Gear
4 - Second Stage Carrier 5 - Shaft (Output Shaft)
6 - Second Stage Ring Gear 7 - Second Stage Planetary Gear
T3-3-6
8 - First Stage Ring Gear 9 - First Stage Planetary Gear
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve OUTLINE The control valve controls the oil pressure along with the flow rate and direction in the hydraulic circuit. The major components in the hydraulic circuit are the main relief valve, overload relief valve, make-up valve, unload valve, differential reducing valve, and pressure compensators. All spools are fully operated by the pilot pressure oil.
Also, the control valve is provided with an Auto-Idle pressure sensor for use in Auto-Idle control. (Refer to SYSTEM/Control System)
Installation Port of Auto Idle Pressure Sensor
Unload Valve Main Relief Valve Differential Reducing Valve
Swing Travel (Left) Blade Travel (Right) Make-Up Valve Boom Swing
Overload Relief Valve
Boom Overload Relief Valve Arm Bucket Auxiliary
T1M9-03-04-001
T3-4-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
37
1 2
123578910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 -
36 3 35 34 33 32 5 31 30 29 28 27
7 8
26 25
9 10
24 23
11
22
12
21 20 19
13 14
18
17
T1M9-03-04-002
T3-4-2
Main Relief Valve Unload Valve Load Check Valve (swing) Load Check Valve (Blade) Make-Up Valve (Boom Swing) Load Check Valve (Boom Swing) Overload Relief Valve (Boom) Load Check Valve (Boom) Overload Relief Valve (Arm) Load Check Valve (Arm) Overload Relief Valve (Bucket) Load Check Valve (Bucket) Load Check Valve (Auxiliary) Pressure Compensator (Auxiliary) Pressure Compensator (Bucket) Shuttle Valve (Bucket) Overload Relief Valve (Bucket) Pressure Compensator (Arm) Shuttle Valve (Arm) Overload Relief Valve (Arm) Pressure Compensator (Boom) Shuttle Valve (Boom) Boom Anti-Drift Valve Overload Relief Valve (Boom) Pressure Compensator (Boom Swing) Shuttle Valve (Boom Swing) Pressure Compensator (Travel Right) Shuttle Valve (Travel Right) Pressure Compensator (Blade) Shuttle Valve (Blade) Pressure Compensator (Travel Left) Shuttle Valve (Travel Left) Pressure Compensator (Swing) Shuttle Valve (Swing) Differential Reducing Valve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve
A
A
D
D
E
E
F
F
E
E
G
G
H
H
I
I
I
I
J
J
T1M9-03-04-001
Cross Section A-A
Cross Section D-D K
36
1 37
2
T1M9-03-04-005
T3-4-3
35
K
T1M9-03-04-007
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve Hydraulic Circuit Diagram
37
1 2
123578910 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 -
36 3 35 34 33 32 5 31 30 29 28 27
7 8
26 25
9 10
24 23
11
22
12
21 20 19
13 14
18
17
T1M9-03-04-002
T3-4-4
Main Relief Valve Unload Valve Load Check Valve (swing) Load Check Valve (Blade) Make-Up Valve (Boom Swing) Load Check Valve (Boom Swing) Overload Relief Valve (Boom) Load Check Valve (Boom) Overload Relief Valve (Arm) Load Check Valve (Arm) Overload Relief Valve (Bucket) Load Check Valve (Bucket) Load Check Valve (Auxiliary) Pressure Compensator (Auxiliary) Pressure Compensator (Bucket) Shuttle Valve (Bucket) Overload Relief Valve (Bucket) Pressure Compensator (Arm) Shuttle Valve (Arm) Overload Relief Valve (Arm) Pressure Compensator (Boom) Shuttle Valve (Boom) Boom Anti-Drift Valve Overload Relief Valve (Boom) Pressure Compensator (Boom Swing) Shuttle Valve (Boom Swing) Pressure Compensator (Travel Right) Shuttle Valve (Travel Right) Pressure Compensator (Blade) Shuttle Valve (Blade) Pressure Compensator (Travel Left) Shuttle Valve (Travel Left) Pressure Compensator (Swing) Shuttle Valve (Swing) Differential Reducing Valve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve Cross Section F-F
Cross Section E-E K
29、33
K
30、34
K
K
31
T1M9-03-04-008
32
T1M9-03-04-009
Cross Section H-H
Cross Section G-G K
28
26
7
25 K
27
K
Cross Section I-I
K
T1M9-03-04-011
Cross Section J-J K
17、20
9
T1M9-03-04-010
23
19、22
24
K
18、21
K
11、13
T1M9-03-04-012
Cross Section K-K
3、5、8、10、12、 14、15
T566-03-03-009
T3-4-5
16
K
T1M9-03-04-013
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT Main pump P1 supplies pressure oil to the control valve. When the spools in the control valve are in neutral, the pressure oil from main pump P1 flows back to the hydraulic oil tank via the unload valve. When the spools in the control valve are operated, the pressure oil from main pump P1 flows to the cylinders and/or the motors after passing through the pressure compensator and the operated spools. In each section of the control valve, a pressure compensator is provided. While the spools are being operated, by the function of this pressure compensator, flow corresponding to the lever input is distributed to the respective actuators regardless of load during a combined operation. Beside the pressure compensators, boom anti-drift valve, unload valve, differential reducing valve, and variable relief valve are provided in the control valve. NOTE: Only the pressure compensator for the swing motor receives PLS pressure coming through the orifice. This is for moderating swing bounce at the moment of operation change from a combined operation of swing and others to the swing operation alone.
T3-4-6
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve
Travel Motor (Left)
Swing Motor
Blade Cylinder
Travel Motor (Right)
Boom Boom Swing Cylinder Cylinder
Arm Cylinder
Bucket Cylinder
Unload Valve
Swing
Travel (Left)
Blade
Travel (Right)
Boom Swing
Boom
Pressure Compensator
Differential Reducing Valve
Arm
Bucket
Auxiliary
Pressure Compensator
Back Pressure Valve Main Pump (P1) Hydraulic Oil Tank Bypass Check Valve
T1M9-02-02-006
Oil Cooler
T3-4-7
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve MAIN RELIEF VALVE The main relief valve is provided in the primary circuit (before spools) to prevent the oil pressure in the main circuit from increasing more than the set pressure. 1. The oil pressure in port P acts on pilot poppet (10) via orifices (2 and 5) in poppet (1) and seat (6). 2. When the oil pressure in the main circuit increases more than the set pressure of spring (8), pilot poppet (10) moves to the right. 3. Then, a small quantity of the pressure oil flows to pot T via passage (7) in holder (9) and around sleeve (11). Thereby, a differential pressure arises between port P and spring chamber (4) due to orifice (2). When this differential pressure increases more than spring (3) force, poppet (1) is moved to the right so that the pressure oil in port P flows directly to port T. 4. When the oil pressure is reduced, pilot poppet (10) is closed by spring (8), causing the oil pressure in spring chamber (4) to increase. The increased pressure oil in spring chamber (4) and spring (3) cause poppet (1) to close again.
In Neutral Port T
Port P
Port T T566-03-03-016
In Operation 1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
9
Port P
Port T
11 123456-
T3-4-8
Poppet Orifice Spring Spring Chamber Orifice Seat
78910 11 -
Passage Spring Holder Pilot Poppet Sleeve
T566-03-03-017
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE The overload relief valve is provided in the secondary (after spool) circuit of the cylinder so that even if the cylinder is moved by external loads, the overload relief valve regulates the oil pressure in the secondary circuit so as to avoid abnormal pressure increase. 1. The oil pressure on the cylinder side acts on pilot poppet (5) via passage (2) in piston (1). 2. If the oil pressure in the circuit increases more than the set pressure of spring (6), pilot poppet (5) is moved to the right. 3. A small quantity of the pressure oil flows to port T through passage (8) in holder (7) and passage (10) in sleeve (9). 4. When pilot poppet (5) is moved to the right, the oil pressure in chamber (11) decreases, causing a pressure difference to arise between the cylinder side port and chamber (11). When this differential pressure overcomes spring (4) force, poppet (3) is moved to the right, allowing the pressure oil in the cylinder side port to directly flow to port T.
In Neutral
Cylinder Side
Port T
T566-03-03-018
In Operation 1
2
4
3
5
6
Cylinder Side
NOTE: When the oil pressure in the cylinder side decreases lower than the oil pressure in port T, this overload relief valve draws oil from port T (hydraulic oil tank side), preventing cavitation from occurring (make-up function).
T3-4-9
Port T
123456-
Piston Passage Poppet Spring Pilot Poppet Spring
11 10
9
8
78910 11 -
Holder Passage Sleeve Passage Chamber
7
T566-03-03-019
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve MAKE-UP VALVE The make-up valve prevents cavitation from occurring in the boom swing cylinder. Other cylinder circuits have one overload relief valve each, by which make-up function the occurrence of cavitation in the circuit is prevented. 1. The oil pressure in the cylinder side is routed into spring chamber (4) through passage (2) in poppet (1) so that the oil pressure in the spring chamber increases to the same pressure in the cylinder side. Accordingly, when the oil pressure in the cylinder side is high, the poppet (1) closing force [pressure in spring chamber (4) Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area (S2)] overcomes the poppet (1) opening force [pressure in cylinder side Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area (S1)], causing poppet (1) to close. 2. When the oil pressure in the cylinder side becomes lower than the pressure in port T, poppet (1) is closed by spring (3) force only. Therefore, when poppet (1) opening force [pressure in port T Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area (S2-S1)] overcomes poppet (1) closing force [spring (3) force], poppet (1) is unseated, allowing the hydraulic oil to supply to the cylinder side so that occurrence of cavitation in the cylinder side is prevented.
In Neutral
Cylinder Side
Port T
T566-03-03-020
In Operation S1
2
1
3
S2
4
Cylinder Side
Port T
1 - Poppet 2 - Passage 3 - Spring
T3-4-10
6
5
4 - Spring Chamber 5 - Sleeve 6 - Passage
T566-03-03-021
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve (Blank)
T3-4-11
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve BOOM ANTI-DRIFT VALVE The boom anti-drift valve is provided in the boom cylinder bottom circuit to reduce the boom cylinder drift. When the boom spool is in neutral: 1. When the engine is stopped with the boom raised, the oil pressure in the boom cylinder bottom increases due to the front attachment weight. 2. The increased oil pressure is routed into the spring chamber via the poppet orifice and acts on the ball and pressure receiving area S1. 3. Therefore, when the ball is pushed the sleeve by the increased oil pressure, the pressure force (oil pressure in the spring chamber Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area S1) closes the poppet. Then, the poppet blocks the pressure oil in the bottom circuit, not allowing the pressure oil to leak to the spool side so that the cylinder drift is reduced.
Boom Cylinder
When Neutral: From the control valve Spring Chamber
Poppet Orifice
Ball S1
When raising the boom: 1. When the boom raise operation is made, the spool is moved to the left. 2. Pressure oil from the spool to open the poppet and to flow further to the boom cylinder bottom. 3. Thereby, the boom is raised.
Sleeve
Spool T566-03-03-024
When Raising:
Boom cylinder To the control valve Poppet
Spool T566-03-03-027
T3-4-12
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve When lowering the boom: 1. When the boom lower operation is made, the boom lower pilot oil pressure is routed to the spool end and the piston, causing the spool and the piston to move to the right. 2. When the piston is moved to the right, the right tip of the piston pushes the ball so that the ball becomes unseated from the sleeve. 3. Then, the pressure oil in the boom cylinder bottom circuit is returned to the hydraulic oil tank via the orifice in the poppet, section A, and the passage around the piston, reducing the oil pressure in the spring chamber. 4. When the oil pressure in the spring chamber is reduced, the poppet is closed by spring force only. Accordingly, when poppet opening force [oil pressure at port A2 Ă&#x2014; pressure receiving area (S1-S2)] overcomes poppet closing force (spring), the poppet is opened. 5. Therefore, the pressure oil in the boom cylinder bottom circuit is returned to the hydraulic oil tank via the poppet and the spool, allowing the boom cylinder to move downwards.
Piston
Section A
Sleeve
Ball
Boom Lower Pilot Oil Pressure Spool
Circuit T
Circuit T2
T566-03-03-025
Boom Cylinder From the control valve Piston
Section A
Poppet Port A2
S2
S1
T566-03-03-026
Spring Chamber
T3-4-13
Spring
Spool
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve UNLOAD VALVE The unload valve operates in response to pump delivery pressure (P1) and maximum load pressure (PLMAX) to control the differential pressure between before and after the spool in the control valve. NOTE: The differential reducing valve outputs pressure PLS (Pressure PLS = Pressure P1 – Pressure PLMAX). Therefore, pressure P1 must be higher than pressure PLMAX to output pressure PLS. The unload valve controls the differential pressure between before and after the spool in the control valve so that pressure P1 (Pressure P1 = Pressure PLMAX) is higher than pressure PLMAX. Then, the differential reducing valve outputs pressure PLS (Pressure PLS = Pressure P1 – Pressure PLMAX), by which the pump delivery flow rate is controlled. 1. The pressure oil flow diverges from port P into two routes, to the differential reducing valve and to chamber C through the spool. 2. As pressure P1 routed into chamber C increases, the spool is pushed to the left by pressure P1 force (pressure P1 × pressure receiving area S3). 3. Hydraulic oil tank is routed into chamber A so that the spool is pushed to the right by spring force in chamber A. 4. Pressure PLMAX from port PLMAX is routed into chamber B, increasing the pressure in chamber B so that the spool is pushed to the right by pressure force (pressure PLMAX × pressure receiving area S2). 5. The pressure forces pushing the spool from both ends is expressed as below: Spring force + Pressure PLMAX × Pressure Receiving Area S2 = Pressure P1 × Pressure Receiving Area S3 6. When pressure P1 increases until spool left pushing force (Pressure P1 × Pressure Receiving Area S3) overcomes spool right pushing force (Spring force + Pressure PLMAX × Pressure Receiving Area S2), the spool is moved to the left.
7. Then, notch D is opened, oil pressure P1 is routed to port T via the spool. The opening area at notch D varies in proportion to the spool stroke (depending on variations in the spool pushing force balance). 8. As pressure areas S2, and S3 are all identical, pressure P1 is maintained so as to match the formula “Pressure P1 = Pressure PLMAX + Spring force”. T Unload Valve
Pressure PLMAX Spring
Pressure P1
Pressure P1
T1M9-03-04-019
: Oil Pressure in the circuit before the spool Pressure PLMAX : Maximum oil pressure in all circuits after the spool Pressure PLS : Reduced pilot oil pressure at the differential reducing valve
T3-4-14
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve
Chamber A
Chamber B
S2
Port P (Pressure P1)
Differential Reducing Valve
Unload Valve
Spring
Port PLMAX (PLMAX Pressure)
Spool
Chamber C
S3
T1M9-03-04-015
Pressure P1
Port T (To Hydraulic Tank)
T3-4-15
Notch D
Spool
T1M9-03-04-016
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve DIFFERENTIAL REDUCING VALVE The differential reducing valve supplies pressure PLS to main pump valve PS to regulate the pump flow rate. 1. Oil pressure P1 from the main pump is routed into chamber C so that it acts on the piston, creating pressure force (pressure P1 × pressure receiving area S3) to move the spool to the left. 2. Oil pressure PLS from port PLS is routed into chamber A via the hole in the sleeve and the passage in the spool, creating pressure force (pressure PLS × pressure receiving area S1) to move the spool to the right. 3. Oil pressure PLMAX from port PLMAX is routed into chamber B, creating pressure force (pressure PLMAX × pressure receiving area S2) to move the spool to the right. 4. Accordingly, the spool moves so as to match the force balance as expressed in the formula below: Spool left pushing force (pressure P1× pressure receiving area S3) = Spool right pushing force [(pressure PLS × pressure receiving area S1) + (pressure PLMAX × pressure receiving area S2)] When the left pushing force is stronger: (Pressure P1× S3 > pressure PLS × S1) + pressure PLMAX × S2) 5. The spool is moved to the left. 6. As notch D is opened, pressure PP1 from the pilot pump is routed to chamber A and port PLS via notch D. 7. Notch E is closed, blocking port DR1 (return port to the hydraulic oil tank). 8. As described in step 4, the spool is moved so as to keep the force balance, pressure PP1 is routed to port PLS to control the pump so that pressure PLS increases.
When the right pushing force is stronger: (Pressure P1× S3 < pressure PLS × S1) + pressure PLMAX × S2) 9. The spool is moved to the right. 10. As notch D is closed, pressure PP1 from the pilot pump cannot go through notch D. Notch E is opened, the oil pressure in chamber A and from port PLS is routed into port DR1 via notch E. 11. As described in step 4, the spool is moved so as to keep the force balance, pressure PLS to control the pump is returned to the hydraulic oil tank that pressure PLS decreases. 12. According to the repeated operation as described in step 5 to 8 and 9 to 11, pressure PLS is maintained so as to match the pressure balance (PLS = P1 – PLMAX) as described in step 4 since S1, S2, and S3 are all identical. Pressure PP1
DR1
Pressure PLS Pressure P1
Pressure PLMAX
Pressure P1:
Differential Reducing Valve
T1M9-03-04-004
: Oil Pressure in the circuit before the spool Pressure PLS : Reduced pilot oil pressure at the differential reducing valve Pressure PLMAX : Maximum oil pressure in all circuits after the spool Pressure PP1 : Primary Pilot Oil Pressure
T3-4-16
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve
S1
S2 Chamber A
Piston
Chamber B
Sleeve
Spool
S3
Chamber C
Main Pump Delivery Pressure (P1) Port PLMAX (Pressure PLMAX)
Port PLS (Pressure PLS)
T566-03-03-030
When the left pushing force is stronger: Chamber A
Notch D
Notch E
Port PLMAX (Pressure PLMAX)
Port PLS (Pressure PLS)
Port PP1 (Pressure PP1)
T566-03-03-031
Port DR1 (Pressure DR1)
When the right pushing force is stronger: Chamber A
Notch D
Notch E
Port PLS (Pressure PLS)
Port PP1 (Pressure PP1)
T3-4-17
T566-03-03-032
Port DR1 (Pressure DR1)
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve PRESSURE COMPENSATOR The pressure compensator is located in the circuit before control valve spool (2). The pressure compensator regulates the oil flow rate passing through spool (2) so that the differential pressure in the circuit between before and rear spool (2) is kept constant. 1. Oil Pressure (PIN) in circuit (1) before spool (2) is routed into chamber C (5) via passage (6) in spool (2), creating force [pressure PIN × pressure receiving area S3 (4)] that moves spool (7) to the left against piston (3). 2. Oil pressure (PLS) from the differential reducing valve is routed into chamber B (9), creating force [pressure PLS × pressure receiving area S2 (8)] that moves spool (7) to the right. 3. Oil Pressure (PL) in circuit (12) after spool (2) is routed into chamber A (11), creating force [pressure PL × pressure receiving area S1 (10)] that moves spool (7) to the right. 4. Spool (7) is moved so that pressures PIN, PLS, and PL maintain the force balance as described in the formula below: Right pushing force [pressure PLS × pressure receiving area S2 (8)] + (pressure PL × pressure receiving area S1 (10))] = Left pushing force (pressure PIN × pressure receiving area S3 (4)) When the differential pressure between pressure (PIN) and pressure (PL) is higher than pressure PLS: 5. When the differential pressure between pressure (PIN) and pressure (PL) is higher than pressure PLS, left pushing force becomes stronger than right pushing force so that spool (7) is moved to the left. 6. Then, notch (13) becomes gradually narrower, reducing the hydraulic oil passing through notch (13) so that the pressure oil routed into circuit (1) before the spool is reduced. Therefore, pressure PIN decreases, causing the differential pressure between circuits (1 and 12) to reduce. 7. When spool pushing force on both sides becomes equal, spool (7) stops moving.
When the differential pressure between pressure (PIN) and pressure (PL) is lower than pressure PLS: 8. When the differential pressure between pressure (PIN) and pressure (PL) is lower than pressure PLS, right pushing force becomes stronger than left pushing force so that spool (7) is moved to the right. 9. Then, notch (13) becomes gradually wider, increasing the hydraulic oil passing through notch (13) so that the pressure oil routed into circuit (1) before the spool increases. Therefore, pressure PIN increases, causing the differential pressure between circuits (1 and 12) to increase. 10. When spool pushing forces on both sides becomes equal, spool (7) stops moving. Spool (7) keeps moving right and left while repeating operation in steps 5 to 7 and 8 to 9. 11. Thereby, the differential pressure between pressure PIN in before spool side circuit (1) and pressure PL after spool side (2) is kept equal to pressure PLS so that the hydraulic oil flow rate passing through spool (2) is maintained constant. Pressure Compensator
To the Control Valve Main Spool
Pressure PL
Pressure PLS Pressure PIN
Pressure PIN Pressure PLS Pressure PL
T3-4-18
T1M9-03-04-020
: Oil Pressure in the circuit before the spool : Reduced pilot oil pressure at the differential reducing valve : Oil pressure in the corresponding circuit after the spool
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve 1
2
12
Pressure PL
Pressure PIN
Pressure Compensator
11
10
9
8
7
6
5 4
3 T1M9-03-04-017
Pressure PLS
When the differential pressure is high:
1
2
3
12 Pressure Compensator
7 T1M9-03-04-018
When the differential pressure is low:
1
2
3
12 Pressure Compensator
T1M9-03-04-007
7 1234-
Circuit before spool Spool Piston Pressure receiving area S3
5 - Chamber C 6 - Passage 7 - Spool
8 - Pressure receiving area S2 9 - Chamber B 10 - Pressure receiving area S1
T3-4-19
11 - Chamber A 12 - Circuit after spool 13 - Notch
COMPONENT OPERATION / Control Valve (Blank)
T3-4-20
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve OUTLINE The pilot valve controls the pilot pressure to move the control valve spools. The 4-port pilot valve is used for front attachment, swing, and travel operation. The 2-port pilot valve is used for blade and offset operation. The blade, boom swing and auxiliary (optional) pilot valves is the same in construction except for the cam which pushes the pusher.
• Front and Swing Pilot Valve Port No. 1 2 3 4 1 2 3 4
Right
Left
HITACHI Stan- ISO Standard dard Bucket Roll-Out ← Boom Lower ← Bucket Roll-In ← ← Boom Raise Arm Roll-In Swing Right Swing Right Arm Roll-Out Arm Roll-Out Swing Left Swing Left Arm Roll-In
P T1M9-03-05-001
A
4
View A
1
3 Hydraulic Symbol
T
T1M9-03-05-002
2 3
P T
1 2
4
4
PT
2 1
3 T1M7-03-04-001
• Travel Pilot Valve Port No. 1 2 3 4
Right Travel Reverse Right Travel Forward Left Travel Forward Left Travel Reverse P
T P
T T1M9-03-05-004
B View B
1
2 4
3
4
3 T1M9-03-05-006
2
1 T1M9-03-05-005
T3-5-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve • Boom Swing Pilot Valve (Optional) Port No. 1 2 3 4 -
Right Travel Reverse Right Travel Forward Left Travel Forward Left Travel Reverse Pressure Sensor P
T P
T Pressure Sensor T1M9-03-05-007
4
3 1
2
4
3 T1M7-03-04-020
Pressure Sensor
2 1
• Blade, Boom Swing, Auxiliary (Optional) Pilot Valve Port No. 1 2
T1M9-03-05-008
Blade Lower, Left Boom Swing Auxiliary (Optional) Blade Raise, Right Boom Swing Auxiliary (Optional) P T
T P
1
2
T1CF-03-04-001
T1CF-03-04-002
1
T3-5-2
2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve (Blank)
T3-5-3
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve OPERATION â&#x20AC;˘ Front Attachment and Swing Pilot Valve Spool (6) head comes in contact with the upper face of spring guide (3) which is kept raised by return spring (5). Control Lever-In Neutral (Output Diagram: A to B) 1. When neutral, spool (6) totally blocks pressure oil port P (from the pilot pump). The output port is opened to port T (hydraulic oil tank) through the passage in spool (6). Therefore, oil pressure in the output port (to the control valve) is equal to that in port T. 2. When the control lever is slightly tilted, cam (1) is tilted, moving pusher (2) downward. Then, pusher (2) compress return spring (5) along with spring guide (3). At this time, as oil pressure in the output port is equal to that in port T, spool (6) moves downward while keeping the under face of the spool head in contact with spring guide (3). 3. This status continues until hole (7) on spool (6) is opened to port P.
T3-5-4
D Pilot Pressure C
A
B
Lever Stroke
Output Diagram
T567-03-04-002
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve
1
2 3 4 5
6 Port T
7
Port P
Output Port T1M7-03-04-012
1 - Cam 2 - Pusher
3 - Spring Guide 4 - Balance Spring
5 - Return Spring 6 - Spool
T3-5-5
7 - Hole
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve During Metering or Decompressing (Output Diagram: C to D) 1. When the control lever is further tilted to move pusher (2) downward more, hole (7) on spool (6) is opened to port P, allowing pressure oil in port P to flow into the output port. 2. Oil pressure in the output port acts on the bottom face of spool (6) so that spool (6) is pushed upward. 3. However, until upward force acting on the bottom face of spool (6) overcomes balance spring (4) force, balance spring (4) is not compressed. Then, spool (6) is not raised, allowing oil pressure in the output port to increase. 4. As oil pressure in the output port increases, force to push spool (6) upward increases. When, this force overcomes balance spring (4) force, balance spring (4) is compressed so that spool (6) is moved upward. 5. As spool (6) is moved upward, hole (7) is closed so that pressure oil from port P stops flowing into the output port, stopping pressure oil in the output port to increase. 6. As spool (6) is moved downward, balance spring (4) is compressed, increasing the spring force. Therefore, oil pressure in the output port becomes equal to the oil pressure acting on the bottom face of spool (6) being balanced in position with the spring force.
T3-5-6
D Pilot Pressure C
A
B
Lever Stroke
Output Diagram
T567-03-04-002
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve
1
1
2
2
3
3
4
4
5
5
6
6 Port T
7
Port T
7
Port P
Output Port
Port P
Output Port T1M7-03-04-014
1 - Cam 2 - Pusher
3 - Spring Guide 4 - Balance Spring
5 - Return Spring 6 - Spool
T3-5-7
7 - Hole
T1M7-03-04-015
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve â&#x20AC;˘ Travel Pilot Valve Control Lever-In Neutral (Pusher Stroke: A to B) When the control lever is in neutral, spool (6) blocks the pressure oil in port P completely. The output port is connected to port T through hole (7), so the pressure at output port becomes equal to the hydraulic oil tank pressure. When the control lever is moved slightly, pusher (2) and spring guides (3) move downward together, compressing return spring (5). At this time, as the pressure under spool (6) (output port) is equal to the hydraulic oil tank pressure, spool (6) moves downwards by balance spring (4), while the top of spool is kept with spring guide (3). This state is maintained until clearance (A) of spool (6) becomes zero.
Control Lever-Full Stroke (Pusher Stroke: E to F) When the control lever is moved to full stroke, pusher (2) compresses return spring (5) more and spool (6) is moved down. Thereby, spool (6) is pressed directly by the bottom of pusher (2). As a result, the lower hole (7) of spool (6) does not close even if the pressure at output port rises. As a result, the pressure at output port becomes equal to the pressure at port P.
Control Lever-Operated (Pusher Stroke: C to D Metering) When the control lever is moved further, hole (9) of spool (6) reaches port P. The pressure oil in port P flows into the output port via the passage in spool (6), so the pressure at output port increases. The pressure at output port acts on the bottom of spool (6), to push spool (6) upwards. If the acting force on spool (6) is smaller than the spring force of balance spring (4), balance spring (4) will not be pressed. As a result, spool (6) will not be pushed up, and the pressure at output port increases continuously. If the pressure at output port increases further, the force to push up spool (6) increases. When this force becomes larger than the spring force of balance spring (4), spool (6) pushes balance spring (4) and moves upwards. When spool (6) moves upwards, hole (7) closes, so the pressure oil does not flow into the output port from port P. Thereby, the pressure at output port stops raising. Accordingly, the amount the balance spring (4) is compressed is equal to the amount spool (6) is pressed down, so the balanced pressure between the spring force and the force acting on spool (6) becomes the pressure at output port.
T3-5-8
E
Delivery Port Pressure (Pilot Pressure)
F
D C A B Pusher Stroke
Output Diagram
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve Pusher Stroke: A to B 1 2
3 4 5 6 Port T (A)
(A)
Port P
7 Output Port
T1M7-03-04-016
Pusher Stroke: C to D
T1M7-03-04-017
Pusher Stroke: E to F
2 2
4
6
Port P
Output Port
1 - Cam 2 - Pusher
34-
Port T
6
Port T
Port P
7
Output Port T1M7-03-04-019
T1M7-03-04-018
Spring Guide Balance Spring
56-
T3-5-9
Return Spring Spool
7-
Hole
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve â&#x20AC;˘ Boom Swing, Blade and Auxiliary (Optional) Control Pedal-In Neutral (Pusher Stroke: A to B) When the control pedal is in neutral, spool (7) blocks the pressure oil in port P completely. The output port is connected to port T through the passage in spool (7), so the pressure at output port becomes equal to the hydraulic oil tank pressure. When the control pedal is moved slightly, cam (1) moves and pusher (2) and spring guide (4) move downward together, compressing return spring (6), At this time, balance spring (5) pushes spool (7) and spool (7) moves downward until clearance (A) becomes ZERO. While spool (7) moves downward, the output port is connected to port T and the pressure oil does not flow into the output port. NOTE: The pedal stroke moved until clearance (A) becomes zero, corresponds to the pedal play in the neutral position. Control Pedal-Operated (Pusher Stroke: C to D Metering) When the control pedal is moved further, the hole on spool (7) is connected to notch. The pressure oil in port P flows into the output port via the hole in spool (7) from notch, so the pressure at output port increases. The pressure at output port acts on the bottom of spool (7), to push spool (7) upwards. If the acting force on spool (7) is smaller than the spring force of balance spring (5), balance spring (5) will not be pressed. As a result, as port P is connected to the output port, the pressure at output port increases continuously. If the pressure at output port increases further, the force to push up spool (7) increases. When this force becomes larger than the spring force of balance spring (5), spool (7) pushes balance spring (5), and moves upwards. When spool (7) moves upwards, notch (B) closes, so the pressure oil does not flow into the output port from port P. Thereby, the pressure at port P stops raising. Accordingly, the amount balance spring (5) is compressed is equal to the amount spool (7) is pressed down, so the balanced pressure between the spring force and the force acting on spool (7) becomes the pressure at output port.
T3-5-10
D Pilot Pressure C
A
B
Lever Stroke
Output Diagram
T567-03-04-002
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve Pusher Stroke: A to B
1 2
4 3
5 Port T Port T
6
Clearance (A): 0 Port P
(A) Port P Hole
7
Passage
Output Port Output Port
T1M7-03-04-008
Pusher Stroke: C to D
5 Port T
Port P Hole
7
Output Port 1 - Cam 2 - Pusher
3 - Plate 4 - Spring Guide
T1M7-03-04-022
5 - Balance Spring 6 - Return Spring
T3-5-11
7 - Spool
T1M7-03-04-021
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve SHOCKLESS FUNCTION TRAVEL PILOT VALVE)
(ONLY
FOR
Damper Spring Pin
Travel Pedal
A
The travel pilot valve has the damper enabling damping of the speed change shock by the lever. The damper is composed of the support, gears 1 and 2, and others. Gear 1 is connected with the support. The support is secure to the bracket with the spring pin. And the travel lever and the travel pedal are secure to the bracket. At this time, support sway transversely around the pin in line with the movement of the travel lever.
Travel Lever Support Bracket Pin Gear 2 A Gear 1
Operation 1. If the travel lever is released from the hand during traveling, return force of the return spring returns the travel lever to the neutral position. 2. At this time, gears 1 and 2 inside the damper receive opposing force due to friction. 3. Therefore, the travel lever gradually returns to the neutral position, thus moderating the extent of sudden stop at the time of abrupt release of the travel lever.
T1M7-03-04-002
Section A-A Spring Pin
Damper Support
Pin T1M7-03-04-003
T3-5-12
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve SHUTTLE VALVE (ONLY FOR TRAVEL PILOT VALVE)
Travel Pilot Valve
The shuttle valve is for selecting necessary pilot pressure for traveling, and leads high pressure to the pressure sensors.
T1M9-03-05-009
To Pressure Sensor
T3-5-13
Shuttle Valve
COMPONENT OPERATION / Pilot Valve (Blank)
T3-5-14
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device OUTLINE The travel device consists of travel motor, travel reduction gear and travel brake valve. The travel motor is a variable displacement axial plunger swash plate type. The travel motor is equipped with a parking brake (wet single negative type). The motor is operated by pressure oil from the pump, and transmits the rotation to the travel reduction gear.
The travel reduction gear is a two-stage planetary gear reduction type, reducing travel motor speed, increasing travel motor torque, and allowing the sprocket and track to rotate. The travel brake valve functions to protect the travel circuit.
Travel Brake Valve
Travel Device
T1LD-03-05-001
Travel Motor
T3-6-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device TRAVEL REDUCTION GEAR The travel motor rotates shaft (1), and the rotation is transmitted to first stage sun gear (5). The rotation of first stage sun gear (5) is reduced by first stage planetary gear (4) and first stage carrier (6), and is transmitted to second stage sun gear (8). The rotation of second stage sun gear (8) is reduced by second stage planetary gear (3) and second stage carrier (2) (united with the travel motor housing).
As second stage carrier (2) and travel motor housing is united into one part, the rotation of second stage planetary gear (3) is transmitted to the sprocket via the ring gear.
1
2
3
4
5
7 1 - Shaft 2 - Second Stage Carrier
8
3 - Second Stage Planetary Gear 4 - First Stage Planetary Gear
5 - First Stage Sun Gear 6 - First Stage Carrier
T3-6-2
6
T1LD-03-05-001
7 - Ring Gear 8 - Second Stage Sun Gear
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device TRAVEL MOTOR The travel motor consists of valve plate, rotor, plungers, shoes, swash plate and shaft. The rotor is connected to the shaft by a spline joint, and the plungers are inserted in the rotor.
Valve Plate
When the pressure oil is supplied from the pump, the plungers are pushed. The swash plate is installed at an angle toward the plungers, the shoe slides on the swash plate, so the rotor rotates. This rotation is transmitted to the travel reduction gear via the shaft.
Travel Motor
Swash plate
Shaft
T1LD-03-05-001
Rotor
Plunger
T3-6-3
Shoe
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device TRAVEL BRAKE VALVE The travel brake valve consists of a counterbalance valve, an anti-cavitation valve and a travel speed changeover valve. The counterbalance valve has two functions; one is to allow the machine to smoothly start and stop traveling and the other is to prevent the machine from running away while descending slopes.
The anti-cavitation valve reduces occurrence of cavitation in motor when the motor is stopped. The travel speed changeover valve is shifted by pressure oil from the travel speed changeover solenoid valve, moving the control piston to change the travel mode.
Travel Brake Valve
B
A
B A
Anti-Cavitation Valve
Control Piston
Counterbalance Valve
T1LD-03-05-001
Anti-Cavitation Valve (Section B-B)
Counterbalance Valve (Section A-A) Counterbalance Valve
T1LD-03-05-010
T1LD-03-05-009
Travel Speed Selector Valve
T3-6-4
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device Counterbalance Valve
â&#x20AC;˘ Travel Operation 1. When the pressure oil from control valve is supplied to port P1, the pressure oil flows to motor port M1 through inside of the spool and opens the check valve. 2. On the other hand, the return oil from motor port M2 is blocked by the check valve and spool. NOTE: The travel parking brake of the travel motor is also working in this condition. 3. Thereby, the pressure at port P1 side increases gradually, so the pressure at port P1 enters into the spring chamber from the orifice, and moves the spool to the right acting on the end surface of spool. 4. As a result, the spool notch opens and port M2 and port P2 connect, so the travel motor rotates.
â&#x20AC;˘ Descending Operation 1. When the machine travels down a slope, the travel motors are forcibly driven by the machine weight, so that the motor draws oil like a pump. 2. The pressure oil in port P1 is drawn into the travel motor, so the pressure at port P1 decreases. 3. Thereby, the spool returns to the left, and the return oil from port M2 to port P2 is restricted, so the oil pressure brake is activated. 4. When the return oil from port M2 is restricted, the pressure at port P1 increases again and moves the spool to the right, so the motor rotates.
Control Valve
Spool Orifice P1
P2
Orifice Spring Chamber
Spring Chamber
M1
M2
Check Valve
Check Valve Travel Speed Selector Valve
T1LD-03-05-009
T3-6-5
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device Anti-Cavitation Valve The anti-cavitation valve consists of spool, passage A, passage B and passage C.
â&#x20AC;˘ When traveling NOTE: Refer to Counterbalance Valve (T3-6-5) for counterbalance valve operation. The anti-cavitation valve does not operate during normal travel motor operation. 1. Pressure oil from port P1 flows to port M1 through the counterbalance. At the same time, it flows to the chamber A through passage B. Thus, pressure oil coming from port P1 and acting in chamber A causes spool to move to the right. 2. Accordingly, passage A to C is closed and the return oil from port M2 returns to port P2 through the counterbalance.
P1
P2 Counterbalance Valve
M1
M2
Passage A Passage B Passage C
Chamber A Spool
(High Pressure)
(Low Pressure)
T1LD-03-05-002
T3-6-6
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device â&#x20AC;˘ When traveling is stopped NOTE: Refer to Counterbalance Valve (T3-6-5) for counterbalance valve operation. 1. As pressure oil from port P1 decreases, the counterbalance valve gradually returns to the neutral. 2. Travel inertia forces the travel motor to rotate so that the motor works as a pump. 3. Accordingly, the pressure in port M2 increases and that in port M1 decreases. 4. Passage C is connected to port M2 so that the pressure is high. Passage A is connected to port M1 so that the pressure is low.
5. Pressure oil from port M2 flows through orifice C of counterbalance valve to passage C and to chamber B, causing spool to move to the left. 6. When spool moves to the left, passages C and A are connected through cutoff of spool, causing pressure oil to flow from port M2 to port M1. 7. This operation reduces the occurrence of cavitation in the motor when traveling is stopped.
Orifice C P1
Counterbalance Valve
P2
M1
M2
Passage C
Passage B
Passage A Chamber B
Spool
T1LD-03-05-003
T3-6-7
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device PARKING BRAKE The parking brake is a wet-type single disc brake. The brake is a negative type so that it is released only when the brake release pressure oil is routed into the brake piston chamber. Applying Brake When the travel stops, the pressure oil acting on the brake piston is returned to the drain circuit through counter balance valve. The spring pushes the brake piston, the friction plates and the plates. Therefore, the friction plates touch the plates tightly, so that the brake is applied.
Releasing Brake During the travel operation, the travel motor pressure flows into the brake piston chamber through counter balance valve and overcomes the spring force, causing the brake piston to move. Therefore, the friction plates and the plates to be freed each other so that the brake is released. Flow the Travel Motor Pressure (Brake Release Pressure Oil)
When Releasing Brake
Brake Piston Chamber Brake Piston Plate
Rotor
Spring To Drain Circuit When Applying Brake
T3-6-8
Friction Plate T1LD-03-05-004
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device (Blank)
T3-6-9
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device Motor Swash Angle (Travel Mode) Control The swash plate angle is changed by moving the control piston to control the motor rotation speed. When the swash plate is in the maximum angle position, the motor runs at slow speed and in the minimum angle position at fast speed. The maximum swash plate angle (slow) is automatically selected if travel load increases more than the specified value when the motor is running at the minimum swash angle (fast).
â&#x20AC;˘ Maximum Swash Angle (Slow Motor Speed) 1. At slow speed mode, pilot pressure from travel mode solenoid valve does to come to pilot port Ps. Thus, spool moves to the left due to motor load pressure Pin acting in chamber A plus spring force. 2. As a result, ports M1 and M2 of travel speed selector valve on its high-pressure side and low-pressure side are blocked by spool 1. NOTE: When motor is in action, pressure oils from both high and low pressure sides always act to travel speed selector valve. 3. Therefore, pressure oil does not flow to control piston. 4. Consequently, the swash plate angle increases so that the plunger stroke is extended, increasing the motor displacement. Then, the motor runs at slow speed.
T3-6-10
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device At Slow Speed: Port M1
Negative Pressure Pin in Motor
Port M2
Spool
Pilot Port Ps
Travel Speed Selector Valve Spring
Chamber A
T1LD-03-05-005
Spool 1
Swash Plate
Control Piston
Plunger
T3-6-11
T1LD-03-05-007
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device â&#x20AC;˘ Minimum Swash Angle (Fast Motor Speed) 1. When pressing fast travel speed mode switch, pressure oil flows from travel mode solenoid valve into pilot port Ps of travel speed selection valve. 2. Then, spool in travel speed selector valve moves to the right. 3. As a result, pressure oils from ports M1 and M2 on high and low pressure sides come to control piston through the rear side of spool. 4. Control piston presses swash plate, causing upper surface of swash plate to contact housing. 5. Consequently, the swash plate angle decreases so that the plunger stroke is retracted, decreasing the motor displacement. Then, the motor runs at fast speed.
T3-6-12
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device Negative Pressure Port M1 Pin in Motor Port M2
At Fast Speed:
Piston
Pilot Port Ps (From Travel Mode Solenoid Valve)
Spool
Spring
Travel Speed Selector Valve
T1LD-03-05-006
Swash Plate
Control Piston
Plunger
T3-6-13
T1LD-03-05-008
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device • Auto Swash Angle Control (Fast → Slow) At fast speed position (at small swash plate angle), switching to slow speed position (at large swash plate angle) is made automatically due to motor load. 1. When traveling at fast speed, the motor load pressure Pin acts in the oil chamber composed of the spool and piston, and pushes the spool left. If the motor load pressure increases, this force becomes larger. 2. When the force (the sum of force due to negative pressure pin in motor × pressurized area of piston and spring force), which moves spool to the left, exceeds the force due to pressure oil from travel mode solenoid valve × pressurized area of spool, which moves spool to the right, spool moves to the left. 3. Pressure oils from ports M1 and M2 are blocked with spool. Thus, pressure oil does not come to control piston. 4. Pressure oil acting on control piston is returned to hydraulic oil tank. 5. Consequently, the swash plate angle increases so that the plunger stroke is extended, increasing the motor displacement. Then, the motor runs at slow speed. 6. Also, if the motor load pressure Pin lowers resulting in the condition of [(motor pressure Pin x pressurized area of piston) + spring force] < [pressure from travel speed changeover solenoid valve x pressurized area of spool], the spool moves right again, and the motor runs at fast speed.
T3-6-14
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device At Fast Speedâ&#x2020;&#x2019;Slow Speed: Pressurized Area of Spool
Negative Port Pressurized Area M2 of Piston Chamber A Port Pressure M1 Pin in Motor To Hydraulic Oil Tank
Piston
To Hydraulic Oil Tank
Pilot Port Ps (From Travel Mode Solenoid Valve)
Spool
Spring
Travel Speed Selector Valve
T1LD-03-05-005
Swash Plate
Control Piston
Plunger
T3-6-15
T1LD-03-05-007
COMPONENT OPERATION / Travel Device (Blank)
T3-6-16
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure) 2-UNIT SOLENOID VALVE The solenoid valves are provided as follows. The pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve for switching ON/OFF of pilot pressure and the travel speed changeover solenoid valve for travel speed mode selection are contained in the 2-unit solenoid valve. And also provided is the torque control solenoid valve for the air conditioner of a cab version machine. Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve 1. The solenoid valve is switched ON/OFF by the position of pilot control shut-off lever to control the pilot pressure to pilot valve. 2. When the pilot control shut-off lever is in the LOCK position, the pilot shut-off switch is OFF. 3. By this action, the solenoid valve is OFF, so that pilot pressure is blocked by the solenoid valve spool. 4. As a consequence, the pressure oil is not delivered to the pilot valve. 5. When the pilot control shut-off lever is in the UNLOCK position, the pilot shut-off switch is ON. 6. By this action, the solenoid valve is ON, so the pilot pressure is supplied to the pilot valve through the solenoid valve spool. Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve 1. The travel speed is controlled by the travel speed mode selector switch. 2. When the travel speed mode selector switch is in the slow speed position, the travel speed changeover mode selector is OFF. By this action, the solenoid valve is OFF, so that pilot pressure is blocked by the solenoid valve spool. 3. As a consequence, the travel speed changeover pressure is not delivered to the travel motor. 4. When the travel speed mode selector switch is in the fast speed position, the travel speed mode selector switch is ON. By this action, the solenoid valve is ON, so that pilot pressure is delivered to the travel motor as the travel mode pressure through the solenoid valve spool. NOTE: Both of above solenoid valves are same mechanism.
Pilot Shut-Off Valve Solenoid Valve
Travel Mode Solenoid Valve
To Pilot Valve
To Travel Motor
T1LA-03-06-001
Pilot Control Shut-Off Lever
Pilot Shut-Off Switch
T532-02-06-002
Travel Speed Mode Selector Switch
T1M9-01-02-002
T3-7-1
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure) Torque Control Solenoid Valve (Cab Version machine only) 1. When the air conditioner is OFF, ports A and T are connected. 2. If the air conditioner is switched ON, the solenoid valve is excited, and the spool is pushed down. 3. By this action, ports P and A are connected, and pressure oil is delivered from port A. The pressure oil acts on the control piston inside the main pump, thus decreasing the main pump swash plate tilting. Port P
Port T T1M9-03-07-003
Spool
Port A
Spring
T3-7-2
T1M9-03-07-004
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure) PILOT RELIEF VALVE
Spring
The pilot circuit of solenoid valve unit has a pilot relief valve, preventing the circuit pressure from rising more than the set pressure. The pressure oil from pilot pump always acts on the relief cap. When this pressure increases more than the set pressure (by spring force), the relief cap is moved, allowing the pressure oil to be relieved through the passage in the relief cap.
To Hydraulic Oil Tank
From Pilot Pump
Relief Cap
BACK PRESSURE VALVE Body
In the return line (control valve to oil cooler) of the main circuit, the back pressure valve is provided. The back pressure valve keeps pressure in the return line of the main circuit at a constant value (0.3 MPa), and has the improved make-up function.
Check Valve
Spring
Spring Support
T1LA-03-06-002
Snap Ring
IN OUT
T1M9-03-07-001
T3-7-3
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Upperstructure) AUXILIARY FLOW SELECTOR VALVE (OPTIONAL) The auxiliary flow selector valve is composed of the flow selector solenoid valve and the pressure reducing valve, and is installed in the auxiliary pilot control circuit (manifold port P to auxiliary pilot valve port P). If the auxiliary flow selector switch is turned ON, the solenoid valve is excited, and delivers pilot pressure to the auxiliary pilot valve after reducing it to the set value. Operation: 1. When the solenoid valve is OFF, the pilot pressure oil coming from port P flows in to the passage and spring chamber. 2. At this time, the spring force and pressure oil act on the upper end of spool B, and pressure oil only acts on the lower end. 3. By this action, spool B is pressed downward, and the pressure oil is kept unchanged, and outputted from port A. 4. If the solenoid valve is switched ON, spool A moves downward, and as the oil for the spring chamber is blocked by spool A, the pressure oil from port P flows into the passage only. 5. At this time, the pressure oil in the spring chamber flows to the hydraulic oil tank through the notched part of spool A. 6. By this action, the spring force is the only force acting on the upper end of spool B, and spool B moves upward receiving pressure from port A. 7. Then, within spool B, the circuit of A to spring chamber to port T is made, reducing the pressure of port A. 8. By this action, spool B moves downward again by the spring force. 9. By repeating actions like these, the pilot pressure oil from port P is delivered to the auxiliary pilot valve from port A after being reduced to the set value.
Port T
Spring Chamber
Spool A Spool B Port P Port A
Line
T1M9-03-07-005
Port T
Spring Chamber
Spool A Spool B Port P Port A
Passage
Port T
T1M9-03-07-006
Spring Chamber
Spool B
A Port P View A Port A T1M9-03-07-007
T3-7-4
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Undercarriage) SWING BEARING The swing bearing supports the upperstructure on the undercarriage and allows the upperstructure to rotate smoothly. The swing bearing is a single-row ball-type. The major parts of swing bearing are outer race (1), inner race (2) with internal gear, ball (5), support (4) and seal (3).
Outer race (1) is bolted to the upperstructure. Inner race (2) is bolted to the undercarriage. The internal gear meshes with the pinion of the swing device.
1
4 2
3
5
T507-03-02-001
1 - Outer Race 2 - Inner Race
3 - Seal
4 - Support
T3-8-1
5 - Ball
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Undercarriage) CENTER JOINT The center joint is a 360° rotating joint. It allows oil to flow to and from travel motors (12) and blade cylinder (13) without twisting hoses when the upperstructure is rotated. Spindle (10) is fastened to the undercarriage with bolts (4 used) and body (5) is fastened to the upperstructure with lock pins.
Body (5) rotates together with the upperstructure around spindle (10) during swing operation. Oil flows into and through the passages in body (5) to spindle (10) and then out of spindle (10) to travel motor (12) and blade cylinder (13). Oil seal (11) prevents oil leaks from the clearance between spindle (10) and body (5).
DR A B C D E F G
1
9
4
6
13
2 8
7
3
G F E
A B C D DR
2
Hydraulic Circuit
1
7
8 9
6
4
3
12
T1M9-03-08-002
T3-8-2
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Undercarriage) B View B
4
9
3 3
8
1
2
7
7
5
A
4
6 6
D
Mounting face to the track frame
2
11
4 10 1 9
8
A
Cross Section A-A T1M9-03-08-001
View C C
1 - Port F (Blade Lower) / Pressure Oil from Port F 2 - Port E (Blade Raise) / Pressure Oil from Port E 3 - Port G (for Travel Speed Changeover) / Pressure Oil from Port G 4 - Port DR (Drain) / Pressure Oil from Port DR
5 - Body 6 - Port A (Right Travel Forward) / Pressure Oil from Port A 7 - Port B (Right Travel Reverse) / Pressure Oil from Port B
T3-8-3
8 - Port C (Left Travel Forward) / Pressure Oil from Port C 9 - Port D (Left Travel Reverse) / Pressure Oil from Port D 10 - Spindle
11 - Seal 12 - Travel Motor 13 - Blade Cylinder
COMPONENT OPERATION / Others (Undercarriage) TRACK ADJUSTER The track adjuster located on the side frame is composed of spring (5) and adjuster cylinder (4). Spring (5) absorbs loads applied to the front idler. Adjuster cylinder (4) adjusts track sag.
â&#x20AC;˘ Grease is applied through the grease fitting into chamber (B) of adjuster cylinder (4) as illustrated below. The pressure of the grease pushes piston rod (3) out and decreases track sag. â&#x20AC;˘ To increase track sag, loosen valve (2) 1 to 1.5 turns counterclockwise to release grease from the track adjuster cylinder through the grease discharge outlet.
Grease Discharge Outlet
Grease Fitting
M1LA-07-036
1
2 Section A-A
B A
3
4
5
A
6
Grease Discharge Outlet
T1LD-03-08-001
1 - Nut 2 - Valve
34-
Piston Rod Adjuster Cylinder
5-
T3-8-4
Spring
6-
Bracket
SECTION 4
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST CONTENTS Group 1 Introduction
Group 5 Component Test
Operational Performance Test.................... T4-1-1
Primary Pilot Pressure ..................................T4-5-1
Preparation for Performance Tests ............. T4-1-2
Secondary Pilot Pressure .............................T4-5-2 Main Relief Valve Set Pressure ....................T4-5-3
Group 2 Standard Operational Performance Standard.............. T4-2-1 Main Pump P-Q Diagram ............................. T4-2-5
Group 3 Engine Test
Overload Relief Valve Set Pressure .............T4-5-6 Swing Motor Drainage ..................................T4-5-8 Travel Motor Drainage ................................T4-5-10 Revolution Sensing Valve
Engine Speed ............................................... T4-3-1
Output Pressure ........................................T4-5-12
Engine Compression Pressure..................... T4-3-2
Pump Delivery Pressure .............................T4-5-14
Valve Clearance ........................................... T4-3-4
Pump Driving Torque ..................................T4-5-16
Nozzle Check ............................................... T4-3-6
Auxiliary Flow Selector Valve
Injection Timing............................................. T4-3-8
Group 4 Excavator Test
Pressure (Optional) ...................................T4-5-17
Group 6 Adjustment
Travel Speed................................................. T4-4-1
Governor Adjustment ....................................T4-6-1
Track Revolution Speed ............................... T4-4-2 Mistrack Check ............................................. T4-4-3 Travel Motor Leakage................................... T4-4-4 Swing Speed................................................. T4-4-5 Swing Function Drift Check .......................... T4-4-6 Swing Motor Leakage................................... T4-4-7 Maximum Swingable Slant Angle ................. T4-4-8 Swing Bearing Play ...................................... T4-4-9 Hydraulic Cylinder Cycle Time ................... T4-4-10 Dig Function Drift........................................ T4-4-12 Control Lever Operating Force................... T4-4-13 Control Lever Stroke................................... T4-4-14 Combined Boom Raise/Swing Function Check......................................... T4-4-15
1M9T-4-1
(Blank)
1M9T-4-2
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Introduction OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST Use operational performance test procedure to quantitatively check all system and functions on the machine. Purpose of Performance Tests 1. To comprehensively evaluate each operational function by comparing the performance test data with the standard values. 2. According to the evaluation results, repair, adjust, or replace parts or components as necessary to restore the machine’s performance to the desired standard. 3. To economically operate the machine under optimal conditions.
Definition of “Allowable Limit” 1. Normal machine performance cannot be accomplished after exceeding this limit.
Kinds of Tests 1. Base machine performance test is to check the operational performance of each system such as engine, travel, swing, and hydraulic cylinders. 2. Hydraulic component unit test is to check the operational performance of each component such as hydraulic pump, motor, and various kinds of valves. Performance Standards “Performance Standard” is shown in tables to evaluate the performance test data. Precautions for Evaluation of Test Data 1. To evaluate not only that the test data are correct, but also in what range the test data are. 2. Be sure to evaluate the test data based on the machine operation hours, kinds and state of work loads, and machine maintenance conditions. The machine performance does not always deteriorate as the working hours increase. However, the machine performance is normally considered to reduce in proportion to the increase of the operation hours. Accordingly, restoring the machine performance by repair, adjustment, or replacement shall consider the number of the machine’s working hours. Definition of “Performance Standard” 1. Operation speed values and dimensions of the new machine. 2. Operational performance of new components adjusted to specifications. Allowable errors will be indicated as necessary.
T4-1-1
2. Repair or adjustment is impossible after exceeding this limit. 3. Therefore, in consideration of operation efficiency and maintenance expense, proper maintenance shall be carried out before reaching the “Allowable Limit”.
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Introduction PREPARATION TESTS
FOR
PERFORMANCE
Observe the following rules in order to carry out performance tests accurately and safely. THE MACHINE 1. Repair any defects and damage found, such as oil or water leaks, loose bolts, cracks and so on, before starting to test. TEST AREA 1. Select a hard and flat surface. 2. Secure enough space to allow the machine to run straight more than 20 m (65 ft 7 in), and to make a full swing with the front attachment extended. 3. If required, rope off the test area and provide signboards to keep unauthorized personnel away. PRECAUTIONS 1. Before starting to test, agree upon the signals to be employed for communication among coworkers. Once the test is started, be sure to communicate with each other using these signals, and to follow them without fail. 2. Operate the machine carefully and always give first priority to safety. 3. While testing, always take care to avoid accidents due to landslides or contact with high-voltage power lines. Always confirm that there is sufficient space for full swings. 4. Avoid polluting the machine and the ground with leaking oil. Use oil pans to catch escaping oil. Pay special attention to this when removing hydraulic pipings. MAKE PRECISE MEASUREMENT 1. Accurately calibrate test instruments in advance to obtain correct data. 2. Carry out tests under the exact test conditions prescribed for each test item. 3. Repeat the same test and confirm that the test data obtained can be produced repeatedly. Use mean values of measurements if necessary.
T4-1-2
T105-06-01-003
T505-06-01-003
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard OPERATIONAL DARD
PERFORMANCE
STAN-
This Operational Performance Standard values are listed below. Refer to the correspondence section in T4-3 and after for the details of measurement method.
Item
The value in ( ) is shown for reference only. * The standard measurement condition is as follows; Engine Speed Control Lever: Full Stroke Hydraulic Oil Temperature: 50±5 °C (122±9 °F)
ZAXIS40U-2
ENGINE SPEED min Slow Idle Speed Fast Idle Speed Fast Idle Speed (Bucket Relief Operation) Fast Idle Speed (Boom Relief Operation) ENGINE COMPRESSION 2 PRESSURE MPa (kgf/cm , psi)
ZAXIS50U-2
VALVE CLEARANCE (IN, EX) NOZZLE INJECTION PRESSURE
mm
2
MPa (kgf/cm , psi)
INJECTION TIMING (Fuel Pump Mounting Standard Angle) TRAVEL SPEED Fast Speed Mode (Rubber Crawler/Steel Crawler) Slow Speed Mode (Rubber Crawler/Steel Crawler) TRACK REVOLUTION SPEED Fast Speed Mode (Rubber Crawler/Steel Crawler) Slow Speed Mode (Rubber Crawler/Steel Crawler) MISTRACK (Fast Speed・Slow Speed) TRAVEL MOTOR LEAKAGE SWING SPEED SWING FUNCTION DRIFT SWING MOTOR LEAKAGE MAXIMUM SWINGABLE SLANT ANGLE SWING BEARING PLAY
deg.
1150±50 2650±50 2250±50 2250±50 3.43±0.1 (35±1, 499±14.5)
← ← ← ←
0.2±0.05
←
19.6∼20.6 (200∼210, 2849∼2995)
←
25°
←
←
16.0±1.5 / 17.2±1.5 25.7±1.5 / 27.6±1.5
← Refer to T4-4-2
11.3±1.5 / 11.9±1.5 19.6±1.5 / 20.7±1.5
sec/3 rev. mm/90° mm/5 min
deg. mm
Refer to T4-3-8
←
sec/3 rev.
mm/3 min
After engine warm-up Refer to T4-3-2 With engine cold Refer to T4-3-4 Refer to T4-3-6
Refer to T4-4-1
sec/20 m
mm/20 m
Remarks Refer to T4-3-1
-1
← ←
200 or less
←
0 19.3±1.5 163 or less
← ← ←
0
←
21 or more
20 or more
0.4 or less
←
T4-2-1
Refer to T4-4-3 Refer to T4-4-4 Refer to T4-4-5 Refer to T4-4-6 Bucket loaded Refer to T4-4-7 Bucket loaded Refer to T4-4-8 Refer to T4-4-9
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard
Item HYDRAULIC CYLINDER CYCLE TIME Boom Raise (Canopy Version) Boom Lower (Canopy Version) Arm Roll-In Arm Roll-Out Bucket Roll-In Bucket Roll-Out Right Boom Swing Left Boom Swing Blade Raise Blade Lower DIG FUNCTION DRIFT
Arm Lever (ISO Lever Pattern: Swing) Bucket Lever Swing Lever (ISO Lever Pattern: Arm)
Boom Swing Pedal
2.0±0.3 2.6±0.3 2.6±0.5 2.1±0.3 2.3±0.3 1.7±0.3 7.0±0.5 7.0±0.5 2.5±0.5 3.1±0.5
2.2±0.3 3.0±0.3 2.7±0.5 2.2±0.3 2.6±0.3 1.8±0.3 ← ← 2.5 ± 0.6 3.1 ± 0.6
Remarks Refer to T4-4-10
Bucket loaded Refer to T4-4-12
mm/5 min
Boom Lever
Blade Lever
ZAXIS50U-2
sec
Boom Cylinder Arm Cylinder Bucket Cylinder Bucket Bottom Blade Cylinder Blade Cylinder (When jacked up) Boom Swing Cylinder CONTROL LEVER/PEDAL OPERATING FORCE N (kgf, lbf)
Travel Lever
ZAXIS40U-2
5 or less 8 or less 5 or less 100 or less 3 or less 15 or less 3 or less
← ← ← ← ← ← ← HITACHI Lever Pattern Refer to T4-4-13
11.0 or less (1.1, 2.5 or less) 11.0 or less (1.1, 2.5 or less) 11.0 or less (1.1, 2.5 or less) 11.0 or less (1.1, 2.5 or less) 17.0 or less (1.7, 3.8 or less) 19.0 or less (1.9, 4.3 or less) 54.0 or less (5.5, 12.2 or less)
T4-2-2
← ← ← ← ← ← ←
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard
Item
ZAXIS40U-2
ZAXIS50U-2
HITACHI Lever Pattern Refer to T4-4-14
CONTROL LEVER/PEDAL STROKE mm (in)
Boom Lever Arm Lever (ISO Lever Pattern: Swing) Bucket Lever Swing Lever (ISO Lever Pattern: Arm) Travel Lever Blade Lever Boom Swing Pedal BOOM RAISE/SWING (Bucket Empty) Height Time PRIMARY PILOT PRESSURE SECONDARY PILOT PRESSURE MAIN RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE
100±10 (3.9±0.4) 95±10 (3.7±0.4) 95±10 (3.7±0.4) 100±10 (3.9±0.4) 100±10 (3.9±0.4) 55±10 (2.2±0.4) 18±5 (0.7±0.2)
← ← ← ← ← ← ←
3000 or more 2.3±0.3
← ←
6.6±0.5 (67±5, 960±73) 2.9±0.5 (30±5, 422±73)
←
Refer to T4-5-1
←
Refer to T4-5-2
Refer to T4-4-15 mm sec 2
MPa (kgf/cm , psi) 2
MPa (kgf/cm , psi)
Measure at Machine Refer to T4-5-3
2
MPa (kgf/cm , psi)
25.3±1.0 (258±10, 3678±145) 25.5±1.0 (260±10, 3707±145) 21.6±1.0 (220±10, 3140±145)
Main Pumps P1
Travel
Swing
← ← ←
OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE SET 2 PRESSURE MPa (kgf/cm , psi)
at constant speed (Fast/Slow)
← Refer to T4-5-8
L/min (gal)
0.5 or less (0.1 or less)
at constant speed TRAVEL MOTOR DRAINAGE
Measure at Bench Refer to T4-5-6 26.5±1(270±10, 3852±145)
Boom, Arm, Bucket SWING MOTOR DRAINAGE
Remarks
← Refer to T4-5-10
L/min (gal)
0.3 or less / 0.2 or less (0.08 or less / 0.05 or less)
T4-2-3
←
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard
Item
ZAXIS40U-2
ZAXIS50U-2
REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE (Pressure PGR)
Remarks Measure at bench Refer to T4-5-12
2
MPa (kgf/cm , psi)
Fast Idle Slow Idle PUMP DELIVERY PRESSURE 2 (Lever in Neutral) MPa (kgf/cm , psi) Fast Idle Slow Idle
1.96 (20, 285) 0.49 (5.0, 71)
← ←
Reference Reference Refer to T4-5-14
3.1 (31.8, 451) 2.3 (23.3, 334)
← ←
Reference Reference
T4-2-4
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard MAIN PUMP P-Q DIAGRAM • P-Q control (Torque control) (Reference: Calculated Valve) • Rated Pump Speed: 2500 min-1 (rpm) • Hydraulic Oil Temperature: 50±5 °C (122±41 °F) • Pilot Pump Pressure: 5.9 MPa (60 kgf/cm2, 858psi)
• P-Q Point
• P-Q Point (Air conditioner: ON
(PC pressure = 3.9 MPa (40 kgf/cm2, 567 psi)) Delivery Pressure Flow Rate MPa (kgf/cm2, psi) L/min (GPM) A 1.96 (20, 285) 126 (33.2) B 4.6 (47, 669) 125 (33) C 6.67 (68, 970) [121.5] [(32)] G 15 (153, 2181) [69] [(18.2)] H 24.5 (250, 3562) [40] [(10.6)] The valve indicated in [ ] is only a reference valve.
(Air conditioner: OFF (PC Pressure = 0 MPa)) Delivery Pressure Flow Rate MPa (kgf/cm2, psi) L/min (GPM) A 1.96 (20, 285) 126 (33.2) B 4.6 (47, 669) 125 (33) C 6.67 (68, 970) [121.5] [(32)] D 8.7 (88.7, 1265) 116.5 (30.7) E 16.67 (170, 2473) [70] [(18.5)] F 24.5 (250, 3562) 47.5 (12.5) The valve indicated in [ ] is only a reference valve.
L/min
A
B
C
D
E
Flow Rate G
F
H
Delivery Pressure
T4-2-5
MPa (kgf/cm2 )
T1M9-04-02-018
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Standard (Blank)
T4-2-6
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test ENGINE SPEED Summary: 1. Be sure to check the engine speed before performing all other tests, since it always affects test results.
Engine Control Dial
Preparation: 1. Warm up the machine, until the engine coolant temperature reaches 50 °C (122 °F) or more, and hydraulic oil temperature is 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). 2. Move the engine control dial from slow idle to fast idle. Confirm that the fuel injection pump governor lever comes into contact with the slow-idle and fast-idle stoppers. 3. Connect an engine tachometer to the fuel injection line. Measurement: 1. Depending upon the engine speed measured, make measurement as per the following table. Engine Control Auto Idle Switch Dial Slow Idle Slow Idle OFF (No-load) Fast Idle Fast Idle OFF (No-load)
T1M9-01-02-002
Governor Lever
2. Repeat measurement three times and calculate the mean value. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T1M9-04-02-019
Stopper
T4-3-1
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test ENGINE COMPRESSION PRESSURE Summary: 1. Measure compression pressure in the cylinders to check for a reduction in engine power. 2. Check exhaust gas color. Keep track of engine oil consumption. 3. Check for abnormalities in the intake system, including the air cleaner.
Compression Gauge Kit
Preparation: 1. Warm up the engine. 2. Disconnect the negative terminal at the battery, and then remove engine stop solenoid connectors. 3. Reconnect the negative terminal to battery. 4. Remove the fuel injection valve of the cylinder to be measured, and attach a pressure gauge (compression gauge kit for YANMAR TNV88) NOTE: Attach the gasket to the end of the adaptor, and tighten it firmly. T1M9-04-02-001
4. Confirm that the batteries are charged. Measurement: 1. Turn the starter to crank the engine. Record the compression pressure of each cylinder. 2. Repeat measurement three times and calculate the mean value. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
NOTE: Engine speed and compression pressure.
4 Compression Pressure
Compression 3 Pressure (MPa)
2
(kgf/cm ) 2
-1
Engine Speed min (rpm)
T4-3-2
T1M9-04-02-020
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test (Blank)
T4-3-3
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test VALVE CLEARANCE Flywheel Side
Summary: 1. Perform the measurement when the engine is cold. 2. Before removing the head cover, clean the area around the head cover to prevent the entry of dust into the engine. Preparation: 1. Remove the head cover. 2. Locate the top dead center (TDC) in the compression stroke of piston No.1 (on the flywheel side). Turn the crank pulley counterclockwise viewed from the flywheel, and have the “mark groove” coincide with the “Mark-0” of the timing gear case cover. At this time, if both of the locker arms of the inlet and exhaust valves for cylinder No. 1 have play when operated manually, TDC for cylinder No. 1 is properly located. If not, turn the crank pulley 360 degrees, and check one more time. NOTE: For turning the crank pulley, remove the fan guard, and turn the fan with one hand while holding the fan belt with the other. If the fuel injection valve of each cylinder is removed in advance, the crank pulley can be easily rotated with no compressive force. IMPORTANT: In case no play is felt for both of the locker arms of the inlet and exhaust valves for cylinder No. 1 even after turning the pulley 4 times, abnormal wear of the valve seats is suspected, and disassembled examination is necessary.
T4-3-4
Mark-0
Crank Pulley
T1M9-04-02-002
Mark Groove
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test Measurement: 1. Measure the valve clearance between the rocker arm and valve. 2. Measure the clearances of valves marked ({) in the table below. Cylinder No.
1 Valve
Cylinder No.1 at top dead center Cylinder No.1 at overlap
I
2 E
I
3 E
I
{ { {
Rocker Arm
Adjust Screw
Lock Nut
4 E
I
E
{ × ×
× ×
T1M9-04-02-003
3. Turn flywheel 360°, then measure the valve clearances marked (×) in the above table. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Adjustment 1. Loosen the lock nut and the adjusting screw of the locker arm. 2. Confirm that the valve cap has no tilting, dust ingress, or wear. 3. Insert a thickness gauge of 0.2 mm between the locker arm and the valve head, and tighten the lock nut after adjusting the valve clearance. IMPORTANT: The valve clearances marked with { are adjustable when piston No. 1 is at TDC, and those marked with ¯ are adjustable when Piston No. 4 is at TDC. In case no play is felt for the locker arm to have play, abnormal wear of the valve seat is suspected, and disassembled examination is necessary.
T4-3-5
Normal
Abnormal T1M9-04-02-004
T1M9-04-02-005
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test NOZZLE CHECK Summary: 1. Check the injection pressure and the spray pattern with a nozzle tester. 2. Before starting work, clean the fuel injector mounting area to avoid contamination in the engine. Preparation: 1. Remove all fuel injector and fuel injection pipings from the engine. 2. Attach a fuel injector to nozzle tester.
Fuel Injector
Measurement: CAUTION: Never touch spray directly. The fuel spray from the nozzle may penetrate the skin, resulting in serious injury. If fuel penetrates into the blood stream, it may cause blood toxication. 1. Injection pressure After attaching the fuel injector to nozzle tester, strongly make several strokes of the tester to inject fuel. Then, while operating the tester at approx. 60 time strokes a minute, measure the fuel injection pressure. Use shims in the fuel injector to adjust the pressure.
T1M9-04-02-007
Fuel Injector Over Flow Pipe
Nozzle Holder
NOTE: If the shim is thickened by 0.1 mm, pressure rises by about 1.9 MPa (19 kgf/cm2). 2. Spray pattern For this test, turn the pressure tester knob to bypass the pressure gauge. Attach the fuel injector to the nozzle tester. Strongly make several strokes of the tester and check the fuel spray pattern.
Shim
NOTE: Use clean diesel oil. 3. Oil tight condition Keep the pressure slightly below the injection pressure. Check for fuel leak from around the nozzle tip. T1M9-04-02-008
T4-3-6
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test Evaluation: 1. Standard Injection Pressure: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. 2. During Spray Injection 2-1. After injecting spray two to three times, gradually raise pressure, and halt it at slightly lower than 2 MPa (20 kgf/cm2), and confirm that there is no fuel drop coming out of the nozzle end. 2-2. During injection with a nozzle tester, in case an extremely large amount of fuel leakage takes place out of the overflow connector, confirm by tightening it again. In case the situation is not bettered, replace the nozzle assembly. 2-3. Operate the nozzle tester lever at the speed of one or two strokes a second, and confirm that no abnormal spray takes place. 2-4. In case spray conditions shown below cannot be obtained, make readjustment or replacement of the parts. -Spray spread angles are similar. (θ) -Spray direction angles are similar. (ι) -The whole spray is like fine mist. -Injection ends with no dripping.
T4-3-7
(Normal)
(Abnormal)
T1M9-04-02-009
T1M9-04-02-010
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test INJECTION TIMING Preparation
Fuel Pump
IMPORTANT: Measurement of injection timing is impossible in the case of an engine provided with the MP type fuel injection pump. Therefore, be sure to assemble the injection pump fully carefully in accordance with the descriptions given in the engine maintenance manual. Adjustment Explanation is made here about the procedure for replacing, mounting, or dismounting of the fuel injection pump.
Fuel Pump Drive Gear
Flange Bolt (Do not disassemble) Drive Gear Fixing Bolt
CAUTION: When dismounting the fuel pump, be sure not to loosen the four screws fixing the pump flange and the fuel pump driving gear. If they are loosened, adjustment of the injection timing becomes very difficult. 1. Before dismounting the fuel pump, put mating marks with a white felt pen on the respective contacting part of the fuel pump driving gear and the idle gear.
T4-3-8
Crank gear Idle Gear T1M9-04-02-013
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test 2. Before dismounting the fuel pump, adhere to the gear case a injection angle adjustment sticker with its center line coinciding with the mark-off line on the fuel pump side. 3. Dismount the fuel pump, and read the injection angle marked on the fuel pump. 4. Read the injection angle marked on the fuel pump to be mounted, and figure out the difference from that of the dismounted fuel pump.
Center Line
1° 1°
0.5° (Injection Angle Adjustment Sticker)
NOTE: In case the same fuel pump is mounted again, the angle difference is zero. Injection angle difference (cam angle) = (injection angle of the mounted fuel pump) (injection angle of the dismounted fuel pump)
T1M9-04-02-014
Sticker
IMPORTANT: In case the injection angle of the fuel pump is difficult to read, consult the engine manufacturer for it by giving information on the fuel pump model and serial number. 5. Attach the fuel pump temporarily to the gear case. Have the mating marks put in advance during disassembling coincide with each other, mount the driving gear to the camshaft, and tighten the nut. Tightening torque of fuel pump driving gear nut: 78 to 88 N⋅m (8 to 9 kgf⋅m, 564 to 637 lbf⋅ft) 6. Read the injection angle difference figured out in procedure 5 with the adjustment sticker measure (minimum 0.5 degrees, cam angle), and adjust the mounting angle of the fuel pump. NOTE: For the injection angle difference of +1 degree, turn the fuel pump 1 degree outward in relation to the cylinder block, and for – 1 degree, turn the fuel pump 1 degree toward the cylinder block. 7. Tighten the nut for attaching the fuel pump.
T4-3-9
Fuel Pump
Gear Case Mark-off Line
Mark-off Line
T1M9-04-02-015
Adjustment Sticker
Center Line
In case of +1°
In case of +0.25°
(Adjustment of Injection Angle)
T1M9-04-02-016
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Engine Test NOTE: The standard mounting angle for the fuel pump is 25 degrees.
Cylinder Block Side
(Fuel Pump Fixing Angle)
NOTE: For advancing or delaying the injection timing, change the mounting angle of the fuel pump. For example, in case the injection angle is advanced by 2 degrees, loosen the nut for fixing the fuel pump to the gear case, turn the fuel pump 1 degree outward in relation to the cylinder block, and tighten the nut for fixing the pump. For delaying the injection timing, mount the pump the other way around.
T1M9-04-02-017
Delay Advance
Cylinder Block Side
T1M9-04-02-017
Fuel Pump Fixing Bolt (Adjustment of Injection Timing)
T4-3-10
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test TRAVEL SPEED Summary: 1. To check overall performance of travel drive system (between main pump and travel motor), measure the time required for the excavator to travel a test track. Preparation: 1. Adjust the track sag of both tracks to be equal. 2. Prepare a level and solid test track 20 m (65.5 ft) in length, with an extra length of 3 to 5 m (9.8 to 16 ft) on both ends for machine acceleration and deceleration. 3. Hold the bucket 0.3 to 0.5 m (1.0 to 1.6 ft) above the ground with the arm and bucket extended. 4. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). End
Arm Roll-in, Bucket Roll-in Start Raise bucket 0.3 to 0.5 m (1.0 to 1.6 ft) above the ground.
20 m (65.5 ft) 3 to 5 m (9.8 to 16 ft) extra length for acceleration / deceleration
Measurement: 1. The test should be performed with each mode (slow and fast travel speeds) in the fast-idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Start traveling the machine in the acceleration zone with the travel levers at full stroke. 3. Measure the time required to travel 20 m (65 ft 7 in). 4. After measuring the forward travel speed, turn the upperstructure 180° and measure the reverse travel speed. 5. Repeat steps (2) and (4) three times in each direction and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-1
3 to 5 m (9.8 to 16 ft) extra length for acceleration / deceleration
T570-06-03-001
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test TRACK REVOLUTION SPEED Summary: 1. With the track raised off ground, measure the track revolution cycle time to check the total track drive system (between main pump and travel motor). Preparation: 1. Adjust the track sag of both side tracks equally. 2. On the track to be measured, mark one shoe with chalk. CAUTION: Support the lifted track securely with wooden blocks. 3. Swing the upperstructure 90° and lower the bucket to raise the track off ground. Keep the boom-arm angle between 90 to 110° as shown. Measurement: 1. The test should be performed with each mode (slow and fast travel speeds) in the fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Operate the travel control lever of the raised track in the full forward or reverse stroke. 3. Measure the time required for 3 revolutions of shoe in both directions. 4. Raise the other track and repeat the procedures. 5. Repeat steps (2) and (4) three times for each track and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. NOTE: The measured values may vary widely. The evaluation based on the results obtained from the 20 m (65.5 ft) travel speed check is more recommendable. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-2
90 to 110° Mark
T570-06-03-009
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test MISTRACK CHECK Summary: 1. Allow the machine to travel 20 m (65.5 ft). Measure the maximum tread deviation from the tread chord line drawn between the travel start and end points to check the performance equilibrium between both sides of the travel device systems (between main pump and travel motor). 2. If measured on a concrete surface, the tread deviation has a trend to decrease. Preparation: 1. Adjust the track sag of both tracks to be equal. 2. Provide a flat, solid test yard 20 m (65.5 ft) in length, with extra length of 3 to 5 m (9.8 to 16 ft) on both ends for machine acceleration and deceleration. 3. Hold the bucket 0.3 to 0.5 m (1.0 to 1.6 ft) above the ground with the arm and bucket extended. 4. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F).
Max Distance
20 m (65.5 ft) T570-06-03-002
Measurement: 1. The test should be performed with each mode (slow and fast travel speeds) in the fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Start traveling the machine in the acceleration zone with the travel levers at full stroke. 3. Measure the distance between a straight 20 m (65.5 ft) line and the tread made by the machine. 4. After measuring the tracking in forward travel, swing the upperstructure 180° and measure that in reverse travel. 5. Repeat steps (3) and (4) three times in each direction and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T 4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-3
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test TRAVEL MOTOR LEAKAGE Summary: 1. Measure the amount of travel motor slippage on a slope, which is due to travel motor inner oil leak. Preparation: 1. The surface of the test slope must be even, with a gradient of 20% (11.31 °). 2. Raise the bucket 0.2 to 0.3 m above the ground with the arm and bucket cylinders fully extended (rolled in) 3. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Measure the slip amount of travel motor at parking. 1-1. Climb the slope and place the travel levers in neutral. 1-2. Stop the engine. 1-3. After parking the machine, makes aligning marks on the side frame and a track link or shoe. 1-4. After 3 minutes, measure discrepancy between the marks.
T570-06-03-010
Amount of slippage after 3 minutes
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T505-06-03-005
T4-4-4
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test SWING SPEED Summary: 1. Measure the time required to swing three complete turns to check the total swing drive system (between the main pump and swing motor). Preparation: 1. Check the lubrication of swing gear and swing bearing. 2. Place the machine on level, solid ground with ample space for swinging. Do not conduct this test on slopes. 3. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of arm top pin is even with the boom foot pin. The bucket must be empty. 4. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F) CAUTION: Before starting the measurement, make sure that there are no person or obstacles within the swing area. Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. Operate swing control lever fully. 2. Measure the time required to swing 3 turns in one direction. 3. Operate swing control lever fully in the opposite direction and measure the time required for 3 turns. 4. Repeat steps (2) and (3) three times each and calculate the average values. Evaluation Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-5
Even with the Boom Foot Pin. T570-06-03-003
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test SWING FUNCTION DRIFT CHECK Summary: 1. To check the valve unit performance, measure the swing drift on the bearing outer circumference when stopping after a 90° full speed swing. 2. Mechanical brake for swing parking is installed on swing motor. Preparation: 1. Check the lubrication of swing gear and swing bearing. 2. Place the machine on level, solid ground with ample space for swinging. Do not conduct this test on slopes. 3. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of bucket pin is even with the boom foot pin. The bucket must be empty. 4. Make the marks on the swing bearing and track frame. 5. Swing the upperstructure 90°. 6. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). CAUTION: Before starting the measurement, make sure that there are no person or obstacles within the swing area. Measurement: 1. Start and run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. Operate the swing control lever fully to swing the upper-structure. When the marks on the swing bearing and track frame meet, return the swing lever to the neutral position. 2. After the swing movement stops, measure the arc length between two aligning marks along the circumference of the swing bearing. 3. Align the marks again, swing 90° then test in the opposite direction. 4. Repeat steps (1) and (2) three times each and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
Make aligning marks on the swing bearing outer circumference and track frame. T570-06-03-004
Swing the upperstructure 90° to the test start position. T570-06-03-005
Measure the arc length along the circumference of swing bearing.
Mark on the track frame Mark on the swing bearing T105-06-03-010
Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-6
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test SWING MOTOR LEAKAGE Summary: 1. To check swing parking brake performance, measure the upperstructure drift after parking the machine on a slope with the upperstructure positioned 90° to the slope. (Mechanical brake for swing parking is installed on swing device.) Preparation: 1. Check the lubrication of swing gear and swing bearing. 2. Load the bucket with either soil or a weight equivalent to the weight standard. Weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 210 kg (463 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 240 kg (529 lb) 3. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of bucket pin is even with the boom foot pin. 4. Park the machine on a flat slope with a gradient of 15±1°. 5. Climb the slope, then swing the upperstructure 90°toward the slope. Make aligning marks on the swing bearing circumference and track frame. 6. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). T570-06-03-006
Measurement: 1. Start the engine and maintain engine speed at idle speed. After 5 minutes, measure the difference between the marks on the swing bearing circumference and the track frame. 2. Perform the measurement under the following two conditions: ⋅ When the brake is applied (with the pilot control shut-off lever in the LOCK position). ⋅ When the brake is released (with the pilot control shut-off lever in the UNLOCK position). 3. Perform the measurement on both right and left swing directions. 4. Perform the measurement three times in each direction and calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
Measure the arc length along the swing bearing circumference.
Mark on the track frame Mark on the swing bearing T105-06-03-010
Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-7
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test MAXIMUM SWINGABLE SLANT ANGLE Summary: 1. To measure the maximum slope angle on which the upperstructure can swing, park the machine on a slope with the upperstructure positioned 90° to the slope. Preparation: 1. Check the lubrication of swing gear and swing bearing. 2. Load the bucket with either soil or a weight equivalent to the weight standard. Weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 210 kg (463 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 240 kg (529 lb) 3. With the arm cylinder fully retracted and the bucket cylinder fully extended, hold the bucket so that the height of bucket pin is even with the boom foot pin. 4. Climb the slope, and then set the upperstructure 90° to the slope. 5. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. Operate the swing control lever fully to swing the upperstructure to the uphill side of slope. 2. If swing is possible, measure the slant angle on the cab floor. 3. Increase the slope angle. Measure on both right and left swing directions. 4. Perform the measurement three times. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-8
T570-06-03-006
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test SWING BEARING PLAY Summary: 1. Measure the swing play with a dial gauge to check the wear of bearing races and balls. Preparation: 1. Check the swing bearing mounting bolt for looseness. 2. Check the lubrication of swing bearing. Confirm that bearing rotation is smooth and noiseless. 3. Install a dial gauge with a magnetic base on the track frame as shown. 4. Position the upperstructure so that the boom aligns with the tracks facing towards the travel motors. 5. Position the dial gauge so that its needle point comes into contact with the bottom face of the bearing outer race as shown. 6. Bucket should be empty. NOTE: The measured value may differ depending on where the dial gauge magnetic base is located. Mount the magnetic base directly onto the round frame trunk or as close to the round frame trunk as possible. Measurement: 1. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of the bucket pin is even with the boom foot pin. Record the dial gauge reading (h1). 2. Lower the bucket to the ground and use it to raise the front idler 0.5 m (20 in). Record the dial gauge reading (h2). 3. Calculate bearing play (H) from this data (h1 and h2) as follows: H = h2 â&#x2C6;&#x2019; h 1
Magnetic Base
Dial Gauge
T105-06-03-014
Round Frame Trunk
Magnetic Base T105-06-03-015
Measurement: [h1]
Even with the Boom Foot Pin. T570-06-03-003
Measurement: [h2]
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
0.5 m (20 in) T570-06-03-007
T4-4-9
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test HYDRAULIC CYLINDER CYCLE TIME
Boom Cylinder
Summary: 1. To totally check the front attachment function performance (between the main pump and each cylinder) by measuring each cylinder cycle time. 2. Bucket should be empty. Preparation: 1. Take the following machine position: T570-06-03-011
Arm Cylinder
1-1. When measuring the boom cylinder: With the arm cylinder fully retracted and the bucket cylinder fully extended, lower the bucket to the ground. 1-2. When measuring the arm cylinder: With the bucket cylinder fully extended, adjust the boom and arm cylinder strokes so that when the arm is moved half the full stroke, the arm longitudinal center line perpendicularly points to the ground and the bucket bottom clearance above the ground is approx. 0.5 m (20 in).
0.5 m (20 in) T570-06-03-012
Bucket Cylinder
1-3. When measuring the bucket cylinder: Adjust the boom and arm cylinder strokes so that when the bucket is moved half the full stroke, the bucket edge points to the ground perpendicularly. 1-4. When measuring the boom swing cylinder: Set the boom swing cylinder in either the right or left swing stroke end position. 1-5. When measuring the blade cylinder: Lower the bucket to the ground to raise the machine front off the ground and secure the height space to allow the blade to move up-and-down full stroke.
T105-06-03-020
Boom Swing Cylinder
2. Maintain hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F).
Blade Cylinder
T523-06-03-006
T570-06-03-007
T4-4-10
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. Operate each cylinder as follows: (The cylinder stroke excludes the cushion range.) 1-1. Measure the boom cylinder. Measure the time required to raise or lower the boom while operating the boom control lever full stroke. 1-2. Measuring the arm cylinder. Measure the time required to roll in or out the arm while operating the arm control lever full stroke. 1-3. Measuring the bucket cylinder. Measure the time required to roll in or out the bucket while operating the bucket control lever full stroke. 1-4. Measuring the boom swing cylinder Measure the time required to swing the front attachment from right to left or vice versa while operating the boom swing pedal full stroke. 1-5. Measuring the blade cylinder Measure the time required to raise or lower the blade while operating the blade control lever full stroke. 2. Repeat each measurement three times and calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T 4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
T4-4-11
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test DIG FUNCTION DRIFT Summary: 1. With the bucket loaded, measure dig function drift, which can be caused by oil leakage in the control valve and / or boom, arm, bucket, blade and boom swing cylinders.
Retraction
2. When testing the dig function drift just after cylinder replacement, slowly operate each cylinder to its stroke end to purge trapped air prior to testing. Preparation: 1. Load the bucket with either soil or a weight equivalent to the weight standard. Weight: ZAXIS40U-2: 210 kg (463 lb) ZAXIS50U-2: 240 kg (529 lb) 2. With the arm cylinder fully retracted and bucket cylinder fully extended, had the bucket pin height even with the boom foot pin. When measuring the boom swing cylinder, climb the slope with a gradient of 15±1 ° and set the upperstructure 90 ° to the slope. 3. Retract arm cylinder and bucket cylinder approx. 50 mm (2 in) to away from the cushion range. 4. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F).
Extension
Retraction
Arm Top Pin is even with Boom Foot Pin.
Front Drift
Extension
T570-06-03-008
T570-06-03-006
Boom, Bucket and Blade Cylinder Retraction Mark
Mark
Measurement: 1. Stop the engine. 2. After five minutes, measure the boom, bucket and blade cylinder retraction, arm and boom swing cylinder extension, and amount of the bucket drift. 3. Repeat step 2. three times and calculate the mean values.
T110-06-03-002
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
Arm Cylinder Extension
Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B". Mark
T110-06-03-001
Boom Swing Cylinder Extension
T506-06-03-001
T4-4-12
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test CONTROL LEVER OPERATING FORCE Summary: 1. Use a spring scale to measure the maximum force needed to move each control lever and pedal. 2. Measure the operating force at the center of each lever grip. Preparation: 1. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). CAUTION: Before the measurement, make sure there are no personnel or obstacles within the swing area. Measurement: 1. Start the engine. 2. Measure the maximum operating force with each boom raise, arm, bucket, swing lever, full stroke. 3. Measure the maximum operating force with the boom lower lever full stroke until the fully raised boom comes in contact with the ground. 4. Operate swing lever and measure the maximum operating force with swing relieved after securing the front attachment to prevent swinging. 5. Lower the bucket to the ground to raise one track off the ground. Operate the travel lever to full stroke and measure the maximum operating force. When finished, lower the track and then jack up the other track. 6. Repeat each measurement three times and calculate the mean values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-4-13
T107-06-03-003
T107-06-03-004
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test CONTROL LEVER STROKE Summary: 1. Measure each lever stroke at the lever top using a ruler. 2. Measure the lever stroke at the grip center of each control lever. As for the boom swing pedal, measure the stroke from the center position to stopper. 3. In case lever stroke play is present in the neutral position, add half (1/2) the play present to both side lever strokes. Preparation: Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). T107-06-03-005
Measurement: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Measure the boom, arm, bucket, swing, travel and blade control lever strokes at the grip top center from the neutral position to the stroke end. On the boom swing pedal, measure the straight distance between the center and fully depressed positions at tip of the pedal. 3. Take the measurements by the straight stroke distances. 4. Conduct the measurement three times. Calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-4-14
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test COMBINED BOOM RAISE/SWING FUNCTION CHECK Summary: 1. Check boom raise and swing movement and speeds while operating both functions simultaneously to evaluate combined functions. 2. Confirm that no hesitation is found with the engine running at maximum speed. Preparation: 1. With the arm rolled out and the bucket rolled in, lower the bucket to the ground. The bucket should be empty. 2. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F).
M570-07-005
CAUTION: Always make sure that the area is clear and that co-workers are out of the swing area before starting the measurement. Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Raise the boom and swing simultaneously, both at full stroke. When the upperstructure rotates 90°, release the control levers to stop both functions. Measure the time required to swing 90° and the height (H) of the bucket teeth. 3. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average values.
T1M9-04-04-001
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Standard. Remedy: Refer to T5-3 "Troubleshooting B".
H
T1M9-04-04-002
T4-4-15
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Excavator Test (Blank)
T4-4-16
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test PRIMARY PILOT PRESSURE Preparation: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Turn the filling cap on hydraulic oil tank to bleed air. 3. Disconnect the hose (9/16-18 UNF) at the pilot filter. Install pressure gauge assembly (ST 6932) with tee (ST 6572) to the pilot filter. : 22 mm, 19 mm 4. Start the engine and check for oil leakage from the gauge connection. 5. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Run engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Measure the pressure without load. 3. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average value.
Pilot Filter
Adjusting Screw
Hose (9/16-18 UNF)
T1M9-04-05-001
Lock Nut
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. Adjustment: Adjustment the relief valve on 2-unit solenoid valve if necessary. 1. Loosen the lock nut. 2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust the pressure. : 6 mm T1LA-03-06-002
3. Tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 15 to 20 N⋅m (1.5 to 2.0 kgf⋅m, 10.8 to 14.5 lbf⋅ft) 4. After completing the adjustment, recheck the set pressure. NOTE: Standard change in pressure. Screw Turns Change in Relief Pressure
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
182
363
545
726
(kgf/cm )
(1.85)
(3.7)
(5.55)
(7.40)
(psi)
(13.4)
(26.8)
(40.1)
(53.5)
kPa 2
T4-5-1
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test SECONDARY PILOT PRESSURE Preparation: 1. Properly shut down the engine. 2. Turn the filling cap on hydraulic oil tank to bleed air. 3. Install pressure gauge (ST 6932) and tee (ST 6573) to the end of pilot hose (7/16-20 UNF) at the respective control valve spool end, as illustrated. : 19 mm, 17 mm
Pilot Hose
Tee (ST 6573) Pressure Gauge (ST 6932)
4. Start the engine and check for oil leakage at the pressure gauge connection. 5. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: CAUTION: Before measuring, check that there are no obstacles or personnel within the swing radius. When measuring the boom lower pilot pressure, raise the machine off the ground while paying attention not to allow the base machine (counterweight) to contact with the ground. Be careful not to tip-over due to a loss of balance. 1. Operate the lever to be measured. Measure the pilot pressure at its full stroke with the pressure gauge. 2. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average valve. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-5-2
T157-05-04-011
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test MAIN RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE Summary: Measure the main relief valve setting pressure at the main delivery port.
Delivery Port in Main Pump (P1)
Preparation: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Turn the filling cap on hydraulic oil tank to bleed air. 3. Disconnect the hose (1-1/16-12 UNF) onto the delivery port in main pump (P1). Install tee (ST 6652), adapter (ST 6069), and pressure gauge assembly (ST 6934). : 36 mm 4. Start the engine and check for oil leakage at the pressure gauge connection. 5. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Run the engine at fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Slowly operate each control lever or pedal to fully extend or retract each cylinder to relieve the pressure. Measure the relief pressure at this time. 3. Repeat the measurement three times and calculate the average values. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-5-3
T1M9-03-01-001
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Main Relief Valve Adjustment Procedure A
Adjustment: Adjust the main relief valves if necessary. The main relief valves are installed on the position as illustrated.
A
NOTE: Before loosening the lock nut, make the alignment marks on the adjusting screw, lock nut and valve. Using these alignment marks, the number of turns of the adjusting screw can be checked easily. 1. Loosen the lock nut on main relief valve. : 17 mm IMPORTANT: Adjust the pressure so that it does not exceed the upper limit of standard. T1M9-03-04-001
2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust the pressure. : 6 mm Adjusting Screw
Section A-A
3. Tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 N⋅m (3.5 to 4 kgf⋅m, 25 to 29 lbf⋅ft)
Lock Nut
4. After completing the adjustment, recheck the set pressure. NOTE: Standard change in pressure. Screw Turns MPa Change in Relief (kgf/cm2) Pressure (psi)
1/4 2.2 (22.4) (319)
1/2 4.4 (44.9) (638)
3/4 6.7 (69.4) (986)
1 (8.9) (90.9) (1290)
Main Relief Valve
Lock Nut
Pressure Increase
T1M9-03-04-005
Adjusting Screw
Pressure Decrease
W107-02-05-129
T4-5-4
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Swing Relief Pressure Adjustment Procedure Adjustment: Adjust the pressure of swing relief valve with the adjusting screw after loosening the lock nut.
Swing Relief Valve
1. Loosen the lock nut. : 17 mm 2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust the pressure referring to the table below. : 4mm 3. Retighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 15.7 ± 0.1 N⋅m (16 ± 1 kgf⋅m, 116 ± 7 lbf⋅ft) 4. Recheck the set pressure. T523-02-03-003
NOTE: Standard change in pressure. Lock Nut
Screw Turns MPa Change in Relief (kgf/cm2) Pressure (psi)
Lock Nut
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
2.45
4.9
7.4
9.8
(25)
(50)
(75)
(100)
(360)
(710)
(1070)
(1420)
Adjusting Screw
Adjusting Screw T561-02-03-001
Pressure Increase
Pressure Decrease W107-02-05-129
T4-5-5
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test OVERLOAD RELIEF VALVE SET PRESSURE Summary: 1. With the return circuit from the control valve blocked, the circuit pressure must be increased by applying an external load. This checking method is hazardous and the results obtained with this method are unreliable. 2. Pressure setting of the overload relief valve must be made at a specified oil flow rate normally far smaller than the delivery flow rate of main relief valve. Accordingly, even if the main relief valve set pressure can be reset higher than the set pressure of overload relief valve, the main pump supplies too much oil to correctly measure the set pressure of overload relief valve. The main relief valve has pre-leaking function. In this case, the set pressure of main relief valve at pre-leaking function need to be set higher than that of overload relief valve. Accordingly, the main relief valve pressure setting may not be reset higher than the set pressure of overload relief valve plus the pressure at pre-leaking. Therefore, when the set pressure of overload relief valve must be checked correctly, remove the overload relief valve assembly from the machine and check the overload relief valve unit performance using the test stand and test block prepared for this purpose. If the poppet of overload relief valve seats to the body of control valve, the test block requires precise machining. Use other control valve unit for the measurement instead of the test block. 3. As an easier method, however, measure the relief pressure of each cylinder in the same method as of main relief pressure setting in previous section. Then, when each relief pressure meets its respective specifications, judge that the set pressure of overload relief valve is correct.
T4-5-6
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Adjustment: Lock Nut
NOTE: Pressure of overload relief valve shall be adjusted with test device in principle. 1. Loosen the lock nut on overload relief valve. : 17 mm 2. Turn adjusting screw to adjust the set pressure. : 6 mm 3. Tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 N⋅m (3.5 to 4 kgf⋅m, 25 to 29 lbf⋅ft)
Adjusting Screw T566-03-03-018
4. After the adjustment, check the set pressure. Lock Nut
Overload Relief Valves: NOTE: Standard Change in Pressure. Screw Turns MPa Change in (kgf/cm2) Relief Pressure (psi)
1/4 2.7 (27.5)
1/2 5.5 (56.1)
3/4 8.3 (84.7)
1 (11.0) (112)
(392)
(798)
(1200)
(1600)
Pressure Increase
Adjusting Screw
Pressure Decrease
W107-02-05-129
T4-5-7
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test SWING MOTOR DRAINAGE Summary: 1. To check the performance of swing motor, measure the amount of oil draining from the swing motor while swinging the upperstructure. 2. Always secure the test personnel’s safe during the measurement. Before the measurement, make sure there are no person or obstacles within the test track. 3. The amount of drain oil will change depending on hydraulic oil temperature. Maintain hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Preparation: 1. Warm the hydraulic oil temperature to 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Rotate the swing motor to warm up the inside of motor. 2. Stop the engine. Turn the filling cap to bleed air from the hydraulic oil tank. 3. Disconnect the drain hose at swing motor. Install a plug (9/16-18 UNF) to the disconnected hose end. Connect hose (ST 6627) onto the drain port of swing motor. : 22 mm, 19 mm : 39 N⋅m (4 kgf⋅m, 29 lbf⋅ft) CAUTION: Before the measurement, make sure there are no person or obstacles within the swing area. Make sure not to fall off from machine during the measurement. 4. Disconnect the make-up line at swing motor. Install plugs on the disconnected line end and motor port. Measurement Condition: 1. Before the measurement, set the engine speed control dial to the fast idle position with auto idle switch off, and then measure it.
T4-5-8
Make-Up Line Drain Hose (9/16-18 UNF)
T1LD-04-05-002
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Measurement: 1. Drain Oil Volume at Swing Operation 1-1. With the arm rolled out and bucket rolled in, hold the bucket so that the height of arm top pin is even with the boom foot pin. The bucket must be empty. 1-2. Start the engine. Operate the swing lever to the full stroke. After swing speed reaches a constant maximum speed, collect the hydraulic oil from drain hose. Measure the time also. 1-3. Repeat the measurement more than 3 times in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and calculate the average value. 1-4. The measurement should be at least 45 seconds. 2. Drain Oil Volume at Swing Lock Operation 2-1. Seize the ground with bucket so that the machine does not move. 2-2. Start the engine. Operate the swing lever to the full stroke. Collect the hydraulic oil from drain hose. Measure the time also. 2-3. Repeat the measurement more than 3 times in both clockwise and counterclockwise directions, and calculate the average value. 2-4. The measurement should be at least 45 seconds. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. * Conversion of Measured Value into the Per-Minute Value Measure the amount of drain oil using a calibrated container. Then, convert the measured drain oil into the per-minute value using the following formula; ∆Q = 60 × q / t ∆Q : Per-Minute Drain Volume (L/min) t : Time Measured (sec) q : Measured Drain Oil Volume (L)
T4-5-9
Even with the Boom Foot Pin. T570-06-03-003
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test TRAVEL MOTOR DRAINAGE Summary: 1. To check the performance of travel motor, measure the amount of oil draining from the travel motor, while rotating the travel motor with the measuring side track jacked up. 2. Always secure the test personnel’s safe during the measurement. Before the measurement, make sure there are no personnel or obstacles within the test track. 3. Evaluate the overall performance of the travel motor taking the test results such as travel speed and mistrack amount into consideration together with this test results. 4. The amount of drain oil will change depending on hydraulic oil temperature. Maintain the hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Preparation: 1. Warm the hydraulic oil results temperature to 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Rotate the travel motor to warm up the inside of motor. 2. Stop the engine. Turn the filling cap to bleed air from the hydraulic oil tank. 3. Disconnect the drain hose at the travel motor. Install a plug (9/16UNF-ORS) to the disconnected hose end. Connect hose (9/16-18UNF-ORS) onto the drain port of travel motor. : 19 mm : 44 N⋅m (4.5 kgf⋅m, 32.5 lbf⋅ft)
Drain Hose
Measurement Condition: 1. Set the engine speed control dial to the fast idle position with auto idle switch off and measure at slow travel speed. T1LD-04-05-003
T4-5-10
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Measurement: 1. Drain oil volume when travel motor rotating. CAUTION: When approaching to the rotation parts, take care that hands, legs or clothes are not entangled. Support the lifted machine securely with wooden block. 1-1. Start the engine. Jack-up the measuring side track. 1-2. Rotate the raised track. Collect the hydraulic oil from drain hose. Measure the time also. 1-3. Repeat the measurement more than 3 times in both forward and reverse directions, and calculate the average value. 1-4. The measurement should be at least 45 seconds.
90 to 110°
T570-06-03-009
Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard. * Conversion of Measured Value into the Per-Minute Value Measure the amount of drain oil using a calibrated container. Then, convert the measured drain oil into the per-minute value using the following formula; ∆Q = 60 × q / t ∆Q : Per-Minute Drain Volume (L/min) t : Time Measured (sec) q : Measured Drain Oil Volume (L)
T157-05-04-019
T4-5-11
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test REVOLUTION SENSING VALVE OUTPUT PRESSURE (PRESSURE PGR) Summary: Measure pressure PGR at the output port of the revolution sensing valve while running the engine at the slow and fast idle speeds. Preparation: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Disconnect the hose (7/16-20 UNF) at revolution sensing valve connection. Install tee (ST 6573) and pressure gauge assembly (ST 6932). : 19 mm, 17 mm 3. Start the engine. Check for oil leakage at the pressure gauge connection. 4. Maintain hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Set the engine speed at slow idle speed and fast idle speed. 2. Measure the pressure PGR without load at slow and fast idle speed. 3. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average value. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-5-12
T1M9-04-05-001
Hose
Revolution Sensing Valve
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Revolution Sensing Valve Adjustment Procedure NOTE: Before loosening the lock nut, make the alignment marks on the adjusting screw, lock nut and valve. Using these alignment marks, the number of turns of the adjusting screw can be checked easily. 1. Loosen the variable metering valve lock nut on the revolution sensing valve. 2. Slightly tighten the variable metering valve adjusting screw so that the variable metering valve doesnâ&#x20AC;&#x2122;t operate. Tighten the adjusting screw until the adjusting screw end face is retracted from the lock nut by approximately 1 mm. : 6 mm 3. Run the engine at the minimum speed (1150 min-1 (rpm)). Loosen the differential reducing valve lock nut. Turn the differential reducing valve adjusting screw so the pressure PRG matches the value below. Pressure PGR: 0.5 MPa (5 kgf/cm2, 71 psi) : 17 mm : 6 mm 4. Increase the engine speed to the maximum speed (2500 min-1 (rpm)). Loosen the variable metering valve lock nut. Turn the variable metering valve adjusting screw so the pressure PRG matches the value below. Pressure PGR: 1.96 MPa (20 kgf/cm2, 284 psi) : 17 mm : 6 mm 5. Tighten both the variable metering valve and differential reducing valve lock nuts. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 Nxm (3.5 to 4 kgfxm, 25 to 29 lbfxft) 6. After completing adjustment, recheck the set pressure.
Lock Nut
Adjusting Screw
Revolution Sensing Valve
Variable Metering Valve
Differential Reducing Valve
T566-03-02-002
Lock Nut
Adjusting Screw
(Variable Metering Valve) Lock Nut
Adjusting Screw
Pressure Decrease
Pressure Increase
W107-02-05-129
(Differential Reducing Valve) Lock Nut
Pressure Increase
Adjusting Screw
Pressure Decrease
W107-02-05-129
T4-5-13
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test PUMP DELIVERY PRESSURE Summary: Measure the pump delivery pressure at the main pump delivery port when all the control levers are in neutral. Preparation: 1. Stop the engine. 2. Turn the filling cap on hydraulic oil tank to bleed air. 3. Disconnect the hose (1-1/16-12 UNF) onto the delivery port in main pump (P1). Install tee (ST 6652), adapter (ST 6069), and pressure gauge assembly (ST 6934). : 36 mm 4. Start the engine. Check for oil leakage at the pressure gauge connection. 5. Maintain hydraulic oil temperature at 50±5 °C (122±9 °F). Measurement: 1. Set the engine speed at slow idle speed or fast idle speed with auto idle switch off. 2. Turn all the control levers into neutral. Measure the pump delivery pressure. 3. Perform the measurement three times and calculate the average value. Evaluation: Refer to T4-2 Operational Performance Standard.
T4-5-14
Delivery Port in Main Pump (P1)
T1M9-03-01-001
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test Unload Valve Adjustment Procedure NOTE: Before loosening the lock nut, make the alignment marks on the adjusting screw, lock nut, and valve. Using these alignment marks, the number of turns of the adjusting screw can be checked easily.
A
A
1. Loosen the lock nut on unload valve. : 17 mm 2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust the pressure. : 6 mm 3. Tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 Nxm (3.5 to 4 kgfâ&#x2039;&#x2026;m, 25 to 29 lbfxft) 4. After the adjustment, recheck the set pressure.
NOTE: Standard change in pressure. T1M9-03-04-001
Screw Turns Change in Pressure
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
0.1
0.2
0.3
0.4
(kgf/cm )
(1.02)
(2.04)
(3.06)
(4.08)
(psi)
(14.5)
(29.1)
(43.6)
(58.2)
MPa 2
Lock Nut
Pressure Increase
Adjusting Screw
Crosse Section A-A
Unload Valve
Pressure Decrease
Lock Nut
W107-02-05-129
T4-5-15
Adjusting Screw
T1M9-03-04-005
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test PUMP DRIVING TORQUE Summary: The adjustment of pump driving torque is not recommended. If the adjustment of pump driving torque is necessary, perform the following procedures.
Adjusting Screw
Adjustment: 1. Loosen the lock nut. 2. Turn the adjusting screw to adjust. (Turn clockwise to increase the driving torque. Turn counterclockwise to decrease the driving torque.) : 4 mm 3. Tighten the lock nut. NOTE: Replace the lock nut washer after every adjustment. Failure to do so may cause oil leaks. T1M9-03-01-003
: 13 mm : 10 to 14 N⋅m (1 to 1.4 kgf⋅m, 7.2 to 10 lbf⋅ft) Lock Nut
NOTE: Standard change in pressure Screw Turns Change in Pressure (difference from point A)
1/4
1/2
3/4
1
113
225
338
441
(kgf/cm )
(1.15)
(2.3)
(3.45)
(4.5)
(psi)
(16)
(33)
(49)
(64)
kPa 2
Torque Increase
Adjusting Screw
Torque Decrease W107-02-05-129
Point A Flow Rate (Q)
Torque Decrease
Torque Increase
Pressure (P)
T4-5-16
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test AUXILIARY FLOW SELECTOR VALVE (OPTION)
Adjusting Screw
Preparation 1. Stop the engine. 2. Loosen the cap of the hydraulic oil tank, and let air out. 3. Disconnect the hose (7/16-20 UNF) at the part connecting port A, and attach the pressure measurement tool (ST 6573) and the pressure gauge assembly (ST 6932). :22 mm 4. Start the engine, and confirm no oil leakage at the pressure gauge connections. 5. Keep the hydraulic oil temperature at 50 ± 5 °C (122± 9 °F).
Lock Nut
Measurement 1. Set the engine speed at maximum speed, turn the auxiliary flow selector switch to LOW, and switch the Auto-Idle OFF. 2. Measure pressure at no load.
Connecting Port A
NOTE: Setting at shipment is 1.8 MPa (18.4 kgf/cm2, 261.7 psi). Adjustment When necessary, adjust the pressure reducing valve. 1. Loosen the lock nut. 2. Make adjustment by turning the adjusting screw. :6 mm 3. After adjustment, tighten the lock nut. :17 mm :18.6 N⋅m (1.9 kgf⋅m, 13.7 lbf⋅ft) 4. Confirm the set pressure after adjustment. NOTE: One turn of the adjusting screw corresponds to 0.54 MPa (5.5 kgf/cm2, 78.5 psi of pilot pressure.
T1M9-04-05-002
NOTE: Relationship between output pressure of port A and output flow rate of auxiliary port. Pressure Port A Auxiliary Flow MPa (kgf/cm2) (psi) L/min (GPM) 1.1 (11.2) (159.9) 11 (2.9) 1.2 (12.2) (174.5) 15 (4.0) 1.3 (13.3) (189.0) 19 (5.0) 1.4 (14.3) (203.5) 22 (5.8) 1.5 (15.3) (218.0) 25 (6.6) 1.6 (16.3) (232.6) 30 (7.9) 1.7 (17.3) (247.1) 39 (10.3) 1.8 (18.4) (261.7) 45 (11.9) 1.9 (19.4) (276.2) 55 (14.5) 2.0 (20.4) (290.8) 60 (15.8) 2.1 (21.4) (305.3) 66 (17.4) 2.2 (22.4) (319.8) 75 (19.8) 2.3 (23.5) (334.4) 79 (20.8) 2.4 (24.5) (348.9) 83 (21.9) 2.5 (25.5) (363.5) 85 (22.4) Full (Up to 25.5) (Up to 363.5) Up to 85 (Up to 22.4)
T4-5-17
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Component Test (Blank)
T4-5-18
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment GOVERNOR ADJUSTMENT Adjust the governor both when the following repair and inspection were made and when the engine speed deviated.
• Removal of engine, engine control cable, and governor actuator IMPORTANT: Do not adjust the slow idle stopper bolt and fast idle stopper bolt. These are sealed in advance by the engine manufacturer. Procedure 1. Remove the cable adjusting nut and cable fixing nut of the governor actuator. 2. Turn the key switch ON. 3. Put the engine control dial to FAST IDLE. 4. Turn the key switch OFF. 5. Adjust the cable adjusting nut of the governor actuator until the Fast Idle stopper bolt lightly touches the governor lever. • Clockwise: Stroke retraction direction • Counterclockwise: Stroke extension direction 6. Fasten the cable adjusting nut clockwise (stroke retraction direction) about 1 turn. 7. Fix the cable of the governor actuator by turning the cable fixing nut clockwise. 8. Turn the key switch ON. 9. Confirm that the governor lever lightly touches the Fast Idle stopper bolt when the engine control dial was operated from Fast Idle to Slow Idle, and then to Fast Idle. • When play is felt, follow procedures 1 through 14. • In case of strong contact, loosen the cable adjusting nut counterclockwise (stroke extension direction) by 1/2 to 1 turn after loosening the cable fixing nut. 10. Turn the engine control dial to the Slow Idle position. 11. Confirm that the governor lever lightly touches the Slow Idle stopper bolt. 12. Turn the key switch OFF.
Cable Fixing Nut
Stopper Bolt (Hi Idle)
Stopper Bolt (Low Idle)
T1M7-04-06-001
Cable Adjustment Nut
T4-6-1
Engine Control Cable
OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST / Adjustment (Blank)
T4-6-2
SECTION 5
TROUBLESHOOTING CONTENTS Group 1 Diagnosing Procedure
Group 4 Troubleshooting C
Introduction ............................................... T5-1-1
Troubleshooting C Procedure .......................T5-4-1
Diagnosing Procedure ............................... T5-1-2
Malfunction of Coolant Temperature Gauge ....................................T5-4-2
Group 2 Troubleshooting A Troubleshooting A Procedure ....................... T5-2-1 Error Indication List....................................... T5-2-2 Wire Breakage and Short Circuit of
Malfunction of Fuel Gauge............................T5-4-4 Malfunction of Preheat Indicator ...................T5-4-6 Malfunction of Alternator Indicator ................T5-4-7 Malfunction of Engine Oil Pressure
Engine Control Dial (System Failure Indicator: Flickering Every 1 Sec.).............. T5-2-3 Motor Sensor Breakage and Short Circuit
Indicator.......................................................T5-4-8 Malfunction of Overheat Indicator.................T5-4-9 Malfunction of Fuel Level Indicator .............T5-4-10
(System Failure Indicator: Flickering Every 0.5 Sec.) ........................................... T5-2-4 Abnormal Motor (System Failure Indicator: Lit)..................... T5-2-5
Group 3 Troubleshooting B
Malfunction of Monitor Buzzer .................... T5-4-11 Malfunction of Liquid Crystal Display (LCD)................................T5-4-12 Malfunction of Hour Meter...........................T5-4-13 Malfunction of Auto-Idle Indicator ...............T5-4-14
Troubleshooting B Procedure....................... T5-3-1 Engine System Troubleshooting................... T5-3-2 Actuator Operating System Troubleshooting ........................................ T5-3-10 Front Attachment System Troubleshooting ........................................ T5-3-15 Swing System Troubleshooting .................. T5-3-22 Travel System Troubleshooting .................. T5-3-24
Group 5 Electrical System Inspection Precautions for Inspection and Maintenance................................................T5-5-1 Fuse Continuity Test......................................T5-5-3 Battery Voltage Check ..................................T5-5-4 Voltage Check ...............................................T5-5-5 Continuity Check...........................................T5-5-6
Blade System Troubleshooting................... T5-3-27 Boom Swing System Troubleshooting ....... T5-3-28 How to Lower Boom when Engine Stops ........................................... T5-3-29 How to Prevent Horn Blowing at Key Switch Position of OFF.................. T5-3-30
1M9T-5-1
(Blank)
1M9T-5-2
TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure INTRODUCTION Troubleshooting charts shown in this section indicate the orderly procedures for inspecting and finding out the cause(s) of problems in the machine. This section is comprised of five groups: Outline, Troubleshooting A (diagnosis of machine by system failure indicator), Troubleshooting B (diagnosis of machine by symptom), Troubleshooting C (diagnosis of monitor), and Electric System Inspection.
• General • Troubleshooting A (diagnosis of machine by system failure indicator) This procedure is used when system failure indicator of the monitor flickers or is lit. Example) System failure indicator: Flickering every 1 second (engine control dial wire breakage and shortcircuit)
• Troubleshooting B (diagnosis of machine by symptom) This procedure is used for diagnosis by symptoms. This is used in case flickering and lighting do not take place after diagnosis by system failure indicator. Example: Even if the engine control dial is operated, engine speed remains uncharged.
• Troubleshooting C (diagnosis of monitor) This procedure is used when there are malfunction on components regarding monitor, such as gauges or indicators. Example: Fuel gauge does not operate.
• Electric System Inspection This procedure is used when the information on precaution for electric system inspection or inspection method is needed. Example: Fuse inspection.
T5-1-1
TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure DIAGNOSING PROCEDURE Follow the five basic steps shown below for efficient troubleshooting. 1. Know the system Study the appropriate technical manuals. Know what the system is composed of and how it works, as well as the construction, functions and specifications of the system components. 2. Ask the operator Before inspecting, get the full story of malfunctions from a witness --- the operator. • How the machine has been used and properly operated? • When was the trouble noticed, and what work was the machine doing at that time? • What is the character of the trouble? Did the trouble slowly get worse, or did it appear suddenly for the first time? • Did the machine have any trouble previously? • If so, which parts were repaired or replaced before?
T107-07-01-001
3. Inspect the machine Before starting troubleshooting, check the machine's daily maintenance points, as shown in the operator's manual. Check the electrical system, including batteries. Trouble in the electrical system such as low battery voltage, loose connections and blown fuses will result in malfunction of the controllers, causing total operational failure of the machine.
T107-07-01-002
Note that if the troubleshooting is performed without noticing that the fuse is blown, it may lead to the incorrect diagnosis results which causes significant loss of time. Make sure to check the fuse before performing the troubleshooting. Fuse failure is often caused by a fine crack in the fuse, and such fine cracks are very hard to detect by visual inspection.
T107-07-01-003
T5-1-2
TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure 4. Inspect the actual trouble on the machine Reproduce the trouble on the machine and make sure the actual phenomenon. In case some trouble cannot be actually confirmed, obtain the details of the malfunction from the operator. Also check for any incomplete connections of the wire harnesses. 5. Check by Each System CAUTION: Always stop the engine before disconnecting the harnesses or lines. If they are disconnected while the engine running, it may cause improper operation of the machine, or the pressurized oil may spout.
T107-07-01-004
Use "Troubleshooting A, B, C" in this chapter to confirm the operation condition for each equipment. 6. Trace causes Before reaching a conclusion, check the most suspect causes again. Try to trace what the real cause of the trouble is. Make a plan of appropriate repairing procedure, to avoid consequential malfunctions. T107-07-01-006
T107-07-01-007
T5-1-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Diagnosing Procedure (Blank)
T5-1-4
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A TROUBLESHOOTING A PROCEDURE This procedure is used when the engine controller is abnormal, and the system failure indicator flickers or is lit.
• How to Read the Troubleshoting Flow Charts YES(OK)
・
(2)
• After checking or measuring item (1), select either YES (OK) or NO (NOT OK) and proceed to item (2) or (3), as appropriate.
(1) NO(NOT OK)
(3)
• Special instructions or reference item are indicated in the spaces under the box.
・
Incorrect measuring or checking methods will render troubleshooting impossible, and may damage components as well.
· Key switch: ON
• Causes are stated in a thick-line box. Scanning through thick-line boxes, possible
・
causes can be seen without going through the flow chart.
NOTE: All harness end connector are seen from the open-end side.
Harness End Connector
Open End Side
Harness
T6L4-05-03-001
T5-2-1
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A ERROR INDICATION LIST Error Item
Judgment
Engine Control Short Circuit Dial Wire Breakage and Short Circuit
System Failure Control of Engine Body Cause Indicator Flickering Move governor lever to location • Faulty Engine Controller (every 1 1/2. Or, leave governor lever where • Faulty Harness second) it is. • Faulty Engine Control Dial
Short Motor Sensor Circuit Wire Breakage and Short Circuit
Flickering (every 0.5 second)
Fully pull engine control cable till • Faulty Engine Controller motor error is lit (more than four • Faulty Harness seconds). Then, engine stops at • Faulty Governor Actuator motor error.
Abnormal Motor Motor Error
Lit
Keep governor lever where it was • Faulty Engine Controller at time of failure. • Faulty Harness • Faulty Governor Actuator
NOTE: Control of Engine Body shown in the above list is made whenever power is supplied (whenever the key switch is turned ON). In case a failure takes place after supplying power, the governor lever is fixed where it is. If the key switch is turned ON again after being turned OFF during a failure, the control at the time of power supply shown in the above list is made similarly.
T5-2-2
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A WIRE BREAKAGE AND SHORT CIRCUIT OF ENGINE CONTROL DIAL (System failure indicator: Flickering every 1 sec.) • Check for loose harness connections before hand.
• Conditions for judgment: Output voltage: 0.5 V and below / 4.5 V and above
Check continuity in circuits shown below where connector (3P) of engine control dial and connector (12P) of engine controller are disconnected.
YES Put engine control dial to SLOW IDLE and FAST IDLE. And measure voltage at respective positions. Check if voltage of #2 (3P) terminal of harness side connector for engine control dial is 0.8 to 4.2 V.
· Terminals #1 (3P) and #11 (12P) · Terminals #2 (3P) and #7 (12P) · Terminals #3 (3P) and #10 (12P)
NO
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side)
3
2
1
Faulty engine controller.
NO
Faulty harness in disconnected circuit.
Faulty engine control dial.
· Key switch: ON
Engine Control Dial (3P)
YES
Engine Controller (12P) 4
3
2
1
8
7
6
5
11 10 9
T5-2-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A MOTOR SENSOR BREAKAGE AND SHORT CIRCUIT (System failure indicator: Flickering every 0.5 sec.) • Check for loose harness connections before hand.
• Conditions for judgment: Output voltage: 0.5 V and below / 4.5 V and above
Check continuity in circuits shown below where connector (6P) of governor actuator and connector (12P) of engine controller are disconnected.
YES Put engine control dial to SLOW IDLE and FAST IDLE. And measure voltage at respective positions. Check if voltage of #8 (12P) terminal of harness side connector for engine controller is as shown below.
· · · · ·
Terminals #1 (6P) and #10 (12P) Terminals #2 (6P) and #8 (12P) Terminals #3 (6P) and #11 (12P) Terminals #5 (6P) and #3 (12P) Terminals #6 (6P) and #4 (12P)
NO
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side)
Engine Controller (12P)
1
6
4
2
5
8
3
Faulty governor actuator.
NO
Faulty harness in disconnected circuit.
Faulty engine controller.
· Key switch: ON · Voltage: 0.5 V and below / 4.5 V and above
Governor Actuator (6P)
YES
3
2
1
7
6
5
11 10 9
T5-2-4
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A ABNORMAL MOTOR (System failure indicator: Lit) • Check for loose harness connections before hand.
YES
Faulty engine controller.
Check if output voltages of engine control dial and motor center are normal. · · · ·
Key switch: ON Engine control dial: 0.8 to 4.2 V (Refer to T5-2-3.) Motor sensor: Voltage: 0.5 V and below / 4.5 V and above (Refer to T5-2-4.)
Check continuity in circuits shown below where connector (6P) of governor actuator and connector (12P) of engine controller are disconnected.
NO
· Terminals #5 (6P) and #3 (12P) · Terminals #6 (6P) and #4 (12P)
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side) Governor Actuator (6P)
Engine Controller (12P)
1
6
4
2
5
8
3
3
2
1
7
6
5
11 10 9
T5-2-5
YES
Faulty governor actuator.
NO
Faulty harness in disconnected circuit.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting A (Blank)
T5-2-6
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B TROUBLESHOOTING B PROCEDURE (DIAGNOSIS OF MACHINE BY SYMPTOM) This procedure is used when operating the diagnosis by the symptom.
• How to Read the Troubleshooting Flow Charts YES (OK) ・
(2)
After checking or measuring item (1), select either YES (OK) or NO (NOT OK) and proceed to item (2) or (3) next.
(1) (3) NO (NOT OK)
・ ・ Key switch: ON
・
As shown to the left, measuring methods or items to be referred to are indicated in the spaces under the box. Take care to measure or check correctly. Incorrect measuring or checking methods may result in making troubleshooting impossible, and may damage components.
The thick-line box indicates the causes. Scanning through thick-line boxes, possible causes can be focused.
NOTE: The connector drawings show the harness end connectors seen from the open end side.
Harness End Connector
Harness
Open End Side
T6L4-05-03-001
T5-3-1
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B ENGINE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Starter does not rotate YES
• Be sure to inspect fuse and connection prior to troubleshooting.
No voltage or less than 12 V at terminal B.
With key switch positioned as YES shown in the table below, check if each terminal voltage on starter is normal. · Pilot shut-off lever: Release position
YES
NO
No voltage or less than 12 V at terminal #50 (S) with key switch at START position.
Check if battery voltage and electrolyte density are normal.
· Key switch: START
· Voltage: 12 volts or more · Density: 1.25 to 1.28 (at 20 degrees centigrade)
Check if voltage on starter relay terminal #R1-1 is higher than 12V. · Key switch: START
NO Unit: V Key Switch Terminal B (M8) #50 (S)
NO
OFF
ON
START
12 0
12 0
12 12
(When key switch is turned to the START position, if voltage at terminal B is lower than 9 volts, battery may be faulty.)
Starter voltage check
#50(S)
1. Turn key switch to the ON or START position. 2. Contact minus (−) probe of a circuit tester to the machine (ground to unpainted area like bolt head) and plus (+) probe terminals to the starter terminal respectively, and check voltages. (Measure with the harness connected.)
B
T1M7-05-03-001
T5-3-2
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
Faulty starter.
Broken harness between battery and starter or faulty connection.
Broken harness between starter relay and starter.
YES Faulty starter relay.
Remove starter relay connector #R2, and check if voltage on starter relay terminal #R2-1 is higher than 12V.
YES Remove starter relay connector #R2, and check if voltage on starter relay terminal #R1-2 is higher than 12V.
¡ Key switch: ON
Check if voltage on YES starter relay terminal #R2-3 higher than 12V. ¡ Key switch: START
NO
NO
Faulty safety start relay, or broken harness between starter relay and fuse box.
Broken harness between starter relay and fuse box.
Broken harness between starter relay and battery.
NO
Faulty battery.
Connector
Starter Relay R1 Connector 2
1
R2 Connector 3
2
1
6
5
4
T5-3-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Starter rotates but engine does not start.
• The faulty engine and the faulty electrical circuit are suspected. This page describes the troubleshooting of electrical circuit (fuel pump, engine stop solenoid). In case of faulty engine, refer to "Engine Shop Manual". • Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES YES Check if terminal #3 on 1 second timer is 12V. · Key switch: ON
Check if terminal #2 on power relay is 12V.
YES
NO
Broken harness between power relay and fuse box.
NO
Disconnect fuel line that goes to engine at fuel pump. Check if fuel is delivered when key switch is turned ON. YES
Check if fuel filter is clogged.
NO
1 second timer
Power Relay 1
YES
NO
Connector
2
4
2
1
3
4
3
Fuel Pump 2
Broken harness between 1 second timer and fuse box.
Disconnect fuel pump connector. Check if terminal #1 on harness end connector is 12V. · Key switch: ON NO
1
T5-3-4
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Connector Engine Stop Solenoid R
YES
Fuel Pump
W
2
1
YES
B
Disconnect engine stop solenoid conYES nector. Check if terminal R on harness end connector is 12V. Check if voltage terminal #1 on engine controller is 12V.
· Key switch: ON
Check if there is continuity between terminal B on harness end connector on engine stop solenoid and vehicle. NO
NO
· Key switch: ON
A
Broken harness between engine stop solenoid and ground. Broken harness between engine stop solenoid and key switch. Broken harness between the engine controller and the fuse box.
NO Starter Engine Stop Solenoid
Pin
T573-05-02-005
Faulty fuel filter.
Check if there is continuity between terminal #2 on harness end connector of fuel pump and vehicle.
YES
Faulty fuel pump.
NO
Broken harness between fuel pump and ground.
YES
Broken harness between fuse box and fuel pump.
Check if fuse #9 (10A) is 12V.
Faulty key switch, or broken harness between key switch and fuse box.
· Key switch: ON NO
T5-3-5
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
YES
A
Remove engine stop solenoid from engine body. Remove starter motor lead wire. Check if the pin on the top of engine stop solenoid moves when key switch is START position.
YES
Check if driving circuit of governor actuator is normal.
Faulty governor actuator or engine.
Faulty engine controller. NO
Faulty engine stop solenoid.
NO
Starter Motor Lead Wire
T1M7-05-03-001
T5-3-6
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Faulty auto-idle system
• If the system failure indicator is lighting, refer to T5-2-2.
• Refer to the pages for Auto-Idle Control in the SYSTEM / Control System group.
• Check for loose harness connections beforehand.
• Even if control lever is turned to neutral. Auto-idle system is inoperable.
YES YES
Check if voltage terminal #6 on engine controller is lower than 1V. · Auto-idle switch: ON
YES Check if voltage terminal #M1-4 on monitor is lower than 1V. · Auto-idle switch: ON
Check if voltage terminal #9 on engine controller is lower than 2.5V.
NO
· Auto-idle switch: ON · Control lever: Neutral position
NO
Faulty engine controller.
Broken harness between engine controller and monitor.
Faulty auto-idle switch or monitor.
Faulty auto-idle pressure sensor.
NO
• Although the auto-idle switch is turned OFF, the auto-idle control is operated. Faulty monitor or broken harness between engine controller and monitor.
NO Check if voltage terminal #6 on engine controller is higher than 5V.
Faulty engine controller.
· Auto-idle switch: OFF YES
Connector Engine Controller
Monitor M1 Connector
4
3
2
1
10 9
8
7
6
5
20
4 18 17
2
1
15 14 13 12 11
11 10 9
T5-3-7
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Engine is difficult to start at low temperature. (During cold weather or in cold districts, the engine is difficult to start or does not start although pre-heated.)
• The pre-heat system operates only when coolant
temperature is below 10 °C (50 °F). When coolant temperature is higher than 10 °C (50 °F), the pre-heat system doesn’t operate. • Check battery at the same time. • Check for loose harness connections beforehand. YES
Faulty air heater.
Remove air heater terminal and check if voltage on harness end is higher than 12V.
YES
· Key switch: HEAT or START
NO
Broken harness between key switch and air heater.
Check if voltage terminal R1 on key switch is higher than 12V. · Key switch: HEAT or START
Faulty key switch. NO
T5-3-8
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)
T5-3-9
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B ACTUATOR OPERATING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING All actuators do not work or do slowly.
• As all the control circuits are pilot systems, the pilot system may be faulty.
• Confirm that the air conditioner switch is OFF in the case of a cab version machine.
• Check for loose harness connections before hand.
Disconnect pilot shut-off valve solenoid valve connector. Measure voltage at YES terminal #1 on harness end connector. Check if voltage is 12V.
Check if there is contiYES nuity between terminal #2 on harness end connector and vehicle.
· Key switch : ON · Pilot control shut-off lever : UNLOCK position YES Check if main relief pressure is normal. · Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
NO
Check if primary pilot pressure is normal. NO
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
YES
NO
Disassemble, clean, and adjust pilot relief valve. Check if symptom disappears.
Disconnect pilot shut-off switch, and check if voltage measured at terminal #1 on harness side connector is 12V.
Faulty main relief valve in control valve.
End. (Faulty pilot relief valve).
Faulty pilot pump. NO
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side) Pilot Shut-Off Switch Pilot Shut-Off Solenoid Valve
2 1
T5-3-10
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Faulty pilot shut-off solenoid valve. (Spool is stuck.)
YES
YES
Disassemble pilot shut-off solenoid valve. Check if it is abnormal.
YES
NO
Disassemble revolution sensing valve or variable metering valve. Check if it is abnormal. NO
A
Broken ground circuit between pilot shut-off solenoid valve terminal #2 and vehicle.
NO
Faulty pilot shut-off switch, or broken harness between pilot shut-off switch and pilot shut-off solenoid valve.
YES
Faulty key switch, or broken harness between key switch terminal BR and pilot shut-off switch.
NO
YES
A
Faulty revolution sensing valve.
Faulty unload valve in control valve.
Disassemble unload valve in control valve. Check if it is abnormal.
YES
NO
Disassemble differential reducing valve in control valve. Check if it is abnormal. NO
T5-3-11
Faulty differential reducing valve in control valve. (Spool is stuck.)
Faulty main pump.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B All actuators work fast.
YES
Normal.
Check if hydraulic cylinder operating time is normal. · Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
Faulty revolution sensing valve.
NO
Actuators work when control lever is in neutral.
• Refer to T5-3-13 in case the Actuator doesn’t stop even if control lever is returned to neutral.
YES
Stuck pilot valve spool.
Turn the pilot shut-off lever into LOCKED position. Check if symptom disappears. Stuck control valve spool. NO
T5-3-12
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Actuators never stop even if control lever is returned to neutral.
Boom, Arm, Bucket, Boom Swing, or Blade
Replace overload relief valve corresponding to actuators and make-up valve (boom swing) with overload relief valve with normal actuator and make-up valve (boom swing). Check if symptom disappears.
YES
NO
YES
Check which actuators are abnormal. Swing
Sticking of spools of front attachment system control valves or pilot valves.
Sticking of spools of swing control valve or pilot valve.
Adjust swing relief valve. Check if trouble still appears. · Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
NO
YES Travel
Faulty overload relief valve or faulty make-up valve in front attachment system.
Disassemble counterbalance valve in travel device. Check if they are abnormal. NO
T5-3-13
Faulty relief valve or faulty make-up valve in swing device. Faulty counterbalance valve in travel device.
Sticking of spools of right or left travel control valve or pilot valve.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)
T5-3-14
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B FRONT ATTACHMENT SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING All front attachment functions are weak.
• Not only the front attachment but also other functions will have the problem. If the travel function is also abnormal, refer to “All actuators do not work or do slowly (T5-3-10).” In case only the front attachment is abnormal, check the pilot valve.
T5-3-15
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Only Specific cylinder(s) does not work, or it (they) does slow and weakly.
â&#x20AC;˘ In case the cylinder speeds are slow, the pump flow rate may be reduced. If the pump flow rate is reduced due to some problems, only actuators requiring more oil flow rate than the reduced pump flow rate look to be slow. â&#x20AC;˘ In case the cylinder works weakly, the relief valve set pressure may be lower than specific one. Be careful not to mix the problem of slow with that of weak because these symptoms are different from each other.
Faulty overload relief valve corresponding to cylinder.
YES Replace overload relief valve corresponding to cylinder with normal one. Check if symptom disappears.
Faulty make-up valve corresponding to cylinder.
YES
Replace make-up valve corresponding to cylinder with the NO new one. Check if symptom disappears.
YES
NO
Disassemble pressure compensator in control valve corresponding to cylinder. Check if it is abnormal. NO
T5-3-16
Faulty pressure compensator corresponding to cylinder.
Disassemble shuttle valve in control valve corresponding to cylinder. Check if it is abnormal.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
Faulty shuttle valve in control valve corresponding to cylinder.
YES
Stuck control valve spool corresponding to cylinder.
YES
NO
Disassemble control valve spool corresponding to cylinder. Check if it is abnormal.
Faulty main pump.
NO
T5-3-17
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Only specific cylinder works fast.
• Even if the pump flow rate increases due to some problems in the pump, the oil flow rate is controlled so that the optimum oil flow can be supplied to the actuators by the flow Pressure Compensator in the control valve. Accordingly, any problems in the pump will not cause the actuator speed to increase. However, in case the flow pressure compensator is stuck in the open position, the flow pressure compensator will be unable to control the optimum oil flow to the actuators (excessive oil more than required will be supplied to the actuators). Therefore, stuck flow pressure compensator in the control valve may be the most possible cause in this case.
Only boom does not work, or it does slow.
YES
Check if pilot secondary pressure is normal.
Stuck boom anti-drift valve in control valve.
YES Disassemble boom anti-drift valve in control valve. Check if it is abnormal. NO
Faulty overload relief valve in control valve.
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”. Faulty pilot valve. NO
T5-3-18
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Front attachment cylinders leaking (drift) is large.
YES
Normal.
YES Check if each front attachment cylinder drift is within standards.
NO Check if oil leaks inside cylinder.
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”. Check if symptom disappears when pilot NO control shut-off lever is turned into LOCK position.
NO
Faulty seal in cylinder.
Faulty boom anti-drift valve, faulty overload relief valve, scored control valve spool, damaged spring, or loosed spool end.
Faulty pilot valve. YES
Boom cylinder inner leak check 1. With the bucket cylinder fully retracted and the arm cylinder slightly extended from the fully retracted position, lower the bucket tooth tip to the ground. 2. Disconnect the hydraulic hose at the rod side of boom cylinder, and drain oil in the cylinder and hose. (Install a plug on disconnected hose end from vehicle.) 3. Retract the rod of the arm cylinder to raise the bucket from the ground. If oil comes out from disconnected and opened pipe on boom cylinder and the rod of that is retracted, oil is leaking in the boom cylinder. If oil does not come out from disconnected pipe on boom cylinder and the rod of that is retracted, oil is leaking in the control valve.
T5-3-19
T1M9-05-03-001
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B When control levers are operated (boom raise, arm roll-out), front attachment drops briefly, and then begins to work.
Internal leakage in cylinder.
YES
Check if load check valve in control valve is normal. ¡ Visually check after disassembling.
Faulty load check valve. NO
NOTE: 1. During the initial stage of operation, the oil pressure and flow rate from the pump are low. If the load check valve is failed, oil in the bottom side of cylinder flows back into the circuit through the load check valve, causing the boom cylinder to temporarily retract because of the load on boom cylinder. 2. If oil is leaking from bottom side (A) to rod side (B) due to the failed piston or tube of the boom cylinder, the boom cylinder temporarily retracts as oil pressure and flow rate from the pump is low during the initial stage of operation. Then, the cylinder cannot support the load, reducing cylinder force and increasing the cylinder drift in this case.
T5-3-20
(B)
At failure in load check valve
(A)
T105-07-04-012
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B (Blank)
T5-3-21
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B SWING SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Upperstructure does not swing, its speed is slow, or its swing power is weak.
YES
Check if problem disappears after control valve spool is disassembled and cleaned.
Check if swing motor YES oil drain amount is normal. · Refer to "OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST".
Check if swing YES motor relief pressure is normal.
Check if swing pilot secondary pressure is normal.
NO
Faulty swing motor.
· Refer to "OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST". Faulty swing motor relief valve.
NO
· Refer to "OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST". NO
Faulty pilot valve.
T5-3-22
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B
YES
Faulty control valve spool (stuck).
YES Disassemble presNO sure compensator in control valve. Check if it in control valve is abnormal.
Faulty pressure compensator in control valve. YES
Check if make-up valve in swing device NO is abnormal.
Disassemble shuttle valve in control valve. Check if it is NO abnormal.
NO
Faulty make-up valve in swing device. Faulty swing reduction gear or faulty signal passage (contamination ingress) to swing pressure compensator (control valve). Faulty shuttle valve in control valve.
YES
T5-3-23
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B TRAVEL SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Machine does not travel, or does slowly, or travel weakly.
• Both right and left travel motors seldom become faulty at same time. Although the trouble shooting hare is for the vehicle that both right and left travel motors become faulty. When only one side is faulty, refer to “The excavator mistracks”. Travel speed does not change to the fast speed.
• Check for loose harness connections before hand. • In case the problem cannot be solved due to the flowchart below, the travel speed changeover valve in travel device may be faulty. YES
YES
Check if terminal #1 on harness end connector of travel speed changeover solenoid valve is 12V.
Check if selection movement sound of solenoid valve is heard if terminal #2 of travel speed changeover solenoid valve connector is connected to machine body. · Key switch : ON · Travel Speed Selector Switch : Fast · Ground the connector to the vehicle with a clip without disconnecting.
· Key switch : ON · Travel Speed Selector Switch : Fast · Measure voltage with a clip without disconnecting. NO
NO
YES
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side)
2
1
Faulty travel speed changeover solenoid valve. (Spool is stuck.)
Faulty travel speed selector switch.
Disconnect travel speed selector switch, and check if voltage measured at terminal #2 on harness side is 12V.
NO
Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve
Broken harness in ground circuit.
Travel Speed Selector Switch
3
6
2
5
T5-3-24
Broken harness between travel speed selector switch and fuse box.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Travel speed does not change to the slow speed.
â&#x20AC;˘ Be sure to inspect wiring connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES
Fault travel speed selector valve.
Check if problem disappears after disconnecting travel speed changeover solenoid valve connector.
Faulty travel speed changeover solenoid valve. (Spool is stuck.)
NO
Connector (Harness End Connector Viewed from the Open End Side) Travel Speed Changeover Solenoid Valve
2
1
T5-3-25
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B Machine mistracks.
• Check that both side track sags are equally adjusted.
• In case the problem cannot be solved due to the flowchart below, the shuttle valve in control valve may be faulty.
Faulty pressure compensator in control valve.
YES
Disassemble pressure comYES pensator in control valve travel right or left section. Check if it is abnormal.
Check if secondary travel pilot pressure is normal.
NO Check if travel NO motor drain oil amount is normal.
NO
Check if problem is reversed when travel hoses under center joint are switched.
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
YES
Faulty travel motor.
Faulty travel motor swash angle change mechanism and travel reduction gear. Faulty center joint.
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
YES Faulty travel pilot valve.
NO
Relationship between Faulty Seal Location and Mistrack Direction Seal No. 1
When traveling straight:
When pivot turn is performed:
Right Travel Forward
2 Right Travel Reverse
2 3
1
Left Travel Forward Left Travel Reverse
3 4 5
4 5
W1M9-03-03-002
T5-3-26
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B BLADE SYSTEM TROUBLESHOOTING Blade does not move, or its speed is slow.
• When blade raise is slow, if reverse travel left is also influenced, faulty center joint (faulty sealing) is suspected. Faulty seal in cylinder.
YES
Remove rod pin of blade cylinder, and have cylinder fully retracted. Remove bottom YES hose, and attach plug on hose side. Check if oil leaks from bottom port of cylinder when blade raise operation is made. Check if pilot valve secondary pressure is normal.
NO
Disassemble pressure compensator in control valve. Check if it is abnormal.
NO · Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
Faulty pressure compensator in control valve.
YES
Disassemble shuttle valve in control valve. Check if it is abnormal.
A
Faulty blade pilot valve.
NO
NO
Faulty center joint.
YES
Faulty shuttle valve in control valve.
A
Left Travel Reverse Blade Raise Blade Lower Travel Motor Displacement Angle Control Pilot Pressure
W1M9-03-03-002
T5-3-27
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B BOOM SWING SHOOTING
SYSTEM
TROUBLE-
Boom swing does not work or does slowly.
• In case the problem cannot be solved due to the flowchart below, the shuttle valve in control valve may be faulty. • In case one side only cannot be operated or moves slowly, the make-up valve may be faulty.
Faulty seal in cylinder.
YES Operate boom swing toward left, and have cylinder fully extended. Remove piping on rod YES side, and attach plug on hose side. Check if oil leaks from port on cylinder rod side when swing left operation is made. Check if pilot valve secondary pressure is normal.
YES
NO
Disassemble pressure compensator in control valve. Check if it is abnormal.
NO
· Refer to “OPERATIONAL PERFORMANCE TEST”.
Faulty pressure compensator in control valve.
Spool in control valve is stuck.
Faulty boom swing pilot valve.
NO
T5-3-28
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B HOW TO LOWER BOOM WHEN ENGINE STOPS With the boom raised if the engine stops and does not restart for some reason, lower the boom in the following procedures. If the front attachment is not loaded. CAUTION: Loosen overload relief valve slowly. If it is loosened rapidly, the boom may lower rapidly. Do not loosen it more than 3/4 turns, as the hydraulic oil may spout. 1. Observing movement of the boom, gradually release the overload relief valve in the boom raise circuit (on the cylinder bottom side). (Lower the pressure in the circuit on the boom cylinder bottom side.) : 24 mm 2. After checking that boom has lowered completely, tighten the overload relief valve.
Overload Relief Valve in the Boom Raise Circuit
T1M9-03-04-001
If the front attachment is loaded. 1. Put alignment marks on the overload relief valve lock nut and adjusting screw in the boom raise circuit (on the cylinder bottom side).
Lock Nut
CAUTION: Loosen the adjusting screw slowly. If it is loosened rapidly, the boom will lower rapidly. 2. Loosen the lock nut. Loosen adjusting screw slowly checking the movement of boom. : 6 mm : 17 mm 3. After checking that the boom is lowered completely, align the marks and tighten the lock nut. : 17 mm : 34 to 39 N⋅m (3.5 to 4 kgf⋅m, 25.3 to 29 lbf⋅ft) IMPORTANT: After re-tightening the overload relief valve or lock nut, check the set pressure of the overload relief valve.
T5-3-29
Adjusting Screw T566-03-03-018
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting B HOW TO PREVENT HORN BLOWING AT KEY SWITCH POSITION OF OFF Normally, the horn can be blown even at OFF position of the key switch. In an immobilizer version machine (optional), the horn switch needs to be pressed for releasing the lock. At that time, horn blowing can be prevented by changing connection of the harnesses. In case such setting is desired that the horn does not blow on releasing lock (key switch position OFF) of the immobilizer (optional), follow the following procedure.
Under the Seat
Female Plug Receptacle (Label: ACC)
1. Detach the plug receptacle (labeled D) under the seat. 2. Connect the detached male plug receptacle (labeled D) to the female plug receptacle (labeled ACC). IMPORTANT: After work, confirm that the horn is blown at the key switch position of ON.
Plug Receptacle (Label: D)
T1M7-05-03-004
Electrical Circuit
From Battery
Plug Receptacle (Label: D)
Horn Switch Horn
Horn Relay
T5-3-30
T1M7-05-03-003
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C TROUBLESHOOTING C PROCEDURE (DIAGNOSIS OF MONITOR) This procedure is used when there are malfunction on components regarding monitor, such as gauge or indicators.
• How to Read the Troubleshooting Flow Charts YES (OK) ・
(2)
After checking or measuring item (1), select either Yes (OK) or No (NOT OK) and proceed to item (2) or (3) next.
(1) (3) NO (NOT OK)
・
· Key switch: ON
As shown to the left, measuring methods or items to be referred to are indicated in the spaces under the box. Take care to measure or check correctly. Incorrect measuring or checking methods may result in making troubleshooting impossible, and may damage components.
The thick-line box indicates the causes. Scanning through thick-line boxes, possible causes can be focused.
・
NOTE: The connector drawings show the harness end connectors, seen from the open end side.
Harness End Connector
Harness
Open End Side
T6L4-05-03-001
T5-4-1
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF COOLANT TEPERATURE GAUGE NOTE: The troubleshooting here only covers the malfunction of coolant temperature gauge. For the malfunction of overheat indicator, refer to T5-4-9.
• Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
Coolant temperature monitor segments (B to F) does not light.
YES
Disconnect coolant temperature sensor terminal, and connect harness end terminal to the vehicle ground. Check if all segments blink. · Key switch: ON NO
With coolant temperature sensor terminal disconnected, remove 20P connector from monitor. Check if there is continuity between terminal #M1-15 and sensor harness end terminal.
YES
All the segments (A to F) on coolant temperature monitor light up.
When coolant temperature sensor terminal is disconnected, check if only one coolant temperature monitor segment blink. · Key switch: ON
YES With coolant temperature sensor terminal disconnected, disNO connect 12P connector from monitor. Check if there is continuity between harness end terminal #M1-15 and vehicle.
YES Coolant temperature monitor segment light moves its position unsuitably.
Disconnect coolant temperature sensor terminal, and connect harness end terminal to vehicle. Check if all coolant temperature monitor segments blink. · Key switch: ON
NO
T5-4-2
NO
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C
Faulty coolant temperature sensor. C
YES
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, or faulty monitor.
E
D
F
B
A
NO
Broken harness between coolant temperature gauge and coolant temperature sensor. Faulty coolant temperature sensor.
Short-circuited harness between monitor and coolant temperature sensor.
T1CF-05-05-001
Segments A (Blinking) A B C D E F
Temperature °C (°F) 20°C (68°F) or less 20 to 49°C (68 to 120°F) 50 to 79°C (122 to 174°F) 80 to 94°C (176 to 201°F) 95 to 101°C (203 to 214°F) 102 to106°C (215 to 223°F) 107°C (225°F) or more
Coolant Temperature Sensor
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, or faulty monitor.
Temperature °C (°F) 25 (77 °F) 40 (104 °F) 50 (122 °F) 80 (176 °F) 95 (203 °F) 105 (221 °F) 120 (248 °F)
Faulty coolant temperature sensor.
Resistance (Ω) 7.6 4.0±0.35 2.7±0.22 0.92 0.6 0.42 0.3±0.01
Connector Monitor
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, or faulty monitor.
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MULFUNCTION OF FUEL GAUGE NOTE: The troubleshooting here only covers the malfunction of fuel level gauge. For the malfunction of fuel level indicator, refer to T5-4-10.
• Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES Fuel gauge monitor segments (B to F) light does not light · Buzzer does not sound.
Disconnect fuel level sensor connector, and connect harness end terminals #1 to #2. Check if all segments on fuel gauge monitor blink. · Key switch: ON · Use a clip to connect terminals.
NO
With fuel level sensor connector disconnected, remove 20P connector from monitor. Check if there is continuity between harness end connector #M1-14 on monitor and harness end connector terminal #2 on sensor.
YES
All segments (A to F) on fuel gauge monitor light up.
When fuel level sensor connector is disconnected, check if all segments on fuel gauge monitor blink. · Key switch: ON
YES With fuel level sensor connector disconnected, disconnect 20P connector from monitor. Check NO if there is continuity between terminal #M1-14 on harness end connector and vehicle.
YES Fuel gauge monitor segment light moves its position unsuitably.
Disconnect fuel level sensor connector, and connect harness end connector terminal #1 to #2. Check if all fuel gauge monitor segments blink stably. · Key switch: ON · Use a clip to connect terminals.
T5-4-4
NO
NO
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C D
F
E
C B A
T1M7-05-04-001
Faulty fuel level sensor.
2 (0.1)
Unit: mm (in)
17.3 (0.7) FULL
YES
NO
Faulty fuel gauge, or faulty monitor.
147.5 (5.8)
73 (2.9)
Broken harness between fuel gauge and fuel level sensor.
215.5 (8.5)
R230 (R9.1)
1/2
Faulty fuel level sensor. Float EMPTY T1M9-05-04-001
Short-circuited harness between fuel gauge and fuel level sensor.
Faulty fuel gauge, or faulty monitor.
Faulty fuel level sensor.
Segment A B C D E F
Floating Position EMPTY 1/2 FULL
Resistance (â&#x201E;Ś) 90 40 10
Connector monitor
Faulty fuel gauge, or faulty monitor.
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-5
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF PREHEAT INDICATOR • Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
• Preheat indicator lights for 15 seconds after turning key switch to heat position. YES
Preheat indicator does not light when key switch is turned to heat position.
Faulty monitor.
Check if voltage on monitor terminal #M1-12 is higher than 12V. · Key switch: HEAT Faulty key switch. NO
YES Preheat indicator keeps lighting.
Faulty monitor.
Check if voltage on monitor terminal #M1-12 is 0V · Key switch: ON
Faulty key switch. NO
Connector Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-6
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF ALTERNATOR INDICATOR • Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting. NO
NO
When key switch is turned ON, alternator indicator does not light. · Engine: Stop
Disconnect terminal L on alternator, and connect harness end terminal to vehicle. Check if alternator indicator lights.
Check if there is continuity between harness end terminal on alternator and monitor terminal #M1-13. YES
· Key switch: ON · Engine: Stop
YES
YES
Even if engine rotates, indicator does not go out.
Broken harness between alternator and monitor.
Burnt indicator bulb, or broken harness in monitor.
Faulty alternator (regulator).
Faulty alternator (regulator).
When alternator is disconnected, does indicator go out? · Key switch: ON · Engine: Stop NO
Connector Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-7
Short-circuited harness between alternator and indicator.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF ENGINE OIL PRESSURE INDICATOR NOTE: The indicator comes on when engine oil pressure is below 49± 9.8 kPa (0.5±0.1 kgf/cm2, 7.1±1.4 psi).
NOTE: 1 kgf/cm2=98.07 kPa
• Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES
When key switch is turned ON, indicator does not light. · Engine: Stop · The pressure might not be released for 1 to 2 minutes just after the engine stops. This is normal.
When oil pressure switch is disconnected, and harness end terminal is connected to vehicle, check if indicator comes on.
NO
Reconnect the disconnected terminal. When terminal #M2-28 NO on monitor panel is connected to vehicle, check if indicator comes on.
· Key switch: ON
· Key switch: ON · Ground the connector to the vehicle using a clip without disconnecting.
YES
After engine is started, indicator does not go out.
When oil pressure switch is disconnected, check if indicator goes out.
· Check if oil filter is clogged or not.
· Key switch: ON · Engine: Stop
Faulty engine oil pressure switch.
NO
Connector Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-8
Burnt indicator, or broken harness in monitor.
Broken harness between engine oil pressure switch YES and indicator.
Faulty engine oil pressure switch.
Short-circuited harness between engine oil pressure switch and indicator.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF OVERHEAT INDICATOR NOTE: The indicator comes on when coolant temperature is above 110 ± 2 °C (230 ± 4 °F) and keeps its temperature more than 2 seconds.
• Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
Faulty overheat switch.
YES
Overheat indicator does not light when coolant temperature gauge reads higher than 110 ℃(230 °F) · Engine: Running · Buzzer does not sound.
When overheat switch terminal (white red) is disconnected, and harness end terminal is connected to vehicle, check if segments light for warning. · Key switch: ON
NO
YES
Broken harness between overheat switch and monitor.
NO
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, or faulty monitor.
Reconnect the disconnected terminal. When terminal #M2-36 on monitor is connected to vehicle, check if indicator blink. · Key switch: ON · Ground the connector to the vehicle with a clip without disconnecting.
Faulty overheat switch.
YES
Segments on coolant temperature gauge monitor do not stop turn off.
When overheat switch terminal (white red) is disconnected, check if indicator turns off.
· Key switch: ON
· Key switch: ON NO
Connector
With overheat switch terminal disconnected, remove 16P connector from monitor. Check if there is continuity between terminal #M2-36 on harness end connector and vehicle. · Key switch: ON
Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-9
YES
NO
Short-circuited harness between overheat switch and monitor.
Faulty coolant temperature gauge, gauge or or faulty faulty monitor. monitor controller.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF FUEL LEVEL INDICATOR • Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES
Even if fuel is empty, lowest segment does not blink for warning.
Check if fuel level indicator segment #A lights.
· Key switch: ON
· Key switch: ON
Faulty monitor.
Refer to T5-4-4. NO
YES
Even if sufficient fuel is in fuel tank, segment blinks for warning.
Check if fuel level indicator segment that is appropriate to fuel level lights.
· Key switch: ON
· Key switch: ON
Faulty monitor.
Refer to T5-4-4. NO
Connector Monitor
T1M7-05-04-002
T5-4-10
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF MONITOR BUZZER • Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
Faulty engine oil lubrication system or faulty engine oil pressure indicator system. (Refer to T5-4-8.)
YES
After engine is started, buzzer continues to sound.
Check if engine oil pressure indicator stays ON.
YES
· Engine: Running NO
Check if all segments of coolant temperature gauge monitor blinks. · Key switch: ON NO
Even if engine oil pressure indicator, overheat indicator or fuel level indicator lights up or blinks, buzzer does not
Engine is overheated, or faulty overheat indicator system. (Refer to T5-4-9.)
Faulty monitor controller, faulty buzzer, or faulty buzzer circuit.
Faulty monitor faulty buzzer, or faulty buzzer circuit.
· Engine: Running
T5-4-11
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF LIQUID CRYSTAL DISPLAY (LCD) When “Built-in diagnosing system” is set, items shown below are displayed.
• How to set ” Built-in diagnosing system” 1. Turn the key switch into ON position while the set switch on the monitor panel is pushed down. 2. Items shown below are displayed as the display selection switch is pushed.
No. 1. 2. 3.
Item Hour meter Trip 1 Trip 2
Troubleshooting Refer to the next page. Faulty monitor.
T5-4-12
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF HOUR METER â&#x20AC;˘ Be sure to inspect connection prior to troubleshooting.
YES
While engine is running, hour meter does not operate.
Check if alternator indicator stays ON. ¡ Engine: Running
NO
YES
Hour meter operates with key switch turned ON.
Faulty alternator, or faulty alternator indicator system. (Refer to T5-4-7.)
Faulty hour meter, or faulty monitor controller.
Faulty hour meter, or faulty monitor controller.
Disconnect terminal L on alternator. Check if there is continuity between harness end terminal and terminal #M1-13 on monitor. NO
T5-4-13
Broken harness between monitor panel and alternator.
TROUBLESHOOTING / Troubleshooting C MALFUNCTION OF AUTO-IDLE INDICATOR • Failure in switches or monitor logic circuit is suspected in case of auto-idle failure occurs.
• Replace entire monitor assembly in case of auto-idle failure occurs.
T5-4-14
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection PRECAUTIONS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE 1. Disconnect the power source. Be sure to remove the negative terminals from the batteries first when taking wire harnesses and connectors off for repair or replacement work. Failure to do so can result in damage to the wire harnesses, fuses, and slow blow fuse and, in some cases, cause fire due to short circuiting. 2. Color coding of wire harnesses. The color codes of the wire harnesses in the electrical system are shown below. In cases on the design sheet where two colors are indicated for one wire, the left initial stands for the base color, while the right initial stands for the marking color. NOTE: 1) Code BW indicates a black base wire with white fine-line marking. 2) Initials “O” and “Or” both stand for the color orange. 3) Wires with longitudinal stripes printed on them are not color coded. Be sure not to confuse them with color coded wires. 3. Precautions for connecting and disconnecting terminal connectors. • When disconnecting harnesses, grasp them by their connectors. Do not pull on the wire itself. Be sure to release the lock first before attempting to separate connectors, if a lock is provided. • Water-resistant connectors keep water out so that if water enters them, water will not easily drain from them. When checking water resistant connectors, take extra care not to allow water to enter the connectors. In case water should enter the connectors, reconnect only after the connectors are thoroughly dried. • Before connecting terminal connectors, check that no terminals are bent or coming off. In addition, as, most connectors are made of brass, check that no terminals are rusting. • When connecting terminal connectors provided with a lock, be sure to insert them together until the lock "clicks."
T5-5-1
Code R L O Y Br Gr
Color Red Blue Orange Yellow Brown Gray
Right
Code W G Lg B P V
Color White Green Light Green Black Pink Violet
Wrong
T107-07-06-001
Right Rust Wrong (Deformation) Wrong (Coming off, Separation) T107-07-06-002
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection 4. Precaution for using a circuit tester. â&#x20AC;˘ Before using a circuit tester, refer to the instructions in the circuit tester manual. Then, set the circuit tester to meet the object to be measured, voltage range and current polarity. â&#x20AC;˘ Before starting the connector test, always check the connector terminal numbers, referring to the circuit diagram. When the connector size is very small, and the standard probe size is too large to be used for testing, wind a fine piece of sharpened wire or a pin around the probe to make the test easier. â&#x20AC;˘ When performing the connector test with the circuit tester, be sure to insert the tester probe from the connector harness side in order not to damage the terminals in the connector.
T5-5-2
Wind a piece of wire
Tester Probe
Sharpen the end of wire T107-07-06-003
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection FUSE CONTINUITY TEST Fuse failure is often caused by a fine crack in the fuse, and such fine cracks are very hard to detect by visual inspection. Checking fuse continuity with a tester is far superior to sight inspection.
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10
1. Turn the key switch ON When key switch is turned ON, the power is supplied to all circuit from key switch BR, R2 and ACC terminal (Refer to Circuit Diagram). 2. Remove the fuse box cover and set the correct voltage measurement range of the tester. (Measurement range: 0 to 14.5 V) 3. Connect the negative probe to the vehicle ground, and touch the outside terminal of each fuse with the positive probe of the tester. When normal continuity of a fuse is intact, the tester will indicate 12 volts.
T1M9-05-05-001
Numbe r 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8
Capacity
Connected to
25 A 5A 5A 10 A 20 A 10 A 25 A 20 A
9
10 A
10
5A
Horn Relay, Power Relay Monitor (Backup), *Air Coditioner Controller, *Radio (Backup) Pilot Shut-Off Switch Auxiliary Work Light *Wiper, *Washer, *Room Light *Radio, *Air Conditioner Controller, *Blower Motor Relay, *Displacement Change Relay Travel Speed Selector Switch, Travel Alarm Controller (Optional), Travel Alarm (Optional) Monitor (Power Supply), Buzzer (Monitor), Starter Relay, 1-second Timer, Engine Controller, Alternater, Engine Stop Solenoid, Fuel Pump Safety Start Relay
NOTE: The *-marked parts are for Cab Version machines only.
T5-5-3
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection BATTERY VOLTAGE CHECK 1. Turn key switch OFF. Measure between battery plus terminal and the ground (vehicle) with a voltmeter. Correct Voltage Reading: 12 V NOTE: If voltage is abnormal, re-charge or replace the battery. 2. Start the engine. Measure the battery voltage again. Correct Voltage Reading: 14.5 V
V
NOTE: If voltage is abnormal, check the charging system. T505-07-01-002
T5-5-4
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection VOLTAGE CHECK Turn switches ON so that the specified voltage is supplied to the checkpoint. Measure voltage. Diagnose the circuit between power source and the checking point by checking that specified voltage is supplied or not. 12 volt circuit (example: the horn circuit) Check the circuit in either the upstream (from the power source) or downstream (from the accessory) order to locate the failed section in the circuit. Set the following check conditions: • Key switch position: ON (When checking points (4) to (8) • Relay position: ON (When checking points (9) or (10) • Tester black terminal (negative): Connected to the vehicle (ground) • Tester red terminal (positive): Connected to the checking point Power source: Batteries (12 volts)
Evaluation Measured voltage must equal 12 V (battery voltage). If the measured voltage is less than the battery voltage by 0.5 V or more, some incorrect contacts may exist at connectors.
Key Switch B
1
BR
R1
R2
C ACC
PREHEAT OFF ON START 2
4
Battery
3 5 6 Relay
8
7
9 10
An example of the checking order (Horn Circuit) 5 6 7 8 9 1 2 3 4
T5-5-5
10
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection CONTINUITY CHECK Single-line continuity check Disconnect both end connectors of the harness and check continuity between ends: If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 Ω = Continuity ∞ Ω = Discontinuity NOTE: When the one end connector is far apart from the other, connect one end of connector (A) or the vehicle frame using a clip. Then, check continuity of the harness through the vehicle frame as illustrated. If the ohm-meter reading is:
0 Ω = Continuity ∞ Ω = Discontinuity
a
Ω Connect to the vehicle frame.
A
Connect to the vehicle frame.
Ω
a
a
A
Single-line short-circuit check Disconnect both end connectors of the harness and check continuity between one end connector of the harness and the vehicle frame: If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 Ω = Short circuit is present. ∞ Ω = No short circuit is present. Multi-line continuity check Disconnect both end connectors of the harness, and connect two terminals (A) and (B), using a jumper wire at one end of the connector, as illustrated. Then, check continuity between terminals (a) and (b) at the other connector. If the ohm-meter reading is ∞Ω, either line (A)-(a), or (B)-(b) is in discontinuity. To find out which line is discontinued, conduct the single line continuity check on both lines individually, or after changing the connected terminals from (A)-(B) to (A)-(C). Check continuity once more between terminals (a) and (c).
Harness
A
× Ω
Short circuit between the harness and the vehicle frame.
T107-07-05-003
First Connected
a b c
A B C Second Connected
NOTE: By Conducting the multi-line continuity check twice, it is possible to find out which line is discontinued. With terminals (A) and (C) short circuited, check continuity between terminals (a) and (c).
Ω
T107-07-05-004
Short circuit between harnesses. A B C
×
If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 Ω = Line (B)-(b) has discontinuity. ∞ Ω = Line (A)-(a) has discontinuity. Multi-lines short circuit check Disconnect both end connectors of the harness, and check continuity between terminals (A) and (B) or (C). If the ohm-meter reading is: 0 Ω = Short circuit exists between the lines. ∞ Ω = No Short circuit exists between the lines.
T5-5-6
a b c
Ω
T107-07-05-005
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection 5V System Circuit • Voltage between Terminal No. 1 and the vehicle Turn OFF the key switch, and disconnect the connector. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 (5 V power supply) on the machine harness end connector and the vehicle (ground) under the following conditions.
Power Source
Signal or Ground 2
1 Two-Polarities
Key Switch: ON Black (Negative) Terminal of Tester: Vehicle (Ground) Red (Positive) Terminal of Tester: Terminal No. 1
V
Power T107-07-05-006 Source Signal Ground
Standard Voltage: If 5±0.5 V, the circuit is normal up to terminal No. 1.
1
Three-Polarities
2
3
V
• Voltage between Terminal No.1 and Ground Terminal Turn OFF the key switch, and disconnect the sensor connector. Measure the voltage between terminal No. 1 (5 V power supply) on the machine harness end connector and the ground terminal (terminal No. 2 for two-polarities or terminal No. 3 for three-polarities connector) under the following conditions.
T107-07-05-007
1
2
Two-Polarities
V
Key Switch: ON Black (Negative) Terminal of Tester: Connected to the ground Terminal (Terminal No. 2 or No. 3) Red (Positive) Terminal of Tester: Connect to Terminal No. 1 Standard Voltage: If 5±0.5 V, the circuit is normal up to terminal No. 1 or ground terminal (terminal No. 2 or No. 3).
T107-07-05-008
1
2
3
Three-Polarities
V
T107-07-05-009
T5-5-7
TROUBLESHOOTING / Electrical System Inspection (Blank)
T5-5-8